initial commit of ebook 39010HEADmain

13 files changed, 18316 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/39010-8.txt b/39010-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..011b8c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5733 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands, Vol I (of 2), by Martinez de Zuniga
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: An Historical View of the Philippine Islands, Vol I (of 2)
+       Exhibiting their discovery, population, language,
+       government, manners, customs, productions and commerce.
+
+Author: Martinez de Zuniga
+
+Translator: John Maver
+
+Release Date: February 29, 2012 [EBook #39010]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORICAL VIEW--PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously
+made available by the Digital & Multimedia Center, Michigan
+State University Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                   AN
+                            HISTORICAL VIEW
+                                 OF THE
+                          PHILIPPINE ISLANDS:
+
+                               EXHIBITING
+                 THEIR DISCOVERY, POPULATION, LANGUAGE,
+                     GOVERNMENT, MANNERS, CUSTOMS,
+                       PRODUCTIONS AND COMMERCE.
+
+
+                          FROM THE SPANISH OF
+                          Martinez de Zuņiga.
+
+
+                       PUBLISHED AT MANILA, 1803.
+
+                            IN TWO VOLUMES.
+
+                                  WITH
+                 A NEW AND ACCURATE MAP OF THE ISLANDS,
+             FROM THE BEST AUTHORITIES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.
+
+
+                               TRANSLATED
+                          BY JOHN MAVER, ESQ.
+
+
+
+                                VOL. I.
+
+                                LONDON:
+            PRINTED FOR J. ASPERNE, CORNHILL; AND NONAVILLE
+                       AND FELL, NEW BOND-STREET:
+                      By T. Davison, Whitefriars.
+
+                                 1814.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The original, of which the following translation is offered to the
+English reader, is, probably, the only copy which has yet reached this
+country. Whether the chance which threw it in the way of the translator
+may be deemed fortunate or otherwise must be left to the decision
+of the candid public; but it appeared to him that the information
+it contains respecting a Spanish colony, the most interesting of any
+other to a British subject, supplies that desideratum so much wanted
+in our language;--a correct view down to a very late period of the
+Spanish establishments in the Philippines.
+
+The position of these islands, and, indeed, that of the eastern
+Archipelago generally, whether considered in a political or commercial
+point of view, is sufficiently important. They form the entrepôt
+of Europe, India, China, the immensely extended regions of Spanish
+America, the north-western coasts of the new, and north-eastern coasts
+of the old world; and in the storms which at present convulse the
+political atmosphere of Europe, as well as that of both the Americas,
+it is not easy even to conjecture what may be their fate.
+
+The productions of these islands are various, and of a value and
+importance unquestionably high. In the hands of an industrious
+population, and under a fostering government, there is scarcely any
+vegetable substance which, by slender exertion, they may not be made
+to yield, whilst the choicest treasures of the mineral kingdom, lodged
+beneath their irregular surface, minister largely to the cupidity,
+and furnish materials for the more enterprising labours of man.
+
+Gold is in abundance; iron, steel, copper, lead, pitch and tar, hemp,
+cotton, indigo, sugar, cocoa, pepper, betel, cowries, tortoiseshell,
+mother of pearl and pearls, hides, coyar, tobacco, corn and rice
+excellent and abundant, with a variety of other productions, contribute
+to the wants of commerce; while in this enumeration will be found all
+the articles which, with the aid of the finest building timber in the
+world, are requisite for the construction and complete equipment of
+ships of every description.
+
+The established intercourse of these islands with Japan and
+China offers a ready transit for manufactures; and although it is
+understood that the East India Company furnishes an adequate supply
+of our woollen staple to the China market, we may yet fairly expect
+that British enterprize will not overlook the advantages which the
+opening of the India trade holds out in this quarter; nor will the
+introduction of British manufactures into these islands, either with
+an ultimate view to the above markets, or to those of Spanish America,
+in any material degree interfere with the staple trade of the Company:
+there is full scope for adventure in this new vineyard, and labourers
+will not be wanting.
+
+The political jealousy, and the national and religious prejudices
+of the Spaniards, have till lately opposed a bar to an extended
+intercourse with the Philippines; but the tide which hitherto
+has flowed in that direction seems of late to have commenced its
+ebb. The events of the last twenty years have been in their nature
+so extraordinary, and in their effects so powerful a solvent of all
+the prejudices, fostered by ignorance and superstition, that the dawn
+of a new day seems to open upon mankind. Let us hope that while these
+clouds vanish before the morning sun, the great bonds of society will
+remain unbroken, and that the liberties of Europe, and consequently
+those of the world, will be fixed on a permanent foundation.
+
+The well-wisher to the temporal and eternal felicity of the human
+race will hail, with becoming exultation, the opportunity which
+it is hoped will now be offered of spreading the Christian faith,
+and amicably and peaceably lending the reformed religion in aid of
+the Catholic missions, to civilize the population of this extensive
+portion of the eastern hemisphere.
+
+As a literary production, the original has probably little claim to
+merit, the author conveying his matter in a style more monastic than
+flowing; at the same time that he seems to be generally under the
+influence of that bias, which an early seclusion from life entails
+upon the mind, and upon which even his official opportunities of
+intercourse with the best society in Manila seem to have had a very
+limited effect. The translator has found him too often occupying
+his pages with contentions between the respective religious orders,
+insignificant in their nature even to a Spaniard, and so much more so
+to the English reader, that he has taken the liberty of altogether
+omitting them in the translation, except where connected with the
+political affairs of the settlement; and although by these means
+several of the chapters are reduced to almost nominal importance;
+yet considering the division of the subject in this form as adopted
+on fair grounds by the author, he hopes he will be deemed justifiable
+in retaining it even with the sacrifice of something of appearance.
+
+Having said as much as he hopes can be urged against the original
+production, the translator willingly advocates Zuņiga's cause
+in respect to its intrinsic value, as giving to the public the
+only correct view of this interesting settlement, purporting to be
+brought down to the peace of 1763; but in fact, as we may reasonably
+conclude, extended to the period of publication at Manila in 1803. From
+information which may be fully relied on, it appears that Zuņiga may,
+with more propriety, be deemed the editor than the author, as he was in
+Manila, and superintended the publication in 1803; with the credit of
+having only arranged for the press the papers of a deceased collector;
+a conclusion justified by the circumstance of the work closing with
+the peace of 1763, for there could not be any very solid reason for his
+declining an account of the forty years intervening between that event
+and the period of publication, had he himself been the author. If,
+however, we are by these means without a detail of the actual events
+which took place, it is probable we may have less cause for regret on
+account of the very limited progress which we well know improvement,
+or even amelioration, have been suffered to make under the Spanish
+monarchy during the period in question. At any rate, we have grounds
+for supposing that if any alteration, favourable or unfavourable, has
+taken place, Zuņiga has contrived to weave it into the work; for it is
+asserted by those whose residence renders them competent judges, that
+the view he gives of the settlement is correct to the latest period.
+
+The origin and language of these islanders have engaged the attention
+of our ablest orientalists. From certain similar characteristics in
+the persons of the inhabitants of the interior, or aborigines of the
+islands, they have hitherto had an African origin assigned to them;
+and nearly from the same source (Madagascar), it has been supposed that
+the Malay population has flowed, which has in a great measure inundated
+the Archipelago, as well as some parts of the continental coasts.
+
+Similarity, or even approximation of language and manners
+unquestionably offer great facilities in enquiries of this nature,
+and they have accordingly been resorted to by all our oriental
+physiologists in their researches respecting the eastern Archipelago;
+and so far as regards the Malays and Malayan language, these researches
+have been attended with corresponding success; but in respect to the
+aboriginal language, or Tagalic, very slight attempts have been made
+to trace it beyond the quarter in which it was found to prevail. Our
+author has not failed to enter into the discussion, and from the
+premises he lays down, not unreasonably, draws the conclusion that the
+Tagalic language and original population of all the islands westward
+of the coast of South America derive from that continent.
+
+It is certainly consonant to reason to presume that the aborigines,
+or mountaineers of the interior of these islands, in their primitive
+state, were more likely to change their residence (if intentionally) by
+committing themselves to a favourable breeze blowing pretty constantly
+in one direction from the eastward; or if in consequence of misfortune,
+by finding their efforts unavailing to encounter an adverse wind, and
+again reach their own coasts; than to suppose even with all the aid
+the monsoons could afford them in an erratic navigation from Africa
+through the Indian ocean to the Archipelago, that they should diffuse
+themselves from that point in every direction over the South Sea, in
+the face of an almost constant current of wind, blowing occasionally
+with extreme violence.
+
+The Malay population most probably had its origin as stated. The
+superior acquirements of that nation doubtless might enable them to
+encounter those difficulties which have been mentioned, and either
+by their extensive conquests, or acknowledged commercial activity,
+to induce their language to be received as the general medium of
+intercourse. On the subject of this language, and its different
+dialects in these islands, some variety of opinion may be fairly
+allowed to prevail; and Sir W. Jones, Dr. Wilkins, Mr. Marsden,
+Mr. Raffles, and other authorities, may not be decided as to its
+source; but it is generally allowed that the language spoken by
+the Papuans, Samangs, and Negritos of the Philippines, and adjacent
+islands, is totally different from the Malayan; and as Mr. Marsden
+expresses himself, "presents a subject of research as curious as it
+is obscure."
+
+This latter gentleman, in the ingenious introduction to his valuable
+grammar of the Malayan language, says, that the large islands of this
+archipelago have their own peculiar language spoken by the inhabitants
+of the interior, while the Malayan is generally used in the districts
+bordering on the coasts, at the mouths and on the banks of navigable
+rivers, and has thence acquired the appellation of the Lingua Franca of
+the east. The antiquity of this insular or original language, we are,
+he says, without the means of ascertaining; but he well supports its
+stability by the strong proof he adduces of Pigafetta's Vocabulary of
+the Tidore language, in 1521, differing in no respect from that of the
+present day. Mr. Marsden seems to conclude that the Malay population
+of this archipelago has its root in Sumatra, the inhabitants of which
+island claim immediate descent from some of the companions of Noah,
+landed there from the ark; and both Mr. Marsden, and Mr. Raffles,
+the present Governor of Java, assert, that the language spoken
+in Sumatra differs in no material respect from that spoken in the
+Malayan peninsula.
+
+Upon any occasion where additional light could be thrown upon the
+subject of these islands, the translator has not scrupled to avail
+himself of the best authorities for that purpose. The Voyage de
+Sonnerat aux Indes orientales et a la Chine, edited and enlarged by
+Sonnini, has been of great service in this respect, as containing
+the most authentic information which was possible to be procured
+by a foreigner, aided by every facility which the influence of the
+court of France over that of Madrid could furnish, and entering upon
+the undertaking with the express intention of seconding the views of
+France on the colonial establishments of her European neighbours.
+
+The translator hopes that, on the whole, the notes and extracts will
+not be found unimportant or useless.
+
+On the subject of the map of the Philippines, accompanying this
+work, the translator trusts he will be excused expressing the
+gratification he feels in presenting it to the world as the only
+correct delineation of these islands in existence. A collection of
+the existing authorities he found answered no purpose, as being at
+variance not only with each other, but still more with the unpublished
+manuscript, and other authentic information he derived from the most
+competent private sources. To John Barrow, Esq. second Secretary, and
+Captain Hurd, Hydrographer to the Admiralty, he feels greatly indebted
+for the communications they favoured him with, and for amenity and
+politeness which accompanied them. To the first eastern scholar in
+this country, probably in Europe, Dr. Wilkins, Librarian to the East
+India Company, he owes more obligations than he can express. He takes
+this opportunity of expressing his gratitude for the kind assistance
+afforded by Captain Horsburgh, Hydrographer to the East India Company,
+who has had full opportunity, for the exercise of his practical and
+theoretical acquirements as a navigator in the eastern Archipelago,
+and who surveyed the western coasts of these islands, and in particular
+the northern extremity of the island of Luzon; to him he owes the
+correction of many errors, in respect to latitude and longitude,
+which disgrace the existing charts; and to him likewise the map is
+indebted, for a more perfect delineation of the coasts, and for the
+disappearance of certain dangerous rocks which he has ascertained
+to have no existence. From these sources, aided by the suggestions
+of commanders in the India service, in regard to the nautical part,
+and from John Guise, Esq. of Baker-street, whose residence of nine
+years in Manila afforded him ample means of information respecting
+the interior of Luzon, the map, it is presumed, may be deemed the
+most correct extant. To this latter gentleman he has to acknowledge
+further obligations on the score of the general information he has
+kindly furnished. To his friend, John Jackson, Esq. whose literary
+attainments do him so much honour, the translator is under particular
+obligations for the kind assistance afforded him in regard to the
+map. To Peter Guichenet, Esq. he feels particularly indebted, as well
+as to another friend, for the permission to extract from his excellent
+manuscript translation of Sonnerat as much as answered his purpose.
+
+The merit of a translator is very limited. He is answerable for
+little beyond the actual transfusion of his author's meaning in
+appropriate language: whatever the present translator has attempted
+beyond this is contained in the notes, and is added with the hope of
+rendering the publication as valuable as possible, and as replete with
+information on the religious, moral, political, and commercial state
+of these dependencies on the Spanish crown as the existing sources are
+capable of furnishing. He lays it before the public with diffidence,
+but with the hope that it will add to the stock of general knowledge;
+equally useful to the moralist, the politician, and the merchant.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+    Their Description--Productions and Commerce.
+
+
+The Philippine Islands were so named by Ruy Lopez de Villalobos,
+in compliment to Philip the Second, when Prince of Asturias. They
+originally were called the Western Isles, or the Archipelago of Saint
+Lazarus, the name which Magellan gave them when first discovered by
+him. These islands are numerous; their appearance on the map is that
+of a large blanket full of holes and rents. The principal of them is
+Luzon, so called, because at the doorway of each house stands a large
+wooden mortar, which, in the language of the country, is called Losong,
+and in which the Indians wash their rice. This island resembles the
+arm a little bent, and in the part which corresponds to the elbow
+is situated the city of Manila, on the shore of a fine bay, thirty
+leagues in circumference, and which receives some considerable rivers,
+among others the Pasig, which flowing from a large lake, situated
+to the east of Manila, at the distance of three leagues, washes its
+walls on the north side: its water is very soft and salubrious.
+
+Before the Spaniards arrived this district was occupied by the nation
+Tagala, inhabiting many towns and mud villages, governed by petty
+chiefs. It is now divided into various provinces, under the government
+of their respective Alcaldes Mayores, who collect the royal tribute,
+and administer justice among the Indians. At three leagues distance
+from Manila, to the south-west, lies the port of Cavite, so called
+from the word cauit, a fish-hook, to which the tongue of land on
+which it stands bears a strong resemblance. Cavite is defended by an
+indifferent fort, the governor of which is nominated by the court
+of Madrid. It is likewise provided with a complete arsenal for the
+accommodation, as well of the Acapulco ships, and a few small vessels
+for the defence of the islands from the Moors, as for general use.
+
+To the north from the nation Tagala, we found the nations Pampanga,
+Zambales, Pangasinan, Ylocos, and Cagayan. Each of these nations
+formed a distinct community, with a distinct language, or dialect of
+the same language, and was distributed in mud villages, having no
+king or supreme head to govern them; but in lieu of that, a number
+of petty chiefs, or rajahs, whose authority scarcely extended over
+fifty or an hundred families respectively: after the conquest, each of
+these nations was constituted into a province, governed by a Spanish
+Alcalde Mayor. To the east from the nation Tagala are the Camarines,
+whose district has been divided into two provinces, that of Camarines,
+and that of Albay, each under an Alcalde Mayor. The greater part of
+the island is mountainous; it is crossed from the north to the south
+by an immense chain, from which diverge those ramifications that
+spread through the whole island, in many cases even forming detached
+mountains, like insulated cones in the midst of extensive plains. The
+whole of this elevated part of the country occupying nearly all
+the interior, is either a desert, or inhabited by a set of wretched
+people who do not acknowledge the Spanish government. There are in
+this island several volcanos, as that of Mayon, which is between the
+provinces of Albay and Camarines. It has a sugar-loaf figure, and is
+of such altitude that it may be discovered at an immense distance at
+sea. The de Taal is of a similar form, and stands in the middle of a
+large lake, called de Bombon; it exhibits sufficient proof that the
+mountain in whose top the volcano was, while in its active state,
+has sunk, remaining, however, still pretty much elevated above the
+water. There are other volcanos, and many warm springs, indicating
+the fermentation in the bowels of this island, from which, no doubt,
+arise those earthquakes to which it is subject, and which, one day,
+may produce new eruptions. We know that these volcanos at times throw
+out ashes, stones, sand, water, and lava, inundating and destroying
+the habitations, and rendering the fields a desert.
+
+To the south of Luzon lie the principal islands of Mindoro, Panay,
+Marinduque, Negros, Masbate, Zebu, Bohol, Leyte, Samar, besides some
+very small ones, the whole of which we denominate Bisayas, or Islas de
+Pintados, Painted Islands, their inhabitants having been accustomed
+to paint their bodies before our arrival in this quarter. All these
+islands acknowledge the Spanish government, and pay tribute to the
+king, which the corregidores, or Alcaldes Mayores of the provinces
+into which they are divided, collect. More to the south from these
+islands are Mindanao and Jolo. In Mindanao the provinces of Misamis
+and Caraga are subject to the Spaniards: the rest of the island has
+not submitted, and is engaged with Jolo and other islands in constant
+hostility against them; and although there have been occasional
+intervals of peace, they have been of short duration.
+
+For these two centuries past these islanders have been plundering
+the coasts of our provinces, have taken an immense number of vessels,
+pillaged many villages, burnt many towns, destroyed many inhabitants,
+and made slaves of a very great number of the clergy, both Spaniards
+and Indians [1].
+
+We have in Mindanao the garrison of Zamboanga, with a Spanish governor,
+to check these depredations; but as yet we have found little benefit
+from this establishment.
+
+To the east of these islands, at the distance of three hundred leagues,
+are found las Marianas, las Carolinas, and the islands de Palaos,
+or Pelew. Of these, the Marianas alone are under the dominion of the
+Spaniards. Here there is a governor, with a detachment of troops,
+to overawe the Indians, and three Franciscan friars to instruct them
+in the Christian religion.
+
+These islands have no other communication with the rest of the world
+than what is afforded by the Acapulco ship, which, in returning to
+Manila, touches there, with the portion of the revenue appropriated
+to the support of this presidency. By this opportunity they likewise
+receive wine for mass, grain, furniture, clothing, and a few other
+necessaries; this obscure corner producing only horned cattle, hogs,
+fowls, and a few vegetables, such as the bread-fruit and others,
+which serve the inhabitants instead of bread. These supplies are
+annually imported by the governor; and as there is no other store in
+the island than his, the price he fixes is at his own option. From
+this commerce he draws all his income; and under such oppression it is
+not to be wondered at that this colony is as poor as the first day it
+was discovered [2]. Rice, Indian corn, and wheat would grow abundantly
+in these islands, but every attempt to raise them in any quantity,
+has been rendered of no avail by the swarms of rats, which pour down
+from the mountains, and sweep all before them. From the combination of
+these political and natural causes, the situation of the inhabitants
+of these islands is so miserable, that some of our historians would
+persuade us, they entertain no wish to propagate the species, that
+their children may avoid their unhappy lot. On this account, it is
+added, the Indians diminish considerably in number; but this seems
+to be a mistake, as the diminution of the Indians, if it may be so
+called, may be rather attributed to the following cause.
+
+The population of the Marianas, independent of the native Indians,
+consists of many from New Spain, some Philippine Indians, and some
+Chinese, who come in the suite of the governors. These men being
+married to women of the country, the children born of these marriages,
+are registered by the friars on a list of casts, distinguished from
+the Indian casts, from which it clearly appears that, in proportion
+as these mixed casts have increased, the Indian casts must have
+diminished, and, in all probability, in a short time this latter
+cast will be annihilated, as has already happened in some of the
+Spanish settlements. This being the case, we ought not to say the
+Indians diminish but change their cast. With all these casts united,
+our historians would wish us to believe, that there are, at present,
+fewer inhabitants in the Marianas than formerly; but that cannot be
+the case, since the Jesuits, in quitting these islands, left a greater
+population than they found in the year 1738; and the Franciscans
+report that that has increased progressively since. It is certain
+the population does increase, as is clearly shewn by the lists of
+the casts. Indeed the inhabitants of the Philippines have doubled
+every century; and I believe it is the case with all the population of
+America, although foreigners charge us, with occasioning the diminution
+of the Indian population, by our oppressive and bad management,
+quoting our own historians in support of the charge. It ought to be
+recollected, however, that by these, the number of inhabitants which
+the Spaniards found on their arrival, is considerably exaggerated,
+whenever they are desirous of giving additional splendor to the
+actions of the heroes they celebrate; and, on the contrary, when it
+is their object to detract, they draw a very opposite picture, and,
+attempting to diminish their numbers, assert that their diminution
+is the consequence of oppression. From the amount of the tributes,
+however, referred to by these historians, and levied at different
+times, the evident conclusion is, that the Spaniards did not find
+the tenth part of the inhabitants, which are now in existence.
+
+The geographical description of the Philippines is, that they are
+in the torrid zone, between five and nineteen degrees of northern
+latitude; the sun twice passes its zenith, and produces those vapours
+which, descending in copious showers, and being again absorbed by the
+earth, form fountains, hot springs, and large lakes. This rainy or wet
+season lasts while we have the Sun to the north, that is, from about
+May till September, and at times till the beginning of December, from
+which latter period till May there is continual spring. The regular
+winds are the north, the east, and the south-west, and they each
+prevail between three and four months at a time, the change of one wind
+for another, being attended with violent storms of thunder, lightning,
+and, at times, whirlwinds. Indeed these storms are complete hurricanes,
+which run all round the compass in less than twenty-four hours, tearing
+up trees by the roots, and laying waste the whole country. These are
+so frequent, that we may justly complain, considering our proximity
+to the line, of the want of sufficient solar influence, to render
+the climate of these islands more agreeable. It cannot be said that
+we have oppressive heat in the Philippines [3]; there reigns throughout
+the greater part of the year, a most beautiful spring, and if the
+atmosphere were less moist, it would be the most delicious climate in
+the world. To this moist atmosphere, and moderately warm temperature,
+is joined of course a great fertility. The trees are always covered
+with leaves, and the soil with vegetation. The harvests of rice are
+most abundant; the plants shoot up with great beauty immediately,
+but the luxuriance of the soil renders it necessary, continually to
+clear away the weeds, which harbour many insects of a destructive
+kind, and others so dangerous as to diminish greatly the comforts
+and enjoyments of a country, which, in point of fertility, returns
+one hundred fold of rice, the common food of the Indians.
+
+Rice is the principal production of these islands, and it was
+cultivated to much greater extent before the Spaniards arrived here [4].
+They have likewise some pulse, as mongos, patani, kidney-beans,
+and millet. The inhabitants breed up, under the same roof with
+themselves, pigs, fowls, ducks, goats, and even buffaloes. In the
+mountains there are many deer, and the woods and fields produce
+all sorts of pigeons, small birds, quails, a species of partridge;
+woodcocks, &c. Few are disposed to indulge themselves in this latter
+kind of sporting; they apply themselves ardently to hunting the deer,
+to which they are particularly partial. The sea abounds with very rich
+fish, such as the pargo, the eel, the sole, the pampano, the mojarra,
+the garropa, the shad, the tunny, the corvina, the tanguingui, and an
+infinite number of others, caught either with hooks or common nets,
+and likewise with a species of net very much used in these rivers,
+and even out at sea, so constructed that the fish may enter, but are
+unable to escape [5].
+
+In this occupation the inhabitants of these islands take more
+delight than in any thing else, as it is a pursuit which at once
+indulges their indolent habits, and gratifies their partiality
+to fish in preference to animal food. Throughout the country are
+found many other productions, contributing to the support of life,
+and which, though not so relishing as those enumerated above, are
+probably better suited to their relaxed habits; and the pith of the
+palm, shoots of the sugar-cane, green withs, and other succulent
+productions, serve for food to those, who have no desire to labour
+for their subsistence. They cultivate the bread-fruit, beans, the
+cacauate, &c. and they pay particular attention to the palm tree,
+from which they procure both a spirit and an oil, together with a
+sweet-meat, which they call chancaca. There are few fruit-trees,
+and those are bad, with the exception of the plantain, of which
+there is a great variety, and all excellent and fine flavoured,
+and the orange, of which there are two kinds. The mango, a very rich
+fruit, it is imagined, the Spaniards imported from the coast of South
+America. We finish our enumeration with the cultivation of a species
+of the palm tree, which bears a very hard, little fruit of the form
+of a green nut. This being cut, a highly scented kernel, or eye,
+is found enclosed, which is called Itmo. This is laid in lime, to
+make what they call Buyo, which being chewed, produces a red saliva,
+together with a disorder in the mouth, to which they are so habituated,
+that they are uneasy when without it. This custom prevails generally,
+and even many Spaniards adopt it with great avidity. There are in
+this country mines of iron and gold, but of little value, either from
+the indolence of the natives, or the insignificance of these objects
+to the Spaniards, affording too little profit in their commerce with
+Acapulco to deserve attention. Gold is likewise, by washing, separated
+from the sand, which the waters bring down from the mountains.
+
+In Paracale they work the mines in the same manner as they do in New
+Spain, but the natives are so addicted to sloth, it is not possible to
+render them so productive as those of South America. In the mountains
+there is excellent timber for building ships or houses, and the canes
+are of an immense size, very long, and as thick as a man's thigh; of
+these latter the Indians construct their houses, covering them with
+the leaf of the palm. They raise cotton for clothing, which they dye
+various colours with logwood, indigo, and the achiote, a large tree,
+whose seed is used for that purpose. There is great abundance of wax
+and wild honey, amber, pearls, mother of pearl, marble, tar, brimstone,
+and many other objects of less value in a commercial point of view.
+
+To these productions the Spaniards have added horses and horned
+cattle, which have multiplied so much that they are to be found in the
+mountains without an owner, and where those that want may supply their
+wants at pleasure. They likewise introduced sheep, geese, grapes, figs,
+wheat, pepper, coffee, cocoa, sugar, tobacco, and various species of
+plants, which thrive so well, and produce so much, that the Indian,
+with all his sloth, acknowledges the utility of cultivating them.
+
+There are, in these islands, some natural curiosities deserving
+particular notice, such as the paxarillo, a species of small swallow,
+which forms its nest chiefly of the froth of the sea [6], and which is
+held in such estimation by the Chinese, as a principal dish at their
+table, that they purchase it at any price.
+
+The Balate is a species of sea worm, which, likewise, is sold in
+China at a high price. The Siguey, is a small shining shell [7], which
+forms the current money of the Malays. The Tabon, is a bird, which
+lays eggs similar to those of the turkey, burying them very deep in
+the sand on the sea shore, and when hatched by the heat of the sun,
+it tears away the sand that covers them, and the young come out. The
+Caiman, is a species of crocodile; a large and uncouth animal,
+the more curious in this respect, that it is produced from an egg,
+of the same size as that of the duck. The Chacon, is a lizard, which
+takes up its abode in the houses, and repeatedly articulates clearly
+the word toco. The Calo, is a bird, which has a kind of hollow shell
+in his head, and crows, at certain hours of the day, the same as the
+cock. The Taclobo, is a large species of the oyster, the shell of which
+will hold a pitcher of water; indeed they are used as vessels for holy
+water in the churches. Our historians mention many curiosities even
+more rare than these, but I do not enumerate them, as they seem to
+have been ill informed on the subject, and I fear with good reason,
+having been too much under the influence of the marvellous, they have
+given credit to the Indians, who are always desirous of distinguishing
+themselves by the relation of something very uncommon.
+
+With all these productions, the Indians formed a species of
+commerce, or barter, among each other, still considering gold as
+the representative of general value, or medium of exchange; they
+were likewise in the habit of trading with the Chinese, and with
+the Moors of Borneo, for flag-stones, copper, articles of furniture,
+&c. but in very small quantities, their wants being necessarily few,
+going almost naked, baking their rice in green canes, and eating it
+with the leaf of the plantain.
+
+The Spaniards, soon after they came into possession of these islands,
+commenced an extended commerce with India and China, which brought to
+New Spain, a proportionable increase of profit; and in a little time,
+Manila became so rich a colony, that it created a jealousy among
+the merchants of Seville, and, in consequence of their petition,
+its commerce was restricted. From this period it began to decline,
+and to the great detriment of these islands, which cannot subsist
+by the exchange of their own productions alone, these being very
+limited in their nature, and incapable of much extension, surrounded
+as they are by other nations, more industrious, and who can work at
+a cheaper rate [8].
+
+The luxuriant nature of the soil of these islands, has been much and
+justly extolled, but, proper allowance has not been made, for the sloth
+of the Indians, the hurricanes or tempests, which sweep every thing
+before them, the destructive insects, the rats, and many other things,
+which diminish greatly the fertility of these beautiful islands [9].
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+    Of the Inhabitants the Spaniards found in the Philippines--their
+    Language, Customs, and Religion.
+
+
+Our historians, affecting always the marvellous, divide into different
+classes, the inhabitants the Spaniards found, on their first arrival
+in the Philippines. They denominate them satyrs, men with tails,
+sea monsters, and whatever else of the fabulous, is calculated to
+raise wonder in the human mind. In reality, however, they found
+only two classes, that which we know by the appellation of Negroes,
+and that of the Indians. The Negroes are very small in stature,
+and more of a copper colour than those of Guinea, with soft hair and
+flat noses. They lived in the mountains, almost in a state of nature,
+merely covering the forepart of the body, with a piece of the bark of
+a tree; and they subsisted upon roots, and such deer, as in hunting,
+they could kill with the bow and arrow, at which they were very
+dexterous. They slept where night overtook them, and they possessed
+no idea of religion or civilized habits, rather, indeed, ranking with
+beasts than as human beings. The Spaniards, have at length succeeded,
+in domesticating many of them, and converting them to christianity,
+to which they give no opposition, so long as they get subsistence,
+but if they are obliged to labour, for the maintenance of their family,
+they return again to the mountains.
+
+The Negroes, without doubt, were the primitive inhabitants of
+these islands, and they retired to the mountains, on the arrival
+of the Indians. These latter, settling on the sea shore, continual
+hostility prevailed between them, but the Indians were never able,
+to establish themselves sufficiently, to be permitted, even to cut
+wood in the mountains, without paying a tribute for it. At present,
+the influence of the Negroes is very limited, but their antipathy to
+their first invaders, continues unabated; for, if a Negro is killed,
+or dies suddenly, it is customary for another, to bind himself to
+his countrymen by an oath, that he will disappear from among them,
+and that he will not return, until he has avenged the death of his
+friend, by killing three or four Indians, to accomplish which, he
+watches their villages, and the passes in the mountains, and if any
+unfortunately stray from their companions, he murders them.
+
+The origin of these Negroes, some believe to be, from Angola [10],
+though they are not so black as their ancestors, which it is pretended,
+proceeds from the temperature of these islands being milder, and less
+scorching than that of Africa. This possibly may be so, for it is
+well known, that by changing, from a sultry to a temperate climate,
+the blackness of the Negro may be diminished, in the course of a long
+series of generations; yet, the flat nose, and using a dialect of the
+same language, which the Indians of these isles speak, appears to
+prove satisfactorily enough, that the origin of one and the other,
+is nearly the same. The reason assigned, for their not being more
+numerous, is, the influence of the rain, wind, sun, and all those
+inclemencies natural to the climate, to which they are exposed;
+the errors of the government, having reduced them to the condition,
+almost, of wild beasts, in which we now see them [11]. The Indians
+whom the Spaniards found here, were of regular stature, and of an olive
+complexion, with flat noses, large eyes, and long hair. They all
+possessed some description of government better or worse, and each
+nation was distinguished by a different name; but, the similarity
+of their dress and manners, proves that the origin of all of them is
+the same.
+
+They had chiefs, who held their situations, either on account of
+personal valour, or by succession to their fathers, where they
+had abilities to retain it. Their dominion extended over one or two
+villages, or more, according to the means they possessed, of extending
+protection. They were continually at war with the neighbouring
+villages, and continually making each other slaves. Out of these
+wars, arose three classes of people; the chiefs or masters of the
+villages, the slaves, and those whom the chiefs had enfranchised,
+with their descendants, and who, to this day, are called Timavas,
+properly signifying children of liberty. In some places, were found
+Indians whiter than others, descended, without doubt, from Chinese
+or Japanese, who had been shipwrecked on these coasts, and whom the
+Indians, naturally hospitable, received, and allowed to intermarry with
+them; and it is generally believed that the Ygorrotes of Ylocos, whose
+eyes resemble the Chinese, must have originated from the companions of
+Limahon, who fled to those mountains, when Juan de Salcedo compelled
+him to his disgraceful retreat, from the province of Pangasinan.
+
+It is not, however, after all, easy to ascertain the origin of
+these people, but their idiom throws some degree of light on the
+subject. Although the languages these Indians speak, are many and
+different, they have so much intercourse one with another, that it
+may clearly be discovered, they are dialects of the same language, as
+the Spanish, French, and Italian, are derivatives from the Latin. The
+prepositions and pronouns, are nearly the same in all of them; the
+numeral characters, differ very little, and they have many words in
+common, and of one and the same structure.
+
+No doubt can be entertained, that the radical language, from which all
+those dialects spring, prevails from Madagascar to the Philippines,
+with local shades of difference. It is spoken too in New Guinea,
+and in all the islands to the southward, in the Marianas, in the
+islands of San Duisk, in those of Otaheite, and in almost all the
+islands in the South Sea. In one collection of voyages, there are
+given various vocabularies, with such corresponding terminations,
+as the respective travellers, were able to distinguish among these
+islands. It is remarkable, that in these almost all the pronouns, are
+the same with those of the nation Tagala; the numerals, are common
+to all the dialects, used in these islands, and most of the words
+are the same, and with the same signification, as in the language
+Tagala. But, I am the more inclined to believe the identity of
+the dialects, from a conversation which I had with Don Juan Hovel,
+an Englishman, who spoke that of San Duisk, and who had a slave,
+a native of one of those islands. The structure, appeared to be the
+same, as that of the languages spoken in the Philippines; and on the
+whole, I feel confident in the opinion, that they are all dialects of
+the same language, so widely diffused over so large a portion of the
+earth. It is ascertained, that this language, is in common use for
+many thousand leagues, extending from Madagascar to the isles of San
+Duisk, Otaheite, and the isle of Pasquas, which latter, is not more
+than six hundred leagues distant, from the coast of South America. Yet,
+the Indians of the Philippines, do not understand the people of these
+last mentioned islands, when they have occasional intercourse with
+them; nor, even in these islands, do the inhabitants of one province,
+understand those of another. So neither does the Spaniard understand
+the Frenchman, nor the Frenchman the Italian.
+
+In the same collection of voyages, already referred to, we find
+a vocabulary of only five terminations, which the Spaniards have
+distinguished on the coast of Patagonia, and which they have been
+able to assimilate to the language of these islands, and one of
+those is the word balay, which in that country signifies a house;
+and by this same word they designate a house among the Pampangos, and
+the inhabitants of the Bisayas in general. This may be more matter of
+accident than of proof, that the languages of one and the other is the
+same; but on observing, besides this, that the proper names of places
+about the middle of the continent of South America are very similar
+to those of the Philippines, I endeavoured to procure a vocabulary
+of this country, and did not fail to examine, with great diligence
+and attention, the few words of the language of Chili which Ercilla
+mentions in his Araucana, and which I found perfectly conformable to
+the language Tagala. The name Chili is a derivation from this language:
+the Cormorant is called Cachile, and this is a name which the Malays
+give to the sons of their kings. Chilian, which is a town of Chili,
+is a compound from the language of Tagala, in which language the
+termination an gives the signification town. Thus from Cachile we
+draw Cachilian, meaning a town, where there are cormorants. Mapocho,
+which is the situation where the city of Santiago stands, is another
+word of Tagalic composition, signifying a town, and pocquiot being a
+kind of herb, we form the name Mapocquiot, a town in which there is
+abundance of this herb.
+
+In Chili they frequently double the syllables in forming a word,
+as ytayta, biobio, lemolemo, colocolo, &c. and this occurs in the
+Tagala language; for instance, we say ataata, bilobilo, lebomlebom,
+colocolo. A great many other words are either actually of Tagalic
+derivation, or assimilate closely to that language. In examining the
+structure of these two languages we are compelled to conclude that
+they flow from one and the same source, and I dare affirm that the
+Indians of the Philippines are descended from the aborigines of Chili
+and Peru, and that the language of these islands derives immediately
+from the parent source, those of the neighbouring islands being
+dialects of this. Many will urge the absurdity of this supposition,
+on the plea that the more immediate vicinity of the Philippines to
+Malacca must have occasioned them to be colonized by the Malays, as
+our historians generally assert. I do not deny that these islands
+could easily have been peopled by the Malays, but how could they
+colonize the Isles de Palaos and Marianas, which are distant more
+than three hundred leagues? and it is still more improbable that
+they colonized the islands of San Duisk and Otaheite, which are
+distant two thousand leagues from the Philippines. All these people,
+however, have the same language, the same manners and customs, and
+consequently the same origin as our Indians. There is, in my opinion,
+this other reason for supposing these latter islands could not be
+peopled from the westward, viz. that in all the torrid zone the east
+wind generally prevails, which being in direct opposition to the course
+from Malacca and the adjacent islands, it is fair to conclude that the
+inhabitants of all the islands of the South Sea came from the east,
+sailing before the wind; for we have seen it often happen, that the
+Indians from the Palaos have arrived at the Philippines, precisely
+under those circumstances. On the contrary, we have no instance on
+record, of any of the Philippine Indians having been, even by accident,
+carried by the winds to the islands to the eastward. Indeed we know
+the reverse of this to be true, since at times the most experienced
+pilots, in attempting this navigation, have been compelled to return,
+without falling in with the islands they went in search of, from the
+necessity there is in the voyage of being provided with proper nautical
+instruments. Here, therefore, we appear to have found the most probable
+solution of our difficulties, that is, that the first settlers came
+out of the east, we may presume from the coast of South America,
+and proceeding gradually to the westward through the Pacific Ocean,
+studded as we find it with islands, and clusters of islands, at no very
+great distance from each other, and of course of easy access before
+the wind, it follows that to whatever point, in an eastern direction,
+we can trace the Tagalic language, we may conclude that at that point
+emigration must have commenced. Some however dissent from this, on the
+ground, that the mode of writing in use among the Malays, is similar
+to that practised by the inhabitants of the Philippines. This consists
+in forming the lines from the right to the left, like the Arabians,
+Persians, &c. and not like the Chinese, Tartars, and Japanese, from
+top to bottom. Their characters are totally different from ours; they
+have only three vowels, a, e, u, and by placing a point, either above
+or below the consonant, or leaving it without one, the corresponding
+vowel is readily known, and equal facility given as if the vowels
+were specifically inserted. Although they can write, they have no
+written laws; decisions are made on traditionary law generally, but
+too often by the right of the strongest. The Rajah, or chief, with
+the assistance of some of the elders, decides in all civil cases;
+but in criminal cases, the kinsmen are accustomed to compound with
+the aggressor, for a sum in gold, unless in cases of murder, when the
+only atonement admitted, is retaliation; and if the murderer is of a
+different tribe or village, all the community of which the deceased was
+a member, make a common cause, against the tribe or community of the
+murderer, and numbers are generally made slaves on both sides. When
+it is suspected that one man has robbed another, he is obliged to
+draw a stone, from the bottom of a cauldron full of boiling water,
+and if he does not accomplish this, which is the vulgar test, he is
+fined in a certain quantity of gold, the greater part of which goes
+to the Rajah or chief. Adultery is likewise punished with a pecuniary
+fine [12], as is the crime of disrespect to the elders, but for fraud,
+and cheating in their dealings, there is no punishment, and usury
+is very general among them. Their matrimonial customs are peculiar;
+they are allowed to marry only one woman, and although the principal
+people have several concubines, yet they commonly are slaves. They
+are accustomed to marry a relation (not a sister), with whom if they
+find themselves unable to live, or if they become tired of her, they
+return her to her parents, without their being required to assign a
+cause for the divorce. The dowry given on the day of marriage is merely
+restored: this dowry is of two kinds, and which the bridegroom always
+pays. The one is called bigay suso, and is paid to the mother, as a
+compensation for the milk, with which she nourished her daughter. The
+other is called bigay caya, or green dowry, which is set apart for the
+maintenance of the newly married couple, although very often, by the
+expenses of the wedding and apparel, there remains little or nothing
+for this desirable end. Besides these dowries paid by the bridegroom,
+he is obliged, for some years, to serve the parents of the bride [13],
+and assist them on certain days, particularly at the sowing of the
+rice, and getting in the harvest. It is incumbent likewise, on all
+the relations of the bridegroom, to behave with courtesy and respect
+to the bride, and her parents and family, during these years of
+service, and if they are guilty of any lapse in this respect, the
+marriage is declared to be annulled, which is always very agreeable
+to the parents of the woman, as a new suitor presents himself, and
+they reap the benefit of a new service. The bridegroom, to console
+himself for his sufferings, as soon as the term closes, and his
+service is at an end, treats his wife as a slave; she is obliged
+to work for the maintenance of the family, whilst the husband is
+quite idle, and thinks herself happy, if, after having done this,
+she is not beaten. The interest which the parents of the girl,
+thus have in her disposal, is highly pernicious to morals; and we
+have not succeeded to this hour, in the abolition of it, either by
+the influence of royal edicts, or the regulations of the bishops,
+by both of which, it is discouraged and prohibited. The ceremony of
+marriage is performed, by sacrificing a hog, which a priestess slays
+with a thousand grimaces; after which, she bestows many benedictions
+on the parties, and an old woman presenting them with some food,
+the ceremony is closed by many obscenities. Dancing, according to
+their fashion, succeeds, and drinking the rest of the day ends the
+feast, which is always proportionate to the circumstances of the
+newly married pair. The principal contributions to this feast, arise
+from presents made to the bride and bridegroom by their friends,
+of which particular notice is taken, in order that similar presents
+may be returned to the parties on a like occasion.
+
+In their religious ceremonies, they use neither idols nor temples;
+their sacrifices are offered in arbours, which they raise for that
+purpose. They have priestesses, whom they call babailanas or catalonas,
+to whose function it belongs, to perform the sacrifices. The priestess,
+taking a lance in her hand, with extravagant and ridiculous gestures,
+works herself up to apparent frenzy, accompanied by foaming at
+the mouth, when uttering something, which is received as prophecy,
+she pierces the hog with the lance, and immediately distributes the
+carcase among those present: the ceremony, as usual, is closed by
+dancing and drinking.
+
+These sacrifices are offered to the infernal deities, as well as to the
+souls of their ancestors, who they are taught to believe inhabit very
+large trees, rocks of uncommon appearance, or any natural object which,
+in point of magnitude or form, varies from the usual course. They are
+so fully persuaded of this, that they never pass any object of this
+description, without first asking the permission of its visionary
+inhabitant, and to this hour the custom prevails. When any person was
+dangerously ill, his friends offered up to their deities rice, wine,
+and flesh, which was then given to the sick person, and which they were
+of opinion would effect his cure, a custom even yet followed by some
+people. They have many other superstitions, as that of the patianac,
+a spirit or ideal being, whose employment or amusement consists in
+preventing, by certain means peculiar to itself, the delivery of
+a woman in labour. To counteract the malignity of this spirit, the
+husband, fastening the door, reduces himself to a state of complete
+nudity, lights a fire, and arming himself with his sword, continues to
+flourish it furiously, until the woman is delivered. The tigbalang is
+another object of which they stand in great awe. It is described as
+a phantom, which assumes a variety of uncouth and monstrous shapes,
+and interposes its authority, to prevent their performing the duties,
+prescribed by our religion.
+
+These and other superstitions, formerly had extensive influence,
+and are still resorted to by impostors, who find their account in
+persuading those, who are silly enough to listen to them, that they
+are able to cure them of dangerous illness, or to recover any thing
+they may have lost, by having recourse to such absurdities; and so
+much do the love of life, and our own individual interests prevail,
+that although they believe these customs sinful, and although they
+do not entirely give credit to their efficacy, yet they put them in
+practice, because, they say, chance may be in their favour: this is
+a proof that as yet they are very superficial christians [14]. Indeed,
+all their religious impressions, seem rather the result of a slavish
+dread, than the effect of rational piety.
+
+They practise no external adoration, and have no other form of address
+to their gods, than what has been mentioned. They do not believe,
+that the good will be rewarded, or the wicked punished, but they
+acknowledge the immortality of the souls of the deceased, and that
+they are capable of doing them mischief. They persuade themselves,
+that these retain all the natural wants incident to the mortal state,
+and accordingly, place on their tombs, clothes, arms, and food, and
+on the fourth day, when the funeral ceremony is performed, a vacant
+seat is left at the table for the deceased, whom they believe to be
+actually present, though not obvious to sight. To prove this, sand is
+strewed on the floor, on which the prints of the feet of the deceased
+are often found. This may be presumed, to be the pious trick of some of
+the friends, but it answers the purpose, of inducing a belief in the
+actual presence of the party; and in order to deprecate the injury he
+may do, offerings of eatables are made to him, and which ceremony,
+is perfectly conformable, to the cowardly and timorous nature of
+the Indians.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1519 to 1564.
+
+    Comprising the Discovery of the Philippines.
+
+
+After the conquest of the Americas, and discovery of the South
+Sea, Hernando de Magellan, a Portuguese, affirmed there must be a
+communication with that sea by the antarctic pole, and proposed to his
+sovereign, to make the discovery by the route of the Moluccas. The
+king, Don Manuel of Portugal, either not believing there was such
+a passage, or prejudiced against Magellan, received his proposal
+with contempt. This disgusted him, and he came into Spain, where,
+at Saragossa, he was presented to Charles V., to whom he promised
+the complete discovery of the Moluccas, and the adjacent islands,
+within the Spanish line of demarcation, by a distinct route from
+that used by the Portuguese, pursuing his object by the expected
+antarctic passage to the South Sea. By the brief of Pope Alexander
+VI., expedited at Rome the 4th of May 1493, Magellan secured a
+patent, attaching such discoveries to the crown of Castile. This
+brief enjoined, that the globe should be equally divided, by a line
+drawn from the north, by the isles of the Azores, towards the south,
+embracing the conquests, which formed the western boundaries of the
+Atlantic; the portion to the west, to belong to the crown of Spain,
+and leaving to the crown of Portugal, the hemisphere to the eastward
+of this line. Having discovered the Brazils, however, and the king of
+Portugal being desirous of preserving it, he requested his Holiness,
+that the line might be drawn, four hundred and sixty leagues more
+to the westward of the Azores, in order, that no other power, might
+interfere with that valuable acquisition. The line was so drawn on
+the map, and the Moluccas, were accordingly, placed out of the line
+of territory, thus appropriated to the Portuguese, and within that
+of Spain[15]: they were not able, however, at that time, to adjust the
+other point as to the route; but the Cape of Good Hope, interposing
+in their voyages to India, it was not doubted, that America might
+be like this hemisphere, and finish also in a cape, and passage to
+the South Sea. The desire of the Spaniards to take possession of the
+Spice Islands, or, as they were called, the Moluccas, instigated them
+to ascertain the truth of this conjecture; and a squadron of five
+ships, was fitted out for that purpose, viz. La Trinidad, in which
+Magellan himself embarked; San Antonio, La Concepcion, Santiago, and
+La Victoria; the whole manned with two hundred and thirty-four men,
+and paid and victualled for two years.
+
+Magellan sailed from Seville with this armament on the 10th of August
+1519, and on the 13th of December he arrived at the Brazils, and
+coasting the land in quest of the expected passage to the South Sea,
+on Easter day, he entered the Bay of Saint Julian, in fifty degrees
+of south latitude, where he intended remaining, finding the winter
+had commenced in those regions. Here his people mutinied, upon an
+idea that their provisions were exhausted, and that it was impossible
+to discover the pass they were in search of. Magellan quelled this
+mutiny; but immediately after understood, that another had broken out
+in the ship San Antonio, and that the crew had murdered the commander,
+and confined his cousin Alvaro de Mesquita, who was made captain
+on the arrest of Juan de Cartagena. The leader on this occasion
+was Gaspar de Quezada, whom he ordered to be hanged; and setting on
+shore a Franciscan friar and Juan de Cartagena, on account of their
+turbulent disposition, he sailed in prosecution of his voyage, by
+the much desired pass to the South Sea. On the 1st of November 1520,
+he discovered the straits which bear his name; and having occupied
+twenty days in passing through them, he found himself in the South
+Sea with three ships, the Santiago having been wrecked, and having
+separated from the San Antonio, which his cousin commanded, and which,
+by the route of the coast of Guinea, returned to Spain. Magellan, with
+fair winds and pleasant weather, ploughed that sea, which never before
+had been navigated. Uninterrupted in the pursuit of his object, he
+discovered, on the Sunday of Saint Lazarus, a great number of islands,
+which he named the Archipelago of Saint Lazarus; and on Easter Day,
+he arrived at the island of Mindanao, where he ordered the first
+mass which was said in the Philippines. This took place in the town
+of Batuan, in the province of Caraga, where he set up the cross,
+and took possession of these islands, in the name of the King of Spain.
+
+From Batuan, Magellan proceeded to Zebu, and, in passing the island
+of Dimasaua, he formed an alliance with its chief, who accompanied
+him to Zebu. The inhabitants of Zebu, received him with such kindness,
+that their king, Hamabar, his whole family, with the chief of Dimasaua,
+and many of the people of the island, were baptized. The King of Mactan
+alone, a very small island in front of the town of Zebu, resisted
+the Spaniards, and was sufficiently confident in his strength, to
+challenge Magellan, who was weak enough to accept the challenge. He
+selected for the enterprize fifty Spaniards, who attacked the Indians
+in morasses, the water up to their breasts, and approached so near
+them, that Magellan was wounded with an arrow, and died on the field
+with six other Spaniards, the rest saving themselves by flight.
+
+The friar Calancha, an Augustine, remarks in his history of Peru,
+that all those engaged in the discovery of the South Sea, came to no
+very enviable end: for, that a seaman of the name of Lopez, who was
+the first that beheld it from the mast-head, renounced his faith,
+and turned Moor. Basco Nunez de Balbua, who took possession of those
+regions, lost his head; and Magellan himself, finished his days in the
+abovementioned manner. I can add, that almost all those, who have been
+concerned in the discovery of the Philippines, have suffered so much,
+that the history of these islands, forms a tissue of tragedies.
+
+On the death of Magellan, the Spaniards chose Juan Serrano as
+Commander of the expedition; and, alarmed at their defeat at Mactan,
+they remained on board their ships, apprehensive of the treachery of
+the other Indians. In fact, the people of Zebu, began to think lightly
+of the strangers, whom they had hitherto considered as invincible,
+and proceeded to plan their destruction. Abundantly deceitful by
+nature, they concealed their designs, and succeeded in persuading
+our General to be present, with twenty-four Spaniards, at a feast,
+which the chief of Zebu had prepared for him. In the middle of the
+feast, a great number of armed Indians, whom Hamabar had concealed,
+rushed in, and murdered them all, Serrano alone excepted, who escaped
+to the sea side, and implored the assistance of his companions; but
+they, fearful of some new treason, were witnesses of his massacre,
+which the Indians effected in view of the squadron, without their
+attempting to relieve him, or revenge the injury. Juan Carvallo now
+became General of the armament, and he resolved to go from thence,
+in search of the Moluccas: he burned the ship Concepcion, as he had
+not men sufficient to man her, and sailed from Zebu with the Trinidad
+and the Victoria. On the 8th of November he arrived at Tidore, one
+of the Moluccas, and was well received by its chief, who granted him
+a factory for the purpose of collecting cloves, &c.; and on the 21st
+of December, he loaded the two ships with spices, preparing for the
+return to Spain. Gonzalo Gomez de Espimosa commanded the Trinidad, and
+it was his intention to proceed to Panama, but he was captured by the
+Portuguese. Sebastian del Cano, went in the Victoria, by the way of the
+Cape of Good Hope, and, after losing many of his crew on the voyage,
+arrived at San Lucar de Barrameda, with only eighteen people, on the
+7th of September 1522, three years from the time of their departure
+from Seville. He was thus the first, who had sailed round the world;
+and on this account, among other honours, the Emperor gave him for
+his arms, a terrestrial globe, with this motto, Hic primus geometros.
+
+The account which Sebastian del Cano gave of the expedition, induced
+the Emperor, to send other armaments to the Moluccas. The first was
+that of Esteban Gomez, who proposed, by the way of Newfoundland, to
+discover a shorter passage to the South Sea. A squadron was accordingly
+despatched in the year 1524; but in a little time, news was received of
+its dispersion by bad weather. In the year following, Don Fray Garcia
+Jofre de Loaysa, was despatched from Corunna with seven ships, well
+appointed with good officers, and four hundred and fifty picked men;
+among these was Andres de Urdaneta, who afterwards became a friar of
+the order of San Augustine, and directed the expedition of Legaspi
+to these islands. They passed the Straits of Magellan, with the loss
+of one ship, and entering the South Sea, they encountered so severe
+a storm, that the whole squadron was separated. Loaysa pursued his
+course; and in a short time afterwards died. By order of the Emperor,
+Sebastian del Cano was to succeed to the command, but he surviving
+only a few days, it devolved on Martin Yaņez, a Biscayan. They arrived
+at Tidore on the 31st of December 1526, as did, in a short time, the
+remainder of the squadron, with few men, and those unserviceable. Here
+they found, that the Portuguese had declared war against the chief
+of Tidore, for having entertained the squadron of Magellan, and it
+was deemed on our part proper, to undertake the defence of those
+benefactors of the Spaniards. They had several encounters with the
+Portuguese, but of no moment, and few were killed on these occasions;
+but the number of sick increased considerably, from the length and
+hardships of the voyage; and from the humid nature of the climate,
+the whole were threatened with rapid dissolution; being therefore
+already reduced to one hundred and twenty, they constructed a fort,
+and surrounding it with a palisade, placed themselves under the
+command of Hernando de la Torre, who was chosen General after the
+death of Martin Yaņez.
+
+In this situation, were the remains of the armament under Loaysa
+found, when the Viceroy of Mexico, by orders from court, despatched
+to Molucca three ships, under the command of Alvaro de Saavedra,
+who arrived at these islands, by the route of the Ladrones, now
+called Marianas, of which he took possession, in the name of his
+Majesty the King of Spain, in the year 1528. Saavedra pursued his
+voyage to Tidore, where he found the hundred and twenty Spaniards,
+shut up in their fortress. They considered him, as an angel sent
+to their relief, in the extremity of misery: but this joy was of
+short duration, new quarrels springing up with the Portuguese, who
+had succeeded in destroying, nearly all the Spanish ships. They at
+last, however, commenced their voyage to New Spain. Twice they made
+the attempt, twice they were driven back; and they suffered so much,
+that the General, with many of the crews, fell a sacrifice; the few
+that remained, being compelled to submit to the Portuguese. This
+was a most lamentable conclusion of the expedition; but all our
+squadrons, having represented the Moluccas as extremely valuable,
+on account of their spices, war was on the point of being declared,
+between the two kingdoms, about the possession of them. The Spaniards
+alleged, that it could not be denied, these islands were in the line
+of demarcation of Spain; and the Portuguese, were unwilling to quit
+the spice trade, of which they were in possession, and which so much
+enriched the mother country. These differences were adjusted about
+the year 1529, the Emperor, renouncing his right to the Moluccas,
+for three hundred and fifty thousand ducats, by way of loan, advanced
+by the King of Portugal.
+
+Thus abandoning the Moluccas, the Emperor turned all his thoughts
+to the conquest of the Western Isles, or Philippines. He despatched
+instructions to the Viceroy of Mexico, to send a squadron for that
+purpose, with directions not to stop at the Moluccas, in order to
+avoid creating jealousy among the Portuguese. In obedience to these
+orders from court, the Viceroy immediately fitted out five ships in
+the Puerto de Natividad, and nominated as Commander of the expedition,
+Ruy Lopez de Villalobos, directing him, to take with him four Augustine
+friars, for the conversion of the conquered inhabitants. The squadron
+sailed on the day of All Saints, in the year 1542, and arrived safe
+off the Philippines; but they were driven so much to leeward, by the
+south-west monsoon, prevalent at that time, that they were compelled
+to anchor at the island of Sarragan, which lies on the opposite coast
+of Mindanao, and at forty leagues distance. In this miserable island,
+they suffered so much from hunger, that Villalobos sent some of the
+smaller vessels, in search of provisions, to the other islands: but,
+their return being delayed beyond his expectation, he resolved to sail
+for the Moluccas, though it was in direct opposition to his orders,
+without having effected any other object, than administering baptism to
+one child. The Portuguese received him very ungraciously, and compelled
+him, immediately to make the best of his way to Spain. In passing
+Amboyna, he died of a deep melancholy, arising out of the disasters
+of the expedition, and the idea of having disobeyed the orders of
+his sovereign, which were, on no account to visit the Moluccas. By
+the death of the General, the whole armament was deranged; indeed it
+was, eventually, almost all annihilated; and the few Spaniards who
+remained, found means to embark in different Portuguese ships. The
+Augustine friars went to Goa, from whence they found a passage to
+Europe, and arrived at Lisbon in August 1549, seven years after they
+had departed from the Puerto de Natividad.
+
+As his Catholic Majesty, was fully determined on the conquest of the
+Philippines, it is necessary to notice the title, by which he laid
+claim to them. Our writers have brought forward a number of arguments,
+to prove the right, which the Kings of Spain have to the Americas,
+and the islands they have conquered; but I find them very superficial,
+and only one incontestable document, by which our sovereigns hold
+these dominions, that is, the concession of the Roman Pontifs. It
+is now the received opinion of churchmen, that the Popes have not
+the power to make such grants, but at the period in question, the
+contrary opinion prevailed, and was generally acknowledged in the
+schools. Supported by this idea, then so universal, the Papal See,
+granted to the respective Kings, not only what they conquered, but,
+as we have seen, assumed the right, of even partitioning the globe.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1564 to 1565.
+
+    Of the Conquest of Zebu, and Discovery of the Route to New Spain.
+
+
+The glory of conquering the Philippines, was reserved for his Catholic
+Majesty Philip II., by means of, the valour of Miguel Lopez de
+Legaspi, the prudence of the Augustine friars, and the skill of one
+of those friars, Andres de Urdaneta, who had been a captain in the
+armament of Loaysa, but subsequently took the habit of San Augustine
+in Mexico, in the year 1552. His Majesty issued an edict, encouraging
+and recommending an expedition, to be sent by the Viceroy of Mexico,
+to the western isles. Friar Urdaneta acquiesced in the will of his
+sovereign, and the Viceroy chose five other religious of the same
+order, viz. Andres de Aguirre, Martin de Rada, Lorenzo Ximenes (who
+died in the Puerto de Natividad), Diego Herrera, and Pedro Gamboa,
+with the view to a spiritual, as well as temporal conquest. This
+squadron was composed of two ships, one small galleon, and a patache
+(a vessel so called). The command was given to Miguel Lopez de Legaspi,
+a noble Biscayan, from whose valour and prudence, the Viceroy expected
+greater results, than had been obtained from the other expeditions. The
+fleet sailed from Puerto de Natividad on the 21st November, 1564,
+with sealed orders; and when about a hundred leagues from the coast,
+the seals being broken, they found directions to proceed to these
+islands. Urdaneta had formed his plan, on the idea conceived by the
+Viceroy of first making New Guinea, but, obliged to conform to the
+royal instructions, he shaped his course nearly due west, in order to
+arrive at the ninth degree of latitude, and from thence to run direct
+west, to demand the submission of those islands, which lie between
+the ninth and tenth degree, passing by the islands of Arrecifes and
+Matalotes, together with those of La Nublada and Rocapartida, the two
+latter being too far out of the track. On the 31st of December, the
+patache separated, as if by accident, and never rejoined the squadron;
+Don Alonzo de Arellano was her commander, and Lopez Martin, a Mulatto,
+the pilot; and there was reason to believe that the separation was
+intentional, as it afterwards proved, that they went to Mindanao,
+where, taking in a cargo of gold and spices, they proceeded to New
+Spain. The squadron pursued its course, and on the 9th of January,
+1565, discovered an island, which Legaspi called Barbudos, because
+the inhabitants wore longer beards than the other Indians. On the
+22d they discovered the islands Ladrones, where they remained some
+days, taking in water and purchasing fresh provisions, which they
+procured from the Indians, in exchange for European commodities,
+especially iron, an article in great esteem with them. These Indians
+pilfered whatever they could lay their hands on, and assaulted our
+people while procuring water; yet, many Spaniards were desirous of
+remaining among them, and petitioned the General to found a colony
+there, and despatch a ship to Acapulco for that purpose; but having no
+orders to that effect, he prosecuted his route on the 3d of February,
+and on the 13th discovered the Philippines. At Tandaya, and Abuyo,
+he attempted to make an amicable arrangement with the inhabitants,
+for provisions, making presents to them, and promising, that he would
+pay liberally for every thing; but he could only procure one fowl
+and one egg. The stock of provisions, was now, however, becoming so
+short, that he deemed it necessary, to run in more among the islands,
+in search of a supply. They arrived at Bohol, and found the Indians
+had retired to the mountains. They had behaved so kindly, in selling
+provisions to those, whom Ruy Lopez de Villalobos had sent for that
+purpose, that Legaspi was astonished at their reserve, and could not
+conceive the cause of this change, until the pilot of a Bornean vessel
+discovered it. This vessel was taken by Colonel Matheo del Sauz,
+in the following manner. The General, had sent him to reconnoitre
+the vessel, and the Borneans, little acquainted with Europeans and
+their customs, and believing they came to make prisoners of them,
+received them in a hostile manner with their cannon [16], killing one
+soldier, and wounding twenty. The Colonel returned their fire, and
+killed their captain; when part of the crew escaped, in a small boat,
+which they carry in the prow of their junk (the name they give their
+vessels), and the pilot, with six men, delivered themselves up, without
+further resistance. All this having taken place, without the knowledge
+or participation of the General, he was extremely solicitous, to do
+away the ill impression, which the transaction might make, and ordered
+them to restore the junk, with all the effects which they had taken;
+and which conduct so satisfied the Borneans, that they immediately
+declared publicly, they should interest themselves particularly, in
+favour of the squadron. They informed Legaspi, among other matters,
+that about two years since, some Portuguese of the Moluccas, had
+landed on their island, had been guilty of great extortion, and had
+done considerable injury to the inhabitants; and as they could not
+distinguish between the two nations, they had imagined that the people
+of his squadron were Portuguese.
+
+Legaspi was aware, that it was necessary, above all things, to
+undeceive the Indians in this respect; he, therefore, earnestly
+requested the pilot of the Bornean vessel, to go on shore, and effect a
+reconciliation with the natives of Bohol, bringing on board the Rajah
+of the island, if possible. The Moor, in gratitude to the Spaniards,
+exerted himself, and returned on board with the Rajah, Sicatuna, who
+was persuaded to enter into an amicable understanding with them, to be
+consecrated and confirmed, in the manner usual with these islanders,
+which is thus; the parties entering into a treaty of friendship being
+bled at the arm, and the blood mixed with a little water, or spirit,
+they reciprocally drink each other's blood, so diluted, in token of
+amity. Legaspi, with this view, sent a soldier of the name of Santiago
+on shore, to go through the ceremony with Sicatuna; but the latter,
+thinking it below his dignity, to allow his blood to be drawn, with any
+but that of the General, ordered his son to take his place, promising,
+that the day following, he would proceed on board, and be bled with
+the General. Sicatuna, jealous of the intentions of the Spaniards,
+requested, that whilst he was on board, two Spaniards and two Moors of
+Borneo, might be sent on shore, as hostages for his safety; on this
+being likewise adjusted, he allowed them to cut wood in the mountains
+of Bohol, for refitting their ships; and in ratification of the whole,
+he was bled with the General the following day. Legaspi, in the belief
+that Sicatuna was King of the island, on this account consented to the
+ceremony; and although he afterwards understood, that the dominion of
+the Rajahs of this country, extended over a few small villages only,
+where they exercised the power, their valour gave them over their
+countrymen, he had no reason to repent of what he had done; for,
+in consequence of it, the Indians became free from apprehension,
+and supplied the squadron with the refreshments, it stood so much in
+need of.
+
+Legaspi paid well for every thing they brought; and, at length,
+procured sufficient provisions, to be in a situation to despatch one
+ship to New Spain, but was unable to accompany it; and he did not wish
+to have recourse to violence, to procure a larger supply, thinking
+that unjustifiable and unwise, except in case of extremity. With the
+people of Zebu, he was inclined to conclude, he should be obliged to
+have recourse to arms, unless they supplied him, on friendly terms,
+with provisions; and he intended to use, as a pretext for hostilities,
+their treachery against the squadron of Magellan. He resolved,
+therefore, to go to this island, in quitting that of Bohol, with the
+inhabitants of which, a cordiality had subsisted from the first; and
+as a proof of his sense of their conduct, he settled every account
+with them, most honourably. To this justice and prudence of Legaspi,
+may be attributed the easy conquest, the Spaniards made of this island,
+against whose natives, they seldom have been obliged to use fire-arms.
+
+On Easter day, the 22d of April, Legaspi accordingly sailed from
+Bohol, and on Friday the 27th, he arrived at Zebu, when he immediately
+despatched an interpreter named Pacheco, to propose amity with the
+natives, and that the Rajah might be sent to conclude the terms. Tupas,
+who was then King of Zebu, immediately sent some of the chief men,
+requesting Legaspi would not fire his artillery, which would alarm
+the town: and he promised to see the General, although he had no such
+intention, merely wishing to gain sufficient time, for the inhabitants
+to retire into the mountains, with all their moveables. It appearing
+the following day, that Tupas did not comply with his promise, three
+notifications were, in the space of two hours, sent to him by a notary,
+accompanied by Friar Urdaneta, who had the title of Protector of the
+Indians; but he paid no attention to this, and placed troops on the
+shore, and in canoes, to resist the landing of the Spaniards. Legaspi
+then determined on the assault, and ordered his men to fire on the
+canoes and Indians, who were posted to oppose them; but they retreated
+with such rapidity, that when the Spaniards leaped on shore, no enemy
+was to be seen. They followed them to the town, and found it in flames,
+the moveables having been taken away, and carried to the mountains, and
+little of any value remaining. The soldiers plundered those houses,
+which as yet, were not on fire, and among some things of little
+importance, they found a jewel, consisting of the image of a child,
+which they understood, was an object of adoration with the Indians,
+and which is at this day, in the church of San Augustine de Santo
+Niņo of Zebu. The Indians, it appeared, had been in possession of
+this image, from time immemorial; and they were accustomed, when they
+wanted rain, to make a solemn feast, and public supplication to it,
+and, carrying it to the sea side, they immersed it in the water until
+it rained; honours or stripes, followed the concession or refusal,
+of what they had petitioned for, and it was believed among them, that
+this Santo Niņo was the cause of the disgrace of Magellan. At first,
+the Spaniards found very few eatables in Zebu, but continuing their
+search, they stumbled upon thirty fanegas of rice, and some millet. In
+returning from the town, they encountered three hundred armed Indians;
+but upon our musquets being fired, they fled immediately. The General
+established his camp on the sea shore, and took out the Royal treasure
+which came in the Capitana, in order to be enabled to examine her
+bottom, and put her in a proper state, for her return to New Spain. The
+Spaniards found themselves perfectly secure in this encampment, in
+the day-time, because the Indians dared not attempt to molest them,
+through fear of their fire-arms; but at night, they occasioned them
+continual alarms, and on several occasions, set fire to their camp,
+doing however, little damage to the soldiers, who were defended by the
+palisades. The General however, in consequence of this, ordered the
+whole to be destroyed, and built a fort, which at once checked all
+further attempts. As yet, Legaspi kept on the defensive, expecting
+that Tupas would soon arrive, with whom he was desirous of being in
+amity, with a view to the conquest of the island by fair means. After
+repeated messages he at last appeared, accompanied by another chief,
+called Tamayan. Legaspi received them with cordiality, treated them
+handsomely, and, in the name of his sovereign, forgave the treachery,
+they had been guilty of towards Magellan. They made many excuses for
+their conduct, and promised that in three days they would return, with
+all the principal people, and establish a friendly intercourse with
+the Spaniards. These people will readily promise, whatever is demanded
+of them, but without any intention of performing their promise. Tupas,
+though King of the island, did not appear better entitled to respect,
+than any of the rest, and thought nothing of breaking his word,
+always, however, making some excuse on the succeeding visit.
+
+Notwithstanding the peaceable demeanor of the Indians, the General
+ordered, that no one should be permitted to quit the camp, as he
+apprehended an ambuscade, which might have a fatal issue. This,
+in fact, happened to Pedro de Arana, one of Legaspi's aides-de-camp,
+who, disregarding this order, passed the lines alone with his gun, and
+before he was able to save himself, he was run through with a lance,
+and his head cut off, and carried on board a parao, which was lying at
+a little distance. The General felt the loss of Pedro de Arana much,
+and gave orders to the Colonel, to chastise the insolence of the
+Indians, and reduce them. Whilst the Colonel was employed in this
+expedition, the General, who had been accustomed to sleep on board
+ship, determined to pass his nights on shore in future, through some
+distrust he entertained, of the officers of the navy, and ordered,
+that his aides-de-camp should keep guard over him. They did not
+relish the thoughts of this, persuading themselves, they would be
+degraded, by obeying the orders. The day following therefore, at a
+general review of the force, Pedro Mena, in the name of the whole,
+came forward, and, with very little ceremony, intimated that they
+would not keep guard, as it was the duty of the privates. The Colonel
+reprehended them sharply, suspended them, and struck them out of
+the list of aids-de-camp of the General. This punishment for their
+insolence, though fully merited, exasperated them to such a degree,
+that they set fire to their tents, and had nearly burnt all the effects
+belonging to his Majesty. The principal perpetrators of this crime,
+were Pedro de Mena, and Terresan, who were executed the following day,
+and by this act, the subordination of the rest was secured.
+
+The ship Capitana, was by this time prepared, for her voyage to New
+Spain. Her commander was Phelipe de Salcedo, grandson of the General;
+and there went in her, the friars Andres de Urdaneta, to conduct her
+to New Spain, and Martin de Aguirre, to solicit assistance for the
+conversion of these islanders. They sailed from Zebu on the 1st of
+June, 1565, and reaching the 36th degree of latitude, in search
+of the north-west winds, they directed their course to Puerto
+de la Natividad, where they arrived, after a four months voyage;
+but considering the distance of this port from Mexico, they pushed
+forwards to Acapulco, which was nearer, and they arrived there on the
+30th of October. In Mexico, their arrival occasioned much exultation,
+as they were considered to be lost, by the accounts which had been
+given, by the Captain Arellano and the pilot Lope Martin, who, three
+months before, had arrived at Puerto de la Natividad. The friars
+Urdaneta and Aguirre went to Madrid, where they met with Arellano,
+who was soliciting a reward, for the discovery of the track from the
+Philippines to New Spain. He had persisted in his pretensions, till
+the arrival of these friars, when he altered his tone; he was put in
+confinement, and ordered to Mexico, to be from thence sent to Manila,
+to be punished by Legaspi as his conduct deserved. The Mexicans,
+however, were of opinion, that he should not be sent to Manila, until
+the death of Legaspi was ascertained. The friars Urdaneta and Aguirre,
+having favourably completed their mission, embarked for Mexico, where
+Urdaneta died on the 3d of June, 1568, in the 70th year of his age.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1565.
+
+    Of the complete Conquest of the Island of Zebu, and of some Towns
+    in other Islands.
+
+
+The day following that, on which the Capitana sailed, a Moor of Borneo,
+called Cid Hamal, established in this island, arrived in our camp. He
+recommended it to the General, to invite Tupas to a conference;
+and upon this being done, he accordingly presented himself a second
+time, with some of the chief men of the island, and the conference
+terminated, in their resolution to preserve a good understanding with
+the Spaniards. They paid homage to the king of Spain, promising, that
+the squadron should be supplied with provisions, at the price usual
+among themselves, and granting land, and every means of founding a
+Spanish city, with fortifications for its defence. Amity thus restored,
+the Indians began to re-build their town, and a very short time,
+exhibited the pleasing sight, of the individuals of two different
+nations, establishing themselves at a little distance from each other.
+
+The Zebuans lost all apprehensions of the Spaniards, and came to
+their town to sell fruit, goats, and provisions. Among the least
+reserved was Tupas, who, under the pretext of accompanying other
+chiefs, visited the General, making him presents; and so contrived
+that his women should visit him likewise, dressing themselves in rich
+clothes, with ear-rings and bracelets of gold on the feet and arms,
+and accompanied by a great concourse of men and women; which visit was
+not ill received, the General always treating them handsomely. Tupas
+likewise, gave Legaspi his niece, who was a widow, and other women to
+attend him. The General directed them to be instructed in the Christian
+doctrine, and they embraced our religion, and were baptized. The
+niece of Tupas, had the name of Isabel given her, in memory of the
+deceased lady of the General, whose name this was, and in a little
+time she was married to Maestre Andrea, an officer of the squadron.
+
+The provisions which they had in the island of Zebu, were not
+sufficient for the Indians and their numerous guests; in consequence
+of which, Legaspi directed Tupas, to send two chiefs to the island
+of Panay, to purchase rice. Whilst these men were on their mission,
+the Spaniards sailed, in vessels which they had constructed at Zebu,
+on an expedition against some towns, belonging to the enemies of the
+Zebuans, and were enabled to send some rice to those in the camp. The
+Moors likewise of the island of Luįon, who came for commercial purposes
+to Zebu, sold them two hundred baskets of this grain; but as the
+return of the two ships which had gone to Panay, was still delayed
+beyond the expected time, Legaspi was compelled to put every man
+on an allowance, which produced great discontent among the people,
+and some even adopted the resolution of escaping with the patache
+San Juan, with the intention of lying in wait behind the islands,
+to rob the small barks that came there for commerce, and with their
+spoils to retire to France. The authors of this conspiracy were Pablo
+Hernandez and Juan Maria Venecianos; and they were joined in it by
+the pilot Francis Pierres Plin, Jorge el Griego, Maestre Andrea, the
+husband of Tupas's niece, Geronimo Foxa, and some foreigners. They
+fixed on the 26th of November, 1565, for their undertaking, intending
+previously to endeavour to disable all the ships, in order that they
+might not be pursued. It pleased Heaven to retard their scheme one
+day beyond the time fixed, and Juan Maria Venecianos repenting of his
+treason, discovered the conspiracy to Colonel Matheo del Sauz. The
+conspirators were immediately all apprehended, except Pablo Hernandez,
+who escaped into the country among the Indians. The whole underwent
+an examination, and Legaspi ordered that Francis Pierres Plin,
+and Jorge el Griego, should be hanged by break of day. It was his
+intention to have followed up the punishment of the conspirators,
+and he was proceeding to hang Maestre Andrea. The clergy, however,
+entreated him to pardon him, on account of his near relationship
+to Tupas, to which he assented. Pablo Hernandez, pressed by hunger,
+was compelled to deliver himself up, and as he was the ringleader,
+he was executed in the middle of the day by proclamation, and his head
+placed on a pole, as a warning to others. A pardon was granted to all
+the rest in the name of the King, and by this due mixture of severity
+and lenity, the minds of the General and the friars were tranquillized.
+
+Famine, at this time, was likely to be the lot of the Spaniards,
+as the chiefs who had been sent to Panay had not appeared; and as
+six more paraos had been despatched for the same purpose, it was
+apprehended that they had entered into a combination with the first,
+to reduce the Spaniards by famine. In this situation, Captain Martin
+de Goite set sail, with the intention of taking by force, from the
+enemies of the Zebuans, as much provision as could be procured, and
+executed his plan with so much success, that by Christmas he sent
+to the camp a small vessel laden with borona (bread made of Indian
+corn and millet). This proved the most acceptable new year's gift,
+which could have been offered under their circumstances; by degrees
+provisions became more plentiful, and the people began to revive,
+and forget the famine they had endured. The chiefs now made their
+appearance from Panay with the rice, but they assigned little of it
+to the Spaniards, and the largest quantity to the Indians.
+
+The General was well aware of the treachery of the Zebuans, of the
+little faith to be placed in them, and their doubtful intentions;
+but he dissembled his sentiments, as they were necessary to his
+views, and our camp was tolerably well supplied. By the expeditions,
+which Martin de Goite and others made round the adjacent islands,
+it was discovered that some of the towns courted the friendship of
+the Spaniards, while others planned their destruction by famine, for
+which purpose all the provisions were conveyed to the mountains. The
+Moors of Luzon, however, found it their interest to bring sufficient
+rice to Zebu, and Legaspi, who did not wish to see a recurrence
+of the same danger as had happened, sent the Colonel in search
+of provisions to the neighbouring islands; but here he encountered
+another inconvenience, in leaving too small a force for the defence of
+Zebu; the consequence of which was, that a plot was formed to seize a
+vessel belonging to the Moors of Luzon, at that time trading at Zebu,
+to murder all on board, and escape with the vessel to the Moluccas,
+where the Portuguese would willingly receive them. Juan Nunes de
+Carrion, and Miguel Gomez Cavecillas, were executed for this piece
+of treason, after due repentance of their villainy. Captain Martin de
+Goite, with the provisions he forwarded, at length sent information,
+that many nations were desirous of becoming vassals of the King of
+Spain, and the Colonel soon after arrived with above one thousand
+fanegas of rice, after having stopt at the islands of Mindanao,
+Negros, and Panay, where he ransomed a Mexican Indian, who had been
+in the squadron of Villalobos, and had been taken prisoner. Captain
+Juan de la Jela, who had likewise gone out in search of provisions,
+had the good fortune to discover the ship San Geronimo, which he
+conducted to Zebu; a circumstance which filled every one with joy,
+mingled with regret, at the thoughts of the tragic scenes which had
+been acted on board that ship.
+
+The Royal Audience of Mexico had despatched the ship San Geronimo from
+Acapulco to relieve those at Zebu, and to advertise them of the arrival
+of the Capitana at that port. They sent as captain of the ship Pedro
+Sanchez Pericon; as second in command, Juan Ortez de Mosquera, and as
+pilot the mulatto Lope Martin, who was sent for the express purpose
+of being punished by Legaspi, for having separated, intentionally,
+from the squadron in the patache San Lucas. Pericon and Mosquera had
+been, before the commencement of the voyage, inimical to each other,
+and in its progress their mutual antipathy was augmented. The pilot,
+Martin, dreading the idea of being confronted with Legaspi, entered
+into a plot with Mosquera, and they gained over to their party most
+of the crew, among whom was Philip de Ocampo, a brave man, but of the
+worst character. Thinking their strength sufficient, they commenced
+their operations by being insolent to the commander, and one night
+they killed a horse which he had brought in the galleon. The friends
+of Pericon conjured him to be on his guard, as they concluded that
+those who had begun by killing the horse, would end in murdering him,
+if he was not sufficiently vigilant. But Pericon's confidence was too
+great, and he slighted the advice of his friends. The conspirators by
+this forbearance increasing every day in boldness, at last resolved to
+put in practice their diabolical design of murdering the commander, and
+getting possession of the vessel; accordingly one night, after having
+placed guards on those of the crew whom they could not confide in,
+Mosquera entered the captain's bedroom, accompanied by two seamen,
+one of the name of Bartolome de Lara, and the other Morales, and
+ordered them to stab Captain Pericon and his son, a young man about
+twenty-five years of age, who had a sub-command in the ship. They
+effected their purpose, and threw the bodies overboard; and placing
+some chests on the deck for the accommodation of the people, Mosquera
+thus harangued them: "Gentlemen, let us recommend to Heaven the souls
+of Captain Pericon and his son; they came by their death for reasons
+which, when we arrive at Zebu, shall be given to General Legaspi;
+every thing shall remain unaltered, and I, as a good subject of his
+Majesty, will conduct the ship to that island."
+
+Many days had not elapsed before Mosquera and the pilot quarrelled;
+it was a difficult task for the latter to reconcile himself to his
+situation, and put on the mask of friendship to the former. He
+whispered to Mosquera in confidence, that the people were much
+irritated at the murders which had been committed, and among other
+things, he proposed to tranquillize them, by putting in irons some
+person who had been concerned in the affair, and afterwards to
+discharge him, under the authority of a notarial process, drawn up
+for that purpose, declaring his innocence. This appearing a plausible
+measure enough, Mosquera, with this view, foolishly convened the ship's
+company, and the pilot seized upon him, and put him in confinement. The
+day following he ordered breakfast, of which Mosquera partook in
+his irons, and when finished, he requested the pilot would set
+him at liberty, as there had been time sufficient allowed for the
+ceremony. The views of the mulatto, however, were very different;
+he ordered him to be hung at the yard-arm, without giving him time
+to confess, observing, that Divine Providence had ordered he should
+die without partaking the sacrament, as had been the case with the
+two whom he had murdered. The mulatto now remaining captain of the
+ship, Philip de Ocampo, who was his favourite, made a speech to his
+companions, telling them, "That Captain Lope Martin did not intend
+going to Zebu; that those who were desirous of accompanying him,
+should go to a part of the world where all might acquire great
+riches, but that those who were of a different opinion, should be
+set on shore on an island in the immediate neighbourhood of Zebu,
+from whence they might easily reach Legaspi." All were silent, and
+nothing was done till they arrived at the islands of Barbudos; when
+Lope Martin landing on one which was desolate, gave out that it was
+necessary to careen the ship there, but his real intention was to
+leave most of his companions on this island, exposed to famine.
+
+He was not, however, able sufficiently to conceal his intentions. The
+Friar Capellan, a venerable priest, suspected him, and consulted
+with Juan de Vivero on some means of averting this blow. Rodrigo de
+Angle, the mate of the ship, a man of approved courage, determined
+to appeal to his Majesty, if it cost him his life, broke the matter
+to others, and eventually drew to his party Bartholome de Lara,
+by promising to make him captain of the ship, although he had no
+such intention. Rodrigo finding he had gained most of the crew on
+board to his side, weighed anchor, and hallooed to those on shore,
+that all the true and faithful vassals of his Majesty might embark
+immediately, and that the ship belonged to the King. By this means
+all were received on board but Lope Martin and Philip de Ocampo,
+and about twenty-five others, among whom were some loyalists, who
+were unable to reach the ship in time.
+
+Bartholome de Lara, disappointed in his expectations of being made
+captain of the ship, began to form a party, and was joined more from
+necessity than otherwise by Hernando de Morales, his accomplice in
+the murder of Pericon and his son; but the new captain contrived
+means to try and hang them, after which the crew remained free from
+further molestation, and they arrived at Zebu. The General Legaspi, to
+deter others, hanged the notary Juan de Zaldivar, for being accessory
+to the aforesaid murder. He rewarded Rodrigo del Angle, Garnica,
+and Juan Enriquez, with all the loyalists, and granted a pardon,
+in the name of the King, to all those who had acted any subordinate
+part in this transaction.
+
+The Colonel, at this time, had gone to ratify a treaty of peace
+with some of the towns, and falling in with a small Portuguese
+galleon of superior force, which bore down upon his patache, he
+was compelled to escape as well as he could. About the same time,
+two Portuguese vessels having appeared off Zebu, Legaspi ordered
+them to be acknowledged as friends, and invited into the harbour,
+but they excused themselves, and prosecuted their route. These proved
+afterwards to be ships belonging to the squadron of Pereyra, which
+was coming against the Spaniards, but being dispersed by storms,
+they could not pursue their first intentions. The General fortified
+his camp, and entertaining no fears of the Portuguese, he despatched
+Martin de Goite on an amicable treaty with some adjacent towns,
+and to receive the tribute of those who had already submitted. He
+likewise sent the Colonel to Mindanao, for the purchase of cinnamon,
+to be shipped to New Spain. This expedition was unfortunate in the
+death of this great man, who was a severe loss to the Spaniards. He
+caught a fever, and being in great danger, he told Morones, his second
+in command, and to whom he entrusted the ship before he died, that he
+suspected an intention of mutiny among the crew; the object of which
+was, to go off with the patache, because they had not been allowed to
+purchase cinnamon for themselves, and which being the only valuable
+object for which the voyage was undertaken, belonged to the King, as
+being the first purchase made of that article. Legaspi paid him the
+usual funeral honours in Zebu, and punished those who were found to
+be concerned in this mutiny. He likewise named as his successor Martin
+de Goite. The General sent Morones to Caraga, and Pedro de Herrera to
+Leyte, for tar, for careening the ships. The Indians of this island are
+excellent porters and labourers, and our soldiers had such confidence
+in them, that leaving their arms, and relying on their friendship, they
+received the tar in an unguarded manner. This, however, in the end,
+cost them dear, as on a sudden they found themselves surrounded in an
+ambuscade, by eight or ten Indians to one Spaniard; and Matheo Sanchez
+Gaditano not being able to extricate them, the Indians murdered all but
+one Spaniard, who escaped to relate the news of this tragedy. Whilst
+this was passing up the country, others came down to plunder the ship,
+who finding our people in unsuspecting security, possessed themselves
+of their arms, and destroyed every thing they could not take away.
+
+On the 10th of June, 1567, there arrived at Zebu two Portuguese
+caracoas, with letters from Captain Pereyra to Miguel Lopez de Legaspi,
+in which he observed, that he supposed they were the Spaniards who had
+taken refuge in Zebu, in consequence of bad weather, and were unable
+to return to New Spain, as had happened to those of the other Spanish
+squadrons which had navigated those seas; and on this supposition he
+invited them to the Moluccas, where he promised to receive them with
+every degree of friendship, and furnish them with proper necessaries
+to prosecute their voyage.
+
+Such were the contents of his letter on the occasion, but some invalid
+Spaniards who came with the messenger, affirmed that Pereyra had
+been despatched by the Viceroy of India to drive the Spaniards out
+of Zebu, and not being able last year to effect it, in consequence
+of the storms they had encountered, they had remained in Tidore with
+the intention of completing it this year. Our General, aware of the
+snare which Pereyra was laying for him, answered this specious letter
+with corresponding dissimulation, and that he had given notice to his
+court of the capture of these islands, and was in daily expectation
+of hearing from his sovereign. Surrounded by these interruptions and
+difficulties, the General sent to Acapulco the patache San Lucas,
+Captain Juan de la Isla, requesting such assistance as might prevent
+the threatened suspension of their intercourse with New Spain, and
+which appeared highly probable. The Augustine friars sent, on this
+occasion, Friar Pedro de Gamboa to solicit some additional aid for the
+conversion of these infidels, who had already begun to be baptized,
+and which, they urged, would securely establish the authority of the
+Spaniards in the Philippines, but the friar never arrived, having
+died on the voyage.
+
+On the 20th of August, this year, Philip de Salcedo arrived with two
+ships, and accompanied by his brother Juan de Salcedo, who had been
+of great use in the first conquest of these islands. The General was
+rejoiced at the arrival of such considerable relief, at a period when
+he had reason to think Pereyra intended to attack Zebu. When Legaspi
+saw, however, that the Portuguese did not make their appearance as he
+expected, he despatched his grandson, Philip de Salcedo, to Acapulco,
+with directions to go by the route of the Ladrone Islands, where he
+was shipwrecked; but, all the people being saved, he built another
+vessel, and returned to Zebu in such happy time, that he made up
+for his disappointment, by the importance of his appearance, at the
+period of Pereyra's arrival, on the 30th of September 1568, with a
+squadron of three galleons, two galeots, three fustas, and twenty
+smaller vessels. Every thing, however, on this occasion, indicated
+perfect amity; the Generals visited reciprocally, and held meetings,
+to ascertain whether these islands were in the line of demarcation of
+Spain, or not, with the view of avoiding hostilities. Pereyra, by an
+artful line of conduct, protracted these discussions, in order to gain
+time, if possible, by stratagem, to get possession of the port and of
+our camp, as he found it could not be effected by force. Disappointed,
+however, in his views, he returned on Christmas-eve to the Moluccas,
+having been dismissed with great civility by Legaspi.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1569 to 1571.
+
+    Of the Conquest of Manila.
+
+
+The supply of provisions having been very short, in consequence of
+the Portuguese, in some measure, blockading the port, the General,
+to guard against being exposed to the same danger a second time,
+determined to change his position, and establish himself in a more
+fertile country than that he then occupied. He ordered the camp to
+be immediately removed to the island of Panay: with this commission
+he charged his grandson, Philip de Salcedo, who was very cordially
+received by the natives, because he had formerly assisted them against
+their enemies, and enabled them to make many prisoners. Captain Luis de
+la Haya was ordered to go with his detachment, to the river Araut in
+the same island; Captain Andres de Ybarra to the island of Masbate;
+and the Colonel was ordered to remain in Zebu. In the interim the
+camp was established in Panay, and the patache San Lucas remained at
+Zebu, preparing to depart for New Spain. Juan de Salcedo ordered his
+brother Philip to Panay with another vessel, which conveyed the books
+and effects of his grandfather, all of which were lost in a storm;
+which loss, although he felt it severely, Legaspi bore with exemplary
+patience and fortitude.
+
+Philip de Salcedo having loaded the patache San Lucas, sailed from
+Zebu, and, in a few days after her departure, fell in with the San
+Juan, which had sailed from Acapulco, and was commanded by Captain
+Juan Lopez de Aguirre; Salcedo returned with her to Zebu, and, on
+the 10th of July, sailed a second time on his voyage. By the San
+Juan the Augustine fathers had sent Friar Herrera, having appointed
+him a provincial, or clerical head of a province, which was the
+first they had established in the Philippines. Their intention was
+by this appointment, to increase the importance of the religious
+orders, and induce higher respect from the new converts; the effect,
+accordingly, was the addition of many to the number, stimulated too,
+by the example of Tupas and his son: Legaspi stood godfather to Tupas,
+who was christened Philip, in compliment to the King of Spain;
+and his son was christened Charles, and had, as his godfather,
+Juan de Salcedo. The feasts which were held on the day these two
+new Christians were baptized, contributed, at the same time, to the
+conversion of many others. This was a measure of great expediency,
+although the duty of the fathers became necessarily so much more
+enlarged. It was determined that a friar, whose name was Juan Alba,
+should be sent to attempt the conversion of the isle of Masbate;
+and another, by the name of Alonzo Ximenes, to the river Araut, in
+the island of Panay, where he made many converts. Friar Martin de
+Rada remained in Zebu, and the rest of the clergy accompanied the
+General in the conquest of Manila.
+
+The General Legaspi arrived at Panay, accompanied by the Colonel,
+who, however, immediately returned to his command at Zebu, together
+with his wife, who had just arrived from New Spain with Captain Juan
+Lopez de Aguirre, in the ship San Juan. Legaspi was received by the
+natives of Panay with every demonstration of joy, and they appeared
+more sincere in their professions than those of Zebu. He constructed,
+with all expedition, some works, to enable him to resist the attempts
+of the squadron of Pereyra, and check the proceedings of a swarm of
+pirates, which had issued from Jolo and Borneo in twenty vessels,
+called vireyes, and had captured a Spanish vessel, with the crew. The
+Colonel attacked these pirates with nine proas: he took four vireyes,
+and would have taken the whole, had not seven of his vessels been too
+much astern. Having forwarded the account of this engagement to the
+General, he was now at liberty to assist the inhabitants of Aclan,
+who had sustained considerable injury from the pirates of Mindoro. In
+the month of January, 1570, Juan de Salcedo sailed on this expedition
+with thirty Spaniards and many friendly Indians. He entered the town
+of Mamburao, and, having made himself master of it, compelled the
+inhabitants to ransom themselves with gold; after which he proceeded
+to the isle of Lucban, where the pirates of Mindoro had taken refuge,
+and had protected themselves by some indifferent works; he, with
+ease, forced their intrenchments, attacked them with fire-arms,
+and, as they were unable to resist this mode of warfare, they agreed
+to ransom themselves with gold, as the inhabitants of Mamburao had
+done. Salcedo divided the spoil among his soldiers and the Indians,
+and returned to Panay, to give an account of this expedition.
+
+The General, who was determined above all things on the conquest
+of Manila, named the Colonel as commandant, and sent with him his
+grandson, Juan de Salcedo, with an hundred and twenty Spaniards,
+and many friendly Indians, to accomplish it. They sailed from Panay
+the beginning of May 1570. The Colonel went directly against Manila,
+but Juan de Salcedo turned aside to the country about the lake of
+Bombon, which is now called the Province of Batangas, to treat with
+the natives. He sent the usual peace-offerings, but they answered
+him with their arms. He engaged them, and would have succeeded,
+but received so severe a wound in his leg from an arrow, that he
+was compelled to abandon his enterprise, and follow the Colonel to
+Manila. The Colonel made terms with the Rajah, who was a good old
+man, and whom history calls Raxa Matanda, that is, the old Rajah; he
+had a nephew of the name of Raxa Soliman, who, likewise, made terms
+with the Colonel; but little dependence could be placed on him, as he
+evidently was no friend to the Spaniards, and had, as it was supposed,
+secreted provisions. He was accused, likewise, of exciting the Indians
+to murder the Spaniards, while on shore, which obliged our people to
+behave with great circumspection toward them. One day Raxa Soliman
+even ordered his men to fire upon our shipping, and, after having done
+us considerable damage, he embarked on board a large junk, and left
+the river, firing at us as he passed [17]. The Colonel instantly landed,
+leaving Juan de Salcedo in charge of the ships, and, with eighty men,
+stormed the fort which the Indians had at the mouth of the river, and
+where at present stands the fort of Santiago. He ordered his soldiers
+to attack the guns, and they were so fortunate in their attack,
+as in their first onset to kill the principal artillery officer,
+who appeared to be an European, as he was seen to cross himself
+before he died [18]; the remainder, were by the vigour of the assault,
+compelled to fly towards the town, which they burnt in their retreat,
+that the Spaniards might not profit by their success. Among other
+things, a foundery for cannon was destroyed, and it was supposed
+they had thrown many pieces of artillery into the sea, as only
+twelve, and a few falconets (a piece so called), were found in the
+place. The old Rajah was not a party in this disturbance, as neither
+he nor any of his people were engaged; and his fidelity was proved,
+by his having displayed from his house a white flag, during the time
+the action lasted. The Colonel, fearing that if he remained longer,
+he should encounter the south-west monsoon, and be unable to return,
+retired immediately to Cavite, to do the needful repairs to his ships,
+and in two days sailed for Panay.
+
+On the 23d of June of this year, Captain Juan de la Isla arrived
+with three vessels, in which came the Friar Perrera with two other
+religious, viz. Friar Diego Orduņez, and Friar Diego de Espinar, who
+came to labour in this new vineyard. Despatches were brought by them
+from his Majesty, by which Miguel Lopez de Legaspi was constituted
+President of the islands of the Ladrones, and he was recommended to
+settle the Philippines; at the same time his Majesty bestowed portions
+of lands, with their inhabitants, on all who might be engaged in the
+conquest. With a view to put these orders in execution, Legaspi first
+despatched from Panay, the same Captain Juan de la Isla, with two ships
+to Acapulco, and sailed for Zebu, where he ordered it to be proclaimed,
+that he intended to erect the town which had been built into a
+city, and to give every encouragement to increase the population,
+directing those who wished to settle in it to go before the notary,
+to be enrolled by five hundreds. On New Year's day, 1571, he named
+two ordinary alcaldes, six regidores, a notary, and two alguazils,
+who immediately took the customary oath on entering their office, and
+he strictly enjoined them the discharge of their respective duties. He
+likewise directed that the town, which had till then been called San
+Miguel, should be named the City del Santissimo Nombre de Jesus, in
+memory of the discovery of the sacred child, as before related. He
+settled the manner, in which rewards should be distributed among
+the tributary Indians, who were in the neighbourhood of the city,
+and left them under the care of the treasurer, Guido de Labezares,
+in order that he might have the opportunity of finishing a stone fort,
+which he had ordered to be constructed. All these and many subordinate
+objects, being attained by the end of January, he returned to Panay,
+to attempt from thence the conquest of Manila.
+
+Immediately after the President arrived at Panay, the Colonel,
+attended by all the officers and soldiers, joined him, leaving in
+Masbate the Padre Alba with six men, and in Dumangas Padre Ximenes, in
+charge of the new conquests. The Padre Herrera, with other religious,
+accompanied the General in his expedition against Manila, on which he
+sailed the 15th of April; and in the island of Lutaga he reviewed his
+force, and found they amounted to two hundred and eighty soldiers,
+consisting partly of his own people, of those of the Colonel, of
+Captains Andres de Ybarra, Luis de la Haya, and Juan de Salcedo. He
+passed by the island of Mindoro, and settled the tribute which the
+natives were to pay to the King of Spain. Here he had the opportunity
+of saving a Chinese vessel called a Sampan, from foundering; and
+he received the crew, with that kindness and warmth of feeling,
+so natural to the Spaniards.
+
+The Chinese acknowledged the kindness of the Spaniards, and formed
+a friendly connection with them. The President continued his voyage,
+and entered Cavite, where he waited the arrival of those who had fallen
+astern; meantime he treated with the natives of the place, and received
+them as vassals of the King of Spain. Two days after he arrived, he
+entered with all his squadron into the river of Manila. The Indians,
+thinking the Spaniards had returned, to punish them for the resistance
+they had made to the Colonel, set fire to the town, and with their
+effects fled to Tondo. The President sent the Colonel to bring them
+to terms, who, arriving at their camp, gave them to understand, by
+means of an interpreter, that the Spaniards had not come with the
+intention of doing them any injury. On learning this, some began
+to quench the flames, and others went in search of the old Rajah;
+and Lacandola, the chief of Tondo, immediately went with others to
+wait on Legaspi. He received them with a smiling countenance, and
+told them that he came as a friend, provided they acknowledged the
+King of Spain, as their king and natural lord and master, who would
+receive them under his protection, and relieve their distresses. The
+principal motive, he said, which induced his Majesty to send him there,
+was to propagate the true worship of one all powerful God; that he
+had brought several sacred characters with him for that purpose, and
+shewing them Padre Herrera, said that he was the principal of those,
+who were to be their teachers. They promised to become vassals of the
+King of Spain, and hear the law which they were to be taught; he hinted
+to them that he did not see Rajah Soliman with them: they replied,
+that he dared not appear after what had happened with the Colonel on
+the first expedition; but if he would pardon him, he would immediately
+appear, and promise obedience, as the rest had done. The General not
+only promised to pardon him, but sent him a message to that effect,
+without, however, being able to remove his apprehensions at that time.
+
+But on the 18th of May, Rajah Soliman arrived, accompanied by his
+uncle Rajah Matanda and Lacandola, making many apologies for what
+had passed. The General pardoned and received him as a vassal of
+his Majesty, and as such he was registered by the notary, Hernando
+Riguel. Legaspi immediately commenced his arrangements for founding a
+new city, and directed the Indians to finish the fort they had begun
+in the mouth of the river. Behind this he erected a large building,
+which served as a palace, with a church and convent for the religious,
+and an hundred and twenty smaller houses for the remainder of the
+Spaniards, intending this city to be the seat of government, both
+spiritual and temporal, of the islands. The whole of this, the Indians
+engaged to accomplish with great despatch, but it was found necessary,
+to employ the Spaniards to assist them in it. A good understanding
+being thus established, between the natives of Manila and Tondo and
+the Spaniards, Manila was taken possession of on the day following,
+the 19th of May, 1571, when, in a temporary church, the feast of
+the blessed Virgin Mary was celebrated, who, from that circumstance,
+was named the patroness of the new city.
+
+The peace which Rajah Soliman and Lacandola had made, was, on their
+part, by no means sincere, for the Indians of Macabebe and Hagonoy,
+appearing at the mouth of the harbour of Bancusay, with forty caracoas
+(an Indian vessel), proceeded to the house of Lacandola. These
+men jeered at and reproached the Indians, for submitting with such
+readiness, to such an insignificant number of Spaniards, promising,
+if they were disposed to shake off the yoke, that they should be
+assisted from Tondo and the neighbouring country, and not leave one
+Spaniard alive. The President, supposing those Indians who had arrived,
+had come to solicit peace, sent two Spaniards to assure them that they
+might present themselves to him without fear. The chief of the Indians,
+after listening to these ambassadors, leaped on his feet, and drawing
+and flourishing his cimeter, he said, "The sun gave me life, and I
+must not be disgraced in the eyes of my women, who would detest me,
+if they thought I was capable, of being on friendly terms with the
+Spaniards." With this speech he quitted the house, without waiting
+to go down by the ladder, for, with great boldness, he leaped out of
+the window into his caracoa, calling out to the Spaniards, "I expect
+you in the bay of Bancusay." Legaspi determined upon punishing such
+conduct, and sent against him the Colonel Martin de Goite with eighty
+Spaniards, in some newly constructed small vessels. The Indian chief
+was true to his word, and waited for them where he had said, with his
+squadron. The battle began, and he fought with great valour; but,
+in a short time, being killed by a musket shot, the rest dismayed,
+fled with great precipitation; our people pursued, and made many
+prisoners, among whom were the son of Lacandola, and his nephew,
+by which his deceit and dissimulation were sufficiently manifest;
+the President, however, sent them home, without the punishment they
+merited for their treason. After this engagement, the natives became so
+much afraid of the Spaniards, that many chiefs came to Manila begging
+peace, and offering to become vassals of the king of Spain. By this
+time, the works which had been ordered in Manila were considerably
+advanced, and, on the day of St. John the Baptist, the President,
+Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, founded the city as the metropolis of the
+Philippine Islands, appointing two ordinary alcaldes, twelve regidores,
+an alguazil mayor, and a notary, who all took the customary oaths, to
+discharge the duties of their respective offices with justice. This
+ceremony took place while Philip II. was King of Spain, and Pius
+V. was in the fifth year of his pontificate, the first governor
+being the President, Miguel Lopez de Legaspi. The public square was
+now marked out, with the situation of the convent of San Augustine,
+and the subordinate arrangements were left to the magistracy. Legaspi
+ordered the city to be called Manila, of which his Majesty approved,
+giving it a coat of arms. This city is placed in fourteen degrees
+and a half of north latitude, and is thought to be the antipodes of
+the river Saint Ann, in Brazil, which is in the same latitude in the
+opposite tropic of Capricorn.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+ANNO DOMINI, 1571.
+
+    Of the Government of Miguel Lopez de Legaspi.
+
+
+Manila being founded, and most of the towns of the surrounding
+district, in amity with the Spaniards, the Governor sent the Colonel
+to Pampanga, to reduce that province to the Spanish yoke, but he
+had no sooner arrived at the river Betis, on his way thither, than
+he was compelled to return, without being able to reduce either the
+town of Betis or that of Lubao; for it appeared that Rajah Soliman and
+Lacandola, who had gone with him to serve as interpreters between the
+Indians and him, had conducted themselves treacherously. This fully
+appeared by Lacandola leaving the Colonel, and returning to Manila
+without leave, for which the Governor ordered him to be put in irons,
+and, to increase his punishment, told his relations that he would
+not let him at liberty but at the Colonel's request; even then he did
+not accede to it without confiscating all his artillery, consisting
+of fifteen pieces of cannon, large and small. About this time Rajah
+Matanda fell sick, and requesting to be baptized, a clergyman of
+the name of Juan de Vivero administered this sacrament to him by
+the name of Philip: he died of his disorder, and was buried with
+great solemnity. On the 17th of July, Don Diego Legaspi, a nephew
+of the Governor, arrived; he was sent by Captain Juan de Aguirre to
+the aid of his uncle, having a short time before come to Panay with
+two ships, which the Viceroy of Mexico had sent to these islands as a
+reinforcement. The Governor ordered the Colonel to proceed to Panay,
+and despatch these ships to Manila, and afterwards go to Zebu, and
+bring his family to the capital. Whilst the Colonel was executing this
+commission, Juan de Salcedo was sent to reduce the people of Cainta and
+Taytay, two small towns high up the river Pasig, which had refused to
+acknowledge the Spanish authority, and had strengthened their position
+by some fortifications covering their towns. He carried Cainta by
+assault, with the loss of only two killed and five wounded, but with
+great slaughter on the part of the Indians, upon hearing which, the
+inhabitants of Taytay immediately surrendered. He afterwards marched
+to a town on the borders of the lake Bay, and of the same name, and
+summoned the inhabitants, but they answered him with their arms in
+their hands. He had with him Padre Friar Alonso de Albarado, who had
+accompanied Ruy Lopez de Villalobos in his expedition; had returned
+a second time to Mexico; and again had accompanied the other five
+religious, of the order of San Augustine, to Manila. This venerable
+person the Colonel sent, to assure the Indians, that he did not wish to
+employ his arms against them, and that he had commissioned the Padre
+Friar Alonso, to accommodate matters, requesting them immediately to
+deliver up their town of Bay. This in the end was acceded to, and was
+followed, by the submission of many small towns, on the borders of
+the lake. Juan de Salcedo went further up the country behind them,
+and found the people of Mahayhay, fortified by nature so securely
+on a hill, that they could defend themselves against a great force,
+with no difficulty, by rolling down immense stones. Having, however,
+reconnoitred it, he perceived a path less rugged than the rest,
+and where they seemed more negligent. By this path he surmounted
+the difficulty, and appeared above them, when they were seized
+with such a panic, that they fled precipitately, without making
+any resistance. For two days more, Juan de Salcedo was detained
+in this part of the country, passing through the villages, which,
+however, he found deserted, the inhabitants having taken refuge in the
+mountains. He in consequence returned to Bay, where he had left most of
+his people. It was understood, that in the country of the Camarines,
+there was a town called Paracale, where there were mines of gold. He
+sent back to Manila Padre Albarado, and some of the Spaniards; and
+having a few soldiers only, he encountered a great many difficulties,
+in undertaking the conquest of this town. Many days having elapsed,
+without hearing from them at Manila, the Governor despatched Major
+Antonio Hurtado in search of them, and he found Juan de Salcedo in
+Paracale, with all his people, very much weakened, in consequence of
+the hardships they had been exposed to, and the sickness with which
+they had been attacked. Salcedo returned with Hurtado to Manila, on
+which occasion there were great rejoicings, as he had been supposed
+dead, and the loss of a man so much loved and respected would have
+been severely felt.
+
+About this time the Colonel returned from Zebu, having first subdued
+the province of Pampanga. The Governor now apportioned the conquered
+districts and towns, among the respective officers, who had so well
+earned that reward, reserving to his Majesty the usual tribute
+only. He directed, that the Indians should pay a moderate rent,
+to those new proprietors of land, and the Spaniards were enjoined,
+not to exact any thing above the rent so settled. In a little time
+it was discovered, that the Indians would not pay the tribute; and
+that the Spanish proprietors, had been guilty of many vexatious acts
+against them, which had produced revolts in various places. In Bohol,
+Panay, and in Marinduque, the Indians had killed several Spanish
+factors and soldiers. To prevent these disturbances from spreading,
+the Governor sent Captain Luis de la Haya, to examine into the matter,
+and to punish the aggressors. He executed his commission with such
+prudence, that, without exasperating the Indians, he chastised the
+murderers, and left the towns in complete subordination.
+
+At the beginning of the year 1572, there arrived, with a great deal
+of rich merchandize, those Chinese whom the Spaniards had saved from
+shipwreck, in the island of Mindoro, together with many others of that
+nation, who brought damasks, satins, taffeties, silks, porcelain,
+and other things, with which the foundation of a lucrative commerce
+with Acapulco was laid. These Chinese, whom we call Sangleyes,
+from two Chinese words, hiang, lay, which signifies travelling
+merchants, continue to this day the commerce with Manila, and many
+have settled in these islands, where, however, they have frequently
+been troublesome, as will be seen in the sequel. About the time these
+merchants arrived, the Augustine friars intended to hold their second
+provincial chapter, and the first which had been celebrated at Manila;
+and at this it was determined, to send some of their order to China,
+to establish a religious intercourse between the two nations. The
+Governor agreed to this, and was desirous, at the same time, to send
+an embassy to the Emperor; but the Chinese would not agree to take it
+to China. The Friar Alvarado, however, who was the most desirous of
+the undertaking, began to study the language, that he might be able
+to convert and baptize the Chinese merchants, who seemed disposed
+to settle in Manila; this plan he had adopted in Tondo, where he had
+administered the sacrament to numbers. In this provincial chapter it
+was agreed, that Padre Herrera should be sent a second time to Mexico,
+in order to bring more clerical aid to this province; they likewise
+chose as provincial, the Padre Friar Martin de Rada, and elected a
+capitular of the convent of Manila; they established clergy in Zebu,
+Masbate, Otong, Mindoro, Tondo, Calumpit, and Lubao. Soon after this,
+convents were founded in the districts of Taal, Bay, and Pasig, and
+many visitations were made, by which it was ascertained, that the
+number of the clergy increased so much, that it became necessary,
+to separate the parish priests from the friars.
+
+The greater part of this quarter of the island, being reduced to
+complete obedience, to the King of Spain, and nothing being known of
+the northern part of it, Juan de Salcedo offered to make the discovery,
+at his own risk. He collected men and ships, the Governor allowing
+him forty-five soldiers, with necessary ammunition. He sailed from
+Manila on the 20th of May, 1572; on the third day, he arrived at
+Cape Bolinao, in the province of Zambales, where he found a Chinese
+junk or sampan, and a party of Chinese, who had got possession of a
+chief and some Indians, with an intent to carry them to China. Juan
+de Salcedo re-took them from the Chinese, and gave them their liberty,
+which action so gratified the feelings of the natives, that they became
+immediately vassals of the King of Spain, and solicited to be placed
+on the same footing, as the people of the other districts. Passing
+from thence to Pangasinan, he coasted the whole of that province,
+and that of Ylocos, until he arrived at Cape Boxeador, examining all
+the ports, bays, and landing places, near which his squadron was able
+to approach, and it consisted of many, but very small vessels. He
+was desirous, of preserving a good understanding with the Indians,
+and most of the towns on the coast, received him in a very friendly
+manner, and supplied him with provisions, which he stood in need of;
+but on his entering the rivers and creeks, he found great resistance
+from the inhabitants of the districts bordering on them. He attacked
+them on several occasions, putting them to flight with great ease,
+and sent to them, desiring them to leave the mountains, with a promise
+of his friendship. Some, however, not relying on the promises of the
+Spaniards, could not divest themselves of their apprehensions, while
+others readily came down, submitted, and agreed to pay the tribute. In
+this manner he was proceeding, and had almost subdued these two large
+provinces [19], intending to pass on to Cagayan; but he was opposed by
+his own people, who became weary of the expedition. His second in
+command, Antonio Hurtado, proposed that he should go on, and prosecute
+his original plan, but Juan de Salcedo, although he desired it much,
+thought it better to accede to the representations of his soldiers,
+and they returned by the same route, confirming in their obedience
+the towns which had submitted. On his arrival at Bigan, the natives
+received him with so much cordiality, that he prudently determined
+on the step of founding there a Spanish city, for the purpose of
+controlling the neighbouring country.
+
+Having, with this view, ordered the natives to cut sufficient timber
+to build a fort, and accommodations for those who chose to remain,
+he became desirous of executing the original project, which he had
+abandoned, of passing on to Cagayan. He left in Bigan his second
+in command, with twenty-five soldiers, and, with the seventeen that
+remained, he commenced this arduous undertaking, departing in three
+vessels on the 24th of July. Having passed Cape Boxeador, he entered
+a river where he found a mud village of salt-makers; he desired them
+to call their chiefs, as he wished to be on good terms with them,
+and after many messages they appeared with their Rajah, who was a
+very handsome man, and whiter than the rest of the Indians. Juan de
+Salcedo came up to him with open arms, intending to embrace him; but
+the barbarian, unaccustomed to such a mode of salutation, believing
+that he wanted to catch him, took to his heels and fled, and on
+no entreaty would he be prevailed on, to leave the mountains. Our
+people, therefore, hoisted their sails, and arrived at the river of
+Cagayan. They sailed up this river a considerable way, and found a
+populous district; but they dared not attempt any hostility against
+the inhabitants, as they were so few in number in comparison to
+the natives, and they resolved to return to Manila by that side of
+the island, in order completely to ascertain the whole extent of
+Luzon. They proceeded about one hundred leagues, without discovering
+any population, or any thing but a rocky shore. They coasted it
+until they arrived at a bay, which Juan de Salcedo thought had been
+named Amanto, having been there when he went to Paracale. In this,
+however, he was mistaken, but as that bay was very near, he arrived
+in a few days at it. Here he went on shore; and travelled on till
+he came to the towns on the lake, where he embarked on board a small
+boat with only four rowers. The boat was on the point of foundering
+during the passage, and the Indians deserting her by swimming away,
+he would inevitably have been lost, had not a proa, with some friendly
+Indians, passing by, immediately relieved him. Arriving at Manila, he
+received the melancholy intelligence of the death of his grandfather,
+on the 20th of August, 1572, accelerated much by the vexatious and
+multifarious duties of his office. He was interred in the church of
+the Augustines, with the magnificence due to his character and station.
+
+By the death of Legaspi, the treasurer, Guido de Labezares became
+governor ad interim, by a decree of the Royal Audience of Mexico,
+and which decree was found among the papers of the deceased. A few
+days after Labezares had succeeded to the government, Manila suffered
+severely from a hurricane, which destroyed almost all the houses,
+these being built of canes, and drove back the two ships which
+had been sent to Acapulco, but which, after the storm subsided,
+sailed again for New Spain, carrying accounts of the death of
+Legaspi. The new Governor sent Colonel Martin de Goite, to reduce
+the revolted natives of Ylocos, which was done with little trouble,
+and he brought away the tribute of the king in gold, compelling them
+to ransom themselves, for a sum far exceeding that amount. This he
+was enabled so easily to do, by the exertions of Juan de Salcedo,
+who, at his own cost, had subdued nearly all this province, and who,
+as the Colonel represented, ought to be allowed to reap the fruits
+of his labours; but Guido de Labezares was prejudiced against him,
+and would not employ him until he was undeceived as to his merits. He
+then sent him to the conquest of the Camarines, which he effected with
+ease, and founded near the river of Vicol a Spanish city, calling it
+Santiago de Libon. He appointed as chief judge Captain Pedro de Chaves,
+with eighty soldiers. While Juan de Salcedo was making these conquests,
+the governor ad interim was exploring the whole of the Bisayas: he
+attempted to restrain within proper bounds the avarice of the factors,
+but it was without effect, as the moment he was gone they returned to
+their old practices. Meanwhile a ship from Acapulco arrived with three
+Augustine friars, men who were much required, not only for the purpose,
+of converting to the Christian religion, the natives of the conquered
+countries, but likewise to preserve the tranquillity of the different
+towns, and which could not be effected solely by force of arms.
+
+When the Governor ad interim returned to Manila, he sent an embassy
+to the Rajah of Borneo, but without effect, as he had no wish to
+be on terms with the Spaniards. He likewise divided the province
+of Ylocos between the Colonel and Juan de Salcedo, who had been
+employed in that expedition. In the beginning of the year 1574, Juan
+de Salcedo sailed to take possession of his portion; he founded in
+the district of Bigan the city Fernandina, where he built a house for
+himself. While he was accomplishing this object, a large squadron of
+vessels passed by, which had taken a galeot and twenty men he had sent
+in search of provisions; and presuming that their intention was to
+attack him, he began to fortify the town, but seeing they prosecuted
+their route, he took it for granted they were going against Manila;
+and having collected together all the Spaniards he had in Ylocos,
+he embarked for the capital to the assistance of the Governor. This
+was the famous expedition of Limahon, by which Manila was nearly lost,
+but a short time after its foundation.
+
+Limahon was a pirate of such renown, that the Emperor of China had
+sent against him three different squadrons, and he was in fact so
+pressed on all sides by this force, that having captured a Chinese
+junk coming from Manila, who informed him of the new conquests
+by the Spaniards, he determined to sail for this country, and be
+crowned King of these islands, in order to be secure, by this means,
+from the Emperor's attacks. He arrived at the island of Corregidor,
+which is in the mouth of the bay, the 29th of November 1574, with
+sixty-two junks, in which he brought one thousand five hundred women,
+two thousand soldiers, and a great many seamen, sufficient artillery,
+muskets, and swords. The Spaniards had no intimation of his arrival
+at Corregidor, and the same night his second in command, who was a
+Japanese of the name of Sioco, landed with six hundred men, with which
+he entered, and attempted to take possession of Manila. In the attempt
+to land his men he lost three boats, which were swamped by the surf;
+but he effected his object, without being at all discovered by our
+people. He first landed at Paraņaque, supposing it to be Manila, but
+soon finding out his mistake, he began his march to it by the beach,
+his vessels following him, and at day-break he arrived at Manila, where
+he was discovered by the Indians. They made all haste to the Colonel,
+who lived close to the royal gate, where the college of St. Joseph
+now stands, and informed him, that there was an immense body of Moors
+of Borneo coming by the sea side. The Colonel, however, as he had no
+reason to conclude, that the Borneans considered themselves, in direct
+hostility with the Spaniards, gave no credit to it, till he saw the
+Chinese enter by the gate, close to his house. Three soldiers, who
+were placed as guards there, attempted to resist them, but they were
+soon overpowered by multitudes, and one only escaped, severely wounded.
+
+The wife of the Colonel looking out of the window, thought they were
+Indians come against them, and called out, "Here the dogs come, we
+are all dead." The Portuguese interpreter, who accompanied Sioco,
+enraged at this reproachful epithet of the lady, ordered the house
+to be set on fire. The Colonel, who was ill, immediately on this got
+up, put on his armour, and unsheathing his sword, leapt out of the
+window in the midst of his enemies, who received him on their swords,
+and cut him to pieces. They killed the wife of a common soldier, whom
+they found in the house, and left for dead Dona Lucia Corral, the wife
+of the Colonel, but she afterwards recovered from her wounds. Sioco
+pursuing his march, encountered some Spaniards who were on their way
+to assist the Governor, and seeing that there were few opposed to
+him, he formed his men into a half moon, and charged the centre of
+the Spaniards. The engagement was long doubtful, when eight soldiers
+being killed, the rest must have shared their fate, had they not been
+joined by twenty more, under the command of Captain Alonso Velasquez,
+the aid-de-camp of General Amador de Arriaran, and Gaspar Ramirez,
+aid-de-camp of the Colonel, who charged the Chinese so furiously,
+that Sioco was obliged to retire to his boats and join Limahon, who had
+anchored in Cavite. Sioco justified his ill success in this action, by
+saying, that the people were tired by their long march along the beach,
+which excuse Limahon admitted, and determined on another assault on
+the third day. This affair having happened on St. Andrew's day, the
+Spaniards attributed it to the intercession of that Saint, that they
+had not all fallen into the hands of the Chinese, and expressed their
+gratitude, by choosing him patron of Manila, instituting an annual
+solemn feast on the occasion. Limahon's delay of the second attack,
+was the means of saving all, as it gave time to Juan de Salcedo, to
+join with his force from Ylocos. He arrived in the bay, in the night
+of the same day of St. Andrew, and understanding that Limahon was in
+Cavite, he did not attempt to enter there, but landed on the Pampanga
+side of the bay. The day following, in the evening, he met with two
+Indians, who had escaped from the engagement, and informed him of all
+that had happened; he immediately made sail, and entered Manila that
+night. When he was at the mouth of the river, he ordered the trumpets
+to be sounded, and placed a great number of lights about his ship,
+to induce the enemy to believe, the approach of considerable relief
+to the Spaniards, who saluted him in form, all of which caused great
+alarm to the Chinese. The Governor ad interim, was so pleased with
+the diligence of Juan de Salcedo, that he appointed him Colonel,
+in the room of Martin de Goite.
+
+The same night, Limahon weighed anchor from Cavite, and pressed on to
+Manila, and Sioco disembarked the following morning, after having sworn
+by an oath to his General, that he would either die in the attempt,
+or that day be in possession of the house of the Governor. He directed
+his march to the fort, which our people had constructed of timber,
+faggots, and barrels of earth, and he divided his troops into three
+bodies. He ordered one to march down, through the principal street of
+the city, to the square, where he expected the Spaniards would sally
+out of the fort, and engage them; and in this expectation, he sent
+another body, by the side of the river round the fort, and the third,
+which he commanded himself, he led along the beach. The division which
+had been ordered down the principal street, arrived in the square,
+and in order to induce the Spaniards to sally from the fort, they
+set fire to the houses. Fortunately the Spaniards did not quit the
+fort, though they saw their houses burning, but contented themselves
+with playing their artillery upon the Chinese, doing a great deal
+of mischief. Sioco, finding that it was not possible, to draw the
+Spaniards from their fortifications, and having lost many of his men,
+ordered the division that had arrived at the square, to assault the
+fort, at the same time leading on his own. Such was the multitude of
+the Chinese, against so few on our part, that the palisade was forced,
+and they entered through a part, which Ensign Sancho Ortez defended,
+and in which he was killed, performing prodigies of valour. Immediately
+the Governor heard of this, he repaired to the fort, attended by the
+Colonel; they cut their way through the Chinese, and having entered it,
+repulsed the invaders with great loss. The Chinese, panic struck at
+this, retiring by degrees towards the shore, the Spaniards followed
+them close, making great slaughter among them; but, to our great
+misfortune, our people suddenly abandoned their advantage, at the
+sight of Limahon's squadron, which had just entered the river, but
+had not been able hitherto, to take part in the action.
+
+Limahon observing this, ordered his ships off, in order that his
+men might become desperate, on finding themselves deprived of all
+protection from him: the contrary effect, however, was produced by
+it, as they were seized with such a panic, that they could not face
+their enemies, but formed themselves on the shore, and received the
+fire of our artillery, which was discharged repeatedly upon them,
+determined rather to wait death with firmness, than return into the
+engagement. In this they would have persisted, had not Limahon arrived
+with four hundred fresh men. As all was not lost, he ordered some of
+his people to burn a ship and galley, which, with a few other small
+vessels, were drawn up on the beach, and which, when they had destroyed
+the houses, they had forgot to burn with the rest, and he made a false
+attack on the fort, in order to compel the Spaniards to sally out, to
+hinder the operation. The Colonel guessed his intention: he, however,
+sallied out with fifty men, against those only who were proceeding
+to pillage the city, and put them to flight precipitately. Limahon
+seeing that his plan had not succeeded, having lost many men,
+and finding that his principal captain, Sioco, had been killed,
+he embarked his troops, and, under favour of the night, returned
+to the river Paraņaque, where he killed all the Indians, he found
+assembled in any hostile way, and, before day-break, he set sail,
+and did not bring to, until he came to the province of Pangasinan;
+where he entered into an amicable arrangement with the chief, forming
+an encampment, and fortifying it with a strong palisado on an inlet of
+the river Lingayen. The Governor was determined to follow him into the
+province, but he found it necessary first to restore the fortifications
+of the city, and likewise to quell a sedition of the Indians, who,
+on this occasion, shewed how little they could be depended upon.
+
+The natives of Manila, whilst the Spaniards were engaging the Chinese,
+robbed their houses and maltreated their slaves; those of Tondo killed
+some Sachristans belonging to a convent, and they would have done the
+same with the clergy, but that they could not have concealed it. Those
+of the island of Mindoro, however, imprisoned the friars, and took them
+to the mountains, where they were not bold enough to murder them, till
+they saw how the action with Limahon would terminate, and how things
+would be adjusted. Rajah Soliman and Lacandola, the chief of Manila
+and Tondo, apprehensive that the Governor would punish them for this
+ill conduct, retired to Navotas, where they fomented a rebellion. In
+order to quell this the Colonel, accompanied by Friar Marin, set out
+immediately, and when Lacandola understood they had arrived, he sent
+to them to request the friar would repair to a station about three
+leagues distant, where all the chiefs were assembled, and where they
+were desirous of treating of a reconciliation with the Spaniards. The
+friar Marin determined to proceed to the station which they mentioned,
+and there he met all the chiefs, who received him with much joy,
+but they could not be persuaded to see the Colonel. Lacandola alone
+abandoned his fears, in consequence of the promise the friar had made
+him, and left Navotas with an intention to present himself, but he
+found that Juan de Salcedo had returned, and directed his way to his
+house. Salcedo encountered two ranks of armed men on the banks of the
+river, near the house of Lacandola; he boldly went up to them, and
+took away their lances and arrows; when, Lacandola arriving, he said,
+"What is the meaning of this? why are these men armed?" The Indian made
+many excuses, and promised to wait on the Governor the day following,
+in company with the friar Marin. The Governor admitted the excuses,
+and presented Lacandola with a silk mantle and a gold chain. Won over
+by this treatment, Rajah Soliman, in four days, presented himself to
+the Governor, and the sedition was thus terminated. Captain Rivera
+subdued the people of Mindoro with the same facility.
+
+The Governor being relieved from the anxiety, which the restlessness
+of the Indians had occasioned, determined to follow Limahon to
+Pangasinan. He found, on mustering, that the soldiers in Manila
+amounted to two hundred, and about two hundred more were scattered
+through the provinces of Bisayas and Camarines; from among these
+he manned the squadron, with two hundred and fifty Spaniards, and
+he added one thousand five hundred friendly Indians. On the 22d of
+March 1575, the Colonel sailed with this armament to Pangasinan,
+and, on the 29th of the same month, in the night, arrived in the
+river Lingayen. The day following he sent Captain Pedro de Chaves to
+take possession of the ships belonging to the corsair, and Captain
+Gabriel de Rivera to reconnoitre his fortifications. Chaves executed
+his commission with ease, as the Chinese fled from their ships, the
+moment he boarded them. Rivera attacked the works, firing upon them,
+and making a dreadful carnage. Limahon, observing what passed, ordered
+his men under cover of a grove of date trees, where they might defend
+themselves more easily. Captain Chaves sent assistance to Rivera,
+and a most sanguinary engagement commenced. Rivera at last routed
+the Chinese, compelling them to retire to their fort, which he would
+have scaled, but, finding the palisade too lofty, he had recourse
+to the expedient of ordering his men to rush in a body against it,
+formed as it was of date trees driven into the earth. This they did
+with such force, that they broke through, opened the gate, and entered
+the fort. The Chinese then retired within the second palisade, which
+was the quarter of Limahon. The Spaniards ought to have attacked the
+inner fort, before the Chinese had recovered from their panic; but
+their avarice prevailed, and they dispersed themselves through the
+different houses, which had been built within the first palisade,
+plundering them, without attempting any thing else. Limahon was
+not slow in taking advantage of this error of the Spaniards, and,
+attacking them with four hundred men, he drove them out of the works
+with great loss, thus paying dearly for the indulgence of their habits
+of plunder. Ashamed of this defeat, our people returned a second time
+to the assault, when they retook the first line of works, but being
+unable to force the inner one, they burnt the houses of the Chinese,
+and going on board their boats, they retired to where Pedro de Chaves
+was posted. Here, finding one of the junks unserviceable, she was
+set fire to, and a retreat of the whole body was made good, to the
+post where the Colonel was stationed, with the rest of the armament.
+
+Juan de Salcedo, convinced of the difficulty of taking the fort by
+storm, and desirous of being as sparing as possible, of the lives of
+his Spaniards, considering the difficulties they had to encounter,
+determined on attempting to reduce Limahon by fair means. Having in
+his army a Chinese who had been established in Manila, he ordered
+him to write to Limahon; but this letter having no effect, he wrote a
+second to the same purpose. Limahon replied, that he was considered a
+savage tiger, whom all were desirous of catching; but he assured them,
+that he should either kill them, or they him. The Chinese, therefore,
+thus declining every amicable proposal, the Colonel resolved to
+throw up works near to their works, but at such a distance as to
+be without the range of the enemy's artillery. Upon his beginning
+accordingly to pitch his camp, however, a shot was fired which passed
+close to him, and wounded his aid-de-camp in the leg, affording him a
+convincing proof that their artillery could reach all over the small
+island. It was, therefore, deemed necessary to remove the camp to
+another position, and to blockade the mouth of the river to prevent
+Limahon from escaping, until the Governor of Manila should determine,
+whether he would have the works taken by assault, or that, by means of
+a blockade, the Chinese should be starved into submission. Upon this
+retreat of the Spaniards, Limahon collected the remaining fragments of
+the junks, which had been burnt, and with these built some boats within
+the fort. Four months passed in this manner, when, finding he had no
+other resource, Limahon opened a canal to the river, and, in the night,
+escaped with all his people in the small vessels he had constructed. To
+deceive the Spaniards, and conquer the difficulties opposed to him in
+the mouth of the river, he set fire to a few small vessels filled with
+combustibles, and, ordering a false attack to be made on the guard,
+he, in the meantime, escaped; and, without any obstruction, on the
+3d of August 1575, prosecuted his voyage. During these transactions
+between Juan de Salcedo and Limahon, the Augustine friars held a
+chapter, and appointed priests in the towns of Candaba and Macabebe,
+in the province of Pampanga, in Bizan, in the province of Ylocos, and
+in the island of Negros. They were not satisfied with the innumerable
+converts, they made in these islands, but they became desirous of
+attempting the spiritual conquest of the empire of China. There was
+at that time in Manila, a Chinese of the name of Aumon, who had been
+sent by the viceroy of Fouquien, in search of Limahon, to promise him
+pardon, on the part of the Emperor of China, if he would cease his
+depredations. This Chinese had been to Pangasinan, and told Juan de
+Salcedo, that he wished to see the pirate; but as Salcedo distrusted
+the nature of his mission, Aumon deemed it prudent to return to Manila,
+where he paid his court so well to the Governor, that he delivered
+him up fifty captives which had been taken from Limahon. Aumon was now
+desirous of returning to China, and the Augustine friars conceived this
+would be a good opportunity, to attempt an establishment there. With
+this view they endeavoured to persuade him, to take two friars under
+his protection, which request the Governor seconded; and, as the news
+of Salcedo's success against Limahon had, by this time, reached them,
+Aumon determined to comply with the request. The friars Martin de
+Rada, and Geronimo Marin, were nominated for this undertaking, and,
+at the same time, as ambassadors from the Governor, were the bearers
+of a letter to the Viceroy of Fouquien, and another to the Emperor,
+which they were ordered to deliver to the Viceroy, as their directions
+were not to proceed beyond that point. But as it was intended,
+that these religious should remain in the province of Fouquien, to
+propagate the Christian faith, two Spaniards were sent to bring back
+the answer to the embassy. They left Manila on the 2d of July 1575,
+and before they returned, the new Governor of these islands arrived.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1575.
+
+    Of the Administration of Don Francisco La Sande, second Governor
+    of Manila.
+
+
+Doctor Don Francisco La Sande, born at Caceres in Estremadura,
+and Oidor of Mexico, took possession of this government on the
+24th of August 1575. He instituted an inquiry into the conduct of
+his predecessor, and acquitted him of any misapplication of his
+authority. At the commencement of La Sande's government, the embassy
+returned from China, and proved to have had a favourable issue,
+as the Viceroy of Fouquien received them with great respect; and
+although he could not permit the friars to remain in the province,
+as he had no orders to that effect, he forwarded the letter, which the
+Governor of Manila had written to the Emperor of China, contributing
+all in his power to second his views: and this fully appeared by the
+answer, which the Chinese brought in the month of February, the year
+following, by which the Emperor appointed one port in his dominions,
+for commercial intercourse with the Spaniards. The Chinese brought
+considerable presents, which they would not deliver to the actual
+Governor, but to Guido de Labexares, who, as Governor ad interim,
+had despatched the embassy. This affront Don Francisco La Sande felt
+so severely, that he behaved to them with great coolness, and made
+them no presents when they returned. The unhandsome conduct of the
+Governor, frustrated those expectations, which had been raised by
+the defeat of Limahon, and the subsequent mission; by making a most
+unfavourable impression on the minds of the Chinese, who discharged
+their whole vengeance, on the heads of the two Augustine friars. They
+landed them in the province of Zambales, scourged them most cruelly,
+murdered, before their eyes, their interpreter and slaves, and left
+them bound fast to trees; in which situation they must have perished,
+had not, providentially, Morones been passing that way, who released
+them, and cured their wounds.
+
+This year, 1576, was unpropitious to the Spaniards in the Philippines;
+for, independent of this disgrace, they had the misfortune to lose
+Juan de Salcedo, who died on the 11th of March, and who had been a
+second Pizarro, or Cortes, in this conquest. He was seized with a
+fever while in Ylocos, and when in that state, visiting a mine in his
+domains, he drank some cold water, which operated so powerfully on the
+intestines, that he died in three hours. On the island of Catanduanes,
+likewise, a party of Augustine missionaries was shipwrecked: this
+was a public loss, and most severely felt, as, without the labours
+of the religious, the military exploits of the Spaniards, would have
+been of little avail, in securing the subjection of these islands.
+
+This loss was repaired the following year, by the arrival of some more
+friars, and seventeen Franciscans, whom the Augustines received in
+their convents, and assigning to them the ecclesiastical authority
+over a number of towns, the Franciscans began their labours with
+indefatigable zeal.
+
+About this time, Queen Elizabeth of England, sent the famous Drake with
+a considerable squadron, for the purpose of subduing the Moluccas. In
+passing the Straits of Magellan, he lost several of his ships;
+but he pursued his course in his own ship, committing many acts of
+hostility on the voyage, and giving a name to several islands which
+he discovered, such as St. Bartholomew, St. James, and New Albion,
+a large island, where he was detained six weeks. Arriving at Tidore,
+he began to gather cloves, without permission from the King of the
+island, at which the latter took great offence; but Drake having
+made him presents, he stipulated for the assistance of their arms,
+in case he should require it, permitting the English to establish
+factories for collecting cloves and nutmegs, and, in token of his
+amity, sent a most superb ring to the Queen of England. Richly laden
+with spices and Chinese merchandize, which he had captured in several
+of our vessels, on their voyage to New Spain, Drake proceeded on his
+return to England, where, after a variety of disasters, he arrived,
+filling all Europe with admiration of the valuable nature of his
+cargo. That strangers might not, by such means, acquire a footing in
+the Moluccas and neighbouring islands, the Governor sent an expedition
+against the island of Borneo, which, by the following circumstances,
+became a matter of easy conquest. Sirela, King of Borneo, had come to
+Manila, to solicit the assistance of the Spaniards, in the recovery of
+his kingdom, of which he had been unjustly deprived by his brother;
+and he promised, in the event of his success, that the whole of this
+large island, should become tributary to Spain. Don Francisco La Sande,
+conceiving this a most desirable object, and that it would necessarily
+lead to the conquest of all the Archipelago of Maluco, determined to go
+in person, that he might not lose the favourable opportunity, which now
+presented itself, by replacing Sirela in the possession of his kingdom.
+
+He sailed from Manila in thirty vessels, with a large body of Spaniards
+and friendly Indians, and arrived safely at Borneo. Having entered
+the river, he proceeded along it, until he arrived at the residence
+of the usurper, upon which he immediately directed his artillery. The
+King, however, with his troops, gallantly attacked the Spaniards,
+but in a short time, fled in great disorder, and took refuge in the
+mountains. The Governor placed his deposed brother on the throne, and
+returned to Manila, where he planned several other expeditions. He sent
+a squadron to Jolo and Mindanao, which reduced these two islands,
+and compelled them to pay the customary tribute to the King of
+Spain; but from the great distance they were at from Manila, and
+the very limited number of clergy then in the seat of government,
+a sufficiency could not be spared, for the purpose of converting the
+natives to Christianity, during the short time these islands were
+held. He completed the conquest of the province of Camarines by means
+of Captain Chaves, who founded the city of Nueva Caceres, close to the
+town of Naga. The Augustine friars began their spiritual conquest,
+but finding their number unequal to the task, of duly attending the
+undertaking, they called in to their assistance the Franciscans,
+to whom eventually they ceded this district.
+
+Towards the close of La Lande's government, an unpleasant disagreement
+arose between the clergy and laity. The factors had introduced into
+their respective districts, several abuses, which the clergy would
+not countenance. Certain services were required of the Indians, beyond
+the stipulated rents, which were extremely vexatious, and which little
+accorded with the Christian character. The friars began by preaching
+against these abuses, but this had little effect, and in the end,
+so many complaints were made, that it reached the ears of the King
+(Philip the Second), who issued an order, in which he reproved the
+conduct of the factors, and enjoined them, to pay strict obedience to
+the instructions they had received, to confine their imposts to the
+stipulated rents alone. The Governor gave every aid to the order of
+his Majesty, making regulations, by which the Indians might be secured
+against such encroachments in future. This, in some respect, abated
+the gathering storm, but tranquillity was never completely restored, as
+the avarice of the factors set at defiance all laws, human and divine.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1580.
+
+    The Administration of Don Ronquillo de Penalosa, third Governor
+    of Manila.
+
+
+In April 1580, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Penalosa arrived at the
+port of Cavite, as Governor of Manila. He was a nephew of the famous
+Judge Ronquillo, who hanged the Bishop of Zamora. He brought to his
+predecessor, the appointment of Oidor of Mexico, with orders for
+him to sail by the first ship, destined for Acapulco. On his taking
+possession of his government, his first step was, to mark out the
+Chinese quarter of the town, under the guns of the fort of Santiago,
+on the other side of the river. He sent Captain Rivera to Borneo,
+again to re-establish on his throne the legitimate King Sirela,
+who had a second time been deprived of it by his brother, with the
+assistance of a Portuguese Captain, of the name of Brito. Rivera
+executed his commission without delay, and returned to Manila, after
+having placed Sirela in peaceable possession of his kingdom. This was
+judged to be the fittest opportunity, for bringing the Moluccas under
+the Spanish dominion, and the Governor began to make preparations for
+the enterprize, for, in addition to the customary enmity between the
+courts of Portugal and Castile, he had received positive instructions
+from Philip the Second, to effect this object. Circumstances, however,
+compelled him to postpone it till the year following, as several
+matters of consequence, in these islands, required his presence,
+particularly in the province of Cagayan, where a Japanese pirate had
+established himself, with a great many followers and vessels. Pablo
+Carrion dislodged the Japanese, but not without great loss on the
+side of the Spaniards, as the former, rather than be taken prisoners,
+preferred dying bravely, with arms in their hands. The pirate thus
+dislodged, the Governor founded the city of Nueva Segovia, close to
+the Indian town of Lalo, and the city of Arivalo, in the island of
+Panay, in memory of his native province.
+
+The year following, 1582, an expedition sailed to the Moluccas,
+commanded by Don Sebastian Ronquillo, a nephew of the Governor, who
+took with him Pablo de Lima, married to a niece of the King of Tidore,
+and who, in her right, laid claim to several towns, of which she had
+been unjustly deprived by the King of Ternate. De Lima was likewise
+appointed Governor of Ternate, when it should be subdued by the
+Spaniards, and all these considerations contributed, to induce him to
+give every aid to this expedition. The squadron arrived at the island
+of Motiel, and making an easy conquest of it, the natives recognized
+Pablo de Lima as their chief. From this island, the Spaniards proceeded
+on their voyage to Ternate, where the Indians seemed determined,
+to throw every impediment in the way of their disembarkation; but
+the resistance was of short duration, as the Spaniards contrived to
+draw them into the interior, and to plant their artillery against
+the town, without which expedient nothing could have been done. They
+laid regular siege to the town, and were on the point of taking it,
+when a disorder in the intestines began to rage among them, which
+occasioned such mortality, that they were compelled to break up their
+enterprize, and return to the Philippines. During these transactions
+in Ternate, the Christians in Manila, found out new objects for mutual
+hostility. Besides the provinces which I have mentioned, which the
+Augustine friars had been the means of reducing to obedience, they
+had distributed priests in Pangasinan, in Cagayan, and in the two
+provinces of Misames and Caraga, in the island of Mindanao, which are
+the only two in this large island, acknowledging subjection to the
+Spaniards. The factor of Mindanao, whose name was Blas de la Serna,
+treated the Indians with great severity, and lived a scandalous life,
+highly prejudicial to the cause of Christianity.
+
+The friar whom the Augustines had placed there, admonished him
+repeatedly to alter his course of life; but as his conduct became
+more reprehensible every day, the friar, unable to bear it longer,
+was under the necessity of excommunicating him. The factor, in revenge
+for (as he termed it) his impudence, publicly beat him. At this time
+the Bishop of Manila was Don Fr. Domingo de Salazar, who had arrived
+at Manila in March, 1581, with two Jesuits, who were the first of
+the order in these islands. On the 21st of December, he erected the
+church into a cathedral, appointing proper prebends and dignitaries,
+and forming municipal authorities for its due government. This
+nobleman was highly attentive to the rights of the clergy. He took
+up the affair with the factor very warmly, and did not relax in his
+exertions, until he saw him at Manila undergo the punishment, imposed
+on him by the sentence of the church, and which he had so well merited.
+
+The whole body of factors being alarmed, and fearing this would be
+much to their prejudice, persuaded the Governor, to withdraw from the
+clergy, the Indians who had been given to them for their own service,
+and that of the church. The Spaniards well inclined to the factors,
+seconded this advice, and they, in conjunction, commenced a cruel
+persecution against the Augustine and Franciscan friars. But Pedro de
+Chaves, Amador de Arriaran, Juan de Morenos, Antonio Savedra, Miguel
+de Lorca, Francisco de la Cueba, Esteban Rodrigueze de Figueroa,
+and other factors, who had seen, of how much importance the friars
+were, in the conquest and retention of these islands, came over to
+their party, and defended them against the attack thus made on them,
+proving satisfactorily, that without the assistance of the clergy,
+the factors would never have received even their rents.
+
+The Governor, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, was deeply afflicted at those
+disputes, so much at variance with his character, and with the anxiety
+of his views, for the happiness and prosperity of these islands. His
+whole mind, indeed, was occupied in the consideration, of what might
+contribute to these ends, and to the aggrandizement of the Spanish
+name; but unhappily persuading himself, that his honour was committed
+by these dissensions, he became affected by a deep melancholy,
+to which he was a prey during six months, and to which he fell a
+sacrifice in the month of March, 1583, before he completed his third
+year as Governor. He was interred in the church of St. Augustine,
+and to do him honour, more tapers than usual being burnt, the roof
+of the church was set on fire, which in a few hours communicated
+so generally, that the greater part of the city was destroyed, with
+immense loss of lives and property.
+
+By the death of Don Gonzalo, his kinsman, Don Diego Ronquillo,
+succeeded as Governor ad interim, being nominated as such in the
+royal order. The new Governor directed all his attention, to the
+rebuilding of the city, assisting personally in the public works,
+and paying particular attention, to the restoration of the houses,
+belonging to the inhabitants. Such diligence was used, that in a short
+time, the city was completely re-established. Many of the inhabitants,
+lost almost all their property in this fire; and the disaster, though
+of sufficient magnitude, was swelled into a most dreadful picture,
+by the ship going to Acapulco, but which had been forced by stress
+of weather into China. It is inconceivable, in what consternation,
+the inhabitants of the islands in the neighbourhood of Manila,
+arrived to their assistance. Don Diego Ronquillo immediately sent
+to China the factor of the royal works, Juan Bautista Roman, with
+orders to chastise those, who had been the cause of spreading this
+report, and to despatch, at any expense, a ship to New Spain, with a
+true statement of the extent of the mischief. The factor performed
+his commission with such efficacy, that the ship he despatched,
+returned the year following from Acapulco, in company with another;
+and in these ships came the new Governor and the Royal Audience. The
+government of Don Diego had lasted only one year, but, though short,
+it was of great importance to the settlement.
+
+He reduced to obedience in the island of Layte, and the province of
+Pangasinan, some towns which refused to pay the usual tribute, and he
+effectually suppressed symptoms of sedition in the other provinces,
+and which took their rise in the ill treatment of the factors. The
+factors entertained the idea, that the Indians whom they had found on
+their lands, ought to be considered in the light of slaves in every
+respect, and compelled them to work, appropriating all the wages of
+their labour to their own use, by which means they enjoyed all the
+luxuries of life, and even accumulated fortunes. To such a height had
+these abuses been raised, that a reform was absolutely necessary. The
+Governor bestowed particular attention on this subject, punishing
+those who were culpable, and watching over the general good. The result
+of this was, that many Indians who before had fled to the mountains,
+returned to the towns, and paid the tribute settled by the government,
+either in silver, or in the produce of the land they cultivated. By
+these desirable arrangements, the royal revenue was improved, and
+the interest of the factors so much injured by their own avarice,
+that from hence arose the proverb, "Avarice bursts the sack."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1584.
+
+    The Administration of Don Santiago de Vera, fourth Governor of
+    Manila.
+
+
+The Governor, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, had sent to Madrid Captain
+Gabriel Rivera, to solicit several objects, necessary to the general
+welfare of these islands, and in particular, that a Royal Audience
+should be established there, as it was extremely disadvantageous and
+embarrassing, to be obliged to have recourse to that of Mexico.
+
+The King granted this request, and sent Don Santiago de Vera, of
+Alcala de Henares, as Governor and President of the Royal Audience; and
+Don Melchor de Avalos, and Don Pedro de Rosas, as oidores of it. The
+third oidor, Don Antonio Rivera, arrived two years afterwards. Don
+Gaspar de Ayala was nominated fiscal. Don Santiago took possession of
+his government May, 1584, and immediately formed the Royal Audience,
+bearing the royal signet with much ostentation, under a canopy, from
+the convent of St. Augustine, to the palace. The Chancellor was Gabriel
+de Rivera, who arrived this year, with the title of Mariscal of the
+lake of Bombon. Immediately that Don Santiago took possession of his
+government, he put in force the orders which he had received from
+the King, to chastise those factors, who had abused the authority,
+they derived from the possession of the lands granted them. He
+began, by dispossessing Bartoleme de Ledesma, factor of Abuyo, and
+others the most culpable, punishing the rest in proportion to their
+irregularities, after full conviction of their delinquency.
+
+In the following year, 1585, he sent Juan de Morones and Pablo de
+Lima, with a powerful squadron, to reduce the Moluccas under the
+Spanish dominion, but it returned to Manila with similar disgrace
+to the preceding one, without being able to take possession of the
+fortifications of Ternate. The Governor was much chagrined at the
+ill success of this expedition, and was desirous of repeating the
+attempt, conformable to the positive instructions received from
+the King to that effect; but he was not able to execute it, as the
+troops from New Spain had not arrived, and, independent of this,
+the insurrections of the Indians were of too formidable a nature,
+for they lost no opportunity which presented itself of breaking the
+yoke of the Spaniards. Those of Pampangos and Manila entered into a
+conspiracy with the Moors of Borneo, who had ostensibly come there
+for the purpose of traffic. They formed the plan of traitorously
+entering the town in the night, setting fire to it, and killing in
+the confusion all the Spaniards. This conspiracy was discovered by
+a female Indian, married to a Spanish soldier. The Governor checked
+it in its commencement, imprisoning many, and severely punishing
+others by way of example. The islands of Samar, Ybabao, and Leyte,
+were likewise far from being in a state of tranquillity, and the
+factor of Dagami, a town of Leyte, had nearly lost his life by the
+Indians, in the collection of the tribute paid in wax, and which
+he had attempted to levy by a measure, containing double the usual
+quantity. This compelled him to fly for safety to the mountains, and
+he passed from thence in a boat to the island of Zebu. The Governor
+sent Captain Lorenzo de la Mota to quell these disturbances, which
+he soon did by promising to punish the delinquent.
+
+Among the calamities which happened during this government, the
+loss of the ship Santa Anna was not the least; she was on her way,
+richly laden, to Acapulco, and was taken by the English. Cavendish,
+an English pirate, emulous of the fame of Drake, having equipped five
+ships, with the assistance of Queen Elizabeth, took his departure
+for this quarter of the world; and having committed many acts of
+hostility on the coasts of Brazil and Peru, he arrived at Molucca,
+where he procured every information respecting the produce of the
+Philippines, and the rich cargoes which every year were sent from
+these islands to Acapulco. Well instructed, likewise, in the tract
+observed by our galleons, he sailed for the coast of California, to
+lie in wait for the annual ship destined for New Spain. In due time
+the Santa Anna, as is customary, made her appearance on that coast,
+in prosecution of her voyage to Acapulco, and fell into the hands of
+the English without any resistance, being quite unprepared.
+
+The English having made themselves masters of this valuable prize,
+directed their course to the Philippines, and arriving at the island
+of Panay, where we had a ship in the dock of Yloylo, an attempt was
+made to burn her, but it was rendered ineffectual by Captain Lorenzo de
+Limas, who made a vigorous resistance, with such soldiers and Indians,
+as he was able to collect in the province. Abandoning this object,
+the English commander sent a letter to the Governor, to apprize him
+of the capture he had made of the Santa Anna, and to inform him he
+should return frequently to those seas. He departed from Panay for
+the Cape of Good Hope, from whence he sailed for England, and arrived
+laden with such riches, that his name became more renowned than ever
+was that of Francis Drake.
+
+In the year 1589 no ship was despatched to New Spain; for two which
+had been equipped for this voyage, were lost in the port of Cavite
+in a dreadful storm, which happened on St. Peter's Day. About the
+same time many insurrections of the Indians took place, and in
+particular, those of Cagayan, who were always very troublesome,
+murdered many Spaniards. Those likewise, in the valley of Dingras,
+in the province of Ylocos, resisted the collections of tribute, and
+murdered six people from the city of Fernandina, who were travelling
+through their towns. Don Santiago quelled these tumults, and restored
+tranquillity, by duly mingling punishment with clemency. He likewise
+constructed a strong fort of stone, where the royal gate now stands;
+he removed to Manila the foundery which was hitherto in Santa Anna; and
+cast some artillery, with the assistance of an Indian of Pampango. He
+founded an hospital for the Spaniards: but the principal mover of
+this pious act was Don Luis de Vivanco, who, jointly with his wife,
+endowed it, and appropriated it to the reception and cure of the
+sick. The Governor divided several portions of land among those
+soldiers and sailors who deserved it most, and conducted himself in
+the exercise of his authority, so much to the general satisfaction,
+that his character as an excellent Governor was established by the
+declaration of the licentiate Herber del Corral, who was chief judge
+on the occasion of passing his trial of approbation.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1590.
+
+    The Administration of Gomez Perez Dasmariņas, the fifth Governor
+    of Manila.
+
+
+The clergy of Manila about this period, sent to the court of Madrid
+and Rome the Friar Sanches, a Jesuit, under the pretence of soliciting
+some objects, for the spiritual as well as temporal welfare of these
+islands. Arriving at Madrid, he petitioned that the Royal Audience
+should be removed, and that Gomez Perez Dasmariņas, a noble Galician
+knight of the order of Santiago, Corregidor of Logrono, should
+be sent as Governor. This nobleman arrived at Manila in May 1590,
+in one of the two ships which the Viceroy of Mexico had despatched,
+and in which he had sent four hundred troops, a supply, by this time
+highly requisite in the islands. The other ship which accompanied
+her struck on a shoal, close in with the land of Maranduque, and was
+lost, but all the people were saved. The King gave the new Governor,
+as a salary, ten thousand Castile ducats out of the royal revenue of
+New Spain, and which was remitted annually to the Philippines.
+
+He brought an order that the proceedings of the Royal Audience
+should be suspended; and in performance of this, the year following,
+the Oidores composing it embarked for Mexico; the Oidor Roxas alone
+remaining, as the ad interim successor of the Governor. The Bishop, who
+had some disagreement with the Governor, feeling the importance of the
+Royal Audience, as the only tribunal capable of curbing the power of
+the Governor, and persuading himself it was not safe, to trust in the
+hands of one man, the uncontrolled exercise of authority, in a country
+so remote from the seat of government, it was his intention to proceed
+to New Spain, with a view to procure the re-establishment of the Royal
+Audience in Manila, and on various, affairs of his bishopric. The
+Governor, that he might not effect his purpose, would not allow him
+to embark with the Oidores; and the Bishop in the mean time contented
+himself, with giving full powers and instructions to the Augustine
+Friar Ortiga, who was going to Madrid, to appear to any allegations
+which might be preferred against him. In the short time this government
+lasted, great undertakings were performed; such as building a wall
+of stone round Manila, erecting the fort of Santiago, and furnishing
+it with good artillery. The royal magazines in Manila and Cavite
+were built; and the asylum of Santa Potenciana was erected for the
+maintenance, at the cost of the state, of a certain number of young
+persons, daughters of deceased military officers, until they should be
+married. The Governor established among the different religious orders,
+a salutary ecclesiastical control over the Indians, assigning to each
+order their different towns and provinces, and converting the colony
+into a complete republic; supplying every defect in the government;
+and putting the whole in a respectable state of defence, by means of
+his four hundred regular soldiers, divided into detachments.
+
+Among the natives of many adjacent islands which traded with Manila,
+those of Japan, in particular, brought the richest merchandize for the
+consumption of the colony, and for the commerce with Acapulco. A keen
+and able man of this nation, named Faranda Kicmon, who had renegaded
+from the faith, persuaded Taycosama, Emperor of Japan, to send an
+embassy to Manila; and promised him, that if he would give him the
+commission, he would procure him to be acknowledged King of Manila,
+and that a regular and lucrative commerce, might be established between
+the two nations. The Emperor gave credit to his representations, and
+despatched him with letters to the Governor, claiming the vassalage of
+the Philippines. The Governor received this embassy, and replied to it
+immediately, without bringing into question the point of vassalage,
+by proposing to establish a commercial intercourse; sending for this
+purpose, the Franciscan Friars Pedro Bautista, Francisco de San Miguel,
+Bartholome, and Gerardo de San Miguel, who likewise had determined to
+avail themselves of this opportunity, to establish themselves in that
+kingdom to preach the gospel: he likewise sent with them a Portuguese
+of the name of Carvallo, and they bore a handsome present to the
+Emperor. Notwithstanding many malicious falsehoods which Faranda
+had circulated, Taycosama received the friars with much courtesy,
+and granted them permission to remain in his kingdom, treating them
+with much respect in the first instance, although, at a subsequent
+period, he murdered them. About this time ambassadors from the King
+of Camboa arrived, with two elephants, as a present to the Governor;
+and endeavoured to engage him, to grant them assistance against
+the King of Siam, who had commenced hostilities against them. The
+Governor answered the King of Camboa with another present, giving
+them great hopes, but evading immediate assistance, on the plea that
+his projected expedition to the Moluccas, required all his resources,
+however desirous he was of giving the aid they demanded.
+
+That this expedition might not turn out as the former had done, Gomez
+Perez Dasmariņas determined to accompany it in person. He sailed
+from Cavite on the 19th of October 1593, and arriving off Santiago,
+encountered a strong gale from the eastward, and the whole of the
+fleet was separated, his own ship alone remaining: this compelled
+him to anchor at Brimstone Cape, to effect which he was obliged
+to have recourse to his boats, on account of the great variety
+of currents. The Chinese, to the number of one hundred and fifty,
+though able to pull at the oar, assisted but very little; and the
+Governor abused them for the little exertion they made. These people
+resented this ill-treatment; and considering themselves as superior
+in force to the few Spaniards in the ship, conceived the design of
+murdering them the same evening. Whilst the Spaniards took their
+siesta (or afternoon nap), little dreaming of the designs of the
+Chinese, the latter commenced their carnage by killing the Governor,
+and all those who were not able to effect their escape in the launch,
+or by swimming, sparing only Friar Montilla, a Franciscan, and Juan de
+Cuellar, secretary to the Governor, whom they took with them. After
+this massacre they sailed for China, and passing by Ylocos, they
+entered the port of Sinay to water, where the Indians fell on them,
+and killed twenty of their number. The following day they disembarked
+in another port; and actuated by superstitious motives, sacrificed
+one of the native converts, in revenge for the slaughter the Indians
+had made the day before, and by which sacrifice, they expected to
+propitiate their gods in favour of their voyage. They tied him to a
+cross, and opening his chest, took out his heart, which they offered
+to their idols. They then made sail, and coasted for several days:
+they resolved to set on shore Friar Montilla, Secretary Cuellar,
+and those Philippine Indians who had been their shipmates. They
+then proceeded to Cochin China, where, in the end, they received the
+punishment due to their crimes.
+
+On the death of the Governor, the Licentiate Rosas succeeded to the
+Command, and immediately despatched two ships in search of the Chinese,
+under the command of Don Juan Ronquillo. They made enquiry in several
+ports; but not being able to gain information respecting their route,
+they returned without effecting their object. That they might not,
+however, remain without punishment for such atrocious crimes, and
+supposing that the Chinese might have taken shelter in the province of
+Chancheo in China, of which they were natives, he sent Don Fernando de
+Castro, to solicit of the Viceroy of that province, due satisfaction
+against the aggressors. Unable, however, to reach that destination,
+he was, by the interposition of divine Providence, compelled to bear
+away for Cochin China, where, on his arrival, he found the murderers
+had retired. He communicated his business to the King, and the whole
+of them were imprisoned and executed. Some of those, likewise, whom
+the Portuguese Governor of Molucca, had sent on the expedition with
+the Chinese, were hanged in Manila. The whole, however, affording
+small consolation for the melancholy catastrophe which had taken place.
+
+Forty days after the death of the Governor, Friar Montilla and
+Secretary Cuellar arrived at Manila, after having suffered many severe
+hardships, and being brought out for death repeatedly, whilst they were
+with the Chinese. The deceased Governor had given in charge to these
+gentlemen a trunk, to be delivered to his son Luis Perez Dasmariņas;
+and on opening it, papers of great importance were found: among
+the rest, a royal order, by which he had the power to nominate his
+successor, in virtue of which he named his own son Luis. At first Luis
+found some difficulty in being acknowledged as such, the Licentiate
+Roxas being firmly seated; and unwilling to deliver up his authority,
+for which he had begun to entertain a great attachment; he, however,
+on the 3d of December, in the same year, left Luis in quiet possession.
+
+The new Governor was desirous of sending another expedition to Molucca,
+but desisted from it at that time from prudential motives. It
+was fortunate that he formed this resolution, as in this case,
+Manila would have been left with only a few troops, and exposed to
+another attack from the Chinese, on whom little reliance could be
+placed. Indeed, there was reason to suspect they had something of
+that nature in contemplation, as many junks about this time arrived
+with Mandarins in them, and the cause of their appearance was never
+ascertained. They landed very frequently, and visited the Governor,
+but did not attempt any thing, nor could he comprehend their object;
+most fortunately, however, at this moment, arrived the two ships which
+sailed this year from Acapulco, bringing a sufficient force with them,
+to resist enemies more powerful than the Chinese.
+
+Our historians have, with great minuteness, stated the losses and
+arrivals of the ships which are sent to New Spain, on account of their
+being so interesting to these islands, which depend upon them for
+their subsistence, and, of course, their loss or arrival occasions
+a very general sensation. There is no reason to think, that these
+misfortunes are to be attributed to the difficulty of the passage,
+nor to stormy weather, so much as to the ignorance of the pilots,
+who are chosen without examination as to their nautical skill, the
+bad construction of the ships, their sailing out of season, and too
+heavily laden. These are, unquestionably, the principal causes of
+their failure; and it is a pity it is not remedied, for it is with
+justice affirmed, that the avarice and knavery of some rich people,
+have buried in the ocean many millions of dollars.
+
+In the year following, the same two vessels again made this voyage,
+and Seņor Morga came in one, as successor to the late Governor,
+but this nobleman was afterwards promoted to be Oidor of Mexico,
+where he wrote the history of the Philippines. There came likewise
+in these ships, a sufficient number of troops, sent by the Viceroy
+of Mexico. Don Luis Dasmariņas was now, therefore, enabled to give
+the King of Camboxa that relief which his father had promised. He
+likewise despatched an expedition to the island of Mindanao; and
+he quelled an insurrection in some of the provincial towns which
+had revolted, and refused to pay the tribute, particularly those in
+Cagayan and Zambales. He did many praiseworthy actions, and governed
+with more approbation than his father, possessing greater abilities,
+at the same time that he was more affable to all.
+
+In the month of February 1596, the flag ship of the squadron of Alvaro
+Mendana de Neyra arrived at Cavite. He had sailed from Callao, the
+port of Lima, with four ships, to colonize the islands of Salmon;
+and having begun his new settlement in the island of Negros, near
+New Guinea, he died there, and his wife, Doņa Isabela Barreto, at the
+instigation of the people, left the colony, and came in his ship to
+Manila. The Governor received her with great attention, and gave her
+every assistance, to enable her to return to New Spain.
+
+An important establishment was now founded here, called the Pious
+Work of Mercy, which originated with a clergyman of the name of Losa,
+and who, together with Captain Esquerra, an inhabitant of Manila,
+employed themselves in collecting donations for this purpose; and
+their exertions were so successful, that they were soon enabled to
+build the college of Santa Isabel, where many female orphans are
+maintained, and on whom marriage portions are bestowed. In emulation
+of this pious work, many others were endowed in the convents, and
+in the cathedral. The projectors traded with their funds to China,
+Batavia, the coast of Coromandel, and Acapulco, the produce of which
+was destined to be employed in like manner as above, in hospitals,
+dowers to orphan females, in ransoming children in China [20], and
+for masses for souls in purgatory, reserving part of it for the
+annual increase of the funds of these pious establishments, and to
+alleviate the distresses occasioned by the losses of the annual ships,
+of which they thus became the assurers to a certain extent. Such
+establishments may be useful to new settlers, since the parties
+desirous of commercial pursuits, may, if they possess any credit,
+be certain of meeting in these resources a capital with which they
+may trade. I am not of opinion, however, that they are very useful
+to these islands, generally speaking, because the rich merchants, who
+have sufficient capital, employ it in objects attended with no risk,
+and in their store-houses, and trade with that which they draw from
+this charity, by which they escape the chance of loss. If there had
+not, unfortunately we may say, been this resource, no doubt some mode
+would have been resorted to, of insuring the Acapulco adventures, at
+less than the pious foundations have been in the habit of contributing,
+and which often exceeds fifty per cent., and never falls below twenty
+per cent. Like all other adventures managed by a public body, there is
+never such strict oeconomy as when under the control of individuals,
+whose interests are involved in the result.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1596.
+
+    The Administration of Don Francisco Tello de Gusman, the fourth
+    Governor of Manila.
+
+
+The news of the death of Dasmariņas, reached Madrid through the
+medium of India, and immediately the King sent as his successor Don
+Francisco Tello de Gusman, Knight of the order of Santiago, born at
+Seville, who had been treasurer of the Indies. He arrived at Manila
+the 1st of June 1596, and the following month despatched the ship San
+Philip to Acapulco; but she encountered in her voyage heavy gales,
+was dismasted, and lost her rudder, and having no other resource, bore
+away for Japan, where the relief she sought was denied, except on the
+condition of her entering the port of Urando; in effecting which she
+touched on a sand bank, and made so much water, that she was under the
+necessity of being unloaded. The Governor, allured by the prospect of
+such rich booty, immediately conceived the design of making himself
+master of the vessel and cargo, and accordingly secured it in the
+royal store-houses, sending information to the Emperor Taycosama,
+that the Captain having given a false representation of the matter,
+he had proceeded against him according to law, and had secured the
+whole of the property. By this means he so warped the whole affair,
+that the cargo was condemned, and a prosecution was commenced, in the
+progress of which those Franciscan friars fell martyrs, who had come
+to this kingdom in quality of ambassadors.
+
+Taycosama named one of the four principal Governors of his kingdom,
+called Uximonoxo, to take charge of the ship, in order that the
+cargo might be delivered up; for our Captain, Don Mathias Landecho,
+had petitioned the Emperor, sending two Spaniards and two friars, of
+those he had in the ship, with a present worth twenty thousand dollars,
+to soften him, and, if possible, to obtain justice. Upon their arrival
+at Meaco, the court of the Emperor, they applied to the Franciscan
+friars, who, by their experience in this city, they conceived, could
+procure a favourable reception to their application. The Franciscans
+judged it better to apply to Ximonoxo, another of the four Governors;
+but this crafty Japanese, possessing more abilities than the friars,
+deceived the whole of them, found means to make them deliver up
+the present of the Emperor to him, offering to give them a letter
+to Uximonoxo, which they agreed to, and acceded to his wish. The
+Spaniards returned quite content with this letter; but it was the
+letter of Uriah, the Hittite, for immediately they delivered it,
+Uximonoxo imprisoned them. When they found out the deceit, they
+sent the Friar Guivara to Meaco, to procure their liberty from the
+other Governors, and, with the assistance of the Franciscan friars,
+attempted to get an audience of the Emperor, to explain to him the
+conduct of his Governors; but Uximonoxo was too crafty for them,
+prejudicing the Emperor against the friars, through the medium of
+the Bonzos, who are priests of their idols, to whom he suggested the
+propriety of complaining against them, because they propagated a new
+doctrine against the gods, which must be prejudicial to the state.
+
+Taycosama, who began to be desirous of keeping possession of the
+merchandize of the wrecked vessel, imprisoned the Franciscan friars,
+on pretence of their having preached the gospel of Christ against
+his command; and likewise pretended that they were employed as spies
+by the Spaniards, and that, with these views, they had quitted their
+own country. He now openly seized the property saved, and condemned
+the friars to death. With them the following were comprehended in
+this sentence; the Friars Pedro Bautista, Francisco Blanco, Gonsalo
+Garįia, Francisco de San Miguel, Martin de la Asumpcion, together
+with Phelipe de Jesus, who was going in that ship to New Spain to
+be ordained, and had resided with his brethren since his arrival in
+Japan. These six Franciscan friars, with three Japanese Jesuits, and
+seventeen Japanese laymen, who professed Christianity, all shared the
+same fate. They were paraded through the streets of Meaco, with their
+left ears cut off, and then marched above two hundred leagues into
+Nangasaqui, where they suffered martyrdom, by being placed on crosses,
+and put to death with lances. This transaction took place on the 5th
+of February 1597, in the presence of Seņor Martinez, a Jesuit Bishop,
+many other Jesuits and Franciscan friars, and the Spaniards lately
+arrived in that ship, and who returned to Manila, after suffering
+many hardships, and certified what they had witnessed on this occasion.
+
+Immediately on the death of these martyrs being made known in Manila,
+the Governor sent two Spaniards and an Augustine friar, to solicit
+their bodies, and complain to the Emperor of the ill treatment which
+the Spaniards had experienced in regard to their ship, contrary to
+the treaty which had been made with the government of Manila. They
+likewise had instructions, to procure the establishment of commercial
+regulations for the future; and to pave the way for these views, they
+took with them a present of an elephant, an animal seldom seen in
+Japan. Taycosama was delighted with this present, and he esteemed it
+the more, as it knelt three times in his presence, on a certain signal
+being made to it. He received the ambassadors with great cordiality,
+and pleaded the laws of the empire, in justification of the conduct
+which had been observed, with regard to the ship and cargo; but made
+a promise, for the second time, of protection to the commerce of the
+Spaniards, assuring them that these vexations should never be repeated,
+and despatched them with a present to the Governor, together with the
+relicts of the martyred saints. The Spaniards had little confidence
+in the duration of this good understanding, for Faranda incessantly
+instigated the Emperor to commence hostilities on Manila, promising to
+reduce the whole of the islands to his obedience. The four Governors
+of the kingdom seconded the representations of Faranda, and measures
+were adopted with the view of carrying them into effect by collecting
+an armament; but the chief men of the country, who considered Faranda
+as a despicable character, much retarded this scheme. It was at
+first understood in Manila, that this armament was directed against
+the island of Formosa, as the first step towards the conquest of the
+Philippines. Our Governor took every precaution, and among others,
+sent an embassy to Canton, as the Chinese were the ancient enemies
+of the Japanese; and it was their interest to prevent the latter
+from making this conquest: nothing of this, however, was eventually
+necessary, as Taycosama died, and peace immediately followed.
+
+While this was passing in Japan, the two expeditions which Luis
+Dasmariņas had sent to Camboxa and Mindanao were proceeding in their
+operations; that which went to Camboxa began successfully, but it was
+afterwards completely ruined by Major Juan Gallinato, and returned to
+Manila without effecting any thing. Don Luis Dasmariņas having pledged
+himself for the success of this expedition, armed, at his own cost,
+two ships and a galiot, and with the approbation of the Governor,
+left Manila for Camboxa, and in a little time after arrived at China,
+at the port of Pinae, twelve leagues distant from Canton, where he
+encountered the Governor of Malacca, took him prisoner, and returned
+to Manila. His galiot arrived at Cagayan, and proceeded on his voyage
+to Camboxa, where he found the King re-established on his throne
+by the Portuguese, Cabos Diego Belloso and Blas Ruiz. The other two
+Spanish ships also arrived there, and an attempt was made to establish
+themselves in that kingdom; but although the King seemed to desire it,
+they were compelled to abandon the project, as it was opposed by his
+step-mother, and the Malays had already freed themselves from the
+control of the Portuguese by the murder of Belloso and Ruiz; indeed
+a few only had escaped, with Captain Juan de Mendoza in his ship.
+
+In Mindanao, Captain Figueroa, who had the charge of this expedition,
+and who bore, by the King's order, the title of Marquis of what
+he might conquer, arrived at Buhayen, where the Moors had some
+fortifications, from whence he retired to the kingdom of Tamoncaca,
+whose King was in amity with the Spaniards. The Seņor Salazar having
+come out about this time to see the Royal Audience re-established,
+the ecclesiastical establishment was likewise arranged, the first
+Archbishop being the Seņor himself. He, however, scarcely enjoyed
+his dignity three months, as, in August in the same year, he died of
+a dysentery. There had come with him Friar Pedro de Agurto, of the
+order of St. Augustine, first Bishop of Zebu, and Seņor Benevides,
+of the order of the Dominicans, first Bishop of New Segovia. In the
+same year the Oidores arrived, who were to form the Royal Audience,
+the President of it being the Governor. The chief Oidor was Morga,
+nominated as successor ad interim to the Governor. The others were Don
+Christoval Telles Almanza, Alvaro Zambrano, and Geronimo de Salazar. In
+eight days after their arrival, the Royal seal being carried with
+much pomp to the cathedral, and from thence to the palace, the Royal
+Audience was, by this ceremony, considered as fully established.
+
+In the garrison of Caldera, Juan Pacho had remained as Governor, and
+being of an active disposition, he attempted to reduce the natives of
+Jolo, on which island he landed immediately after a storm of rain, and
+attacking them, was killed, with the greater part of his people. The
+residue retreated to Caldera; but in consequence of this defeat,
+the natives of Jolo and of Mindanao, with fifty Caracoas, invaded the
+islands of Zebu, Negros, and Panay, pillaging and burning the towns,
+and making many prisoners. In the following year, 1590, they repeated
+the attack, and the natives retiring to the mountains, refused to quit
+them again, as the Spaniards were unable to protect them. Those in
+particular of the island of Panay were most pertinacious, and would
+not come near the town, as one of their priestesses had asserted,
+that the Spaniards were in league with the Moors, and had been the
+cause of these hostilities for years back. It cost the friars a great
+deal of trouble, to eradicate the effects of the impression, made by
+this means on the minds of the Indians, but at length they succeeded,
+and the towns were re-occupied.
+
+To chastise these insults of the Moors, the Governor sent Juan
+Gallinato, with two hundred Spaniards, to Jolo; but after making an
+attempt to possess himself of a fort, which the King of Jolo had on a
+lofty hill, he returned to Manila, without having effected any thing
+of consequence.
+
+From that time to the present, the Moors have not ceased to infest our
+colonies. It is incredible what a number of Indians they have made
+prisoners, what towns they have plundered, what villages they have
+annihilated, and what ships they have taken. I am inclined to think,
+that Providence permits this as a punishment on the Spaniards, for
+delaying the conquest for no less a period than two hundred years [21],
+notwithstanding the expeditions and fleets, that have almost annually
+been sent to attempt it. On the first arrival of the Spaniards in
+those seas, they conquered, in a short time, all the Philippines,
+excepting the small island of Jolo, part of Mindanao, and a few other
+very insignificant islands near them, which, to this period, have
+not submitted. These Moorish Indians are certainly very valiant, and
+their enmity has been drawn upon us by our own conduct; for instead of
+following the laudable example of the first settlers in these islands,
+who brought the natives under subjection, principally by the mild
+interference of the friars, it seems, of late years, to have been the
+object of the Spaniards, since the great increase of the lucrative
+commerce of Manila, to acquire, by oppression and force, lands and
+establishments on these islands, without any view to conciliate the
+natives. Those, therefore, who have been sent on different occasions to
+reduce the country, have, instead of attending to the object of their
+mission, been solicitous only to serve their own purposes, considering
+that as a primary, which ought to have been a secondary object; and
+the natives profiting by constant experience in warfare, during which
+they discovered that the Spaniards were mortal like themselves, have
+at last become very formidable. There can be no doubt these Indians
+may be reduced by the same means employed with the others, that is,
+by sending missionaries amongst them, and a sufficient number of
+Spanish stations might be established, to command respect. These
+garrisons ought to be independent of the Governor of Manila, and
+ought to have a chief, who should reside there, directing his whole
+attention to the improvement of the settlement, by the extension in
+the country of the Spanish influence, by temperate measures.
+
+As the matter is now ordered, these appointments are made with no
+other view than to enrich, by any means, the individuals sent there as
+Governors. Such, too, is the situation of the Governors of Zamboanga
+and Marianas; who appropriate to their own use all the revenue sent
+by his Majesty's Governors for public purposes, and then return to
+Manila, leaving the colonies as poor and miserable as the first day
+they were established.
+
+In October 1600, two Dutch pirates took their station at the entrance
+of Marivelez, waiting for the ship Saint Thomas, which was expected
+to return from New Spain about this time. The Governor sent against
+them the Oydor Morga with two galleons, an English patache which had
+come from Malacca, a galiot, and other small vessels. On the 12th of
+December an engagement took place, when Morga took one ship, and the
+other fled, very much disabled; but he was incapable of pursuing his
+advantage, for his ship had suffered so much that she foundered, and
+fifty of the crew were drowned, the rest being saved on the island
+of Fortune. The ship which he had taken from the Dutch had on board
+twenty-five men, whom the Governor ordered to be hanged, as a warning
+to other pirates. During this year, two ships sailed for Acapulco; one
+was lost on the island of Catanduanes, but all the people were saved;
+the other took shelter in one of the Marianas, where she was seized by
+the Indians, who murdered most of the Spaniards, reserving only a few,
+whom the ship Saint Thomas rescued on her return to New Spain; but the
+various disasters which had befallen Manila during this government,
+were far surpassed by a terrible earthquake, in which many houses,
+and the church of the Jesuits, were destroyed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1602.
+
+    The Administration of Don Pedro de Acuņa.
+
+
+In May 1602, four ships from New Spain arrived at Cavite, in one
+of which came the new Governor, Don Pedro Brabo de Acuņa, Knight of
+the order of San Juan, and who had been Governor of Carthagena. In
+passing by the Marianas, he had the good fortune to rescue twenty-five
+Spaniards, who had been shipwrecked in the St. Margarita. Immediately
+on taking possession of his government, he gave audience to the
+ambassadors of Dayfusama, Emperor of Japan, who had succeeded to the
+kingdom, on the death of Taycosama, and requested that the commerce
+with his kingdom might be continued; and that shipwrights might be
+sent from Manila to build vessels for him. Without touching on this
+last subject, the Governor dismissed the Japanese with a magnificent
+present, which was all lost, as they were shipwrecked on the island of
+Formosa. With these ambassadors, friars from all the orders in Manila
+entreated the Governor to be allowed to proceed to Japan, in order to
+make converts, even at the risk of martyrdom. These good dispositions
+and intentions the Governor encouraged, and by his assistance, they
+were able to establish themselves in that kingdom, where in a short
+time they founded several convents. In 1603, the Augustine friars
+already possessed one, and the Captain of the ship Espiritu Santo,
+who put in there in distress, applied to the friars, requesting them
+to interest themselves with the Emperor, as the Japanese, conformable
+to their regulations, would not permit the ship to remain. Dayfusama
+received the application with courtesy, and punished those who had
+been the cause of it, sending the Spaniards who had accompanied
+the friars back to Manila, with great honours, giving at the same
+time strict orders, that all Spanish vessels arriving in future,
+in his ports, should be treated as friends; the ship, however,
+in the meantime had made her escape, fearing the same ill success,
+as had attended a similar application to Taycosama.
+
+A short time after the arrival of Acuņa, he made a voyage through
+the Bisayas (or Islas de Pintados), to inspect the garrisons, and to
+make preparations for an expedition, which he intended against the
+Moluccas; and whilst he was employed in building the fort of Yloylo,
+the Moors took the opportunity offered by his absence, of seizing
+all the ships they met with, burning the towns, and endeavouring to
+take possession of Balayan; but the Alcalde Mayor of the province
+opposed them; and upon receiving assistance from Manila, pursued
+them to a desert island, off which he fell in with the Governor on
+his return to the capital. Orders were issued to attack them; but
+the Moors making all the sail they could, he was able only to take
+two, and sink five others, out of seventy vessels, of which their
+force consisted. On his arrival at Manila, the Governor received the
+melancholy intelligence of the death of Seņor Tello, his deputy, who
+had discharged his trust with great zeal and probity. He was buried
+in the church of St. Augustine, to which he had left considerable
+donations. Soon after this a great fire happened in Manila, which
+burnt two hundred and fifty houses, the convent of St. Domingo,
+and the hospital for the reception of the Spaniards.
+
+In May 1603, three Chinese Mandarins arrived, on the extraordinary
+mission of discovering, whether the port of Cavite was composed of
+gold, as a Chinese, called Tiongon, had reported to his Emperor,
+by whom he was imprisoned, until the truth of his assertion should
+be ascertained, this man having promised to conquer it or lose his
+life. It was believed that this was a mere stratagem, to reconnoitre
+the country, as it was understood, that the Emperor intended to land
+an hundred thousand men, in the following December, with the view of
+becoming master, of the whole of the Spanish possessions. The Governor
+treated these Mandarins, with the most flattering distinction, shewed
+them the island of Cavite, and undeceived them in regard to the opinion
+propagated by their countryman, assuring them that the island was
+termed the Golden Island, on account of its lucrative commerce only.
+
+The expected armament of the Emperor did not make its appearance;
+but an insurrection of the Chinese inhabitants of Manila followed,
+which had been in a state of preparation during the embassy, and now
+broke out. There was a Chinese in Manila of the name of Engcan, who
+had remained there since the time of Limahon, who had been baptized,
+was very rich, and was in intimacy with many Spaniards. He offered to
+his countrymen, to build a wall round their quarter of the town: the
+work was commenced; but the fidelity of the Chinese beginning to be
+suspected, the Governor endeavoured to ascertain their intentions,
+through the medium of their enemies, the Japanese, from which
+circumstance the Chinese entertained a belief, that the Governor
+proposed to massacre them, with the assistance of these people;
+and they resolved, among themselves, to enter Manila on the eve of
+St. Francis, and murder every Spaniard in the place. Twenty-five
+thousand Chinese were concerned in this plot, which was discovered
+by an Indian having given notice of it to the curate of Quiapo,
+through whose means the information was instantly communicated
+to the Governor. There were two classes of Chinese at that time in
+Manila. Those who came annually for the purposes of commerce, and those
+who had long been residents, in a quarter of the town called Parian,
+outside of the walls of the city, and whom the Dominican friars had
+endeavoured to convert.
+
+The first step the Governor took, was to attempt to reconcile the
+annual Chinese merchants, who were very numerous; but he failed in
+the attempt, as they had collected in a large body in open rebellion,
+in a town within half a league of Manila, the others remaining in
+Parian. The Governor made a confidant of Engcan, and sent him, in
+company with some Spaniards, to endeavour to bring them back to a
+sense of their duty, but without effect, as the works they had raised
+in their defence would, in their opinion, protect them. In the night,
+some of them sallied out, burned the towns of Quiapo and Tondo, and
+killed many Indians. They were opposed by one hundred and thirty
+Spaniards, almost all of whom perished: among them were Don Luis
+Dasmariņas, Don Thomas Brabo, and Don Juan de Alcega, whose heads
+the Chinese sent to Parian, as an incitement for their countrymen
+to follow their example. Upon examination, it being discovered that
+Engcan was the principal abettor of these men, he was imprisoned,
+which had such an effect upon many of his countrymen, that they hanged
+themselves in despair.
+
+The Spaniards, finding that they could do nothing by means of mild
+measures, commenced their operations, and fought with such determined
+resolution, that the slaughter was immense. So general was the spirit
+of loyalty, that even the friars took up arms, and, in particular,
+Antonio Flores, who had been a soldier in Flanders and Italy, and had,
+in the battle of Lepanto, been ensign under Bernardino de Meneses, but
+afterwards took the habit of St. Augustine. The position he took was on
+the river, close to which the rebels were obliged to pass to join the
+Chinese of Parian; from this he sallied out, and made great slaughter
+among them. They made good their retreat, however, to Parian and Dilao,
+where they threw up works, but Captain Gallinato burned Parian, and
+laid waste Dilao; and Captain Luis de Velasco pursued them to Tabuco,
+which we now call Cabuyao. The Chinese not being able to maintain
+themselves here, passed on to the town of St. Pablo in the mountains,
+where Velasco, who had pursued them, fell, together with two Franciscan
+friars. Here the insurgents fortified themselves so strongly, that it
+was deemed necessary to send a greater force from Manila against them.
+
+Major Christoval de Acuņa was charged with the expedition. He cut
+off their supply of provisions, and reduced them to such distress,
+that their only alternative was, to abandon their position or starve.
+
+They availed themselves of the cover of night, and made the best
+of their way to Batangas, where the Spaniards pursued them, and
+completed their destruction, having killed in different engagements,
+twenty-three thousand men, one hundred alone, who were rowers in the
+galleons, remaining of their whole number; and as a warning to their
+countrymen, to abstain from insurrection in future, Engcan was ordered
+to be hanged, and his head to be placed on the gaol. The Governor sent
+two Augustine friars to Spain, to inform his Majesty of the rebellion,
+and to enable them to arrive in a shorter time, he sent them by India;
+but they encountered so many difficulties in their passage through Goa,
+Persia, Turkey, and Italy, that it was three years before they arrived
+at the court of Madrid. This has always been a dangerous journey,
+and was particularly so to Friar Nicholas Milo, an Augustine, who,
+a few years before, had been sent the same route with a lay brother,
+born in Japan, and who, after having been exposed to great misery
+in many countries, fell a martyr in Muscovy with his companion. The
+Emperor of China sent ambassadors to Manila respecting the rebellion,
+requesting to know the meaning of the slaughter, which had been made
+among his subjects. The Governor justified himself amply, and the
+commerce remained on the same footing as before.
+
+In March 1604, eight hundred troops arrived from New Spain, with which
+relief Don Pedro de Acuņa was enabled to fit out a fleet of thirty
+sail, in the port of Yloylo, for the conquest of the Moluccas. He
+sailed at the head of this armament on the 15th of January, 1606; and
+upon his arrival at Ternate, he sat down before the place, to which
+the King of the island had retired, and took it on the 1st of April,
+with the loss of fifteen Spaniards. The King of Ternate, who had fled
+with some of his subjects, intimated a desire to enter into amicable
+terms with the Spaniards, proposing to deliver up all his fortresses,
+the towns in Batoquina, which were anciently peopled by Christians
+(either Dutch captives, or Spanish deserters), all his Christian
+prisoners, the islands of Marotay and Herrao, with all his artillery
+and ammunition; and which terms were acceded to. He was not, however,
+left in possession of his kingdom, but accompanied the Governor to
+Manila, with some of his chiefs, who were not allowed to remain,
+from an apprehension of their fomenting disturbances.
+
+The Colonel, Don Martin Esquival, was appointed Governor of Ternate,
+with six hundred men; and in Tidore, the King of the island requested,
+that Captain Alarcon might remain with one hundred troops, which was
+acceded to. During these transactions, and while this armament was
+at Ternate, and few troops remained at Manila, the Japanese who lived
+behind the city, availed themselves of these circumstances, and took
+up arms against the Spaniards. This rebellion was soon put a stop to,
+through the mediation of the friars, who persuaded the insurgents to
+lay down their arms, and submit quietly. By this species of management,
+time was gained for the arrival of the Governor, to whom information
+had been sent. He arrived at Manila, banished the ringleaders to
+their own island, and obliged the rest to live in the town of Dilao,
+where they would be always under our guns; and by this means, kept in
+obedience. The Governor reaped little benefit from these successes,
+as he was immediately afterwards, seized with a complaint in the
+intestines, which carried him off on St. John the Baptist's day. On
+the death of the Governor, Don Christoval Telles de Almanza, as chief
+Oidor, became Military Governor ad interim. The rebellion, which lay
+smothered in the breasts of the Japanese, on this occasion, broke
+out afresh. They engaged the Spaniards, and many fell on both sides,
+as the Japanese were very brave, and were called the Spaniards of
+Asia. In the end, however, they were conquered, and were not permitted
+to live together in any considerable number till the year 1621, when
+Pelayo Hernandez built shops on their old quarter, which were hired
+out for the benefit of the Franciscan friars.
+
+Some of the Spaniards of the Moluccas took prisoner Pablo Blancardo,
+the Dutch commander at Malacca, and brought him in his galley to
+Ternate. The Governor there, in consideration of fifty thousand
+dollars, set him and all his people at liberty, which, when it was
+known in Manila, was stigmatized as an act of great baseness; and this
+public censure affected the Governor's mind to that degree, that he
+died of grief soon afterwards. The second in command succeeded; and to
+give satisfaction to the Royal Audience, despatched two ships in search
+of General Blancardo, who, it was supposed, had gone towards Maquien,
+in a patache; they took him prisoner a second time, and sent him with
+all his people, to Manila, where he was some time afterwards repaid
+from the Royal coffers, the amount of his ransom. Pablo Blancardo
+died of grief in prison at Manila, where he had been confined until
+the arrival of twenty-two Spaniards, who had been taken at Amboyna
+by the Dutch, and for whom it was intended he should be exchanged.
+
+The Royal Audience conducted themselves with great approbation in the
+civil administration, until the year 1608, when Don Rodrigo Vivero of
+Laredo, who was named by the Viceroy as Governor ad interim, arrived
+at Manila, and having had great experience in the management of the
+Indians in New Spain, he availed himself of it on this occasion, giving
+instructions to that effect to the chief judges, and other ministers
+of justice. He governed with much satisfaction for one year, when he
+delivered up the insignia of his office, and returned to Mexico.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1609.
+
+    Of the Administration of Don Juan de Silva.
+
+
+When the account of the death of Acuņa reached Madrid from New
+Spain, the government was bestowed on Don Juan de Silva of Truxillo,
+Knight of the order of Santiago, who, at that time, was serving in
+Flanders. He arrived at Cavite in Easter, and took possession of
+his government, bringing with him six companies of soldiers, which
+addition to our force was of great importance at this period, as,
+in the month of October, the Dutch squadron which has been mentioned,
+appeared off the port of Yloylo. It was composed of six ships and a
+considerable military force, which it was intended to disembark in
+this province, but they were repulsed by the Alcalde Mayor. It then
+appeared off Marivelez, with the view of preventing ships from going
+to Manila, and of seizing all merchantmen. Don Juan de Silva fitted
+out an armament, with which, in the month of April, he attacked and
+defeated them on the day of St. Mark. He took two ships, the Captains
+of which had been killed, with many of the crews; a third fled, and
+the other two which had been separated the day before from the fleet,
+and were returning with great booty, retired with such despatch, that
+the Spanish squadron was unable to come up with them. He, however,
+seized those ships which they had taken. Among others was a Japanese
+vessel, in which were embarked those Spaniards, who had been wrecked
+on the coast of that island in the ship St. Francis.
+
+The Archbishop of Manila, Benavides, having died on the 26th of
+July, 1605, his Majesty named as his successor, Don Diego Vasques
+Mercado of Arevalo, in Old Castile. This year, 1610, he arrived at
+the Philippines, and discharged his functions with great approbation,
+until the year 1616, when he died, and the Bishop of Zebu succeeded
+him in the Archbishopric.
+
+The Dutch being settled in the island of Java, and possessing
+fortifications in Malacca and other parts of India, our Governor
+had little relish for such a neighbourhood, and as they had at
+times infested our seas, and attacked our islands, he determined,
+in person, to destroy the forts they had in Malacca, which being so
+close in his vicinity, he was the more jealous of. He fitted out a
+squadron of six ships and two galleys, and sailed for Ternate, where
+he intended to take on board some linguists, and to arrange all his
+other operations. He understood, in Ternate, that the Dutch hearing of
+this expedition, had fortified themselves in such a manner in Malacca,
+that it was impossible to make an impression upon them, and that he
+might not entirely lose the benefit of the armament he had prepared,
+he attempted to reduce the forts in Gilolo and Bataquina, but was
+obliged to retreat to Manila, with the loss of three hundred men,
+when he immediately began to make preparations of men and ships for
+another expedition of the same nature. These islands, at this time,
+received considerable aid in the arrival from Spain, by the way of
+India, of five caravelas out of seven, which in April, 1613, had
+sailed from Cadiz, commanded by Ruy Gonzalez de Segueira, having on
+board three hundred and fifty soldiers, two hundred and forty seamen,
+and a hundred Portuguese landsmen.
+
+Upon the arrival of this relief, the Governor determined to
+proceed to Malacca against the Dutch, whose position he ordered to
+be reconnoitred, but he found them so powerful in ships, which had
+arrived by the Straits both of Magellan and Sunda, that he deemed it
+necessary to use his utmost exertions, to enable him to cope with
+such powerful enemies. With this view he sent a despatch to the
+Viceroy of India, requesting he would unite the forces of the two
+kingdoms; but while he was preparing his armament at Cavite, ten Dutch
+vessels arrived at Panay. They landed a number of men, and marched
+for the city of Arivalo, burning the churches and the convents of
+the Augustine friars, in the towns of Ogtong and Xaro. The Indians,
+aware of the inadequate force the Spaniards possessed, fled to the
+mountains, and although the Dutch retired immediately, it cost the
+friars a great deal of labour, to bring them back to their towns,
+where they could not persuade themselves they were secure.
+
+By the end of the year 1616, Don Juan de Silva had collected the
+greatest armament, that had been seen in the Philippines; it consisted
+of ten galleons, four galleys, a patache, and many smaller vessels,
+with all necessary supplies, and five thousand men, two thousand being
+Spaniards and Portuguese. He sailed with this formidable armament,
+on the last day of this year, to attack the forts of Malacca; but
+as the galleons had not arrived which were expected from India,
+and which he imagined had wintered in the Straits of Malacca, and
+it was known that the Dutch kept some vessels in these Straits,
+in expectation of the ships from China which passed by here, the
+Governor thought it most adviseable, to attack these ships in the
+first instance, and after he had destroyed them, he should be able
+to join the galleons from India, and proceed to the Dutch forts in
+Malacca. The reasoning was good, but it failed in the execution,
+the galleons of India having been burnt, in an engagement they had
+with the Dutch, and the latter having quitted the Straits eight days
+before the Spaniards arrived, flying with all their effects, as they
+had received secret intelligence of their route. At the same time that
+the Spanish galleons entered the Straits, two Malay merchantmen from
+China arrived very richly laden; by saving which, the inhabitants
+of Malacca called Don de Silva their preserver, received him on
+shore under a canopy, and expected from his valour, and the powerful
+fleet he brought, that India would be freed from those freebooters,
+the Dutch; but he was seized with a fever, and died in eleven days,
+on the 19th of April, 1616. He had ordered his body to be embalmed,
+and directed it should be carried to Xerez de los Cavalleros, to
+a convent of bare-footed carmelites, and buried there. Before he
+died, he gave the command of the armament to Don Alonzo Henriquez,
+who brought it back to Manila, without effecting any thing else.
+
+By the death of the Governor, the command devolved on Don Andres
+Alcaraz, the oldest Oidor, who had been left in charge of the
+government by Don Juan de Silva, when he sailed with the armament
+for Malacca. About the same time our squadron sailed from the bay,
+another Dutch squadron, which had lately arrived by the Straits of
+Magellan, entered the mouth of the harbour, and lay a month close to
+Marivelez. There were only four ships and two pataches laying before
+Manila, and it was without artillery, ammunition, or soldiers. The
+Governor ad interim was not dismayed at this; he armed those few ships
+he possessed, fortified certain positions, and was encouraged in the
+undertaking by the people, who took up arms, not only the laity, but
+even the ecclesiastics also. The Dutch commander wrote two letters
+to the Royal Audience, and one to General Pablo Blancardo, whom the
+Spaniards had carried prisoner to Manila; but as soon as he learned
+that Blancardo had died in prison, he made sail to the Moluccas.
+
+Upon the death of Silva, the Dutch came with ten ships against Oton,
+where they were gallantly repulsed by the commandant of the Pintados,
+Don Diego de Quiņones, who, in a wooden fort, sustained a siege of
+ten days, during which time the Dutch made four assaults, in which
+many were killed, but at last they were compelled to re-embark, and
+they retired to Malacca. The following year the same armament of ten
+ships came against Playa Honda. The Governor despatched against them,
+the Colonel Don Juan Ronquillo, with six galleons and two galleys; they
+came to an action on the 14th of April, 1617, and the two commodores
+being engaged, Don Juan Ronquillo sunk his adversary's ship, called
+the Sun of Holland; two other ships were burnt, and the rest fled
+with precipitation. The Spaniards, however, were not able to pursue
+them, as they had suffered much in the engagement, and had lost the
+galleon St. Mark. After this action, Don Geronimo de Silva returned
+from Molucca, and the Oidor Alcarez resigned to him his office, the
+duties of which he had discharged with great applause. In October,
+Don Geronimo ordered the seven galleons that had been so severely
+handled in the last engagement, to be laid up in Marinduque. The two
+ships for Acapulco were despatched in the worst season of the year,
+during the hurricane months, and they were both lost, one on the
+coast of Lobo, and the other on that of Galban. This reflected no
+great credit on the wisdom and prudence of the Governor.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1618.
+
+    The Administration of Don Alonzo Faxardo.
+
+
+On the 2d of July, 1618, arrived Don Alonzo Faxardo, of the order of
+Alcantara, of Murcia, and on the day following he took possession
+of the government of these islands. His Majesty had appointed him
+chief of an armament which he had intended to send by the Straits of
+Magellan, to the relief of Don Juan de Silva, to drive the Dutch from
+these seas; but it was delayed by his sending the forces destined for
+the Philippines, to the relief of the Emperor of Germany, Ferdinand
+the Second. The voyage on this account did not take place, until the
+death of Silva was known, when his Majesty named Faxardo as Governor,
+charging him to be careful of the interests of the Indians, who had
+suffered much in the late struggles, and promising ample rewards
+to those Spaniards, who should make this an object of their special
+attention.
+
+A short time after his arrival, the Dutch appeared in those seas,
+not with the intention of attempting Manila, as they were aware of
+the difficulty of the undertaking, but to intercept the galleons from
+Acapulco, richly laden with bullion. For this purpose they cruized
+with three ships off Cape Espiritu Santo, taking their station in the
+strait of St. Bernardino, as the galleons coming from Acapulco were
+in the constant habit of taking that route. On the 25th of February
+the Dutch got sight of them; they bore up, and ordered them to strike
+their colours, when a severe engagement took place. The Spaniards,
+under the veil of night, and in the confusion which prevailed,
+separated and escaped, one arriving at Palapag, and the other at
+Borongo, on the coast of Ybabao, where the cargoes were all saved,
+though the ships were lost. That the same misfortune might not occur
+again, the Governor ever after gave the commanders secret instructions,
+changing their route each voyage. On the 24th of August, this year,
+Friar Miguel Garcia Serrano, of the order of St. Augustine, late
+Bishop of New Segovia, took possession of the Archbishopric of Manila.
+
+In the year 1623, upon the canonization of St. Ignacio and
+St. Francisco Xavier, the friars of that order celebrated a grand
+festival, and those of Zebu, desirous of imitating them, likewise
+celebrated one, at which all the Jesuits of the island of Bohol were
+present, leaving very few Spaniards in that island. The defenceless
+state of it induced two or three Indians to persuade the rest to rebel,
+assuring them that the Devil had appeared, ordering them not to pay
+tribute to the Spaniards, but to retire to the mountains, and erect a
+chapel, where they should worship him, and he would give them every
+thing they required, and defend them from the Spaniards. This was
+quite sufficient to set all the island in a flame, two towns alone
+remaining faithful to the Spaniards. The Alcalde Mayor of Zebu,
+immediately upon notice of this insurrection, sent fifty Spaniards,
+and one thousand friendly Indians to Bohol, who attacked the rebels
+with great vigour, made considerable slaughter, and completely routed
+them. This ought to have undeceived them, but they were obstinate,
+and fortified themselves on a rock, which, however, afforded them
+little defence, as our people being protected by their shields from
+the arrows and stones they hurled down, gained the height, and made
+great havock among them, making prisoners all that were not able
+to save themselves by flight. The Alcalde Mayor hanged some of the
+ringleaders, and pardoned the remainder; but insensible to this favour,
+they spurned at the proffered pardon, and fled to the mountains,
+to which, six months after, the Alcalde returned, and thoroughly
+quelled the insurrection.
+
+The bad example of the people of Bohol was followed by those of the
+island of Leyte, and was fomented by an Indian who was not suspected
+of disaffection. This was Bancao, a petty chief of Dimasava, who had
+received Legaspi with great attention, and had accompanied him to Zebu,
+where he was baptized, for which conduct Philip the Second had sent
+him a royal order, granting him many privileges. He had been very
+faithful to the Spaniards in his youth, but turned traitor in his
+old age. In imitation of those of Bohol, he raised an insurrection
+among the Indians in the island of Leyte, so that it became necessary
+to send a force against them. Although they saw the Spaniards were
+superior in numbers to them, they were not dismayed, and received
+them firmly; but in a short time they fled with precipitation. In
+this flight Bancao was killed, having been transfixed by a lance:
+his head was placed on a pole, to serve as a warning to others,
+which had so good an effect, that order was immediately restored.
+
+This year an expedition was sent to the mountains of Igorrotes,
+where there were mines of gold, and where the Indians were of fairer
+complexion, with the small eyes of the Chinese. It was imagined that
+when Limahon was in Pangasinan, many of his people, pressed by hunger,
+fled to the mountains, and mixed with the inhabitants, from which
+intercourse resulted this cast, so different from the rest.
+
+This expedition, under charge of Francisco Carriņo de Valdes, head
+of the provinces of Pangasinan and Ylocos, marched in good order
+seven days, and on the eighth arrived in the town of the mines,
+where the natives received them well; but the Spaniards placed too
+much confidence in them. The Igorrotes, when least expected, rose on
+them, and treacherously murdered the chief of the friendly Indians, on
+which de Valades retired, to wait a better opportunity. The following
+year the expedition was expected to be repeated, but it was not, as
+it became necessary for the troops to march to Cagayan, to quell an
+insurrection among the Indians of that province. Many expeditions have
+since taken place to these mountains, but with such ill success, that
+the Indians of this district remain independent to this hour. They,
+however, trade with the Spaniards in gold, wax, and tobacco, in return
+for cattle; and the Augustine friars have succeeded, in converting
+to Christianity, a few who live in the towns near the mountains.
+
+The Governor persevered in pacific measures as much as possible,
+although those measures were deemed disgraceful. He had much
+domestic uneasiness on account of his wife, Dona Catalina Zembrano,
+who had an illicit connection, and was accustomed to steal out from
+the palace to a particular house, where she was at last discovered
+with her lover by Faxardo, who going his rounds through the city, as
+was his custom, from information, no doubt, which he had received,
+entered into the house in which this lady was with her paramour,
+and found her in a situation, which rendered her guilt sufficiently
+manifest. Don Alonzo, a man of high honour, severely felt this injury,
+and was determined to take proper vengeance. He ordered a confessor
+to be called to her; and the ceremony at an end, unmoved by the
+tears and persuasion of the priest to the contrary, he stabbed her
+with his own hand. The unworthy paramour saved his life by flight,
+and thus escaped the vengeance of the Governor. Don Alonzo soon after
+fell into a profound melancholy, of which he died in two years, and
+was buried in the church of the Franciscans, August, 1624. By his
+death Don Geronimo de Silva succeeded to the military government,
+and the civil government became vested in the Royal Audience. In a
+short time after, a fleet of seven Dutch men of war appeared off Playa
+Honda, and many of their soldiers landed on the island of Corrigidor,
+and took prisoners or killed such Indians as fell in their way. The
+Governor proceeded against them with five galleons and two large
+galleys, and fell in with them on the coast of Playa Honda, when the
+Dutch attempted to escape; but our commander's ship, by superiority
+of sailing, prevented it, when a warm engagement took place, and a
+Spaniard was killed close to the Governor. It is necessary to mention
+this accident, as he thought himself in great danger, and was so
+alarmed by it, that he ordered the ships to retire to Cavite, where
+he was received with the contempt he merited; the people imputing
+the loss of the victory to his cowardice. Complaints were made to
+the Royal Audience, who confined him in the fort of Santiago, where
+he remained until he was released by the Governor who succeeded him,
+ad interim, Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the order of Santiago.
+
+Don Fernando had been in Manila before this time, having there made a
+most honourable matrimonial connection; and having accumulated a good
+fortune, he went with his wife to Mexico, and from thence to Madrid,
+having been sent thither by his near relation, the Viceroy of New
+Spain, Marquis de Cerralbo. Having returned to Mexico and this vacancy
+in the government of Manila occurring, it was given to him ad interim,
+and he arrived there in June 1625.
+
+He was received in Manila with great satisfaction, as they knew he
+was prudent, and well acquainted with these islands: this he had
+sufficiently shewn in the measures he had adopted for the protection
+of our commerce, by means of the ships he had built at Cavite for
+that purpose. He ordered the Alcalde Mayor of Cagayan to land on the
+island of Formosa, and fortify it in that part of Fanchuy which was
+the nearest to Cagayan, in order, with greater facility to oppose the
+Dutch, who, the year before, had raised forts on the opposite side,
+called Tayguan, with the intention of obstructing the commerce of
+China with Manila. The Alcalde Mayor executed his commission, and
+constructed works sufficiently extensive to accommodate the troops,
+and the Dominican friars, who had gone there to convert the natives;
+and who exerted themselves with such zeal, that in a short time they
+built several towns, and were able to number the greater part of the
+natives, among the professors of our faith.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1626.
+
+    Of the Administration of Don Juan Niņo de Tabora.
+
+
+Don Juan Niņo de Tabora, knight of the order of Calatrava, was named
+as Governor of the Philippines. He embarked for his government with
+six hundred troops, and several officers, who had served with him
+in Flanders, among whom were Don Lorenzo Olaso y Ochotegui, who came
+with the appointment of Colonel. Tabora arrived safely at Manila, and
+entered upon his government on the 29th of June, 1626. He possessed
+a fund of military knowledge, which was of great importance, at this
+period, to the Philippines, and he immediately provided a sufficient
+force to protect their commerce, and secure the respect of their
+neighbours. In ten months after his arrival, he had collected eight
+large ships of war, four smaller for the commerce of Acapulco, and two
+still smaller for the protection of the intercourse with Molucca. With
+this armament, and with two ships, which were expected from New Spain
+with men and money, he determined to attack the Dutch on the island
+of Formosa; but the arrival of the two ships being retarded very
+considerably, he was not ready to proceed with the expedition, until
+the middle of August. The Royal Audience, considering the approach
+of the monsoon, and apprehensive of the loss of the squadron, and
+that the object of the expedition might be thus defeated, represented
+their fears to the Governor, and passed an order that it should not
+sail. Having no faith, however, in what he considered as idle chimeras,
+Tabora left Cavite, and arrived at Cape Boxeador; where, finding the
+north winds had set in, and that it was impossible to make head against
+them, after repeated unsuccessful attempts, he bore away for Cavite;
+and the only advantage resulting, from his pertinacious opposition
+to the opinion of the Royal Audience, was the relief he sent in some
+small vessels, to the Spaniards in the island of Formosa.
+
+A vessel soon after arrived from China, and gave the intelligence that
+the Dutch were lying in wait at Macao, for the merchantmen expected
+from Manila in China. The Portuguese requested, that part of the
+armament might be allowed to convoy them, offering to contribute to
+the expenses. The Governor, accordingly, sent with them two large
+galleons, with a patache, ordering the commodore, after he had seen
+the Portuguese safe, to run up the coast from Macao to Sincapura
+in search of the Dutch, wintering at Siam, for which indulgence he
+was ordered to make the necessary presents to the King. Don Juan
+de Alcaraz, who was the commodore, punctually obeyed his orders: he
+arrived at Macao, and not meeting with the Dutch, who had quitted it
+precipitately, on notice of his appearance in this quarter, he passed
+on to Siam, where, finding the Dutch protected by the Siamese, he
+burned some of their junks, and made prisoners the ambassadors whom
+the Siamese were accustomed, at certain periods, to send to China,
+with their acknowledgment of the sovereignty of the Emperor. Upon this
+occasion our arms acquired such credit, that, during the whole of this
+government, the Dutch made no further attempt against these islands.
+
+In the year 1628 two ships arrived with the usual supplies from
+Acapulco, and in them came Friar Hernando Guerrero, of the order of
+St. Augustine, Bishop of Cagayan, and the Governor's intended bride,
+Doņa Magdalena Zaldivar y Mendoza, with whom he had entered into a
+treaty of marriage while at Mexico, and had obtained leave from the
+King for that purpose. The wedding feasts, however, were no impediment
+to the operations of the government. The Moors of Jolo continually
+infested these islands; those, in particular, which were the more
+remote from the capital, were kept in perpetual alarm, and nothing was
+talked of but the depredations committed, and the prisoners taken. To
+chastise these insults, a squadron was sent against Jolo, under the
+command of Don Christoval de Lugo. He arrived safe, and landed all
+his people without any resistance, the Indians having, in a cowardly
+manner, abandoned their town, and retired, with their King, to a fort
+situated on the top of a hill. The Spaniards plundered these houses, in
+which the friendly Indians diligently assisted, enriching themselves by
+the spoils, which consisted of rice, gunpowder, brimstone, small-arms,
+&c. They did not pursue them to the fort on the top of the hill, in
+which they had taken refuge; but, after having completely destroyed the
+town, they embarked for Manila. In passing by the island of Basilan,
+they landed, burned the principal town, and destroyed all the trees,
+as a punishment for the aid which these Indians had afforded to those
+of Jolo, in the last incursions they made.
+
+The following year, a sacrilege was committed in the cathedral, which
+affected the mind of the Archbishop to that degree, that he died of
+melancholy. He was one of the most devout prelates who had occupied
+the archbishopric. He was interred in the church of St. Augustine.
+
+After his death, there was a dispute between the ecclesiastical
+Cabildo and the Bishop of Zebu, as to who should succeed ad interim
+to the archbishopric, when the Royal Audience determined in favour of
+the Bishop, conformable to the bull of Pius V. The Moors in Jolo and
+Caumocones again commenced their ravages in the islands: nothing was
+secure in the towns on the coasts; neither friars, Indians, churches,
+or ornaments; all were objects of their enmity. Notice was, without
+loss of time, given to the Governor; he despatched a fleet, commanded
+by Don Lorenzo Olaso, for the double purpose of making peace with the
+Indians of Mindanao, as they requested, and to retaliate upon those
+of Jolo. He arrived at Jolo, landed his people, and marched up to the
+fort on the hill, to which, as usual, the Indians had retired. The
+General believed it no difficult matter to reduce the fort, and
+gave orders to attack it accordingly; he shewed, in the attack,
+great personal valour, and acting the part of a common soldier,
+as well as a general, was, with two of his captains, killed. As no
+officer remained to command them, the men retired to their ships;
+and, without doing anything else than laying waste the country, they
+returned to Manila in haste, and in disgrace, the Moors becoming more
+insolent than they were before. The Indians of the province of Caraga,
+in Mindanao, observing that the Spaniards were unable to subdue their
+countrymen, put to death some of the friars and Spaniards who were
+living among them, and declared open rebellion in most of the towns of
+the province.--The remaining friars and Spaniards, took refuge in the
+towns which continued faithful to their cause; and, in a short time,
+relief arriving from Manila, order was again restored.
+
+This year several embassies arrived at Manila: one from Japan
+from the Governor of Nangasaquy; and the King of Saxuma, likewise,
+sent ambassadors, seeking redress for the ravages our galleons had
+committed in the harbour of Siam, on two junks of his nation, and
+out of which had been taken some of the royal merchandize, which
+they considered a great sacrilege, and which had so irritated them,
+that the real object of the embassy was to reconnoitre the place,
+with a view to take vengeance for this insult. A Governor of one of
+the Chinese provinces, sent an embassy to request the continuation of
+the commercial intercourse; and the King of Cambodia, who was at war
+with the King of Siam, sent to request the protection of the Spaniards,
+offering the commerce of his kingdom, and liberty to form a dock for
+the building of ships. The Governor received all these with presents,
+and dismissed them with urbanity and kindness: he accepted the offer
+of the King of Cambodia, and sent some ship-builders for the purpose
+of constructing a vessel there: with them went four Dominicans to
+preach the gospel; but when they arrived, finding the King dead, and
+little disposition in his son, who succeeded him, to admit the catholic
+religion, they all returned to Manila without effecting any thing.
+
+The Governor, who was determined to lose no opportunity that offered
+to build ships, finished one in the port of Cavite; but so badly
+constructed, that, at the commencement of her voyage for Acapulco,
+she foundered in the port: she was, however, hove up, and sufficiently
+repaired to proceed on her voyage the following year. By this means,
+and the arrival here of the other ships in 1631, no ship remained
+in Acapulco to send to the Philippines; and the Viceroy of Mexico
+despatched two pataches with the ordinary relief. In one of these came
+Don Francisco Roxas y Oņate, Oidor of Mexico, as inspector of the
+Royal Audience, and other tribunals; and his office to continue two
+years. He was well received, and the Governor supported his authority
+whilst he lived; by means of which, he made his visit pleasant,
+although he suspended two Oidors. His Excellency, on the 22d of July
+1632, died of a dysentery, occasioned by being exposed to the rain
+and sun, during his visits to and from Cavite, in the performance of
+his office, in which he was extremely diligent, having made a bridge
+over the river of Manila, repaired the fortifications of the town,
+and constructed several works in Cavite.
+
+Don Lorenzo Olaso had been named by the Viceroy of Mexico to succeed
+him pro tempore. Nothing particular occurred under his administration,
+which only lasted a year, when Don Juan Zerezo of Salamanca was
+appointed to succeed as Governor ad interim. Immediately on his arrival
+at Manila, with a view to repress the insults of the Moors, and on
+the representation of the Jesuits, he determined to form a garrison
+at Zamboanga. He appointed Don Juan de Chaves to the command, with an
+adequate force, and orders, after destroying the towns of the Moors,
+to erect a fort in the situation which Friar Vera had pitched upon,
+a little distant from the port of Caldera, where it was necessary
+to maintain a detachment to guard the shipping. This situation is
+most beautiful; but, having no water, the defect was supplied by
+digging a channel from the river, through which the water flows in
+great abundance, and, passing by the wall of the fort, falls into
+the sea. The first stone of the fort was laid on the 23d of June,
+1635. Many of the Spaniards opposed this plan under different pretexts,
+and experience has shewn what little purpose this fort has answered,
+its only use being to enrich one military man, who is Governor for
+three years, and who draws twenty or thirty thousand dollars profit
+from the supplies furnished the soldiers. The Moors, not in the
+least checked by the fort of Zamboanga, have continued, to this hour,
+committing the same ravages as before; and the Indians, who are each
+taxed a measure of rice for its maintenance, have received neither
+security or benefit from it.
+
+It has been too justly observed by Seņor Solorzano, that whatever is
+established with a view to benefit the Indians, universally fails of
+attaining that end; nor is this to be wondered at, as every regulation
+brought forward with this avowed intention is always so contrived,
+as to contribute not to the advantage of the oppressed Indian, but
+solely to that of the person exercising the chief authority.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1635.
+
+    The Administration of Don Sebastian Corcuera.
+
+
+On the 25th of June, 1635, Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, who had
+been Governor of Panama, took possession of this government, and the
+same day Seņor Guerrero took possession of the archbishopric, although
+the bulls had not yet arrived. Dissensions immediately begun between
+these two, originating between the Dominicans and bearded friars,
+respecting the division of their provinces, and on which account
+his Excellency was determined to be revenged of the Archbishop,
+the very first opportunity. An occasion very soon presented itself:
+the Archbishop having taken a female slave from an artilleryman,
+because he had an illicit intercourse with her, the artilleryman met
+her one day in the street, and, for some unknown cause, murdered her,
+taking refuge in the church of St. Augustine.
+
+The Governor ordered the troops to seize him in the church, without
+first applying to the friars; they obeyed their orders, seized
+the criminal, and delivered him up to their commanding officer,
+who sentenced him to death. The sentence was executed in front of
+the church of St. Augustine, a place which had never been used for
+public punishment: the Archbishop attempted to prevent the violation
+of the church privileges, but his attempt proved ineffectual.
+
+During the disputes between the Governor and the Archbishop, the
+Moors were ravaging our towns, and for the space of eight months
+committed horrible atrocities. His Excellency determined to go in
+person to chastise them. He sailed from Manila with a squadron on the
+2d of February, 1637, and having arrived at Lamitan, the residence of
+Corralat, petty sovereign of Mindanao, he possessed himself of it with
+ease. Corralat retired to a hill well defended by batteries, and the
+best troops he had. The Governor attacked him, but after losing many
+Spaniards, he sounded a retreat. The day following he renewed the
+attack by a road more accessible, when he possessed himself of the
+fort, and made great slaughter of the Moors, who threw themselves
+headlong over the precipice in their confusion. The Governor now
+retired to Zamboanga, where he received the chief of Buhayen, and those
+of the island of Basilan, upon both of whom their fears had operated
+to beg for peace, promising to consider Corralat as a common enemy,
+and receive Friars into their dominions.
+
+From Zamboanga he passed to Jolo, and sat down before the famous
+hill fort of the island, and which the Spaniards had never been able
+to possess themselves of. He found it, however, so well fortified,
+that after attempting to batter it, he was obliged to have recourse
+to some other mode of attack. He prepared five mines, and springing
+them at the time of assault, he blew up part of the works, with
+fifty men; but the Spaniards advanced so slow, that the Moors had
+time to recover themselves, and returning to the charge, repulsed
+them effectually. The next day two more mines were sprung, which did
+great damage. The Spaniards then advanced rapidly to the remaining
+fortification, but behind the rampart which had been blown up, contrary
+to their expectation, they found another work erected, and by which
+means they were repulsed. The Governor observing the little effect
+produced by these assaults, determined to surround the hill, though a
+league in circumference, with a wall and forts, converting the siege
+into a strict blockade. This measure, however, proved by no means
+adequate to the end in view, the besieged defending themselves with
+great resolution, and destroying numbers of the assailants. It was,
+therefore, resolved to construct a battery on a position completely
+commanding the hill. The Moors on this were desirous of capitulating,
+but the Governor commanded them to surrender at discretion. Thinking
+these terms harsh, they became desperate, and assaulted the Spanish
+camp; but not being able to force it, they took the opportunity of
+quitting the hill by the back part of it, which had been left for
+the time lightly guarded.
+
+His Excellency found himself in possession of the enemies position,
+and all their riches, with the Queen and her nephew, Tancun. The
+Queen requested permission to bring the King and his chiefs into the
+presence of the Governor; he consented, and she took that opportunity
+of escaping. The Governor then sent Tancun for the same purpose, and he
+returned with the keys of the royal coffers; but by the carelessness
+of the guard, being left too much at liberty, he contrived to get
+possession of all the treasure, with which he secured his retreat. His
+Excellency leaving a garrison of two hundred Spaniards, and two hundred
+Pampangos in Jolo, returned to Manila, where he was received with
+great honours, as conqueror of Jolo and Mindanao. It is undeniable
+that Seņor Corcuera reduced the inhabitants of Jolo and Mindanao, and
+would have retained his conquest, had greater harmony subsisted between
+the Jesuits, and the commanders of the different garrisons. He was
+successful as a soldier, but unfortunate in his choice of the means
+to secure his acquisition. The dissensions between the Jesuits and
+the military rose to such a pitch, that at last all the positions were
+abandoned, and all our exertions, and sacrifices of men and resources,
+rendered of no avail.
+
+By the year 1639, the number of Chinese in these islands had
+increased to thirty thousand, most of them cultivators in Calamba
+and in Biņan. Among these began a disaffection, which spreading to
+those of Santa Cruz, Parian, and Manila, they at last converted the
+church of St. Peter Macati into a kind of strong hold, in which they
+established their head-quarters. The Governor sent against them two
+hundred Spaniards, and a large body of Indians, who easily dislodged
+them from this position. Dispersed into separate bands, they plundered
+the houses of the Spaniards, and some Indian towns, committing great
+atrocities. The Spaniards followed them, making dreadful havock among
+them, from November 1639, to March following, when being reduced in
+number to seven thousand, they surrendered. Very few of our people
+were killed, but Manila was reduced to great distress, by the loss of
+so many of its useful class of citizens, as unquestionably the Chinese
+were. The Indians fortunately had remained perfectly tranquil, which
+was rather to be attributed to their fixed hatred of the Chinese,
+than their attachment to the Spaniards.
+
+In the year 1642, the Archbishop Guerreo visited his diocese, and in
+the harbour of Naryan, in Mindoro, a pirate seized his vessel, with
+all his equipage, he himself, with great difficulty, saving himself by
+flight. This disaster had such an effect upon him, that he died on the
+2d of July at Manila, and was buried in the church of St. Augustine.
+
+The kingdom of Portugal, which had been united to the crown of
+Castile in 1640, shook off the Spanish yoke, and electing the Duke of
+Braganza King, the possessions of that nation in India immediately
+followed the example of the mother country, and declared for that
+family. This year the Dutch reduced Malacca, and by this conquest,
+and the separation of the Spanish and Portuguese interest, it was
+apprehended they would renew their attempts on the Philippines, which
+had now, for many years, remained unmolested by them. This conjecture
+proved true; they commenced their operations by stationing, for two
+successive years, a squadron in the route of the ships from Acapulco,
+but the Jesuits, in the island of Samar, frustrated their design. They
+then planned the capture of the island of Formosa, with a view to
+interrupt the commerce to China, and as a ladder for the conquest of
+the Philippines. They proceeded on the enterprize in the year 1642,
+with four ships, a patache, and several smaller vessels, and in a few
+days succeeded in their object, the island having surrendered. Great
+consternation prevailed at Manila on information of this conquest,
+as it was expected that the Dutch would follow up their success by
+an attack on that capital; but the glory of repelling these intruders
+was reserved for the successor of Seņor Corcuera.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1644.
+
+    The Administration of Don Diego Faxardo.
+
+
+Don Diego Faxardo, Knight of the order of Santiago, took possession
+of his government on the 11th of August, 1644, and immediately gave
+proof of his unrelenting disposition by his conduct towards Seņor
+Corcuera, by confining him in the fort of Santiago, in which he
+remained five years.
+
+The new Governor found these islands infested by Dutch squadrons, and
+to enable himself to meet them with effect, he deemed it necessary
+to unite the whole of the Spanish force, dispersed through the
+different garrisons. He directed the officer in command at Zamboanga,
+to enter into an amicable arrangement with Corralat, King of Mindanao,
+which was effected very satisfactorily, through the mediation of a
+friar. He likewise directed the officer commanding at Jolo to adopt
+similar measures with the King of that island, and evacuating all
+the forts, to bring all the Spaniards to Manila; but this was not to
+be effected so easily, Salicala, hereditary Prince of the kingdom,
+having gone to Batavia, soliciting assistance from the Dutch, to
+drive the Spaniards from the island. They, however, spared him only
+two ships, with which trifling aid, having made many attempts against
+our principal position, which was defended vigorously by Don Estevan
+Ugalde, a valiant Biscayan, the Dutch retired to Batavia, promising
+the Moors to return next year, with a more effective force. The
+Jesuit friar was, in the mean time, commissioned to make peace with
+them; which he effected on very advantageous terms. Jolo being thus
+evacuated, the Dutch arrived at the appointed time with the promised
+assistance; and finding that the Spaniards had retired to Zamboanga,
+they determined on attempting the capture of the fort of Caldera,
+in Mindanao, but they were repulsed with such loss, that they made
+a rapid retreat to Batavia.
+
+The following year, the Dutch again appeared in these seas, with a
+squadron of twelve ships, when eleven of them remaining on the coast of
+Batan, the commodore came forward alone, to reconnoitre Cavite. Seņor
+Corcuera, who was in confinement in the fort, as already mentioned,
+immediately saw the error the Dutch commander had committed, in not
+making the attack with his whole force, while the place was in an
+unguarded and defenceless state. Every advantage was taken of the
+error, and Cavite was furnished, without delay, with the necessary
+reinforcements, and supplies of ammunition and provisions. On the
+third day the Dutch squadron made their attack, but the Governor,
+Andras Azaldegui, a very active man, defended the place so effectually,
+that great slaughter ensued, and the Dutch General received a wound,
+of which he died. On this they retired, and disembarked in Pampanga,
+where the Alcalde Mayor of the province having collected six hundred
+Pampangos, and fortified himself as well as possible in the convent
+of Abucay, the Dutch assaulted him, when the Indians fled in such
+disorder, and with such precipitation, that four hundred of them were
+killed in the pursuit. The Dutch not deeming it prudent to remove
+far from their ships, returned on board, and disembarked a second
+time in the town of Samal, where the Spaniards having gone to Manila,
+the Indians alone remained, who repulsed them, and compelled them to
+take refuge in their ships.
+
+They then took their station close to Mareveles, to intercept our
+commerce, and while here they had information that a galleon, built at
+Leyte, was on her way to Manila. They despatched six ships to take her,
+but the commander understanding that the Dutch were in these seas,
+put into a harbour, and fortifying the entrance with batteries,
+remained perfectly secure from all insult, and the Dutch deeming
+the attempt unjustifiable, returned to Batavia, without reaping any
+advantage from their expedition.
+
+Salicala, son of the King of Jolo, a turbulent character,
+notwithstanding the peace he had concluded with the Spaniards, begun
+to infest our seas with a squadron, which committed great depredations
+in every quarter; and Cachile, Lord of Tup Tup, in Borneo, having
+followed his example, it was found necessary to send against them an
+adequate force. The Spaniards encountered the squadron of Cachile
+between Masbate and Burias, and an engagement took place, in which
+he was killed, and his fleet dispersed. Immediately on this Salicala
+retired to Jolo, where his attention became sufficiently occupied, in
+disputes respecting the succession to the throne. The Moors of Borneo,
+imitating the conduct of the Indians of Jolo in their piracies, the
+Governor sent Major Monforte with orders to chastise them severely,
+as a warning to the rest. Monforte landed in Borneo, burning and
+destroying all the towns within his reach, together with great
+quantities of provisions, and a number of vessels, and making about
+two hundred prisoners, thus retaliating on them for their piratical
+attacks on us. Exclusive of these continual depredations of the Moors
+and Dutch, the provinces in Luzon were by no means in a tranquil state.
+
+A commotion, likewise, was begun in Palapag, by murdering the Jesuit
+friar, who was the curate of the place; and, to enhance the criminality
+of the action, and comprehend every one in the rebellion, Sumoroy, who
+was the assassin, was for two days parading the town, avowing publicly
+that he killed the friar; and, setting at liberty two insurgents,
+whom the Jesuits had confined, he ordered the people to plunder the
+church and convent: from this source, the insurrection spread through
+the whole island. The Camarines imitated the conduct of the people of
+Palapag, in every thing but the murder of the friars. The island of
+Zebu, likewise, notwithstanding its garrison, wavered in its loyalty;
+and, indeed, all the islands were ripe for rebellion: the people of
+Caraga, however, were the most violent, having murdered many Spaniards
+and Friars. There is no question that the Bisayas would have been
+lost on this occasion, had not a stop been put to these atrocities
+in due time.
+
+The Governor sent a force to Palapag, and ordered that four hundred
+Indians of Lutao, who had been lately converted from Mahometanism,
+should be incorporated with this force sent from Manila, and
+jointly attack the rebels. The Jesuit friar, Vincente Damian,
+took compassion on the misguided Indians, and attempted to persuade
+them to return to their obedience; but, thinking themselves strong
+enough to overcome the Spaniards, they would not listen to reason,
+and fortified themselves on a hill, which Sumoroy had made his head
+quarters. Captain Roxas commanded the Spaniards, Don Andres Azaldeguy,
+who was the proper commanding officer, having had orders from the
+government, to go and secure the property, in a ship which had been
+lost on the coast of Camarines. Roxas was a man of ability and bravery,
+and came to the resolution of assaulting the hill in the night, when
+the rebels would be less on their guard. The Spaniards arrived at the
+outposts, when they were discovered, and notice given to Sumoroy. The
+precipitation with which the Indians fled is incredible: it resembled
+that of a flock of goats, our people following them, and making great
+slaughter. Sumoroy attempted to escape; but his people killed him,
+with the view of ingratiating themselves with the Spaniards, and
+delivered up his head to Roxas, who placed it on a pole as a warning
+to the rest. The friars being now able to return to their duty,
+in the respective towns, soon reduced the discontented to obedience.
+
+The ringleader of the rebellion in Caraga was an Indian, named Dabao,
+who was not in the least suspected of disaffection. He entered
+one day into the fort, bringing with him eight men with their hands
+bound, apparently with the view of surrendering them; but yet, at the
+same time, so loosely bound, as to escape when they chose. When the
+Spanish officer came out to receive them, Dabao struck him on the head
+with his sword, and the eight men, immediately releasing themselves,
+unexpectedly attacked the people in the fort. They made such carnage,
+that only one friar and five soldiers escaped, by throwing themselves
+from the wall, and retiring to the convent, where they fortified
+themselves. The Indians immediately forsook the town and fled to the
+mountains, when the friar, and the Spaniards who were in the convent,
+built a boat, and retired along the coast to another town, to which
+the insurrection had not spread.
+
+The Governor sent them relief from Manila, and offered a pardon
+to those who should return to their towns, and their allegiance as
+before. The Spaniards, however, broke their word, and hanged many of
+the ringleaders.
+
+On the day of Saint Andrew, which was the anniversary of the victory
+the Spaniards obtained over Limahon, about eight o'clock at night,
+an earthquake happened, which destroyed almost all Manila, with the
+exception of the church and convent of St. Augustine. The public
+edifices, in particular, were nearly all thrown down and destroyed,
+and more than six hundred people buried in the ruins: some were found
+alive between the stones and the wood, who had remained there even
+three days. The calamity reached the towns of the islands; in Cagayan,
+a hill was rased from its foundation, and fell on a town, burying in
+its fall all the inhabitants. In some parts the earth sunk; and, in
+others, torrents of sand burst out, overwhelming man and beast. Many
+other extraordinary changes occurred in the course of sixty days,
+during which a succession of earthquakes prevailed. The people of
+Manila left the city to live in huts in the fields, until it was
+ascertained that they might return in safety to their houses. It
+was said that the image of St. Francis, placed in the house of an
+Indian of Dilao, sweated most copiously during this calamity, and
+shed abundance of tears; in consequence, he was elected patron of
+earthquakes, and is designated St. Francis of Tears.
+
+As a proof of that harshness which characterized Seņor Faxardo,
+it will be sufficient to mention his conduct to Christoval Romero,
+whom the Viceroy of Mexico had sent, to bring him intelligence of the
+state of these islands, two years having elapsed without the usual
+ship having appeared at Acapulco. He arrived at the port of Lampon,
+and, understanding that the Dutch were infesting these seas, he landed
+the silver, and despatched it to Manila, in order that he might with
+less risk get round. Soon after he had sent away the silver, the Dutch
+arrived, and entered the port with their launches. Romero being far
+inferior in force to the enemy, burnt his vessel, as he saw no chance
+of saving it, and came to Manila by land. Everybody considered this
+man as entitled to great praise for his conduct on the occasion,
+and expected that he would be well received and rewarded; but the
+rigorous Governor, on the plea that the burning of the launch was
+an act of cowardice, imprisoned him, and condemned him to lose his
+head. All Manila clamoured against this sentence; and the object of
+it appealed to the Royal Audience, who revoked it. This rigour of the
+Governor was imputed to his not having been duly bribed by Romero;
+but nothing of that nature could be absolutely proved against him.
+
+About this time, the hospital or college of St. Juan de Letran was
+founded by Juan Geronimo Romero, who compassionating the situation of
+unfortunate orphans, took them into his house, and carefully brought
+them up. His Majesty being informed of this praise-worthy conduct, by a
+royal order protected the establishment; but granted so little in aid
+of it, that recourse was necessarily had to the contributions of the
+well disposed, in order to render it of more general use. It was, at
+length, removed to a spot behind the city: the boys were allowed a blue
+coat, cap, &c., and were supported, as in others, with the additional
+aid of a college pension, to enable them to pursue their studies at
+the university; the college having no establishment of this nature.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1653.
+
+    The Administration of Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara.
+
+
+The ship San Francisco Xavier arrived in Cavite in July, 1653, bringing
+the new Governor, Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara; the Archbishop
+of Manila, Don Miguel Poblete; the Bishop of Ylocos, Don Rodrigo de
+Cordinas, a Dominican; and the Oidor, Don Juan Bolivar. The Governor
+immediately, as was usual, sat in judgment on his predecessor, who,
+apprehensive that he might be deprived of his liberty, retired into
+the college of Jesuits, securing his personal safety in this sacred
+asylum. The Archbishop fixed the month of March for a jubilee, on
+which occasion an immense concourse of people assembled, and he, with
+great solemnity, invoked the blessing of the Almighty on these islands.
+
+Many calamities occurred during this administration, such as the
+small-pox, famine, and a dreadful earthquake, which ruined many
+edifices, and did much injury; but what affected the Governor much
+more than all these, was the revolt of the Indians and Chinese, and the
+ravages committed by the Moors of Mindanao. The Spaniards were at peace
+with Corrolat, King of Mindanao, and he appeared perfectly satisfied;
+but the chief men, turbulent and warlike, urged him to break it.
+
+The Governor sent two Jesuits and some Spaniards, in the nature of an
+embassy, to strengthen our existing amity with the King: when, without
+any respect for their characters as ambassadors, and, listening to
+the representations of his nephew Balatamay, he murdered them all,
+and excused his atrocity to the Governor of Zamboanga, throwing the
+blame on his nephew, whom, he alleged, he could not punish, on account
+of his great power in the state.
+
+In the letter which he wrote to the Governor of Manila, he laid
+the blame on the Jesuit, who was at the head of the embassy; thus
+indicating his intention, by these contradictory falsehoods, of
+gaining time to draw to his party the King of Jolo, and other chiefs
+of the Moluccas.
+
+Don Francisco Esteyvar, who was Governor of Zamboanga, despatched
+against him an armament of ten carracoas, whose rowers were Indians
+of Lutao, and who, though they had been converted to Christianity,
+felt for Corrolat as a countryman. Nothing could persuade them to row
+against the Moors, excusing themselves under various pretexts; and,
+although they could have been compelled, yet Don Fernando Bobadilla,
+who commanded the expedition, fearing that they would desert him in
+the time he most wanted them, and not desirous of exposing himself
+to such a risk, returned to Zamboanga.
+
+As the Spaniards had delayed the chastisement of the Moors for the
+murder of their ambassadors, they were induced, as might be expected,
+to commit still greater ravages than those they had yet been guilty of,
+and Don Sabiniano de Lara sent against them a considerable squadron,
+under the command of a man, valiant in the cabinet, but who proved the
+reverse in the field. He repeatedly showed a disposition to attack the
+Moors; but, on various pretexts, avoided coming to an engagement, and
+at last retired to Zebu, abandoning the cause, and leaving the Moors
+to return quietly to their own country. The Governor of Zamboanga,
+however, acting a different part, and determined to chastise the Moors,
+collected some vessels, and retaliated on their country, the ravages
+they had committed on ours.
+
+A slight disturbance, about this time, took place in the province of
+Pampanga, the cause of which was as follows: the late Governor having
+ordered a ship to be built in Camboxa, sent all the necessary workmen
+in a vessel, which he patched up, and launched for the purpose. After
+having completed their work, and when they were on their return from
+Camboxa to Manila, they encountered a storm, so violent, that the
+vessel was wrecked, and almost all the people perished. The galleon,
+San Francisco Xavier, was lost in the same storm on the coast of Samar,
+and two other ships which were going to Acapulco were forced back. The
+galleon, La Concepcion, too, was so unfortunate as to be driven back
+twice, having suffered severely in her rigging. To repair these losses,
+it was necessary that a greater quantity of wood should be cut than
+was customary, and that with unusual expedition. The Indians suffered
+always severely in these undertakings, as they were obliged to leave
+their towns for the mountains, where, their wages being very small,
+and their treatment very bad, they too often fell a sacrifice to
+sickness. The overseer of the present wood cutting was a man of
+great severity, and, as the wood was to be cut with all despatch,
+he had recourse, with the poor Indians, to measures which humanity
+could not justify, in order to expedite the work. Resisting this
+oppressive conduct, they mutinied, and the mutiny extended through
+all the towns, although they did not behave with disrespect to the
+church or friars. To quell this sedition before it took a wider
+range, the Governor took up his residence in Macabebe, which is the
+first town in the province, from Manila, taking with him some troops,
+and ordering into his presence some of the ringleaders. The Indians,
+naturally timid, had already repented of this disturbance, when the
+friars interfering, it was completely quelled, and the principal
+ringleader, an Indian named Maniago, was conveyed to Manila, being
+considered as too dangerous an inhabitant of the province.
+
+The bad example of those in Pampanga, induced the Indians of Pangasinan
+to rebel, electing as their King an Indian, called Marlong. They
+murdered the Alcalde Mayor of the province, with all his family, and,
+upon this being known in Manila, the Governor sent troops by sea
+and land to quell the sedition; but the Dominican friars possessed
+such power over the Indians, that they were restored to their duty
+without firing one gun; and their King, Marlong, was delivered up
+and hanged immediately.
+
+When the Indians of Pangasinan began their rebellion, they had sent
+emissaries to the provinces of Cagayan, Ylocos, and Zambales. In
+this last they made little progress, but in Ylocos, an Indian called
+Manzano, headed the rebellion, and, having collected a number of
+malcontents, he attacked the Spaniards, murdered the Friar Bacarra, and
+ill treated the Bishop Cardinas, on which the Alcalde Mayor and some
+friars fled to Manila; but the province of Pangasinan being by this
+time reduced to subjection, the troops were sent against Manzano, and
+soon reduced him likewise; and the ringleaders of both were executed.
+
+The civil wars of China were the cause of the conquest of that country
+by the Tartars. A Chinese named Ly, having urged the provinces
+remote from the court to revolt, and meeting with no opposition,
+arrived at the capital (Pekin), on which occasion, either from
+treason or cowardice, all abandoned the Emperor, who, seeing himself
+thus forsaken, cut off, according to their usual custom, the head of
+his daughter, that she might not fall into the hands of the rebels,
+and afterwards hanged himself on a tree, to avoid a similar disgrace.
+
+All acknowledged the authority of Ly, except the army, which had
+been opposed to the Tartars, and which, fearing the result of this
+rebellion, made peace with them, and they united against the common
+enemy, Ly, whom they soon drove from Pekin. Nothing more was ever
+heard of this rebellion; but, the Tartars having by this means got
+into the interior of China, though they met with some opposition,
+yet, finally, they reduced the whole of the empire, and it continues
+still under the Tartar dynasty.
+
+A poor Chinese, who had fled from Macao to Manila, where he was
+baptized by the name of Nicolas, and where he became a shop-keeper,
+afterwards went to Japan, where he married; but finding that he did
+not acquire riches quick enough, he entered the Chinese army, where he
+rose very high, being appointed General against the rebels. Zunchin,
+who was the last Emperor of the Chinese race, having hanged himself,
+as already noticed, Nicolas sided with the Tartars, by whom he was
+apparently well received. The Tartar Emperor heaped favours upon him,
+and named him as one of his tributary monarchs, under the title of
+Pignan, which signifies, conqueror of the south. By these means he
+lulled him into security; and having at last imprisoned him and all
+his family, completed his treachery by blowing him, and the greater
+part of them, up with gunpowder.
+
+His son, Cogseng, after this disgraceful transaction, turned pirate,
+and sufficiently revenged the death of his father by ravaging the
+Chinese coasts and islands. He was the conqueror of the island of
+Formosa, and the first who triumphed over the arms of Europeans. The
+Dutch, at this time, were complete masters of the island, they
+possessed two thousand Europeans, with sufficient artillery and ships;
+when hearing that the Chinese intended to attack them, they united
+all their forces in Tayguan; but the pirate, who came with about one
+hundred thousand men, landed on the opposite coast of the island,
+and immediately entered on the cultivation of the soil. A short time
+after, he invested the fort of Tayguan, and the Dutch capitulated,
+after a seven months siege, by which they were allowed to leave the
+island, with the ships they had in the port.
+
+Cogseng, elated with this success, determined to become master
+of the Philippines, for which purpose he sent the Friar Victorio
+Riccio, a Dominican, with the title of his Ambassador, to Manila,
+with a letter to the Governor, in which he required him to recognize
+him as Sovereign, and pay him tribute, threatening, if he refused,
+to ravage his coasts with his fleet. On the 18th of May, 1662, the
+friar arrived on this embassy at Manila, and delivered his letter
+with great secrecy, which, however, was not long withheld from the
+public. The Governor without delay began to levy troops, repair the
+fortifications, and recall all the forces to the capital; and in order
+to be as secure as possible, he sent away all the Chinese merchants,
+and others that were established in the islands. Upon this being
+known, it was whispered that the Governor intended to decapitate
+all the Chinese, who, being naturally cowards, believed the knife
+already at their throats, and retired to the mountains, from whence
+some passed, with great risk, in small boats to Formosa. The day on
+which the Governor called the Chinese chiefs before him, in order
+to intimate to them that they must retire, the remaining Chinese
+believing that they were all to be murdered, took up arms; but the
+Dominicans had sufficient influence to prevail on them to remain
+quiet. The Governor now sent back Friar Riccio to Cogseng with an
+answer to his letter, but, on Riccio's arrival, he found the pirate
+dead of a fever, Manila being by this means released from the danger
+with which she was threatened. The Chinese who had fled to Formosa,
+circulated a thousand calumnies, which would have cost Friar Riccio
+his life, if he had not been saved by the son of Cogseng, who had
+succeeded his father in power; but not possessing the warlike spirit
+of his father, he sent an Ambassador to Manila, to make a treaty
+of amity and commerce with the Spaniards. Although the expedition
+of Cogseng had not reached Manila, the place of its destination,
+the effects of it had fallen very heavy on the islands, as all the
+churches and convents near Manila were destroyed, to prevent the
+enemy from converting them into military stations.
+
+The Governor of Ternate had abandoned that station, by no means
+easy to be recovered, as the garrison was, in its retreat to Manila,
+accompanied by the Indians, called Mahhicas, who were the best friends
+to the Spanish cause, and who were then settled at the mouth of the
+river Marigondon, where their descendants remain to this hour. The
+garrisons too of Calamianes and Zamboanga evacuated these stations;
+and as they had always been a check on the Moors of Jolo and Mindanao,
+opportunities were by this means offered of committing with impunity
+such ravages in the Bisayas, that the friars were compelled to abandon
+the province of Calamianes.
+
+Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara had governed these islands with great
+prudence, but notwithstanding this, several articles of impeachment
+were preferred against him, and he was fined seventy thousand
+dollars. On appealing, however, to the council of the Indies, the
+sentence was reversed, and the fine remitted; but disgusted with
+the world, he retired to Malaga, his native country, and took the
+monastic habit.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1663.
+
+    The Administration of Don Diego Salcedo.
+
+
+Don Diego de Salcedo not being able, by the prevalence of the
+south-west-monsoon, to reach Manila by the ordinary route of the
+straits of Bernardino, he made Cagayan, where he landed, and travelled
+across the island to the city, and took possession of his government
+in September, 1663. Immediately on his arrival, he held out every
+encouragement to commerce, and preparation was made for sending the
+usual ship to Acapulco as early in the season as possible, in order
+to avoid those misfortunes which had too frequently taken place.
+
+This conduct of the Governor at first gave great satisfaction to
+the merchants of Manila; but they began very soon to discover his
+diligence was directed only to his own individual benefit, or that of
+his friends, as due care had been taken by them to buy up all the best
+goods, leaving in the market only those of inferior quality; and that
+no opportunity might be afforded to the merchants to procure a fresh
+supply of the different articles from the coast, he despatched the
+ship before the coasters could possibly arrive. By this means almost
+all the commerce of Acapulco, for that season, centered in him and
+his friends. About this time the news arrived of the death of Philip
+the Fourth, and the Archbishop was attacked with protracted illness,
+which ended in extreme debility, of which he died, 1667. The attention
+of Salcedo had been completely occupied by the violent disputes, which,
+during the whole period of his government, subsisted between him and
+the ecclesiastical authorities, and which terminated in the Commissary
+of the Inquisition of Mexico ordering him to be seized, and conveyed on
+board the patache destined for Acapulco, in which ship he died, 1669.
+
+
+                             END OF VOL. I.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTES TO VOLUME I.
+
+
+Note I.--Page 6.
+
+Were it not that we have this strong corroborative evidence of the
+veracity of other travellers on this subject, we should be inclined
+to attach a degree of impossibility to the existence of an European
+power of the first distinction, in an insular situation, similar to
+that of the Philippines, established there for nearly three centuries;
+yet through the whole of that period incessantly exposed to the inroads
+and depredations of the surrounding savage nations. But in the perusal
+of the following pages it will appear sufficiently manifest that the
+system of colonization pursued by the Spanish monarchy. From the first
+discovery of the New World, and without little, if any, amelioration,
+practised at this time, is least of all calculated for either the
+extension of permanent national dominion, the enlargement of the
+human mind, or the general dissemination of commercial industry. The
+discovery of the Cape of Good Hope and America produced a revolution
+among the European nations, which, aided by the phenomenon of the
+magnetic needle, stimulated the human mind to exertions far more
+arduous than had been effected by the Crusades; but the same spirit
+that animated Peter the Hermit seems to have presided over the counsels
+of the Spanish monarchy and directed its researches. To whatever
+cause it may be imputed, whether political, moral, or physical, this
+nation, so justly celebrated about this period, seems to have had
+little progressive tendency to improvement, and till within these few
+years the Spanish colonists of the eighteenth, in point of information
+and commercial enterprize, differed in no respect from those of the
+sixteenth century. The general dissemination of science, the gradual
+dispersion of prejudice, the consequent expansion of the human mind,
+and the example of surrounding nations, will doubtless have due
+effect on those noble qualities which characterized the Spaniard of
+the sixteenth century; and which, though enchained for succeeding
+ages by the peculiarity of their internal politics, still exist in
+the Spaniard of the nineteenth. No doubt, indeed, can be entertained
+that the changes likely to be produced during the present eventful
+period, will convert the reign of Ferdinand the VIIth into the æra of
+Spanish regeneration, in all that can be considered steady in council,
+great in arms, liberal in sentiment, and energetic in social as well
+as commercial intercourse. And we fully trust that the blind and
+persecuting influence which dictated the expulsion of the Chinese
+from the Philippines, and produced consequences nearly bordering on
+the annihilation of all industry and all commerce in the Islands,
+no longer disgraces their counsels or finds an advocate in the breast
+of one true Spaniard.
+
+
+Note II.--Page 8.
+
+We are well aware that at a distance from the seat of even an energetic
+government, abuses will exist which may sometimes be beyond its
+reach; but the instance before us, gives us at once an insight into
+that system of oppression and abuse of power which prevails in the
+Spanish settlements, and originated in the invariable practice of the
+Spanish court, of furnishing the opportunity to their dependants in
+the mother country to enrich themselves during a temporary residence
+in the colonies.
+
+
+Note III.--Page 12.
+
+The most authentic communications on this subject to the translator,
+are, that during the months of March, April, and May, the heat is
+sometimes oppressive; June, July, August, and September, forms the
+rainy season; the month of October of a doubtful character; November,
+December, January, and February, a heavenly spring: and that the
+climate in the whole is uncommonly healthy, the natives living to a
+great age.
+
+
+Note IV.--Page 13.
+
+If it were not sufficiently ascertained that the author of this work
+was not a foreigner, but a monastic Spaniard, it might be concluded
+from this expression, that he meant to cast a strong reflection on
+the Spanish government; but in the progress of the work the reader
+will discover that he is fully justified.
+
+
+Note V.--Page 14.
+
+"The fishermen place their net zig-zag-ways in from eight to eighteen
+fathom water; at each angle they have several chambers, and over every
+angle they have a boat moored, with two or three fishermen in it, who
+are always watching the fish when they enter the chambers, and with
+a line, supported on the surface by a buoy, they draw a net across
+the chamber door." Vide Jackson's Mediterranean Commerce, p. 103-4.
+
+
+Note VI.--Page 18.
+
+The diversity of opinion as to the substance of which these nests are
+composed, is such, that to this hour we are left on the wide field
+of conjecture, and without any clue which may be absolutely relied on
+for unravelling the mystery. The intelligent Sonnerat, as a judicious
+naturalist, is entitled to every attention on the subject, and he,
+by admitting into his work the following quotation from "Transactions
+philosophiques de la société Batave, établie dans l'isle de Java pour
+l'avancement des arts et des sciences, vol. iii." gives us reason to
+suppose that he adopts the opinion of that writer. He prefaces his
+introduction of the subject by the following scientific description
+of the bird:
+
+"La salangane (hirundo esculenta, Lath. sp. 26. Lin. Rumph. herb.
+vi. pag. 183. tab. 75. fig. 4. Forster.)"
+
+And then proceeds with the extract thus:
+
+"The salanganes are of a blackish grey colour, somewhat inclining
+to green; but on the back, down to the tail, as well as under the
+breast, the colour is mouse grey. The whole length of the bird, from
+the back to the tail, is about four inches and a half; and its height,
+taken from the beak to the extremity of the foot, three and a quarter
+inches: its girt is ten and a quarter inches: the longest feathers of
+the wing are about four inches. The head is flat; but the thickness
+of the downy feathers which cover it make it appear round, and rather
+large in proportion to the rest of the body. The beak is large, ending
+in a sharp point, but hooked like that of a nocturnal bird of prey;
+its size is augmented by the addition of a naked membrane, similar to
+parchment, which folds inwards when the beak is shut, but expands with
+the opening of it, and enables the bird, while on the wing, to seize
+with greater facility the insects which constitute its food. The eyes
+are black, and very large; and the tongue not forked, but of the form
+of an arrow. The ears flat and round, with a small oblong opening,
+and entirely covered by the downy feathers of the head. The neck very
+short, as are the legs, and bones of the wings. The thighs entirely
+covered with feathers; and the lower and more delicate parts of the
+legs, as well as the feet, provided with a black skin resembling
+parchment: each foot has four toes, three pointing forwards and one
+backwards; they are separated from each other even to the root, and
+the middle one, including the claw, is at least as long as the lower
+part of the leg; each toe is furnished with a black claw, pointed,
+hooked, and very long, by means of which it attaches itself, with great
+facility, to the juttings of the rocks. The tail is at least as long
+as the body, even including the neck and the head; when it is spread
+out it has the shape of a wedge, and has ten large feathers; the four
+first on each side are the longest, and when the tail is closed they
+extend beyond the others about an inch; the others diminish towards
+the middle of the tail, and nearly equal the length of the body. This
+bird is extremely light and delicate; ten of these swallows will only
+weigh about two ounces and a half. The inhabitants of Java call them
+lawit, and the mountaineers give them the names of berongdagæ or waled.
+
+"There are two places in the neighbourhood of Batavia where they
+are found in great abundance; the one, Calappa-Nongal, is about ten
+miles to the south of the town; the other, Sampia, is a little more
+distant towards the south-west, but both lie in that elevated range
+which takes its direction by the sea coast, and which appears to be
+different from the great chain which pushes itself into the country,
+and traverses the whole island. Besides these principal places,
+there are many others, both in the same district, and at a very great
+distance from the coast, where these birds are found, though in fewer
+numbers; and there are even some which are carefully concealed by
+those of the inhabitants who are acquainted with them.
+
+"There are two bird mountains, called Goa (caverns) by the inhabitants
+of Java, which are insulated rocks, hollow in the middle, and pierced
+by a great number of openings, for the most part of sufficient size
+easily to admit a man; others are more difficult of access, and some
+so small that nature seems to have intended them for the security of
+those little animals. These rocks are composed of a grey calcareous
+stone and white marble, and are covered with a multitude of lofty trees
+of different kinds. To the interior of these caverns the birds fix
+their nests in horizontal ranges, and so close to each other, that,
+generally speaking, they join; they build them at different heights,
+from fifty to three hundred feet, higher or lower as they can find
+a berth; there is not a single hole, or convenient spot sufficiently
+dry and proper, which is not occupied; but if the surface is in the
+smallest degree wet, or even damp, the birds immediately abandon it.
+
+"At break of day the whole of the birds take wing with a great noise,
+and in the dry season immediately shoot up so high in the atmosphere,
+in search of their food, as to be soon lost to the sight: they return
+about four in the afternoon, and again take shelter in their holes,
+to which they confine themselves during the rest of the day, those
+excepted which are hatching. On the other hand, during the rainy
+season, it has been often remarked that they never ramble very far
+from their holes, particularly in the government of Java, where the
+rocks even border close on the sea.
+
+"They feed on all the varieties of insects which are found hovering
+over stagnated waters, and they easily secure them by means of the
+extended opening of which their beak is capable. Their most formidable
+enemy is a bird of prey, which catches them in great numbers as they
+escape from their holes, and which the inhabitants are very careful
+to keep at a distance as much as possible by shooting them.
+
+"They prepare their nests with the more solid parts of their food,
+and by no means with the froth of the sea or marine plants, as has
+been asserted [1]. This opinion is the more founded in probability,
+as it is ascertained by experience that those birds which build on
+the rocks, already mentioned, have never been seen on the coast,
+and that they could not repair thither and return in any reasonable
+time on account of the lofty chains of mountains they would have to
+traverse, and the tempestuous winds which prevail there. The great
+difference, then, in the colour and value of these nests, is a proof
+that their quality depends solely on the nature and abundance of the
+insects which form their food; perhaps, likewise, on the more or less
+perfect solitude of the places they resort to for it.
+
+"The nests collected in the territory of Calappa-Nongal and of Goadja
+are quite grey, and are of one-third less value than those of the
+territory of Sampia. These last again are in far less estimation
+than the excellent sort sent every year from Ternate and Passir,
+or those found in the islands immediately adjoining, and on that of
+Borneo in particular.
+
+"These birds require two months to prepare their nests; they
+immediately after lay their eggs, and sit fifteen or sixteen days. As
+soon as the young take flight, the gathering of the nests commences,
+and is repeated every four months: it is the harvest of the proprietors
+of those rocks. This is performed by men accustomed from their infancy
+to clamber among these precipices: with reeds and bamboos they provide
+themselves with ladders, with which they mount up to the holes; but
+when the depth of the caves is too great, they have recourse to ropes.
+
+"When at the bottom of these caverns, they place against the inside
+notched bamboos, which answer the purpose of ladders, to enable them to
+reach the nests, and if these are beyond their immediate reach, they
+detach them with bamboo poles; there are likewise holes, but in very
+limited numbers, which may be got at by means of ladders of bamboo.
+
+"This employment, which is attended with very great risk, costs the
+lives of many human beings, and particularly of those who attempt
+to steal the nests. For their preservation, guards are placed here
+and there.
+
+"The mountaineers usually employed in collecting the nests never
+undertake it till they have sacrificed a buffalo, the usual prelude,
+with the Javanese, of all their enterprizes; they mutter a few
+prayers, anoint their bodies with aromatic oils, and fumigate the
+caverns with incense, a precaution, according to them, absolutely
+necessary. The principal of these caverns lie in the island of Java,
+where a female deity, under the appellation of Raton laut Ridaud,
+or Princess of the South Sea, is held in high veneration. A small
+hut, containing a covered bed, is prepared for her, together with
+several elegant dresses, and which no person but a Princess dare
+approach. Every Friday, during the period of collecting the nests,
+incense is burnt in it, and the bodies and clothes of all those who
+propose to mount the rocks ought to be exposed to this fumigation. The
+rest of the Javanese are not so superstitious, and attach much less
+importance to ceremonies. These caverns are lighted, on such occasions,
+by torches made with the rosin of a large tree, called the cavet,
+and of the inner bark of the areka.
+
+"The collection of the nests does not last more than a month, and, as
+has been said, may be repeated three times annually. Some think that
+it might even be extended to a fourth, but that is not very probable,
+as all the people employed in this work affirm that a nest, as long as
+it remains entire, is constantly augmented or thickened by the bird,
+which never totally abandons it till it becomes dry and woolly in
+the inside.
+
+"After the nests are gathered, nothing remains to be done but to dry
+and clean them, and they are then packed in baskets and sold to the
+Chinese. The price varies, as depending on their whiteness and degree
+of perfection; some are grey, and others reddish, while those of the
+best sort are extremely rare. They are sold on the spot for from eight
+hundred to one thousand four hundred rixdollars for one hundred and
+twenty-five pounds weight. This price, and the insatiable avarice
+of the Chinese, often produce cheating, and an adulteration of the
+article. They have no hesitation in corrupting the guards with money,
+opium, or clothes; and deceits are practised, against which the most
+extreme vigilance is often unavailing.
+
+"The two places we have already mentioned, Calappa-Nongal and
+Sampia, belonged formerly to the Dutch East India Company, but as
+the advantages resulting from the possession of them were partly
+unknown, or diminished in value by the dexterity of the Javanese, the
+company formed the resolution of letting them by public auction, and
+nearly one hundred thousand rixdollars is drawn from them, a sum far
+exceeding their utmost expectations. In the same range of mountains
+there are besides these other places of the same description, but
+of less importance. There are likewise two or three in the interior,
+and some others, which are concealed with great care.
+
+"There are in the government of Samarang, in the island of Java,
+three mountains celebrated for their birds, called Goadaher, Gede,
+and Nangasari. The sea washes their base, and flows so far into the
+interior of the latter, that it may be said they can catch fish in
+the body of the mountain. The nests in these districts are of an
+excellent quality, but very difficult to collect, on account of the
+precipitous nature of the rocks, and the violent beating of the surge
+against them, which renders it necessary for those employed to suspend
+themselves from the top by ladders of bamboo. In the island of Java,
+about twenty-five quintals of these nests are collected annually.
+
+"There are likewise swallow caverns in the island of Bantam, and in
+Sumatra; but the inhabitants of the former are so indolent, and the
+government so detestable, that they are not even at the trouble to
+sow rice, nor do they cultivate any one article which contributes to
+human existence. The Chinese have never attempted to penetrate into
+the interior of this kingdom, and they have no commerce whatever with
+the mountaineers; indeed they have very little intercourse even with
+the coast.
+
+"The Javanese and Europeans established in India eat even the birds
+themselves when young, but it is difficult to procure them; they are
+considered as a very luscious food. The nests, on the contrary, when
+stewed as a soup, and afterwards exposed to the dew, and sweetened
+with sugar, are said to be highly cooling, and the Javanese administer
+them successfully in violent fevers. The author of this memoir has
+had occasion to observe that, prepared in the manner which will be
+subsequently mentioned, they have been useful in disorders of the
+throat, and in hoarseness. Most probably this remedy has been borrowed
+from the Chinese, who (according to information furnished to the author
+by a man who was in the habit of dealing largely in these nests) use
+them most generally in the winter, because disorders of the throat
+are very common at that season in the southern regions of the empire,
+on account of the habits the Chinese are in of indulging themselves
+over the fire.
+
+"But though the author has repeatedly eat these nests, prepared in
+various ways, he has not been able to bring himself to put much faith
+in the very nutritive and strengthening property attributed to them. He
+has had them analyzed by good chemists, but the result has been only a
+gummy solution, of rather a disagreeable taste, which might, however,
+be of service in certain disorders of the chest.
+
+"These nests are, in fact, only articles of luxury or ornament on
+the tables of the rich. The Chinese are passionately fond of them:
+after well soaking and cleaning them, they are put with a fat capon
+or a duck into an earthen pot, closely covered; they are simmered
+for twenty-four hours over a small fire, which is called timmen;
+thus prepared, this eatable acquires a relish infinitely more rich,
+and a more nourishing quality.
+
+"The trade in these nests, which some years ago was of little
+importance, has been greatly on the increase for some time. The price
+is constantly rising in China, and Batavia is the principal market
+for them. The company having abandoned it, the inhabitants derive
+sufficient advantage from it to diminish the exportation of specie,
+which is highly prejudicial. It is now very well ascertained that
+the species of swallow which builds these nests is not to be found
+in China.
+
+"Linnæus, in his Systeme Naturel, characterizes this swallow, which he
+calls the hirundo esculenta, by white spots only on the feathers of the
+tail. But those birds of Java, which construct the nests in question,
+have no spots either on their tail or elsewhere. The feathers of the
+tail are entirely of one colour, that is, grey, approaching to black
+on the upper, and a lighter grey on the under surface.
+
+"Rumph says, in speaking of these apodes marinæ, that the feathers of
+their tail are spotted, and that the breast has black and white spots.
+
+"Valentyn in his description of the small swallow which builds the
+eatable nests, says nothing of spots, and only states that the body
+is veined white and black.
+
+"If these differences are allowed to be essential, it will follow
+that there must be two kinds of these swallows, the one with a
+spotted breast, and having white spots on the tail, the other without
+either. It is possible, even, that there may be a third variety, that
+called momos, or bocrongitams. These likewise form their nests of
+part of their food; but mixed with so much impure matter that no use
+can be made of them. Care is taken, therefore, to drive them away,
+that they may not injure the nests of the better species. They are
+readily known from these latter by their superior size, and their
+legs being provided with small feathers down to the feet.
+
+"In the kingdom of Tonquin, and in China, there is a great demand for
+these nests of the salanganes. They form their most exquisite food,
+and they attribute to them the property of strengthening the stomach,
+and of being a powerful aphrodisiac. They are preserved for the tables
+of the King, and those of the principal nobles who are able to procure
+them. They are diluted, made into gravy or soup, and mixed with all
+sorts of choice aliment, and every kind of taste is imputed to them.
+
+"In the state in which the salanganes are sold, they bear a close
+resemblance to the half of a preserved citron, both in size and
+shape. They are put into small boats, which the people of the country
+are sufficiently dextrous in piloting through the rocks where the
+nests are found. The King of Cochin-China retains in his own hands,
+exclusively, the portion of this trade which belongs to him, as the
+most precious production of his dominions, and of which the sale is
+most to be relied on."
+
+
+Note VII.--Page 18.
+
+This shell, which even here, as every where else, bears the name of
+cowrie, forms likewise the currency of Africa, as it formerly did
+that of India; and this may probably furnish an argument in favour
+of the Malay origin.
+
+
+Note VIII.--Page 21. Note IX.--Same page.
+
+Two causes are here assigned for the wretched state of these
+dependencies, apparently different, but in fact flowing from the same
+source. We are told that the surrounding nations are more industrious,
+and can work at a cheaper rate, and that the insects and rats destroy
+the produce of the soil. Were the encouragement of agriculture and
+manufactures an object of importance in the colonial system of the
+Philippines, the extension and protection of the former would soon
+circumscribe the dominion of the rats, its most destructive enemy;
+and if the productions of the soil were, as they ought to be, in as
+great plenty, and at as low a rate as on the neighbouring islands,
+manufactures, particularly with the aid of machinery, would be afforded
+at a profit adequate to the exertions of industry. But the truth
+is, that the Spanish government is rather desirous of considering
+the Philippines as the grand depot of the commerce of South America
+with India and China, and it may be presumed that, on this account,
+not only is its industry repressed, but the very heavy expense of the
+settlement submitted to and annually sent from New Spain. The revenue
+stated to be collected in the islands amounts to about one million of
+dollars, and this, together with about the same sum remitted by the
+Acapulco ships, enable the government to defray the annual charges
+of the colonial establishment.
+
+
+Note X.--Page 24.
+
+The Spanish author, on the subject of the origin of these Negroes,
+forms a conclusion directly at variance with what he afterwards says
+with regard to the origin of the Indians. He admits that the similarity
+of the former to those of Angola, with the exception of only a shade
+in colour, carries sufficient conviction as to their parent stock,
+and of course allows the islands to have been originally colonized
+from Africa, and by a people infinitely less advanced in cultivation
+than the Indians, setting aside at once his own very well founded
+subsequent conclusion, that the colonization of all the islands of the
+South Sea, with the Marianas, Philippines, &c. must have originated in
+South America, and proceeded gradually before the wind. The constant
+course of easterly winds in the Pacific, joined to the instances he
+adduces of similitude of language, unquestionably aid his hypothesis,
+which, though probably more curious than practically useful, is yet
+deserving of attention. There is not, indeed, a more embarrassing
+subject than that frequently proves to be, which treats of the origin
+and ancient connexion of distant nations, and after all, as in this
+case, we are too often left on the field of conjecture.
+
+
+Note XI.--Page 25.
+
+The reason here given for the wretched condition of these people
+seems more candidly than might be expected from a Spaniard, to take
+the load of responsibility from them and cast it on the government;
+and the perusal of the succeeding pages will but too well confirm
+the propriety of the censure.
+
+
+Note XII.--Page 36.
+
+Sonnerat asserts, that among the mild inhabitants of the fertile
+plains on the west border of the Lake Bay, adultery is the only crime
+punished with death; but it seems more reasonable to conclude, that
+of the two the Spaniard is most to be relied on.
+
+
+Note XIII.--Page 37.
+
+The striking resemblance of this to the price exacted by Laban from
+Jacob for his two daughters, will not be passed over by the reader
+unnoticed; and we are obliged to conclude either that such similarity
+of customs must originate in a common source, or that a certain state
+of social life, in certain climates, will produce manners mutually
+approximating.
+
+
+Note XIV.--Page 42.
+
+Without, in any respect, detracting from the merit of the propagators
+of the Christian faith in these islands, or claiming any superiority
+for our own tenets or practice, I fear we need not travel beyond the
+pillars of Hercules to the southward, and the Ultima Thulé to the
+northward, to discover such perversion of human intellect, although,
+I trust, it is no proof that we are very bad Christians.
+
+The influence of traditional superstitions is too generally known
+and admitted to require to be descanted on. Its operation commences
+with the first dawn of reason, and very rarely is it found that even
+all the strength of the human mind, aided by religion and philosophy,
+can thoroughly eradicate the impressions it makes. The water kelpie
+of the north of Scotland differs from the Patianac and Tigbalang, only
+as being a good natured and very useful being; and we are all familiar
+with the mythologic machinery of our ancestors, for we will take leave
+to entertain a belief that Fingal and Ossian did once exist, and that
+the latter pourtrayed the manners, customs and opinions of his time.
+
+
+Note XV.--Page 46.
+
+It is curious to observe the progress of science and discovery, and
+still more deserving our notice is the transitory nature of power. The
+magisterial authority assumed by the Pontiff on this occasion might
+possibly have saved the effusion of human blood, and its interposition
+at that crisis, as a mediator between the most powerful nations then
+in existence, if it was beneficial in no other respect, seems to have
+stimulated the Spaniards to attempt the discovery of a passage into
+the Pacific by the southern coast of America.
+
+
+Note XVI.--Page 65.
+
+This must either be a mistake, or we must conclude that the intercourse
+of the Portuguese with these islands had furnished them with the
+European improvements.
+
+
+Notes XVII. and XVIII.--Pages 106-7.
+
+The circumstances stated on both these occasions, incontestably prove
+that the energy and exertions of the Portuguese in establishing their
+own exclusive dominion in the eastern Archipelago, even in defiance of
+the fiat of his Holiness, had led them to impart to the natives that
+knowledge which they themselves had been but lately possessed of;
+for the use of cannon, on board ships, did not come into practice
+till about the year 1539.
+
+
+Note XIX.--Page 129.
+
+Thus it is that the Spaniards appear even to have deceived themselves
+in subduing those islands. In the course of this work, the reader
+will be enabled to appreciate the nature of what the Spaniards called
+a conquest. The progress of a few men into the interior of a country
+under the protection of fire-arms, and the baptism of some individuals,
+to whose language the Spaniards were perfect strangers, and who of
+course could form no idea of the obligations imposed by the ceremony,
+seem to constitute their notion of conquest. Thus it is too that their
+authority extends over so small a portion of these delicious islands.
+
+
+Note XX.--Page 197.
+
+The inhuman custom of infanticide is not only practised with impunity
+in China, but seems even countenanced as the readiest means of
+limiting a population which would otherwise be superabundant, and in
+time exceed the productive powers of the country. By the narrative of
+Lord Macartney we learn, that in the tract of country through which
+the embassy passed, the population appeared excessive; at the same
+time that cultivation and industry seemed to be extended to their
+utmost limits. All the accounts we possess of that extraordinary empire
+concur in this representation. What effect the very pious application
+of the funds of the eleemosynary establishments at Manila may have
+in checking this savage custom is not noticed by the author; and we
+have reason to fear the practice is so general, that any attempt to
+check it by this means might rather tend to stimulate the avarice
+of the parents, and produce an opposite effect. The Chinese are as
+yet but in a half civilized state, and while they continue so we can
+entertain but slender hopes of any alteration more consistent with
+the feelings of humanity.
+
+
+Note XXI.--Page 211.
+
+The whole of this paragraph comprises a more virulent Philippic against
+the Spanish government than we could have expected from a Spaniard;
+but which the reader is by this time convinced is no less just than
+spirited. That the mild measures the author recommends would have
+the desired effect may be fairly doubted. He appears to write as a
+monk rather than as a statesman; but it cannot admit of a question,
+that if it were possible to combine with such measures a military
+establishment, under the control of wise laws, whose mild influence
+might be generally felt, and equally protect the native as the
+Spaniard, the unstable authority of that nation upon these islands
+would soon assume a different character, and reduce the quantum of
+human misery which their present system is calculated to perpetuate.
+
+
+
+
+
+                      T. DAVISON, Lombard-street,
+                          Whitefriars, London.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTE
+
+
+[1] This is an opinion very generally received, and naturalists,
+in copying one from another, have stamped a credit upon it. Houttyn
+himself, in his Natural History, vol. i. part v. page 607, gives a
+description of this bird, and of its manners, very different from
+the above.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands, Vol I (of 2), by Martinez de Zuniga
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORICAL VIEW--PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 39010-8.txt or 39010-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/0/1/39010/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously
+made available by the Digital & Multimedia Center, Michigan
+State University Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/39010-8.zip b/39010-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83078b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-8.zip
diff --git a/39010-h.zip b/39010-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bba389c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-h.zip
diff --git a/39010-h/39010-h.htm b/39010-h/39010-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..29fdfba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-h/39010-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,6834 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"
+"http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd">
+<!-- This HTML file has been automatically generated from an XML source on 2012-02-28T20:04:08Z. -->
+<html lang="en">
+<head>
+<meta name="generator" content=
+"HTML Tidy for Windows (vers 25 March 2009), see www.w3.org">
+<title>An Historical View of the Philippine Islands (Volume 1 of
+2)</title>
+<meta http-equiv="content-type" content="text/html; charset=us-ascii">
+<meta name="generator" content=
+"tei2html.xsl, see http://code.google.com/p/tei2html/">
+<meta name="author" content=
+"Joaqu&iacute;n Mart&iacute;nez de Z&uacute;&ntilde;iga (1760&ndash;1818)">
+<link rel="schema.DC" href=
+"http://dublincore.org/documents/1998/09/dces/">
+<meta name="DC.Creator" content=
+"Joaqu&iacute;n Mart&iacute;nez de Z&uacute;&ntilde;iga (1760&ndash;1818)">
+<meta name="DC.Title" content=
+"An Historical View of the Philippine Islands (Volume 1 of 2)">
+<meta name="DC.Language" content="en">
+<meta name="DC.Format" content="text/html">
+<meta name="DC.Publisher" content="Project Gutenberg">
+<meta name="DC:Subject" content="Philippines -- History">
+<style type="text/css">
+body
+{
+font: 100%/1.2em "Times New Roman", Times, serif;
+margin: 1.58em 16%;
+text-align: left;
+}
+/* Titlepage */
+.titlePage
+{
+border: #DDDDDD 2px solid;
+margin: 3em 0% 7em 0%;
+padding: 5em 10% 6em 10%;
+text-align: center;
+}
+.titlePage .docTitle
+{
+line-height: 3.5em;
+margin: 2em 0% 2em 0%;
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+.titlePage .docTitle .mainTitle
+{
+font-size: 1.8em;
+}
+.titlePage .docTitle .subTitle, .titlePage .docTitle .seriesTitle, .titlePage .docTitle .volumeTitle
+{
+font-size: 1.44em;
+}
+.titlePage .byline
+{
+margin: 2em 0% 2em 0%;
+font-size:1.2em;
+line-height:1.72em;
+}
+.titlePage .byline .docAuthor
+{
+font-size: 1.2em;
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+.titlePage .figure
+{
+margin: 2em 0% 2em 0%;
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+}
+.titlePage .docImprint
+{
+margin: 4em 0% 0em 0%;
+font-size: 1.2em;
+line-height: 1.72em;
+}
+.titlePage .docImprint .docDate
+{
+font-size: 1.2em;
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+/* End Titlepage */
+.transcribernote
+{
+background-color:#DDE;
+border:black 1px dotted;
+color:#000;
+font-family:sans-serif;
+font-size:80%;
+margin:2em 5%;
+padding:1em;
+}
+.advertisment
+{
+background-color:#FFFEE0;
+border:black 1px dotted;
+color:#000;
+margin:2em 5%;
+padding:1em;
+}
+.correctiontable
+{
+width: 75%;
+}
+.width20
+{
+width: 20%;
+}
+.width40
+{
+width: 40%;
+}
+.indextoc
+{
+text-align: center;
+}
+.div0
+{
+padding-top: 5.6em;
+}
+.div1
+{
+padding-top: 4.8em;
+}
+.index
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+}
+.div2
+{
+padding-top: 3.6em;
+}
+.div3, .div4, .div5
+{
+padding-top: 2.4em;
+}
+.footnotes .body,
+.footnotes .div1
+{
+padding: 0;
+}
+.apparatusnote
+{
+text-decoration: none;
+}
+table.alignedtext
+{
+border-collapse: collapse;
+}
+table.alignedtext td
+{
+vertical-align: top;
+width: 50%;
+}
+table.alignedtext td.first
+{
+border-width: 0 0.2px 0 0;
+border-color: gray;
+border-style: solid;
+padding-right: 10px;
+}
+table.alignedtext td.second
+{
+padding-left: 10px;
+}
+h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, .h1, .h2, .h3, .h4
+{
+clear: both;
+font-style: normal;
+text-transform: none;
+}
+h3, .h3
+{
+font-size:1.2em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+}
+h3.label
+{
+font-size:1em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+margin-bottom:0;
+}
+h4, .h4
+{
+font-size:1em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+}
+.alignleft
+{
+text-align:left;
+}
+.alignright
+{
+text-align:right;
+}
+.alignblock
+{
+text-align:justify;
+}
+p.tb, hr.tb
+{
+margin-top: 1.6em;
+margin-bottom: 1.6em;
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+text-align: center;
+}
+p.argument, p.note, p.tocArgument
+{
+font-size:0.9em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+text-indent:0;
+}
+p.argument, p.tocArgument
+{
+margin:1.58em 10%;
+}
+p.tocPart
+{
+margin:1.58em 0%;
+font-variant: small-caps;
+}
+p.tocChapter
+{
+margin:1.58em 0%;
+}
+p.tocSection
+{
+margin:0.7em 5%;
+}
+.opener, .address
+{
+margin-top: 1.6em;
+margin-bottom: 1.6em;
+}
+.addrline
+{
+margin-top: 0;
+margin-bottom: 0;
+}
+.dateline
+{
+margin-top: 1.6em;
+margin-bottom: 1.6em;
+text-align: right;
+}
+.salute
+{
+margin-top: 1.6em;
+margin-left: 3.58em;
+text-indent: -2em;
+}
+.signed
+{
+margin-top: 1.6em;
+margin-left: 3.58em;
+text-indent: -2em;
+}
+.epigraph
+{
+font-size:0.9em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+width: 60%;
+margin-left: auto;
+}
+.epigraph span.bibl
+{
+display: block;
+text-align: right;
+}
+.trailer
+{
+clear: both;
+padding-top: 2.4em;
+padding-bottom: 1.6em;
+}
+.figure
+{
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+}
+.floatLeft
+{
+float:left;
+margin:10px 10px 10px 0;
+}
+.floatRight
+{
+float:right;
+margin:10px 0 10px 10px;
+}
+p.figureHead
+{
+font-size:100%;
+text-align:center;
+}
+.figAnnotation
+{
+font-size:80%;
+position:relative;
+margin: 0 auto; /* center this */
+}
+.figTopLeft, .figBottomLeft
+{
+float: left;
+}
+.figTop, .figBottom
+{
+}
+.figTopRight, .figBottomRight
+{
+float: right;
+}
+.hangq
+{
+text-indent: -0.35em;
+}
+.hangqq
+{
+text-indent: -0.44em;
+}
+.hangqqq
+{
+text-indent: -0.78em;
+}
+.figure p
+{
+font-size:80%;
+margin-top:0;
+text-align:center;
+}
+img
+{
+border-width:0;
+}
+p.smallprint,li.smallprint
+{
+color:#666666;
+font-size:80%;
+}
+span.parnum
+{
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+.marginnote
+{
+font-size:0.8em;
+height:0;
+left:1%;
+line-height:1.2em;
+position:absolute;
+text-indent:0;
+width:14%;
+}
+.pagenum
+{
+display:inline;
+font-size:70%;
+font-style:normal;
+margin:0;
+padding:0;
+position:absolute;
+right:1%;
+text-align:right;
+}
+a.noteref, a.pseudonoteref
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+text-decoration: none;
+vertical-align: 0.25em;
+}
+.displayfootnote
+{
+display: none;
+}
+div.footnotes
+{
+font-size: 80%;
+margin-top: 1em;
+padding: 0;
+}
+hr.fnsep
+{
+margin-left: 0;
+margin-right: 0;
+text-align: left;
+width: 25%;
+}
+p.footnote
+{
+margin-bottom: 0.5em;
+margin-top: 0.5em;
+}
+p.footnote .label
+{
+float:left;
+width:2em;
+height:12pt;
+display:block;
+}
+/* Tables */
+tr, td, th
+{
+vertical-align: top;
+}
+td.bottom
+{
+vertical-align: bottom;
+}
+td.label, tr.label td
+{
+font-weight: bold;
+}
+td.unit, tr.unit td
+{
+font-style: italic;
+}
+td.sum
+{
+padding-top: 2px; border-top: solid black 1px;
+}
+/* Poetry */
+.lgouter
+{
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+display:table; /* used to make the block shrink to the actual size */
+}
+.lg
+{
+text-align: left;
+}
+.lg h4, .lgouter h4
+{
+font-weight: normal;
+}
+.lg .linenum, .sp .linenum, .lgouter .linenum
+{
+color:#777;
+font-size:90%;
+left: 16%;
+margin:0;
+position:absolute;
+text-align:center;
+text-indent:0;
+top:auto;
+width:1.75em;
+}
+p.line
+{
+margin: 0 0% 0 0%;
+}
+span.hemistich /* invisible text to achieve visual effect of hemistich indentation. */
+{
+color: white;
+}
+.versenum
+{
+font-weight:bold;
+}
+/* Drama */
+.speaker
+{
+font-weight: bold;
+margin-bottom: 0.4em;
+}
+.sp .line
+{
+margin: 0 10%;
+text-align: left;
+}
+/* End Drama */
+/* right aligned page number in table of contents */
+.tocPagenum, .flushright
+{
+position: absolute;
+right: 16%;
+top: auto;
+}
+table.tocList
+{
+width: 100%;
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+border-width: 0;
+border-collapse: collapse;
+}
+td.tocPageNum, td.tocDivNum
+{
+text-align: right;
+width: 10%;
+border-width: 0;
+}
+td.tocDivNum
+{
+padding-left: 0;
+padding-right: 0.5em;
+}
+td.tocPageNum
+{
+padding-left: 0.5em;
+padding-right: 0;
+}
+td.tocDivTitle
+{
+width: auto;
+}
+span.corr, span.gap
+{
+border-bottom:1px dotted red;
+}
+span.abbr
+{
+border-bottom:1px dotted gray;
+}
+span.measure
+{
+border-bottom:1px dotted green;
+}
+/* Font Styles and Colors */
+.ex
+{
+letter-spacing: 0.2em;
+}
+.sc
+{
+font-variant: small-caps;
+}
+.uc
+{
+text-transform: uppercase;
+}
+.tt
+{
+font-family: monospace;
+}
+.underline
+{
+text-decoration: underline;
+}
+/* overline is actually a bit too high; overtilde is approximated with overline */
+.overline, .overtilde
+{
+text-decoration: overline;
+}
+.rm
+{
+font-style: normal;
+}
+.red
+{
+color: red;
+}
+/* End Font Styles and Colors */
+hr
+{
+clear:both;
+height:1px;
+margin-left:auto;
+margin-right:auto;
+margin-top:1em;
+text-align:center;
+width:45%;
+}
+.aligncenter, div.figure
+{
+text-align:center;
+}
+h1, h2
+{
+font-size:1.44em;
+line-height:1.5em;
+}
+h1.label, h2.label
+{
+font-size:1.2em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+margin-bottom:0;
+}
+h5, h6
+{
+font-size:1em;
+font-style:italic;
+line-height:1em;
+}
+p
+{
+text-indent:0;
+}
+p.firstlinecaps:first-line
+{
+text-transform: uppercase;
+}
+p.dropcap:first-letter
+{
+float: left;
+clear: left;
+margin: 0em 0.05em 0 0;
+padding: 0px;
+line-height: 0.8em;
+font-size: 420%;
+vertical-align:super;
+}
+.lg
+{
+padding: .5em 0% .5em 0%;
+}
+p.quote,div.blockquote, div.argument
+{
+font-size:0.9em;
+line-height:1.2em;
+margin:1.58em 5%;
+}
+.pagenum a, a.noteref:hover, a.hidden:hover, a.hidden
+{
+text-decoration:none;
+}
+ul { list-style-type: none; }
+.castlist, .castitem { list-style-type: none; }
+/* External Links */
+.pglink, .catlink, .exlink, .wplink, .biblink
+{
+background-repeat: no-repeat;
+background-position: right center;
+}
+.pglink
+{
+background-image: url(images/book.png);
+padding-right: 18px;
+}
+.catlink
+{
+background-image: url(images/card.png);
+padding-right: 17px;
+}
+.exlink, .wplink, .biblink
+{
+background-image: url(images/external.png);
+padding-right: 13px;
+}
+.pglink:hover
+{
+background-color: #DCFFDC;
+}
+.catlink:hover
+{
+background-color: #FFFFDC;
+}
+.exlink:hover, .wplink:hover, .biblink:hover
+{
+background-color: #FFDCDC;
+}
+body
+{
+background: #FFFFFF;
+font-family: "Times New Roman", Times, serif;
+}
+body, a.hidden
+{
+color: black;
+}
+h1, .h1
+{
+padding-bottom: 5em;
+}
+h1, h2, .h1, .h2
+{
+text-align: center;
+font-variant: small-caps;
+font-weight: normal;
+}
+p.byline
+{
+text-align: center;
+font-style: italic;
+margin-bottom: 2em;
+}
+.figureHead, .noteref, .pseudonoteref, .marginnote, p.legend, .versenum
+{
+color: #660000;
+}
+.rightnote, .pagenum, .linenum, .pagenum a
+{
+color: #AAAAAA;
+}
+a.hidden:hover, a.noteref:hover
+{
+color: red;
+}
+h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6
+{
+font-weight: normal;
+}
+table
+{
+margin-left: auto;
+margin-right: auto;
+}
+.tablecaption
+{
+text-align: center;
+}
+.pagenum, .linenum
+{
+speak: none;
+}
+</style>
+
+<style type="text/css">
+.xd19e110
+{
+text-align:center;
+}
+.xd19e115width
+{
+width:390px;
+}
+.xd19e1700
+{
+text-align:center;
+}
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands, Vol I (of 2), by Martinez de Zuniga
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: An Historical View of the Philippine Islands, Vol I (of 2)
+       Exhibiting their discovery, population, language,
+              government, manners, customs, productions and commerce.
+
+Author: Martinez de Zuniga
+
+Translator: John Maver
+
+Release Date: February 29, 2012 [EBook #39010]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORICAL VIEW--PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously
+made available by the Digital & Multimedia Center, Michigan
+State University Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+<div class="front">
+<div class="div1 frenchtitle"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first xd19e110">An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="div1 titlepage"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first"></p>
+<div class="figure xd19e115width"><img src="images/titlepage.gif" alt=
+"Original Title Page." width="390" height="720"></div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="titlePage">
+<div class="docTitle">
+<div class="mainTitle">AN<br>
+HISTORICAL VIEW<br>
+OF THE<br>
+PHILIPPINE ISLANDS:</div>
+<div class="subTitle">EXHIBITING<br>
+THEIR DISCOVERY, POPULATION, LANGUAGE,<br>
+GOVERNMENT, MANNERS, CUSTOMS,<br>
+PRODUCTIONS AND COMMERCE.</div>
+</div>
+<div class="byline">FROM THE SPANISH OF<br>
+<span class="docAuthor">Martinez de Zu&ntilde;iga.</span></div>
+<div class="docImprint">PUBLISHED AT MANILA, 1803.<br>
+IN TWO VOLUMES.<br>
+WITH<br>
+A NEW AND ACCURATE MAP OF THE ISLANDS,<br>
+FROM THE BEST AUTHORITIES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.</div>
+<div class="byline">TRANSLATED<br>
+BY <span class="docAuthor">JOHN MAVER, ESQ.</span></div>
+<div class="docImprint">VOL. I.<br>
+<i>LONDON</i>:<br>
+PRINTED FOR J. ASPERNE, CORNHILL; AND NONAVILLE AND FELL, NEW
+BOND-STREET:<br>
+<i>By T. Davison, Whitefriars</i>.<br>
+<span class="docDate">1814.</span></div>
+</div>
+<p><span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e178" href="#xd19e178" name=
+"xd19e178">v</a>]</span></p>
+<div id="intro" class="div1 introduction"><span class=
+"pagenum">[<a href="#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e180" class="main">INTRODUCTION.</h2>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The original, of which the following translation is
+offered to the English reader, is, probably, the only copy which has
+yet reached this country. Whether the chance which threw it in the way
+of the translator may be deemed fortunate or otherwise must be left to
+the decision of the candid public; but it appeared to him that the
+information it contains respecting a Spanish colony, the most
+interesting of any other to a British subject, supplies that
+desideratum so much wanted in our language;&mdash;<i>a correct view
+down to a very late period of the Spanish establishments in the
+Philippines</i>.</p>
+<p>The position of these islands, and, indeed, that of the eastern
+Archipelago generally, whether considered in a political or commercial
+point of view, is sufficiently important. They form the entrep&ocirc;t
+of Europe, India, China, the immensely extended regions of Spanish
+America, the north-western coasts of the new, and <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="xd19e189" href="#xd19e189" name=
+"xd19e189">vi</a>]</span>north-eastern coasts of the old world; and in
+the storms which at present convulse the political atmosphere of
+Europe, as well as that of both the Americas, it is not easy even to
+conjecture what may be their fate.</p>
+<p>The productions of these islands are various, and of a value and
+importance unquestionably high. In the hands of an industrious
+population, and under a fostering government, there is scarcely any
+vegetable substance which, by slender exertion, they may not be made to
+yield, whilst the choicest treasures of the mineral kingdom, lodged
+beneath their irregular surface, minister largely to the cupidity, and
+furnish materials for the more enterprising labours of man.</p>
+<p>Gold is in abundance; iron, steel, copper, lead, pitch and tar,
+hemp, cotton, indigo, sugar, cocoa, pepper, betel, cowries,
+tortoiseshell, mother of pearl and pearls, hides, coyar, tobacco, corn
+and rice excellent and abundant, with a variety of other productions,
+contribute to the wants of commerce; while in this enumeration will be
+found all the articles which, with the aid of the finest building
+timber in the world, are requisite for the construction and complete
+equipment of ships of every description.</p>
+<p>The established intercourse of these islands with Japan and China
+offers a ready transit for <span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e197"
+href="#xd19e197" name="xd19e197">vii</a>]</span>manufactures; and
+although it is understood that the East India Company furnishes an
+adequate supply of our woollen staple to the China market, we may yet
+fairly expect that British enterprize will not overlook the advantages
+which the opening of the India trade holds out in this quarter; nor
+will the introduction of British manufactures into these islands,
+either with an ultimate view to the above markets, or to those of
+Spanish America, in any material degree interfere with the staple trade
+of the Company: there is full scope for adventure in this new vineyard,
+and labourers will not be wanting.</p>
+<p>The political jealousy, and the national and religious prejudices of
+the Spaniards, have till lately opposed a bar to an extended
+intercourse with the Philippines; but the tide which hitherto has
+flowed in that direction seems of late to have commenced its ebb. The
+events of the last twenty years have been in their nature so
+extraordinary, and in their effects so powerful a solvent of all the
+prejudices, fostered by ignorance and superstition, that the dawn of a
+new day seems to open upon mankind<span class="corr" id="xd19e201"
+title="Source: ,">.</span> Let us hope that while these clouds vanish
+before the morning sun, the great bonds of society will remain
+unbroken, and that the liberties of Europe, and consequently those of
+the world, will be fixed on a permanent foundation. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="xd19e204" href="#xd19e204" name=
+"xd19e204">viii</a>]</span></p>
+<p>The well-wisher to the temporal and eternal felicity of the human
+race will hail, with becoming exultation, the opportunity which it is
+hoped will now be offered of spreading the Christian faith, and
+amicably and peaceably lending the reformed religion in aid of the
+Catholic missions, to civilize the population of this extensive portion
+of the eastern hemisphere.</p>
+<p>As a literary production, the original has probably little claim to
+merit, the author conveying his matter in a style more monastic than
+flowing; at the same time that he seems to be generally under the
+influence of that bias, which an early seclusion from life entails upon
+the mind, and upon which even his official opportunities of intercourse
+with the best society in Manila seem to have had a very limited effect.
+The translator has found him too often occupying his pages with
+contentions between the respective religious orders, insignificant in
+their nature even to a Spaniard, and so much more so to the English
+reader, that he has taken the liberty of altogether omitting them in
+the translation, except where connected with the political affairs of
+the settlement; and although by these means several of the chapters are
+reduced to almost nominal importance; yet considering the division of
+the subject in this form as adopted on fair grounds by the author, he
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e209" href="#xd19e209" name=
+"xd19e209">ix</a>]</span>hopes he will be deemed justifiable in
+retaining it even with the sacrifice of something of appearance.</p>
+<p>Having said as much as he hopes can be urged against the original
+production, the translator willingly advocates Zu&ntilde;iga's cause in
+respect to its intrinsic value, as giving to the public the only
+correct view of this interesting settlement, purporting to be brought
+down to the peace of 1763; but in fact, as we may reasonably conclude,
+extended to the period of publication at Manila in 1803. From
+information which may be fully relied on, it appears that Zu&ntilde;iga
+may, with more propriety, be deemed the editor than the author, as he
+was in Manila, and superintended the publication in 1803; with the
+credit of having only arranged for the press the papers of a deceased
+collector; a conclusion justified by the circumstance of the work
+closing with the peace of 1763, for there could not be any very solid
+reason for his declining an account of the forty years intervening
+between that event and the period of publication, had he himself been
+the author. If, however, we are by these means without a detail of the
+actual events which took place, it is probable we may have less cause
+for regret on account of the very limited progress which we well know
+improvement, or even <span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e213" href=
+"#xd19e213" name="xd19e213">x</a>]</span>amelioration, have been
+suffered to make under the Spanish monarchy during the period in
+question. At any rate, we have grounds for supposing that if any
+alteration, favourable or unfavourable, has taken place, Zu&ntilde;iga
+has contrived to weave it into the work; for it is asserted by those
+whose residence renders them competent judges, that the view he gives
+of the settlement is correct to the latest period.</p>
+<p>The origin and language of these islanders have engaged the
+attention of our ablest orientalists. From certain similar
+characteristics in the persons of the inhabitants of the interior, or
+aborigines of the islands, they have hitherto had an African origin
+assigned to them; and nearly from the same source (Madagascar), it has
+been supposed that the Malay population has flowed, which has in a
+great measure inundated the Archipelago, as well as some parts of the
+continental coasts.</p>
+<p>Similarity, or even approximation of language and manners
+unquestionably offer great facilities in enquiries of this nature, and
+they have accordingly been resorted to by all our oriental
+physiologists in their researches respecting the eastern Archipelago;
+and so far as regards the Malays and Malayan language, these researches
+have been attended with corresponding success; but in respect to the
+aboriginal language, or <span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e220" href=
+"#xd19e220" name="xd19e220">xi</a>]</span>Tagalic, very slight attempts
+have been made to trace it beyond the quarter in which it was found to
+prevail. Our author has not failed to enter into the discussion, and
+from the premises he lays down, not unreasonably, draws the conclusion
+that the Tagalic language and original population of all the islands
+westward of the coast of South America derive from that continent.</p>
+<p>It is certainly consonant to reason to presume that the aborigines,
+or mountaineers of the interior of these islands, in their primitive
+state, were more likely to change their residence (if intentionally) by
+committing themselves to a favourable breeze blowing pretty constantly
+in one direction from the eastward; or if in consequence of misfortune,
+by finding their efforts unavailing to encounter an adverse wind, and
+again reach their own coasts; than to suppose even with all the aid the
+monsoons could afford them in an erratic navigation from Africa through
+the Indian ocean to the Archipelago, that they should diffuse
+themselves from that point in every direction over the South Sea, in
+the face of an almost constant current of wind, blowing occasionally
+with extreme violence.</p>
+<p>The Malay population most probably had its origin as stated. The
+superior acquirements of that nation doubtless might enable them to
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e226" href="#xd19e226" name=
+"xd19e226">xii</a>]</span>encounter those difficulties which have been
+mentioned, and either by their extensive conquests, or acknowledged
+commercial activity, to induce their language to be received as the
+general medium of intercourse. On the subject of this language, and its
+different dialects in these islands, some variety of opinion may be
+fairly allowed to prevail; and Sir W. Jones, Dr. Wilkins, Mr. Marsden,
+Mr. Raffles, and other authorities, may not be decided as to its
+source; but it is generally allowed that the language spoken by the
+Papuans, Samangs, and Negritos of the Philippines, and adjacent
+islands, is totally different from the Malayan; and as Mr. Marsden
+expresses himself, &ldquo;presents a subject of research as curious as
+it is obscure.&rdquo;</p>
+<p>This latter gentleman, in the ingenious introduction to his valuable
+grammar of the Malayan language, says, that the large islands of this
+archipelago have their own peculiar language spoken by the inhabitants
+of the interior, while the Malayan is generally used in the districts
+bordering on the coasts, at the mouths and on the banks of navigable
+rivers, and has thence acquired the appellation of the Lingua Franca of
+the east. The antiquity of this insular or original language, we are,
+he says, without the means of ascertaining; but he well supports its
+stability by the strong proof he adduces of Pigafetta's <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="xd19e230" href="#xd19e230" name=
+"xd19e230">xiii</a>]</span>Vocabulary of the Tidore language, in 1521,
+differing in no respect from that of the present day. Mr. Marsden seems
+to conclude that the Malay population of this archipelago has its root
+in Sumatra, the inhabitants of which island claim immediate descent
+from some of the companions of Noah, landed there from the ark; and
+both Mr. Marsden, and Mr. Raffles, the present Governor of Java,
+assert, that the language spoken in Sumatra differs in no material
+respect from that spoken in the Malayan peninsula.</p>
+<p>Upon any occasion where additional light could be thrown upon the
+subject of these islands, the translator has not scrupled to avail
+himself of the best authorities for that purpose. The <i lang=
+"fr">Voyage de Sonnerat aux Indes orientales et a la Chine</i>, edited
+and enlarged by Sonnini, has been of great service in this respect, as
+containing the most authentic information which was possible to be
+procured by a foreigner, aided by every facility which the influence of
+the court of France over that of Madrid could furnish, and entering
+upon the undertaking with the express intention of seconding the views
+of France on the colonial establishments of her European
+neighbours.</p>
+<p>The translator hopes that, on the whole, the notes and extracts will
+not be found unimportant or useless. <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"xd19e239" href="#xd19e239" name="xd19e239">xiv</a>]</span></p>
+<p>On the subject of the map of the Philippines, accompanying this
+work, the translator trusts he will be excused expressing the
+gratification he feels in presenting it to the world as the only
+correct delineation of these islands in existence. A collection of the
+existing authorities he found answered no purpose, as being at variance
+not only with each other, but still more with the unpublished
+manuscript, and other authentic information he derived from the most
+competent private sources. To John Barrow, Esq. second Secretary, and
+Captain Hurd, Hydrographer to the Admiralty, he feels greatly indebted
+for the communications they favoured him with, and for amenity and
+politeness which accompanied them. To the first eastern scholar in this
+country, probably in Europe, Dr. Wilkins, Librarian to the East India
+Company, he owes more obligations than he can express. He takes this
+opportunity of expressing his gratitude for the kind assistance
+afforded by Captain Horsburgh, Hydrographer to the East India Company,
+who has had full opportunity, for the exercise of his practical and
+theoretical acquirements as a navigator in the eastern Archipelago, and
+who surveyed the western coasts of these islands, and in particular the
+northern extremity of the island of Luzon; to him he owes the
+correction of many errors, in respect to latitude <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="xd19e242" href="#xd19e242" name=
+"xd19e242">xv</a>]</span>and longitude, which disgrace the existing
+charts; and to him likewise the map is indebted, for a more perfect
+delineation of the coasts, and for the disappearance of certain
+dangerous rocks which he has ascertained to have no existence. From
+these sources, aided by the suggestions of commanders in the India
+service, in regard to the nautical part, and from John Guise, Esq. of
+Baker-street, whose residence of nine years in Manila afforded him
+ample means of information respecting the interior of Luzon, the map,
+it is presumed, may be deemed the most correct extant. To this latter
+gentleman he has to acknowledge further obligations on the score of the
+general information he has kindly furnished. To his friend, John
+Jackson, Esq. whose literary attainments do him so much honour, the
+translator is under particular obligations for the kind assistance
+afforded him in regard to the map. To Peter Guichenet, Esq. he feels
+particularly indebted, as well as to another friend, for the permission
+to extract from his excellent manuscript translation of <i>Sonnerat</i>
+as much as answered his purpose.</p>
+<p>The merit of a translator is very limited. He is answerable for
+little beyond the actual transfusion of his author's meaning in
+appropriate language: whatever the present translator has attempted
+beyond this is contained in <span class="pagenum">[<a id="xd19e249"
+href="#xd19e249" name="xd19e249">xvi</a>]</span>the notes, and is added
+with the hope of rendering the publication as valuable as possible, and
+as replete with information on the religious, moral, political, and
+commercial state of these dependencies on the Spanish crown as the
+existing sources are capable of furnishing. He lays it before the
+public with diffidence, but with the hope that it will add to the stock
+of general knowledge; equally useful to the moralist, the politician,
+and the merchant. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb1" href="#pb1" name=
+"pb1">1</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="body">
+<div id="ch1" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e254" class="super">PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">CHAPTER I.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Their Description&mdash;Productions and
+Commerce.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The Philippine Islands were so named by Ruy Lopez de
+Villalobos, in compliment to Philip the Second, when Prince of
+Asturias. They originally were called the Western Isles, or the
+Archipelago of Saint Lazarus, the name which Magellan gave them when
+first discovered by him. These islands are numerous; their appearance
+on the map is that of a large blanket full of holes and rents. The
+principal of them is <i>Luzon</i>, so called, because at the doorway of
+each house stands a large wooden mortar, which, in the language of the
+country, is called <i>Losong</i>, and in which the Indians <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2" href="#pb2" name="pb2">2</a>]</span>wash their
+rice. This island resembles the arm a little bent, and in the part
+which corresponds to the elbow is situated the city of Manila, on the
+shore of a fine bay, thirty leagues in circumference, and which
+receives some considerable rivers, among others the Pasig, which
+flowing from a large lake, situated to the east of Manila, at the
+distance of three leagues, washes its walls on the north side: its
+water is very soft and salubrious.</p>
+<p>Before the Spaniards arrived this district was occupied by the
+nation Tagala, inhabiting many towns and mud villages, governed by
+petty chiefs. It is now divided into various provinces, under the
+government of their respective Alcaldes Mayores, who collect the royal
+tribute, and administer justice among the Indians. At three leagues
+distance from Manila, to the south-west, lies the port of Cavite, so
+called from the word <i lang="tl">cauit</i>, a fish-hook, to which the
+tongue of land on which it <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb3" href=
+"#pb3" name="pb3">3</a>]</span>stands bears a strong resemblance.
+Cavite is defended by an indifferent fort, the governor of which is
+nominated by the court of Madrid. It is likewise provided with a
+complete arsenal for the accommodation, as well of the Acapulco ships,
+and a few small vessels for the defence of the islands from the Moors,
+as for general use.</p>
+<p>To the north from the nation Tagala, we found the nations Pampanga,
+Zambales, Pangasinan, Ylocos, and Cagayan. Each of these nations formed
+a distinct community, with a distinct language, or dialect of the same
+language, and was distributed in mud villages, having no king or
+supreme head to govern them; but in lieu of that, a number of petty
+chiefs, or rajahs, whose authority scarcely extended over fifty or an
+hundred families respectively: after the conquest, each of these
+nations was constituted into a province, governed by a Spanish Alcalde
+Mayor. To the east from the nation Tagala are the Camarines, whose
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb4" href="#pb4" name=
+"pb4">4</a>]</span>district has been divided into two provinces, that
+of Camarines, and that of Albay, each under an Alcalde Mayor. The
+greater part of the island is mountainous; it is crossed from the north
+to the south by an immense chain, from which diverge those
+ramifications that spread through the whole island, in many cases even
+forming detached mountains, like insulated cones in the midst of
+extensive plains. The whole of this elevated part of the country
+occupying nearly all the interior, is either a desert, or inhabited by
+a set of wretched people who do not acknowledge the Spanish government.
+There are in this island several volcanos, as that of Mayon, which is
+between the provinces of Albay and Camarines. It has a sugar-loaf
+figure, and is of such altitude that it may be discovered at an immense
+distance at sea. The de Taal is of a similar form, and stands in the
+middle of a large lake, called de Bombon; it exhibits sufficient proof
+that <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb5" href="#pb5" name=
+"pb5">5</a>]</span>the mountain in whose top the volcano was, while in
+its active state, has sunk, remaining, however, still pretty much
+elevated above the water. There are other volcanos, and many warm
+springs, indicating the fermentation in the bowels of this island, from
+which, no doubt, arise those earthquakes to which it is subject, and
+which, one day, may produce new eruptions. We know that these volcanos
+at times throw out ashes, stones, sand, water, and lava, inundating and
+destroying the habitations, and rendering the fields a desert.</p>
+<p>To the south of Luzon lie the principal islands of Mindoro, Panay,
+Marinduque, Negros, Masbate, Zebu, Bohol, Leyte, Samar, besides some
+very small ones, the whole of which we denominate Bisayas, or Islas de
+Pintados, Painted Islands, their inhabitants having been accustomed to
+paint their bodies before our arrival in this quarter. All these
+islands <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb6" href="#pb6" name=
+"pb6">6</a>]</span>acknowledge the Spanish government, and pay tribute
+to the king, which the corregidores, or Alcaldes Mayores of the
+provinces into which they are divided, collect. More to the south from
+these islands are Mindanao and Jolo. In Mindanao the provinces of
+Misamis and Caraga are subject to the Spaniards: the rest of the island
+has not submitted, and is engaged with Jolo and other islands in
+constant hostility against them; and although there have been
+occasional intervals of peace, they have been of short duration.</p>
+<p>For these two centuries past these islanders have been plundering
+the coasts of our provinces, have taken an immense number of vessels,
+pillaged many villages, burnt many towns, destroyed many inhabitants,
+and made slaves of a very great number of the clergy, both Spaniards
+and Indians<a href="#n1"><sup>1</sup></a>.</p>
+<p>We have in Mindanao the garrison of Zamboanga, with a Spanish
+governor, to <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb7" href="#pb7" name=
+"pb7">7</a>]</span>check these depredations; but as yet we have found
+little benefit from this establishment.</p>
+<p>To the east of these islands, at the distance of three hundred
+leagues, are found las Marianas, las Carolinas, and the islands de
+Palaos, or Pelew. Of these, the Marianas alone are under the dominion
+of the Spaniards. Here there is a governor, with a detachment of
+troops, to overawe the Indians, and three Franciscan friars to instruct
+them in the Christian religion.</p>
+<p>These islands have no other communication with the rest of the world
+than what is afforded by the Acapulco ship, which, in returning to
+Manila, touches there, with the portion of the revenue appropriated to
+the support of this presidency. By this opportunity they likewise
+receive wine for mass, grain, furniture, clothing, and a few other
+necessaries; this obscure corner producing only horned cattle, hogs,
+fowls, and a few vegetables, such as the bread-fruit <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb8" href="#pb8" name="pb8">8</a>]</span>and others,
+which serve the inhabitants instead of bread. These supplies are
+annually imported by the governor; and as there is no other store in
+the island than his, the price he fixes is at his own option. From this
+commerce he draws all his income; and under such oppression it is not
+to be wondered at that this colony is as poor as the first day it was
+discovered<a href="#n2"><sup>2</sup></a>. Rice, Indian corn, and wheat
+would grow abundantly in these islands, but every attempt to raise them
+in any quantity, has been rendered of no avail by the swarms of rats,
+which pour down from the mountains, and sweep all before them. From the
+combination of these political and natural causes, the situation of the
+inhabitants of these islands is so miserable, that some of our
+historians would persuade us, they entertain no wish to propagate the
+species, that their children may avoid their unhappy lot. On this
+account, it is added, the Indians diminish considerably in number;
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb9" href="#pb9" name=
+"pb9">9</a>]</span>but this seems to be a mistake, as the diminution of
+the Indians, if it may be so called, may be rather attributed to the
+following cause.</p>
+<p>The population of the Marianas, independent of the native Indians,
+consists of many from New Spain, some Philippine Indians, and some
+Chinese, who come in the suite of the governors. These men being
+married to women of the country, the children born of these marriages,
+are registered by the friars on a list of casts, distinguished from the
+Indian casts, from which it clearly appears that, in proportion as
+these mixed casts have increased, the Indian casts must have
+diminished, and, in all probability, in a short time this latter cast
+will be annihilated, as has already happened in some of the Spanish
+settlements. This being the case, we ought not to say the Indians
+diminish but change their cast. With all these casts united, our
+historians would wish us to believe, that <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb10" href="#pb10" name="pb10">10</a>]</span>there are, at present,
+fewer inhabitants in the Marianas than formerly; but that cannot be the
+case, since the Jesuits, in quitting these islands, left a greater
+population than they found in the year 1738; and the Franciscans report
+that that has increased progressively since. It is certain the
+population does increase, as is clearly shewn by the lists of the
+casts. Indeed the inhabitants of the Philippines have doubled every
+century; and I believe it is the case with all the population of
+America, although foreigners charge us, with occasioning the diminution
+of the Indian population, by our oppressive and bad management, quoting
+our own historians in support of the charge. It ought to be
+recollected, however, that by these, the number of inhabitants which
+the Spaniards found on their arrival, is considerably exaggerated,
+whenever they are desirous of giving additional splendor to the actions
+of the heroes they celebrate; and, on the contrary, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb11" href="#pb11" name="pb11">11</a>]</span>when it
+is their object to detract, they draw a very opposite picture, and,
+attempting to diminish their numbers, assert that their diminution is
+the consequence of oppression. From the amount of the tributes,
+however, referred to by these historians, and levied at different
+times, the evident conclusion is, that the Spaniards did not find the
+tenth part of the inhabitants, which are now in existence.</p>
+<p>The geographical description of the Philippines is, that they are in
+the torrid zone, between five and nineteen degrees of northern
+latitude; the sun twice passes its zenith, and produces those vapours
+which, descending in copious showers, and being again absorbed by the
+earth, form fountains, hot springs, and large lakes. This rainy or wet
+season lasts while we have the Sun to the north, that is, from about
+May till September, and at times till the beginning of December, from
+which latter <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb12" href="#pb12" name=
+"pb12">12</a>]</span>period till May there is continual spring. The
+regular winds are the north, the east, and the south-west, and they
+each prevail between three and four months at a time, the change of one
+wind for another, being attended with violent storms of thunder,
+lightning, and, at times, whirlwinds. Indeed these storms are complete
+hurricanes, which run all round the compass in less than twenty-four
+hours, tearing up trees by the roots, and laying waste the whole
+country. These are so frequent, that we may justly complain,
+considering our proximity to the line, of the want of sufficient solar
+influence, to render the climate of these islands more agreeable. It
+cannot be said that we have oppressive heat in the Philippines<a href=
+"#n3"><sup>3</sup></a>; there reigns throughout the greater part of the
+year, a most beautiful spring, and if the atmosphere were less moist,
+it would be the most delicious climate in the world. To this moist
+atmosphere, and moderately warm temperature, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb13" href="#pb13" name="pb13">13</a>]</span>is
+joined of course a great fertility. The trees are always covered with
+leaves, and the soil with vegetation. The harvests of rice are most
+abundant; the plants shoot up with great beauty immediately, but the
+luxuriance of the soil renders it necessary, continually to clear away
+the weeds, which harbour many insects of a destructive kind, and others
+so dangerous as to diminish greatly the comforts and enjoyments of a
+country, which, in point of fertility, returns one hundred fold of
+rice, the common food of the Indians.</p>
+<p>Rice is the principal production of these islands, and it was
+cultivated to much greater extent before the Spaniards arrived
+here<a href="#n4"><sup>4</sup></a>. They have likewise some pulse, as
+mongos, patani, kidney-beans, and millet. The inhabitants breed up,
+under the same roof with themselves, pigs, fowls, ducks, goats, and
+even buffaloes. In the mountains there are many deer, and the woods and
+fields produce all sorts of pigeons, <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb14" href="#pb14" name="pb14">14</a>]</span>small birds, quails, a
+species of partridge; woodcocks, &amp;c. Few are disposed to indulge
+themselves in this latter kind of sporting; they apply themselves
+ardently to hunting the deer, to which they are particularly partial.
+The sea abounds with very rich fish, such as the pargo, the eel, the
+sole, the pampano, the mojarra, the garropa, the shad, the tunny, the
+corvina, the tanguingui, and an infinite number of others, caught
+either with hooks or common nets, and likewise with a species of net
+very much used in these rivers, and even out at sea, so constructed
+that the fish may enter, but are unable to escape<a href=
+"#n5"><sup>5</sup></a>.</p>
+<p>In this occupation the inhabitants of these islands take more
+delight than in any thing else, as it is a pursuit which at once
+indulges their indolent habits, and gratifies their partiality to fish
+in preference to animal food. Throughout the country are found many
+other productions, contributing to the support of life, and which,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb15" href="#pb15" name=
+"pb15">15</a>]</span>though not so relishing as those enumerated above,
+are probably better suited to their relaxed habits; and the pith of the
+palm, shoots of the sugar-cane, green withs, and other succulent
+productions, serve for food to those, who have no desire to labour for
+their subsistence. They cultivate the bread-fruit, beans, the cacauate,
+&amp;c. and they pay particular attention to the palm tree, from which
+they procure both a spirit and an oil, together with a sweet-meat,
+which they call chancaca. There are few fruit-trees, and those are bad,
+with the exception of the plantain, of which there is a great variety,
+and all excellent and fine flavoured, and the orange, of which there
+are two kinds. The mango, a very rich fruit, it is imagined, the
+Spaniards imported from the coast of South America. We finish our
+enumeration with the cultivation of a species of the palm tree, which
+bears a very hard, little fruit of the form of a green nut.
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb16" href="#pb16" name=
+"pb16">16</a>]</span>This being cut, a highly scented kernel, or eye,
+is found enclosed, which is called <i>Itmo</i>. This is laid in lime,
+to make what they call <i>Buyo</i>, which being chewed, produces a red
+saliva, together with a disorder in the mouth, to which they are so
+habituated, that they are uneasy when without it. This custom prevails
+generally, and even many Spaniards adopt it with great avidity. There
+are in this country mines of iron and gold, but of little value, either
+from the indolence of the natives, or the insignificance of these
+objects to the Spaniards, affording too little profit in their commerce
+with Acapulco to deserve attention. Gold is likewise, by washing,
+separated from the sand, which the waters bring down from the
+mountains.</p>
+<p>In Paracale they work the mines in the same manner as they do in New
+Spain, but the natives are so addicted to sloth, it is not possible to
+render them so productive as those of South America. In the
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb17" href="#pb17" name=
+"pb17">17</a>]</span>mountains there is excellent timber for building
+ships or houses, and the canes are of an immense size, very long, and
+as thick as a man's thigh; of these latter the Indians construct their
+houses, covering them with the leaf of the palm. They raise cotton for
+clothing, which they dye various colours with logwood, indigo, and the
+achiote, a large tree, whose seed is used for that purpose. There is
+great abundance of wax and wild honey, amber, pearls, mother of pearl,
+marble, tar, brimstone, and many other objects of less value in a
+commercial point of view.</p>
+<p>To these productions the Spaniards have added horses and horned
+cattle, which have multiplied so much that they are to be found in the
+mountains without an owner, and where those that want may supply their
+wants at pleasure. They likewise introduced sheep, geese, grapes, figs,
+wheat, pepper, coffee, cocoa, sugar, tobacco, and various species of
+plants, which <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb18" href="#pb18" name=
+"pb18">18</a>]</span>thrive so well, and produce so much, that the
+Indian, with all his sloth, acknowledges the utility of cultivating
+them.</p>
+<p>There are, in these islands, some natural curiosities deserving
+particular notice, such as the paxarillo, a species of small swallow,
+which forms its nest chiefly of the froth of the sea<a href=
+"#n6"><sup>6</sup></a>, and which is held in such estimation by the
+Chinese, as a principal dish at their table, that they purchase it at
+any price.</p>
+<p>The <i>Balate</i> is a species of sea worm, which, likewise, is sold
+in China at a high price. The <i>Siguey</i>, is a small shining
+shell<a href="#n7"><sup>7</sup></a>, which forms the current money of
+the Malays. The <i>Tabon</i>, is a bird, which lays eggs similar to
+those of the turkey, burying them very deep in the sand on the sea
+shore, and when hatched by the heat of the sun, it tears away the sand
+that covers them, and the young come out. The <i>Caiman</i>, is a
+species of crocodile; a large and uncouth animal, the more curious in
+this <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb19" href="#pb19" name=
+"pb19">19</a>]</span>respect, that it is produced from an egg, of the
+same size as that of the duck. The <i>Chacon</i>, is a lizard, which
+takes up its abode in the houses, and repeatedly articulates clearly
+the word <i>toco</i>. The <i>Calo</i>, is a bird, which has a kind of
+hollow shell in his head, and crows, at certain hours of the day, the
+same as the cock. The <i>Taclobo</i>, is a large species of the oyster,
+the shell of which will hold a pitcher of water; indeed they are used
+as vessels for holy water in the churches. Our historians mention many
+curiosities even more rare than these, but I do not enumerate them, as
+they seem to have been ill informed on the subject, and I fear with
+good reason, having been too much under the influence of the
+marvellous, they have given credit to the Indians, who are always
+desirous of distinguishing themselves by the relation of something very
+uncommon.</p>
+<p>With all these productions, the Indians formed a species of
+commerce, or barter, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb20" href="#pb20"
+name="pb20">20</a>]</span>among each other, still considering gold as
+the representative of general value, or medium of exchange; they were
+likewise in the habit of trading with the Chinese, and with the Moors
+of Borneo, for flag-stones, copper, articles of furniture, &amp;c. but
+in very small quantities, their wants being necessarily few, going
+almost naked, baking their rice in green canes, and eating it with the
+leaf of the plantain.</p>
+<p>The Spaniards, soon after they came into possession of these
+islands, commenced an extended commerce with India and China, which
+brought to New Spain, a proportionable increase of profit; and in a
+little time, Manila became so rich a colony, that it created a jealousy
+among the merchants of Seville, and, in consequence of their petition,
+its commerce was restricted. From this period it began to decline, and
+to the great detriment of these islands, which cannot subsist by the
+exchange of their own productions alone, these being <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb21" href="#pb21" name="pb21">21</a>]</span>very
+limited in their nature, and incapable of much extension, surrounded as
+they are by other nations, more industrious, and who can work at a
+cheaper rate<a href="#n8"><sup>8</sup></a>.</p>
+<p>The luxuriant nature of the soil of these islands, has been much and
+justly extolled, but, proper allowance has not been made, for the sloth
+of the Indians, the hurricanes or tempests, which sweep every thing
+before them, the destructive insects, the rats, and many other things,
+which diminish greatly the fertility of these beautiful islands<a href=
+"#n9"><sup>9</sup></a>. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb22" href=
+"#pb22" name="pb22">22</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch2" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e419" class="main">CHAPTER II.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Inhabitants the Spaniards found in the
+Philippines&mdash;their Language, Customs, and Religion.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">Our historians, affecting always the marvellous,
+divide into different classes, the inhabitants the Spaniards found, on
+their first arrival in the Philippines. They denominate them satyrs,
+men with tails, sea monsters, and whatever else of the fabulous, is
+calculated to raise wonder in the human mind. In reality, however, they
+found only two classes, that which we know by the appellation of
+Negroes, and that of the Indians. The Negroes are very small in
+stature, and more of a copper colour than those of Guinea, with soft
+hair and flat noses. They lived in the mountains, almost in a state of
+nature, merely <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb23" href="#pb23" name=
+"pb23">23</a>]</span>covering the forepart of the body, with a piece of
+the bark of a tree; and they subsisted upon roots, and such deer, as in
+hunting, they could kill with the bow and arrow, at which they were
+very dexterous. They slept where night overtook them, and they
+possessed no idea of religion or civilized habits, rather, indeed,
+ranking with beasts than as human beings. The Spaniards, have at length
+succeeded, in domesticating many of them, and converting them to
+christianity, to which they give no opposition, so long as they get
+subsistence, but if they are obliged to labour, for the maintenance of
+their family, they return again to the mountains.</p>
+<p>The Negroes, without doubt, were the primitive inhabitants of these
+islands, and they retired to the mountains, on the arrival of the
+Indians. These latter, settling on the sea shore, continual hostility
+prevailed between them, but the Indians were never able, to establish
+themselves sufficiently, to <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb24" href=
+"#pb24" name="pb24">24</a>]</span>be permitted, even to cut wood in the
+mountains, without paying a tribute for it. At present, the influence
+of the Negroes is very limited, but their antipathy to their first
+invaders, continues unabated; for, if a Negro is killed, or dies
+suddenly, it is customary for another, to bind himself to his
+countrymen by an oath, that he will disappear from among them, and that
+he will not return, until he has avenged the death of his friend, by
+killing three or four Indians, to accomplish which, he watches their
+villages, and the passes in the mountains, and if any unfortunately
+stray from their companions, he murders them.</p>
+<p>The origin of these Negroes, some believe to be, from Angola<a href=
+"#n10"><sup>10</sup></a>, though they are not so black as their
+ancestors, which it is pretended, proceeds from the temperature of
+these islands being milder, and less scorching than that of Africa.
+This possibly may be so, for it is well known, that by changing, from a
+sultry to a temperate <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb25" href="#pb25"
+name="pb25">25</a>]</span>climate, the blackness of the Negro may be
+diminished, in the course of a long series of generations; yet, the
+flat nose, and using a dialect of the same language, which the Indians
+of these isles speak, appears to prove satisfactorily enough, that the
+origin of one and the other, is nearly the same. The reason assigned,
+for their not being more numerous, is, the influence of the rain, wind,
+sun, and all those inclemencies natural to the climate, to which they
+are exposed; the errors of the government, having reduced them to the
+condition, almost, of wild beasts, in which we now see them<a href=
+"#n11"><sup>11</sup></a>. The Indians whom the Spaniards found here,
+were of regular stature, and of an olive complexion, with flat noses,
+large eyes, and long hair. They all possessed some description of
+government better or worse, and each nation was distinguished by a
+different name; but, the similarity of their dress and manners, proves
+that the origin of all of them is the same. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb26" href="#pb26" name="pb26">26</a>]</span></p>
+<p>They had chiefs, who held their situations, either on account of
+personal valour, or by succession to their fathers, where they had
+abilities to retain it. Their dominion extended over one or two
+villages, or more, according to the means they possessed, of extending
+protection. They were continually at war with the neighbouring
+villages, and continually making each other slaves. Out of these wars,
+arose three classes of people; the chiefs or masters of the villages,
+the slaves, and those whom the chiefs had enfranchised, with their
+descendants, and who, to this day, are called Timavas, properly
+signifying children of liberty. In some places, were found Indians
+whiter than others, descended, without doubt, from Chinese or Japanese,
+who had been shipwrecked on these coasts, and whom the Indians,
+naturally hospitable, received, and allowed to intermarry with them;
+and it is generally believed that the Ygorrotes of Ylocos, whose eyes
+resemble <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb27" href="#pb27" name=
+"pb27">27</a>]</span>the Chinese, must have originated from the
+companions of Limahon, who fled to those mountains, when Juan de
+Salcedo compelled him to his disgraceful retreat, from the province of
+Pangasinan.</p>
+<p>It is not, however, after all, easy to ascertain the origin of these
+people, but their idiom throws some degree of light on the subject.
+Although the languages these Indians speak, are many and different,
+they have so much intercourse one with another, that it may clearly be
+discovered, they are dialects of the same language, as the Spanish,
+French, and Italian, are derivatives from the Latin. The prepositions
+and pronouns, are nearly the same in all of them; the numeral
+characters, differ very little, and they have many words in common, and
+of one and the same structure.</p>
+<p>No doubt can be entertained, that the radical language, from which
+all those dialects spring, prevails from Madagascar to the Philippines,
+with local shades of difference. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb28"
+href="#pb28" name="pb28">28</a>]</span>It is spoken too in New Guinea,
+and in all the islands to the southward, in the Marianas, in the
+islands of San Duisk, in those of Otaheite, and in almost all the
+islands in the South Sea. In one collection of voyages, there are given
+various vocabularies, with such corresponding terminations, as the
+respective travellers, were able to distinguish among these islands. It
+is remarkable, that in these almost all the pronouns, are the same with
+those of the nation Tagala; the numerals, are common to all the
+dialects, used in these islands, and most of the words are the same,
+and with the same signification, as in the language Tagala. But, I am
+the more inclined to believe the identity of the dialects, from a
+conversation which I had with Don Juan Hovel, an Englishman, who spoke
+that of San Duisk, and who had a slave, a native of one of those
+islands. The structure, appeared to be the same, as that of the
+languages spoken in the Philippines; and on <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb29" href="#pb29" name="pb29">29</a>]</span>the
+whole, I feel confident in the opinion, that they are all dialects of
+the same language, so widely diffused over so large a portion of the
+earth. It is ascertained, that this language, is in common use for many
+thousand leagues, extending from Madagascar to the isles of San Duisk,
+Otaheite, and the isle of Pasquas, which latter, is not more than six
+hundred leagues distant, from the coast of South America. Yet, the
+Indians of the Philippines, do not understand the people of these last
+mentioned islands, when they have occasional intercourse with them;
+nor, even in these islands, do the inhabitants of one province,
+understand those of another. So neither does the Spaniard understand
+the Frenchman, nor the Frenchman the Italian.</p>
+<p>In the same collection of voyages, already referred to, we find a
+vocabulary of only five terminations, which the Spaniards have
+distinguished on the coast of Patagonia, and which they have been able
+to <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb30" href="#pb30" name=
+"pb30">30</a>]</span>assimilate to the language of these islands, and
+one of those is the word <i>balay</i>, which in that country signifies
+a house; and by this same word they designate a house among the
+Pampangos, and the inhabitants of the Bisayas in general. This may be
+more matter of accident than of proof, that the languages of one and
+the other is the same; but on observing, besides this, that the proper
+names of places about the middle of the continent of South America are
+very similar to those of the Philippines, I endeavoured to procure a
+vocabulary of this country, and did not fail to examine, with great
+diligence and attention, the few words of the language of Chili which
+Ercilla mentions in his Araucana, and which I found perfectly
+conformable to the language Tagala. The name Chili is a derivation from
+this language: the Cormorant is called Cachile, and this is a name
+which the Malays give to the sons of their kings. Chilian, which
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb31" href="#pb31" name=
+"pb31">31</a>]</span>is a town of Chili, is a compound from the
+language of Tagala, in which language the termination <i>an</i> gives
+the signification <i>town</i>. Thus from Cachile we draw Cachilian,
+meaning a town, where there are cormorants. Mapocho, which is the
+situation where the city of Santiago stands, is another word of Tagalic
+composition, signifying a town, and pocquiot being a kind of herb, we
+form the name Mapocquiot, a town in which there is abundance of this
+herb.</p>
+<p>In Chili they frequently double the syllables in forming a word, as
+ytayta, biobio, lemolemo, colocolo, &amp;c. and this occurs in the
+Tagala language; for instance, we say ataata, bilobilo, lebomlebom,
+colocolo. A great many other words are either actually of Tagalic
+derivation, or assimilate closely to that language. In examining the
+structure of these two languages we are compelled to conclude that they
+flow from one and the same source, and I dare affirm that the Indians
+of the Philippines <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb32" href="#pb32"
+name="pb32">32</a>]</span>are descended from the aborigines of Chili
+and Peru, and that the language of these islands derives immediately
+from the parent source, those of the neighbouring islands being
+dialects of this. Many will urge the absurdity of this supposition, on
+the plea that the more immediate vicinity of the Philippines to Malacca
+must have occasioned them to be colonized by the Malays, as our
+historians generally assert. I do not deny that these islands could
+easily have been peopled by the Malays, but how could they colonize the
+Isles de Palaos and Marianas, which are distant more than three hundred
+leagues? and it is still more improbable that they colonized the
+islands of San Duisk and Otaheite, which are distant two thousand
+leagues from the Philippines. All these people, however, have the same
+language, the same manners and customs, and consequently the same
+origin as our Indians. There is, in my opinion, this other reason for
+supposing <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb33" href="#pb33" name=
+"pb33">33</a>]</span>these latter islands could not be peopled from the
+westward, viz. that in all the torrid zone the east wind generally
+prevails, which being in direct opposition to the course from Malacca
+and the adjacent islands, it is fair to conclude that the inhabitants
+of all the islands of the South Sea came from the east, sailing before
+the wind; for we have seen it often happen, that the Indians from the
+Palaos have arrived at the Philippines, precisely under those
+circumstances. On the contrary, we have no instance on record, of any
+of the Philippine Indians having been, even by accident, carried by the
+winds to the islands to the eastward. Indeed we know the reverse of
+this to be true, since at times the most experienced pilots, in
+attempting this navigation, have been compelled to return, without
+falling in with the islands they went in search of, from the necessity
+there is in the voyage of being provided with proper nautical
+instruments. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb34" href="#pb34" name=
+"pb34">34</a>]</span>Here, therefore, we appear to have found the most
+probable solution of our difficulties, that is, that the first settlers
+came out of the east, we may presume from the coast of South America,
+and proceeding gradually to the westward through the Pacific Ocean,
+studded as we find it with islands, and clusters of islands, at no very
+great distance from each other, and of course of easy access before the
+wind, it follows that to whatever point, in an eastern direction, we
+can trace the Tagalic language, we may conclude that at that point
+emigration must have commenced. Some however dissent from this, on the
+ground, that the mode of writing in use among the Malays, is similar to
+that practised by the inhabitants of the Philippines. This consists in
+forming the lines from the right to the left, like the Arabians,
+Persians, &amp;c. and not like the Chinese, Tartars, and Japanese, from
+top to bottom. Their characters are totally different from <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb35" href="#pb35" name="pb35">35</a>]</span>ours;
+they have only three vowels, <i>a</i>, <i>e</i>, <i>u</i>, and by
+placing a point, either above or below the consonant, or leaving it
+without one, the corresponding vowel is readily known, and equal
+facility given as if the vowels were specifically inserted. Although
+they can write, they have no written laws; decisions are made on
+traditionary law generally, but too often by the right of the
+strongest. The Rajah, or chief, with the assistance of some of the
+elders, decides in all civil cases; but in criminal cases, the kinsmen
+are accustomed to compound with the aggressor, for a sum in gold,
+unless in cases of murder, when the only atonement admitted, is
+retaliation; and if the murderer is of a different tribe or village,
+all the community of which the deceased was a member, make a common
+cause, against the tribe or community of the murderer, and numbers are
+generally made slaves on both sides. When it is suspected that one man
+has robbed another, he is obliged to <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb36" href="#pb36" name="pb36">36</a>]</span>draw a stone, from the
+bottom of a cauldron full of boiling water, and if he does not
+accomplish this, which is the vulgar test, he is fined in a certain
+quantity of gold, the greater part of which goes to the Rajah or chief.
+Adultery is likewise punished with a pecuniary fine<a href=
+"#n12"><sup>12</sup></a>, as is the crime of disrespect to the elders,
+but for fraud, and cheating in their dealings, there is no punishment,
+and usury is very general among them. Their matrimonial customs are
+peculiar; they are allowed to marry only one woman, and although the
+principal people have several concubines, yet they commonly are slaves.
+They are accustomed to marry a relation (not a sister), with whom if
+they find themselves unable to live, or if they become tired of her,
+they return her to her parents, without their being required to assign
+a cause for the divorce. The dowry given on the day of marriage is
+merely restored: this dowry is of two kinds, and which the bridegroom
+always pays. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb37" href="#pb37" name=
+"pb37">37</a>]</span>The one is called <i>bigay suso</i>, and is paid
+to the mother, as a compensation for the milk, with which she nourished
+her daughter. The other is called <i>bigay caya</i>, or green dowry,
+which is set apart for the maintenance of the newly married couple,
+although very often, by the <span class="corr" id="xd19e508" title=
+"Source: expences">expenses</span> of the wedding and apparel, there
+remains little or nothing for this desirable end. Besides these dowries
+paid by the bridegroom, he is obliged, for some years, to serve the
+parents of the bride<a href="#n13"><sup>13</sup></a>, and assist them
+on certain days, particularly at the sowing of the rice, and getting in
+the harvest. It is incumbent likewise, on all the relations of the
+bridegroom, to behave with courtesy and respect to the bride, and her
+parents and family, during these years of service, and if they are
+guilty of any lapse in this respect, the marriage is declared to be
+annulled, which is always very agreeable to the parents of the woman,
+as a new suitor presents himself, and they reap the <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb38" href="#pb38" name="pb38">38</a>]</span>benefit
+of a new service. The bridegroom, to console himself for his
+sufferings, as soon as the term closes, and his service is at an end,
+treats his wife as a slave; she is obliged to work for the maintenance
+of the family, whilst the husband is quite idle, and thinks herself
+happy, if, after having done this, she is not beaten. The interest
+which the parents of the girl, thus have in her disposal, is highly
+pernicious to morals; and we have not succeeded to this hour, in the
+abolition of it, either by the influence of royal edicts, or the
+regulations of the bishops, by both of which, it is discouraged and
+prohibited. The ceremony of marriage is performed, by sacrificing a
+hog, which a priestess slays with a thousand grimaces; after which, she
+bestows many benedictions on the parties, and an old woman presenting
+them with some food, the ceremony is closed by many obscenities.
+Dancing, according to their fashion, succeeds, and drinking the rest of
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb39" href="#pb39" name=
+"pb39">39</a>]</span>the day ends the feast, which is always
+proportionate to the circumstances of the newly married pair. The
+principal contributions to this feast, arise from presents made to the
+bride and bridegroom by their friends, of which particular notice is
+taken, in order that similar presents<a id="xd19e519" name=
+"xd19e519"></a> may be returned to the parties on a like occasion.</p>
+<p>In their religious ceremonies, they use neither idols nor temples;
+their sacrifices are offered in arbours, which they raise for that
+purpose. They have priestesses, whom they call <i>babailanas</i> or
+<i>catalonas</i>, to whose function it belongs, to perform the
+sacrifices. The priestess, taking a lance in her hand, with extravagant
+and ridiculous gestures, works herself up to apparent frenzy,
+accompanied by foaming at the mouth, when uttering something, which is
+received as prophecy, she pierces the hog with the lance, and
+immediately distributes the carcase among those present: the ceremony,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb40" href="#pb40" name=
+"pb40">40</a>]</span>as usual, is closed by dancing and drinking.</p>
+<p>These sacrifices are offered to the infernal deities, as well as to
+the souls of their ancestors, who they are taught to believe inhabit
+very large trees, rocks of uncommon appearance, or any natural object
+which, in point of magnitude or form, varies from the usual course.
+They are so fully persuaded of this, that they never pass any object of
+this description, without first asking the permission of its visionary
+inhabitant, and to this hour the custom prevails. When any person was
+dangerously ill, his friends offered up to their deities rice, wine,
+and flesh, which was then given to the sick person, and which they were
+of opinion would effect his cure, a custom even yet followed by some
+people. They have many other superstitions, as that of the <i lang=
+"tl">patianac</i>, a spirit or ideal being, whose employment or
+amusement consists in preventing, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb41"
+href="#pb41" name="pb41">41</a>]</span>by certain means peculiar to
+itself, the delivery of a woman in labour. To counteract the malignity
+of this spirit, the husband, fastening the door, reduces himself to a
+state of complete nudity, lights a fire, and arming himself with his
+sword, continues to flourish it furiously, until the woman is
+delivered. The <i lang="tl">tigbalang</i> is another object of which
+they stand in great awe. It is described as a phantom, which assumes a
+variety of uncouth and monstrous shapes, and interposes its authority,
+to prevent their performing the duties, prescribed by our religion.</p>
+<p>These and other superstitions, formerly had extensive influence, and
+are still resorted to by impostors, who find their account in
+persuading those, who are silly enough to listen to them, that they are
+able to cure them of dangerous illness, or to recover any thing they
+may have lost, by having recourse to such absurdities; and so much do
+the love of life, and our <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb42" href=
+"#pb42" name="pb42">42</a>]</span>own individual interests prevail,
+that although they believe these customs sinful, and although they do
+not entirely give credit to their efficacy, yet they put them in
+practice, because, they say, chance may be in their favour: this is a
+proof that as yet they are very superficial christians<a href=
+"#n14"><sup>14</sup></a>. Indeed, all their religious impressions, seem
+rather the result of a slavish dread, than the effect of rational
+piety.</p>
+<p>They practise no external adoration, and have no other form of
+address to their gods, than what has been mentioned. They do not
+believe, that the good will be rewarded, or the wicked punished, but
+they acknowledge the immortality of the souls of the deceased, and that
+they are capable of doing them mischief. They persuade themselves, that
+these retain all the natural wants incident to the mortal state, and
+accordingly, place on their tombs, clothes, arms, and food, and on the
+fourth day, when the funeral ceremony is performed, a vacant seat is
+left at the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb43" href="#pb43" name=
+"pb43">43</a>]</span>table for the deceased, whom they believe to be
+actually present, though not obvious to sight. To prove this, sand is
+strewed on the floor, on which the prints of the feet of the deceased
+are often found. This may be presumed, to be the pious trick of some of
+the friends, but it answers the purpose, of inducing a belief in the
+actual presence of the party; and in order to deprecate the injury he
+may do, offerings of eatables are made to him, and which ceremony, is
+perfectly conformable, to the cowardly and timorous nature of the
+Indians. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb44" href="#pb44" name=
+"pb44">44</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch3" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e556" class="label">CHAPTER III.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1519 to 1564.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Comprising the Discovery of the
+Philippines.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">After the conquest of the Americas, and discovery of
+the South Sea, Hernando de Magellan, a Portuguese, affirmed there must
+be a communication with that sea by the antarctic pole, and proposed to
+his sovereign, to make the discovery by the route of the Moluccas. The
+king, Don Manuel of Portugal, either not believing there was such a
+passage, or prejudiced against Magellan, received his proposal with
+contempt. This disgusted him, and he came into Spain, where, at
+Saragossa, he was presented to Charles V., to whom he promised the
+complete discovery of the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb45" href=
+"#pb45" name="pb45">45</a>]</span>Moluccas, and the adjacent islands,
+within the Spanish line of demarcation, by a distinct route from that
+used by the Portuguese, pursuing his object by the expected antarctic
+passage to the South Sea. By the brief of Pope Alexander VI., expedited
+at Rome the 4th of May 1493, Magellan secured a patent, attaching such
+discoveries to the crown of Castile. This brief enjoined, that the
+globe should be equally divided, by a line drawn from the north, by the
+isles of the Azores, towards the south, embracing the conquests, which
+formed the western boundaries of the Atlantic; the portion to the west,
+to belong to the crown of Spain, and leaving to the crown of Portugal,
+the hemisphere to the eastward of this line. Having discovered the
+Brazils, however, and the king of Portugal being desirous of preserving
+it, he requested his Holiness, that the line might be drawn, four
+hundred and sixty leagues more <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb46"
+href="#pb46" name="pb46">46</a>]</span>to the westward of the Azores,
+in order, that no other power, might interfere with that valuable
+acquisition. The line was so drawn on the map, and the Moluccas, were
+accordingly, placed out of the line of territory, thus appropriated to
+the Portuguese, and within that of Spain<a href=
+"#n15"><sup>15</sup></a>: they were not able, however, at that time, to
+adjust the other point as to the route; but the Cape of Good Hope,
+interposing in their voyages to India, it was not doubted, that America
+might be like this hemisphere, and finish also in a cape, and passage
+to the South Sea. The desire of the Spaniards to take possession of the
+Spice Islands, or, as they were called, the Moluccas, instigated them
+to ascertain the truth of this conjecture; and a squadron of five
+ships, was fitted out for that purpose, viz. La Trinidad, in which
+Magellan himself embarked; San Antonio, La Concepcion, Santiago, and La
+Victoria; <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb47" href="#pb47" name=
+"pb47">47</a>]</span>the whole manned with two hundred and thirty-four
+men, and paid and victualled for two years.</p>
+<p>Magellan sailed from Seville with this armament on the 10th of
+August 1519, and on the 13th of December he arrived at the Brazils, and
+coasting the land in quest of the expected passage to the South Sea, on
+Easter day, he entered the Bay of Saint Julian, in fifty degrees of
+south latitude, where he intended remaining, finding the winter had
+commenced in those regions. Here his people mutinied, upon an idea that
+their provisions were exhausted, and that it was impossible to discover
+the pass they were in search of. Magellan quelled this mutiny; but
+immediately after understood, that another had broken out in the ship
+San Antonio, and that the crew had murdered the commander, and confined
+his cousin Alvaro de Mesquita, who was made captain on the arrest of
+Juan de Cartagena. The leader on this occasion <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb48" href="#pb48" name="pb48">48</a>]</span>was
+Gaspar de Quezada, whom he ordered to be hanged; and setting on shore a
+Franciscan friar and Juan de Cartagena, on account of their turbulent
+disposition, he sailed in prosecution of his voyage, by the much
+desired pass to the South Sea. On the 1st of November 1520, he
+discovered the straits which bear his name; and having occupied twenty
+days in passing through them, he found himself in the South Sea with
+three ships, the Santiago having been wrecked, and having separated
+from the San Antonio, which his cousin commanded, and which, by the
+route of the coast of Guinea, returned to Spain. Magellan, with fair
+winds and pleasant weather, ploughed that sea, which never before had
+been navigated. Uninterrupted in the pursuit of his object, he
+discovered, on the Sunday of Saint Lazarus, a great number of islands,
+which he named the Archipelago of Saint Lazarus; and on Easter Day, he
+arrived at the island <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb49" href="#pb49"
+name="pb49">49</a>]</span>of Mindanao, where he ordered the first mass
+which was said in the Philippines. This took place in the town of
+Batuan, in the province of Caraga, where he set up the cross, and took
+possession of these islands, in the name of the King of Spain.</p>
+<p>From Batuan, Magellan proceeded to Zebu, and, in passing the island
+of Dimasaua, he formed an alliance with its chief, who accompanied him
+to Zebu. The inhabitants of Zebu, received him with such kindness, that
+their king, Hamabar, his whole family, with the chief of Dimasaua, and
+many of the people of the island, were baptized. The King of Mactan
+alone, a very small island in front of the town of Zebu, resisted the
+Spaniards, and was sufficiently confident in his strength, to challenge
+Magellan, who was weak enough to accept the challenge. He selected for
+the enterprize fifty Spaniards, who attacked the Indians in morasses,
+the water up to their breasts, and approached so near them,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb50" href="#pb50" name=
+"pb50">50</a>]</span>that Magellan was wounded with an arrow, and died
+on the field with six other Spaniards, the rest saving themselves by
+flight.</p>
+<p>The friar Calancha, an Augustine, remarks in his history of Peru,
+that all those engaged in the discovery of the South Sea, came to no
+very enviable end: for, that a seaman of the name of Lopez, who was the
+first that beheld it from the mast-head, renounced his faith, and
+turned Moor. Basco Nunez de Balbua, who took possession of those
+regions, lost his head; and Magellan himself, finished his days in the
+abovementioned manner. I can add, that almost all those, who have been
+concerned in the discovery of the Philippines, have suffered so much,
+that the history of these islands, forms a tissue of tragedies.</p>
+<p>On the death of Magellan, the Spaniards chose Juan Serrano as
+Commander of the expedition; and, alarmed at their defeat at Mactan,
+they remained on board their ships, apprehensive of the treachery of
+the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb51" href="#pb51" name=
+"pb51">51</a>]</span>other Indians. In fact, the people of Zebu, began
+to think lightly of the strangers, whom they had hitherto considered as
+invincible, and proceeded to plan their destruction. Abundantly
+deceitful by nature, they concealed their designs, and succeeded in
+persuading our General to be present, with twenty-four Spaniards, at a
+feast, which the chief of Zebu had prepared for him. In the middle of
+the feast, a great number of armed Indians, whom Hamabar had concealed,
+rushed in, and murdered them all, Serrano alone excepted, who escaped
+to the sea side, and implored the assistance of his companions; but
+they, fearful of some new treason, were witnesses of his massacre,
+which the Indians effected in view of the squadron, without their
+attempting to relieve him, or revenge the injury. Juan Carvallo now
+became General of the armament, and he resolved to go from thence, in
+search of the Moluccas: <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb52" href=
+"#pb52" name="pb52">52</a>]</span>he burned the ship Concepcion, as he
+had not men sufficient to man her, and sailed from Zebu with the
+Trinidad and the Victoria. On the 8th of November he arrived at Tidore,
+one of the Moluccas, and was well received by its chief, who granted
+him a factory for the purpose of collecting cloves, &amp;c.; and on the
+21st of December, he loaded the two ships with spices, preparing for
+the return to Spain. Gonzalo Gomez de Espimosa commanded the Trinidad,
+and it was his intention to proceed to Panama, but he was captured by
+the Portuguese. Sebastian del Cano, went in the Victoria, by the way of
+the Cape of Good Hope, and, after losing many of his crew on the
+voyage, arrived at San Lucar de Barrameda, with only eighteen people,
+on the 7th of September 1522, three years from the time of their
+departure from Seville. He was thus the first, who had sailed round the
+world; and on this account, among other honours, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb53" href="#pb53" name="pb53">53</a>]</span>the
+Emperor gave him for his arms, a terrestrial globe, with this motto,
+<i lang="la">Hic primus geometros</i>.</p>
+<p>The account which Sebastian del Cano gave of the expedition, induced
+the Emperor, to send other armaments to the Moluccas. The first was
+that of Esteban Gomez, who proposed, by the way of Newfoundland, to
+discover a shorter passage to the South Sea. A squadron was accordingly
+despatched in the year 1524; but in a little time, news was received of
+its dispersion by bad weather. In the year following, Don Fray Garcia
+Jofre de Loaysa, was despatched from Corunna with seven ships, well
+appointed with good officers, and four hundred and fifty picked men;
+among these was Andres de Urdaneta, who afterwards became a friar of
+the order of San Augustine, and directed the expedition of Legaspi to
+these islands. They passed the Straits of Magellan, with the loss of
+one ship, and entering the South <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb54"
+href="#pb54" name="pb54">54</a>]</span>Sea, they encountered so severe
+a storm, that the whole squadron was separated. Loaysa pursued his
+course; and in a short time afterwards died. By order of the Emperor,
+Sebastian del Cano was to succeed to the command, but he surviving only
+a few days, it devolved on Martin Ya&ntilde;ez, a Biscayan. They
+arrived at Tidore on the 31st of December 1526, as did, in a short
+time, the remainder of the squadron, with few men, and those
+unserviceable. Here they found, that the Portuguese had declared war
+against the chief of Tidore, for having entertained the squadron of
+Magellan, and it was deemed on our part proper, to undertake the
+defence of those benefactors of the Spaniards. They had several
+encounters with the Portuguese, but of no moment, and few were killed
+on these occasions; but the number of sick increased considerably, from
+the length and hardships of the voyage; and from the humid nature of
+the climate, the whole <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb55" href="#pb55"
+name="pb55">55</a>]</span>were threatened with rapid dissolution; being
+therefore already reduced to one hundred and twenty, they constructed a
+fort, and surrounding it with a palisade, placed themselves under the
+command of Hernando de la Torre, who was chosen General after the death
+of Martin Ya&ntilde;ez.</p>
+<p>In this situation, were the remains of the armament under Loaysa
+found, when the Viceroy of Mexico, by orders from court, despatched to
+Molucca three ships, under the command of Alvaro de Saavedra, who
+arrived at these islands, by the route of the Ladrones, now called
+Marianas, of which he took possession, in the name of his Majesty the
+King of Spain, in the year 1528. Saavedra pursued his voyage to Tidore,
+where he found the hundred and twenty Spaniards, shut up in their
+fortress. They considered him, as an angel sent to their relief, in the
+extremity of misery: but this joy was of short duration, new quarrels
+springing up with the Portuguese, who <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb56" href="#pb56" name="pb56">56</a>]</span>had succeeded in
+destroying, nearly all the Spanish ships. They at last, however,
+commenced their voyage to New Spain. Twice they made the attempt, twice
+they were driven back; and they suffered so much, that the General,
+with many of the crews, fell a sacrifice; the few that remained, being
+compelled to submit to the Portuguese. This was a most lamentable
+conclusion of the expedition; but all our squadrons, having represented
+the Moluccas as extremely valuable, on account of their spices, war was
+on the point of being declared, between the two kingdoms, about the
+possession of them. The Spaniards alleged, that it could not be denied,
+these islands were in the line of demarcation of Spain; and the
+Portuguese, were unwilling to quit the spice trade, of which they were
+in possession, and which so much enriched the mother country. These
+differences were adjusted about the year 1529, the Emperor, renouncing
+his right to the Moluccas, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb57" href=
+"#pb57" name="pb57">57</a>]</span>for three hundred and fifty thousand
+ducats, by way of loan, advanced by the King of Portugal.</p>
+<p>Thus abandoning the Moluccas, the Emperor turned all his thoughts to
+the conquest of the Western Isles, or Philippines. He despatched
+instructions to the Viceroy of Mexico, to send a squadron for that
+purpose, with directions not to stop at the Moluccas, in order to avoid
+creating jealousy among the Portuguese. In obedience to these orders
+from court, the Viceroy immediately fitted out five ships in the Puerto
+de Natividad, and nominated as Commander of the expedition, Ruy Lopez
+de Villalobos, directing him, to take with him four Augustine friars,
+for the conversion of the conquered inhabitants. The squadron sailed on
+the day of All Saints, in the year 1542, and arrived safe off the
+Philippines; but they were driven so much to leeward, by the south-west
+monsoon, prevalent at that time, that they were compelled <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb58" href="#pb58" name="pb58">58</a>]</span>to
+anchor at the island of Sarragan, which lies on the opposite coast of
+Mindanao, and at forty leagues distance. In this miserable island, they
+suffered so much from hunger, that Villalobos sent some of the smaller
+vessels, in search of provisions, to the other islands: but, their
+return being delayed beyond his expectation, he resolved to sail for
+the Moluccas, though it was in direct opposition to his orders, without
+having effected any other object, than administering baptism to one
+child. The Portuguese received him very ungraciously, and compelled
+him, immediately to make the best of his way to Spain. In passing
+Amboyna, he died of a deep melancholy, arising out of the disasters of
+the expedition, and the idea of having disobeyed the orders of his
+sovereign, which were, on no account to visit the Moluccas. By the
+death of the General, the whole armament was deranged; indeed it was,
+eventually, almost all annihilated; <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb59"
+href="#pb59" name="pb59">59</a>]</span>and the few Spaniards who
+remained, found means to embark in different Portuguese ships. The
+Augustine friars went to Goa, from whence they found a passage to
+Europe, and arrived at Lisbon in August 1549, seven years after they
+had departed from the Puerto de Natividad.</p>
+<p>As his Catholic Majesty, was fully determined on the conquest of the
+Philippines, it is necessary to notice the title, by which he laid
+claim to them. Our writers have brought forward a number of arguments,
+to prove the right, which the Kings of Spain have to the Americas, and
+the islands they have conquered; but I find them very superficial, and
+only one incontestable document, by which our sovereigns hold these
+dominions, that is, the concession of the Roman Pontifs. It is now the
+received opinion of churchmen, that the Popes have not the power to
+make such grants, but at the period in question, the <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb60" href="#pb60" name="pb60">60</a>]</span>contrary
+opinion prevailed, and was generally acknowledged in the schools.
+Supported by this idea, then so universal, the Papal See, granted to
+the respective Kings, not only what they conquered, but, as we have
+seen, assumed the right, of even partitioning the globe. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb61" href="#pb61" name="pb61">61</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch4" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e624" class="label">CHAPTER IV.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1564 to 1565.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Conquest of Zebu, and Discovery of the Route
+to New Spain.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The glory of conquering the Philippines, was reserved
+for his Catholic Majesty Philip II., by means of, the valour of Miguel
+Lopez de Legaspi, the prudence of the Augustine friars, and the skill
+of one of those friars, Andres de Urdaneta, who had been a captain in
+the armament of Loaysa, but subsequently took the habit of San
+Augustine in Mexico, in the year 1552. His Majesty issued an edict,
+encouraging and recommending an expedition, to be sent by the Viceroy
+of Mexico, to the western isles. Friar Urdaneta acquiesced in the will
+of his sovereign, and the Viceroy <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb62"
+href="#pb62" name="pb62">62</a>]</span>chose five other religious of
+the same order, viz. Andres de Aguirre, Martin de Rada, Lorenzo Ximenes
+(who died in the Puerto de Natividad), Diego Herrera, and Pedro Gamboa,
+with the view to a spiritual, as well as temporal conquest. This
+squadron was composed of two ships, one small galleon, and a patache (a
+vessel so called). The command was given to Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, a
+noble Biscayan, from whose valour and prudence, the Viceroy expected
+greater results, than had been obtained from the other expeditions. The
+fleet sailed from Puerto de Natividad on the 21st November, 1564, with
+sealed orders; and when about a hundred leagues from the coast, the
+seals being broken, they found directions to proceed to these islands.
+Urdaneta had formed his plan, on the idea conceived by the Viceroy of
+first making New Guinea, but, obliged to conform to the royal
+instructions, he shaped his course nearly due west, in order to arrive
+at the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb63" href="#pb63" name=
+"pb63">63</a>]</span>ninth degree of latitude, and from thence to run
+direct west, to demand the submission of those islands, which lie
+between the ninth and tenth degree, passing by the islands of Arrecifes
+and Matalotes, together with those of La Nublada and Rocapartida, the
+two latter being too far out of the track. On the 31st of December, the
+patache separated, as if by accident, and never rejoined the squadron;
+Don Alonzo de Arellano was her commander, and Lopez Martin, a Mulatto,
+the pilot; and there was reason to believe that the separation was
+intentional, as it afterwards proved, that they went to Mindanao,
+where, taking in a cargo of gold and spices, they proceeded to New
+Spain. The squadron pursued its course, and on the 9th of January,
+1565, discovered an island, which Legaspi called Barbudos, because the
+inhabitants wore longer beards than the other Indians. On the 22d they
+discovered the islands Ladrones, where they <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb64" href="#pb64" name="pb64">64</a>]</span>remained
+some days, taking in water and purchasing fresh provisions, which they
+procured from the Indians, in exchange for European commodities,
+especially iron, an article in great esteem with them. These Indians
+pilfered whatever they could lay their hands on, and assaulted our
+people while procuring water; yet, many Spaniards were desirous of
+remaining among them, and petitioned the General to found a colony
+there, and despatch a ship to Acapulco for that purpose; but having no
+orders to that effect, he prosecuted his route on the 3d of February,
+and on the 13th discovered the Philippines. At Tandaya, and Abuyo, he
+attempted to make an amicable arrangement with the inhabitants, for
+provisions, making presents to them, and promising, that he would pay
+liberally for every thing; but he could only procure one fowl and one
+egg. The stock of provisions, was now, however, becoming so short, that
+he deemed it necessary, to run in more among <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb65" href="#pb65" name="pb65">65</a>]</span>the
+islands, in search of a supply. They arrived at Bohol, and found the
+Indians had retired to the mountains. They had behaved so kindly, in
+selling provisions to those, whom Ruy Lopez de Villalobos had sent for
+that purpose, that Legaspi was astonished at their reserve, and could
+not conceive the cause of this change, until the pilot of a Bornean
+vessel discovered it. This vessel was taken by Colonel Matheo del Sauz,
+in the following manner. The General, had sent him to reconnoitre the
+vessel, and the Borneans, little acquainted with Europeans and their
+customs, and believing they came to make prisoners of them, received
+them in a hostile manner with their cannon<a href=
+"#n16"><sup>16</sup></a>, killing one soldier, and wounding twenty. The
+Colonel returned their fire, and killed their captain; when part of the
+crew escaped, in a small boat, which they carry in the prow of their
+junk (the name they give their vessels), and the pilot, with six men,
+delivered themselves <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb66" href="#pb66"
+name="pb66">66</a>]</span>up, without further resistance. All this
+having taken place, without the knowledge or participation of the
+General, he was extremely solicitous, to do away the ill impression,
+which the transaction might make, and ordered them to restore the junk,
+with all the effects which they had taken; and which conduct so
+satisfied the Borneans, that they immediately declared publicly, they
+should interest themselves particularly, in favour of the squadron.
+They informed Legaspi, among other matters, that about two years since,
+some Portuguese of the Moluccas, had landed on their island, had been
+guilty of great extortion, and had done considerable injury to the
+inhabitants; and as they could not distinguish between the two nations,
+they had imagined that the people of his squadron were Portuguese.</p>
+<p>Legaspi was aware, that it was necessary, above all things, to
+undeceive the Indians in this respect; he, therefore, earnestly
+requested <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb67" href="#pb67" name=
+"pb67">67</a>]</span>the pilot of the Bornean vessel, to go on shore,
+and effect a reconciliation with the natives of Bohol, bringing on
+board the Rajah of the island, if possible. The Moor, in gratitude to
+the Spaniards, exerted himself, and returned on board with the Rajah,
+Sicatuna, who was persuaded to enter into an amicable understanding
+with them, to be consecrated and confirmed, in the manner usual with
+these islanders, which is thus; the parties entering into a treaty of
+friendship being bled at the arm, and the blood mixed with a little
+water, or spirit, they reciprocally drink each other's blood, so
+diluted, in token of amity. Legaspi, with this view, sent a soldier of
+the name of Santiago on shore, to go through the ceremony with
+Sicatuna; but the latter, thinking it below his dignity, to allow his
+blood to be drawn, with any but that of the General, ordered his son to
+take his place, promising, that the day following, he would proceed on
+board, and be bled<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb68" href="#pb68"
+name="pb68">68</a>]</span> with the General. Sicatuna, jealous of the
+intentions of the Spaniards, requested, that whilst he was on board,
+two Spaniards and two Moors of Borneo, might be sent on shore, as
+hostages for his safety; on this being likewise adjusted, he allowed
+them to cut wood in the mountains of Bohol, for refitting their ships;
+and in ratification of the whole, he was bled with the General the
+following day. Legaspi, in the belief that Sicatuna was King of the
+island, on this account consented to the ceremony; and although he
+afterwards understood, that the dominion of the Rajahs of this country,
+extended over a few small villages only, where they exercised the
+power, their valour gave them over their countrymen, he had no reason
+to repent of what he had done; for, in consequence of it, the Indians
+became free from apprehension, and supplied the squadron with the
+refreshments, it stood so much in need of. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb69" href="#pb69" name="pb69">69</a>]</span></p>
+<p>Legaspi paid well for every thing they brought; and, at length,
+procured sufficient provisions, to be in a situation to despatch one
+ship to New Spain, but was unable to accompany it; and he did not wish
+to have recourse to violence, to procure a larger supply, thinking that
+unjustifiable and unwise, except in case of extremity. With the people
+of Zebu, he was inclined to conclude, he should be obliged to have
+recourse to arms, unless they supplied him, on friendly terms, with
+provisions; and he intended to use, as a pretext for hostilities, their
+treachery against the squadron of Magellan. He resolved, therefore, to
+go to this island, in quitting that of Bohol, with the inhabitants of
+which, a cordiality had subsisted from the first; and as a proof of his
+sense of their conduct, he settled every account with them, most
+honourably. To this justice and prudence of Legaspi, may be attributed
+the easy conquest, the Spaniards made of this <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb70" href="#pb70" name="pb70">70</a>]</span>island,
+against whose natives, they seldom have been obliged to use
+fire-arms.</p>
+<p>On Easter day, the 22d of April, Legaspi accordingly sailed from
+Bohol, and on Friday the 27th, he arrived at Zebu, when he immediately
+despatched an interpreter named Pacheco, to propose amity with the
+natives, and that the Rajah might be sent to conclude the terms. Tupas,
+who was then King of Zebu, immediately sent some of the chief men,
+requesting Legaspi would not fire his artillery, which would alarm the
+town: and he promised to see the General, although he had no such
+intention, merely wishing to gain sufficient time, for the inhabitants
+to retire into the mountains, with all their moveables. It appearing
+the following day, that Tupas did not comply with his promise, three
+notifications were, in the space of two hours, sent to him by a notary,
+accompanied by Friar Urdaneta, who had the title of Protector of the
+Indians; but he paid no attention <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb71"
+href="#pb71" name="pb71">71</a>]</span>to this, and placed troops on
+the shore, and in canoes, to resist the landing of the Spaniards.
+Legaspi then determined on the assault, and ordered his men to fire on
+the canoes and Indians, who were posted to oppose them; but they
+retreated with such rapidity, that when the Spaniards leaped on shore,
+no enemy was to be seen. They followed them to the town, and found it
+in flames, the moveables having been taken away, and carried to the
+mountains, and little of any value remaining. The soldiers plundered
+those houses, which as yet, were not on fire, and among some things of
+little importance, they found a jewel, consisting of the image of a
+child, which they understood, was an object of adoration with the
+Indians, and which is at this day, in the church of San Augustine de
+Santo Ni&ntilde;o of Zebu. The Indians, it appeared, had been in
+possession of this image, from time immemorial; and they were
+accustomed, when they wanted rain, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb72"
+href="#pb72" name="pb72">72</a>]</span>to make a solemn feast, and
+public supplication to it, and, carrying it to the sea side, they
+immersed it in the water until it rained; honours or stripes, followed
+the concession or refusal, of what they had petitioned for, and it was
+believed among them, that this Santo Ni&ntilde;o was the cause of the
+disgrace of Magellan. At first, the Spaniards found very few eatables
+in Zebu, but continuing their search, they stumbled upon thirty fanegas
+of rice, and some millet. In returning from the town, they encountered
+three hundred armed Indians; but upon our musquets being fired, they
+fled immediately. The General established his camp on the sea shore,
+and took out the Royal treasure which came in the Capitana, in order to
+be enabled to examine her bottom, and put her in a proper state, for
+her return to New Spain. The Spaniards found themselves perfectly
+secure in this encampment, in the day-time, because the Indians dared
+not attempt to molest them, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb73" href=
+"#pb73" name="pb73">73</a>]</span>through fear of their fire-arms; but
+at night, they occasioned them continual alarms, and on several
+occasions, set fire to their camp, doing however, little damage to the
+soldiers, who were defended by the palisades. The General however, in
+consequence of this, ordered the whole to be destroyed, and built a
+fort, which at once checked all further attempts. As yet, Legaspi kept
+on the defensive, expecting that Tupas would soon arrive, with whom he
+was desirous of being in amity, with a view to the conquest of the
+island by fair means. After repeated messages he at last appeared,
+accompanied by another chief, called Tamayan. Legaspi received them
+with cordiality, treated them handsomely, and, in the name of his
+sovereign, forgave the treachery, they had been guilty of towards
+Magellan. They made many excuses for their conduct, and promised that
+in three days they would return, with all the principal people, and
+establish a <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb74" href="#pb74" name=
+"pb74">74</a>]</span>friendly intercourse with the Spaniards. These
+people will readily promise, whatever is demanded of them, but without
+any intention of performing their promise. Tupas, though King of the
+island, did not appear better entitled to respect, than any of the
+rest, and thought nothing of breaking his word, always, however, making
+some excuse on the succeeding visit.</p>
+<p>Notwithstanding the peaceable demeanor of the Indians, the General
+ordered, that no one should be permitted to quit the camp, as he
+apprehended an ambuscade, which might have a fatal issue. This, in
+fact, happened to Pedro de Arana, one of Legaspi's aides-de-camp, who,
+disregarding this order, passed the lines alone with his gun, and
+before he was able to save himself, he was run through with a lance,
+and his head cut off, and carried on board a parao, which was lying at
+a little distance. The General felt the loss of Pedro de Arana much,
+and gave orders to the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb75" href="#pb75"
+name="pb75">75</a>]</span>Colonel, to chastise the insolence of the
+Indians, and reduce them. Whilst the Colonel was employed in this
+expedition, the General, who had been accustomed to sleep on board
+ship, determined to pass his nights on shore in future, through some
+distrust he entertained, of the officers of the navy, and ordered, that
+his aides-de-camp should keep guard over him. They did not relish the
+thoughts of this, persuading themselves, they would be degraded, by
+obeying the orders. The day following therefore, at a general review of
+the force, Pedro Mena, in the name of the whole, came forward, and,
+with very little ceremony, intimated that they would not keep guard, as
+it was the duty of the privates. The Colonel reprehended them sharply,
+suspended them, and struck them out of the list of aids-de-camp of the
+General. This punishment for their insolence, though fully merited,
+exasperated them to such a degree, that they set fire to their tents,
+and <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb76" href="#pb76" name=
+"pb76">76</a>]</span>had nearly burnt all the effects belonging to his
+Majesty. The principal perpetrators of this crime, were Pedro de Mena,
+and Terresan, who were executed the following day, and by this act, the
+subordination of the rest was secured.</p>
+<p>The ship Capitana, was by this time prepared, for her voyage to New
+Spain. Her commander was Phelipe de Salcedo, grandson of the General;
+and there went in her, the friars Andres de Urdaneta, to conduct her to
+New Spain, and Martin de Aguirre, to solicit assistance for the
+conversion of these islanders. They sailed from Zebu on the 1st of
+June, 1565, and reaching the 36th degree of latitude, in search of the
+north-west winds, they directed their course to Puerto de la Natividad,
+where they arrived, after a four months voyage; but considering the
+distance of this port from Mexico, they pushed forwards to Acapulco,
+which was nearer, and they arrived there on the 30th of October. In
+Mexico, their arrival <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb77" href="#pb77"
+name="pb77">77</a>]</span>occasioned much exultation, as they were
+considered to be lost, by the accounts which had been given, by the
+Captain Arellano and the pilot Lope Martin, who, three months before,
+had arrived at Puerto de la Natividad. The friars Urdaneta and Aguirre
+went to Madrid, where they met with Arellano, who was soliciting a
+reward, for the discovery of the track from the Philippines to New
+Spain. He had persisted in his pretensions, till the arrival of these
+friars, when he altered his tone; he was put in confinement, and
+ordered to Mexico, to be from thence sent to Manila, to be punished by
+Legaspi as his conduct deserved. The Mexicans, however, were of
+opinion, that he should not be sent to Manila, until the death of
+Legaspi was ascertained. The friars Urdaneta and Aguirre, having
+favourably completed their mission, embarked for Mexico, where Urdaneta
+died on the 3d of June, 1568, in the 70th year of his age. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb78" href="#pb78" name="pb78">78</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch5" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e682" class="label">CHAPTER V.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1565.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the complete Conquest of the Island of Zebu, and
+of some Towns in other Islands.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The day following that, on which the Capitana sailed,
+a Moor of Borneo, called Cid Hamal, established in this island, arrived
+in our camp. He recommended it to the General, to invite Tupas to a
+conference; and upon this being done, he accordingly presented himself
+a second time, with some of the chief men of the island, and the
+conference terminated, in their resolution to preserve a good
+understanding with the Spaniards. They paid homage to the king of
+Spain, promising, that the squadron should be supplied with provisions,
+at the price usual among themselves, and granting land, and every means
+of founding a Spanish city, with fortifications <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb79" href="#pb79" name="pb79">79</a>]</span>for its
+defence. Amity thus restored, the Indians began to re-build their town,
+and a very short time, exhibited the pleasing sight, of the individuals
+of two different nations, establishing themselves at a little distance
+from each other.</p>
+<p>The Zebuans lost all apprehensions of the Spaniards, and came to
+their town to sell fruit, goats, and provisions. Among the least
+reserved was Tupas, who, under the pretext of accompanying other
+chiefs, visited the General, making him presents; and so contrived that
+his women should visit him likewise, dressing themselves in rich
+clothes, with ear-rings and bracelets of gold on the feet and arms, and
+accompanied by a great concourse of men and women; which visit was not
+ill received, the General always treating them handsomely. Tupas
+likewise, gave Legaspi his niece, who was a widow, and other women to
+attend him. The General directed them to be instructed in the Christian
+doctrine, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb80" href="#pb80" name=
+"pb80">80</a>]</span>and they embraced our religion, and were baptized.
+The niece of Tupas, had the name of Isabel given her, in memory of the
+deceased lady of the General, whose name this was, and in a little time
+she was married to Maestre Andrea, an officer of the squadron.</p>
+<p>The provisions which they had in the island of Zebu, were not
+sufficient for the Indians and their numerous guests; in consequence of
+which, Legaspi directed Tupas, to send two chiefs to the island of
+Panay, to purchase rice. Whilst these men were on their mission, the
+Spaniards sailed, in vessels which they had constructed at Zebu, on an
+expedition against some towns, belonging to the enemies of the Zebuans,
+and were enabled to send some rice to those in the camp. The Moors
+likewise of the island of Lu&ccedil;on, who came for commercial
+purposes to Zebu, sold them two hundred baskets of this grain; but as
+the return of the two ships which had gone <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb81" href="#pb81" name="pb81">81</a>]</span>to
+Panay, was still delayed beyond the expected time, Legaspi was
+compelled to put every man on an allowance, which produced great
+discontent among the people, and some even adopted the resolution of
+escaping with the patache San Juan, with the intention of lying in wait
+behind the islands, to rob the small barks that came there for
+commerce, and with their spoils to retire to France. The authors of
+this conspiracy were Pablo Hernandez and Juan Maria Venecianos; and
+they were joined in it by the pilot Francis Pierres Plin, Jorge el
+Griego, Maestre Andrea, the husband of Tupas's niece, Geronimo Foxa,
+and some foreigners. They fixed on the 26th of November, 1565, for
+their undertaking, intending previously to endeavour to disable all the
+ships, in order that they might not be pursued. It pleased Heaven to
+retard their scheme one day beyond the time fixed, and Juan Maria
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb82" href="#pb82" name=
+"pb82">82</a>]</span>Venecianos repenting of his treason, discovered
+the conspiracy to Colonel Matheo del Sauz. The conspirators were
+immediately all apprehended, except Pablo Hernandez, who escaped into
+the country among the Indians. The whole underwent an examination, and
+Legaspi ordered that Francis Pierres Plin, and Jorge el Griego, should
+be hanged by break of day. It was his intention to have followed up the
+punishment of the conspirators, and he was proceeding to hang Maestre
+Andrea. The clergy, however, entreated him to pardon him, on account of
+his near relationship to Tupas, to which he assented. Pablo Hernandez,
+pressed by hunger, was compelled to deliver himself up, and as he was
+the ringleader, he was executed in the middle of the day by
+proclamation, and his head placed on a pole, as a warning to others. A
+pardon was granted to all the rest in the name of the King, and by this
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb83" href="#pb83" name=
+"pb83">83</a>]</span>due mixture of severity and lenity, the minds of
+the General and the friars were tranquillized.</p>
+<p>Famine, at this time, was likely to be the lot of the Spaniards, as
+the chiefs who had been sent to Panay had not appeared; and as six more
+paraos had been despatched for the same purpose, it was apprehended
+that they had entered into a combination with the first, to reduce the
+Spaniards by famine. In this situation, Captain Martin de Goite set
+sail, with the intention of taking by force, from the enemies of the
+Zebuans, as much provision as could be procured, and executed his plan
+with so much success, that by Christmas he sent to the camp a small
+vessel laden with borona (bread made of Indian corn and millet). This
+proved the most acceptable new year's gift, which could have been
+offered under their circumstances; by degrees provisions became more
+plentiful, and the people began to revive, and forget <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb84" href="#pb84" name="pb84">84</a>]</span>the
+famine they had endured. The chiefs now made their appearance from
+Panay with the rice, but they assigned little of it to the Spaniards,
+and the largest quantity to the Indians.</p>
+<p>The General was well aware of the treachery of the Zebuans, of the
+little faith to be placed in them, and their doubtful intentions; but
+he dissembled his sentiments, as they were necessary to his views, and
+our camp was tolerably well supplied. By the expeditions, which Martin
+de Goite and others made round the adjacent islands, it was discovered
+that some of the towns courted the friendship of the Spaniards, while
+others planned their destruction by famine, for which purpose all the
+provisions were conveyed to the mountains. The Moors of Luzon, however,
+found it their interest to bring sufficient rice to Zebu, and Legaspi,
+who did not wish to see a recurrence of the same danger as had
+happened, sent the Colonel in search of provisions <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb85" href="#pb85" name="pb85">85</a>]</span>to the
+neighbouring islands; but here he encountered another inconvenience, in
+leaving too small a force for the defence of Zebu; the consequence of
+which was, that a plot was formed to seize a vessel belonging to the
+Moors of Luzon, at that time trading at Zebu, to murder all on board,
+and escape with the vessel to the Moluccas, where the Portuguese would
+willingly receive them. Juan Nunes de Carrion, and Miguel Gomez
+Cavecillas, were executed for this piece of treason, after due
+repentance of their villainy. Captain Martin de Goite, with the
+provisions he forwarded, at length sent information, that many nations
+were desirous of becoming vassals of the King of Spain, and the Colonel
+soon after arrived with above one thousand fanegas of rice, after
+having stopt at the islands of Mindanao, Negros, and Panay, where he
+ransomed a Mexican Indian, who had been in the squadron of Villalobos,
+and had been taken prisoner. Captain Juan de la <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb86" href="#pb86" name="pb86">86</a>]</span>Jela,
+who had likewise gone out in search of provisions, had the good fortune
+to discover the ship San Geronimo, which he conducted to Zebu; a
+circumstance which filled every one with joy, mingled with regret, at
+the thoughts of the tragic scenes which had been acted on board that
+ship.</p>
+<p>The Royal Audience of Mexico had despatched the ship San Geronimo
+from Acapulco to relieve those at Zebu, and to advertise them of the
+arrival of the Capitana at that port. They sent as captain of the ship
+Pedro Sanchez Pericon; as second in command, Juan Ortez de Mosquera,
+and as pilot the mulatto Lope Martin, who was sent for the express
+purpose of being punished by Legaspi, for having separated,
+intentionally, from the squadron in the patache San Lucas. Pericon and
+Mosquera had been, before the commencement of the voyage, inimical to
+each other, and in its progress their mutual antipathy was augmented.
+The pilot, Martin, dreading <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb87" href=
+"#pb87" name="pb87">87</a>]</span>the idea of being confronted with
+Legaspi, entered into a plot with Mosquera, and they gained over to
+their party most of the crew, among whom was Philip de Ocampo, a brave
+man, but of the worst character. Thinking their strength sufficient,
+they commenced their operations by being insolent to the commander, and
+one night they killed a horse which he had brought in the galleon. The
+friends of Pericon conjured him to be on his guard, as they concluded
+that those who had begun by killing the horse, would end in murdering
+him, if he was not sufficiently vigilant. But Pericon's confidence was
+too great, and he slighted the advice of his friends. The conspirators
+by this forbearance increasing every day in boldness, at last resolved
+to put in practice their diabolical design of murdering the commander,
+and getting possession of the vessel; accordingly one night, after
+having placed guards on those of the crew whom they could not confide
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb88" href="#pb88" name=
+"pb88">88</a>]</span>in, Mosquera entered the captain's bedroom,
+accompanied by two seamen, one of the name of Bartolome de Lara, and
+the other Morales, and ordered them to stab Captain Pericon and his
+son, a young man about twenty-five years of age, who had a sub-command
+in the ship. They effected their purpose, and threw the bodies
+overboard; and placing some chests on the deck for the accommodation of
+the people, Mosquera thus harangued them: &ldquo;Gentlemen, let us
+recommend to Heaven the souls of Captain Pericon and his son; they came
+by their death for reasons which, when we arrive at Zebu, shall be
+given to General Legaspi; every thing shall remain unaltered, and I, as
+a good subject of his Majesty, will conduct the ship to that
+island.&rdquo;</p>
+<p>Many days had not elapsed before Mosquera and the pilot quarrelled;
+it was a difficult task for the latter to reconcile himself to his
+situation, and put on the mask of <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb89"
+href="#pb89" name="pb89">89</a>]</span>friendship to the former. He
+whispered to Mosquera in confidence, that the people were much
+irritated at the murders which had been committed, and among other
+things, he proposed to tranquillize them, by putting in irons some
+person who had been concerned in the affair, and afterwards to
+discharge him, under the authority of a notarial process, drawn up for
+that purpose, <span class="corr" id="xd19e726" title=
+"Source: delaring">declaring</span> his innocence. This appearing a
+plausible measure enough, Mosquera, with this view, foolishly convened
+the ship's company, and the pilot seized upon him, and put him in
+confinement. The day following he ordered breakfast, of which Mosquera
+partook in his irons, and when finished, he requested the pilot would
+set him at liberty, as there had been time sufficient allowed for the
+ceremony. The views of the mulatto, however, were very different; he
+ordered him to be hung at the yard-arm, without giving him time to
+confess, observing, that Divine Providence <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb90" href="#pb90" name="pb90">90</a>]</span>had
+ordered he should die without partaking the sacrament, as had been the
+case with the two whom he had murdered. The mulatto now remaining
+captain of the ship, Philip de Ocampo, who was his favourite, made a
+speech to his companions, telling them, &ldquo;That Captain Lope Martin
+did not intend going to Zebu; that those who were desirous of
+accompanying him, should go to a part of the world where all might
+acquire great riches, but that those who were of a different opinion,
+should be set on shore on an island in the immediate neighbourhood of
+Zebu, from whence they might easily reach Legaspi.&rdquo; All were
+silent, and nothing was done till they arrived at the islands of
+Barbudos; when Lope Martin landing on one which was desolate, gave out
+that it was necessary to careen the ship there, but his real intention
+was to leave most of his companions on this island, exposed to
+famine.</p>
+<p>He was not, however, able sufficiently <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb91" href="#pb91" name="pb91">91</a>]</span>to conceal his
+intentions. The Friar Capellan, a venerable priest, suspected him, and
+consulted with Juan de Vivero on some means of averting this blow.
+Rodrigo de Angle, the mate of the ship, a man of approved courage,
+determined to appeal to his Majesty, if it cost him his life, broke the
+matter to others, and eventually drew to his party Bartholome de Lara,
+by promising to make him captain of the ship, although he had no such
+intention. Rodrigo finding he had gained most of the crew on board to
+his side, weighed anchor, and hallooed to those on shore, that all the
+true and faithful vassals of his Majesty might embark immediately, and
+that the ship belonged to the King. By this means all were received on
+board but Lope Martin and Philip de Ocampo, and about twenty-five
+others, among whom were some loyalists, who were unable to reach the
+ship in time.</p>
+<p>Bartholome de Lara, disappointed in <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb92" href="#pb92" name="pb92">92</a>]</span>his expectations of being
+made captain of the ship, began to form a party, and was joined more
+from necessity than otherwise by Hernando de Morales, his accomplice in
+the murder of Pericon and his son; but the new captain contrived means
+to try and hang them, after which the crew remained free from further
+molestation, and they arrived at Zebu. The General Legaspi, to deter
+others, hanged the notary Juan de Zaldivar, for being <span class=
+"corr" id="xd19e740" title="Source: accessary">accessory</span> to the
+aforesaid murder. He rewarded Rodrigo del Angle, Garnica, and Juan
+Enriquez, with all the loyalists, and granted a pardon, in the name of
+the King, to all those who had acted any subordinate part in this
+transaction.</p>
+<p>The Colonel, at this time, had gone to ratify a treaty of peace with
+some of the towns, and falling in with a small Portuguese galleon of
+superior force, which bore down upon his patache, he was compelled to
+escape as well as he could. About the <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb93" href="#pb93" name="pb93">93</a>]</span>same time, two Portuguese
+vessels having appeared off Zebu, Legaspi ordered them to be
+acknowledged as friends, and invited into the harbour, but they excused
+themselves, and prosecuted their route. These proved afterwards to be
+ships belonging to the squadron of Pereyra, which was coming against
+the Spaniards, but being dispersed by storms, they could not pursue
+their first intentions. The General fortified his camp, and
+entertaining no fears of the Portuguese, he despatched Martin de Goite
+on an amicable treaty with some adjacent towns, and to receive the
+tribute of those who had already submitted. He likewise sent the
+Colonel to Mindanao, for the purchase of cinnamon, to be shipped to New
+Spain. This expedition was unfortunate in the death of this great man,
+who was a severe loss to the Spaniards. He caught a fever, and being in
+great danger, he told Morones, his second in command, and to
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb94" href="#pb94" name=
+"pb94">94</a>]</span>whom he entrusted the ship before he died, that he
+suspected an intention of mutiny among the crew; the object of which
+was, to go off with the patache, because they had not been allowed to
+purchase cinnamon for themselves, and which being the only valuable
+object for which the voyage was undertaken, belonged to the King, as
+being the first purchase made of that article. Legaspi paid him the
+usual funeral honours in Zebu, and punished those who were found to be
+concerned in this mutiny. He likewise named as his successor Martin de
+Goite. The General sent Morones to Caraga, and Pedro de Herrera to
+Leyte, for tar, for careening the ships. The Indians of this island are
+excellent porters and labourers, and our soldiers had such confidence
+in them, that leaving their arms, and relying on their friendship, they
+received the tar in an unguarded manner. This, however, in the end,
+cost them dear, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb95" href="#pb95" name=
+"pb95">95</a>]</span>as on a sudden they found themselves surrounded in
+an ambuscade, by eight or ten Indians to one Spaniard; and Matheo
+Sanchez Gaditano not being able to extricate them, the Indians murdered
+all but one Spaniard, who escaped to relate the news of this tragedy.
+Whilst this was passing up the country, others came down to plunder the
+ship, who finding our people in unsuspecting security, possessed
+themselves of their arms, and destroyed every thing they could not take
+away.</p>
+<p>On the 10th of June, 1567, there arrived at Zebu two Portuguese
+caracoas, with letters from Captain Pereyra to Miguel Lopez de Legaspi,
+in which he observed, that he supposed they were the Spaniards who had
+taken refuge in Zebu, in consequence of bad weather, and were unable to
+return to New Spain, as had happened to those of the other Spanish
+squadrons which had navigated those seas; and on this supposition
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb96" href="#pb96" name=
+"pb96">96</a>]</span>he invited them to the Moluccas, where he promised
+to receive them with every degree of friendship, and furnish them with
+proper necessaries to prosecute their voyage.</p>
+<p>Such were the contents of his letter on the occasion, but some
+invalid Spaniards who came with the messenger, affirmed that Pereyra
+had been despatched by the Viceroy of India to drive the Spaniards out
+of Zebu, and not being able last year to effect it, in consequence of
+the storms they had encountered, they had remained in Tidore with the
+intention of completing it this year. Our General, aware of the snare
+which Pereyra was laying for him, answered this specious letter with
+corresponding dissimulation, and that he had given notice to his court
+of the capture of these islands, and was in daily expectation of
+hearing from his sovereign. Surrounded by these interruptions and
+difficulties, the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb97" href="#pb97"
+name="pb97">97</a>]</span>General sent to Acapulco the patache San
+Lucas, Captain Juan de la Isla, requesting such assistance as might
+prevent the threatened suspension of their intercourse with New Spain,
+and which appeared highly probable. The Augustine friars sent, on this
+occasion, Friar Pedro de Gamboa to solicit some additional aid for the
+conversion of these infidels, who had already begun to be baptized, and
+which, they urged, would securely establish the authority of the
+Spaniards in the Philippines, but the friar never arrived, having died
+on the voyage.</p>
+<p>On the 20th of August, this year, Philip de Salcedo arrived with two
+ships, and accompanied by his brother Juan de Salcedo, who had been of
+great use in the first conquest of these islands. The General was
+rejoiced at the arrival of such considerable relief, at a period when
+he had reason to think Pereyra intended to attack <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb98" href="#pb98" name="pb98">98</a>]</span>Zebu.
+When Legaspi saw, however, that the Portuguese did not make their
+appearance as he expected, he despatched his grandson, Philip de
+Salcedo, to Acapulco, with directions to go by the route of the Ladrone
+Islands, where he was shipwrecked; but, all the people being saved, he
+built another vessel, and returned to Zebu in such happy time, that he
+made up for his disappointment, by the importance of his appearance, at
+the period of Pereyra's arrival, on the 30th of September 1568, with
+<span class="corr" id="xd19e763" title="Source: as quadron">a
+squadron</span> of three galleons, two galeots, three fustas, and
+twenty smaller vessels. Every thing, however, on this occasion,
+indicated perfect amity; the Generals visited reciprocally, and held
+meetings, to ascertain whether these islands were in the line of
+demarcation of Spain, or not, with the view of avoiding hostilities.
+Pereyra, by an artful line of conduct, protracted these discussions, in
+order to gain time, if <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb99" href="#pb99"
+name="pb99">99</a>]</span>possible, by stratagem, to get possession of
+the port and of our camp, as he found it could not be effected by
+force. Disappointed, however, in his views, he returned on
+Christmas-eve to the Moluccas, having been dismissed with great
+civility by Legaspi. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb100" href="#pb100"
+name="pb100">100</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch6" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e770" class="label">CHAPTER VI.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1569 to 1571.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Conquest of Manila.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The supply of provisions having been very short, in
+consequence of the Portuguese, in some measure, blockading the port,
+the General, to guard against being exposed to the same danger a second
+time, determined to change his position, and establish himself in a
+more fertile country than that he then occupied. He ordered the camp to
+be immediately removed to the island of Panay: with this commission he
+charged his grandson, Philip de Salcedo, who was very cordially
+received by the natives, because he had formerly assisted them against
+their enemies, and enabled them to make many prisoners. Captain Luis de
+la Haya was ordered to go with <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb101"
+href="#pb101" name="pb101">101</a>]</span>his detachment, to the river
+Araut in the same island; Captain Andres de Ybarra to the island of
+Masbate; and the Colonel was ordered to remain in Zebu. In the interim
+the camp was established in Panay, and the patache San Lucas remained
+at Zebu, preparing to depart for New Spain. Juan de Salcedo ordered his
+brother Philip to Panay with another vessel, which conveyed the books
+and effects of his grandfather, all of which were lost in a storm;
+which loss, although he felt it severely, Legaspi bore with exemplary
+patience and fortitude.</p>
+<p>Philip de Salcedo having loaded the patache San Lucas, sailed from
+Zebu, and, in a few days after her departure, fell in with the San
+Juan, which had sailed from Acapulco, and was commanded by Captain Juan
+Lopez de Aguirre; Salcedo returned with her to Zebu, and, on the 10th
+of July, sailed a second time on his voyage. By the San Juan the
+Augustine fathers had <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb102" href=
+"#pb102" name="pb102">102</a>]</span>sent Friar Herrera, having
+appointed him a provincial, or clerical head of a province, which was
+the first they had established in the Philippines. Their intention was
+by this appointment, to increase the importance of the religious
+orders, and induce higher respect from the new converts; the effect,
+accordingly, was the addition of many to the number, stimulated too, by
+the example of Tupas and his son: Legaspi stood godfather to Tupas, who
+was christened Philip, in compliment to the King of Spain; and his son
+was christened Charles, and had, as his godfather, Juan de Salcedo. The
+feasts which were held on the day these two new Christians were
+baptized, contributed, at the same time, to the conversion of many
+others. This was a measure of great expediency, although the duty of
+the fathers became necessarily so much more enlarged. It was determined
+that a friar, whose name was Juan Alba, should be sent to attempt the
+conversion of the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb103" href="#pb103"
+name="pb103">103</a>]</span>isle of Masbate; and another, by the name
+of Alonzo Ximenes, to the river Araut, in the island of Panay, where he
+made many converts. Friar Martin de Rada remained in Zebu, and the rest
+of the clergy accompanied the General in the conquest of Manila.</p>
+<p>The General Legaspi arrived at Panay, accompanied by the Colonel,
+who, however, immediately returned to his command at Zebu, together
+with his wife, who had just arrived from New Spain with Captain Juan
+Lopez de Aguirre, in the ship San Juan. Legaspi was received by the
+natives of Panay with every demonstration of joy, and they appeared
+more sincere in their professions than those of Zebu. He constructed,
+with all expedition, some works, to enable him to resist the attempts
+of the squadron of Pereyra, and check the proceedings of a swarm of
+pirates, which had issued from Jolo and Borneo in twenty vessels,
+called <i>vireyes</i>, and had captured <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb104" href="#pb104" name="pb104">104</a>]</span>a Spanish vessel,
+with the crew. The Colonel attacked these pirates with nine
+<i>proas</i>: he took four <i>vireyes</i>, and would have taken the
+whole, had not seven of his vessels been too much astern. Having
+forwarded the account of this engagement to the General, he was now at
+liberty to assist the inhabitants of Aclan, who had sustained
+considerable injury from the pirates of Mindoro. In the month of
+January, 1570, Juan de Salcedo sailed on this expedition with thirty
+Spaniards and many friendly Indians. He entered the town of Mamburao,
+and, having made himself master of it, compelled the inhabitants to
+ransom themselves with gold; after which he proceeded to the isle of
+Lucban, where the pirates of Mindoro had taken refuge, and had
+protected themselves by some indifferent works; he, with ease, forced
+their intrenchments, attacked them with fire-arms, and, as they were
+unable to resist this mode of warfare, they <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb105" href="#pb105" name=
+"pb105">105</a>]</span>agreed to ransom themselves with gold, as the
+inhabitants of Mamburao had done. Salcedo divided the spoil among his
+soldiers and the Indians, and returned to Panay, to give an account of
+this expedition.</p>
+<p>The General, who was determined above all things on the conquest of
+Manila, named the Colonel as commandant, and sent with him his
+grandson, Juan de Salcedo, with an hundred and twenty Spaniards, and
+many friendly Indians, to accomplish it. They sailed from Panay the
+beginning of May 1570. The Colonel went directly against Manila, but
+Juan de Salcedo turned aside to the country about the lake of Bombon,
+which is now called the Province of Batangas, to treat with the
+natives. He sent the usual peace-offerings, but they answered him with
+their arms. He engaged them, and would have succeeded, but received so
+severe a wound in his leg from an arrow, that he was compelled
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb106" href="#pb106" name=
+"pb106">106</a>]</span>to abandon his enterprise, and follow the
+Colonel to Manila. The Colonel made terms with the Rajah, who was a
+good old man, and whom history calls Raxa Matanda, that is, the old
+Rajah; he had a nephew of the name of Raxa Soliman, who, likewise, made
+terms with the Colonel; but little dependence could be placed on him,
+as he evidently was no friend to the Spaniards, and had, as it was
+supposed, secreted provisions. He was accused, likewise, of exciting
+the Indians to murder the Spaniards, while on shore, which obliged our
+people to behave with great circumspection toward them. One day Raxa
+Soliman even ordered his men to fire upon our shipping, and, after
+having done us considerable damage, he embarked on board a large junk,
+and left the river, firing at us as he passed<a href=
+"#n17"><sup>17</sup></a>. The Colonel instantly landed, leaving Juan de
+Salcedo in charge of the ships, and, with eighty men, stormed the fort
+which the Indians had at <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb107" href=
+"#pb107" name="pb107">107</a>]</span>the mouth of the river, and where
+at present stands the fort of Santiago. He ordered his soldiers to
+attack the guns, and they were so fortunate in their attack, as in
+their first onset to kill the principal artillery officer, who appeared
+to be an European, as he was seen to cross himself before he
+died<a href="#n18"><sup>18</sup></a>; the remainder, were by the vigour
+of the assault, compelled to fly towards the town, which they burnt in
+their retreat, that the Spaniards might not profit by their success.
+Among other things, a foundery for cannon was destroyed, and it was
+supposed they had thrown many pieces of artillery into the sea, as only
+twelve, and a few falconets (a piece so called), were found in the
+place. The old Rajah was not a party in this disturbance, as neither he
+nor any of his people were engaged; and his fidelity was proved, by his
+having displayed from his house a white flag, during the time the
+action lasted. The Colonel, fearing that <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb108" href="#pb108" name="pb108">108</a>]</span>if he remained
+longer, he should encounter the south-west monsoon, and be unable to
+return, retired immediately to Cavite, to do the needful repairs to his
+ships, and in two days sailed for Panay.</p>
+<p>On the 23d of June of this year, Captain Juan de la Isla arrived
+with three vessels, in which came the Friar Perrera with two other
+religious, viz. Friar Diego Ordu&ntilde;ez, and Friar Diego de Espinar,
+who came to labour in this new vineyard. Despatches were brought by
+them from his Majesty, by which Miguel Lopez de Legaspi was constituted
+President of the islands of the Ladrones, and he was recommended to
+settle the Philippines; at the same time his Majesty bestowed portions
+of lands, with their inhabitants, on all who might be engaged in the
+conquest. With a view to put these orders in execution, Legaspi first
+despatched from Panay, the same Captain Juan de la Isla, with two ships
+to Acapulco, and sailed for Zebu, where he ordered <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb109" href="#pb109" name="pb109">109</a>]</span>it
+to be proclaimed, that he intended to erect the town which had been
+built into a city, and to give every encouragement to increase the
+population, directing those who wished to settle in it to go before the
+notary, to be enrolled by five hundreds. On New Year's day, 1571, he
+named two ordinary alcaldes, six regidores, a notary, and two
+alguazils, who immediately took the customary oath on entering their
+office, and he strictly enjoined them the discharge of their respective
+duties. He likewise directed that the town, which had till then been
+called San Miguel, should be named the City del Santissimo Nombre de
+Jesus, in memory of the discovery of the sacred child, as before
+related. He settled the manner, in which rewards should be distributed
+among the tributary Indians, who were in the neighbourhood of the city,
+and left them under the care of the treasurer, Guido de Labezares, in
+order that he might have the opportunity of finishing a stone
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb110" href="#pb110" name=
+"pb110">110</a>]</span>fort, which he had ordered to be constructed.
+All these and many subordinate objects, being attained by the end of
+January, he returned to Panay, to attempt from thence the conquest of
+Manila.</p>
+<p>Immediately after the President arrived at Panay, the Colonel,
+attended by all the officers and soldiers, joined him, leaving in
+Masbate the Padre Alba with six men, and in Dumangas Padre Ximenes, in
+charge of the new conquests. The Padre Herrera, with other religious,
+accompanied the General in his expedition against Manila, on which he
+sailed the 15th of April; and in the island of Lutaga he reviewed his
+force, and found they amounted to two hundred and eighty soldiers,
+consisting partly of his own people, of those of the Colonel, of
+Captains Andres de Ybarra, Luis de la Haya, and Juan de Salcedo. He
+passed by the island of Mindoro, and settled the tribute which the
+natives were to pay to the King of Spain. Here he had <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb111" href="#pb111" name="pb111">111</a>]</span>the
+opportunity of saving a Chinese vessel called a Sampan, from
+foundering; and he received the crew, with that kindness and warmth of
+feeling, so natural to the Spaniards.</p>
+<p>The Chinese acknowledged the kindness of the Spaniards, and formed a
+friendly connection with them. The President continued his voyage, and
+entered Cavite, where he waited the arrival of those who had fallen
+astern; meantime he treated with the natives of the place, and received
+them as vassals of the King of Spain. Two days after he arrived, he
+entered with all his squadron into the river of Manila. The Indians,
+thinking the Spaniards had returned, to punish them for the resistance
+they had made to the Colonel, set fire to the town, and with their
+effects fled to Tondo. The President sent the Colonel to bring them to
+terms, who, arriving at their camp, gave them to understand, by means
+of an interpreter, that the Spaniards had not <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb112" href="#pb112" name="pb112">112</a>]</span>come
+with the intention of doing them any injury. On learning this, some
+began to quench the flames, and others went in search of the old Rajah;
+and Lacandola, the chief of Tondo, immediately went with others to wait
+on Legaspi. He received them with a smiling countenance, and told them
+that he came as a friend, provided they acknowledged the King of Spain,
+as their king and natural lord and master, who would receive them under
+his protection, and relieve their distresses. The principal motive, he
+said, which induced his Majesty to send him there, was to propagate the
+true worship of one all powerful God; that he had brought several
+sacred characters with him for that purpose, and shewing them Padre
+Herrera, said that he was the principal of those, who were to be their
+teachers. They promised to become vassals of the King of Spain, and
+hear the law which they were to be taught; he hinted to them that he
+did not see Rajah <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb113" href="#pb113"
+name="pb113">113</a>]</span>Soliman with them: they replied, that he
+dared not appear after what had happened with the Colonel on the first
+expedition; but if he would pardon him, he would immediately appear,
+and promise obedience, as the rest had done. The General not only
+promised to pardon him, but sent him a message to that effect, without,
+however, being able to remove his apprehensions at that time.</p>
+<p>But on the 18th of May, Rajah Soliman arrived, accompanied by his
+uncle Rajah Matanda and Lacandola, making many apologies for what had
+passed. The General pardoned and received him as a vassal of his
+Majesty, and as such he was registered by the notary, Hernando Riguel.
+Legaspi immediately commenced his arrangements for founding a new city,
+and directed the Indians to finish the fort they had begun in the mouth
+of the river. Behind this he erected a large building, which served as
+a palace, with a church and convent <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb114" href="#pb114" name="pb114">114</a>]</span>for the religious,
+and an hundred and twenty smaller houses for the remainder of the
+Spaniards, intending this city to be the seat of government, both
+spiritual and temporal, of the islands. The whole of this, the Indians
+engaged to accomplish with great despatch, but it was found necessary,
+to employ the Spaniards to assist them in it. A good understanding
+being thus established, between the natives of Manila and Tondo and the
+Spaniards, Manila was taken possession of on the day following, the
+19th of May, 1571, when, in a temporary church, the feast of the
+blessed Virgin Mary was celebrated, who, from that circumstance, was
+named the patroness of the new city.</p>
+<p>The peace which Rajah Soliman and Lacandola had made, was, on their
+part, by no means sincere, for the Indians of Macabebe and Hagonoy,
+appearing at the mouth of the harbour of Bancusay, with forty caracoas
+(an Indian vessel), proceeded <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb115"
+href="#pb115" name="pb115">115</a>]</span>to the house of Lacandola.
+These men jeered at and reproached the Indians, for submitting with
+such readiness, to such an insignificant number of Spaniards,
+promising, if they were disposed to shake off the yoke, that they
+should be assisted from Tondo and the neighbouring country, and not
+leave one Spaniard alive. The President, supposing those Indians who
+had arrived, had come to solicit peace, sent two Spaniards to assure
+them that they might present themselves to him without fear. The chief
+of the Indians, after listening to these ambassadors, leaped on his
+feet, and drawing and flourishing his cimeter, he said, &ldquo;The sun
+gave me life, and I must not be disgraced in the eyes of my women, who
+would detest me, if they thought I was capable, of being on friendly
+terms with the Spaniards.&rdquo; With this speech he quitted the house,
+without waiting to go down by the ladder, for, with great boldness, he
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb116" href="#pb116" name=
+"pb116">116</a>]</span>leaped out of the window into his caracoa,
+calling out to the Spaniards, &ldquo;I expect you in the bay of
+Bancusay.&rdquo; Legaspi determined upon punishing such conduct, and
+sent against him the Colonel Martin de Goite with eighty Spaniards, in
+some newly constructed small vessels. The Indian chief was true to his
+word, and waited for them where he had said, with his squadron. The
+battle began, and he fought with great valour; but, in a short time,
+being killed by a musket shot, the rest dismayed, fled with great
+precipitation; our people pursued, and made many prisoners, among whom
+were the son of Lacandola, and his nephew, by which his deceit and
+dissimulation were sufficiently manifest; the President, however, sent
+them home, without the punishment they merited for their treason. After
+this engagement, the natives became so much afraid of the Spaniards,
+that many chiefs <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb117" href="#pb117"
+name="pb117">117</a>]</span>came to Manila begging peace, and offering
+to become vassals of the king of Spain. By this time, the works which
+had been ordered in Manila were considerably advanced, and, on the day
+of St. John the Baptist, the President, Miguel Lopez de Legaspi,
+founded the city as the metropolis of the Philippine Islands,
+appointing two ordinary alcaldes, twelve regidores, an alguazil mayor,
+and a notary, who all took the customary oaths, to discharge the duties
+of their respective offices with justice. This ceremony took place
+while Philip II. was King of Spain, and Pius V. was in the fifth year
+of his pontificate, the first governor being the President, Miguel
+Lopez de Legaspi. The public square was now marked out, with the
+situation of the convent of San Augustine, and the subordinate
+arrangements were left to the magistracy. Legaspi ordered the city to
+be called Manila, of which his Majesty approved, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb118" href="#pb118" name=
+"pb118">118</a>]</span>giving it a coat of arms. This city is placed in
+fourteen degrees and a half of north latitude, and is thought to be the
+antipodes of the river Saint Ann, in Brazil, which is in the same
+latitude in the opposite tropic of Capricorn. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb119" href="#pb119" name="pb119">119</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch7" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e852" class="label">CHAPTER VII.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOMINI, 1571.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Government of Miguel Lopez de
+Legaspi.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">Manila being founded, and most of the towns of the
+surrounding district, in amity with the Spaniards, the Governor sent
+the Colonel to Pampanga, to reduce that province to the Spanish yoke,
+but he had no sooner arrived at the river Betis, on his way thither,
+than he was compelled to return, without being able to reduce either
+the town of Betis or that of Lubao; for it appeared that Rajah Soliman
+and Lacandola, who had gone with him to serve as interpreters between
+the Indians and him, had conducted themselves treacherously. This fully
+appeared by Lacandola leaving <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb120"
+href="#pb120" name="pb120">120</a>]</span>the Colonel, and returning to
+Manila without leave, for which the Governor ordered him to be put in
+irons, and, to increase his punishment, told his relations that he
+would not let him at liberty but at the Colonel's request; even then he
+did not accede to it without confiscating all his artillery, consisting
+of fifteen pieces of cannon, large and small. About this time Rajah
+Matanda fell sick, and requesting to be baptized, a clergyman of the
+name of Juan de Vivero administered this sacrament to him by the name
+of Philip: he died of his disorder, and was buried with great
+solemnity. On the 17th of July, Don Diego Legaspi, a nephew of the
+Governor, arrived; he was sent by Captain Juan de Aguirre to the aid of
+his uncle, having a short time before come to Panay with two ships,
+which the Viceroy of Mexico had sent to these islands as a
+reinforcement. The Governor ordered the Colonel to proceed to Panay,
+and despatch these ships to <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb121" href=
+"#pb121" name="pb121">121</a>]</span>Manila, and afterwards go to Zebu,
+and bring his family to the capital. Whilst the Colonel was executing
+this commission, Juan de Salcedo was sent to reduce the people of
+Cainta and Taytay, two small towns high up the river Pasig, which had
+refused to acknowledge the Spanish authority, and had strengthened
+their position by some fortifications covering their towns. He carried
+Cainta by assault, with the loss of only two killed and five wounded,
+but with great slaughter on the part of the Indians, upon hearing
+which, the inhabitants of Taytay immediately surrendered. He afterwards
+marched to a town on the borders of the lake <i>Bay</i>, and of the
+same name, and summoned the inhabitants, but they answered him with
+their arms in their hands. He had with him Padre Friar Alonso de
+Albarado, who had accompanied Ruy Lopez de Villalobos in his
+expedition; had returned a second time to Mexico; and again had
+accompanied the other five <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb122" href=
+"#pb122" name="pb122">122</a>]</span>religious, of the order of San
+Augustine, to Manila. This venerable person the Colonel sent, to assure
+the Indians, that he did not wish to employ his arms against them, and
+that he had commissioned the Padre Friar Alonso, to accommodate
+matters, requesting them immediately to deliver up their town of Bay.
+This in the end was acceded to, and was followed, by the submission of
+many small towns, on the borders of the lake. Juan de Salcedo went
+further up the country behind them, and found the people of Mahayhay,
+fortified by nature so securely on a hill, that they could defend
+themselves against a great force, with no difficulty, by rolling down
+immense stones. Having, however, reconnoitred it, he perceived a path
+less rugged than the rest, and where they seemed more negligent. By
+this path he surmounted the difficulty, and appeared above them, when
+they were seized with such a panic, that they fled precipitately,
+without making <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb123" href="#pb123" name=
+"pb123">123</a>]</span>any resistance. For two days more, Juan de
+Salcedo was detained in this part of the country, passing through the
+villages, which, however, he found deserted, the inhabitants having
+taken refuge in the mountains. He in consequence returned to Bay, where
+he had left most of his people. It was understood, that in the country
+of the Camarines, there was a town called Paracale, where there were
+mines of gold. He sent back to Manila Padre Albarado, and some of the
+Spaniards; and having a few soldiers only, he encountered a great many
+difficulties, in undertaking the conquest of this town. Many days
+having elapsed, without hearing from them at Manila, the Governor
+despatched Major Antonio Hurtado in search of them, and he found Juan
+de Salcedo in Paracale, with all his people, very much weakened, in
+consequence of the hardships they had been exposed to, and the sickness
+with which they had been attacked. Salcedo <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb124" href="#pb124" name=
+"pb124">124</a>]</span>returned with Hurtado to Manila, on which
+occasion there were great rejoicings, as he had been supposed dead, and
+the loss of a man so much loved and respected would have been severely
+felt.</p>
+<p>About this time the Colonel returned from Zebu, having first subdued
+the province of Pampanga. The Governor now apportioned the conquered
+districts and towns, among the respective officers, who had so well
+earned that reward, reserving to his Majesty the usual tribute only. He
+directed, that the Indians should pay a moderate rent, to those new
+proprietors of land, and the Spaniards were enjoined, not to exact any
+thing above the rent so settled. In a little time it was discovered,
+that the Indians would not pay the tribute; and that the Spanish
+proprietors, had been guilty of many vexatious acts against them, which
+had produced revolts in various places. In Bohol, Panay, and in
+Marinduque, the Indians had killed several Spanish <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb125" href="#pb125" name=
+"pb125">125</a>]</span>factors and soldiers. To prevent these
+disturbances from spreading, the Governor sent Captain Luis de la Haya,
+to examine into the matter, and to punish the aggressors. He executed
+his commission with such prudence, that, without exasperating the
+Indians, he chastised the murderers, and left the towns in complete
+subordination.</p>
+<p>At the beginning of the year 1572, there arrived, with a great deal
+of rich merchandize, those Chinese whom the Spaniards had saved from
+shipwreck, in the island of Mindoro, together with many others of that
+nation, who brought damasks, satins, taffeties, silks, porcelain, and
+other things, with which the foundation of a lucrative commerce with
+Acapulco was laid. These Chinese, whom we call Sangleyes, from two
+Chinese words, <i>hiang, lay</i>, which signifies travelling merchants,
+continue to this day the commerce with Manila, and many have settled in
+these islands, where, however, they have frequently been troublesome,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb126" href="#pb126" name=
+"pb126">126</a>]</span>as will be seen in the sequel. About the time
+these merchants arrived, the Augustine friars intended to hold their
+second provincial chapter, and the first which had been celebrated at
+Manila; and at this it was determined, to send some of their order to
+China, to establish a religious intercourse between the two nations.
+The Governor agreed to this, and was desirous, at the same time, to
+send an embassy to the Emperor; but the Chinese would not agree to take
+it to China. The Friar Alvarado, however, who was the most desirous of
+the undertaking, began to study the language, that he might be able to
+convert and baptize the Chinese merchants, who seemed disposed to
+settle in Manila; this plan he had adopted in Tondo, where he had
+administered the sacrament to numbers. In this provincial chapter it
+was agreed, that Padre Herrera should be sent a second time to Mexico,
+in order to bring more clerical aid to this province; they likewise
+chose as provincial, the Padre Friar Martin <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb127" href="#pb127" name="pb127">127</a>]</span>de
+Rada, and elected a capitular of the convent of Manila; they
+established clergy in Zebu, Masbate, Otong, Mindoro, Tondo, Calumpit,
+and Lubao. Soon after this, convents were founded in the districts of
+Taal, Bay, and Pasig, and many visitations were made, by which it was
+ascertained, that the number of the clergy increased so much, that it
+became necessary, to separate the parish priests from the friars.</p>
+<p>The greater part of this quarter of the island, being reduced to
+complete obedience, to the King of Spain, and nothing being known of
+the northern part of it, Juan de Salcedo offered to make the discovery,
+at his own risk. He collected men and ships, the Governor allowing him
+forty-five soldiers, with necessary ammunition. He sailed from Manila
+on the 20th of May, 1572; on the third day, he arrived at Cape Bolinao,
+in the province of Zambales, where he found a Chinese junk or sampan,
+and a party <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb128" href="#pb128" name=
+"pb128">128</a>]</span>of Chinese, who had got possession of a chief
+and some Indians, with an intent to carry them to China. Juan de
+Salcedo re-took them from the Chinese, and gave them their liberty,
+which action so gratified the feelings of the natives, that they became
+immediately vassals of the King of Spain, and solicited to be placed on
+the same footing, as the people of the other districts. Passing from
+thence to Pangasinan, he coasted the whole of that province, and that
+of Ylocos, until he arrived at Cape Boxeador, examining all the ports,
+bays, and landing places, near which his squadron was able to approach,
+and it consisted of many, but very small vessels. He was desirous, of
+preserving a good understanding with the Indians, and most of the towns
+on the coast, received him in a very friendly manner, and supplied him
+with provisions, which he stood in need of; but on his entering the
+rivers and creeks, he found great resistance from the inhabitants
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb129" href="#pb129" name=
+"pb129">129</a>]</span>of the districts bordering on them. He attacked
+them on several occasions, putting them to flight with great ease, and
+sent to them, desiring them to leave the mountains, with a promise of
+his friendship. Some, however, not relying on the promises of the
+Spaniards, could not divest themselves of their apprehensions, while
+others readily came down, submitted, and agreed to pay the tribute. In
+this manner he was proceeding, and had almost subdued these two large
+provinces<a href="#n19"><sup>19</sup></a>, intending to pass on to
+Cagayan; but he was opposed by his own people, who became weary of the
+expedition. His second in command, Antonio Hurtado, proposed that he
+should go on, and prosecute his original plan, but Juan de Salcedo,
+although he desired it much, thought it better to accede to the
+representations of his soldiers, and they returned by the same route,
+confirming in their obedience the towns which had submitted. On his
+arrival <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb130" href="#pb130" name=
+"pb130">130</a>]</span>at Bigan, the natives received him with so much
+cordiality, that he prudently determined on the step of founding there
+a Spanish city, for the purpose of <span class="corr" id="xd19e901"
+title="Source: controuling">controlling</span> the neighbouring
+country.</p>
+<p>Having, with this view, ordered the natives to cut sufficient timber
+to build a fort, and accommodations for those who chose to remain, he
+became desirous of executing the original project, which he had
+abandoned, of passing on to Cagayan. He left in Bigan his second in
+command, with twenty-five soldiers, and, with the seventeen that
+remained, he commenced this arduous undertaking, departing in three
+vessels on the 24th of July. Having passed Cape Boxeador, he entered a
+river where he found a mud village of salt-makers; he desired them to
+call their chiefs, as he wished to be on good terms with them, and
+after many messages they appeared with their Rajah, who was a very
+handsome man, and whiter than the rest of the Indians. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb131" href="#pb131" name="pb131">131</a>]</span>Juan
+de Salcedo came up to him with open arms, intending to embrace him; but
+the barbarian, unaccustomed to such a mode of salutation, believing
+that he wanted to catch him, took to his heels and fled, and on no
+entreaty would he be prevailed on, to leave the mountains. Our people,
+therefore, hoisted their sails, and arrived at the river of Cagayan.
+They sailed up this river a considerable way, and found a populous
+district; but they dared not attempt any hostility against the
+inhabitants, as they were so few in number in comparison to the
+natives, and they resolved to return to Manila by that side of the
+island, in order completely to ascertain the whole extent of Luzon.
+They proceeded about one hundred leagues, without discovering any
+population, or any thing but a rocky shore. They coasted it until they
+arrived at a bay, which Juan de Salcedo thought had been named Amanto,
+having been there when <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb132" href=
+"#pb132" name="pb132">132</a>]</span>he went to Paracale. In this,
+however, he was mistaken, but as that bay was very near, he arrived in
+a few days at it. Here he went on shore; and travelled on till he came
+to the towns on the lake, where he embarked on board a small boat with
+only four rowers. The boat was on the point of foundering during the
+passage, and the Indians deserting her by swimming away, he would
+inevitably have been lost, had not a proa, with some friendly Indians,
+passing by, immediately relieved him. Arriving at Manila, he received
+the melancholy intelligence of the death of his grandfather, on the
+20th of August, 1572, accelerated much by the vexatious and
+multifarious duties of his office. He was interred in the church of the
+Augustines, with the magnificence due to his character and station.</p>
+<p>By the death of Legaspi, the treasurer, Guido de Labezares became
+governor <i>ad interim</i>, by a decree of the Royal Audience of
+Mexico, and which decree was found <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb133"
+href="#pb133" name="pb133">133</a>]</span>among the papers of the
+deceased. A few days after Labezares had succeeded to the government,
+Manila suffered severely from a hurricane, which destroyed almost all
+the houses, these being built of canes, and drove back the two ships
+which had been <span class="corr" id="xd19e917" title=
+"Source: seent">sent</span> to Acapulco, but which, after the storm
+subsided, sailed again for New Spain, carrying accounts of the death of
+Legaspi. The new Governor sent Colonel Martin de Goite, to reduce the
+revolted natives of Ylocos, which was done with little trouble, and he
+brought away the tribute of the king in gold, compelling them to ransom
+themselves, for a sum far exceeding that amount. This he was enabled so
+easily to do, by the exertions of Juan de Salcedo, who, at his own
+cost, had subdued nearly all this province, and who, as the Colonel
+represented, ought to be allowed to reap the fruits of his labours; but
+Guido de Labezares was prejudiced against him, and would not employ him
+until he was <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb134" href="#pb134" name=
+"pb134">134</a>]</span>undeceived as to his merits. He then sent him to
+the conquest of the Camarines, which he effected with ease, and founded
+near the river of Vicol a Spanish city, calling it Santiago de Libon.
+He appointed as chief judge Captain Pedro de Chaves, with eighty
+soldiers. While Juan de Salcedo was making these conquests, the
+governor <i>ad interim</i> was exploring the whole of the Bisayas: he
+attempted to restrain within proper bounds the avarice of the factors,
+but it was without effect, as the moment he was gone they returned to
+their old practices. Meanwhile a ship from Acapulco arrived with three
+Augustine friars, men who were much required, not only for the purpose,
+of converting to the Christian religion, the natives of the conquered
+countries, but likewise to preserve the tranquillity of the different
+towns, and which could not be effected solely by force of arms.</p>
+<p>When the Governor <i>ad interim</i> returned <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb135" href="#pb135" name="pb135">135</a>]</span>to
+Manila, he sent an embassy to the Rajah of Borneo, but without effect,
+as he had no wish to be on terms with the Spaniards. He likewise
+divided the province of Ylocos between the Colonel and Juan de Salcedo,
+who had been employed in that expedition. In the beginning of the year
+1574, Juan de Salcedo sailed to take possession of his portion; he
+founded in the district of Bigan the city Fernandina, where he built a
+house for himself. While he was accomplishing this object, a large
+squadron of vessels passed by, which had taken a galeot and twenty men
+he had sent in search of provisions; and presuming that their intention
+was to attack him, he began to fortify the town, but seeing they
+prosecuted their route, he took it for granted they were going against
+Manila; and having collected together all the Spaniards he had in
+Ylocos, he embarked for the capital to the assistance of the Governor.
+This was the famous expedition of Limahon, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb136" href="#pb136" name="pb136">136</a>]</span>by
+which Manila was nearly lost, but a short time after its
+foundation.</p>
+<p>Limahon was a pirate of such renown, that the Emperor of China had
+sent against him three different squadrons, and he was in fact so
+pressed on all sides by this force, that having captured a Chinese junk
+coming from Manila, who informed him of the new conquests by the
+Spaniards, he determined to sail for this country, and be crowned King
+of these islands, in order to be secure, by this means, from the
+Emperor's attacks. He arrived at the island of Corregidor, which is in
+the mouth of the bay, the 29th of November 1574, with sixty-two junks,
+in which he brought one thousand five hundred women, two thousand
+soldiers, and a great many seamen, sufficient artillery, muskets, and
+swords. The Spaniards had no intimation of his arrival at Corregidor,
+and the same night his second in command, who was a Japanese of the
+name of Sioco, landed with <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb137" href=
+"#pb137" name="pb137">137</a>]</span>six hundred men, with which he
+entered, and attempted to take possession of Manila. In the attempt to
+land his men he lost three boats, which were swamped by the surf; but
+he effected his object, without being at all discovered by our people.
+He first landed at Para&ntilde;aque, supposing it to be Manila, but
+soon finding out his mistake, he began his march to it by the beach,
+his vessels following him, and at day-break he arrived at Manila, where
+he was discovered by the Indians. They made all haste to the Colonel,
+who lived close to the royal gate, where the college of St. Joseph now
+stands, and informed him, that there was an immense body of Moors of
+Borneo coming by the sea side. The Colonel, however, as he had no
+reason to conclude, that the Borneans considered themselves, in direct
+hostility with the Spaniards, gave no credit to it, till he saw the
+Chinese enter by the gate, close to his house. Three soldiers, who were
+placed as <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb138" href="#pb138" name=
+"pb138">138</a>]</span>guards there, attempted to resist them, but they
+were soon overpowered by multitudes, and one only escaped, severely
+wounded.</p>
+<p>The wife of the Colonel looking out of the window, thought they were
+Indians come against them, and called out, &ldquo;Here the dogs come,
+we are all dead.&rdquo; The Portuguese interpreter, who accompanied
+Sioco, enraged at this reproachful epithet of the lady, ordered the
+house to be set on fire. The Colonel, who was ill, immediately on this
+got up, put on his armour, and unsheathing his sword, leapt out of the
+window in the midst of his enemies, who received him on their swords,
+and cut him to pieces. They killed the wife of a common soldier, whom
+they found in the house, and left for dead Dona Lucia Corral, the wife
+of the Colonel, but she afterwards recovered from her wounds. Sioco
+pursuing his march, encountered some Spaniards who were on their way to
+assist <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb139" href="#pb139" name=
+"pb139">139</a>]</span>the Governor, and seeing that there were few
+opposed to him, he formed his men into a half moon, and charged the
+centre of the Spaniards. The engagement was long doubtful, when eight
+soldiers being killed, the rest must have shared their fate, had they
+not been joined by twenty more, under the command of Captain Alonso
+Velasquez, the aid-de-camp of General Amador de Arriaran, and Gaspar
+Ramirez, aid-de-camp of the Colonel, who charged the Chinese so
+furiously, that Sioco was obliged to retire to his boats and join
+Limahon, who had anchored in Cavite. Sioco justified his ill success in
+this action, by saying, that the people were tired by their long march
+along the beach, which excuse Limahon admitted, and determined on
+another assault on the third day. This affair having happened on St.
+Andrew's day, the Spaniards attributed it to the intercession of that
+Saint, that they had not all fallen into the hands of the Chinese, and
+expressed <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb140" href="#pb140" name=
+"pb140">140</a>]</span>their gratitude, by choosing him patron of
+Manila, instituting an annual solemn feast on the occasion. Limahon's
+delay of the second attack, was the means of saving all, as it gave
+time to Juan de Salcedo, to join with his force from Ylocos. He arrived
+in the bay, in the night of the same day of St. Andrew, and
+understanding that Limahon was in Cavite, he did not attempt to enter
+there, but landed on the Pampanga side of the bay. The day following,
+in the evening, he met with two Indians, who had escaped from the
+engagement, and informed him of all that had happened; he immediately
+made sail, and entered Manila that night. When he was at the mouth of
+the river, he ordered the trumpets to be sounded, and placed a great
+number of lights about his ship, to induce the enemy to believe, the
+approach of considerable relief to the Spaniards, who saluted him in
+form, all of which caused great alarm to the Chinese. The Governor
+<i>ad interim</i>, was <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb141" href=
+"#pb141" name="pb141">141</a>]</span>so pleased with the diligence of
+Juan de Salcedo, that he appointed him Colonel, in the room of Martin
+de Goite.</p>
+<p>The same night, Limahon weighed anchor from Cavite, and pressed on
+to Manila, and Sioco disembarked the following morning, after having
+sworn by an oath to his General, that he would either die in the
+attempt, or that day be in possession of the house of the Governor. He
+directed his march to the fort, which our people had constructed of
+timber, faggots, and barrels of earth, and he divided his troops into
+three bodies. He ordered one to march down, through the principal
+street of the city, to the square, where he expected the Spaniards
+would sally out of the fort, and engage them; and in this expectation,
+he sent another body, by the side of the river round the fort, and the
+third, which he commanded himself, he led along the beach. The division
+which had been ordered down the principal street, arrived in the
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb142" href="#pb142" name=
+"pb142">142</a>]</span>square, and in order to induce the Spaniards to
+sally from the fort, they set fire to the houses. Fortunately the
+Spaniards did not quit the fort, though they saw their houses burning,
+but contented themselves with playing their artillery upon the Chinese,
+doing a great deal of mischief. Sioco, finding that it was not
+possible, to draw the Spaniards from their fortifications, and having
+lost many of his men, ordered the division that had arrived at the
+square, to assault the fort, at the same time leading on his own. Such
+was the multitude of the Chinese, against so few on our part, that the
+palisade was forced, and they entered through a part, which Ensign
+Sancho Ortez defended, and in which he was killed, performing prodigies
+of valour. Immediately the Governor heard of this, he repaired to the
+fort, attended by the Colonel; they cut their way through the Chinese,
+and having entered it, repulsed the invaders with great loss. The
+Chinese, panic struck <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb143" href=
+"#pb143" name="pb143">143</a>]</span>at this, retiring by degrees
+towards the shore, the Spaniards followed them close, making great
+slaughter among them; but, to our great misfortune, our people suddenly
+abandoned their advantage, at the sight of Limahon's squadron, which
+had just entered the river, but had not been able hitherto, to take
+part in the action.</p>
+<p>Limahon observing this, ordered his ships off, in order that his men
+might become desperate, on finding themselves deprived of all
+protection from him: the contrary effect, however, was produced by it,
+as they were seized with such a panic, that they could not face their
+enemies, but formed themselves on the shore, and received the fire of
+our artillery, which was discharged repeatedly upon them, determined
+rather to wait death with firmness, than return into the engagement. In
+this they would have persisted, had not Limahon arrived with four
+hundred fresh men. As all was not lost, he ordered some of his
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb144" href="#pb144" name=
+"pb144">144</a>]</span>people to burn a ship and galley, which, with a
+few other small vessels, were drawn up on the beach, and which, when
+they had destroyed the houses, they had forgot to burn with the rest,
+and he made a false attack on the fort, in order to compel the
+Spaniards to sally out, to hinder the operation. The Colonel guessed
+his intention: he, however, sallied out with fifty men, against those
+only who were proceeding to pillage the city, and put them to flight
+precipitately. Limahon seeing that his plan had not succeeded, having
+lost many men, and finding that his principal captain, Sioco, had been
+killed, he embarked his troops, and, under favour of the night,
+returned to the river Para&ntilde;aque, where he killed all the
+Indians, he found assembled in any hostile way, and, before day-break,
+he set sail, and did not bring to, until he came to the province of
+Pangasinan; where he entered into an amicable arrangement with the
+chief, forming an encampment, and fortifying it with a <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb145" href="#pb145" name=
+"pb145">145</a>]</span>strong palisado on an inlet of the river
+Lingayen. The Governor was determined to follow him into the province,
+but he found it necessary first to restore the fortifications of the
+city, and likewise to quell a sedition of the Indians, who, on this
+occasion, shewed how little they could be depended upon.</p>
+<p>The natives of Manila, whilst the Spaniards were engaging the
+Chinese, robbed their houses and maltreated their slaves; those of
+Tondo killed some Sachristans belonging to a convent, and they would
+have done the same with the clergy, but that they could not have
+concealed it. Those of the island of Mindoro, however, imprisoned the
+friars, and took them to the mountains, where they were not bold enough
+to murder them, till they saw how the action with Limahon would
+terminate, and how things would be adjusted. Rajah Soliman and
+Lacandola, the chief of Manila and Tondo, apprehensive that the
+Governor <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb146" href="#pb146" name=
+"pb146">146</a>]</span>would punish them for this ill conduct, retired
+to Navotas, where they fomented a rebellion. In order to quell this the
+Colonel, accompanied by Friar Marin, set out immediately, and when
+Lacandola understood they had arrived, he sent to them to request the
+friar would repair to a station about three leagues distant, where all
+the chiefs were assembled, and where they were desirous of treating of
+a reconciliation with the Spaniards. The friar Marin determined to
+proceed to the station which they mentioned, and there he met all the
+chiefs, who received him with much joy, but they could not be persuaded
+to see the Colonel. Lacandola alone abandoned his fears, in consequence
+of the promise the friar had made him, and left Navotas with an
+intention to present himself, but he found that Juan de Salcedo had
+returned, and directed his way to his house. Salcedo encountered two
+ranks of armed men on the banks of the river, near the house
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb147" href="#pb147" name=
+"pb147">147</a>]</span>of Lacandola; he boldly went up to them, and
+took away their lances and arrows; when, Lacandola arriving, he said,
+&ldquo;What is the meaning of this? why are these men armed?&rdquo; The
+Indian made many excuses, and promised to wait on the Governor the day
+following, in company with the friar Marin. The Governor admitted the
+excuses, and presented Lacandola with a silk mantle and a gold chain.
+Won over by this treatment, Rajah Soliman, in four days, presented
+himself to the Governor, and the sedition was thus terminated. Captain
+Rivera subdued the people of Mindoro with the same facility.</p>
+<p>The Governor being relieved from the anxiety, which the restlessness
+of the Indians had occasioned, determined to follow Limahon to
+Pangasinan. He found, on mustering, that the soldiers in Manila
+amounted to two hundred, and about two hundred more were scattered
+through the provinces of Bisayas and Camarines; from <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb148" href="#pb148" name=
+"pb148">148</a>]</span>among these he manned the squadron, with two
+hundred and fifty Spaniards, and he added one thousand five hundred
+friendly Indians. On the 22d of March 1575, the Colonel sailed with
+this armament to Pangasinan, and, on the 29th of the same month, in the
+night, arrived in the river Lingayen. The day following he sent Captain
+Pedro de Chaves to take possession of the ships belonging to the
+corsair, and Captain Gabriel de Rivera to reconnoitre his
+fortifications. Chaves executed his commission with ease, as the
+Chinese fled from their ships, the moment he boarded them. Rivera
+attacked the works, firing upon them, and making a dreadful carnage.
+Limahon, observing what passed, ordered his men under cover of a grove
+of date trees, where they might defend themselves more easily. Captain
+Chaves sent assistance to Rivera, and a most sanguinary engagement
+commenced. Rivera at last routed the Chinese, compelling them to
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb149" href="#pb149" name=
+"pb149">149</a>]</span>retire to their fort, which he would have
+scaled, but, finding the palisade too lofty, he had recourse to the
+expedient of ordering his men to rush in a body against it, formed as
+it was of date trees driven into the earth. This they did with such
+force, that they broke through, opened the gate, and entered the fort.
+The Chinese then retired within the second palisade, which was the
+quarter of Limahon. The Spaniards ought to have attacked the inner
+fort, before the Chinese had recovered from their panic; but their
+avarice prevailed, and they dispersed themselves through the different
+houses, which had been built within the first palisade, plundering
+them, without attempting any thing else. Limahon was not slow in taking
+advantage of this error of the Spaniards, and, attacking them with four
+hundred men, he drove them out of the works with great loss, thus
+paying dearly for the indulgence of their habits of plunder. Ashamed of
+this defeat, our <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb150" href="#pb150"
+name="pb150">150</a>]</span>people returned a second time to the
+assault, when they retook the first line of works, but being unable to
+force the inner one, they burnt the houses of the Chinese, and going on
+board their boats, they retired to where Pedro de Chaves was posted.
+Here, finding one of the junks unserviceable, she was set fire to, and
+a retreat of the whole body was made good, to the post where the
+Colonel was stationed, with the rest of the armament.</p>
+<p>Juan de Salcedo, convinced of the difficulty of taking the fort by
+storm, and desirous of being as sparing as possible, of the lives of
+his Spaniards, considering the difficulties they had to encounter,
+determined on attempting to reduce Limahon by fair means. Having in his
+army a Chinese who had been established in Manila, he ordered him to
+write to Limahon; but this letter having no effect, he wrote a second
+to the same purpose. Limahon replied, that he was considered a savage
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb151" href="#pb151" name=
+"pb151">151</a>]</span>tiger, whom all were desirous of catching; but
+he assured them, that he should either kill them, or they him. The
+Chinese, therefore, thus declining every amicable proposal, the Colonel
+resolved to throw up works near to their works, but at such a distance
+as to be without the range of the enemy's artillery. Upon his beginning
+accordingly to pitch his camp, however, a shot was fired which passed
+close to him, and wounded his aid-de-camp in the leg, affording him a
+convincing proof that their artillery could reach all over the small
+island. It was, therefore, deemed necessary to remove the camp to
+another position, and to blockade the mouth of the river to prevent
+Limahon from escaping, until the Governor of Manila should determine,
+whether he would have the works taken by assault, or that, by means of
+a blockade, the Chinese should be starved into submission. Upon this
+retreat of the Spaniards, Limahon collected the remaining <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb152" href="#pb152" name=
+"pb152">152</a>]</span>fragments of the junks, which had been burnt,
+and with these built some boats within the fort. Four months passed in
+this manner, when, finding he had no other resource, Limahon opened a
+canal to the river, and, in the night, escaped with all his people in
+the small vessels he had constructed. To deceive the Spaniards, and
+conquer the difficulties opposed to him in the mouth of the river, he
+set fire to a few small vessels filled with combustibles, and, ordering
+a false attack to be made on the guard, he, in the meantime, escaped;
+and, without any obstruction, on the 3d of August 1575, prosecuted his
+voyage. During these transactions between Juan de Salcedo and Limahon,
+the Augustine friars held a chapter, and appointed priests in the towns
+of Candaba and Macabebe, in the province of Pampanga, in Bizan, in the
+province of Ylocos, and in the island of Negros. They were not
+satisfied with the innumerable converts, they made in <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb153" href="#pb153" name=
+"pb153">153</a>]</span>these islands, but they became desirous of
+attempting the spiritual conquest of the empire of China. There was at
+that time in Manila, a Chinese of the name of Aumon, who had been sent
+by the viceroy of Fouquien, in search of Limahon, to promise him
+pardon, on the part of the Emperor of China, if he would cease his
+depredations. This Chinese had been to Pangasinan, and told Juan de
+Salcedo, that he wished to see the pirate; but as Salcedo distrusted
+the nature of his mission, Aumon deemed it prudent to return to Manila,
+where he paid his court so well to the Governor, that he delivered him
+up fifty captives which had been taken from Limahon. Aumon was now
+desirous of returning to China, and the Augustine friars conceived this
+would be a good opportunity, to attempt an establishment there. With
+this view they endeavoured to persuade him, to take two friars under
+his protection, which request the Governor seconded; and, as
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb154" href="#pb154" name=
+"pb154">154</a>]</span>the news of Salcedo's success against Limahon
+had, by this time, reached them, Aumon determined to comply with the
+request. The friars Martin de Rada, and Geronimo Marin, were nominated
+for this undertaking, and, at the same time, as ambassadors from the
+Governor, were the bearers of a letter to the Viceroy of Fouquien, and
+another to the Emperor, which they were ordered to deliver to the
+Viceroy, as their directions were not to proceed beyond that point. But
+as it was intended, that these religious should remain in the province
+of Fouquien, to propagate the Christian faith, two Spaniards were sent
+to bring back the answer to the embassy. They left Manila on the 2d of
+July 1575, and before they returned, the new Governor of these islands
+arrived. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb155" href="#pb155" name=
+"pb155">155</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch8" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e990" class="label">CHAPTER VIII.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1575.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Administration of Don Francisco La Sande,
+second Governor of Manila.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">Doctor Don Francisco La Sande, born at Caceres in
+Estremadura, and Oidor of Mexico, took possession of this government on
+the 24th of August 1575. He instituted an inquiry into the conduct of
+his predecessor, and acquitted him of any misapplication of his
+authority. At the commencement of La Sande's government, the embassy
+returned from China, and proved to have had a favourable issue, as the
+Viceroy of Fouquien received them with great respect; and although he
+could not permit the friars to remain in the province, as he had no
+orders to that effect, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb156" href=
+"#pb156" name="pb156">156</a>]</span>he forwarded the letter, which the
+Governor of Manila had written to the Emperor of China, contributing
+all in his power to second his views: and this fully appeared by the
+answer, which the Chinese brought in the month of February, the year
+following, by which the Emperor appointed one port in his dominions,
+for commercial intercourse with the Spaniards. The Chinese brought
+considerable presents, which they would not deliver to the actual
+Governor, but to Guido de Labexares, who, as Governor <i>ad
+interim</i>, had despatched the embassy. This affront Don Francisco La
+Sande felt so severely, that he behaved to them with great coolness,
+and made them no presents when they returned. The unhandsome conduct of
+the Governor, frustrated those expectations, which had been raised by
+the defeat of Limahon, and the subsequent mission; by making a most
+unfavourable impression on the minds of the Chinese, who discharged
+their whole <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb157" href="#pb157" name=
+"pb157">157</a>]</span>vengeance, on the heads of the two Augustine
+friars. They landed them in the province of Zambales, scourged them
+most cruelly, murdered, before their eyes, their interpreter and
+slaves, and left them bound fast to trees; in which situation they must
+have perished, had not, providentially, Morones been passing that way,
+who released them, and cured their wounds.</p>
+<p>This year, 1576, was unpropitious to the Spaniards in the
+Philippines; for, independent of this disgrace, they had the misfortune
+to lose Juan de Salcedo, who died on the 11th of March, and who had
+been a second Pizarro, or Cortes, in this conquest. He was seized with
+a fever while in Ylocos, and when in that state, visiting a mine in his
+domains, he drank some cold water, which operated so powerfully on the
+intestines, that he died in three hours. On the island of Catanduanes,
+likewise, a party of Augustine missionaries was shipwrecked: this was a
+public <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb158" href="#pb158" name=
+"pb158">158</a>]</span>loss, and most severely felt, as, without the
+labours of the religious, the military exploits of the Spaniards, would
+have been of little avail, in securing the subjection of these
+islands.</p>
+<p>This loss was repaired the following year, by the arrival of some
+more friars, and seventeen Franciscans, whom the Augustines received in
+their convents, and assigning to them the ecclesiastical authority over
+a number of towns, the Franciscans began their labours with
+indefatigable zeal.</p>
+<p>About this time, Queen Elizabeth of England, sent the famous Drake
+with a considerable squadron, for the purpose of subduing the Moluccas.
+In passing the Straits of Magellan, he lost several of his ships; but
+he pursued his course in his own ship, committing many acts of
+hostility on the voyage, and giving a name to several islands which he
+discovered, such as St. Bartholomew, St. James, and New <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb159" href="#pb159" name=
+"pb159">159</a>]</span>Albion, a large island, where he was detained
+six weeks. Arriving at Tidore, he began to gather cloves, without
+permission from the King of the island, at which the latter took great
+offence; but Drake having made him presents, he stipulated for the
+assistance of their arms, in case he should require it, permitting the
+English to establish factories for collecting cloves and nutmegs, and,
+in token of his amity, sent a most superb ring to the Queen of England.
+Richly laden with spices and Chinese merchandize, which he had captured
+in several of our vessels, on their voyage to New Spain, Drake
+proceeded on his return to England, where, after a variety of
+disasters, he arrived, filling all Europe with admiration of the
+valuable nature of his cargo. That strangers might not, by such means,
+acquire a footing in the Moluccas and neighbouring islands, the
+Governor sent an expedition against the island of Borneo, which, by the
+following circumstances, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb160" href=
+"#pb160" name="pb160">160</a>]</span>became a matter of easy conquest.
+Sirela, King of Borneo, had come to Manila, to solicit the assistance
+of the Spaniards, in the recovery of his kingdom, of which he had been
+unjustly deprived by his brother; and he promised, in the event of his
+success, that the whole of this large island, should become tributary
+to Spain. Don Francisco La Sande, conceiving this a most desirable
+object, and that it would necessarily lead to the conquest of all the
+Archipelago of Maluco, determined to go in person, that he might not
+lose the favourable opportunity, which now presented itself, by
+replacing Sirela in the possession of his kingdom.</p>
+<p>He sailed from Manila in thirty vessels, with a large body of
+Spaniards and friendly Indians, and arrived safely at Borneo. Having
+entered the river, he proceeded along it, until he arrived at the
+residence of the usurper, upon which he immediately directed his
+artillery. The King, however, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb161"
+href="#pb161" name="pb161">161</a>]</span>with his troops, gallantly
+attacked the Spaniards, but in a short time, fled in great disorder,
+and took refuge in the mountains. The Governor placed his deposed
+brother on the throne, and returned to Manila, where he planned several
+other expeditions. He sent a squadron to Jolo and Mindanao, which
+reduced these two islands, and compelled them to pay the customary
+tribute to the King of Spain; but from the great distance they were at
+from Manila, and the very limited number of clergy then in the seat of
+government, a sufficiency could not be spared, for the purpose of
+converting the natives to Christianity, during the short time these
+islands were held. He completed the conquest of the province of
+Camarines by means of Captain Chaves, who founded the city of Nueva
+Caceres, close to the town of Naga. The Augustine friars began their
+spiritual conquest, but finding their number unequal to the task, of
+duly attending the undertaking, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb162"
+href="#pb162" name="pb162">162</a>]</span>they called in to their
+assistance the Franciscans, to whom eventually they ceded this
+district.</p>
+<p>Towards the close of La Lande's government, an unpleasant
+disagreement arose between the clergy and laity. The factors had
+introduced into their respective districts, several abuses, which the
+clergy would not countenance. Certain services were required of the
+Indians, beyond the stipulated rents, which were extremely vexatious,
+and which little accorded with the Christian character. The friars
+began by preaching against these abuses, but this had little effect,
+and in the end, so many complaints were made, that it reached the ears
+of the King (Philip the Second), who issued an order, in which he
+reproved the conduct of the factors, and enjoined them, to pay strict
+obedience to the instructions they had received, to confine their
+imposts to the stipulated rents alone. The Governor gave every aid to
+the order of his Majesty, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb163" href=
+"#pb163" name="pb163">163</a>]</span>making regulations, by which the
+Indians might be secured against such encroachments in future. This, in
+some respect, abated the gathering storm, but tranquillity was never
+completely restored, as the avarice of the factors set at defiance all
+laws, human and divine. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb164" href=
+"#pb164" name="pb164">164</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch9" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1031" class="label">CHAPTER IX.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1580.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Ronquillo de Penalosa,
+third Governor of Manila.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">In April 1580, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Penalosa
+arrived at the port of Cavite, as Governor of Manila. He was a nephew
+of the famous Judge Ronquillo, who hanged the Bishop of Zamora. He
+brought to his predecessor, the appointment of Oidor of Mexico, with
+orders for him to sail by the first ship, destined for Acapulco. On his
+taking possession of his government, his first step was, to mark out
+the Chinese quarter of the town, under the guns of the fort of
+Santiago, on the other side of the river. He sent Captain Rivera to
+Borneo, again to re-establish on his throne the legitimate King Sirela,
+who had a second <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb165" href="#pb165"
+name="pb165">165</a>]</span>time been deprived of it by his brother,
+with the assistance of a Portuguese Captain, of the name of Brito.
+Rivera executed his commission without delay, and returned to Manila,
+after having placed Sirela in peaceable possession of his kingdom. This
+was judged to be the fittest opportunity, for bringing the Moluccas
+under the Spanish dominion, and the Governor began to make preparations
+for the enterprize, for, in addition to the customary enmity between
+the courts of Portugal and Castile, he had received positive
+instructions from Philip the Second, to effect this object.
+Circumstances, however, compelled him to postpone it till the year
+following, as several matters of consequence, in these islands,
+required his presence, particularly in the province of Cagayan, where a
+Japanese pirate had established himself, with a great many followers
+and vessels. Pablo Carrion dislodged the Japanese, but not without
+great loss on the side of the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb166"
+href="#pb166" name="pb166">166</a>]</span>Spaniards, as the former,
+rather than be taken prisoners, preferred dying bravely, with arms in
+their hands. The pirate thus dislodged, the Governor founded the city
+of Nueva Segovia, close to the Indian town of Lalo, and the city of
+Arivalo, in the island of Panay, in memory of his native province.</p>
+<p>The year following, 1582, an expedition sailed to the Moluccas,
+commanded by Don Sebastian Ronquillo, a nephew of the Governor, who
+took with him Pablo de Lima, married to a niece of the King of Tidore,
+and who, in her right, laid claim to several towns, of which she had
+been unjustly deprived by the King of Ternate. De Lima was likewise
+appointed Governor of Ternate, when it should be subdued by the
+Spaniards, and all these considerations contributed, to induce him to
+give every aid to this expedition. The squadron arrived at the island
+of Motiel, and making an easy conquest of it, the natives recognized
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb167" href="#pb167" name=
+"pb167">167</a>]</span>Pablo de Lima as their chief. From this island,
+the Spaniards proceeded on their voyage to Ternate, where the Indians
+seemed determined, to throw every impediment in the way of their
+disembarkation; but the resistance was of short duration, as the
+Spaniards contrived to draw them into the interior, and to plant their
+artillery against the town, without which expedient nothing could have
+been done. They laid regular siege to the town, and were on the point
+of taking it, when a disorder in the intestines began to rage among
+them, which occasioned such mortality, that they were compelled to
+break up their enterprize, and return to the Philippines. During these
+transactions in Ternate, the Christians in Manila, found out new
+objects for mutual hostility. Besides the provinces which I have
+mentioned, which the Augustine friars had been the means of reducing to
+obedience, they had distributed priests in Pangasinan, in Cagayan,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb168" href="#pb168" name=
+"pb168">168</a>]</span>and in the two provinces of Misames and Caraga,
+in the island of Mindanao, which are the only two in this large island,
+acknowledging subjection to the Spaniards. The factor of Mindanao,
+whose name was Blas de la Serna, treated the Indians with great
+severity, and lived a scandalous life, highly prejudicial to the cause
+of Christianity.</p>
+<p>The friar whom the Augustines had placed there, admonished him
+repeatedly to alter his course of life; but as his conduct became more
+reprehensible every day, the friar, unable to bear it longer, was under
+the necessity of excommunicating him. The factor, in revenge for (as he
+termed it) his impudence, publicly beat him. At this time the Bishop of
+Manila was Don Fr. Domingo de Salazar, who had arrived at Manila in
+March, 1581, with two Jesuits, who were the first of the order in these
+islands. On the 21st of December, he erected the church into a
+cathedral, appointing <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb169" href=
+"#pb169" name="pb169">169</a>]</span>proper prebends and dignitaries,
+and forming municipal authorities for its due government. This nobleman
+was highly attentive to the rights of the clergy. He took up the affair
+with the factor very warmly, and did not relax in his exertions, until
+he saw him at Manila undergo the punishment, imposed on him by the
+sentence of the church, and which he had so well merited.</p>
+<p>The whole body of factors being alarmed, and fearing this would be
+much to their prejudice, persuaded the Governor, to withdraw from the
+clergy, the Indians who had been given to them for their own service,
+and that of the church. The Spaniards well inclined to the factors,
+seconded this advice, and they, in conjunction, commenced a cruel
+persecution against the Augustine and Franciscan friars. But Pedro de
+Chaves, Amador de Arriaran, Juan de Morenos, Antonio Savedra, Miguel de
+Lorca, Francisco de la Cueba, Esteban <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb170" href="#pb170" name="pb170">170</a>]</span>Rodrigueze de
+Figueroa, and other factors, who had seen, of how much importance the
+friars were, in the conquest and retention of these islands, came over
+to their party, and defended them against the attack thus made on them,
+proving satisfactorily, that without the assistance of the clergy, the
+factors would never have received even their rents.</p>
+<p>The Governor, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, was deeply afflicted at those
+disputes, so much at variance with his character, and with the anxiety
+of his views, for the happiness and prosperity of these islands. His
+whole mind, indeed, was occupied in the consideration, of what might
+contribute to these ends, and to the aggrandizement of the Spanish
+name; but unhappily persuading himself, that his honour was committed
+by these dissensions, he became affected by a deep melancholy, to which
+he was a prey during six months, and to which he fell a sacrifice in
+the month of March, 1583, before <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb171"
+href="#pb171" name="pb171">171</a>]</span>he completed his third year
+as Governor. He was interred in the church of St. Augustine, and to do
+him honour, more tapers than usual being burnt, the roof of the church
+was set on fire, which in a few hours communicated so generally, that
+the greater part of the city was destroyed, with immense loss of lives
+and property.</p>
+<p>By the death of Don Gonzalo, his kinsman, Don Diego Ronquillo,
+succeeded as Governor <i>ad interim</i>, being nominated as such in the
+royal order. The new Governor directed all his attention, to the
+rebuilding of the city, assisting personally in the public works, and
+paying particular attention, to the restoration of the houses,
+belonging to the inhabitants. Such diligence was used, that in a short
+time, the city was completely re-established. Many of the inhabitants,
+lost almost all their property in this fire; and the disaster, though
+of sufficient magnitude, was swelled into a <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb172" href="#pb172" name="pb172">172</a>]</span>most
+dreadful picture, by the ship going to Acapulco, but which had been
+forced by stress of weather into China. It is inconceivable, in what
+consternation, the inhabitants of the islands in the neighbourhood of
+Manila, arrived to their assistance. Don Diego Ronquillo immediately
+sent to China the factor of the royal works, Juan <span class="corr"
+id="xd19e1070" title="Source: Butista">Bautista</span> Roman, with
+orders to chastise those, who had been the cause of spreading this
+report, and to despatch, at any expense, a ship to New Spain, with a
+true statement of the extent of the mischief. The factor performed his
+commission with such efficacy, that the ship he despatched, returned
+the year following from Acapulco, in company with another; and in these
+ships came the new Governor and the Royal Audience. The government of
+Don Diego had lasted only one year, but, though short, it was of great
+importance to the settlement.</p>
+<p>He reduced to obedience in the island <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb173" href="#pb173" name="pb173">173</a>]</span>of Layte, and the
+province of Pangasinan, some towns which refused to pay the usual
+tribute, and he effectually suppressed symptoms of sedition in the
+other provinces, and which took their rise in the ill treatment of the
+factors. The factors entertained the idea, that the Indians whom they
+had found on their lands, ought to be considered in the light of slaves
+in every respect, and compelled them to work, appropriating all the
+wages of their labour to their own use, by which means they enjoyed all
+the luxuries of life, and even accumulated fortunes. To such a height
+had these abuses been raised, that a reform was absolutely necessary.
+The Governor bestowed particular attention on this subject, punishing
+those who were culpable, and watching over the general good. The result
+of this was, that many Indians who before had fled to the mountains,
+returned to the towns, and paid the tribute settled <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb174" href="#pb174" name="pb174">174</a>]</span>by
+the government, either in silver, or in the produce of the land they
+cultivated. By these desirable arrangements, the royal revenue was
+improved, and the interest of the factors so much injured by their own
+avarice, that from hence arose the proverb, &ldquo;Avarice bursts the
+sack.&rdquo; <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb175" href="#pb175" name=
+"pb175">175</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch10" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1081" class="label">CHAPTER X.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1584.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Santiago de Vera, fourth
+Governor of Manila.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The Governor, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, had sent to
+Madrid Captain Gabriel Rivera, to solicit several objects, necessary to
+the general welfare of these islands, and in particular, that a Royal
+Audience should be established there, as it was extremely
+disadvantageous and embarrassing, to be obliged to have recourse to
+that of Mexico.</p>
+<p>The King granted this request, and sent Don Santiago de Vera, of
+Alcala de Henares, as Governor and President of the Royal Audience; and
+Don Melchor de Avalos, and Don Pedro de Rosas, as oidores of it. The
+third oidor, Don Antonio Rivera, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb176"
+href="#pb176" name="pb176">176</a>]</span>arrived two years afterwards.
+Don Gaspar de Ayala was nominated fiscal. Don Santiago took possession
+of his government May, 1584, and immediately formed the Royal Audience,
+bearing the royal signet with much ostentation, under a canopy, from
+the convent of St. Augustine, to the palace. The Chancellor was Gabriel
+de Rivera, who arrived this year, with the title of Mariscal of the
+lake of Bombon. Immediately that Don Santiago took possession of his
+government, he put in force the orders which he had received from the
+King, to chastise those factors, who had abused the authority, they
+derived from the possession of the lands granted them. He began, by
+dispossessing Bartoleme de Ledesma, factor of Abuyo, and others the
+most culpable, punishing the rest in proportion to their
+irregularities, after full conviction of their delinquency.</p>
+<p>In the following year, 1585, he sent Juan de Morones and Pablo de
+Lima, with a <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb177" href="#pb177" name=
+"pb177">177</a>]</span>powerful squadron, to reduce the Moluccas under
+the Spanish dominion, but it returned to Manila with similar disgrace
+to the preceding one, without being able to take possession of the
+fortifications of Ternate. The Governor was much chagrined at the ill
+success of this expedition, and was desirous of repeating the attempt,
+conformable to the positive instructions received from the King to that
+effect; but he was not able to execute it, as the troops from New Spain
+had not arrived, and, independent of this, the insurrections of the
+Indians were of too formidable a nature, for they lost no opportunity
+which presented itself of breaking the yoke of the Spaniards. Those of
+Pampangos and Manila entered into a conspiracy with the Moors of
+Borneo, who had ostensibly come there for the purpose of traffic. They
+formed the plan of traitorously entering the town in the night, setting
+fire to it, and killing in the confusion all the Spaniards.
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb178" href="#pb178" name=
+"pb178">178</a>]</span>This conspiracy was discovered by a female
+Indian, married to a Spanish soldier. The Governor checked it in its
+commencement, imprisoning many, and severely punishing others by way of
+example. The islands of Samar, Ybabao, and Leyte, were likewise far
+from being in a state of tranquillity, and the factor of Dagami, a town
+of Leyte, had nearly lost his life by the Indians, in the collection of
+the tribute paid in wax, and which he had attempted to levy by a
+measure, containing double the usual quantity. This compelled him to
+fly for safety to the mountains, and he passed from thence in a boat to
+the island of Zebu. The Governor sent Captain Lorenzo de la Mota to
+quell these disturbances, which he soon did by promising to punish the
+delinquent.</p>
+<p>Among the calamities which happened during this government, the loss
+of the ship Santa Anna was not the least; she was on her way, richly
+laden, to Acapulco, and <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb179" href=
+"#pb179" name="pb179">179</a>]</span>was taken by the English.
+Cavendish, an English pirate, emulous of the fame of Drake, having
+equipped five ships, with the assistance of Queen Elizabeth, took his
+departure for this quarter of the world; and having committed many acts
+of hostility on the coasts of Brazil and Peru, he arrived at Molucca,
+where he procured every information respecting the produce of the
+Philippines, and the rich cargoes which every year were sent from these
+islands to Acapulco. Well instructed, likewise, in the tract observed
+by our galleons, he sailed for the coast of California, to lie in wait
+for the annual ship destined for New Spain. In due time the Santa Anna,
+as is customary, made her appearance on that coast, in prosecution of
+her voyage to Acapulco, and fell into the hands of the English without
+any resistance, being quite unprepared.</p>
+<p>The English having made themselves masters of this valuable prize,
+directed their <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb180" href="#pb180" name=
+"pb180">180</a>]</span>course to the Philippines, and arriving at the
+island of Panay, where we had a ship in the dock of Yloylo, an attempt
+was made to burn her, but it was rendered ineffectual by Captain
+Lorenzo de Limas, who made a vigorous resistance, with such soldiers
+and Indians, as he was able to collect in the province. Abandoning this
+object, the English commander sent a letter to the Governor, to apprize
+him of the capture he had made of the Santa Anna, and to inform him he
+should return frequently to those seas. He departed from Panay for the
+Cape of Good Hope, from whence he sailed for England, and arrived laden
+with such riches, that his name became more renowned than ever was that
+of Francis Drake.</p>
+<p>In the year 1589 no ship was despatched to New Spain; for two which
+had been equipped for this voyage, were lost in the port of Cavite in a
+dreadful storm, which happened on St. Peter's Day. About the
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb181" href="#pb181" name=
+"pb181">181</a>]</span>same time many insurrections of the Indians took
+place, and in particular, those of Cagayan, who were always very
+troublesome, murdered many Spaniards. Those likewise, in the valley of
+Dingras, in the province of Ylocos, resisted the collections of
+tribute, and murdered six people from the city of Fernandina, who were
+travelling through their towns. Don Santiago quelled these tumults, and
+restored tranquillity, by duly mingling punishment with clemency. He
+likewise constructed a strong fort of stone, where the royal gate now
+stands; he removed to Manila the foundery which was hitherto in Santa
+Anna; and cast some artillery, with the assistance of an Indian of
+Pampango. He founded an hospital for the Spaniards: but the principal
+mover of this pious act was Don Luis de Vivanco, who, jointly with his
+wife, endowed it, and appropriated it to the reception and cure of the
+sick. The Governor divided several portions of land among those
+soldiers <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb182" href="#pb182" name=
+"pb182">182</a>]</span>and sailors who deserved it most, and conducted
+himself in the exercise of his authority, so much to the general
+satisfaction, that his character as an excellent Governor was
+established by the declaration of the licentiate Herber del Corral, who
+was chief judge on the occasion of passing his trial of approbation.
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb183" href="#pb183" name=
+"pb183">183</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch11" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1117" class="label">CHAPTER XI.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1590.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Gomez Perez
+Dasmari&ntilde;as, the fifth Governor of Manila.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The clergy of Manila about this period, sent to the
+court of Madrid and Rome the Friar Sanches, a Jesuit, under the
+pretence of soliciting some objects, for the spiritual as well as
+temporal welfare of these islands. Arriving at Madrid, he petitioned
+that the Royal Audience should be removed, and that Gomez Perez
+Dasmari&ntilde;as, a noble Galician knight of the order of Santiago,
+Corregidor of Logrono, should be sent as Governor. This nobleman
+arrived at Manila in May 1590, in one of the two ships which the
+Viceroy of Mexico had despatched, and in which he had sent four
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb184" href="#pb184" name=
+"pb184">184</a>]</span>hundred troops, a supply, by this time highly
+requisite in the islands. The other ship which accompanied her struck
+on a shoal, close in with the land of Maranduque, and was lost, but all
+the people were saved. The King gave the new Governor, as a salary, ten
+thousand Castile ducats out of the royal revenue of New Spain, and
+which was remitted annually to the Philippines.</p>
+<p>He brought an order that the proceedings of the Royal Audience
+should be suspended; and in performance of this, the year following,
+the Oidores composing it embarked for Mexico; the Oidor Roxas alone
+remaining, as the <i>ad interim</i> successor of the Governor. The
+Bishop, who had some disagreement with the Governor, feeling the
+importance of the Royal Audience, as the only tribunal capable of
+curbing the power of the Governor, and persuading himself it was not
+safe, to trust in the hands of one man, the uncontrolled <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb185" href="#pb185" name=
+"pb185">185</a>]</span>exercise of authority, in a country so remote
+from the seat of government, it was his intention to proceed to New
+Spain, with a view to procure the re-establishment of the Royal
+Audience in Manila, and on various, affairs of his bishopric. The
+Governor, that he might not effect his purpose, would not allow him to
+embark with the Oidores; and the Bishop in the mean time contented
+himself, with giving full powers and instructions to the Augustine
+Friar Ortiga, who was going to Madrid, to appear to any allegations
+which might be preferred against him. In the short time this government
+lasted, great undertakings were performed; such as building a wall of
+stone round Manila, erecting the fort of Santiago, and furnishing it
+with good artillery. The royal magazines in Manila and Cavite were
+built; and the asylum of Santa Potenciana was erected for the
+maintenance, at the cost of the state, of a certain number of young
+persons, daughters of deceased <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb186"
+href="#pb186" name="pb186">186</a>]</span>military officers, until they
+should be married. The Governor established among the different
+religious orders, a salutary ecclesiastical control over the Indians,
+assigning to each order their different towns and provinces, and
+converting the colony into a complete republic; supplying every defect
+in the government; and putting the whole in a respectable state of
+defence, by means of his four hundred regular soldiers, divided into
+detachments.</p>
+<p>Among the natives of many adjacent islands which traded with Manila,
+those of Japan, in particular, brought the richest merchandize for the
+consumption of the colony, and for the commerce with Acapulco. A keen
+and able man of this nation, named Faranda Kicmon, who had renegaded
+from the faith, persuaded Taycosama, Emperor of Japan, to send an
+embassy to Manila; and promised him, that if he would give him the
+commission, he would procure him to be acknowledged <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb187" href="#pb187" name="pb187">187</a>]</span>King
+of Manila, and that a regular and lucrative commerce, might be
+established between the two nations. The Emperor gave credit to his
+representations, and despatched him with letters to the Governor,
+claiming the vassalage of the Philippines. The Governor received this
+embassy, and replied to it immediately, without bringing into question
+the point of vassalage, by proposing to establish a commercial
+intercourse; sending for this purpose, the Franciscan Friars Pedro
+Bautista, Francisco de San Miguel, Bartholome, and Gerardo de San
+Miguel, who likewise had determined to avail themselves of this
+opportunity, to establish themselves in that kingdom to preach the
+gospel: he likewise sent with them a Portuguese of the name of
+Carvallo, and they bore a handsome present to the Emperor.
+Notwithstanding many malicious falsehoods which Faranda had circulated,
+Taycosama received the friars with much courtesy, and granted
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb188" href="#pb188" name=
+"pb188">188</a>]</span>them permission to remain in his kingdom,
+treating them with much respect in the first instance, although, at a
+subsequent period, he murdered them. About this time ambassadors from
+the King of Camboa arrived, with two elephants, as a present to the
+Governor; and endeavoured to engage him, to grant them assistance
+against the King of Siam, who had commenced hostilities against them.
+The Governor answered the King of Camboa with another present, giving
+them great hopes, but evading immediate assistance, on the plea that
+his projected expedition to the Moluccas, required all his resources,
+however desirous he was of giving the aid they demanded.</p>
+<p>That this expedition might not turn out as the former had done,
+Gomez Perez Dasmari&ntilde;as determined to accompany it in person. He
+sailed from Cavite on the 19th of October 1593, and arriving off
+Santiago, encountered a strong gale from <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb189" href="#pb189" name="pb189">189</a>]</span>the eastward, and the
+whole of the fleet was separated, his own ship alone remaining: this
+compelled him to anchor at Brimstone Cape, to effect which he was
+obliged to have recourse to his boats, on account of the great variety
+of currents. The Chinese, to the number of one hundred and fifty,
+though able to pull at the oar, assisted but very little; and the
+Governor abused them for the little exertion they made. These people
+resented this ill-treatment; and considering themselves as superior in
+force to the few Spaniards in the ship, conceived the design of
+murdering them the same evening. Whilst the Spaniards took their siesta
+(or afternoon nap), little dreaming of the designs of the Chinese, the
+latter commenced their carnage by killing the Governor, and all those
+who were not able to effect their escape in the launch, or by swimming,
+sparing only Friar Montilla, a Franciscan, and Juan de Cuellar,
+secretary to the Governor, whom <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb190"
+href="#pb190" name="pb190">190</a>]</span>they took with them. After
+this massacre they sailed for China, and passing by Ylocos, they
+entered the port of Sinay to water, where the Indians fell on them, and
+killed twenty of their number. The following day they disembarked in
+another port; and actuated by superstitious motives, sacrificed one of
+the native converts, in revenge for the slaughter the Indians had made
+the day before, and by which sacrifice, they expected to propitiate
+their gods in favour of their voyage. They tied him to a cross, and
+opening his chest, took out his heart, which they offered to their
+idols. They then made sail, and coasted for several days: they resolved
+to set on shore Friar Montilla, Secretary Cuellar, and those Philippine
+Indians who had been their shipmates. They then proceeded to Cochin
+China, where, in the end, they received the punishment due to their
+crimes.</p>
+<p>On the death of the Governor, the Licentiate <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb191" href="#pb191" name=
+"pb191">191</a>]</span>Rosas succeeded to the Command, and immediately
+despatched two ships in search of the Chinese, under the command of Don
+Juan Ronquillo. They made enquiry in several ports; but not being able
+to gain information respecting their route, they returned without
+effecting their object. That they might not, however, remain without
+punishment for such atrocious crimes, and supposing that the Chinese
+might have taken shelter in the province of Chancheo in China, of which
+they were natives, he sent Don Fernando de Castro, to solicit of the
+Viceroy of that province, due satisfaction against the aggressors.
+Unable, however, to reach that destination, he was, by the
+interposition of divine Providence, compelled to bear away for Cochin
+China, where, on his arrival, he found the murderers had retired. He
+communicated his business to the King, and the whole of them were
+imprisoned and executed. Some of those, likewise, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb192" href="#pb192" name="pb192">192</a>]</span>whom
+the Portuguese Governor of Molucca, had sent on the expedition with the
+Chinese, were hanged in Manila. The whole, however, affording small
+consolation for the melancholy catastrophe which had taken place.</p>
+<p>Forty days after the death of the Governor, Friar Montilla and
+Secretary Cuellar arrived at Manila, after having suffered many severe
+hardships, and being brought out for death repeatedly, whilst they were
+with the Chinese. The deceased Governor had given in charge to these
+gentlemen a trunk, to be delivered to his son Luis Perez
+Dasmari&ntilde;as; and on opening it, papers of great importance were
+found: among the rest, a royal order, by which he had the power to
+nominate his successor, in virtue of which he named his own son Luis.
+At first Luis found some difficulty in being acknowledged as such, the
+Licentiate Roxas being firmly seated; and unwilling to deliver up his
+authority, for <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb193" href="#pb193" name=
+"pb193">193</a>]</span>which he had begun to entertain a great
+attachment; he, however, on the 3d of December, in the same year, left
+Luis in quiet possession.</p>
+<p>The new Governor was desirous of sending another expedition to
+Molucca, but desisted from it at that time from prudential motives. It
+was fortunate that he formed this resolution, as in this case, Manila
+would have been left with only a few troops, and exposed to another
+attack from the Chinese, on whom little reliance could be placed.
+Indeed, there was reason to suspect they had something of that nature
+in contemplation, as many junks about this time arrived with Mandarins
+in them, and the cause of their appearance was never ascertained. They
+landed very frequently, and visited the Governor, but did not attempt
+any thing, nor could he comprehend their object; most fortunately,
+however, at this moment, arrived the two <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb194" href="#pb194" name="pb194">194</a>]</span>ships which sailed
+this year from Acapulco, bringing a sufficient force with them, to
+resist enemies more powerful than the Chinese.</p>
+<p>Our historians have, with great minuteness, stated the losses and
+arrivals of the ships which are sent to New Spain, on account of their
+being so interesting to these islands, which depend upon them for their
+subsistence, and, of course, their loss or arrival occasions a very
+general sensation. There is no reason to think, that these misfortunes
+are to be attributed to the difficulty of the passage, nor to stormy
+weather, so much as to the ignorance of the pilots, who are chosen
+without examination as to their nautical skill, the bad construction of
+the ships, their sailing out of season, and too heavily laden. These
+are, unquestionably, the principal causes of their failure; and it is a
+pity it is not remedied, for it is with justice affirmed, that
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb195" href="#pb195" name=
+"pb195">195</a>]</span>the avarice and knavery of some rich people,
+have buried in the ocean many millions of dollars.</p>
+<p>In the year following, the same two vessels again made this voyage,
+and Se&ntilde;or Morga came in one, as successor to the late Governor,
+but this nobleman was afterwards promoted to be Oidor of Mexico, where
+he wrote the history of the Philippines. There came likewise in these
+ships, a sufficient number of troops, sent by the Viceroy of Mexico.
+Don Luis Dasmari&ntilde;as was now, therefore, enabled to give the King
+of Camboxa that relief which his father had promised. He likewise
+despatched an expedition to the island of Mindanao; and he quelled an
+insurrection in some of the provincial towns which had revolted, and
+refused to pay the tribute, particularly those in Cagayan and Zambales.
+He did many praiseworthy actions, and governed with more approbation
+than his father, possessing greater abilities, at <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb196" href="#pb196" name="pb196">196</a>]</span>the
+same time that he was more affable to all.</p>
+<p>In the month of February 1596, the flag ship of the squadron of
+Alvaro Mendana de Neyra arrived at Cavite. He had sailed from Callao,
+the port of Lima, with four ships, to colonize the islands of Salmon;
+and having begun his new settlement in the island of Negros, near New
+Guinea, he died there, and his wife, Do&ntilde;a Isabela Barreto, at
+the instigation of the people, left the colony, and came in his ship to
+Manila. The Governor received her with great attention, and gave her
+every assistance, to enable her to return to New Spain.</p>
+<p>An important establishment was now founded here, called the Pious
+Work of Mercy, which originated with a clergyman of the name of Losa,
+and who, together with Captain Esquerra, an inhabitant of Manila,
+employed themselves in collecting donations for this purpose; and
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb197" href="#pb197" name=
+"pb197">197</a>]</span>their exertions were so successful, that they
+were soon enabled to build the college of Santa Isabel, where many
+female orphans are maintained, and on whom marriage portions are
+bestowed. In emulation of this pious work, many others were endowed in
+the convents, and in the cathedral. The projectors traded with their
+funds to China, Batavia, the coast of Coromandel, and Acapulco, the
+produce of which was destined to be employed in like manner as above,
+in hospitals, dowers to orphan females, in ransoming children in
+China<a href="#n20"><sup>20</sup></a>, and for masses for souls in
+purgatory, reserving part of it for the annual increase of the funds of
+these pious establishments, and to alleviate the distresses occasioned
+by the losses of the annual ships, of which they thus became the
+assurers to a certain extent. Such establishments may be useful to new
+settlers, since the parties desirous of commercial pursuits, may, if
+they possess any credit, be certain of meeting in <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb198" href="#pb198" name=
+"pb198">198</a>]</span>these resources a capital with which they may
+trade. I am not of opinion, however, that they are very useful to these
+islands, generally speaking, because the rich merchants, who have
+sufficient capital, employ it in objects attended with no risk, and in
+their store-houses, and trade with that which they draw from this
+charity, by which they escape the chance of loss. If there had not,
+unfortunately we may say, been this resource, no doubt some mode would
+have been resorted to, of insuring the Acapulco adventures, at less
+than the pious foundations have been in the habit of contributing, and
+which often exceeds fifty per cent., and never falls below twenty per
+cent. Like all other adventures managed by a public body, there is
+never such strict &oelig;conomy as when under the control of
+individuals, whose interests are involved in the result. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb199" href="#pb199" name="pb199">199</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch12" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1188" class="label">CHAPTER XII.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1596.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Francisco Tello de
+Gusman, the fourth Governor of Manila.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The news of the death of Dasmari&ntilde;as, reached
+Madrid through the medium of India, and immediately the King sent as
+his successor Don Francisco Tello de Gusman, Knight of the order of
+Santiago, born at Seville, who had been treasurer of the Indies. He
+arrived at Manila the 1st of June 1596, and the following month
+despatched the ship San Philip to Acapulco; but she encountered in her
+voyage heavy gales, was dismasted, and lost her rudder, and having no
+other resource, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb200" href="#pb200"
+name="pb200">200</a>]</span>bore away for Japan, where the relief she
+sought was denied, except on the condition of her entering the port of
+Urando; in effecting which she touched on a sand bank, and made so much
+water, that she was under the necessity of being unloaded. The
+Governor, allured by the prospect of such rich booty, immediately
+conceived the design of making himself master of the vessel and cargo,
+and accordingly secured it in the royal store-houses, sending
+information to the Emperor Taycosama, that the Captain having given a
+false representation of the matter, he had proceeded against him
+according to law, and had secured the whole of the property. By this
+means he so warped the whole affair, that the cargo was condemned, and
+a prosecution was commenced, in the progress of which those Franciscan
+friars fell martyrs, who had come to this kingdom in quality of
+ambassadors.</p>
+<p>Taycosama named one of the four principal <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb201" href="#pb201" name=
+"pb201">201</a>]</span>Governors of his kingdom, called Uximonoxo, to
+take charge of the ship, in order that the cargo might be delivered up;
+for our Captain, Don Mathias Landecho, had petitioned the Emperor,
+sending two Spaniards and two friars, of those he had in the ship, with
+a present worth twenty thousand dollars, to soften him, and, if
+possible, to obtain justice. Upon their arrival at Meaco, the court of
+the Emperor, they applied to the Franciscan friars, who, by their
+experience in this city, they conceived, could procure a favourable
+reception to their application. The Franciscans judged it better to
+apply to Ximonoxo, another of the four Governors; but this crafty
+Japanese, possessing more abilities than the friars, deceived the whole
+of them, found means to make them deliver up the present of the Emperor
+to him, offering to give them a letter to Uximonoxo, which they agreed
+to, and acceded to his wish. The Spaniards returned <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb202" href="#pb202" name=
+"pb202">202</a>]</span>quite content with this letter; but it was the
+letter of Uriah, the Hittite, for immediately they delivered it,
+Uximonoxo imprisoned them. When they found out the deceit, they sent
+the Friar Guivara to Meaco, to procure their liberty from the other
+Governors, and, with the assistance of the Franciscan friars, attempted
+to get an audience of the Emperor, to explain to him the conduct of his
+Governors; but Uximonoxo was too crafty for them, prejudicing the
+Emperor against the friars, through the medium of the Bonzos, who are
+priests of their idols, to whom he suggested the propriety of
+complaining against them, because they propagated a new doctrine
+against the gods, which must be prejudicial to the state.</p>
+<p>Taycosama, who began to be desirous of keeping possession of the
+merchandize of the wrecked vessel, imprisoned the Franciscan friars, on
+pretence of their having preached the gospel of Christ against his
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb203" href="#pb203" name=
+"pb203">203</a>]</span>command; and likewise pretended that they were
+employed as spies by the Spaniards, and that, with these views, they
+had quitted their own country. He now openly seized the property saved,
+and condemned the friars to death. With them the following were
+comprehended in this sentence; the Friars Pedro Bautista, Francisco
+Blanco, Gonsalo Gar&ccedil;ia, Francisco de San Miguel, Martin de la
+Asumpcion, together with Phelipe de Jesus, who was going in that ship
+to New Spain to be ordained, and had resided with his brethren since
+his arrival in Japan. These six Franciscan friars, with three Japanese
+Jesuits, and seventeen Japanese laymen, who professed Christianity, all
+shared the same fate. They were paraded through the streets of Meaco,
+with their left ears cut off, and then marched above two hundred
+leagues into Nangasaqui, where they suffered martyrdom, by being placed
+on crosses, and put to death with lances. This transaction took
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb204" href="#pb204" name=
+"pb204">204</a>]</span>place on the 5th of February 1597, in the
+presence of Se&ntilde;or Martinez, a Jesuit Bishop, many other Jesuits
+and Franciscan friars, and the Spaniards lately arrived in that ship,
+and who returned to Manila, after suffering many hardships, and
+certified what they had witnessed on this occasion.</p>
+<p>Immediately on the death of these martyrs being made known in
+Manila, the Governor sent two Spaniards and an Augustine friar, to
+solicit their bodies, and complain to the Emperor of the ill treatment
+which the Spaniards had experienced in regard to their ship, contrary
+to the treaty which had been made with the government of Manila. They
+likewise had instructions, to procure the establishment of commercial
+regulations for the future; and to pave the way for these views, they
+took with them a present of an elephant, an animal seldom seen in
+Japan. Taycosama was delighted with this present, and <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb205" href="#pb205" name="pb205">205</a>]</span>he
+esteemed it the more, as it knelt three times in his presence, on a
+certain signal being made to it. He received the ambassadors with great
+cordiality, and pleaded the laws of the empire, in justification of the
+conduct which had been observed, with regard to the ship and cargo; but
+made a promise, for the second time, of protection to the commerce of
+the Spaniards, assuring them that these vexations should never be
+repeated, and despatched them with a present to the Governor, together
+with the relicts of the martyred saints. The Spaniards had little
+confidence in the duration of this good understanding, for Faranda
+incessantly instigated the Emperor to commence hostilities on Manila,
+promising to reduce the whole of the islands to his obedience. The four
+Governors of the kingdom seconded the representations of Faranda, and
+measures were adopted with the view of carrying them into effect by
+collecting an armament; but the chief men of <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb206" href="#pb206" name="pb206">206</a>]</span>the
+country, who considered Faranda as a despicable character, much
+retarded this scheme. It was at first understood in Manila, that this
+armament was directed against the island of Formosa, as the first step
+towards the conquest of the Philippines. Our Governor took every
+precaution, and among others, sent an embassy to Canton, as the Chinese
+were the ancient enemies of the Japanese; and it was their interest to
+prevent the latter from making this conquest: nothing of this, however,
+was eventually necessary, as Taycosama died, and peace immediately
+followed.</p>
+<p>While this was passing in Japan, the two expeditions which Luis
+Dasmari&ntilde;as had sent to Camboxa and Mindanao were proceeding in
+their operations; that which went to Camboxa began successfully, but it
+was afterwards completely ruined by Major Juan Gallinato, and returned
+to Manila without effecting any thing. Don Luis Dasmari&ntilde;as
+having pledged himself <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb207" href=
+"#pb207" name="pb207">207</a>]</span>for the success of this
+expedition, armed, at his own cost, two ships and a galiot, and with
+the approbation of the Governor, left Manila for Camboxa, and in a
+little time after arrived at China, at the port of Pinae, twelve
+leagues distant from Canton, where he encountered the Governor of
+Malacca, took him prisoner, and returned to Manila. His galiot arrived
+at Cagayan, and proceeded on his voyage to Camboxa, where he found the
+King re-established on his throne by the Portuguese, Cabos Diego
+Belloso and Blas Ruiz. The other two Spanish ships also arrived there,
+and an attempt was made to establish themselves in that kingdom; but
+although the King seemed to desire it, they were compelled to abandon
+the project, as it was opposed by his step-mother, and the Malays had
+already freed themselves from the control of the Portuguese by the
+murder of Belloso and Ruiz; indeed a few only had escaped, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb208" href="#pb208" name="pb208">208</a>]</span>with
+Captain Juan de Mendoza in his ship.</p>
+<p>In Mindanao, Captain Figueroa, who had the charge of this
+expedition, and who bore, by the King's order, the title of Marquis of
+what he might conquer, arrived at Buhayen, where the Moors had some
+fortifications, from whence he retired to the kingdom of Tamoncaca,
+whose King was in amity with the Spaniards. The Se&ntilde;or Salazar
+having come out about this time to see the Royal Audience
+re-established, the ecclesiastical establishment was likewise arranged,
+the first Archbishop being the Se&ntilde;or himself. He, however,
+scarcely enjoyed his dignity three months, as, in August in the same
+year, he died of a dysentery. There had come with him Friar Pedro de
+Agurto, of the order of St. Augustine, first Bishop of Zebu, and
+Se&ntilde;or Benevides, of the order of the Dominicans, first Bishop of
+New Segovia. In the same <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb209" href=
+"#pb209" name="pb209">209</a>]</span>year the Oidores arrived, who were
+to form the Royal Audience, the President of it being the Governor. The
+chief Oidor was Morga, nominated as successor <i>ad interim</i> to the
+Governor. The others were Don Christoval Telles Almanza, Alvaro
+Zambrano, and Geronimo de Salazar. In eight days after their arrival,
+the Royal seal being carried with much pomp to the cathedral, and from
+thence to the palace, the Royal Audience was, by this ceremony,
+considered as fully established.</p>
+<p>In the garrison of Caldera, Juan Pacho had remained as Governor, and
+being of an active disposition, he attempted to reduce the natives of
+Jolo, on which island he landed immediately after a storm of rain, and
+attacking them, was killed, with the greater part of his people. The
+residue retreated to Caldera; but in consequence of this defeat, the
+natives of Jolo and of Mindanao, with fifty Caracoas, invaded the
+islands of Zebu, Negros, and Panay, <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb210" href="#pb210" name="pb210">210</a>]</span>pillaging and burning
+the towns, and making many prisoners. In the following year, 1590, they
+repeated the attack, and the natives retiring to the mountains, refused
+to quit them again, as the Spaniards were unable to protect them. Those
+in particular of the island of Panay were most pertinacious, and would
+not come near the town, as one of their priestesses had asserted, that
+the Spaniards were in league with the Moors, and had been the cause of
+these hostilities for years back. It cost the friars a great deal of
+trouble, to eradicate the effects of the impression, made by this means
+on the minds of the Indians, but at length they succeeded, and the
+towns were re-occupied.</p>
+<p>To chastise these insults of the Moors, the Governor sent Juan
+Gallinato, with two hundred Spaniards, to Jolo; but after making an
+attempt to possess himself of a fort, which the King of Jolo had on a
+lofty hill, he returned to Manila, without <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb211" href="#pb211" name=
+"pb211">211</a>]</span>having effected any thing of consequence.</p>
+<p>From that time to the present, the Moors have not ceased to infest
+our colonies. It is incredible what a number of Indians they have made
+prisoners, what towns they have plundered, what villages they have
+annihilated, and what ships they have taken. I am inclined to think,
+that Providence permits this as a punishment on the Spaniards, for
+delaying the conquest for no less a period than two hundred
+years<a href="#n21"><sup>21</sup></a>, notwithstanding the expeditions
+and fleets, that have almost annually been sent to attempt it. On the
+first arrival of the Spaniards in those seas, they conquered, in a
+short time, all the Philippines, excepting the small island of Jolo,
+part of Mindanao, and a few other very insignificant islands near them,
+which, to this period, have not submitted. These Moorish Indians are
+certainly very valiant, and their enmity has been drawn upon us
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb212" href="#pb212" name=
+"pb212">212</a>]</span>by our own conduct; for instead of following the
+laudable example of the first settlers in these islands, who brought
+the natives under subjection, principally by the mild interference of
+the friars, it seems, of late years, to have been the object of the
+Spaniards, since the great increase of the lucrative commerce of
+Manila, to acquire, by oppression and force, lands and establishments
+on these islands, without any view to conciliate the natives. Those,
+therefore, who have been sent on different occasions to reduce the
+country, have, instead of attending to the object of their mission,
+been solicitous only to serve their own purposes, considering that as a
+primary, which ought to have been a secondary object; and the natives
+profiting by constant experience in warfare, during which they
+discovered that the Spaniards were mortal like themselves, have at last
+become very formidable. There can be no doubt these Indians may be
+reduced by <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb213" href="#pb213" name=
+"pb213">213</a>]</span>the same means employed with the others, that
+is, by sending missionaries amongst them, and a sufficient number of
+Spanish stations might be established, to command respect. These
+garrisons ought to be independent of the Governor of Manila, and ought
+to have a chief, who should reside there, directing his whole attention
+to the improvement of the settlement, by the extension in the country
+of the Spanish influence, by temperate measures.</p>
+<p>As the matter is now ordered, these appointments are made with no
+other view than to enrich, by any means, the individuals sent there as
+Governors. Such, too, is the situation of the Governors of Zamboanga
+and Marianas; who appropriate to their own use all the revenue sent by
+his Majesty's Governors for public purposes, and then return to Manila,
+leaving the colonies as poor and miserable as the first day they were
+established.</p>
+<p>In October 1600, two Dutch pirates <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb214" href="#pb214" name="pb214">214</a>]</span>took their station at
+the entrance of Marivelez, waiting for the ship Saint Thomas, which was
+expected to return from New Spain about this time. The Governor sent
+against them the Oydor Morga with two galleons, an English patache
+which had come from Malacca, a galiot, and other small vessels. On the
+12th of December an engagement took place, when Morga took one ship,
+and the other fled, very much disabled; but he was incapable of
+pursuing his advantage, for his ship had suffered so much that she
+foundered, and fifty of the crew were drowned, the rest being saved on
+the island of Fortune. The ship which he had taken from the Dutch had
+on board twenty-five men, whom the Governor ordered to be hanged, as a
+warning to other pirates. During this year, two ships sailed for
+Acapulco; one was lost on the island of Catanduanes, but all the people
+were saved; the other took shelter in one of the Marianas, where she
+was <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb215" href="#pb215" name=
+"pb215">215</a>]</span>seized by the Indians, who murdered most of the
+Spaniards, reserving only a few, whom the ship Saint Thomas rescued on
+her return to New Spain; but the various disasters which had befallen
+Manila during this government, were far surpassed by a terrible
+earthquake, in which many houses, and the church of the Jesuits, were
+destroyed. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb216" href="#pb216" name=
+"pb216">216</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch13" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1260" class="label">CHAPTER XIII.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1602.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Pedro de
+Acu&ntilde;a.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">In May 1602, four ships from New Spain arrived at
+Cavite, in one of which came the new Governor, Don Pedro Brabo de
+Acu&ntilde;a, Knight of the order of San Juan, and who had been
+Governor of Carthagena. In passing by the Marianas, he had the good
+fortune to rescue twenty-five Spaniards, who had been shipwrecked in
+the St. Margarita. Immediately on taking possession of his government,
+he gave audience to the ambassadors of Dayfusama, Emperor of Japan, who
+had succeeded to the kingdom, on the death of Taycosama, and requested
+that the commerce with his kingdom might be continued; and that
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb217" href="#pb217" name=
+"pb217">217</a>]</span>shipwrights might be sent from Manila to build
+vessels for him. Without touching on this last subject, the Governor
+dismissed the Japanese with a magnificent present, which was all lost,
+as they were shipwrecked on the island of Formosa. With these
+ambassadors, friars from all the orders in Manila entreated the
+Governor to be allowed to proceed to Japan, in order to make converts,
+even at the risk of martyrdom. These good dispositions and intentions
+the Governor encouraged, and by his assistance, they were able to
+establish themselves in that kingdom, where in a short time they
+founded several convents. In 1603, the Augustine friars already
+possessed one, and the Captain of the ship Espiritu Santo, who put in
+there in distress, applied to the friars, requesting them to interest
+themselves with the Emperor, as the Japanese, conformable to their
+regulations, would not permit the ship to remain. Dayfusama received
+the application with <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb218" href="#pb218"
+name="pb218">218</a>]</span>courtesy, and punished those who had been
+the cause of it, sending the Spaniards who had accompanied the friars
+back to Manila, with great honours, giving at the same time strict
+orders, that all Spanish vessels arriving in future, in his ports,
+should be treated as friends; the ship, however, in the meantime had
+made her escape, fearing the same ill success, as had attended a
+similar application to Taycosama.</p>
+<p>A short time after the arrival of Acu&ntilde;a, he made a voyage
+through the Bisayas (or Islas de Pintados), to inspect the garrisons,
+and to make preparations for an expedition, which he intended against
+the Moluccas; and whilst he was employed in building the fort of
+Yloylo, the Moors took the opportunity offered by his absence, of
+seizing all the ships they met with, burning the towns, and
+endeavouring to take possession of Balayan; but the Alcalde Mayor of
+the province opposed them; and upon receiving assistance from
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb219" href="#pb219" name=
+"pb219">219</a>]</span>Manila, pursued them to a desert island, off
+which he fell in with the Governor on his return to the capital. Orders
+were issued to attack them; but the Moors making all the sail they
+could, he was able only to take two, and sink five others, out of
+seventy vessels, of which their force consisted. On his arrival at
+Manila, the Governor received the melancholy intelligence of the death
+of Se&ntilde;or Tello, his deputy, who had discharged his trust with
+great zeal and probity. He was buried in the church of St. Augustine,
+to which he had left considerable donations. Soon after this a great
+fire happened in Manila, which burnt two hundred and fifty houses, the
+convent of St. Domingo, and the hospital for the reception of the
+Spaniards.</p>
+<p>In May 1603, three Chinese Mandarins arrived, on the extraordinary
+mission of discovering, whether the port of Cavite was composed of
+gold, as a Chinese, called Tiongon, had reported to his Emperor, by
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb220" href="#pb220" name=
+"pb220">220</a>]</span>whom he was imprisoned, until the truth of his
+assertion should be ascertained, this man having promised to conquer it
+or lose his life. It was believed that this was a mere stratagem, to
+reconnoitre the country, as it was understood, that the Emperor
+intended to land an hundred thousand men, in the following December,
+with the view of becoming master, of the whole of the Spanish
+possessions. The Governor treated these Mandarins, with the most
+flattering distinction, shewed them the island of Cavite, and
+undeceived them in regard to the opinion propagated by their
+countryman, assuring them that the island was termed the Golden Island,
+on account of its lucrative commerce only.</p>
+<p>The expected armament of the Emperor did not make its appearance;
+but an insurrection of the Chinese inhabitants of Manila followed,
+which had been in a state of preparation during the embassy, and now
+broke out. There was a Chinese in <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb221"
+href="#pb221" name="pb221">221</a>]</span>Manila of the name of Engcan,
+who had remained there since the time of Limahon, who had been
+baptized, was very rich, and was in intimacy with many Spaniards. He
+offered to his countrymen, to build a wall round their quarter of the
+town: the work was commenced; but the fidelity of the Chinese beginning
+to be suspected, the Governor endeavoured to ascertain their
+intentions, through the medium of their enemies, the Japanese, from
+which circumstance the Chinese entertained a belief, that the Governor
+proposed to massacre them, with the assistance of these people; and
+they resolved, among themselves, to enter Manila on the eve of St.
+Francis, and murder every Spaniard in the place. Twenty-five thousand
+Chinese were concerned in this plot, which was discovered by an Indian
+having given notice of it to the curate of <span class="corr" id=
+"xd19e1286" title="Source: Guiapo">Quiapo</span>, through whose means
+the information was instantly communicated to the Governor. There were
+two <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb222" href="#pb222" name=
+"pb222">222</a>]</span>classes of Chinese at that time in Manila. Those
+who came annually for the purposes of commerce, and those who had long
+been residents, in a quarter of the town called Parian, outside of the
+walls of the city, and whom the Dominican friars had endeavoured to
+convert.</p>
+<p>The first step the Governor took, was to attempt to reconcile the
+annual Chinese merchants, who were very numerous; but he failed in the
+attempt, as they had collected in a large body in open rebellion, in a
+town within half a league of Manila, the others remaining in Parian.
+The Governor made a confidant of Engcan, and sent him, in company with
+some Spaniards, to endeavour to bring them back to a sense of their
+duty, but without effect, as the works they had raised in their defence
+would, in their opinion, protect them. In the night, some of them
+sallied out, burned the towns of Quiapo and Tondo, and killed many
+Indians. They were opposed by <span class="corr" id="xd19e1293" title=
+"Source: an">one</span> <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb223" href=
+"#pb223" name="pb223">223</a>]</span>hundred and thirty Spaniards,
+almost all of whom perished: among them were Don Luis
+Dasmari&ntilde;as, Don Thomas Brabo, and Don Juan de Alcega, whose
+heads the Chinese sent to Parian, as an incitement for their countrymen
+to follow their example. Upon examination, it being discovered that
+Engcan was the principal abettor of these men, he was imprisoned, which
+had such an effect upon many of his countrymen, that they hanged
+themselves in despair.</p>
+<p>The Spaniards, finding that they could do nothing by means of mild
+measures, commenced their operations, and fought with such determined
+resolution, that the slaughter was immense. So general was the spirit
+of loyalty, that even the friars took up arms, and, in particular,
+Antonio Flores, who had been a soldier in Flanders and Italy, and had,
+in the battle of Lepanto, been ensign under Bernardino <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb224" href="#pb224" name="pb224">224</a>]</span>de
+Meneses, but afterwards took the habit of St. Augustine. The position
+he took was on the river, close to which the rebels were obliged to
+pass to join the Chinese of Parian; from this he sallied out, and made
+great slaughter among them. They made good their retreat, however, to
+Parian and Dilao, where they threw up works, but Captain Gallinato
+burned Parian, and laid waste Dilao; and Captain Luis de Velasco
+pursued them to Tabuco, which we now call Cabuyao. The Chinese not
+being able to maintain themselves here, passed on to the town of St.
+Pablo in the mountains, where Velasco, who had pursued them, fell,
+together with two Franciscan friars. Here the insurgents fortified
+themselves so strongly, that it was deemed necessary to send a greater
+force from Manila against them.</p>
+<p>Major Christoval de <span class="corr" id="xd19e1304" title=
+"Source: Acuna">Acu&ntilde;a</span> was charged with the expedition. He
+cut off their supply <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb225" href="#pb225"
+name="pb225">225</a>]</span>of provisions, and reduced them to such
+distress, that their only alternative was, to abandon their position or
+starve.</p>
+<p>They availed themselves of the cover of night, and made the best of
+their way to Batangas, where the Spaniards pursued them, and completed
+their destruction, having killed in different engagements, twenty-three
+thousand men, one hundred alone, who were rowers in the galleons,
+remaining of their whole number; and as a warning to their countrymen,
+to abstain from insurrection in future, Engcan was ordered to be
+hanged, and his head to be placed on the gaol. The Governor sent two
+Augustine friars to Spain, to inform his Majesty of the rebellion, and
+to enable them to arrive in a shorter time, he sent them by India; but
+they encountered so many difficulties in their passage through Goa,
+Persia, Turkey, and Italy, that it was three years before they arrived
+at the court of Madrid. This has always been a dangerous <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb226" href="#pb226" name=
+"pb226">226</a>]</span>journey, and was particularly so to Friar
+Nicholas Milo, an Augustine, who, a few years before, had been sent the
+same route with a lay brother, born in Japan, and who, after having
+been exposed to great misery in many countries, fell a martyr in
+Muscovy with his companion. The Emperor of China sent ambassadors to
+Manila respecting the rebellion, requesting to know the meaning of the
+slaughter, which had been made among his subjects. The Governor
+justified himself amply, and the commerce remained on the same footing
+as before.</p>
+<p>In March 1604, eight hundred troops arrived from New Spain, with
+which relief Don Pedro de Acu&ntilde;a was enabled to fit out a fleet
+of thirty sail, in the port of Yloylo, for the conquest of the
+Moluccas. He sailed at the head of this armament on the 15th of
+January, 1606; and upon his arrival at Ternate, he sat down before the
+place, to which the King of the island <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb227" href="#pb227" name="pb227">227</a>]</span>had retired, and took
+it on the 1st of April, with the loss of fifteen Spaniards. The King of
+Ternate, who had fled with some of his subjects, intimated a desire to
+enter into amicable terms with the Spaniards, proposing to deliver up
+all his fortresses, the towns in Batoquina, which were anciently
+peopled by Christians (either Dutch captives, or Spanish deserters),
+all his Christian prisoners, the islands of Marotay and Herrao, with
+all his artillery and ammunition; and which terms were acceded to. He
+was not, however, left in possession of his kingdom, but accompanied
+the Governor to Manila, with some of his chiefs, who were not allowed
+to remain, from an apprehension of their fomenting disturbances.</p>
+<p>The Colonel, Don Martin Esquival, was appointed Governor of Ternate,
+with six hundred men; and in Tidore, the King of the island requested,
+that Captain Alarcon might remain with one hundred <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb228" href="#pb228" name=
+"pb228">228</a>]</span>troops, which was acceded to. During these
+transactions, and while this armament was at Ternate, and few troops
+remained at Manila, the Japanese who lived behind the city, availed
+themselves of these circumstances, and took up arms against the
+Spaniards. This rebellion was soon put a stop to, through the mediation
+of the friars, who persuaded the insurgents to lay down their arms, and
+submit quietly. By this species of management, time was gained for the
+arrival of the Governor, to whom information had been sent. He arrived
+at Manila, banished the ringleaders to their own island, and obliged
+the rest to live in the town of Dilao, where they would be always under
+our guns; and by this means, kept in obedience. The Governor reaped
+little benefit from these successes, as he was immediately afterwards,
+seized with a complaint in the intestines, which carried him off on St.
+John the Baptist's day. On the death of the Governor, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb229" href="#pb229" name="pb229">229</a>]</span>Don
+Christoval Telles de Almanza, as chief Oidor, became Military Governor
+<i>ad interim</i>. The rebellion, which lay smothered in the breasts of
+the Japanese, on this occasion, broke out afresh. They engaged the
+Spaniards, and many fell on both sides, as the Japanese were very
+brave, and were called the Spaniards of Asia. In the end, however, they
+were conquered, and were not permitted to live together in any
+considerable number till the year 1621, when Pelayo Hernandez built
+shops on their old quarter, which were hired out for the benefit of the
+Franciscan friars.</p>
+<p>Some of the Spaniards of the Moluccas took prisoner Pablo Blancardo,
+the Dutch commander at Malacca, and brought him in his galley to
+Ternate. The Governor there, in consideration of fifty thousand
+dollars, set him and all his people at liberty, which, when it was
+known in Manila, was stigmatized as an act of great baseness; and this
+public censure affected the Governor's <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb230" href="#pb230" name="pb230">230</a>]</span>mind to that degree,
+that he died of grief soon afterwards. The second in command succeeded;
+and to give satisfaction to the Royal Audience, despatched two ships in
+search of General Blancardo, who, it was supposed, had gone towards
+Maquien, in a patache; they took him prisoner a second time, and sent
+him with all his people, to Manila, where he was some time afterwards
+repaid from the Royal coffers, the amount of his ransom. Pablo
+Blancardo died of grief in prison at Manila, where he had been confined
+until the arrival of twenty-two Spaniards, who had been taken at
+Amboyna by the Dutch, and for whom it was intended he should be
+exchanged.</p>
+<p>The Royal Audience conducted themselves with great approbation in
+the civil administration, until the year 1608, when Don Rodrigo Vivero
+of Laredo, who was named by the Viceroy as Governor <i>ad interim</i>,
+arrived at Manila, and having had <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb231"
+href="#pb231" name="pb231">231</a>]</span>great experience in the
+management of the Indians in New Spain, he availed himself of it on
+this occasion, giving instructions to that effect to the chief judges,
+and other ministers of justice. He governed with much satisfaction for
+one year, when he delivered up the insignia of his office, and returned
+to Mexico. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb232" href="#pb232" name=
+"pb232">232</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch14" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1340" class="label">CHAPTER XIV.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1609.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Administration of Don Juan de Silva.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">When the account of the death of Acu&ntilde;a reached
+Madrid from New Spain, the government was bestowed on Don Juan de Silva
+of Truxillo, Knight of the order of Santiago, who, at that time, was
+serving in Flanders. He arrived at Cavite in Easter, and took
+possession of his government, bringing with him six companies of
+soldiers, which addition to our force was of great importance at this
+period, as, in the month of October, the Dutch squadron which has been
+mentioned, appeared off the port of Yloylo. It was composed of six
+ships and a considerable military force, <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb233" href="#pb233" name="pb233">233</a>]</span>which it was intended
+to disembark in this province, but they were repulsed by the Alcalde
+Mayor. It then appeared off Marivelez, with the view of preventing
+ships from going to Manila, and of seizing all merchantmen. Don Juan de
+Silva fitted out an armament, with which, in the month of April, he
+attacked and defeated them on the day of St. Mark. He took two ships,
+the Captains of which had been killed, with many of the crews; a third
+fled, and the other two which had been separated the day before from
+the fleet, and were returning with great booty, retired with such
+despatch, that the Spanish squadron was unable to come up with them.
+He, however, seized those ships which they had taken. Among others was
+a Japanese vessel, in which were embarked those Spaniards, who had been
+wrecked on the coast of that island in the ship St. Francis.</p>
+<p>The Archbishop of Manila, Benavides, <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb234" href="#pb234" name="pb234">234</a>]</span>having died on the
+26th of July, 1605, his Majesty named as his successor, Don Diego
+Vasques Mercado of Arevalo, in Old Castile. This year, 1610, he arrived
+at the Philippines, and discharged his functions with great
+approbation, until the year 1616, when he died, and the Bishop of Zebu
+succeeded him in the Archbishopric.</p>
+<p>The Dutch being settled in the island of Java, and possessing
+fortifications in Malacca and other parts of India, our Governor had
+little relish for such a neighbourhood, and as they had at times
+infested our seas, and attacked our islands, he determined, in person,
+to destroy the forts they had in Malacca, which being so close in his
+vicinity, he was the more jealous of. He fitted out a squadron of six
+ships and two galleys, and sailed for Ternate, where he intended to
+take on board some linguists, and to arrange all his other operations.
+He understood, in Ternate, that the Dutch hearing of this expedition,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb235" href="#pb235" name=
+"pb235">235</a>]</span>had fortified themselves in such a manner in
+Malacca, that it was impossible to make an impression upon them, and
+that he might not entirely lose the benefit of the armament he had
+prepared, he attempted to reduce the forts in Gilolo and Bataquina, but
+was obliged to retreat to Manila, with the loss of three hundred men,
+when he immediately began to make preparations of men and ships for
+another expedition of the same nature. These islands, at this time,
+received considerable aid in the arrival from Spain, by the way of
+India, of five caravelas out of seven, which in April, 1613, had sailed
+from Cadiz, commanded by Ruy Gonzalez de Segueira, having on board
+three hundred and fifty soldiers, two hundred and forty seamen, and a
+hundred Portuguese landsmen.</p>
+<p>Upon the arrival of this relief, the Governor determined to proceed
+to Malacca against the Dutch, whose position he ordered <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb236" href="#pb236" name="pb236">236</a>]</span>to
+be reconnoitred, but he found them so powerful in ships, which had
+arrived by the Straits both of Magellan and Sunda, that he deemed it
+necessary to use his utmost exertions, to enable him to cope with such
+powerful enemies. With this view he sent a despatch to the Viceroy of
+India, requesting he would unite the forces of the two kingdoms; but
+while he was preparing his armament at Cavite, ten Dutch vessels
+arrived at Panay. They landed a number of men, and marched for the city
+of Arivalo, burning the churches and the convents of the Augustine
+friars, in the towns of Ogtong and Xaro. The Indians, aware of the
+inadequate force the Spaniards possessed, fled to the mountains, and
+although the Dutch retired immediately, it cost the friars a great deal
+of labour, to bring them back to their towns, where they could not
+persuade themselves they were secure.</p>
+<p>By the end of the year 1616, Don Juan <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb237" href="#pb237" name="pb237">237</a>]</span>de Silva had
+collected the greatest armament, that had been seen in the Philippines;
+it consisted of ten galleons, four galleys, a patache, and many smaller
+vessels, with all necessary supplies, and five thousand men, two
+thousand being Spaniards and Portuguese. He sailed with this formidable
+armament, on the last day of this year, to attack the forts of Malacca;
+but as the galleons had not arrived which were expected from India, and
+which he imagined had wintered in the Straits of Malacca, and it was
+known that the Dutch kept some vessels in these Straits, in expectation
+of the ships from China which passed by here, the Governor thought it
+most adviseable, to attack these ships in the first instance, and after
+he had destroyed them, he should be able to join the galleons from
+India, and proceed to the Dutch forts in Malacca. The reasoning was
+good, but it failed in the execution, the galleons of <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb238" href="#pb238" name=
+"pb238">238</a>]</span>India having been burnt, in an engagement they
+had with the Dutch, and the latter having quitted the Straits eight
+days before the Spaniards arrived, flying with all their effects, as
+they had received secret intelligence of their route. At the same time
+that the Spanish galleons entered the Straits, two Malay merchantmen
+from China arrived very richly laden; by saving which, the inhabitants
+of Malacca called Don de Silva their preserver, received him on shore
+under a canopy, and expected from his valour, and the powerful fleet he
+brought, that India would be freed from those freebooters, the Dutch;
+but he was seized with a fever, and died in eleven days, on the 19th of
+April, 1616. He had ordered his body to be embalmed, and directed it
+should be carried to Xerez de los Cavalleros, to a convent of
+bare-footed carmelites, and buried there. Before he died, he gave the
+command of the armament to <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb239" href=
+"#pb239" name="pb239">239</a>]</span>Don Alonzo Henriquez, who brought
+it back to Manila, without effecting any thing else.</p>
+<p>By the death of the Governor, the command devolved on Don Andres
+Alcaraz, the oldest Oidor, who had been left in charge of the
+government by Don Juan de Silva, when he sailed with the armament for
+Malacca. About the same time our squadron sailed from the bay, another
+Dutch squadron, which had lately arrived by the Straits of Magellan,
+entered the mouth of the harbour, and lay a month close to Marivelez.
+There were only four ships and two pataches laying before Manila, and
+it was without artillery, ammunition, or soldiers. The Governor <i>ad
+interim</i> was not dismayed at this; he armed those few ships he
+possessed, fortified certain positions, and was encouraged in the
+undertaking by the people, who took up arms, not only the laity, but
+even the ecclesiastics also. The Dutch commander wrote two <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb240" href="#pb240" name=
+"pb240">240</a>]</span>letters to the Royal Audience, and one to
+General Pablo Blancardo, whom the Spaniards had carried prisoner to
+Manila; but as soon as he learned that Blancardo had died in prison, he
+made sail to the Moluccas.</p>
+<p>Upon the death of Silva, the Dutch came with ten ships against Oton,
+where they were gallantly repulsed by the commandant of the Pintados,
+Don Diego de Qui&ntilde;ones, who, in a wooden fort, sustained a siege
+of ten days, during which time the Dutch made four assaults, in which
+many were killed, but at last they were compelled to re-embark, and
+they retired to Malacca. The following year the same armament of ten
+ships came against Playa Honda. The Governor despatched against them,
+the Colonel Don Juan Ronquillo, with six galleons and two galleys; they
+came to an action on the 14th of April, 1617, and the two commodores
+being engaged, Don Juan Ronquillo sunk his adversary's <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb241" href="#pb241" name=
+"pb241">241</a>]</span>ship, called the Sun of Holland; two other ships
+were burnt, and the rest fled with precipitation. The Spaniards,
+however, were not able to pursue them, as they had suffered much in the
+engagement, and had lost the galleon St. Mark. After this action, Don
+Geronimo de Silva returned from Molucca, and the Oidor Alcarez resigned
+to him his office, the duties of which he had discharged with great
+applause. In October, Don Geronimo ordered the seven galleons that had
+been so severely handled in the last engagement, to be laid up in
+Marinduque. The two ships for Acapulco were despatched in the worst
+season of the year, during the hurricane months, and they were both
+lost, one on the coast of Lobo, and the other on that of Galban. This
+reflected no great credit on the wisdom and prudence of the Governor.
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb242" href="#pb242" name=
+"pb242">242</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch15" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1385" class="label">CHAPTER XV.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1618.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Alonzo Faxardo.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">On the 2d of July, 1618, arrived Don Alonzo Faxardo,
+of the order of Alcantara, of Murcia, and on the day following he took
+possession of the government of these islands. His Majesty had
+appointed him chief of an armament which he had intended to send by the
+Straits of Magellan, to the relief of Don Juan de Silva, to drive the
+Dutch from these seas; but it was delayed by his sending the forces
+destined for the Philippines, to the relief of the Emperor of Germany,
+Ferdinand the Second. The voyage on this account did not take place,
+until the death of Silva was known, when <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb243" href="#pb243" name="pb243">243</a>]</span>his Majesty named
+Faxardo as Governor, charging him to be careful of the interests of the
+Indians, who had suffered much in the late struggles, and promising
+ample rewards to those Spaniards, who should make this an object of
+their special attention.</p>
+<p>A short time after his arrival, the Dutch appeared in those seas,
+not with the intention of attempting Manila, as they were aware of the
+difficulty of the undertaking, but to intercept the galleons from
+Acapulco, richly laden with bullion. For this purpose they cruized with
+three ships off Cape Espiritu Santo, taking their station in the strait
+of St. Bernardino, as the galleons coming from Acapulco were in the
+constant habit of taking that route. On the 25th of February the Dutch
+got sight of them; they bore up, and ordered them to strike their
+colours, when a severe engagement took place. The Spaniards, under the
+veil of night, and in the confusion <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb244" href="#pb244" name="pb244">244</a>]</span>which prevailed,
+separated and escaped, one arriving at Palapag, and the other at
+Borongo, on the coast of Ybabao, where the cargoes were all saved,
+though the ships were lost. That the same misfortune might not occur
+again, the Governor ever after gave the commanders secret instructions,
+changing their route each voyage. On the 24th of August, this year,
+Friar Miguel Garcia Serrano, of the order of St. Augustine, late Bishop
+of New Segovia, took possession of the Archbishopric of Manila.</p>
+<p>In the year 1623, upon the canonization of St. Ignacio and St.
+Francisco Xavier, the friars of that order celebrated a grand festival,
+and those of Zebu, desirous of imitating them, likewise celebrated one,
+at which all the Jesuits of the island of Bohol were present, leaving
+very few Spaniards in that island. The defenceless state of it induced
+two or three Indians to persuade the rest to rebel, assuring them that
+the Devil had appeared, ordering them <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb245" href="#pb245" name="pb245">245</a>]</span>not to pay tribute to
+the Spaniards, but to retire to the mountains, and erect a chapel,
+where they should worship him, and he would give them every thing they
+required, and defend them from the Spaniards. This was quite sufficient
+to set all the island in a flame, two towns alone remaining faithful to
+the Spaniards. The Alcalde Mayor of Zebu, immediately upon notice of
+this insurrection, sent fifty Spaniards, and one thousand friendly
+Indians to Bohol, who attacked the rebels with great vigour, made
+considerable slaughter, and completely routed them. This ought to have
+undeceived them, but they were obstinate, and fortified themselves on a
+rock, which, however, afforded them little defence, as our people being
+protected by their shields from the arrows and stones they hurled down,
+gained the height, and made great havock among them, making prisoners
+all that were not able to save themselves by flight. The Alcalde Mayor
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb246" href="#pb246" name=
+"pb246">246</a>]</span>hanged some of the ringleaders, and pardoned the
+remainder; but insensible to this favour, they spurned at the proffered
+pardon, and fled to the mountains, to which, six months after, the
+Alcalde returned, and thoroughly quelled the insurrection.</p>
+<p>The bad example of the people of Bohol was followed by those of the
+island of Leyte, and was fomented by an Indian who was not suspected of
+disaffection. This was Bancao, a petty chief of Dimasava, who had
+received Legaspi with great attention, and had accompanied him to Zebu,
+where he was baptized, for which conduct Philip the Second had sent him
+a royal order, granting him many privileges. He had been very faithful
+to the Spaniards in his youth, but turned traitor in his old age. In
+imitation of those of Bohol, he raised an insurrection among the
+Indians in the island of Leyte, so that it became necessary to send a
+force against them. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb247" href="#pb247"
+name="pb247">247</a>]</span>Although they saw the Spaniards were
+superior in numbers to them, they were not dismayed, and received them
+firmly; but in a short time they fled with precipitation. In this
+flight Bancao was killed, having been transfixed by a lance: his head
+was placed on a pole, to serve as a warning to others, which had so
+good an effect, that order was immediately restored.</p>
+<p>This year an expedition was sent to the mountains of Igorrotes,
+where there were mines of gold, and where the Indians were of fairer
+complexion, with the small eyes of the Chinese. It was imagined that
+when Limahon was in Pangasinan, many of his people, pressed by hunger,
+fled to the mountains, and mixed with the inhabitants, from which
+intercourse resulted this cast, so different from the rest.</p>
+<p>This expedition, under charge of Francisco Carri&ntilde;o de Valdes,
+head of the provinces of Pangasinan and Ylocos, marched <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb248" href="#pb248" name="pb248">248</a>]</span>in
+good order seven days, and on the eighth arrived in the town of the
+mines, where the natives received them well; but the Spaniards placed
+too much confidence in them. The Igorrotes, when least expected, rose
+on them, and treacherously murdered the chief of the friendly Indians,
+on which de Valades retired, to wait a better opportunity. The
+following year the expedition was expected to be repeated, but it was
+not, as it became necessary for the troops to march to Cagayan, to
+quell an insurrection among the Indians of that province. Many
+expeditions have since taken place to these mountains, but with such
+ill success, that the Indians of this district remain independent to
+this hour. They, however, trade with the Spaniards in gold, wax, and
+tobacco, in return for cattle; and the Augustine friars have succeeded,
+in converting to Christianity, a few who live in the towns near the
+mountains.</p>
+<p>The Governor persevered in pacific <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb249" href="#pb249" name="pb249">249</a>]</span>measures as much as
+possible, although those measures were deemed disgraceful. He had much
+domestic uneasiness on account of his wife, Dona Catalina Zembrano, who
+had an illicit connection, and was accustomed to steal out from the
+palace to a particular house, where she was at last discovered with her
+lover by Faxardo, who going his rounds through the city, as was his
+custom, from information, no doubt, which he had received, entered into
+the house in which this lady was with her paramour, and found her in a
+situation, which rendered her guilt sufficiently manifest. Don Alonzo,
+a man of high honour, severely felt this injury, and was determined to
+take proper vengeance. He ordered a confessor to be called to her; and
+the ceremony at an end, unmoved by the tears and persuasion of the
+priest to the contrary, he stabbed her with his own hand. The unworthy
+paramour saved his <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb250" href="#pb250"
+name="pb250">250</a>]</span>life by flight, and thus escaped the
+vengeance of the Governor. Don Alonzo soon after fell into a profound
+melancholy, of which he died in two years, and was buried in the church
+of the Franciscans, August, 1624. By his death Don Geronimo de Silva
+succeeded to the military government, and the civil government became
+vested in the Royal Audience. In a short time after, a fleet of seven
+Dutch men of war appeared off Playa Honda, and many of their soldiers
+landed on the island of Corrigidor, and took prisoners or killed such
+Indians as fell in their way. The Governor proceeded against them with
+five galleons and two large galleys, and fell in with them on the coast
+of Playa Honda, when the Dutch attempted to escape; but our commander's
+ship, by superiority of sailing, prevented it, when a warm engagement
+took place, and a Spaniard was killed close to the Governor. It is
+necessary <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb251" href="#pb251" name=
+"pb251">251</a>]</span>to mention this accident, as he thought himself
+in great danger, and was so alarmed by it, that he ordered the ships to
+retire to Cavite, where he was received with the contempt he merited;
+the people imputing the loss of the victory to his cowardice.
+Complaints were made to the Royal Audience, who confined him in the
+fort of Santiago, where he remained until he was released by the
+Governor who succeeded him, <i>ad interim</i>, Don Fernando de Silva,
+knight of the order of Santiago.</p>
+<p>Don Fernando had been in Manila before this time, having there made
+a most honourable matrimonial connection; and having accumulated a good
+fortune, he went with his wife to Mexico, and from thence to Madrid,
+having been sent thither by his near relation, the Viceroy of New
+Spain, Marquis de Cerralbo. Having returned to Mexico and this vacancy
+in the government of Manila occurring, it was <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb252" href="#pb252" name=
+"pb252">252</a>]</span>given to him <i>ad interim</i>, and he arrived
+there in June 1625.</p>
+<p>He was received in Manila with great satisfaction, as they knew he
+was prudent, and well acquainted with these islands: this he had
+sufficiently shewn in the measures he had adopted for the protection of
+our commerce, by means of the ships he had built at Cavite for that
+purpose. He ordered the Alcalde Mayor of Cagayan to land on the island
+of Formosa, and fortify it in that part of Fanchuy which was the
+nearest to Cagayan, in order, with greater facility to oppose the
+Dutch, who, the year before, had raised forts on the opposite side,
+called Tayguan, with the intention of obstructing the commerce of China
+with Manila. The Alcalde Mayor executed his commission, and constructed
+works sufficiently extensive to accommodate the troops, and the
+Dominican friars, who had gone there to convert the natives; and who
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb253" href="#pb253" name=
+"pb253">253</a>]</span>exerted themselves with such zeal, that in a
+short time they built several towns, and were able to number the
+greater part of the natives, among the professors of our faith.
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb254" href="#pb254" name=
+"pb254">254</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch16" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1445" class="label">CHAPTER XVI.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1626.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>Of the Administration of Don Juan Ni&ntilde;o de
+Tabora.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">Don Juan Ni&ntilde;o de Tabora, knight of the order of
+Calatrava, was named as Governor of the Philippines. He embarked for
+his government with six hundred troops, and several officers, who had
+served with him in Flanders, among whom were Don Lorenzo Olaso y
+Ochotegui, who came with the appointment of Colonel. Tabora arrived
+safely at Manila, and entered upon his government on the 29th of June,
+1626. He possessed a fund of military knowledge, which was of great
+importance, at this period, to the Philippines, and <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb255" href="#pb255" name="pb255">255</a>]</span>he
+immediately provided a sufficient force to protect their commerce, and
+secure the respect of their neighbours. In ten months after his
+arrival, he had collected eight large ships of war, four smaller for
+the commerce of Acapulco, and two still smaller for the protection of
+the intercourse with Molucca. With this armament, and with two ships,
+which were expected from New Spain with men and money, he determined to
+attack the Dutch on the island of Formosa; but the arrival of the two
+ships being retarded very considerably, he was not ready to proceed
+with the expedition, until the middle of August. The Royal Audience,
+considering the approach of the monsoon, and apprehensive of the loss
+of the squadron, and that the object of the expedition might be thus
+defeated, represented their fears to the Governor, and passed an order
+that it should not sail. Having no faith, however, in what he
+considered as idle chimeras, Tabora left Cavite, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb256" href="#pb256" name="pb256">256</a>]</span>and
+arrived at Cape Boxeador; where, finding the north winds had set in,
+and that it was impossible to make head against them, after repeated
+unsuccessful attempts, he bore away for Cavite; and the only advantage
+resulting, from his pertinacious opposition to the opinion of the Royal
+Audience, was the relief he sent in some small vessels, to the
+Spaniards in the island of Formosa.</p>
+<p>A vessel soon after arrived from China, and gave the intelligence
+that the Dutch were lying in wait at Macao, for the merchantmen
+expected from Manila in China. The Portuguese requested, that part of
+the armament might be allowed to convoy them, offering to contribute to
+the expenses. The Governor, accordingly, sent with them two large
+galleons, with a patache, ordering the commodore, after he had seen the
+Portuguese safe, to run up the coast from Macao to Sincapura in search
+of the Dutch, wintering at Siam, for which indulgence he <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb257" href="#pb257" name="pb257">257</a>]</span>was
+ordered to make the necessary presents to the King. Don Juan de
+Alcaraz, who was the commodore, punctually obeyed his orders: he
+arrived at Macao, and not meeting with the Dutch, who had quitted it
+precipitately, on notice of his appearance in this quarter, he passed
+on to Siam, where, finding the Dutch protected by the Siamese, he
+burned some of their junks, and made prisoners the ambassadors whom the
+Siamese were accustomed, at certain periods, to send to China, with
+their acknowledgment of the sovereignty of the Emperor. Upon this
+occasion our arms acquired such credit, that, during the whole of this
+government, the Dutch made no further attempt against these
+islands.</p>
+<p>In the year 1628 two ships arrived with the usual supplies from
+Acapulco, and in them came Friar Hernando Guerrero, of the order of St.
+Augustine, Bishop of Cagayan, and the Governor's intended bride,
+Do&ntilde;a Magdalena Zaldivar y Mendoza, <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb258" href="#pb258" name="pb258">258</a>]</span>with whom he had
+entered into a treaty of marriage while at Mexico, and had obtained
+leave from the King for that purpose. The wedding feasts, however, were
+no impediment to the operations of the government. The Moors of Jolo
+continually infested these islands; those, in particular, which were
+the more remote from the capital, were kept in perpetual alarm, and
+nothing was talked of but the depredations committed, and the prisoners
+taken. To chastise these insults, a squadron was sent against Jolo,
+under the command of Don Christoval de Lugo. He arrived safe, and
+landed all his people without any resistance, the Indians having, in a
+cowardly manner, abandoned their town, and retired, with their King, to
+a fort situated on the top of a hill. The Spaniards plundered these
+houses, in which the friendly Indians diligently assisted, enriching
+themselves by the spoils, which consisted of rice, gunpowder,
+brimstone, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb259" href="#pb259" name=
+"pb259">259</a>]</span>small-arms, &amp;c. They did not pursue them to
+the fort on the top of the hill, in which they had taken refuge; but,
+after having completely destroyed the town, they embarked for Manila.
+In passing by the island of Basilan, they landed, burned the principal
+town, and destroyed all the trees, as a punishment for the aid which
+these Indians had afforded to those of Jolo, in the last incursions
+they made.</p>
+<p>The following year, a sacrilege was committed in the cathedral,
+which affected the mind of the Archbishop to that degree, that he died
+of melancholy. He was one of the most devout prelates who had occupied
+the archbishopric. He was interred in the church of St. Augustine.</p>
+<p>After his death, there was a dispute between the ecclesiastical
+Cabildo and the Bishop of Zebu, as to who should succeed <i>ad
+interim</i> to the archbishopric, when the Royal Audience determined in
+favour of the Bishop, conformable to the bull of <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb260" href="#pb260" name="pb260">260</a>]</span>Pius
+V. The Moors in Jolo and Caumocones again commenced their ravages in
+the islands: nothing was secure in the towns on the coasts; neither
+friars, Indians, churches, or ornaments; all were objects of their
+enmity. Notice was, without loss of time, given to the Governor; he
+despatched a fleet, commanded by Don Lorenzo Olaso, for the double
+purpose of making peace with the Indians of Mindanao, as they
+requested, and to retaliate upon those of Jolo. He arrived at Jolo,
+landed his people, and marched up to the fort on the hill, to which, as
+usual, the Indians had retired. The General believed it no difficult
+matter to reduce the fort, and gave orders to attack it accordingly; he
+shewed, in the attack, great personal valour, and acting the part of a
+common soldier, as well as a general, was, with two of his captains,
+killed. As no officer remained to command them, the men retired to
+their ships; and, without doing anything <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb261" href="#pb261" name="pb261">261</a>]</span>else than laying
+waste the country, they returned to Manila in haste, and in disgrace,
+the Moors becoming more insolent than they were before. The Indians of
+the province of Caraga, in Mindanao, observing that the Spaniards were
+unable to subdue their countrymen, put to death some of the friars and
+Spaniards who were living among them, and declared open rebellion in
+most of the towns of the province.&mdash;The remaining friars and
+Spaniards, took refuge in the towns which continued faithful to their
+cause; and, in a short time, relief arriving from Manila, order was
+again restored.</p>
+<p>This year several embassies arrived at Manila: one from Japan from
+the Governor of Nangasaquy; and the King of Saxuma, likewise, sent
+ambassadors, seeking redress for the ravages our galleons had committed
+in the harbour of Siam, on two junks of his nation, and out of which
+had been taken some of the royal merchandize, which they considered a
+great sacrilege, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb262" href="#pb262"
+name="pb262">262</a>]</span>and which had so irritated them, that the
+real object of the embassy was to reconnoitre the place, with a view to
+take vengeance for this insult. A Governor of one of the Chinese
+provinces, sent an embassy to request the continuation of the
+commercial intercourse; and the King of Cambodia, who was at war with
+the King of Siam, sent to request the protection of the Spaniards,
+offering the commerce of his kingdom, and liberty to form a dock for
+the building of ships. The Governor received all these with presents,
+and dismissed them with urbanity and kindness: he accepted the offer of
+the King of Cambodia, and sent some ship-builders for the purpose of
+constructing a vessel there: with them went four Dominicans to preach
+the gospel; but when they arrived, finding the King dead, and little
+disposition in his son, who succeeded him, to admit the catholic
+religion, they all returned to Manila without effecting any thing.</p>
+<p>The Governor, who was determined to <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb263" href="#pb263" name="pb263">263</a>]</span>lose no opportunity
+that offered to build ships, finished one in the port of Cavite; but so
+badly constructed, that, at the commencement of her voyage for
+Acapulco, she foundered in the port: she was, however, hove up, and
+sufficiently repaired to proceed on her voyage the following year. By
+this means, and the arrival here of the other ships in 1631, no ship
+remained in Acapulco to send to the Philippines; and the Viceroy of
+Mexico despatched two pataches with the ordinary relief. In one of
+these came Don Francisco Roxas y O&ntilde;ate, Oidor of Mexico, as
+inspector of the Royal Audience, and other tribunals; and his office to
+continue two years. He was well received, and the Governor supported
+his authority whilst he lived; by means of which, he made his visit
+pleasant, although he suspended two Oidors. His Excellency, on the 22d
+of July 1632, died of a dysentery, occasioned by being exposed to the
+rain and sun, during his visits to <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb264"
+href="#pb264" name="pb264">264</a>]</span>and from Cavite, in the
+performance of his office, in which he was extremely diligent, having
+made a bridge over the river of Manila, repaired the fortifications of
+the town, and constructed several works in Cavite.</p>
+<p>Don Lorenzo Olaso had been named by the Viceroy of Mexico to succeed
+him <i lang="la">pro tempore</i>. Nothing particular occurred under his
+administration, which only lasted a year, when Don Juan Zerezo of
+Salamanca was appointed to succeed as Governor <i lang="la">ad
+interim</i>. Immediately on his arrival at Manila, with a view to
+repress the insults of the Moors, and on the representation of the
+Jesuits, he determined to form a garrison at Zamboanga. He appointed
+Don Juan de Chaves to the command, with an adequate force, and orders,
+after destroying the towns of the Moors, to erect a fort in the
+situation which Friar Vera had pitched upon, a little distant from the
+port of Caldera, where it was necessary to maintain <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb265" href="#pb265" name="pb265">265</a>]</span>a
+detachment to guard the shipping. This situation is most beautiful;
+but, having no water, the defect was supplied by digging a channel from
+the river, through which the water flows in great abundance, and,
+passing by the wall of the fort, falls into the sea. The first stone of
+the fort was laid on the 23d of June, 1635. Many of the Spaniards
+opposed this plan under different pretexts, and experience has shewn
+what little purpose this fort has answered, its only use being to
+enrich one military man, who is Governor for three years, and who draws
+twenty or thirty thousand dollars profit from the supplies furnished
+the soldiers. The Moors, not in the least checked by the fort of
+Zamboanga, have continued, to this hour, committing the same ravages as
+before; and the Indians, who are each taxed a measure of rice for its
+maintenance, have received neither security or benefit from it.</p>
+<p>It has been too justly observed by <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb266" href="#pb266" name="pb266">266</a>]</span>Se&ntilde;or
+Solorzano, that whatever is established with a view to benefit the
+Indians, universally fails of attaining that end; nor is this to be
+wondered at, as every regulation brought forward with this avowed
+intention is always so contrived, as to contribute not to the advantage
+of the oppressed Indian, but solely to that of the person exercising
+the chief authority. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb267" href="#pb267"
+name="pb267">267</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch17" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1507" class="label">CHAPTER XVII.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1635.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Sebastian
+Corcuera.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">On the 25th of June, 1635, Don Sebastian Hurtado de
+Corcuera, who had been Governor of Panama, took possession of this
+government, and the same day Se&ntilde;or Guerrero took possession of
+the archbishopric, although the bulls had not yet arrived. Dissensions
+immediately begun between these two, originating between the Dominicans
+and bearded friars, respecting the division of their provinces, and on
+which account his Excellency was determined to be revenged of the
+Archbishop, the very first opportunity. An occasion very soon presented
+itself: the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb268" href="#pb268" name=
+"pb268">268</a>]</span>Archbishop having taken a female slave from an
+artilleryman, because he had an illicit intercourse with her, the
+artilleryman met her one day in the street, and, for some unknown
+cause, murdered her, taking refuge in the church of St. Augustine.</p>
+<p>The Governor ordered the troops to seize him in the church, without
+first applying to the friars; they obeyed their orders, seized the
+criminal, and delivered him up to their commanding officer, who
+sentenced him to death. The sentence was executed in front of the
+church of St. Augustine, a place which had never been used for public
+punishment: the Archbishop attempted to prevent the violation of the
+church privileges, but his attempt proved ineffectual.</p>
+<p>During the disputes between the Governor and the Archbishop, the
+Moors were ravaging our towns, and for the space of eight months
+committed horrible atrocities. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb269"
+href="#pb269" name="pb269">269</a>]</span>His Excellency determined to
+go in person to chastise them. He sailed from Manila with a squadron on
+the 2d of February, 1637, and having arrived at Lamitan, the residence
+of Corralat, petty sovereign of Mindanao, he possessed himself of it
+with ease. Corralat retired to a hill well defended by batteries, and
+the best troops he had. The Governor attacked him, but after losing
+many Spaniards, he sounded a retreat. The day following he renewed the
+attack by a road more accessible, when he possessed himself of the
+fort, and made great slaughter of the Moors, who threw themselves
+headlong over the precipice in their confusion. The Governor now
+retired to Zamboanga, where he received the chief of Buhayen, and those
+of the island of Basilan, upon both of whom their fears had operated to
+beg for peace, promising to consider Corralat as a common enemy, and
+receive Friars into their dominions. <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb270" href="#pb270" name="pb270">270</a>]</span></p>
+<p>From Zamboanga he passed to Jolo, and sat down before the famous
+hill fort of the island, and which the Spaniards had never been able to
+possess themselves of. He found it, however, so well fortified, that
+after attempting to batter it, he was obliged to have recourse to some
+other mode of attack. He prepared five mines, and springing them at the
+time of assault, he blew up part of the works, with fifty men; but the
+Spaniards advanced so slow, that the Moors had time to recover
+themselves, and returning to the charge, repulsed them effectually. The
+next day two more mines were sprung, which did great damage. The
+Spaniards then advanced rapidly to the remaining fortification, but
+behind the rampart which had been blown up, contrary to their
+expectation, they found another work erected, and by which means they
+were repulsed. The Governor observing the little effect produced by
+these assaults, determined to surround the <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb271" href="#pb271" name=
+"pb271">271</a>]</span>hill, though a league in circumference, with a
+wall and forts, converting the siege into a strict blockade. This
+measure, however, proved by no means adequate to the end in view, the
+besieged defending themselves with great resolution, and destroying
+numbers of the assailants. It was, therefore, resolved to construct a
+battery on a position completely commanding the hill. The Moors on this
+were desirous of capitulating, but the Governor commanded them to
+surrender at discretion. Thinking these terms harsh, they became
+desperate, and assaulted the Spanish camp; but not being able to force
+it, they took the opportunity of quitting the hill by the back part of
+it, which had been left for the time lightly guarded.</p>
+<p>His Excellency found himself in possession of the enemies position,
+and all their riches, with the Queen and her nephew, Tancun. The Queen
+requested permission to bring the King and his chiefs into the
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb272" href="#pb272" name=
+"pb272">272</a>]</span>presence of the Governor; he consented, and she
+took that opportunity of escaping. The Governor then sent Tancun for
+the same purpose, and he returned with the keys of the royal coffers;
+but by the carelessness of the guard, being left too much at liberty,
+he contrived to get possession of all the treasure, with which he
+secured his retreat. His Excellency leaving a garrison of two hundred
+Spaniards, and two hundred Pampangos in Jolo, returned to Manila, where
+he was received with great honours, as conqueror of Jolo and Mindanao.
+It is undeniable that Se&ntilde;or Corcuera reduced the inhabitants of
+Jolo and Mindanao, and would have retained his conquest, had greater
+harmony subsisted between the Jesuits, and the commanders of the
+different garrisons. He was successful as a soldier, but unfortunate in
+his choice of the means to secure his acquisition. The dissensions
+between the Jesuits and the military rose to such a pitch, that
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb273" href="#pb273" name=
+"pb273">273</a>]</span>at last all the positions were abandoned, and
+all our exertions, and sacrifices of men and resources, rendered of no
+avail.</p>
+<p>By the year 1639, the number of Chinese in these islands had
+increased to thirty thousand, most of them cultivators in Calamba and
+in Bi&ntilde;an. Among these began a disaffection, which spreading to
+those of Santa Cruz, Parian, and Manila, they at last converted the
+church of St. Peter Macati into a kind of strong hold, in which they
+established their head-quarters. The Governor sent against them two
+hundred Spaniards, and a large body of Indians, who easily dislodged
+them from this position. Dispersed into separate bands, they plundered
+the houses of the Spaniards, and some Indian towns, committing great
+atrocities. The Spaniards followed them, making dreadful havock among
+them, from November 1639, to March following, when being reduced in
+number to seven thousand, they surrendered. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb274" href="#pb274" name="pb274">274</a>]</span>Very
+few of our people were killed, but Manila was reduced to great
+distress, by the loss of so many of its useful class of citizens, as
+unquestionably the Chinese were. The Indians fortunately had remained
+perfectly tranquil, which was rather to be attributed to their fixed
+hatred of the Chinese, than their attachment to the Spaniards.</p>
+<p>In the year 1642, the Archbishop Guerreo visited his diocese, and in
+the harbour of Naryan, in Mindoro, a pirate seized his vessel, with all
+his equipage, he himself, with great difficulty, saving himself by
+flight. This disaster had such an effect upon him, that he died on the
+2d of July at Manila, and was buried in the church of St.
+Augustine.</p>
+<p>The kingdom of Portugal, which had been united to the crown of
+Castile in 1640, shook off the Spanish yoke, and electing the Duke of
+Braganza King, the possessions of that nation in India immediately
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb275" href="#pb275" name=
+"pb275">275</a>]</span>followed the example of the mother country, and
+declared for that family. This year the Dutch reduced Malacca, and by
+this conquest, and the separation of the Spanish and Portuguese
+interest, it was apprehended they would renew their attempts on the
+Philippines, which had now, for many years, remained unmolested by
+them. This conjecture proved true; they commenced their operations by
+stationing, for two successive years, a squadron in the route of the
+ships from Acapulco, but the Jesuits, in the island of Samar,
+frustrated their design. They then planned the capture of the island of
+Formosa, with a view to interrupt the commerce to China, and as a
+ladder for the conquest of the Philippines. They proceeded on the
+enterprize in the year 1642, with four ships, a patache, and several
+smaller vessels, and in a few days succeeded in their object, the
+island having surrendered. Great consternation prevailed <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb276" href="#pb276" name="pb276">276</a>]</span>at
+Manila on information of this conquest, as it was expected that the
+Dutch would follow up their success by an attack on that capital; but
+the glory of repelling these intruders was reserved for the successor
+of Se&ntilde;or Corcuera. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb277" href=
+"#pb277" name="pb277">277</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch18" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1550" class="label">CHAPTER XVIII.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1644.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Diego Faxardo.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">Don Diego Faxardo, Knight of the order of Santiago,
+took possession of his government on the 11th of August, 1644, and
+immediately gave proof of his unrelenting disposition by his conduct
+towards Se&ntilde;or Corcuera, by confining him in the fort of
+Santiago, in which he remained five years.</p>
+<p>The new Governor found these islands infested by Dutch squadrons,
+and to enable himself to meet them with effect, he deemed it necessary
+to unite the whole of the Spanish force, dispersed through the
+different garrisons. He directed the officer in command at Zamboanga,
+to enter into <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb278" href="#pb278" name=
+"pb278">278</a>]</span>an amicable arrangement with Corralat, King of
+Mindanao, which was effected very satisfactorily, through the mediation
+of a friar. He likewise directed the officer commanding at Jolo to
+adopt similar measures with the King of that island, and evacuating all
+the forts, to bring all the Spaniards to Manila; but this was not to be
+effected so easily, Salicala, hereditary Prince of the kingdom, having
+gone to Batavia, soliciting assistance from the Dutch, to drive the
+Spaniards from the island. They, however, spared him only two ships,
+with which trifling aid, having made many attempts against our
+principal position, which was defended vigorously by Don Estevan
+Ugalde, a valiant Biscayan, the Dutch retired to Batavia, promising the
+Moors to return next year, with a more effective force. The Jesuit
+friar was, in the mean time, commissioned to make peace with them;
+which he effected on very advantageous terms. Jolo being <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb279" href="#pb279" name="pb279">279</a>]</span>thus
+evacuated, the Dutch arrived at the appointed time with the promised
+assistance; and finding that the Spaniards had retired to Zamboanga,
+they determined on attempting the capture of the fort of Caldera, in
+Mindanao, but they were repulsed with such loss, that they made a rapid
+retreat to Batavia.</p>
+<p>The following year, the Dutch again appeared in these seas, with a
+squadron of twelve ships, when eleven of them remaining on the coast of
+Batan, the commodore came forward alone, to reconnoitre Cavite.
+Se&ntilde;or Corcuera, who was in confinement in the fort, as already
+mentioned, immediately saw the error the Dutch commander had committed,
+in not making the attack with his whole force, while the place was in
+an unguarded and defenceless state. Every advantage was taken of the
+error, and Cavite was furnished, without delay, with the necessary
+reinforcements, and supplies of ammunition and provisions. On
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb280" href="#pb280" name=
+"pb280">280</a>]</span>the third day the Dutch squadron made their
+attack, but the Governor, Andras Azaldegui, a very active man, defended
+the place so effectually, that great slaughter ensued, and the Dutch
+General received a wound, of which he died. On this they retired, and
+disembarked in Pampanga, where the Alcalde Mayor of the province having
+collected six hundred Pampangos, and fortified himself as well as
+possible in the convent of Abucay, the Dutch assaulted him, when the
+Indians fled in such disorder, and with such precipitation, that four
+hundred of them were killed in the pursuit. The Dutch not deeming it
+prudent to remove far from their ships, returned on board, and
+disembarked a second time in the town of Samal, where the Spaniards
+having gone to Manila, the Indians alone remained, who repulsed them,
+and compelled them to take refuge in their ships.</p>
+<p>They then took their station close to <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb281" href="#pb281" name="pb281">281</a>]</span>Mareveles, to
+intercept our commerce, and while here they had information that a
+galleon, built at Leyte, was on her way to Manila. They despatched six
+ships to take her, but the commander understanding that the Dutch were
+in these seas, put into a harbour, and fortifying the entrance with
+batteries, remained perfectly secure from all insult, and the Dutch
+deeming the attempt unjustifiable, returned to Batavia, without reaping
+any advantage from their expedition.</p>
+<p>Salicala, son of the King of Jolo, a turbulent character,
+notwithstanding the peace he had concluded with the Spaniards, begun to
+infest our seas with a squadron, which committed great depredations in
+every quarter; and Cachile, Lord of Tup Tup, in Borneo, having followed
+his example, it was found necessary to send against them an adequate
+force. The Spaniards encountered the squadron of Cachile between
+Masbate and Burias, and <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb282" href=
+"#pb282" name="pb282">282</a>]</span>an engagement took place, in which
+he was killed, and his fleet dispersed. Immediately on this Salicala
+retired to Jolo, where his attention became sufficiently occupied, in
+disputes respecting the succession to the throne. The Moors of Borneo,
+imitating the conduct of the Indians of Jolo in their piracies, the
+Governor sent Major Monforte with orders to chastise them severely, as
+a warning to the rest. Monforte landed in Borneo, burning and
+destroying all the towns within his reach, together with great
+quantities of provisions, and a number of vessels, and making about two
+hundred prisoners, thus retaliating on them for their piratical attacks
+on us. Exclusive of these continual depredations of the Moors and
+Dutch, the provinces in Luzon were by no means in a tranquil state.</p>
+<p>A commotion, likewise, was begun in Palapag, by murdering the Jesuit
+friar, who was the curate of the place; and, to <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb283" href="#pb283" name=
+"pb283">283</a>]</span>enhance the criminality of the action, and
+comprehend every one in the rebellion, Sumoroy, who was the assassin,
+was for two days parading the town, avowing publicly that he killed the
+friar; and, setting at liberty two insurgents, whom the Jesuits had
+confined, he ordered the people to plunder the church and convent: from
+this source, the insurrection spread through the whole island. The
+Camarines imitated the conduct of the people of Palapag, in every thing
+but the murder of the friars. The island of Zebu, likewise,
+notwithstanding its garrison, wavered in its loyalty; and, indeed, all
+the islands were ripe for rebellion: the people of Caraga, however,
+were the most violent, having murdered many Spaniards and Friars. There
+is no question that the Bisayas would have been lost on this occasion,
+had not a stop been put to these atrocities in due time.</p>
+<p>The Governor sent a force to Palapag, and ordered that four hundred
+Indians of <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb284" href="#pb284" name=
+"pb284">284</a>]</span>Lutao, who had been lately converted from
+Mahometanism, should be incorporated with this force sent from Manila,
+and jointly attack the rebels. The Jesuit friar, Vincente Damian, took
+compassion on the misguided Indians, and attempted to persuade them to
+return to their obedience; but, thinking themselves strong enough to
+overcome the Spaniards, they would not listen to reason, and fortified
+themselves on a hill, which Sumoroy had made his head quarters. Captain
+Roxas commanded the Spaniards, Don Andres Azaldeguy, who was the proper
+commanding officer, having had orders from the government, to go and
+secure the property, in a ship which had been lost on the coast of
+Camarines. Roxas was a man of ability and bravery, and came to the
+resolution of assaulting the hill in the night, when the rebels would
+be less on their guard. The Spaniards arrived at the outposts, when
+they were discovered, and notice given to Sumoroy. The precipitation
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb285" href="#pb285" name=
+"pb285">285</a>]</span>with which the Indians fled is incredible: it
+resembled that of a flock of goats, our people following them, and
+making great slaughter. Sumoroy attempted to escape; but his people
+killed him, with the view of ingratiating themselves with the
+Spaniards, and delivered up his head to Roxas, who placed it on a pole
+as a warning to the rest. The friars being now able to return to their
+duty, in the respective towns, soon reduced the discontented to
+obedience.</p>
+<p>The ringleader of the rebellion in Caraga was an Indian, named
+Dabao, who was not in the least suspected of disaffection. He entered
+one day into the fort, bringing with him eight men with their hands
+bound, apparently with the view of surrendering them; but yet, at the
+same time, so loosely bound, as to escape when they chose. When the
+Spanish officer came out to receive them, Dabao struck him on the head
+with his <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb286" href="#pb286" name=
+"pb286">286</a>]</span>sword, and the eight men, immediately releasing
+themselves, unexpectedly attacked the people in the fort. They made
+such carnage, that only one friar and five soldiers escaped, by
+throwing themselves from the wall, and retiring to the convent, where
+they fortified themselves. The Indians immediately forsook the town and
+fled to the mountains, when the friar, and the Spaniards who were in
+the convent, built a boat, and retired along the coast to another town,
+to which the insurrection had not spread.</p>
+<p>The Governor sent them relief from Manila, and offered a pardon to
+those who should return to their towns, and their allegiance as before.
+The Spaniards, however, broke their word, and hanged many of the
+ringleaders.</p>
+<p>On the day of Saint Andrew, which was the anniversary of the victory
+the Spaniards obtained over Limahon, about eight o'clock at night, an
+earthquake happened, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb287" href="#pb287"
+name="pb287">287</a>]</span>which destroyed almost all Manila, with the
+exception of the church and convent of St. Augustine. The public
+edifices, in particular, were nearly all thrown down and destroyed, and
+more than six hundred people buried in the ruins: some were found alive
+between the stones and the wood, who had remained there even three
+days. The calamity reached the towns of the islands; in Cagayan, a hill
+was rased from its foundation, and fell on a town, burying in its fall
+all the inhabitants. In some parts the earth sunk; and, in others,
+torrents of sand burst out, overwhelming man and beast. Many other
+extraordinary changes occurred in the course of sixty days, during
+which a succession of earthquakes prevailed. The people of Manila left
+the city to live in huts in the fields, until it was ascertained that
+they might return in safety to their houses. It was said that the image
+of St. Francis, placed in the house of an Indian of Dilao, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb288" href="#pb288" name=
+"pb288">288</a>]</span>sweated most copiously during this calamity, and
+shed abundance of tears; in consequence, he was elected patron of
+earthquakes, and is designated St. Francis of Tears.</p>
+<p>As a proof of that harshness which characterized Se&ntilde;or
+Faxardo, it will be sufficient to mention his conduct to Christoval
+Romero, whom the Viceroy of Mexico had sent, to bring him intelligence
+of the state of these islands, two years having elapsed without the
+usual ship having appeared at Acapulco. He arrived at the port of
+Lampon, and, understanding that the Dutch were infesting these seas, he
+landed the silver, and despatched it to Manila, in order that he might
+with less risk get round. Soon after he had sent away the silver, the
+Dutch arrived, and entered the port with their launches. Romero being
+far inferior in force to the enemy, burnt his vessel, as he saw no
+chance of saving it, and came to Manila by land. Everybody <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb289" href="#pb289" name=
+"pb289">289</a>]</span>considered this man as entitled to great praise
+for his conduct on the occasion, and expected that he would be well
+received and rewarded; but the rigorous Governor, on the plea that the
+burning of the launch was an act of cowardice, imprisoned him, and
+condemned him to lose his head. All Manila clamoured against this
+sentence; and the object of it appealed to the Royal Audience, who
+revoked it. This rigour of the Governor was imputed to his not having
+been duly bribed by Romero; but nothing of that nature could be
+absolutely proved against him.</p>
+<p>About this time, the hospital or college of St. Juan de Letran was
+founded by Juan Geronimo Romero, who compassionating the situation of
+unfortunate orphans, took them into his house, and carefully brought
+them up. His Majesty being informed of this praise-worthy conduct, by a
+royal order protected the establishment; but granted so little in aid
+of it, that recourse was necessarily <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb290" href="#pb290" name="pb290">290</a>]</span>had to the
+contributions of the well disposed, in order to render it of more
+general use. It was, at length, removed to a spot behind the city: the
+boys were allowed a blue coat, cap, &amp;c., and were supported, as in
+others, with the additional aid of a college pension, to enable them to
+pursue their studies at the university; the college having no
+establishment of this nature. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb291"
+href="#pb291" name="pb291">291</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch19" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1611" class="label">CHAPTER XIX.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1653.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Sabiniano Manrique de
+Lara.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">The ship San Francisco Xavier arrived in Cavite in
+July, 1653, bringing the new Governor, Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara;
+the Archbishop of Manila, Don Miguel Poblete; the Bishop of Ylocos, Don
+Rodrigo de Cordinas, a Dominican; and the Oidor, Don Juan Bolivar. The
+Governor immediately, as was usual, sat in judgment on his predecessor,
+who, apprehensive that he might be deprived of his liberty, retired
+into the college of Jesuits, securing his personal safety in this
+sacred <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb292" href="#pb292" name=
+"pb292">292</a>]</span>asylum. The Archbishop fixed the month of March
+for a jubilee, on which occasion an immense concourse of people
+assembled, and he, with great solemnity, invoked the blessing of the
+Almighty on these islands.</p>
+<p>Many calamities occurred during this administration, such as the
+small-pox, famine, and a dreadful earthquake, which ruined many
+edifices, and did much injury; but what affected the Governor much more
+than all these, was the revolt of the Indians and Chinese, and the
+ravages committed by the Moors of Mindanao. The Spaniards were at peace
+with Corrolat, King of Mindanao, and he appeared perfectly satisfied;
+but the chief men, turbulent and warlike, urged him to break it.</p>
+<p>The Governor sent two Jesuits and some Spaniards, in the nature of
+an embassy, to strengthen our existing amity with the King: when,
+without any respect for their characters as ambassadors, and, listening
+to the representations of his nephew <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb293" href="#pb293" name="pb293">293</a>]</span>Balatamay, he
+murdered them all, and excused his atrocity to the Governor of
+Zamboanga, throwing the blame on his nephew, whom, he alleged, he could
+not punish, on account of his great power in the state.</p>
+<p>In the letter which he wrote to the Governor of Manila, he laid the
+blame on the Jesuit, who was at the head of the embassy; thus
+indicating his intention, by these contradictory falsehoods, of gaining
+time to draw to his party the King of Jolo, and other chiefs of the
+Moluccas.</p>
+<p>Don Francisco Esteyvar, who was Governor of Zamboanga, despatched
+against him an armament of ten carracoas, whose rowers were Indians of
+Lutao, and who, though they had been converted to Christianity, felt
+for Corrolat as a countryman. Nothing could persuade them to row
+against the Moors, excusing themselves under various pretexts; and,
+although they could have been compelled, yet Don <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb294" href="#pb294" name=
+"pb294">294</a>]</span>Fernando Bobadilla, who commanded the
+expedition, fearing that they would desert him in the time he most
+wanted them, and not desirous of exposing himself to such a risk,
+returned to Zamboanga.</p>
+<p>As the Spaniards had delayed the chastisement of the Moors for the
+murder of their ambassadors, they were induced, as might be expected,
+to commit still greater ravages than those they had yet been guilty of,
+and Don Sabiniano de Lara sent against them a considerable squadron,
+under the command of a man, valiant in the cabinet, but who proved the
+reverse in the field. He repeatedly showed a disposition to attack the
+Moors; but, on various pretexts, avoided coming to an engagement, and
+at last retired to Zebu, abandoning the cause, and leaving the Moors to
+return quietly to their own country. The Governor of Zamboanga,
+however, acting a different part, and determined to chastise the Moors,
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb295" href="#pb295" name=
+"pb295">295</a>]</span>collected some vessels, and retaliated on their
+country, the ravages they had committed on ours.</p>
+<p>A slight disturbance, about this time, took place in the province of
+Pampanga, the cause of which was as follows: the late Governor having
+ordered a ship to be built in Camboxa, sent all the necessary workmen
+in a vessel, which he patched up, and launched for the purpose. After
+having completed their work, and when they were on their return from
+Camboxa to Manila, they encountered a storm, so violent, that the
+vessel was wrecked, and almost all the people perished. The galleon,
+San Francisco Xavier, was lost in the same storm on the coast of Samar,
+and two other ships which were going to Acapulco were forced back. The
+galleon, La Concepcion, too, was so unfortunate as to be driven back
+twice, having suffered severely in her rigging. To repair these losses,
+it was necessary that a greater quantity <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb296" href="#pb296" name="pb296">296</a>]</span>of wood should be cut
+than was customary, and that with unusual expedition. The Indians
+suffered always severely in these undertakings, as they were obliged to
+leave their towns for the mountains, where, their wages being very
+small, and their treatment very bad, they too often fell a sacrifice to
+sickness. The overseer of the present wood cutting was a man of great
+severity, and, as the wood was to be cut with all despatch, he had
+recourse, with the poor Indians, to measures which humanity could not
+justify, in order to expedite the work. Resisting this oppressive
+conduct, they mutinied, and the mutiny extended through all the towns,
+although they did not behave with disrespect to the church or friars.
+To quell this sedition before it took a wider range, the Governor took
+up his residence in Macabebe, which is the first town in the province,
+from Manila, taking with him some troops, and ordering into his
+presence some of the ringleaders. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb297"
+href="#pb297" name="pb297">297</a>]</span>The Indians, naturally timid,
+had already repented of this disturbance, when the friars interfering,
+it was completely quelled, and the principal ringleader, an Indian
+named Maniago, was conveyed to Manila, being considered as too
+dangerous an inhabitant of the province.</p>
+<p>The bad example of those in Pampanga, induced the Indians of
+Pangasinan to rebel, electing as their King an Indian, called Marlong.
+They murdered the Alcalde Mayor of the province, with all his family,
+and, upon this being known in Manila, the Governor sent troops by sea
+and land to quell the sedition; but the Dominican friars possessed such
+power over the Indians, that they were restored to their duty without
+firing one gun; and their King, Marlong, was delivered up and hanged
+immediately.</p>
+<p>When the Indians of Pangasinan began their rebellion, they had sent
+emissaries to the provinces of Cagayan, Ylocos, and <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb298" href="#pb298" name=
+"pb298">298</a>]</span>Zambales. In this last they made little
+progress, but in Ylocos, an Indian called Manzano, headed the
+rebellion, and, having collected a number of malcontents, he attacked
+the Spaniards, murdered the Friar Bacarra, and ill treated the Bishop
+Cardinas, on which the Alcalde Mayor and some friars fled to Manila;
+but the province of Pangasinan being by this time reduced to
+subjection, the troops were sent against Manzano, and soon reduced him
+likewise; and the ringleaders of both were executed.</p>
+<p>The civil wars of China were the cause of the conquest of that
+country by the Tartars. A Chinese named Ly, having urged the provinces
+remote from the court to revolt, and meeting with no opposition,
+arrived at the capital (Pekin), on which occasion, either from treason
+or cowardice, all abandoned the Emperor, who, seeing himself thus
+forsaken, cut off, according to their usual custom, the head of his
+daughter, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb299" href="#pb299" name=
+"pb299">299</a>]</span>that she might not fall into the hands of the
+rebels, and afterwards hanged himself on a tree, to avoid a similar
+disgrace.</p>
+<p>All acknowledged the authority of Ly, except the army, which had
+been opposed to the Tartars, and which, fearing the result of this
+rebellion, made peace with them, and they united against the common
+enemy, Ly, whom they soon drove from Pekin. Nothing more was ever heard
+of this rebellion; but, the Tartars having by this means got into the
+interior of China, though they met with some opposition, yet, finally,
+they reduced the whole of the empire, and it continues still under the
+Tartar dynasty.</p>
+<p>A poor Chinese, who had fled from Macao to Manila, where he was
+baptized by the name of Nicolas, and where he became a shop-keeper,
+afterwards went to Japan, where he married; but finding that he did not
+acquire riches quick enough, he <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb300"
+href="#pb300" name="pb300">300</a>]</span>entered the Chinese army,
+where he rose very high, being appointed General against the rebels.
+Zunchin, who was the last Emperor of the Chinese race, having hanged
+himself, as already noticed, Nicolas sided with the Tartars, by whom he
+was apparently well received. The Tartar Emperor heaped favours upon
+him, and named him as one of his tributary monarchs, under the title of
+Pignan, which signifies, conqueror of the south. By these means he
+lulled him into security; and having at last imprisoned him and all his
+family, completed his treachery by blowing him, and the greater part of
+them, up with gunpowder.</p>
+<p>His son, Cogseng, after this disgraceful transaction, turned pirate,
+and sufficiently revenged the death of his father by ravaging the
+Chinese coasts and islands. He was the conqueror of the island of
+Formosa, and the first who triumphed over <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb301" href="#pb301" name="pb301">301</a>]</span>the arms of
+Europeans. The Dutch, at this time, were complete masters of the
+island, they possessed two thousand Europeans, with sufficient
+artillery and ships; when hearing that the Chinese intended to attack
+them, they united all their forces in Tayguan; but the pirate, who came
+with about one hundred thousand men, landed on the opposite coast of
+the island, and immediately entered on the cultivation of the soil. A
+short time after, he invested the fort of Tayguan, and the Dutch
+capitulated, after a seven months siege, by which they were allowed to
+leave the island, with the ships they had in the port.</p>
+<p>Cogseng, elated with this success, determined to become master of
+the Philippines, for which purpose he sent the Friar Victorio Riccio, a
+Dominican, with the title of his Ambassador, to Manila, with a letter
+to the Governor, in which he required him to recognize him as
+Sovereign, and <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb302" href="#pb302" name=
+"pb302">302</a>]</span>pay him tribute, threatening, if he refused, to
+ravage his coasts with his fleet. On the 18th of May, 1662, the friar
+arrived on this embassy at Manila, and delivered his letter with great
+secrecy, which, however, was not long withheld from the public. The
+Governor without delay began to levy troops, repair the fortifications,
+and <span class="corr" id="xd19e1670" title=
+"Source: recal">recall</span> all the forces to the capital; and in
+order to be as secure as possible, he sent away all the Chinese
+merchants, and others that were established in the islands. Upon this
+being known, it was whispered that the Governor intended to decapitate
+all the Chinese, who, being naturally cowards, believed the knife
+already at their throats, and retired to the mountains, from whence
+some passed, with great risk, in small boats to Formosa. The day on
+which the Governor called the Chinese chiefs before him, in order to
+intimate to them that they must retire, the remaining Chinese believing
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb303" href="#pb303" name=
+"pb303">303</a>]</span>that they were all to be murdered, took up arms;
+but the Dominicans had sufficient influence to prevail on them to
+remain quiet. The Governor now sent back Friar Riccio to Cogseng with
+an answer to his letter, but, on Riccio's arrival, he found the pirate
+dead of a fever, Manila being by this means released from the danger
+with which she was threatened. The Chinese who had fled to Formosa,
+circulated a thousand calumnies, which would have cost Friar Riccio his
+life, if he had not been saved by the son of Cogseng, who had succeeded
+his father in power; but not possessing the warlike spirit of his
+father, he sent an Ambassador to Manila, to make a treaty of amity and
+commerce with the Spaniards. Although the expedition of Cogseng had not
+reached Manila, the place of its destination, the effects of it had
+fallen very heavy on the islands, as all the churches and convents
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb304" href="#pb304" name=
+"pb304">304</a>]</span>near Manila were destroyed, to prevent the enemy
+from converting them into military stations.</p>
+<p>The Governor of Ternate had abandoned that station, by no means easy
+to be recovered, as the garrison was, in its retreat to Manila,
+accompanied by the Indians, called Mahhicas, who were the best friends
+to the Spanish cause, and who were then settled at the mouth of the
+river Marigondon, where their descendants remain to this hour. The
+garrisons too of Calamianes and Zamboanga evacuated these stations; and
+as they had always been a check on the Moors of Jolo and Mindanao,
+opportunities were by this means offered of committing with impunity
+such ravages in the Bisayas, that the friars were compelled to abandon
+the province of Calamianes.</p>
+<p>Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara had governed these islands with great
+prudence, but notwithstanding this, several articles of <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb305" href="#pb305" name=
+"pb305">305</a>]</span>impeachment were preferred against him, and he
+was fined seventy thousand dollars. On appealing, however, to the
+council of the Indies, the sentence was reversed, and the fine
+remitted; but disgusted with the world, he retired to Malaga, his
+native country, and took the monastic habit. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb306" href="#pb306" name="pb306">306</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div id="ch20" class="div1 chapter"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1685" class="label">CHAPTER XX.</h2>
+<h2 class="main">ANNO DOM. 1663.</h2>
+<div class="argument">
+<p class="first"><i>The Administration of Don Diego Salcedo.</i></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first">Don Diego de Salcedo not being able, by the prevalence
+of the south-west-monsoon, to reach Manila by the ordinary route of the
+straits of Bernardino, he made Cagayan, where he landed, and travelled
+across the island to the city, and took possession of his government in
+September, 1663. Immediately on his arrival, he held out every
+encouragement to commerce, and preparation was made for sending the
+usual ship to Acapulco as early in the season as possible, in order to
+avoid those misfortunes which had too frequently taken place.
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb307" href="#pb307" name=
+"pb307">307</a>]</span></p>
+<p>This conduct of the Governor at first gave great satisfaction to the
+merchants of Manila; but they began very soon to discover his diligence
+was directed only to his own individual benefit, or that of his
+friends, as due care had been taken by them to buy up all the best
+goods, leaving in the market only those of inferior quality; and that
+no opportunity might be afforded to the merchants to procure a fresh
+supply of the different articles from the coast, he despatched the ship
+before the coasters could possibly arrive. By this means almost all the
+commerce of Acapulco, for that season, centered in him and his friends.
+About this time the news arrived of the death of Philip the Fourth, and
+the Archbishop was attacked with protracted illness, which ended in
+extreme debility, of which he died, 1667. The attention of Salcedo had
+been completely occupied by the violent disputes, which, during the
+whole period of his government, <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb308"
+href="#pb308" name="pb308">308</a>]</span>subsisted between him and the
+ecclesiastical authorities, and which terminated in the Commissary of
+the Inquisition of Mexico ordering him to be seized, and conveyed on
+board the patache destined for Acapulco, in which ship he died,
+1669.</p>
+<p class="trailer xd19e1700">END OF VOL. I.</p>
+<p><span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.273" href="#pb2.273" name=
+"pb2.273">273</a>]</span></p>
+</div>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="back">
+<div id="notes" class="div1 notes"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divHead">
+<h2 id="xd19e1705" class="main">NOTES TO VOLUME I.</h2>
+</div>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p id="n1" class="first"><span class="sc">Note I</span>.&mdash;Page
+6.</p>
+<p>Were it not that we have this strong corroborative evidence of the
+veracity of other travellers on this subject, we should be inclined to
+attach a degree of impossibility to the existence of an European power
+of the first distinction, in an insular situation, similar to that of
+the Philippines, established there for nearly three centuries; yet
+through the whole of that period incessantly exposed to the inroads and
+depredations of the surrounding savage nations. But in the perusal of
+the following pages it will appear sufficiently manifest that the
+system of colonization pursued by the Spanish monarchy. From the first
+discovery of the New World, and without little, if any, amelioration,
+practised at this time, is least of all calculated for either the
+extension of permanent national dominion, the enlargement of the human
+mind, or the general dissemination of commercial industry. The
+discovery of the Cape of Good Hope and America produced a revolution
+among the European nations, which, aided by the phenomenon of the
+magnetic needle, stimulated the human mind to exertions far more
+arduous than had been effected by the Crusades; but the same spirit
+that animated Peter the Hermit seems to have presided over the counsels
+of <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.274" href="#pb2.274" name=
+"pb2.274">274</a>]</span>the Spanish monarchy and directed its
+researches. To whatever cause it may be imputed, whether political,
+moral, or physical, this nation, so justly celebrated about this
+period, seems to have had little progressive tendency to improvement,
+and till within these few years the Spanish colonists of the
+eighteenth, in point of information and commercial enterprize, differed
+in no respect from those of the sixteenth century. The general
+dissemination of science, the gradual dispersion of prejudice, the
+consequent expansion of the human mind, and the example of surrounding
+nations, will doubtless have due effect on those noble qualities which
+characterized the Spaniard of the sixteenth century; and which, though
+enchained for succeeding ages by the peculiarity of their internal
+politics, still exist in the Spaniard of the nineteenth. No doubt,
+indeed, can be entertained that the changes likely to be produced
+during the present eventful period, will convert the reign of Ferdinand
+the VIIth into the &aelig;ra of Spanish regeneration, in all that can
+be considered steady in council, great in arms, liberal in sentiment,
+and energetic in social as well as commercial intercourse. And we fully
+trust that the blind and persecuting influence which dictated the
+expulsion of the Chinese from the Philippines, and produced
+consequences nearly bordering on the annihilation of all industry and
+all commerce in the Islands, no longer disgraces their counsels or
+finds an advocate in the breast of one true Spaniard.</p>
+<p id="n2"><span class="sc">Note II.</span>&mdash;Page 8.</p>
+<p>We are well aware that at a distance from the seat of even an
+energetic government, abuses will exist which may sometimes be beyond
+its reach; but the instance before us, gives us at once an insight into
+that system of oppression and abuse of power which prevails in the
+Spanish settlements, and originated in the <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.275" href="#pb2.275" name=
+"pb2.275">275</a>]</span>invariable practice of the Spanish court, of
+furnishing the opportunity to their dependants in the mother country to
+enrich themselves during a temporary residence in the colonies.</p>
+<p id="n3"><span class="sc">Note III.</span>&mdash;Page 12.</p>
+<p>The most authentic communications on this subject to the translator,
+are, that during the months of March, April, and May, the heat is
+sometimes oppressive; June, July, August, and September, forms the
+rainy season; the month of October of a doubtful character; November,
+December, January, and February, a heavenly spring: and that the
+climate in the whole is uncommonly healthy, the natives living to a
+great age.</p>
+<p id="n4"><span class="sc">Note IV.</span>&mdash;Page 13.</p>
+<p>If it were not sufficiently ascertained that the author of this work
+was not a foreigner, but a monastic Spaniard, it might be concluded
+from this expression, that he meant to cast a strong reflection on the
+Spanish government; but in the progress of the work the reader will
+discover that he is fully justified.</p>
+<p id="n5"><span class="sc">Note V.</span>&mdash;Page 14.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The fishermen place their net zig-zag-ways in from eight to
+eighteen fathom water; at each angle they have several chambers, and
+over every angle they have a boat moored, with two or three fishermen
+in it, who are always watching the fish when they enter the chambers,
+and with a line, supported on the surface by a buoy, they draw a net
+across the chamber door.&rdquo; <i>Vide Jackson's Mediterranean
+Commerce</i>, p. 103&ndash;4.</p>
+<p id="n6"><span class="sc">Note VI.</span>&mdash;Page 18.</p>
+<p>The diversity of opinion as to the substance of which these nests
+are composed, is such, that to this hour we <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.276" href="#pb2.276" name=
+"pb2.276">276</a>]</span>are left on the wide field of conjecture, and
+without any clue which may be absolutely relied on for unravelling the
+mystery. The intelligent Sonnerat, as a judicious naturalist, is
+entitled to every attention on the subject, and he, by admitting into
+his work the following quotation from &ldquo;<i lang="fr">Transactions
+philosophiques de la soci&eacute;t&eacute; Batave, &eacute;tablie dans
+l'isle de Java pour l'avancement des arts et des sciences, vol.
+iii.</i>&rdquo; gives us reason to suppose that he adopts the opinion
+of that writer. He prefaces his introduction of the subject by the
+following scientific description of the bird:</p>
+<p>&ldquo;La salangane (hirundo esculenta, Lath. sp. 26. Lin. Rumph.
+herb. vi. pag. 183. tab. 75. fig. 4. Forster.)&rdquo;</p>
+<p>And then proceeds with the extract thus:</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The salanganes are of a blackish grey colour, somewhat
+inclining to green; but on the back, down to the tail, as well as under
+the breast, the colour is mouse grey. The whole length of the bird,
+from the back to the tail, is about four inches and a half; and its
+height, taken from the beak to the extremity of the foot, three and a
+quarter inches: its girt is ten and a quarter inches: the longest
+feathers of the wing are about four inches. The head is flat; but the
+thickness of the downy feathers which cover it make it appear round,
+and rather large in proportion to the rest of the body. The beak is
+large, ending in a sharp point, but hooked like that of a nocturnal
+bird of prey; its size is augmented by the addition of a naked
+membrane, similar to parchment, which folds inwards when the beak is
+shut, but expands with the opening of it, and enables the bird, while
+on the wing, to seize with greater facility the insects which
+constitute its food. The eyes are black, and very large; and the tongue
+not forked, but of the form of an arrow. The ears flat and round, with
+a small oblong opening, and entirely covered by the downy feathers of
+the head. The neck very short, as are the legs, and bones of the wings.
+The thighs entirely <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.277" href=
+"#pb2.277" name="pb2.277">277</a>]</span>covered with feathers; and the
+lower and more delicate parts of the legs, as well as the feet,
+provided with a black skin resembling parchment: each foot has four
+toes, three pointing forwards and one backwards; they are separated
+from each other even to the root, and the middle one, including the
+claw, is at least as long as the lower part of the leg; each toe is
+furnished with a black claw, pointed, hooked, and very long, by means
+of which it attaches itself, with great facility, to the juttings of
+the rocks. The tail is at least as long as the body, even including the
+neck and the head; when it is spread out it has the shape of a wedge,
+and has ten large feathers; the four first on each side are the
+longest, and when the tail is closed they extend beyond the others
+about an inch; the others diminish towards the middle of the tail, and
+nearly equal the length of the body. This bird is extremely light and
+delicate; ten of these swallows will only weigh about two ounces and a
+half. The inhabitants of Java call them <i>lawit</i>, and the
+mountaineers give them the names of <i>berongdag&aelig;</i> or
+<i>waled</i>.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;There are two places in the neighbourhood of Batavia where
+they are found in great abundance; the one, Calappa-Nongal, is about
+ten miles to the south of the town; the other, Sampia, is a little more
+distant towards the south-west, but both lie in that elevated range
+which takes its direction by the sea coast, and which appears to be
+different from the great chain which pushes itself into the country,
+and traverses the whole island. Besides these principal places, there
+are many others, both in the same district, and at a very great
+distance from the coast, where these birds are found, though in fewer
+numbers; and there are even some which are carefully concealed by those
+of the inhabitants who are acquainted with them.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;There are two bird mountains, called <i>Goa</i> (caverns) by
+the inhabitants of Java, which are insulated rocks, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.278" href="#pb2.278" name=
+"pb2.278">278</a>]</span>hollow in the middle, and pierced by a great
+number of openings, for the most part of sufficient size easily to
+admit a man; others are more difficult of access, and some so small
+that nature seems to have intended them for the security of those
+little animals. These rocks are composed of a grey calcareous stone and
+white marble, and are covered with a multitude of lofty trees of
+different kinds. To the interior of these caverns the birds fix their
+nests in horizontal ranges, and so close to each other, that, generally
+speaking, they join; they build them at different heights, from fifty
+to three hundred feet, higher or lower as they can find a <span class=
+"corr" id="xd19e1782" title="Source: birth">berth</span>; there is not
+a single hole, or convenient spot sufficiently dry and proper, which is
+not occupied; but if the surface is in the smallest degree wet, or even
+damp, the birds immediately abandon it.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;At break of day the whole of the birds take wing with a great
+noise, and in the dry season immediately shoot up so high in the
+atmosphere, in search of their food, as to be soon lost to the sight:
+they return about four in the afternoon, and again take shelter in
+their holes, to which they confine themselves during the rest of the
+day, those excepted which are hatching. On the other hand, during the
+rainy season, it has been often remarked that they never ramble very
+far from their holes, particularly in the government of Java, where the
+rocks even border close on the sea.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;They feed on all the varieties of insects which are found
+hovering over stagnated waters, and they easily secure them by means of
+the extended opening of which their beak is capable. Their most
+formidable enemy is a bird of prey, which catches them in great numbers
+as they escape from their holes, and which the inhabitants are very
+careful to keep at a distance as much as possible by shooting them.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;They prepare their nests with the more solid parts of their
+food, and by no means with the froth of the <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.279" href="#pb2.279" name=
+"pb2.279">279</a>]</span>sea or marine plants, as has been
+asserted<a class="noteref" id="xd19e1793src" href="#xd19e1793" name=
+"xd19e1793src">1</a>. This opinion is the more founded in probability,
+as it is ascertained by experience that those birds which build on the
+rocks, already mentioned, have never been seen on the coast, and that
+they could not repair thither and return in any reasonable time on
+account of the lofty chains of mountains they would have to traverse,
+and the tempestuous winds which prevail there. The great difference,
+then, in the colour and value of these nests, is a proof that their
+quality depends solely on the nature and abundance of the insects which
+form their food; perhaps, likewise, on the more or less perfect
+solitude of the places they resort to for it.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The nests collected in the territory of Calappa-Nongal and of
+Goadja are quite grey, and are of one-third less value than those of
+the territory of Sampia. These last again are in far less estimation
+than the excellent sort sent every year from Ternate and Passir, or
+those found in the islands immediately adjoining, and on that of Borneo
+in particular.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;These birds require two months to prepare their nests; they
+immediately after lay their eggs, and sit fifteen or sixteen days. As
+soon as the young take flight, the gathering of the nests commences,
+and is repeated every four months: it is the harvest of the proprietors
+of those rocks. This is performed by men accustomed from their infancy
+to clamber among these precipices: with reeds and bamboos they provide
+themselves with ladders, with which they mount up to the holes; but
+when the depth of the caves is too great, they have recourse to
+ropes.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;When at the bottom of these caverns, they place against the
+inside notched bamboos, which answer the <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb2.280" href="#pb2.280" name="pb2.280">280</a>]</span>purpose of
+ladders, to enable them to reach the nests, and if these are beyond
+their immediate reach, they detach them with bamboo poles; there are
+likewise holes, but in very limited numbers, which may be got at by
+means of ladders of bamboo.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;This employment, which is attended with very great risk,
+costs the lives of many human beings, and particularly of those who
+attempt to steal the nests. For their preservation, guards are placed
+here and there.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The mountaineers usually employed in collecting the nests
+never undertake it till they have sacrificed a buffalo, the usual
+prelude, with the Javanese, of all their enterprizes; they mutter a few
+prayers, anoint their bodies with aromatic oils, and fumigate the
+caverns with incense, a precaution, according to them, absolutely
+necessary. The principal of these caverns lie in the island of Java,
+where a female deity, under the appellation of <i>Raton laut
+Ridaud</i>, or <i>Princess of the South Sea</i>, is held in high
+veneration. A small hut, containing a covered bed, is prepared for her,
+together with several elegant dresses, and which no person but a
+Princess dare approach. Every Friday, during the period of collecting
+the nests, incense is burnt in it, and the bodies and clothes of all
+those who propose to mount the rocks ought to be exposed to this
+fumigation. The rest of the Javanese are not so superstitious, and
+attach much less importance to ceremonies. These caverns are lighted,
+on such occasions, by torches made with the rosin of a large tree,
+called the <i>cavet</i>, and of the inner bark of the areka.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The collection of the nests does not last more than a month,
+and, as has been said, may be repeated three times annually. Some think
+that it might even be extended to a fourth, but that is not very
+probable, as all the people employed in this work affirm that a nest,
+as long as it remains entire, is constantly augmented or <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.281" href="#pb2.281" name=
+"pb2.281">281</a>]</span>thickened by the bird, which never totally
+abandons it till it becomes dry and woolly in the inside.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;After the nests are gathered, nothing remains to be done but
+to dry and clean them, and they are then packed in baskets and sold to
+the Chinese. The price varies, as depending on their whiteness and
+degree of perfection; some are grey, and others reddish, while those of
+the best sort are extremely rare. They are sold on the spot for from
+eight hundred to one thousand four hundred rixdollars for one hundred
+and twenty-five pounds weight. This price, and the insatiable avarice
+of the Chinese, often produce cheating, and an adulteration of the
+article. They have no hesitation in corrupting the guards with money,
+opium, or clothes; and deceits are practised, against which the most
+extreme vigilance is often unavailing.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The two places we have already mentioned, Calappa-Nongal and
+Sampia, belonged formerly to the Dutch East India Company, but as the
+advantages resulting from the possession of them were partly unknown,
+or diminished in value by the dexterity of the Javanese, the company
+formed the resolution of letting them by public auction, and nearly one
+hundred thousand rixdollars is drawn from them, a sum far exceeding
+their utmost expectations. In the same range of mountains there are
+besides these other places of the same description, but of less
+importance. There are likewise two or three in the interior, and some
+others, which are concealed with great care.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;There are in the government of Samarang, in the island of
+Java, three mountains celebrated for their birds, called Goadaher,
+Gede, and Nangasari. The sea washes their base, and flows so far into
+the interior of the latter, that it may be said they can catch fish in
+the body of the mountain. The nests in these districts are of an
+excellent quality, but very difficult to collect, on account
+<span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.282" href="#pb2.282" name=
+"pb2.282">282</a>]</span>of the precipitous nature of the rocks, and
+the violent beating of the surge against them, which renders it
+necessary for those employed to suspend themselves from the top by
+ladders of bamboo. In the island of Java, about twenty-five quintals of
+these nests are collected annually.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;There are likewise swallow caverns in the island of Bantam,
+and in Sumatra; but the inhabitants of the former are so indolent, and
+the government so detestable, that they are not even at the trouble to
+sow rice, nor do they cultivate any one article which contributes to
+human existence. The Chinese have never attempted to penetrate into the
+interior of this kingdom, and they have no commerce whatever with the
+mountaineers; indeed they have very little intercourse even with the
+coast.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The Javanese and Europeans established in India eat even the
+birds themselves when young, but it is difficult to procure them; they
+are considered as a very luscious food. The nests, on the contrary,
+when stewed as a soup, and afterwards exposed to the dew, and sweetened
+with sugar, are said to be highly cooling, and the Javanese administer
+them successfully in violent fevers. The author of this memoir has had
+occasion to observe that, prepared in the manner which will be
+subsequently mentioned, they have been useful in disorders of the
+throat, and in hoarseness. Most probably this remedy has been borrowed
+from the Chinese, who (according to information furnished to the author
+by a man who was in the habit of dealing largely in these nests) use
+them most generally in the winter, because disorders of the throat are
+very common at that season in the southern regions of the empire, on
+account of the habits the Chinese are in of indulging themselves over
+the fire.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;But though the author has repeatedly eat these nests,
+prepared in various ways, he has not been able to bring <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.283" href="#pb2.283" name=
+"pb2.283">283</a>]</span>himself to put much faith in the very
+nutritive and strengthening property attributed to them. He has had
+them analyzed by good chemists, but the result has been only a gummy
+solution, of rather a disagreeable taste, which might, however, be of
+service in certain disorders of the chest.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;These nests are, in fact, only articles of luxury or ornament
+on the tables of the rich. The Chinese are passionately fond of them:
+after well soaking and cleaning them, they are put with a fat capon or
+a duck into an earthen pot, closely covered; they are simmered for
+twenty-four hours over a small fire, which is called <i>timmen</i>;
+thus prepared, this eatable acquires a relish infinitely more rich, and
+a more nourishing quality.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;The trade in these nests, which some years ago was of little
+importance, has been greatly on the increase for some time. The price
+is constantly rising in China, and Batavia is the principal market for
+them. The company having abandoned it, the inhabitants derive
+sufficient advantage from it to diminish the exportation of specie,
+which is highly prejudicial. It is now very well ascertained that the
+species of swallow which builds these nests is not to be found in
+China.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;Linn&aelig;us, in his <i lang="fr">Systeme Naturel</i>,
+characterizes this swallow, which he calls the <i>hirundo
+esculenta</i>, by white spots only on the feathers of the tail. But
+those birds of Java, which construct the nests in question, have no
+spots either on their tail or elsewhere. The feathers of the tail are
+entirely of one colour, that is, grey, approaching to black on the
+upper, and a lighter grey on the under surface.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;Rumph says, in speaking of these <i>apodes marin&aelig;</i>,
+that the feathers of their tail are spotted, and that the breast has
+black and white spots.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;Valentyn in his description of the small swallow which builds
+the eatable nests, says nothing of spots, and only states that the body
+is veined white and black. <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.284" href=
+"#pb2.284" name="pb2.284">284</a>]</span></p>
+<p>&ldquo;If these differences are allowed to be essential, it will
+follow that there must be two kinds of these swallows, the one with a
+spotted breast, and having white spots on the tail, the other without
+either. It is possible, even, that there may be a third variety, that
+called <i>momos</i>, or <i>bocrongitams</i>. These likewise form their
+nests of part of their food; but mixed with so much impure matter that
+no use can be made of them. Care is taken, therefore, to drive them
+away, that they may not injure the nests of the better species. They
+are readily known from these latter by their superior size, and their
+legs being provided with small feathers down to the feet.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;In the kingdom of Tonquin, and in China, there is a great
+demand for these nests of the salanganes. They form their most
+exquisite food, and they attribute to them the property of
+strengthening the stomach, and of being a powerful aphrodisiac. They
+are preserved for the tables of the King, and those of the principal
+nobles who are able to procure them. They are diluted, made into gravy
+or soup, and mixed with all sorts of choice aliment, and every kind of
+taste is imputed to them.</p>
+<p>&ldquo;In the state in which the salanganes are sold, they bear a
+close resemblance to the half of a preserved citron, both in size and
+shape. They are put into small boats, which the people of the country
+are sufficiently dextrous in piloting through the rocks where the nests
+are found. The King of Cochin-China retains in his own hands,
+exclusively, the portion of this trade which belongs to him, as the
+most precious production of his dominions, and of which the sale is
+most to be relied on.&rdquo;</p>
+<p id="n7"><span class="sc">Note VII.</span>&mdash;Page 18.</p>
+<p>This shell, which even here, as every where else, <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.285" href="#pb2.285" name=
+"pb2.285">285</a>]</span>bears the name of cowrie, forms likewise the
+currency of Africa, as it formerly did that of India; and this may
+probably furnish an argument in favour of the Malay origin.</p>
+<p id="n8"><span class="sc">Note VIII.</span>&mdash;Page 21.
+<span class="sc" id="n9">Note IX.</span>&mdash;Same page.</p>
+<p>Two causes are here assigned for the wretched state of these
+dependencies, apparently different, but in fact flowing from the same
+source. We are told that the surrounding nations are more industrious,
+and can work at a cheaper rate, and that the insects and rats destroy
+the produce of the soil. Were the encouragement of agriculture and
+manufactures an object of importance in the colonial system of the
+Philippines, the extension and protection of the former would soon
+circumscribe the dominion of the rats, its most destructive enemy; and
+if the productions of the soil were, as they ought to be, in as great
+plenty, and at as low a rate as on the neighbouring islands,
+manufactures, particularly with the aid of machinery, would be afforded
+at a profit adequate to the exertions of industry. But the truth is,
+that the Spanish government is rather desirous of considering the
+Philippines as the grand depot of the commerce of South America with
+India and China, and it may be presumed that, on this account, not only
+is its industry repressed, but the very heavy expense of the settlement
+submitted to and annually sent from New Spain. The revenue stated to be
+collected in the islands amounts to about one million of dollars, and
+this, together with about the same sum remitted by the Acapulco ships,
+enable the government to defray the annual charges of the colonial
+establishment.</p>
+<p id="n10"><span class="sc">Note X.</span>&mdash;Page 24.</p>
+<p>The Spanish author, on the subject of the origin of these Negroes,
+forms a conclusion directly at variance <span class="pagenum">[<a id=
+"pb2.286" href="#pb2.286" name="pb2.286">286</a>]</span>with what he
+afterwards says with regard to the origin of the Indians. He admits
+that the similarity of the former to those of Angola, with the
+exception of only a shade in colour, carries sufficient conviction as
+to their parent stock, and of course allows the islands to have been
+originally colonized from Africa, and by a people infinitely less
+advanced in cultivation than the Indians, setting aside at once his own
+very well founded subsequent conclusion, that the colonization of all
+the islands of the South Sea, with the Marianas, Philippines, &amp;c.
+must have originated in South America, and proceeded gradually before
+the wind. The constant course of easterly winds in the Pacific, joined
+to the instances he adduces of similitude of language, unquestionably
+aid his hypothesis, which, though probably more curious than
+practically useful, is yet deserving of attention. There is not,
+indeed, a more embarrassing subject than that frequently proves to be,
+which treats of the origin and ancient connexion of distant nations,
+and after all, as in this case, we are too often left on the field of
+conjecture.</p>
+<p id="n11"><span class="sc">Note XI.</span>&mdash;Page 25.</p>
+<p>The reason here given for the wretched condition of these people
+seems more candidly than might be expected from a Spaniard, to take the
+load of responsibility from them and cast it on the government; and the
+perusal of the succeeding pages will but too well confirm the propriety
+of the censure.</p>
+<p id="n12"><span class="sc">Note XII.</span>&mdash;Page 36.</p>
+<p>Sonnerat asserts, that among the mild inhabitants of the fertile
+plains on the west border of the Lake Bay, adultery is the only crime
+punished with death; but it seems more reasonable to conclude, that of
+the two the Spaniard is most to be relied on. <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.287" href="#pb2.287" name=
+"pb2.287">287</a>]</span></p>
+<p id="n13"><span class="sc">Note XIII.</span>&mdash;Page 37.</p>
+<p>The striking resemblance of this to the price exacted by Laban from
+Jacob for his two daughters, will not be passed over by the reader
+unnoticed; and we are obliged to conclude either that such similarity
+of customs must originate in a common source, or that a certain state
+of social life, in certain climates, will produce manners mutually
+approximating.</p>
+<p id="n14"><span class="sc">Note XIV.</span>&mdash;Page 42.</p>
+<p>Without, in any respect, detracting from the merit of the
+propagators of the Christian faith in these islands, or claiming any
+superiority for our own tenets or practice, I fear we need not travel
+beyond the pillars of Hercules to the southward, and the Ultima
+Thul&eacute; to the northward, to discover such perversion of human
+intellect, although, I trust, it is no proof that we are very bad
+Christians.</p>
+<p>The influence of traditional superstitions is too generally known
+and admitted to require to be descanted on. Its operation commences
+with the first dawn of reason, and very rarely is it found that even
+all the strength of the human mind, aided by religion and philosophy,
+can thoroughly eradicate the impressions it makes. The water kelpie of
+the north of Scotland differs from the Patianac and Tigbalang, only as
+being a good natured and very useful being; and we are all familiar
+with the mythologic machinery of our ancestors, for we will take leave
+to entertain a belief that Fingal and Ossian did once exist, and that
+the latter pourtrayed the manners, customs and opinions of his
+time.</p>
+<p id="n15"><span class="sc">Note XV.</span>&mdash;Page 46.</p>
+<p>It is curious to observe the progress of science and <span class=
+"pagenum">[<a id="pb2.288" href="#pb2.288" name=
+"pb2.288">288</a>]</span>discovery, and still more deserving our notice
+is the transitory nature of power. The magisterial authority assumed by
+the Pontiff on this occasion might possibly have saved the effusion of
+human blood, and its interposition at that crisis, as a mediator
+between the most powerful nations then in existence, if it was
+beneficial in no other respect, seems to have stimulated the Spaniards
+to attempt the discovery of a passage into the Pacific by the southern
+coast of America.</p>
+<p id="n16"><span class="sc">Note XVI.</span>&mdash;Page 65.</p>
+<p>This must either be a mistake, or we must conclude that the
+intercourse of the Portuguese with these islands had furnished them
+with the European improvements.</p>
+<p id="n17"><span class="sc">Notes</span> XVII. and <span id=
+"n18">XVIII</span>.&mdash;Pages 106&ndash;7.</p>
+<p>The circumstances stated on both these occasions, incontestably
+prove that the energy and exertions of the Portuguese in establishing
+their own exclusive dominion in the eastern Archipelago, even in
+defiance of the fiat of his Holiness, had led them to impart to the
+natives that knowledge which they themselves had been but lately
+possessed of; for the use of cannon, on board ships, did not come into
+practice till about the year 1539.</p>
+<p id="n19"><span class="sc">Note XIX.</span>&mdash;Page 129.</p>
+<p>Thus it is that the Spaniards appear even to have deceived
+themselves in <i>subduing</i> those islands. In the course of this
+work, the reader will be enabled to appreciate the nature of what the
+Spaniards called a conquest. The progress of a few men into the
+interior of a country under the protection of fire-arms, and the
+baptism of some individuals, to whose language the Spaniards were
+perfect strangers, and who of course could form no idea of the
+obligations imposed by the <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.289" href=
+"#pb2.289" name="pb2.289">289</a>]</span>ceremony, seem to constitute
+their notion of conquest. Thus it is too that their authority extends
+over so small a portion of these delicious islands.</p>
+<p id="n20"><span class="sc">Note XX.</span>&mdash;Page 197.</p>
+<p>The inhuman custom of infanticide is not only practised with
+impunity in China, but seems even countenanced as the readiest means of
+limiting a population which would otherwise be superabundant, and in
+time exceed the productive powers of the country. By the narrative of
+Lord Macartney we learn, that in the tract of country through which the
+embassy passed, the population appeared excessive; at the same time
+that cultivation and industry seemed to be extended to their utmost
+limits. All the accounts we possess of that extraordinary empire concur
+in this representation. What effect the very pious application of the
+funds of the eleemosynary establishments at Manila may have in checking
+this savage custom is not noticed by the author; and we have reason to
+fear the practice is so general, that any attempt to check it by this
+means might rather tend to stimulate the avarice of the parents, and
+produce an opposite effect. The Chinese are as yet but in a half
+civilized state, and while they continue so we can entertain but
+slender hopes of any alteration more consistent with the feelings of
+humanity.</p>
+<p id="n21"><span class="sc">Note XXI.</span>&mdash;Page 211.</p>
+<p>The whole of this paragraph comprises a more virulent Philippic
+against the Spanish government than we could have expected from a
+Spaniard; but which the reader is by this time convinced is no less
+just than spirited. That the mild measures the author recommends would
+have the desired effect may be fairly doubted. He appears to write as a
+monk rather than as a statesman; but it cannot admit of a question,
+that if <span class="pagenum">[<a id="pb2.290" href="#pb2.290" name=
+"pb2.290">290</a>]</span>it were possible to combine with such measures
+a military establishment, under the control of wise laws, whose mild
+influence might be generally felt, and equally protect the native as
+the Spaniard, the unstable authority of that nation upon these islands
+would soon assume a different character, and reduce the quantum of
+human misery which their present system is calculated to
+perpetuate.</p>
+</div>
+<div class="footnotes">
+<hr class="fnsep">
+<p class="footnote"><span class="label"><a class="noteref" id=
+"xd19e1793" href="#xd19e1793src" name="xd19e1793">1</a></span> This is
+an opinion very generally received, and naturalists, in copying one
+from another, have stamped a credit upon it. Houttyn himself, in his
+<i>Natural History</i>, vol. i. part v. page 607, gives a description
+of this bird, and of its manners, very different from the above.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="div1 imprint"><span class="pagenum">[<a href=
+"#toc">Contents</a>]</span>
+<div class="divBody">
+<p class="first xd19e110">T. DAVISON, Lombard-street,<br>
+Whitefriars, London.</p>
+</div>
+</div>
+<div class="div1" id="toc">
+<h2 class="main">Table of Contents</h2>
+<ul>
+<li><a href="#intro">INTRODUCTION.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e180">v</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch1">CHAPTER I.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span class=
+"tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e254">1</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch2">CHAPTER II.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; <span class=
+"tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e419">22</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch3">ANNO DOM. 1519 to 1564.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e556">44</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch4">ANNO DOM. 1564 to 1565.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e624">61</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch5">ANNO DOM. 1565.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e682">78</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch6">ANNO DOM. 1569 to 1571.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e770">100</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch7">ANNO DOMINI, 1571.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e852">119</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch8">ANNO DOM. 1575.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e990">155</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch9">ANNO DOM. 1580.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1031">164</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch10">ANNO DOM. 1584.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1081">175</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch11">ANNO DOM. 1590.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1117">183</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch12">ANNO DOM. 1596.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1188">199</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch13">ANNO DOM. 1602.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1260">216</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch14">ANNO DOM. 1609.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1340">232</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch15">ANNO DOM. 1618.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1385">242</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch16">ANNO DOM. 1626.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1445">254</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch17">ANNO DOM. 1635.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1507">267</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch18">ANNO DOM. 1644.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1550">277</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch19">ANNO DOM. 1653.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1611">291</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#ch20">ANNO DOM. 1663.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1685">306</a></span></li>
+<li><a href="#notes">NOTES TO VOLUME I.</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;
+<span class="tocPagenum"><a class="pageref" href=
+"#xd19e1705">273</a></span></li>
+</ul>
+</div>
+<div class="transcribernote">
+<h2 class="main">Colophon</h2>
+<h3 class="main">Availability</h3>
+<p class="first">This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no
+cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give
+it away or re-use it under the terms of the <a class="exlink xd19e38"
+title="External link" href="https://www.gutenberg.org/license" rel=
+"license">Project Gutenberg License</a> included with this eBook or
+online at <a class="exlink xd19e38" title="External link" href=
+"https://www.gutenberg.org/" rel="home">www.gutenberg.org</a>.</p>
+<p>This eBook is produced by the Online Distributed Proofreading Team
+at <a class="exlink xd19e38" title="External link" href=
+"https://www.pgdp.net/">www.pgdp.net</a>.</p>
+<p>This is volume one of one of earliest histories of the Philippines
+in the English language, published in 1814 in London by J. Asperne, as
+a translation of <i lang="es">Historia de las Islas Philipinas</i>
+published near Manila at the Impreso en Sampaloc in 1803. The Spanish
+original is extremely rare.</p>
+<p>This book has been prepared from scans available from the Collection
+&ldquo;The United States and its Territories&rdquo; at the University
+of Michigan (<a class="exlink xd19e38" title="External link" href=
+"http://name.umdl.umich.edu/AFJ2216.0001.001">1</a>).</p>
+<p>Alternative scans are available from the Internet Archive (<a class=
+"exlink xd19e38" title="External link" href=
+"http://www.archive.org/details/anhistoricalvie02mavegoog">1</a>).</p>
+<p>Related Library of Congress catalog page: <a class="catlink" href=
+"http://lccn.loc.gov/94944968">94944968</a>.</p>
+<p>Related Open Library catalog page (for source): <a class="catlink"
+href="http://openlibrary.org/books/OL1261846M">OL1261846M</a>.</p>
+<p>Related Open Library catalog page (for work): <a class="catlink"
+href="http://openlibrary.org/works/OL3730780W">OL3730780W</a>.</p>
+<h3 class="main">Encoding</h3>
+<p class="first">The notes to this volume, which originally appeared at
+the end of volume II, have been moved to the end of this volume.</p>
+<h3 class="main">Revision History</h3>
+<ul>
+<li>2011-03-21 Started.</li>
+</ul>
+<h3 class="main">External References</h3>
+<p>This Project Gutenberg eBook contains external references. These
+links may not work for you.</p>
+<h3 class="main">Corrections</h3>
+<p>The following corrections have been applied to the text:</p>
+<table class="correctiontable" summary=
+"Overview of corrections applied to the text.">
+<tr>
+<th>Page</th>
+<th>Source</th>
+<th>Correction</th>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e201">vii</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">,</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">.</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e508">37</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">expences</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">expenses</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e519">39</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">,</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">[<i>Deleted</i>]</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e726">89</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">delaring</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">declaring</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e740">92</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">accessary</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">accessory</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e763">98</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">as quadron</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">a squadron</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e901">130</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">controuling</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">controlling</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e917">133</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">seent</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">sent</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e1070">172</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">Butista</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">Bautista</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e1286">221</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">Guiapo</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">Quiapo</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e1293">222</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">an</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">one</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e1304">224</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">Acuna</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">Acu&ntilde;a</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e1670">302</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">recal</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">recall</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+<td class="width20"><a class="pageref" href="#xd19e1782">278</a></td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">birth</td>
+<td class="width40 bottom">berth</td>
+</tr>
+</table>
+</div>
+</div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands, Vol I (of 2), by Martinez de Zuniga
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORICAL VIEW--PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 39010-h.htm or 39010-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/0/1/39010/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously
+made available by the Digital & Multimedia Center, Michigan
+State University Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/39010-h/images/book.png b/39010-h/images/book.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c9ee4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-h/images/book.png
diff --git a/39010-h/images/card.png b/39010-h/images/card.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ffbe1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-h/images/card.png
diff --git a/39010-h/images/external.png b/39010-h/images/external.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba4f205
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-h/images/external.png
diff --git a/39010-h/images/titlepage.gif b/39010-h/images/titlepage.gif
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99b68db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010-h/images/titlepage.gif
diff --git a/39010.txt b/39010.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5aba29d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5733 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands, Vol I (of 2), by Martinez de Zuniga
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: An Historical View of the Philippine Islands, Vol I (of 2)
+       Exhibiting their discovery, population, language,
+       government, manners, customs, productions and commerce.
+
+Author: Martinez de Zuniga
+
+Translator: John Maver
+
+Release Date: February 29, 2012 [EBook #39010]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORICAL VIEW--PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously
+made available by the Digital & Multimedia Center, Michigan
+State University Libraries.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+                                   AN
+                            HISTORICAL VIEW
+                                 OF THE
+                          PHILIPPINE ISLANDS:
+
+                               EXHIBITING
+                 THEIR DISCOVERY, POPULATION, LANGUAGE,
+                     GOVERNMENT, MANNERS, CUSTOMS,
+                       PRODUCTIONS AND COMMERCE.
+
+
+                          FROM THE SPANISH OF
+                          Martinez de Zuniga.
+
+
+                       PUBLISHED AT MANILA, 1803.
+
+                            IN TWO VOLUMES.
+
+                                  WITH
+                 A NEW AND ACCURATE MAP OF THE ISLANDS,
+             FROM THE BEST AUTHORITIES, PUBLIC AND PRIVATE.
+
+
+                               TRANSLATED
+                          BY JOHN MAVER, ESQ.
+
+
+
+                                VOL. I.
+
+                                LONDON:
+            PRINTED FOR J. ASPERNE, CORNHILL; AND NONAVILLE
+                       AND FELL, NEW BOND-STREET:
+                      By T. Davison, Whitefriars.
+
+                                 1814.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+
+The original, of which the following translation is offered to the
+English reader, is, probably, the only copy which has yet reached this
+country. Whether the chance which threw it in the way of the translator
+may be deemed fortunate or otherwise must be left to the decision
+of the candid public; but it appeared to him that the information
+it contains respecting a Spanish colony, the most interesting of any
+other to a British subject, supplies that desideratum so much wanted
+in our language;--a correct view down to a very late period of the
+Spanish establishments in the Philippines.
+
+The position of these islands, and, indeed, that of the eastern
+Archipelago generally, whether considered in a political or commercial
+point of view, is sufficiently important. They form the entrepot
+of Europe, India, China, the immensely extended regions of Spanish
+America, the north-western coasts of the new, and north-eastern coasts
+of the old world; and in the storms which at present convulse the
+political atmosphere of Europe, as well as that of both the Americas,
+it is not easy even to conjecture what may be their fate.
+
+The productions of these islands are various, and of a value and
+importance unquestionably high. In the hands of an industrious
+population, and under a fostering government, there is scarcely any
+vegetable substance which, by slender exertion, they may not be made
+to yield, whilst the choicest treasures of the mineral kingdom, lodged
+beneath their irregular surface, minister largely to the cupidity,
+and furnish materials for the more enterprising labours of man.
+
+Gold is in abundance; iron, steel, copper, lead, pitch and tar, hemp,
+cotton, indigo, sugar, cocoa, pepper, betel, cowries, tortoiseshell,
+mother of pearl and pearls, hides, coyar, tobacco, corn and rice
+excellent and abundant, with a variety of other productions, contribute
+to the wants of commerce; while in this enumeration will be found all
+the articles which, with the aid of the finest building timber in the
+world, are requisite for the construction and complete equipment of
+ships of every description.
+
+The established intercourse of these islands with Japan and
+China offers a ready transit for manufactures; and although it is
+understood that the East India Company furnishes an adequate supply
+of our woollen staple to the China market, we may yet fairly expect
+that British enterprize will not overlook the advantages which the
+opening of the India trade holds out in this quarter; nor will the
+introduction of British manufactures into these islands, either with
+an ultimate view to the above markets, or to those of Spanish America,
+in any material degree interfere with the staple trade of the Company:
+there is full scope for adventure in this new vineyard, and labourers
+will not be wanting.
+
+The political jealousy, and the national and religious prejudices
+of the Spaniards, have till lately opposed a bar to an extended
+intercourse with the Philippines; but the tide which hitherto
+has flowed in that direction seems of late to have commenced its
+ebb. The events of the last twenty years have been in their nature
+so extraordinary, and in their effects so powerful a solvent of all
+the prejudices, fostered by ignorance and superstition, that the dawn
+of a new day seems to open upon mankind. Let us hope that while these
+clouds vanish before the morning sun, the great bonds of society will
+remain unbroken, and that the liberties of Europe, and consequently
+those of the world, will be fixed on a permanent foundation.
+
+The well-wisher to the temporal and eternal felicity of the human
+race will hail, with becoming exultation, the opportunity which
+it is hoped will now be offered of spreading the Christian faith,
+and amicably and peaceably lending the reformed religion in aid of
+the Catholic missions, to civilize the population of this extensive
+portion of the eastern hemisphere.
+
+As a literary production, the original has probably little claim to
+merit, the author conveying his matter in a style more monastic than
+flowing; at the same time that he seems to be generally under the
+influence of that bias, which an early seclusion from life entails
+upon the mind, and upon which even his official opportunities of
+intercourse with the best society in Manila seem to have had a very
+limited effect. The translator has found him too often occupying
+his pages with contentions between the respective religious orders,
+insignificant in their nature even to a Spaniard, and so much more so
+to the English reader, that he has taken the liberty of altogether
+omitting them in the translation, except where connected with the
+political affairs of the settlement; and although by these means
+several of the chapters are reduced to almost nominal importance;
+yet considering the division of the subject in this form as adopted
+on fair grounds by the author, he hopes he will be deemed justifiable
+in retaining it even with the sacrifice of something of appearance.
+
+Having said as much as he hopes can be urged against the original
+production, the translator willingly advocates Zuniga's cause
+in respect to its intrinsic value, as giving to the public the
+only correct view of this interesting settlement, purporting to be
+brought down to the peace of 1763; but in fact, as we may reasonably
+conclude, extended to the period of publication at Manila in 1803. From
+information which may be fully relied on, it appears that Zuniga may,
+with more propriety, be deemed the editor than the author, as he was in
+Manila, and superintended the publication in 1803; with the credit of
+having only arranged for the press the papers of a deceased collector;
+a conclusion justified by the circumstance of the work closing with
+the peace of 1763, for there could not be any very solid reason for his
+declining an account of the forty years intervening between that event
+and the period of publication, had he himself been the author. If,
+however, we are by these means without a detail of the actual events
+which took place, it is probable we may have less cause for regret on
+account of the very limited progress which we well know improvement,
+or even amelioration, have been suffered to make under the Spanish
+monarchy during the period in question. At any rate, we have grounds
+for supposing that if any alteration, favourable or unfavourable, has
+taken place, Zuniga has contrived to weave it into the work; for it is
+asserted by those whose residence renders them competent judges, that
+the view he gives of the settlement is correct to the latest period.
+
+The origin and language of these islanders have engaged the attention
+of our ablest orientalists. From certain similar characteristics in
+the persons of the inhabitants of the interior, or aborigines of the
+islands, they have hitherto had an African origin assigned to them;
+and nearly from the same source (Madagascar), it has been supposed that
+the Malay population has flowed, which has in a great measure inundated
+the Archipelago, as well as some parts of the continental coasts.
+
+Similarity, or even approximation of language and manners
+unquestionably offer great facilities in enquiries of this nature,
+and they have accordingly been resorted to by all our oriental
+physiologists in their researches respecting the eastern Archipelago;
+and so far as regards the Malays and Malayan language, these researches
+have been attended with corresponding success; but in respect to the
+aboriginal language, or Tagalic, very slight attempts have been made
+to trace it beyond the quarter in which it was found to prevail. Our
+author has not failed to enter into the discussion, and from the
+premises he lays down, not unreasonably, draws the conclusion that the
+Tagalic language and original population of all the islands westward
+of the coast of South America derive from that continent.
+
+It is certainly consonant to reason to presume that the aborigines,
+or mountaineers of the interior of these islands, in their primitive
+state, were more likely to change their residence (if intentionally) by
+committing themselves to a favourable breeze blowing pretty constantly
+in one direction from the eastward; or if in consequence of misfortune,
+by finding their efforts unavailing to encounter an adverse wind, and
+again reach their own coasts; than to suppose even with all the aid
+the monsoons could afford them in an erratic navigation from Africa
+through the Indian ocean to the Archipelago, that they should diffuse
+themselves from that point in every direction over the South Sea, in
+the face of an almost constant current of wind, blowing occasionally
+with extreme violence.
+
+The Malay population most probably had its origin as stated. The
+superior acquirements of that nation doubtless might enable them to
+encounter those difficulties which have been mentioned, and either
+by their extensive conquests, or acknowledged commercial activity,
+to induce their language to be received as the general medium of
+intercourse. On the subject of this language, and its different
+dialects in these islands, some variety of opinion may be fairly
+allowed to prevail; and Sir W. Jones, Dr. Wilkins, Mr. Marsden,
+Mr. Raffles, and other authorities, may not be decided as to its
+source; but it is generally allowed that the language spoken by
+the Papuans, Samangs, and Negritos of the Philippines, and adjacent
+islands, is totally different from the Malayan; and as Mr. Marsden
+expresses himself, "presents a subject of research as curious as it
+is obscure."
+
+This latter gentleman, in the ingenious introduction to his valuable
+grammar of the Malayan language, says, that the large islands of this
+archipelago have their own peculiar language spoken by the inhabitants
+of the interior, while the Malayan is generally used in the districts
+bordering on the coasts, at the mouths and on the banks of navigable
+rivers, and has thence acquired the appellation of the Lingua Franca of
+the east. The antiquity of this insular or original language, we are,
+he says, without the means of ascertaining; but he well supports its
+stability by the strong proof he adduces of Pigafetta's Vocabulary of
+the Tidore language, in 1521, differing in no respect from that of the
+present day. Mr. Marsden seems to conclude that the Malay population
+of this archipelago has its root in Sumatra, the inhabitants of which
+island claim immediate descent from some of the companions of Noah,
+landed there from the ark; and both Mr. Marsden, and Mr. Raffles,
+the present Governor of Java, assert, that the language spoken
+in Sumatra differs in no material respect from that spoken in the
+Malayan peninsula.
+
+Upon any occasion where additional light could be thrown upon the
+subject of these islands, the translator has not scrupled to avail
+himself of the best authorities for that purpose. The Voyage de
+Sonnerat aux Indes orientales et a la Chine, edited and enlarged by
+Sonnini, has been of great service in this respect, as containing
+the most authentic information which was possible to be procured
+by a foreigner, aided by every facility which the influence of the
+court of France over that of Madrid could furnish, and entering upon
+the undertaking with the express intention of seconding the views of
+France on the colonial establishments of her European neighbours.
+
+The translator hopes that, on the whole, the notes and extracts will
+not be found unimportant or useless.
+
+On the subject of the map of the Philippines, accompanying this
+work, the translator trusts he will be excused expressing the
+gratification he feels in presenting it to the world as the only
+correct delineation of these islands in existence. A collection of
+the existing authorities he found answered no purpose, as being at
+variance not only with each other, but still more with the unpublished
+manuscript, and other authentic information he derived from the most
+competent private sources. To John Barrow, Esq. second Secretary, and
+Captain Hurd, Hydrographer to the Admiralty, he feels greatly indebted
+for the communications they favoured him with, and for amenity and
+politeness which accompanied them. To the first eastern scholar in
+this country, probably in Europe, Dr. Wilkins, Librarian to the East
+India Company, he owes more obligations than he can express. He takes
+this opportunity of expressing his gratitude for the kind assistance
+afforded by Captain Horsburgh, Hydrographer to the East India Company,
+who has had full opportunity, for the exercise of his practical and
+theoretical acquirements as a navigator in the eastern Archipelago,
+and who surveyed the western coasts of these islands, and in particular
+the northern extremity of the island of Luzon; to him he owes the
+correction of many errors, in respect to latitude and longitude,
+which disgrace the existing charts; and to him likewise the map is
+indebted, for a more perfect delineation of the coasts, and for the
+disappearance of certain dangerous rocks which he has ascertained
+to have no existence. From these sources, aided by the suggestions
+of commanders in the India service, in regard to the nautical part,
+and from John Guise, Esq. of Baker-street, whose residence of nine
+years in Manila afforded him ample means of information respecting
+the interior of Luzon, the map, it is presumed, may be deemed the
+most correct extant. To this latter gentleman he has to acknowledge
+further obligations on the score of the general information he has
+kindly furnished. To his friend, John Jackson, Esq. whose literary
+attainments do him so much honour, the translator is under particular
+obligations for the kind assistance afforded him in regard to the
+map. To Peter Guichenet, Esq. he feels particularly indebted, as well
+as to another friend, for the permission to extract from his excellent
+manuscript translation of Sonnerat as much as answered his purpose.
+
+The merit of a translator is very limited. He is answerable for
+little beyond the actual transfusion of his author's meaning in
+appropriate language: whatever the present translator has attempted
+beyond this is contained in the notes, and is added with the hope of
+rendering the publication as valuable as possible, and as replete with
+information on the religious, moral, political, and commercial state
+of these dependencies on the Spanish crown as the existing sources are
+capable of furnishing. He lays it before the public with diffidence,
+but with the hope that it will add to the stock of general knowledge;
+equally useful to the moralist, the politician, and the merchant.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+    Their Description--Productions and Commerce.
+
+
+The Philippine Islands were so named by Ruy Lopez de Villalobos,
+in compliment to Philip the Second, when Prince of Asturias. They
+originally were called the Western Isles, or the Archipelago of Saint
+Lazarus, the name which Magellan gave them when first discovered by
+him. These islands are numerous; their appearance on the map is that
+of a large blanket full of holes and rents. The principal of them is
+Luzon, so called, because at the doorway of each house stands a large
+wooden mortar, which, in the language of the country, is called Losong,
+and in which the Indians wash their rice. This island resembles the
+arm a little bent, and in the part which corresponds to the elbow
+is situated the city of Manila, on the shore of a fine bay, thirty
+leagues in circumference, and which receives some considerable rivers,
+among others the Pasig, which flowing from a large lake, situated
+to the east of Manila, at the distance of three leagues, washes its
+walls on the north side: its water is very soft and salubrious.
+
+Before the Spaniards arrived this district was occupied by the nation
+Tagala, inhabiting many towns and mud villages, governed by petty
+chiefs. It is now divided into various provinces, under the government
+of their respective Alcaldes Mayores, who collect the royal tribute,
+and administer justice among the Indians. At three leagues distance
+from Manila, to the south-west, lies the port of Cavite, so called
+from the word cauit, a fish-hook, to which the tongue of land on
+which it stands bears a strong resemblance. Cavite is defended by an
+indifferent fort, the governor of which is nominated by the court
+of Madrid. It is likewise provided with a complete arsenal for the
+accommodation, as well of the Acapulco ships, and a few small vessels
+for the defence of the islands from the Moors, as for general use.
+
+To the north from the nation Tagala, we found the nations Pampanga,
+Zambales, Pangasinan, Ylocos, and Cagayan. Each of these nations
+formed a distinct community, with a distinct language, or dialect of
+the same language, and was distributed in mud villages, having no
+king or supreme head to govern them; but in lieu of that, a number
+of petty chiefs, or rajahs, whose authority scarcely extended over
+fifty or an hundred families respectively: after the conquest, each of
+these nations was constituted into a province, governed by a Spanish
+Alcalde Mayor. To the east from the nation Tagala are the Camarines,
+whose district has been divided into two provinces, that of Camarines,
+and that of Albay, each under an Alcalde Mayor. The greater part of
+the island is mountainous; it is crossed from the north to the south
+by an immense chain, from which diverge those ramifications that
+spread through the whole island, in many cases even forming detached
+mountains, like insulated cones in the midst of extensive plains. The
+whole of this elevated part of the country occupying nearly all
+the interior, is either a desert, or inhabited by a set of wretched
+people who do not acknowledge the Spanish government. There are in
+this island several volcanos, as that of Mayon, which is between the
+provinces of Albay and Camarines. It has a sugar-loaf figure, and is
+of such altitude that it may be discovered at an immense distance at
+sea. The de Taal is of a similar form, and stands in the middle of a
+large lake, called de Bombon; it exhibits sufficient proof that the
+mountain in whose top the volcano was, while in its active state,
+has sunk, remaining, however, still pretty much elevated above the
+water. There are other volcanos, and many warm springs, indicating
+the fermentation in the bowels of this island, from which, no doubt,
+arise those earthquakes to which it is subject, and which, one day,
+may produce new eruptions. We know that these volcanos at times throw
+out ashes, stones, sand, water, and lava, inundating and destroying
+the habitations, and rendering the fields a desert.
+
+To the south of Luzon lie the principal islands of Mindoro, Panay,
+Marinduque, Negros, Masbate, Zebu, Bohol, Leyte, Samar, besides some
+very small ones, the whole of which we denominate Bisayas, or Islas de
+Pintados, Painted Islands, their inhabitants having been accustomed
+to paint their bodies before our arrival in this quarter. All these
+islands acknowledge the Spanish government, and pay tribute to the
+king, which the corregidores, or Alcaldes Mayores of the provinces
+into which they are divided, collect. More to the south from these
+islands are Mindanao and Jolo. In Mindanao the provinces of Misamis
+and Caraga are subject to the Spaniards: the rest of the island has
+not submitted, and is engaged with Jolo and other islands in constant
+hostility against them; and although there have been occasional
+intervals of peace, they have been of short duration.
+
+For these two centuries past these islanders have been plundering
+the coasts of our provinces, have taken an immense number of vessels,
+pillaged many villages, burnt many towns, destroyed many inhabitants,
+and made slaves of a very great number of the clergy, both Spaniards
+and Indians [1].
+
+We have in Mindanao the garrison of Zamboanga, with a Spanish governor,
+to check these depredations; but as yet we have found little benefit
+from this establishment.
+
+To the east of these islands, at the distance of three hundred leagues,
+are found las Marianas, las Carolinas, and the islands de Palaos,
+or Pelew. Of these, the Marianas alone are under the dominion of the
+Spaniards. Here there is a governor, with a detachment of troops,
+to overawe the Indians, and three Franciscan friars to instruct them
+in the Christian religion.
+
+These islands have no other communication with the rest of the world
+than what is afforded by the Acapulco ship, which, in returning to
+Manila, touches there, with the portion of the revenue appropriated
+to the support of this presidency. By this opportunity they likewise
+receive wine for mass, grain, furniture, clothing, and a few other
+necessaries; this obscure corner producing only horned cattle, hogs,
+fowls, and a few vegetables, such as the bread-fruit and others,
+which serve the inhabitants instead of bread. These supplies are
+annually imported by the governor; and as there is no other store in
+the island than his, the price he fixes is at his own option. From
+this commerce he draws all his income; and under such oppression it is
+not to be wondered at that this colony is as poor as the first day it
+was discovered [2]. Rice, Indian corn, and wheat would grow abundantly
+in these islands, but every attempt to raise them in any quantity,
+has been rendered of no avail by the swarms of rats, which pour down
+from the mountains, and sweep all before them. From the combination of
+these political and natural causes, the situation of the inhabitants
+of these islands is so miserable, that some of our historians would
+persuade us, they entertain no wish to propagate the species, that
+their children may avoid their unhappy lot. On this account, it is
+added, the Indians diminish considerably in number; but this seems
+to be a mistake, as the diminution of the Indians, if it may be so
+called, may be rather attributed to the following cause.
+
+The population of the Marianas, independent of the native Indians,
+consists of many from New Spain, some Philippine Indians, and some
+Chinese, who come in the suite of the governors. These men being
+married to women of the country, the children born of these marriages,
+are registered by the friars on a list of casts, distinguished from
+the Indian casts, from which it clearly appears that, in proportion
+as these mixed casts have increased, the Indian casts must have
+diminished, and, in all probability, in a short time this latter
+cast will be annihilated, as has already happened in some of the
+Spanish settlements. This being the case, we ought not to say the
+Indians diminish but change their cast. With all these casts united,
+our historians would wish us to believe, that there are, at present,
+fewer inhabitants in the Marianas than formerly; but that cannot be
+the case, since the Jesuits, in quitting these islands, left a greater
+population than they found in the year 1738; and the Franciscans
+report that that has increased progressively since. It is certain
+the population does increase, as is clearly shewn by the lists of
+the casts. Indeed the inhabitants of the Philippines have doubled
+every century; and I believe it is the case with all the population of
+America, although foreigners charge us, with occasioning the diminution
+of the Indian population, by our oppressive and bad management,
+quoting our own historians in support of the charge. It ought to be
+recollected, however, that by these, the number of inhabitants which
+the Spaniards found on their arrival, is considerably exaggerated,
+whenever they are desirous of giving additional splendor to the
+actions of the heroes they celebrate; and, on the contrary, when it
+is their object to detract, they draw a very opposite picture, and,
+attempting to diminish their numbers, assert that their diminution
+is the consequence of oppression. From the amount of the tributes,
+however, referred to by these historians, and levied at different
+times, the evident conclusion is, that the Spaniards did not find
+the tenth part of the inhabitants, which are now in existence.
+
+The geographical description of the Philippines is, that they are
+in the torrid zone, between five and nineteen degrees of northern
+latitude; the sun twice passes its zenith, and produces those vapours
+which, descending in copious showers, and being again absorbed by the
+earth, form fountains, hot springs, and large lakes. This rainy or wet
+season lasts while we have the Sun to the north, that is, from about
+May till September, and at times till the beginning of December, from
+which latter period till May there is continual spring. The regular
+winds are the north, the east, and the south-west, and they each
+prevail between three and four months at a time, the change of one wind
+for another, being attended with violent storms of thunder, lightning,
+and, at times, whirlwinds. Indeed these storms are complete hurricanes,
+which run all round the compass in less than twenty-four hours, tearing
+up trees by the roots, and laying waste the whole country. These are
+so frequent, that we may justly complain, considering our proximity
+to the line, of the want of sufficient solar influence, to render
+the climate of these islands more agreeable. It cannot be said that
+we have oppressive heat in the Philippines [3]; there reigns throughout
+the greater part of the year, a most beautiful spring, and if the
+atmosphere were less moist, it would be the most delicious climate in
+the world. To this moist atmosphere, and moderately warm temperature,
+is joined of course a great fertility. The trees are always covered
+with leaves, and the soil with vegetation. The harvests of rice are
+most abundant; the plants shoot up with great beauty immediately,
+but the luxuriance of the soil renders it necessary, continually to
+clear away the weeds, which harbour many insects of a destructive
+kind, and others so dangerous as to diminish greatly the comforts
+and enjoyments of a country, which, in point of fertility, returns
+one hundred fold of rice, the common food of the Indians.
+
+Rice is the principal production of these islands, and it was
+cultivated to much greater extent before the Spaniards arrived here [4].
+They have likewise some pulse, as mongos, patani, kidney-beans,
+and millet. The inhabitants breed up, under the same roof with
+themselves, pigs, fowls, ducks, goats, and even buffaloes. In the
+mountains there are many deer, and the woods and fields produce
+all sorts of pigeons, small birds, quails, a species of partridge;
+woodcocks, &c. Few are disposed to indulge themselves in this latter
+kind of sporting; they apply themselves ardently to hunting the deer,
+to which they are particularly partial. The sea abounds with very rich
+fish, such as the pargo, the eel, the sole, the pampano, the mojarra,
+the garropa, the shad, the tunny, the corvina, the tanguingui, and an
+infinite number of others, caught either with hooks or common nets,
+and likewise with a species of net very much used in these rivers,
+and even out at sea, so constructed that the fish may enter, but are
+unable to escape [5].
+
+In this occupation the inhabitants of these islands take more
+delight than in any thing else, as it is a pursuit which at once
+indulges their indolent habits, and gratifies their partiality
+to fish in preference to animal food. Throughout the country are
+found many other productions, contributing to the support of life,
+and which, though not so relishing as those enumerated above, are
+probably better suited to their relaxed habits; and the pith of the
+palm, shoots of the sugar-cane, green withs, and other succulent
+productions, serve for food to those, who have no desire to labour
+for their subsistence. They cultivate the bread-fruit, beans, the
+cacauate, &c. and they pay particular attention to the palm tree,
+from which they procure both a spirit and an oil, together with a
+sweet-meat, which they call chancaca. There are few fruit-trees,
+and those are bad, with the exception of the plantain, of which
+there is a great variety, and all excellent and fine flavoured,
+and the orange, of which there are two kinds. The mango, a very rich
+fruit, it is imagined, the Spaniards imported from the coast of South
+America. We finish our enumeration with the cultivation of a species
+of the palm tree, which bears a very hard, little fruit of the form
+of a green nut. This being cut, a highly scented kernel, or eye,
+is found enclosed, which is called Itmo. This is laid in lime, to
+make what they call Buyo, which being chewed, produces a red saliva,
+together with a disorder in the mouth, to which they are so habituated,
+that they are uneasy when without it. This custom prevails generally,
+and even many Spaniards adopt it with great avidity. There are in
+this country mines of iron and gold, but of little value, either from
+the indolence of the natives, or the insignificance of these objects
+to the Spaniards, affording too little profit in their commerce with
+Acapulco to deserve attention. Gold is likewise, by washing, separated
+from the sand, which the waters bring down from the mountains.
+
+In Paracale they work the mines in the same manner as they do in New
+Spain, but the natives are so addicted to sloth, it is not possible to
+render them so productive as those of South America. In the mountains
+there is excellent timber for building ships or houses, and the canes
+are of an immense size, very long, and as thick as a man's thigh; of
+these latter the Indians construct their houses, covering them with
+the leaf of the palm. They raise cotton for clothing, which they dye
+various colours with logwood, indigo, and the achiote, a large tree,
+whose seed is used for that purpose. There is great abundance of wax
+and wild honey, amber, pearls, mother of pearl, marble, tar, brimstone,
+and many other objects of less value in a commercial point of view.
+
+To these productions the Spaniards have added horses and horned
+cattle, which have multiplied so much that they are to be found in the
+mountains without an owner, and where those that want may supply their
+wants at pleasure. They likewise introduced sheep, geese, grapes, figs,
+wheat, pepper, coffee, cocoa, sugar, tobacco, and various species of
+plants, which thrive so well, and produce so much, that the Indian,
+with all his sloth, acknowledges the utility of cultivating them.
+
+There are, in these islands, some natural curiosities deserving
+particular notice, such as the paxarillo, a species of small swallow,
+which forms its nest chiefly of the froth of the sea [6], and which is
+held in such estimation by the Chinese, as a principal dish at their
+table, that they purchase it at any price.
+
+The Balate is a species of sea worm, which, likewise, is sold in
+China at a high price. The Siguey, is a small shining shell [7], which
+forms the current money of the Malays. The Tabon, is a bird, which
+lays eggs similar to those of the turkey, burying them very deep in
+the sand on the sea shore, and when hatched by the heat of the sun,
+it tears away the sand that covers them, and the young come out. The
+Caiman, is a species of crocodile; a large and uncouth animal,
+the more curious in this respect, that it is produced from an egg,
+of the same size as that of the duck. The Chacon, is a lizard, which
+takes up its abode in the houses, and repeatedly articulates clearly
+the word toco. The Calo, is a bird, which has a kind of hollow shell
+in his head, and crows, at certain hours of the day, the same as the
+cock. The Taclobo, is a large species of the oyster, the shell of which
+will hold a pitcher of water; indeed they are used as vessels for holy
+water in the churches. Our historians mention many curiosities even
+more rare than these, but I do not enumerate them, as they seem to
+have been ill informed on the subject, and I fear with good reason,
+having been too much under the influence of the marvellous, they have
+given credit to the Indians, who are always desirous of distinguishing
+themselves by the relation of something very uncommon.
+
+With all these productions, the Indians formed a species of
+commerce, or barter, among each other, still considering gold as
+the representative of general value, or medium of exchange; they
+were likewise in the habit of trading with the Chinese, and with
+the Moors of Borneo, for flag-stones, copper, articles of furniture,
+&c. but in very small quantities, their wants being necessarily few,
+going almost naked, baking their rice in green canes, and eating it
+with the leaf of the plantain.
+
+The Spaniards, soon after they came into possession of these islands,
+commenced an extended commerce with India and China, which brought to
+New Spain, a proportionable increase of profit; and in a little time,
+Manila became so rich a colony, that it created a jealousy among
+the merchants of Seville, and, in consequence of their petition,
+its commerce was restricted. From this period it began to decline,
+and to the great detriment of these islands, which cannot subsist
+by the exchange of their own productions alone, these being very
+limited in their nature, and incapable of much extension, surrounded
+as they are by other nations, more industrious, and who can work at
+a cheaper rate [8].
+
+The luxuriant nature of the soil of these islands, has been much and
+justly extolled, but, proper allowance has not been made, for the sloth
+of the Indians, the hurricanes or tempests, which sweep every thing
+before them, the destructive insects, the rats, and many other things,
+which diminish greatly the fertility of these beautiful islands [9].
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+    Of the Inhabitants the Spaniards found in the Philippines--their
+    Language, Customs, and Religion.
+
+
+Our historians, affecting always the marvellous, divide into different
+classes, the inhabitants the Spaniards found, on their first arrival
+in the Philippines. They denominate them satyrs, men with tails,
+sea monsters, and whatever else of the fabulous, is calculated to
+raise wonder in the human mind. In reality, however, they found
+only two classes, that which we know by the appellation of Negroes,
+and that of the Indians. The Negroes are very small in stature,
+and more of a copper colour than those of Guinea, with soft hair and
+flat noses. They lived in the mountains, almost in a state of nature,
+merely covering the forepart of the body, with a piece of the bark of
+a tree; and they subsisted upon roots, and such deer, as in hunting,
+they could kill with the bow and arrow, at which they were very
+dexterous. They slept where night overtook them, and they possessed
+no idea of religion or civilized habits, rather, indeed, ranking with
+beasts than as human beings. The Spaniards, have at length succeeded,
+in domesticating many of them, and converting them to christianity,
+to which they give no opposition, so long as they get subsistence,
+but if they are obliged to labour, for the maintenance of their family,
+they return again to the mountains.
+
+The Negroes, without doubt, were the primitive inhabitants of
+these islands, and they retired to the mountains, on the arrival
+of the Indians. These latter, settling on the sea shore, continual
+hostility prevailed between them, but the Indians were never able,
+to establish themselves sufficiently, to be permitted, even to cut
+wood in the mountains, without paying a tribute for it. At present,
+the influence of the Negroes is very limited, but their antipathy to
+their first invaders, continues unabated; for, if a Negro is killed,
+or dies suddenly, it is customary for another, to bind himself to
+his countrymen by an oath, that he will disappear from among them,
+and that he will not return, until he has avenged the death of his
+friend, by killing three or four Indians, to accomplish which, he
+watches their villages, and the passes in the mountains, and if any
+unfortunately stray from their companions, he murders them.
+
+The origin of these Negroes, some believe to be, from Angola [10],
+though they are not so black as their ancestors, which it is pretended,
+proceeds from the temperature of these islands being milder, and less
+scorching than that of Africa. This possibly may be so, for it is
+well known, that by changing, from a sultry to a temperate climate,
+the blackness of the Negro may be diminished, in the course of a long
+series of generations; yet, the flat nose, and using a dialect of the
+same language, which the Indians of these isles speak, appears to
+prove satisfactorily enough, that the origin of one and the other,
+is nearly the same. The reason assigned, for their not being more
+numerous, is, the influence of the rain, wind, sun, and all those
+inclemencies natural to the climate, to which they are exposed;
+the errors of the government, having reduced them to the condition,
+almost, of wild beasts, in which we now see them [11]. The Indians
+whom the Spaniards found here, were of regular stature, and of an olive
+complexion, with flat noses, large eyes, and long hair. They all
+possessed some description of government better or worse, and each
+nation was distinguished by a different name; but, the similarity
+of their dress and manners, proves that the origin of all of them is
+the same.
+
+They had chiefs, who held their situations, either on account of
+personal valour, or by succession to their fathers, where they
+had abilities to retain it. Their dominion extended over one or two
+villages, or more, according to the means they possessed, of extending
+protection. They were continually at war with the neighbouring
+villages, and continually making each other slaves. Out of these
+wars, arose three classes of people; the chiefs or masters of the
+villages, the slaves, and those whom the chiefs had enfranchised,
+with their descendants, and who, to this day, are called Timavas,
+properly signifying children of liberty. In some places, were found
+Indians whiter than others, descended, without doubt, from Chinese
+or Japanese, who had been shipwrecked on these coasts, and whom the
+Indians, naturally hospitable, received, and allowed to intermarry with
+them; and it is generally believed that the Ygorrotes of Ylocos, whose
+eyes resemble the Chinese, must have originated from the companions of
+Limahon, who fled to those mountains, when Juan de Salcedo compelled
+him to his disgraceful retreat, from the province of Pangasinan.
+
+It is not, however, after all, easy to ascertain the origin of
+these people, but their idiom throws some degree of light on the
+subject. Although the languages these Indians speak, are many and
+different, they have so much intercourse one with another, that it
+may clearly be discovered, they are dialects of the same language, as
+the Spanish, French, and Italian, are derivatives from the Latin. The
+prepositions and pronouns, are nearly the same in all of them; the
+numeral characters, differ very little, and they have many words in
+common, and of one and the same structure.
+
+No doubt can be entertained, that the radical language, from which all
+those dialects spring, prevails from Madagascar to the Philippines,
+with local shades of difference. It is spoken too in New Guinea,
+and in all the islands to the southward, in the Marianas, in the
+islands of San Duisk, in those of Otaheite, and in almost all the
+islands in the South Sea. In one collection of voyages, there are
+given various vocabularies, with such corresponding terminations,
+as the respective travellers, were able to distinguish among these
+islands. It is remarkable, that in these almost all the pronouns, are
+the same with those of the nation Tagala; the numerals, are common
+to all the dialects, used in these islands, and most of the words
+are the same, and with the same signification, as in the language
+Tagala. But, I am the more inclined to believe the identity of
+the dialects, from a conversation which I had with Don Juan Hovel,
+an Englishman, who spoke that of San Duisk, and who had a slave,
+a native of one of those islands. The structure, appeared to be the
+same, as that of the languages spoken in the Philippines; and on the
+whole, I feel confident in the opinion, that they are all dialects of
+the same language, so widely diffused over so large a portion of the
+earth. It is ascertained, that this language, is in common use for
+many thousand leagues, extending from Madagascar to the isles of San
+Duisk, Otaheite, and the isle of Pasquas, which latter, is not more
+than six hundred leagues distant, from the coast of South America. Yet,
+the Indians of the Philippines, do not understand the people of these
+last mentioned islands, when they have occasional intercourse with
+them; nor, even in these islands, do the inhabitants of one province,
+understand those of another. So neither does the Spaniard understand
+the Frenchman, nor the Frenchman the Italian.
+
+In the same collection of voyages, already referred to, we find
+a vocabulary of only five terminations, which the Spaniards have
+distinguished on the coast of Patagonia, and which they have been
+able to assimilate to the language of these islands, and one of
+those is the word balay, which in that country signifies a house;
+and by this same word they designate a house among the Pampangos, and
+the inhabitants of the Bisayas in general. This may be more matter of
+accident than of proof, that the languages of one and the other is the
+same; but on observing, besides this, that the proper names of places
+about the middle of the continent of South America are very similar
+to those of the Philippines, I endeavoured to procure a vocabulary
+of this country, and did not fail to examine, with great diligence
+and attention, the few words of the language of Chili which Ercilla
+mentions in his Araucana, and which I found perfectly conformable to
+the language Tagala. The name Chili is a derivation from this language:
+the Cormorant is called Cachile, and this is a name which the Malays
+give to the sons of their kings. Chilian, which is a town of Chili,
+is a compound from the language of Tagala, in which language the
+termination an gives the signification town. Thus from Cachile we
+draw Cachilian, meaning a town, where there are cormorants. Mapocho,
+which is the situation where the city of Santiago stands, is another
+word of Tagalic composition, signifying a town, and pocquiot being a
+kind of herb, we form the name Mapocquiot, a town in which there is
+abundance of this herb.
+
+In Chili they frequently double the syllables in forming a word,
+as ytayta, biobio, lemolemo, colocolo, &c. and this occurs in the
+Tagala language; for instance, we say ataata, bilobilo, lebomlebom,
+colocolo. A great many other words are either actually of Tagalic
+derivation, or assimilate closely to that language. In examining the
+structure of these two languages we are compelled to conclude that
+they flow from one and the same source, and I dare affirm that the
+Indians of the Philippines are descended from the aborigines of Chili
+and Peru, and that the language of these islands derives immediately
+from the parent source, those of the neighbouring islands being
+dialects of this. Many will urge the absurdity of this supposition,
+on the plea that the more immediate vicinity of the Philippines to
+Malacca must have occasioned them to be colonized by the Malays, as
+our historians generally assert. I do not deny that these islands
+could easily have been peopled by the Malays, but how could they
+colonize the Isles de Palaos and Marianas, which are distant more
+than three hundred leagues? and it is still more improbable that
+they colonized the islands of San Duisk and Otaheite, which are
+distant two thousand leagues from the Philippines. All these people,
+however, have the same language, the same manners and customs, and
+consequently the same origin as our Indians. There is, in my opinion,
+this other reason for supposing these latter islands could not be
+peopled from the westward, viz. that in all the torrid zone the east
+wind generally prevails, which being in direct opposition to the course
+from Malacca and the adjacent islands, it is fair to conclude that the
+inhabitants of all the islands of the South Sea came from the east,
+sailing before the wind; for we have seen it often happen, that the
+Indians from the Palaos have arrived at the Philippines, precisely
+under those circumstances. On the contrary, we have no instance on
+record, of any of the Philippine Indians having been, even by accident,
+carried by the winds to the islands to the eastward. Indeed we know
+the reverse of this to be true, since at times the most experienced
+pilots, in attempting this navigation, have been compelled to return,
+without falling in with the islands they went in search of, from the
+necessity there is in the voyage of being provided with proper nautical
+instruments. Here, therefore, we appear to have found the most probable
+solution of our difficulties, that is, that the first settlers came
+out of the east, we may presume from the coast of South America,
+and proceeding gradually to the westward through the Pacific Ocean,
+studded as we find it with islands, and clusters of islands, at no very
+great distance from each other, and of course of easy access before
+the wind, it follows that to whatever point, in an eastern direction,
+we can trace the Tagalic language, we may conclude that at that point
+emigration must have commenced. Some however dissent from this, on the
+ground, that the mode of writing in use among the Malays, is similar
+to that practised by the inhabitants of the Philippines. This consists
+in forming the lines from the right to the left, like the Arabians,
+Persians, &c. and not like the Chinese, Tartars, and Japanese, from
+top to bottom. Their characters are totally different from ours; they
+have only three vowels, a, e, u, and by placing a point, either above
+or below the consonant, or leaving it without one, the corresponding
+vowel is readily known, and equal facility given as if the vowels
+were specifically inserted. Although they can write, they have no
+written laws; decisions are made on traditionary law generally, but
+too often by the right of the strongest. The Rajah, or chief, with
+the assistance of some of the elders, decides in all civil cases;
+but in criminal cases, the kinsmen are accustomed to compound with
+the aggressor, for a sum in gold, unless in cases of murder, when the
+only atonement admitted, is retaliation; and if the murderer is of a
+different tribe or village, all the community of which the deceased was
+a member, make a common cause, against the tribe or community of the
+murderer, and numbers are generally made slaves on both sides. When
+it is suspected that one man has robbed another, he is obliged to
+draw a stone, from the bottom of a cauldron full of boiling water,
+and if he does not accomplish this, which is the vulgar test, he is
+fined in a certain quantity of gold, the greater part of which goes
+to the Rajah or chief. Adultery is likewise punished with a pecuniary
+fine [12], as is the crime of disrespect to the elders, but for fraud,
+and cheating in their dealings, there is no punishment, and usury
+is very general among them. Their matrimonial customs are peculiar;
+they are allowed to marry only one woman, and although the principal
+people have several concubines, yet they commonly are slaves. They
+are accustomed to marry a relation (not a sister), with whom if they
+find themselves unable to live, or if they become tired of her, they
+return her to her parents, without their being required to assign a
+cause for the divorce. The dowry given on the day of marriage is merely
+restored: this dowry is of two kinds, and which the bridegroom always
+pays. The one is called bigay suso, and is paid to the mother, as a
+compensation for the milk, with which she nourished her daughter. The
+other is called bigay caya, or green dowry, which is set apart for the
+maintenance of the newly married couple, although very often, by the
+expenses of the wedding and apparel, there remains little or nothing
+for this desirable end. Besides these dowries paid by the bridegroom,
+he is obliged, for some years, to serve the parents of the bride [13],
+and assist them on certain days, particularly at the sowing of the
+rice, and getting in the harvest. It is incumbent likewise, on all
+the relations of the bridegroom, to behave with courtesy and respect
+to the bride, and her parents and family, during these years of
+service, and if they are guilty of any lapse in this respect, the
+marriage is declared to be annulled, which is always very agreeable
+to the parents of the woman, as a new suitor presents himself, and
+they reap the benefit of a new service. The bridegroom, to console
+himself for his sufferings, as soon as the term closes, and his
+service is at an end, treats his wife as a slave; she is obliged
+to work for the maintenance of the family, whilst the husband is
+quite idle, and thinks herself happy, if, after having done this,
+she is not beaten. The interest which the parents of the girl,
+thus have in her disposal, is highly pernicious to morals; and we
+have not succeeded to this hour, in the abolition of it, either by
+the influence of royal edicts, or the regulations of the bishops,
+by both of which, it is discouraged and prohibited. The ceremony of
+marriage is performed, by sacrificing a hog, which a priestess slays
+with a thousand grimaces; after which, she bestows many benedictions
+on the parties, and an old woman presenting them with some food,
+the ceremony is closed by many obscenities. Dancing, according to
+their fashion, succeeds, and drinking the rest of the day ends the
+feast, which is always proportionate to the circumstances of the
+newly married pair. The principal contributions to this feast, arise
+from presents made to the bride and bridegroom by their friends,
+of which particular notice is taken, in order that similar presents
+may be returned to the parties on a like occasion.
+
+In their religious ceremonies, they use neither idols nor temples;
+their sacrifices are offered in arbours, which they raise for that
+purpose. They have priestesses, whom they call babailanas or catalonas,
+to whose function it belongs, to perform the sacrifices. The priestess,
+taking a lance in her hand, with extravagant and ridiculous gestures,
+works herself up to apparent frenzy, accompanied by foaming at
+the mouth, when uttering something, which is received as prophecy,
+she pierces the hog with the lance, and immediately distributes the
+carcase among those present: the ceremony, as usual, is closed by
+dancing and drinking.
+
+These sacrifices are offered to the infernal deities, as well as to the
+souls of their ancestors, who they are taught to believe inhabit very
+large trees, rocks of uncommon appearance, or any natural object which,
+in point of magnitude or form, varies from the usual course. They are
+so fully persuaded of this, that they never pass any object of this
+description, without first asking the permission of its visionary
+inhabitant, and to this hour the custom prevails. When any person was
+dangerously ill, his friends offered up to their deities rice, wine,
+and flesh, which was then given to the sick person, and which they were
+of opinion would effect his cure, a custom even yet followed by some
+people. They have many other superstitions, as that of the patianac,
+a spirit or ideal being, whose employment or amusement consists in
+preventing, by certain means peculiar to itself, the delivery of
+a woman in labour. To counteract the malignity of this spirit, the
+husband, fastening the door, reduces himself to a state of complete
+nudity, lights a fire, and arming himself with his sword, continues to
+flourish it furiously, until the woman is delivered. The tigbalang is
+another object of which they stand in great awe. It is described as
+a phantom, which assumes a variety of uncouth and monstrous shapes,
+and interposes its authority, to prevent their performing the duties,
+prescribed by our religion.
+
+These and other superstitions, formerly had extensive influence,
+and are still resorted to by impostors, who find their account in
+persuading those, who are silly enough to listen to them, that they
+are able to cure them of dangerous illness, or to recover any thing
+they may have lost, by having recourse to such absurdities; and so
+much do the love of life, and our own individual interests prevail,
+that although they believe these customs sinful, and although they
+do not entirely give credit to their efficacy, yet they put them in
+practice, because, they say, chance may be in their favour: this is
+a proof that as yet they are very superficial christians [14]. Indeed,
+all their religious impressions, seem rather the result of a slavish
+dread, than the effect of rational piety.
+
+They practise no external adoration, and have no other form of address
+to their gods, than what has been mentioned. They do not believe,
+that the good will be rewarded, or the wicked punished, but they
+acknowledge the immortality of the souls of the deceased, and that
+they are capable of doing them mischief. They persuade themselves,
+that these retain all the natural wants incident to the mortal state,
+and accordingly, place on their tombs, clothes, arms, and food, and
+on the fourth day, when the funeral ceremony is performed, a vacant
+seat is left at the table for the deceased, whom they believe to be
+actually present, though not obvious to sight. To prove this, sand is
+strewed on the floor, on which the prints of the feet of the deceased
+are often found. This may be presumed, to be the pious trick of some of
+the friends, but it answers the purpose, of inducing a belief in the
+actual presence of the party; and in order to deprecate the injury he
+may do, offerings of eatables are made to him, and which ceremony,
+is perfectly conformable, to the cowardly and timorous nature of
+the Indians.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1519 to 1564.
+
+    Comprising the Discovery of the Philippines.
+
+
+After the conquest of the Americas, and discovery of the South
+Sea, Hernando de Magellan, a Portuguese, affirmed there must be a
+communication with that sea by the antarctic pole, and proposed to his
+sovereign, to make the discovery by the route of the Moluccas. The
+king, Don Manuel of Portugal, either not believing there was such
+a passage, or prejudiced against Magellan, received his proposal
+with contempt. This disgusted him, and he came into Spain, where,
+at Saragossa, he was presented to Charles V., to whom he promised
+the complete discovery of the Moluccas, and the adjacent islands,
+within the Spanish line of demarcation, by a distinct route from
+that used by the Portuguese, pursuing his object by the expected
+antarctic passage to the South Sea. By the brief of Pope Alexander
+VI., expedited at Rome the 4th of May 1493, Magellan secured a
+patent, attaching such discoveries to the crown of Castile. This
+brief enjoined, that the globe should be equally divided, by a line
+drawn from the north, by the isles of the Azores, towards the south,
+embracing the conquests, which formed the western boundaries of the
+Atlantic; the portion to the west, to belong to the crown of Spain,
+and leaving to the crown of Portugal, the hemisphere to the eastward
+of this line. Having discovered the Brazils, however, and the king of
+Portugal being desirous of preserving it, he requested his Holiness,
+that the line might be drawn, four hundred and sixty leagues more
+to the westward of the Azores, in order, that no other power, might
+interfere with that valuable acquisition. The line was so drawn on
+the map, and the Moluccas, were accordingly, placed out of the line
+of territory, thus appropriated to the Portuguese, and within that
+of Spain[15]: they were not able, however, at that time, to adjust the
+other point as to the route; but the Cape of Good Hope, interposing
+in their voyages to India, it was not doubted, that America might
+be like this hemisphere, and finish also in a cape, and passage to
+the South Sea. The desire of the Spaniards to take possession of the
+Spice Islands, or, as they were called, the Moluccas, instigated them
+to ascertain the truth of this conjecture; and a squadron of five
+ships, was fitted out for that purpose, viz. La Trinidad, in which
+Magellan himself embarked; San Antonio, La Concepcion, Santiago, and
+La Victoria; the whole manned with two hundred and thirty-four men,
+and paid and victualled for two years.
+
+Magellan sailed from Seville with this armament on the 10th of August
+1519, and on the 13th of December he arrived at the Brazils, and
+coasting the land in quest of the expected passage to the South Sea,
+on Easter day, he entered the Bay of Saint Julian, in fifty degrees
+of south latitude, where he intended remaining, finding the winter
+had commenced in those regions. Here his people mutinied, upon an
+idea that their provisions were exhausted, and that it was impossible
+to discover the pass they were in search of. Magellan quelled this
+mutiny; but immediately after understood, that another had broken out
+in the ship San Antonio, and that the crew had murdered the commander,
+and confined his cousin Alvaro de Mesquita, who was made captain
+on the arrest of Juan de Cartagena. The leader on this occasion
+was Gaspar de Quezada, whom he ordered to be hanged; and setting on
+shore a Franciscan friar and Juan de Cartagena, on account of their
+turbulent disposition, he sailed in prosecution of his voyage, by
+the much desired pass to the South Sea. On the 1st of November 1520,
+he discovered the straits which bear his name; and having occupied
+twenty days in passing through them, he found himself in the South
+Sea with three ships, the Santiago having been wrecked, and having
+separated from the San Antonio, which his cousin commanded, and which,
+by the route of the coast of Guinea, returned to Spain. Magellan, with
+fair winds and pleasant weather, ploughed that sea, which never before
+had been navigated. Uninterrupted in the pursuit of his object, he
+discovered, on the Sunday of Saint Lazarus, a great number of islands,
+which he named the Archipelago of Saint Lazarus; and on Easter Day,
+he arrived at the island of Mindanao, where he ordered the first
+mass which was said in the Philippines. This took place in the town
+of Batuan, in the province of Caraga, where he set up the cross,
+and took possession of these islands, in the name of the King of Spain.
+
+From Batuan, Magellan proceeded to Zebu, and, in passing the island
+of Dimasaua, he formed an alliance with its chief, who accompanied
+him to Zebu. The inhabitants of Zebu, received him with such kindness,
+that their king, Hamabar, his whole family, with the chief of Dimasaua,
+and many of the people of the island, were baptized. The King of Mactan
+alone, a very small island in front of the town of Zebu, resisted
+the Spaniards, and was sufficiently confident in his strength, to
+challenge Magellan, who was weak enough to accept the challenge. He
+selected for the enterprize fifty Spaniards, who attacked the Indians
+in morasses, the water up to their breasts, and approached so near
+them, that Magellan was wounded with an arrow, and died on the field
+with six other Spaniards, the rest saving themselves by flight.
+
+The friar Calancha, an Augustine, remarks in his history of Peru,
+that all those engaged in the discovery of the South Sea, came to no
+very enviable end: for, that a seaman of the name of Lopez, who was
+the first that beheld it from the mast-head, renounced his faith,
+and turned Moor. Basco Nunez de Balbua, who took possession of those
+regions, lost his head; and Magellan himself, finished his days in the
+abovementioned manner. I can add, that almost all those, who have been
+concerned in the discovery of the Philippines, have suffered so much,
+that the history of these islands, forms a tissue of tragedies.
+
+On the death of Magellan, the Spaniards chose Juan Serrano as
+Commander of the expedition; and, alarmed at their defeat at Mactan,
+they remained on board their ships, apprehensive of the treachery of
+the other Indians. In fact, the people of Zebu, began to think lightly
+of the strangers, whom they had hitherto considered as invincible,
+and proceeded to plan their destruction. Abundantly deceitful by
+nature, they concealed their designs, and succeeded in persuading
+our General to be present, with twenty-four Spaniards, at a feast,
+which the chief of Zebu had prepared for him. In the middle of the
+feast, a great number of armed Indians, whom Hamabar had concealed,
+rushed in, and murdered them all, Serrano alone excepted, who escaped
+to the sea side, and implored the assistance of his companions; but
+they, fearful of some new treason, were witnesses of his massacre,
+which the Indians effected in view of the squadron, without their
+attempting to relieve him, or revenge the injury. Juan Carvallo now
+became General of the armament, and he resolved to go from thence,
+in search of the Moluccas: he burned the ship Concepcion, as he had
+not men sufficient to man her, and sailed from Zebu with the Trinidad
+and the Victoria. On the 8th of November he arrived at Tidore, one
+of the Moluccas, and was well received by its chief, who granted him
+a factory for the purpose of collecting cloves, &c.; and on the 21st
+of December, he loaded the two ships with spices, preparing for the
+return to Spain. Gonzalo Gomez de Espimosa commanded the Trinidad, and
+it was his intention to proceed to Panama, but he was captured by the
+Portuguese. Sebastian del Cano, went in the Victoria, by the way of the
+Cape of Good Hope, and, after losing many of his crew on the voyage,
+arrived at San Lucar de Barrameda, with only eighteen people, on the
+7th of September 1522, three years from the time of their departure
+from Seville. He was thus the first, who had sailed round the world;
+and on this account, among other honours, the Emperor gave him for
+his arms, a terrestrial globe, with this motto, Hic primus geometros.
+
+The account which Sebastian del Cano gave of the expedition, induced
+the Emperor, to send other armaments to the Moluccas. The first was
+that of Esteban Gomez, who proposed, by the way of Newfoundland, to
+discover a shorter passage to the South Sea. A squadron was accordingly
+despatched in the year 1524; but in a little time, news was received of
+its dispersion by bad weather. In the year following, Don Fray Garcia
+Jofre de Loaysa, was despatched from Corunna with seven ships, well
+appointed with good officers, and four hundred and fifty picked men;
+among these was Andres de Urdaneta, who afterwards became a friar of
+the order of San Augustine, and directed the expedition of Legaspi
+to these islands. They passed the Straits of Magellan, with the loss
+of one ship, and entering the South Sea, they encountered so severe
+a storm, that the whole squadron was separated. Loaysa pursued his
+course; and in a short time afterwards died. By order of the Emperor,
+Sebastian del Cano was to succeed to the command, but he surviving
+only a few days, it devolved on Martin Yanez, a Biscayan. They arrived
+at Tidore on the 31st of December 1526, as did, in a short time, the
+remainder of the squadron, with few men, and those unserviceable. Here
+they found, that the Portuguese had declared war against the chief
+of Tidore, for having entertained the squadron of Magellan, and it
+was deemed on our part proper, to undertake the defence of those
+benefactors of the Spaniards. They had several encounters with the
+Portuguese, but of no moment, and few were killed on these occasions;
+but the number of sick increased considerably, from the length and
+hardships of the voyage; and from the humid nature of the climate,
+the whole were threatened with rapid dissolution; being therefore
+already reduced to one hundred and twenty, they constructed a fort,
+and surrounding it with a palisade, placed themselves under the
+command of Hernando de la Torre, who was chosen General after the
+death of Martin Yanez.
+
+In this situation, were the remains of the armament under Loaysa
+found, when the Viceroy of Mexico, by orders from court, despatched
+to Molucca three ships, under the command of Alvaro de Saavedra,
+who arrived at these islands, by the route of the Ladrones, now
+called Marianas, of which he took possession, in the name of his
+Majesty the King of Spain, in the year 1528. Saavedra pursued his
+voyage to Tidore, where he found the hundred and twenty Spaniards,
+shut up in their fortress. They considered him, as an angel sent
+to their relief, in the extremity of misery: but this joy was of
+short duration, new quarrels springing up with the Portuguese, who
+had succeeded in destroying, nearly all the Spanish ships. They at
+last, however, commenced their voyage to New Spain. Twice they made
+the attempt, twice they were driven back; and they suffered so much,
+that the General, with many of the crews, fell a sacrifice; the few
+that remained, being compelled to submit to the Portuguese. This
+was a most lamentable conclusion of the expedition; but all our
+squadrons, having represented the Moluccas as extremely valuable,
+on account of their spices, war was on the point of being declared,
+between the two kingdoms, about the possession of them. The Spaniards
+alleged, that it could not be denied, these islands were in the line
+of demarcation of Spain; and the Portuguese, were unwilling to quit
+the spice trade, of which they were in possession, and which so much
+enriched the mother country. These differences were adjusted about
+the year 1529, the Emperor, renouncing his right to the Moluccas,
+for three hundred and fifty thousand ducats, by way of loan, advanced
+by the King of Portugal.
+
+Thus abandoning the Moluccas, the Emperor turned all his thoughts
+to the conquest of the Western Isles, or Philippines. He despatched
+instructions to the Viceroy of Mexico, to send a squadron for that
+purpose, with directions not to stop at the Moluccas, in order to
+avoid creating jealousy among the Portuguese. In obedience to these
+orders from court, the Viceroy immediately fitted out five ships in
+the Puerto de Natividad, and nominated as Commander of the expedition,
+Ruy Lopez de Villalobos, directing him, to take with him four Augustine
+friars, for the conversion of the conquered inhabitants. The squadron
+sailed on the day of All Saints, in the year 1542, and arrived safe
+off the Philippines; but they were driven so much to leeward, by the
+south-west monsoon, prevalent at that time, that they were compelled
+to anchor at the island of Sarragan, which lies on the opposite coast
+of Mindanao, and at forty leagues distance. In this miserable island,
+they suffered so much from hunger, that Villalobos sent some of the
+smaller vessels, in search of provisions, to the other islands: but,
+their return being delayed beyond his expectation, he resolved to sail
+for the Moluccas, though it was in direct opposition to his orders,
+without having effected any other object, than administering baptism to
+one child. The Portuguese received him very ungraciously, and compelled
+him, immediately to make the best of his way to Spain. In passing
+Amboyna, he died of a deep melancholy, arising out of the disasters
+of the expedition, and the idea of having disobeyed the orders of
+his sovereign, which were, on no account to visit the Moluccas. By
+the death of the General, the whole armament was deranged; indeed it
+was, eventually, almost all annihilated; and the few Spaniards who
+remained, found means to embark in different Portuguese ships. The
+Augustine friars went to Goa, from whence they found a passage to
+Europe, and arrived at Lisbon in August 1549, seven years after they
+had departed from the Puerto de Natividad.
+
+As his Catholic Majesty, was fully determined on the conquest of the
+Philippines, it is necessary to notice the title, by which he laid
+claim to them. Our writers have brought forward a number of arguments,
+to prove the right, which the Kings of Spain have to the Americas,
+and the islands they have conquered; but I find them very superficial,
+and only one incontestable document, by which our sovereigns hold
+these dominions, that is, the concession of the Roman Pontifs. It
+is now the received opinion of churchmen, that the Popes have not
+the power to make such grants, but at the period in question, the
+contrary opinion prevailed, and was generally acknowledged in the
+schools. Supported by this idea, then so universal, the Papal See,
+granted to the respective Kings, not only what they conquered, but,
+as we have seen, assumed the right, of even partitioning the globe.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1564 to 1565.
+
+    Of the Conquest of Zebu, and Discovery of the Route to New Spain.
+
+
+The glory of conquering the Philippines, was reserved for his Catholic
+Majesty Philip II., by means of, the valour of Miguel Lopez de
+Legaspi, the prudence of the Augustine friars, and the skill of one
+of those friars, Andres de Urdaneta, who had been a captain in the
+armament of Loaysa, but subsequently took the habit of San Augustine
+in Mexico, in the year 1552. His Majesty issued an edict, encouraging
+and recommending an expedition, to be sent by the Viceroy of Mexico,
+to the western isles. Friar Urdaneta acquiesced in the will of his
+sovereign, and the Viceroy chose five other religious of the same
+order, viz. Andres de Aguirre, Martin de Rada, Lorenzo Ximenes (who
+died in the Puerto de Natividad), Diego Herrera, and Pedro Gamboa,
+with the view to a spiritual, as well as temporal conquest. This
+squadron was composed of two ships, one small galleon, and a patache
+(a vessel so called). The command was given to Miguel Lopez de Legaspi,
+a noble Biscayan, from whose valour and prudence, the Viceroy expected
+greater results, than had been obtained from the other expeditions. The
+fleet sailed from Puerto de Natividad on the 21st November, 1564,
+with sealed orders; and when about a hundred leagues from the coast,
+the seals being broken, they found directions to proceed to these
+islands. Urdaneta had formed his plan, on the idea conceived by the
+Viceroy of first making New Guinea, but, obliged to conform to the
+royal instructions, he shaped his course nearly due west, in order to
+arrive at the ninth degree of latitude, and from thence to run direct
+west, to demand the submission of those islands, which lie between
+the ninth and tenth degree, passing by the islands of Arrecifes and
+Matalotes, together with those of La Nublada and Rocapartida, the two
+latter being too far out of the track. On the 31st of December, the
+patache separated, as if by accident, and never rejoined the squadron;
+Don Alonzo de Arellano was her commander, and Lopez Martin, a Mulatto,
+the pilot; and there was reason to believe that the separation was
+intentional, as it afterwards proved, that they went to Mindanao,
+where, taking in a cargo of gold and spices, they proceeded to New
+Spain. The squadron pursued its course, and on the 9th of January,
+1565, discovered an island, which Legaspi called Barbudos, because
+the inhabitants wore longer beards than the other Indians. On the
+22d they discovered the islands Ladrones, where they remained some
+days, taking in water and purchasing fresh provisions, which they
+procured from the Indians, in exchange for European commodities,
+especially iron, an article in great esteem with them. These Indians
+pilfered whatever they could lay their hands on, and assaulted our
+people while procuring water; yet, many Spaniards were desirous of
+remaining among them, and petitioned the General to found a colony
+there, and despatch a ship to Acapulco for that purpose; but having no
+orders to that effect, he prosecuted his route on the 3d of February,
+and on the 13th discovered the Philippines. At Tandaya, and Abuyo,
+he attempted to make an amicable arrangement with the inhabitants,
+for provisions, making presents to them, and promising, that he would
+pay liberally for every thing; but he could only procure one fowl
+and one egg. The stock of provisions, was now, however, becoming so
+short, that he deemed it necessary, to run in more among the islands,
+in search of a supply. They arrived at Bohol, and found the Indians
+had retired to the mountains. They had behaved so kindly, in selling
+provisions to those, whom Ruy Lopez de Villalobos had sent for that
+purpose, that Legaspi was astonished at their reserve, and could not
+conceive the cause of this change, until the pilot of a Bornean vessel
+discovered it. This vessel was taken by Colonel Matheo del Sauz,
+in the following manner. The General, had sent him to reconnoitre
+the vessel, and the Borneans, little acquainted with Europeans and
+their customs, and believing they came to make prisoners of them,
+received them in a hostile manner with their cannon [16], killing one
+soldier, and wounding twenty. The Colonel returned their fire, and
+killed their captain; when part of the crew escaped, in a small boat,
+which they carry in the prow of their junk (the name they give their
+vessels), and the pilot, with six men, delivered themselves up, without
+further resistance. All this having taken place, without the knowledge
+or participation of the General, he was extremely solicitous, to do
+away the ill impression, which the transaction might make, and ordered
+them to restore the junk, with all the effects which they had taken;
+and which conduct so satisfied the Borneans, that they immediately
+declared publicly, they should interest themselves particularly, in
+favour of the squadron. They informed Legaspi, among other matters,
+that about two years since, some Portuguese of the Moluccas, had
+landed on their island, had been guilty of great extortion, and had
+done considerable injury to the inhabitants; and as they could not
+distinguish between the two nations, they had imagined that the people
+of his squadron were Portuguese.
+
+Legaspi was aware, that it was necessary, above all things, to
+undeceive the Indians in this respect; he, therefore, earnestly
+requested the pilot of the Bornean vessel, to go on shore, and effect a
+reconciliation with the natives of Bohol, bringing on board the Rajah
+of the island, if possible. The Moor, in gratitude to the Spaniards,
+exerted himself, and returned on board with the Rajah, Sicatuna, who
+was persuaded to enter into an amicable understanding with them, to be
+consecrated and confirmed, in the manner usual with these islanders,
+which is thus; the parties entering into a treaty of friendship being
+bled at the arm, and the blood mixed with a little water, or spirit,
+they reciprocally drink each other's blood, so diluted, in token of
+amity. Legaspi, with this view, sent a soldier of the name of Santiago
+on shore, to go through the ceremony with Sicatuna; but the latter,
+thinking it below his dignity, to allow his blood to be drawn, with any
+but that of the General, ordered his son to take his place, promising,
+that the day following, he would proceed on board, and be bled with
+the General. Sicatuna, jealous of the intentions of the Spaniards,
+requested, that whilst he was on board, two Spaniards and two Moors of
+Borneo, might be sent on shore, as hostages for his safety; on this
+being likewise adjusted, he allowed them to cut wood in the mountains
+of Bohol, for refitting their ships; and in ratification of the whole,
+he was bled with the General the following day. Legaspi, in the belief
+that Sicatuna was King of the island, on this account consented to the
+ceremony; and although he afterwards understood, that the dominion of
+the Rajahs of this country, extended over a few small villages only,
+where they exercised the power, their valour gave them over their
+countrymen, he had no reason to repent of what he had done; for,
+in consequence of it, the Indians became free from apprehension,
+and supplied the squadron with the refreshments, it stood so much in
+need of.
+
+Legaspi paid well for every thing they brought; and, at length,
+procured sufficient provisions, to be in a situation to despatch one
+ship to New Spain, but was unable to accompany it; and he did not wish
+to have recourse to violence, to procure a larger supply, thinking
+that unjustifiable and unwise, except in case of extremity. With the
+people of Zebu, he was inclined to conclude, he should be obliged to
+have recourse to arms, unless they supplied him, on friendly terms,
+with provisions; and he intended to use, as a pretext for hostilities,
+their treachery against the squadron of Magellan. He resolved,
+therefore, to go to this island, in quitting that of Bohol, with the
+inhabitants of which, a cordiality had subsisted from the first; and
+as a proof of his sense of their conduct, he settled every account
+with them, most honourably. To this justice and prudence of Legaspi,
+may be attributed the easy conquest, the Spaniards made of this island,
+against whose natives, they seldom have been obliged to use fire-arms.
+
+On Easter day, the 22d of April, Legaspi accordingly sailed from
+Bohol, and on Friday the 27th, he arrived at Zebu, when he immediately
+despatched an interpreter named Pacheco, to propose amity with the
+natives, and that the Rajah might be sent to conclude the terms. Tupas,
+who was then King of Zebu, immediately sent some of the chief men,
+requesting Legaspi would not fire his artillery, which would alarm
+the town: and he promised to see the General, although he had no such
+intention, merely wishing to gain sufficient time, for the inhabitants
+to retire into the mountains, with all their moveables. It appearing
+the following day, that Tupas did not comply with his promise, three
+notifications were, in the space of two hours, sent to him by a notary,
+accompanied by Friar Urdaneta, who had the title of Protector of the
+Indians; but he paid no attention to this, and placed troops on the
+shore, and in canoes, to resist the landing of the Spaniards. Legaspi
+then determined on the assault, and ordered his men to fire on the
+canoes and Indians, who were posted to oppose them; but they retreated
+with such rapidity, that when the Spaniards leaped on shore, no enemy
+was to be seen. They followed them to the town, and found it in flames,
+the moveables having been taken away, and carried to the mountains, and
+little of any value remaining. The soldiers plundered those houses,
+which as yet, were not on fire, and among some things of little
+importance, they found a jewel, consisting of the image of a child,
+which they understood, was an object of adoration with the Indians,
+and which is at this day, in the church of San Augustine de Santo
+Nino of Zebu. The Indians, it appeared, had been in possession of
+this image, from time immemorial; and they were accustomed, when they
+wanted rain, to make a solemn feast, and public supplication to it,
+and, carrying it to the sea side, they immersed it in the water until
+it rained; honours or stripes, followed the concession or refusal,
+of what they had petitioned for, and it was believed among them, that
+this Santo Nino was the cause of the disgrace of Magellan. At first,
+the Spaniards found very few eatables in Zebu, but continuing their
+search, they stumbled upon thirty fanegas of rice, and some millet. In
+returning from the town, they encountered three hundred armed Indians;
+but upon our musquets being fired, they fled immediately. The General
+established his camp on the sea shore, and took out the Royal treasure
+which came in the Capitana, in order to be enabled to examine her
+bottom, and put her in a proper state, for her return to New Spain. The
+Spaniards found themselves perfectly secure in this encampment, in
+the day-time, because the Indians dared not attempt to molest them,
+through fear of their fire-arms; but at night, they occasioned them
+continual alarms, and on several occasions, set fire to their camp,
+doing however, little damage to the soldiers, who were defended by the
+palisades. The General however, in consequence of this, ordered the
+whole to be destroyed, and built a fort, which at once checked all
+further attempts. As yet, Legaspi kept on the defensive, expecting
+that Tupas would soon arrive, with whom he was desirous of being in
+amity, with a view to the conquest of the island by fair means. After
+repeated messages he at last appeared, accompanied by another chief,
+called Tamayan. Legaspi received them with cordiality, treated them
+handsomely, and, in the name of his sovereign, forgave the treachery,
+they had been guilty of towards Magellan. They made many excuses for
+their conduct, and promised that in three days they would return, with
+all the principal people, and establish a friendly intercourse with
+the Spaniards. These people will readily promise, whatever is demanded
+of them, but without any intention of performing their promise. Tupas,
+though King of the island, did not appear better entitled to respect,
+than any of the rest, and thought nothing of breaking his word,
+always, however, making some excuse on the succeeding visit.
+
+Notwithstanding the peaceable demeanor of the Indians, the General
+ordered, that no one should be permitted to quit the camp, as he
+apprehended an ambuscade, which might have a fatal issue. This,
+in fact, happened to Pedro de Arana, one of Legaspi's aides-de-camp,
+who, disregarding this order, passed the lines alone with his gun, and
+before he was able to save himself, he was run through with a lance,
+and his head cut off, and carried on board a parao, which was lying at
+a little distance. The General felt the loss of Pedro de Arana much,
+and gave orders to the Colonel, to chastise the insolence of the
+Indians, and reduce them. Whilst the Colonel was employed in this
+expedition, the General, who had been accustomed to sleep on board
+ship, determined to pass his nights on shore in future, through some
+distrust he entertained, of the officers of the navy, and ordered,
+that his aides-de-camp should keep guard over him. They did not
+relish the thoughts of this, persuading themselves, they would be
+degraded, by obeying the orders. The day following therefore, at a
+general review of the force, Pedro Mena, in the name of the whole,
+came forward, and, with very little ceremony, intimated that they
+would not keep guard, as it was the duty of the privates. The Colonel
+reprehended them sharply, suspended them, and struck them out of
+the list of aids-de-camp of the General. This punishment for their
+insolence, though fully merited, exasperated them to such a degree,
+that they set fire to their tents, and had nearly burnt all the effects
+belonging to his Majesty. The principal perpetrators of this crime,
+were Pedro de Mena, and Terresan, who were executed the following day,
+and by this act, the subordination of the rest was secured.
+
+The ship Capitana, was by this time prepared, for her voyage to New
+Spain. Her commander was Phelipe de Salcedo, grandson of the General;
+and there went in her, the friars Andres de Urdaneta, to conduct her
+to New Spain, and Martin de Aguirre, to solicit assistance for the
+conversion of these islanders. They sailed from Zebu on the 1st of
+June, 1565, and reaching the 36th degree of latitude, in search
+of the north-west winds, they directed their course to Puerto
+de la Natividad, where they arrived, after a four months voyage;
+but considering the distance of this port from Mexico, they pushed
+forwards to Acapulco, which was nearer, and they arrived there on the
+30th of October. In Mexico, their arrival occasioned much exultation,
+as they were considered to be lost, by the accounts which had been
+given, by the Captain Arellano and the pilot Lope Martin, who, three
+months before, had arrived at Puerto de la Natividad. The friars
+Urdaneta and Aguirre went to Madrid, where they met with Arellano,
+who was soliciting a reward, for the discovery of the track from the
+Philippines to New Spain. He had persisted in his pretensions, till
+the arrival of these friars, when he altered his tone; he was put in
+confinement, and ordered to Mexico, to be from thence sent to Manila,
+to be punished by Legaspi as his conduct deserved. The Mexicans,
+however, were of opinion, that he should not be sent to Manila, until
+the death of Legaspi was ascertained. The friars Urdaneta and Aguirre,
+having favourably completed their mission, embarked for Mexico, where
+Urdaneta died on the 3d of June, 1568, in the 70th year of his age.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1565.
+
+    Of the complete Conquest of the Island of Zebu, and of some Towns
+    in other Islands.
+
+
+The day following that, on which the Capitana sailed, a Moor of Borneo,
+called Cid Hamal, established in this island, arrived in our camp. He
+recommended it to the General, to invite Tupas to a conference;
+and upon this being done, he accordingly presented himself a second
+time, with some of the chief men of the island, and the conference
+terminated, in their resolution to preserve a good understanding with
+the Spaniards. They paid homage to the king of Spain, promising, that
+the squadron should be supplied with provisions, at the price usual
+among themselves, and granting land, and every means of founding a
+Spanish city, with fortifications for its defence. Amity thus restored,
+the Indians began to re-build their town, and a very short time,
+exhibited the pleasing sight, of the individuals of two different
+nations, establishing themselves at a little distance from each other.
+
+The Zebuans lost all apprehensions of the Spaniards, and came to
+their town to sell fruit, goats, and provisions. Among the least
+reserved was Tupas, who, under the pretext of accompanying other
+chiefs, visited the General, making him presents; and so contrived
+that his women should visit him likewise, dressing themselves in rich
+clothes, with ear-rings and bracelets of gold on the feet and arms,
+and accompanied by a great concourse of men and women; which visit was
+not ill received, the General always treating them handsomely. Tupas
+likewise, gave Legaspi his niece, who was a widow, and other women to
+attend him. The General directed them to be instructed in the Christian
+doctrine, and they embraced our religion, and were baptized. The
+niece of Tupas, had the name of Isabel given her, in memory of the
+deceased lady of the General, whose name this was, and in a little
+time she was married to Maestre Andrea, an officer of the squadron.
+
+The provisions which they had in the island of Zebu, were not
+sufficient for the Indians and their numerous guests; in consequence
+of which, Legaspi directed Tupas, to send two chiefs to the island
+of Panay, to purchase rice. Whilst these men were on their mission,
+the Spaniards sailed, in vessels which they had constructed at Zebu,
+on an expedition against some towns, belonging to the enemies of the
+Zebuans, and were enabled to send some rice to those in the camp. The
+Moors likewise of the island of Lucon, who came for commercial purposes
+to Zebu, sold them two hundred baskets of this grain; but as the
+return of the two ships which had gone to Panay, was still delayed
+beyond the expected time, Legaspi was compelled to put every man
+on an allowance, which produced great discontent among the people,
+and some even adopted the resolution of escaping with the patache
+San Juan, with the intention of lying in wait behind the islands,
+to rob the small barks that came there for commerce, and with their
+spoils to retire to France. The authors of this conspiracy were Pablo
+Hernandez and Juan Maria Venecianos; and they were joined in it by
+the pilot Francis Pierres Plin, Jorge el Griego, Maestre Andrea, the
+husband of Tupas's niece, Geronimo Foxa, and some foreigners. They
+fixed on the 26th of November, 1565, for their undertaking, intending
+previously to endeavour to disable all the ships, in order that they
+might not be pursued. It pleased Heaven to retard their scheme one
+day beyond the time fixed, and Juan Maria Venecianos repenting of his
+treason, discovered the conspiracy to Colonel Matheo del Sauz. The
+conspirators were immediately all apprehended, except Pablo Hernandez,
+who escaped into the country among the Indians. The whole underwent
+an examination, and Legaspi ordered that Francis Pierres Plin,
+and Jorge el Griego, should be hanged by break of day. It was his
+intention to have followed up the punishment of the conspirators,
+and he was proceeding to hang Maestre Andrea. The clergy, however,
+entreated him to pardon him, on account of his near relationship
+to Tupas, to which he assented. Pablo Hernandez, pressed by hunger,
+was compelled to deliver himself up, and as he was the ringleader,
+he was executed in the middle of the day by proclamation, and his head
+placed on a pole, as a warning to others. A pardon was granted to all
+the rest in the name of the King, and by this due mixture of severity
+and lenity, the minds of the General and the friars were tranquillized.
+
+Famine, at this time, was likely to be the lot of the Spaniards,
+as the chiefs who had been sent to Panay had not appeared; and as
+six more paraos had been despatched for the same purpose, it was
+apprehended that they had entered into a combination with the first,
+to reduce the Spaniards by famine. In this situation, Captain Martin
+de Goite set sail, with the intention of taking by force, from the
+enemies of the Zebuans, as much provision as could be procured, and
+executed his plan with so much success, that by Christmas he sent
+to the camp a small vessel laden with borona (bread made of Indian
+corn and millet). This proved the most acceptable new year's gift,
+which could have been offered under their circumstances; by degrees
+provisions became more plentiful, and the people began to revive,
+and forget the famine they had endured. The chiefs now made their
+appearance from Panay with the rice, but they assigned little of it
+to the Spaniards, and the largest quantity to the Indians.
+
+The General was well aware of the treachery of the Zebuans, of the
+little faith to be placed in them, and their doubtful intentions;
+but he dissembled his sentiments, as they were necessary to his
+views, and our camp was tolerably well supplied. By the expeditions,
+which Martin de Goite and others made round the adjacent islands,
+it was discovered that some of the towns courted the friendship of
+the Spaniards, while others planned their destruction by famine, for
+which purpose all the provisions were conveyed to the mountains. The
+Moors of Luzon, however, found it their interest to bring sufficient
+rice to Zebu, and Legaspi, who did not wish to see a recurrence
+of the same danger as had happened, sent the Colonel in search
+of provisions to the neighbouring islands; but here he encountered
+another inconvenience, in leaving too small a force for the defence of
+Zebu; the consequence of which was, that a plot was formed to seize a
+vessel belonging to the Moors of Luzon, at that time trading at Zebu,
+to murder all on board, and escape with the vessel to the Moluccas,
+where the Portuguese would willingly receive them. Juan Nunes de
+Carrion, and Miguel Gomez Cavecillas, were executed for this piece
+of treason, after due repentance of their villainy. Captain Martin de
+Goite, with the provisions he forwarded, at length sent information,
+that many nations were desirous of becoming vassals of the King of
+Spain, and the Colonel soon after arrived with above one thousand
+fanegas of rice, after having stopt at the islands of Mindanao,
+Negros, and Panay, where he ransomed a Mexican Indian, who had been
+in the squadron of Villalobos, and had been taken prisoner. Captain
+Juan de la Jela, who had likewise gone out in search of provisions,
+had the good fortune to discover the ship San Geronimo, which he
+conducted to Zebu; a circumstance which filled every one with joy,
+mingled with regret, at the thoughts of the tragic scenes which had
+been acted on board that ship.
+
+The Royal Audience of Mexico had despatched the ship San Geronimo from
+Acapulco to relieve those at Zebu, and to advertise them of the arrival
+of the Capitana at that port. They sent as captain of the ship Pedro
+Sanchez Pericon; as second in command, Juan Ortez de Mosquera, and as
+pilot the mulatto Lope Martin, who was sent for the express purpose
+of being punished by Legaspi, for having separated, intentionally,
+from the squadron in the patache San Lucas. Pericon and Mosquera had
+been, before the commencement of the voyage, inimical to each other,
+and in its progress their mutual antipathy was augmented. The pilot,
+Martin, dreading the idea of being confronted with Legaspi, entered
+into a plot with Mosquera, and they gained over to their party most
+of the crew, among whom was Philip de Ocampo, a brave man, but of the
+worst character. Thinking their strength sufficient, they commenced
+their operations by being insolent to the commander, and one night
+they killed a horse which he had brought in the galleon. The friends
+of Pericon conjured him to be on his guard, as they concluded that
+those who had begun by killing the horse, would end in murdering him,
+if he was not sufficiently vigilant. But Pericon's confidence was too
+great, and he slighted the advice of his friends. The conspirators by
+this forbearance increasing every day in boldness, at last resolved to
+put in practice their diabolical design of murdering the commander, and
+getting possession of the vessel; accordingly one night, after having
+placed guards on those of the crew whom they could not confide in,
+Mosquera entered the captain's bedroom, accompanied by two seamen,
+one of the name of Bartolome de Lara, and the other Morales, and
+ordered them to stab Captain Pericon and his son, a young man about
+twenty-five years of age, who had a sub-command in the ship. They
+effected their purpose, and threw the bodies overboard; and placing
+some chests on the deck for the accommodation of the people, Mosquera
+thus harangued them: "Gentlemen, let us recommend to Heaven the souls
+of Captain Pericon and his son; they came by their death for reasons
+which, when we arrive at Zebu, shall be given to General Legaspi;
+every thing shall remain unaltered, and I, as a good subject of his
+Majesty, will conduct the ship to that island."
+
+Many days had not elapsed before Mosquera and the pilot quarrelled;
+it was a difficult task for the latter to reconcile himself to his
+situation, and put on the mask of friendship to the former. He
+whispered to Mosquera in confidence, that the people were much
+irritated at the murders which had been committed, and among other
+things, he proposed to tranquillize them, by putting in irons some
+person who had been concerned in the affair, and afterwards to
+discharge him, under the authority of a notarial process, drawn up
+for that purpose, declaring his innocence. This appearing a plausible
+measure enough, Mosquera, with this view, foolishly convened the ship's
+company, and the pilot seized upon him, and put him in confinement. The
+day following he ordered breakfast, of which Mosquera partook in
+his irons, and when finished, he requested the pilot would set
+him at liberty, as there had been time sufficient allowed for the
+ceremony. The views of the mulatto, however, were very different;
+he ordered him to be hung at the yard-arm, without giving him time
+to confess, observing, that Divine Providence had ordered he should
+die without partaking the sacrament, as had been the case with the
+two whom he had murdered. The mulatto now remaining captain of the
+ship, Philip de Ocampo, who was his favourite, made a speech to his
+companions, telling them, "That Captain Lope Martin did not intend
+going to Zebu; that those who were desirous of accompanying him,
+should go to a part of the world where all might acquire great
+riches, but that those who were of a different opinion, should be
+set on shore on an island in the immediate neighbourhood of Zebu,
+from whence they might easily reach Legaspi." All were silent, and
+nothing was done till they arrived at the islands of Barbudos; when
+Lope Martin landing on one which was desolate, gave out that it was
+necessary to careen the ship there, but his real intention was to
+leave most of his companions on this island, exposed to famine.
+
+He was not, however, able sufficiently to conceal his intentions. The
+Friar Capellan, a venerable priest, suspected him, and consulted
+with Juan de Vivero on some means of averting this blow. Rodrigo de
+Angle, the mate of the ship, a man of approved courage, determined
+to appeal to his Majesty, if it cost him his life, broke the matter
+to others, and eventually drew to his party Bartholome de Lara,
+by promising to make him captain of the ship, although he had no
+such intention. Rodrigo finding he had gained most of the crew on
+board to his side, weighed anchor, and hallooed to those on shore,
+that all the true and faithful vassals of his Majesty might embark
+immediately, and that the ship belonged to the King. By this means
+all were received on board but Lope Martin and Philip de Ocampo,
+and about twenty-five others, among whom were some loyalists, who
+were unable to reach the ship in time.
+
+Bartholome de Lara, disappointed in his expectations of being made
+captain of the ship, began to form a party, and was joined more from
+necessity than otherwise by Hernando de Morales, his accomplice in
+the murder of Pericon and his son; but the new captain contrived
+means to try and hang them, after which the crew remained free from
+further molestation, and they arrived at Zebu. The General Legaspi, to
+deter others, hanged the notary Juan de Zaldivar, for being accessory
+to the aforesaid murder. He rewarded Rodrigo del Angle, Garnica,
+and Juan Enriquez, with all the loyalists, and granted a pardon,
+in the name of the King, to all those who had acted any subordinate
+part in this transaction.
+
+The Colonel, at this time, had gone to ratify a treaty of peace
+with some of the towns, and falling in with a small Portuguese
+galleon of superior force, which bore down upon his patache, he
+was compelled to escape as well as he could. About the same time,
+two Portuguese vessels having appeared off Zebu, Legaspi ordered
+them to be acknowledged as friends, and invited into the harbour,
+but they excused themselves, and prosecuted their route. These proved
+afterwards to be ships belonging to the squadron of Pereyra, which
+was coming against the Spaniards, but being dispersed by storms,
+they could not pursue their first intentions. The General fortified
+his camp, and entertaining no fears of the Portuguese, he despatched
+Martin de Goite on an amicable treaty with some adjacent towns,
+and to receive the tribute of those who had already submitted. He
+likewise sent the Colonel to Mindanao, for the purchase of cinnamon,
+to be shipped to New Spain. This expedition was unfortunate in the
+death of this great man, who was a severe loss to the Spaniards. He
+caught a fever, and being in great danger, he told Morones, his second
+in command, and to whom he entrusted the ship before he died, that he
+suspected an intention of mutiny among the crew; the object of which
+was, to go off with the patache, because they had not been allowed to
+purchase cinnamon for themselves, and which being the only valuable
+object for which the voyage was undertaken, belonged to the King, as
+being the first purchase made of that article. Legaspi paid him the
+usual funeral honours in Zebu, and punished those who were found to
+be concerned in this mutiny. He likewise named as his successor Martin
+de Goite. The General sent Morones to Caraga, and Pedro de Herrera to
+Leyte, for tar, for careening the ships. The Indians of this island are
+excellent porters and labourers, and our soldiers had such confidence
+in them, that leaving their arms, and relying on their friendship, they
+received the tar in an unguarded manner. This, however, in the end,
+cost them dear, as on a sudden they found themselves surrounded in an
+ambuscade, by eight or ten Indians to one Spaniard; and Matheo Sanchez
+Gaditano not being able to extricate them, the Indians murdered all but
+one Spaniard, who escaped to relate the news of this tragedy. Whilst
+this was passing up the country, others came down to plunder the ship,
+who finding our people in unsuspecting security, possessed themselves
+of their arms, and destroyed every thing they could not take away.
+
+On the 10th of June, 1567, there arrived at Zebu two Portuguese
+caracoas, with letters from Captain Pereyra to Miguel Lopez de Legaspi,
+in which he observed, that he supposed they were the Spaniards who had
+taken refuge in Zebu, in consequence of bad weather, and were unable
+to return to New Spain, as had happened to those of the other Spanish
+squadrons which had navigated those seas; and on this supposition he
+invited them to the Moluccas, where he promised to receive them with
+every degree of friendship, and furnish them with proper necessaries
+to prosecute their voyage.
+
+Such were the contents of his letter on the occasion, but some invalid
+Spaniards who came with the messenger, affirmed that Pereyra had
+been despatched by the Viceroy of India to drive the Spaniards out
+of Zebu, and not being able last year to effect it, in consequence
+of the storms they had encountered, they had remained in Tidore with
+the intention of completing it this year. Our General, aware of the
+snare which Pereyra was laying for him, answered this specious letter
+with corresponding dissimulation, and that he had given notice to his
+court of the capture of these islands, and was in daily expectation
+of hearing from his sovereign. Surrounded by these interruptions and
+difficulties, the General sent to Acapulco the patache San Lucas,
+Captain Juan de la Isla, requesting such assistance as might prevent
+the threatened suspension of their intercourse with New Spain, and
+which appeared highly probable. The Augustine friars sent, on this
+occasion, Friar Pedro de Gamboa to solicit some additional aid for the
+conversion of these infidels, who had already begun to be baptized,
+and which, they urged, would securely establish the authority of the
+Spaniards in the Philippines, but the friar never arrived, having
+died on the voyage.
+
+On the 20th of August, this year, Philip de Salcedo arrived with two
+ships, and accompanied by his brother Juan de Salcedo, who had been
+of great use in the first conquest of these islands. The General was
+rejoiced at the arrival of such considerable relief, at a period when
+he had reason to think Pereyra intended to attack Zebu. When Legaspi
+saw, however, that the Portuguese did not make their appearance as he
+expected, he despatched his grandson, Philip de Salcedo, to Acapulco,
+with directions to go by the route of the Ladrone Islands, where he
+was shipwrecked; but, all the people being saved, he built another
+vessel, and returned to Zebu in such happy time, that he made up
+for his disappointment, by the importance of his appearance, at the
+period of Pereyra's arrival, on the 30th of September 1568, with a
+squadron of three galleons, two galeots, three fustas, and twenty
+smaller vessels. Every thing, however, on this occasion, indicated
+perfect amity; the Generals visited reciprocally, and held meetings,
+to ascertain whether these islands were in the line of demarcation of
+Spain, or not, with the view of avoiding hostilities. Pereyra, by an
+artful line of conduct, protracted these discussions, in order to gain
+time, if possible, by stratagem, to get possession of the port and of
+our camp, as he found it could not be effected by force. Disappointed,
+however, in his views, he returned on Christmas-eve to the Moluccas,
+having been dismissed with great civility by Legaspi.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1569 to 1571.
+
+    Of the Conquest of Manila.
+
+
+The supply of provisions having been very short, in consequence of
+the Portuguese, in some measure, blockading the port, the General,
+to guard against being exposed to the same danger a second time,
+determined to change his position, and establish himself in a more
+fertile country than that he then occupied. He ordered the camp to
+be immediately removed to the island of Panay: with this commission
+he charged his grandson, Philip de Salcedo, who was very cordially
+received by the natives, because he had formerly assisted them against
+their enemies, and enabled them to make many prisoners. Captain Luis de
+la Haya was ordered to go with his detachment, to the river Araut in
+the same island; Captain Andres de Ybarra to the island of Masbate;
+and the Colonel was ordered to remain in Zebu. In the interim the
+camp was established in Panay, and the patache San Lucas remained at
+Zebu, preparing to depart for New Spain. Juan de Salcedo ordered his
+brother Philip to Panay with another vessel, which conveyed the books
+and effects of his grandfather, all of which were lost in a storm;
+which loss, although he felt it severely, Legaspi bore with exemplary
+patience and fortitude.
+
+Philip de Salcedo having loaded the patache San Lucas, sailed from
+Zebu, and, in a few days after her departure, fell in with the San
+Juan, which had sailed from Acapulco, and was commanded by Captain
+Juan Lopez de Aguirre; Salcedo returned with her to Zebu, and, on
+the 10th of July, sailed a second time on his voyage. By the San
+Juan the Augustine fathers had sent Friar Herrera, having appointed
+him a provincial, or clerical head of a province, which was the
+first they had established in the Philippines. Their intention was
+by this appointment, to increase the importance of the religious
+orders, and induce higher respect from the new converts; the effect,
+accordingly, was the addition of many to the number, stimulated too,
+by the example of Tupas and his son: Legaspi stood godfather to Tupas,
+who was christened Philip, in compliment to the King of Spain;
+and his son was christened Charles, and had, as his godfather,
+Juan de Salcedo. The feasts which were held on the day these two
+new Christians were baptized, contributed, at the same time, to the
+conversion of many others. This was a measure of great expediency,
+although the duty of the fathers became necessarily so much more
+enlarged. It was determined that a friar, whose name was Juan Alba,
+should be sent to attempt the conversion of the isle of Masbate;
+and another, by the name of Alonzo Ximenes, to the river Araut, in
+the island of Panay, where he made many converts. Friar Martin de
+Rada remained in Zebu, and the rest of the clergy accompanied the
+General in the conquest of Manila.
+
+The General Legaspi arrived at Panay, accompanied by the Colonel,
+who, however, immediately returned to his command at Zebu, together
+with his wife, who had just arrived from New Spain with Captain Juan
+Lopez de Aguirre, in the ship San Juan. Legaspi was received by the
+natives of Panay with every demonstration of joy, and they appeared
+more sincere in their professions than those of Zebu. He constructed,
+with all expedition, some works, to enable him to resist the attempts
+of the squadron of Pereyra, and check the proceedings of a swarm of
+pirates, which had issued from Jolo and Borneo in twenty vessels,
+called vireyes, and had captured a Spanish vessel, with the crew. The
+Colonel attacked these pirates with nine proas: he took four vireyes,
+and would have taken the whole, had not seven of his vessels been too
+much astern. Having forwarded the account of this engagement to the
+General, he was now at liberty to assist the inhabitants of Aclan,
+who had sustained considerable injury from the pirates of Mindoro. In
+the month of January, 1570, Juan de Salcedo sailed on this expedition
+with thirty Spaniards and many friendly Indians. He entered the town
+of Mamburao, and, having made himself master of it, compelled the
+inhabitants to ransom themselves with gold; after which he proceeded
+to the isle of Lucban, where the pirates of Mindoro had taken refuge,
+and had protected themselves by some indifferent works; he, with
+ease, forced their intrenchments, attacked them with fire-arms,
+and, as they were unable to resist this mode of warfare, they agreed
+to ransom themselves with gold, as the inhabitants of Mamburao had
+done. Salcedo divided the spoil among his soldiers and the Indians,
+and returned to Panay, to give an account of this expedition.
+
+The General, who was determined above all things on the conquest
+of Manila, named the Colonel as commandant, and sent with him his
+grandson, Juan de Salcedo, with an hundred and twenty Spaniards,
+and many friendly Indians, to accomplish it. They sailed from Panay
+the beginning of May 1570. The Colonel went directly against Manila,
+but Juan de Salcedo turned aside to the country about the lake of
+Bombon, which is now called the Province of Batangas, to treat with
+the natives. He sent the usual peace-offerings, but they answered
+him with their arms. He engaged them, and would have succeeded,
+but received so severe a wound in his leg from an arrow, that he
+was compelled to abandon his enterprise, and follow the Colonel to
+Manila. The Colonel made terms with the Rajah, who was a good old
+man, and whom history calls Raxa Matanda, that is, the old Rajah; he
+had a nephew of the name of Raxa Soliman, who, likewise, made terms
+with the Colonel; but little dependence could be placed on him, as he
+evidently was no friend to the Spaniards, and had, as it was supposed,
+secreted provisions. He was accused, likewise, of exciting the Indians
+to murder the Spaniards, while on shore, which obliged our people to
+behave with great circumspection toward them. One day Raxa Soliman
+even ordered his men to fire upon our shipping, and, after having done
+us considerable damage, he embarked on board a large junk, and left
+the river, firing at us as he passed [17]. The Colonel instantly landed,
+leaving Juan de Salcedo in charge of the ships, and, with eighty men,
+stormed the fort which the Indians had at the mouth of the river, and
+where at present stands the fort of Santiago. He ordered his soldiers
+to attack the guns, and they were so fortunate in their attack,
+as in their first onset to kill the principal artillery officer,
+who appeared to be an European, as he was seen to cross himself
+before he died [18]; the remainder, were by the vigour of the assault,
+compelled to fly towards the town, which they burnt in their retreat,
+that the Spaniards might not profit by their success. Among other
+things, a foundery for cannon was destroyed, and it was supposed
+they had thrown many pieces of artillery into the sea, as only
+twelve, and a few falconets (a piece so called), were found in the
+place. The old Rajah was not a party in this disturbance, as neither
+he nor any of his people were engaged; and his fidelity was proved,
+by his having displayed from his house a white flag, during the time
+the action lasted. The Colonel, fearing that if he remained longer,
+he should encounter the south-west monsoon, and be unable to return,
+retired immediately to Cavite, to do the needful repairs to his ships,
+and in two days sailed for Panay.
+
+On the 23d of June of this year, Captain Juan de la Isla arrived
+with three vessels, in which came the Friar Perrera with two other
+religious, viz. Friar Diego Ordunez, and Friar Diego de Espinar, who
+came to labour in this new vineyard. Despatches were brought by them
+from his Majesty, by which Miguel Lopez de Legaspi was constituted
+President of the islands of the Ladrones, and he was recommended to
+settle the Philippines; at the same time his Majesty bestowed portions
+of lands, with their inhabitants, on all who might be engaged in the
+conquest. With a view to put these orders in execution, Legaspi first
+despatched from Panay, the same Captain Juan de la Isla, with two ships
+to Acapulco, and sailed for Zebu, where he ordered it to be proclaimed,
+that he intended to erect the town which had been built into a
+city, and to give every encouragement to increase the population,
+directing those who wished to settle in it to go before the notary,
+to be enrolled by five hundreds. On New Year's day, 1571, he named
+two ordinary alcaldes, six regidores, a notary, and two alguazils,
+who immediately took the customary oath on entering their office, and
+he strictly enjoined them the discharge of their respective duties. He
+likewise directed that the town, which had till then been called San
+Miguel, should be named the City del Santissimo Nombre de Jesus, in
+memory of the discovery of the sacred child, as before related. He
+settled the manner, in which rewards should be distributed among
+the tributary Indians, who were in the neighbourhood of the city,
+and left them under the care of the treasurer, Guido de Labezares,
+in order that he might have the opportunity of finishing a stone fort,
+which he had ordered to be constructed. All these and many subordinate
+objects, being attained by the end of January, he returned to Panay,
+to attempt from thence the conquest of Manila.
+
+Immediately after the President arrived at Panay, the Colonel,
+attended by all the officers and soldiers, joined him, leaving in
+Masbate the Padre Alba with six men, and in Dumangas Padre Ximenes, in
+charge of the new conquests. The Padre Herrera, with other religious,
+accompanied the General in his expedition against Manila, on which he
+sailed the 15th of April; and in the island of Lutaga he reviewed his
+force, and found they amounted to two hundred and eighty soldiers,
+consisting partly of his own people, of those of the Colonel, of
+Captains Andres de Ybarra, Luis de la Haya, and Juan de Salcedo. He
+passed by the island of Mindoro, and settled the tribute which the
+natives were to pay to the King of Spain. Here he had the opportunity
+of saving a Chinese vessel called a Sampan, from foundering; and
+he received the crew, with that kindness and warmth of feeling,
+so natural to the Spaniards.
+
+The Chinese acknowledged the kindness of the Spaniards, and formed
+a friendly connection with them. The President continued his voyage,
+and entered Cavite, where he waited the arrival of those who had fallen
+astern; meantime he treated with the natives of the place, and received
+them as vassals of the King of Spain. Two days after he arrived, he
+entered with all his squadron into the river of Manila. The Indians,
+thinking the Spaniards had returned, to punish them for the resistance
+they had made to the Colonel, set fire to the town, and with their
+effects fled to Tondo. The President sent the Colonel to bring them
+to terms, who, arriving at their camp, gave them to understand, by
+means of an interpreter, that the Spaniards had not come with the
+intention of doing them any injury. On learning this, some began
+to quench the flames, and others went in search of the old Rajah;
+and Lacandola, the chief of Tondo, immediately went with others to
+wait on Legaspi. He received them with a smiling countenance, and
+told them that he came as a friend, provided they acknowledged the
+King of Spain, as their king and natural lord and master, who would
+receive them under his protection, and relieve their distresses. The
+principal motive, he said, which induced his Majesty to send him there,
+was to propagate the true worship of one all powerful God; that he
+had brought several sacred characters with him for that purpose, and
+shewing them Padre Herrera, said that he was the principal of those,
+who were to be their teachers. They promised to become vassals of the
+King of Spain, and hear the law which they were to be taught; he hinted
+to them that he did not see Rajah Soliman with them: they replied,
+that he dared not appear after what had happened with the Colonel on
+the first expedition; but if he would pardon him, he would immediately
+appear, and promise obedience, as the rest had done. The General not
+only promised to pardon him, but sent him a message to that effect,
+without, however, being able to remove his apprehensions at that time.
+
+But on the 18th of May, Rajah Soliman arrived, accompanied by his
+uncle Rajah Matanda and Lacandola, making many apologies for what
+had passed. The General pardoned and received him as a vassal of
+his Majesty, and as such he was registered by the notary, Hernando
+Riguel. Legaspi immediately commenced his arrangements for founding a
+new city, and directed the Indians to finish the fort they had begun
+in the mouth of the river. Behind this he erected a large building,
+which served as a palace, with a church and convent for the religious,
+and an hundred and twenty smaller houses for the remainder of the
+Spaniards, intending this city to be the seat of government, both
+spiritual and temporal, of the islands. The whole of this, the Indians
+engaged to accomplish with great despatch, but it was found necessary,
+to employ the Spaniards to assist them in it. A good understanding
+being thus established, between the natives of Manila and Tondo and
+the Spaniards, Manila was taken possession of on the day following,
+the 19th of May, 1571, when, in a temporary church, the feast of
+the blessed Virgin Mary was celebrated, who, from that circumstance,
+was named the patroness of the new city.
+
+The peace which Rajah Soliman and Lacandola had made, was, on their
+part, by no means sincere, for the Indians of Macabebe and Hagonoy,
+appearing at the mouth of the harbour of Bancusay, with forty caracoas
+(an Indian vessel), proceeded to the house of Lacandola. These
+men jeered at and reproached the Indians, for submitting with such
+readiness, to such an insignificant number of Spaniards, promising,
+if they were disposed to shake off the yoke, that they should be
+assisted from Tondo and the neighbouring country, and not leave one
+Spaniard alive. The President, supposing those Indians who had arrived,
+had come to solicit peace, sent two Spaniards to assure them that they
+might present themselves to him without fear. The chief of the Indians,
+after listening to these ambassadors, leaped on his feet, and drawing
+and flourishing his cimeter, he said, "The sun gave me life, and I
+must not be disgraced in the eyes of my women, who would detest me,
+if they thought I was capable, of being on friendly terms with the
+Spaniards." With this speech he quitted the house, without waiting
+to go down by the ladder, for, with great boldness, he leaped out of
+the window into his caracoa, calling out to the Spaniards, "I expect
+you in the bay of Bancusay." Legaspi determined upon punishing such
+conduct, and sent against him the Colonel Martin de Goite with eighty
+Spaniards, in some newly constructed small vessels. The Indian chief
+was true to his word, and waited for them where he had said, with his
+squadron. The battle began, and he fought with great valour; but,
+in a short time, being killed by a musket shot, the rest dismayed,
+fled with great precipitation; our people pursued, and made many
+prisoners, among whom were the son of Lacandola, and his nephew,
+by which his deceit and dissimulation were sufficiently manifest;
+the President, however, sent them home, without the punishment they
+merited for their treason. After this engagement, the natives became so
+much afraid of the Spaniards, that many chiefs came to Manila begging
+peace, and offering to become vassals of the king of Spain. By this
+time, the works which had been ordered in Manila were considerably
+advanced, and, on the day of St. John the Baptist, the President,
+Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, founded the city as the metropolis of the
+Philippine Islands, appointing two ordinary alcaldes, twelve regidores,
+an alguazil mayor, and a notary, who all took the customary oaths, to
+discharge the duties of their respective offices with justice. This
+ceremony took place while Philip II. was King of Spain, and Pius
+V. was in the fifth year of his pontificate, the first governor
+being the President, Miguel Lopez de Legaspi. The public square was
+now marked out, with the situation of the convent of San Augustine,
+and the subordinate arrangements were left to the magistracy. Legaspi
+ordered the city to be called Manila, of which his Majesty approved,
+giving it a coat of arms. This city is placed in fourteen degrees
+and a half of north latitude, and is thought to be the antipodes of
+the river Saint Ann, in Brazil, which is in the same latitude in the
+opposite tropic of Capricorn.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+ANNO DOMINI, 1571.
+
+    Of the Government of Miguel Lopez de Legaspi.
+
+
+Manila being founded, and most of the towns of the surrounding
+district, in amity with the Spaniards, the Governor sent the Colonel
+to Pampanga, to reduce that province to the Spanish yoke, but he
+had no sooner arrived at the river Betis, on his way thither, than
+he was compelled to return, without being able to reduce either the
+town of Betis or that of Lubao; for it appeared that Rajah Soliman and
+Lacandola, who had gone with him to serve as interpreters between the
+Indians and him, had conducted themselves treacherously. This fully
+appeared by Lacandola leaving the Colonel, and returning to Manila
+without leave, for which the Governor ordered him to be put in irons,
+and, to increase his punishment, told his relations that he would
+not let him at liberty but at the Colonel's request; even then he did
+not accede to it without confiscating all his artillery, consisting
+of fifteen pieces of cannon, large and small. About this time Rajah
+Matanda fell sick, and requesting to be baptized, a clergyman of
+the name of Juan de Vivero administered this sacrament to him by
+the name of Philip: he died of his disorder, and was buried with
+great solemnity. On the 17th of July, Don Diego Legaspi, a nephew
+of the Governor, arrived; he was sent by Captain Juan de Aguirre to
+the aid of his uncle, having a short time before come to Panay with
+two ships, which the Viceroy of Mexico had sent to these islands as a
+reinforcement. The Governor ordered the Colonel to proceed to Panay,
+and despatch these ships to Manila, and afterwards go to Zebu, and
+bring his family to the capital. Whilst the Colonel was executing this
+commission, Juan de Salcedo was sent to reduce the people of Cainta and
+Taytay, two small towns high up the river Pasig, which had refused to
+acknowledge the Spanish authority, and had strengthened their position
+by some fortifications covering their towns. He carried Cainta by
+assault, with the loss of only two killed and five wounded, but with
+great slaughter on the part of the Indians, upon hearing which, the
+inhabitants of Taytay immediately surrendered. He afterwards marched
+to a town on the borders of the lake Bay, and of the same name, and
+summoned the inhabitants, but they answered him with their arms in
+their hands. He had with him Padre Friar Alonso de Albarado, who had
+accompanied Ruy Lopez de Villalobos in his expedition; had returned
+a second time to Mexico; and again had accompanied the other five
+religious, of the order of San Augustine, to Manila. This venerable
+person the Colonel sent, to assure the Indians, that he did not wish to
+employ his arms against them, and that he had commissioned the Padre
+Friar Alonso, to accommodate matters, requesting them immediately to
+deliver up their town of Bay. This in the end was acceded to, and was
+followed, by the submission of many small towns, on the borders of
+the lake. Juan de Salcedo went further up the country behind them,
+and found the people of Mahayhay, fortified by nature so securely
+on a hill, that they could defend themselves against a great force,
+with no difficulty, by rolling down immense stones. Having, however,
+reconnoitred it, he perceived a path less rugged than the rest,
+and where they seemed more negligent. By this path he surmounted
+the difficulty, and appeared above them, when they were seized
+with such a panic, that they fled precipitately, without making
+any resistance. For two days more, Juan de Salcedo was detained
+in this part of the country, passing through the villages, which,
+however, he found deserted, the inhabitants having taken refuge in the
+mountains. He in consequence returned to Bay, where he had left most of
+his people. It was understood, that in the country of the Camarines,
+there was a town called Paracale, where there were mines of gold. He
+sent back to Manila Padre Albarado, and some of the Spaniards; and
+having a few soldiers only, he encountered a great many difficulties,
+in undertaking the conquest of this town. Many days having elapsed,
+without hearing from them at Manila, the Governor despatched Major
+Antonio Hurtado in search of them, and he found Juan de Salcedo in
+Paracale, with all his people, very much weakened, in consequence of
+the hardships they had been exposed to, and the sickness with which
+they had been attacked. Salcedo returned with Hurtado to Manila, on
+which occasion there were great rejoicings, as he had been supposed
+dead, and the loss of a man so much loved and respected would have
+been severely felt.
+
+About this time the Colonel returned from Zebu, having first subdued
+the province of Pampanga. The Governor now apportioned the conquered
+districts and towns, among the respective officers, who had so well
+earned that reward, reserving to his Majesty the usual tribute
+only. He directed, that the Indians should pay a moderate rent,
+to those new proprietors of land, and the Spaniards were enjoined,
+not to exact any thing above the rent so settled. In a little time
+it was discovered, that the Indians would not pay the tribute; and
+that the Spanish proprietors, had been guilty of many vexatious acts
+against them, which had produced revolts in various places. In Bohol,
+Panay, and in Marinduque, the Indians had killed several Spanish
+factors and soldiers. To prevent these disturbances from spreading,
+the Governor sent Captain Luis de la Haya, to examine into the matter,
+and to punish the aggressors. He executed his commission with such
+prudence, that, without exasperating the Indians, he chastised the
+murderers, and left the towns in complete subordination.
+
+At the beginning of the year 1572, there arrived, with a great deal
+of rich merchandize, those Chinese whom the Spaniards had saved from
+shipwreck, in the island of Mindoro, together with many others of that
+nation, who brought damasks, satins, taffeties, silks, porcelain,
+and other things, with which the foundation of a lucrative commerce
+with Acapulco was laid. These Chinese, whom we call Sangleyes,
+from two Chinese words, hiang, lay, which signifies travelling
+merchants, continue to this day the commerce with Manila, and many
+have settled in these islands, where, however, they have frequently
+been troublesome, as will be seen in the sequel. About the time these
+merchants arrived, the Augustine friars intended to hold their second
+provincial chapter, and the first which had been celebrated at Manila;
+and at this it was determined, to send some of their order to China,
+to establish a religious intercourse between the two nations. The
+Governor agreed to this, and was desirous, at the same time, to send
+an embassy to the Emperor; but the Chinese would not agree to take it
+to China. The Friar Alvarado, however, who was the most desirous of
+the undertaking, began to study the language, that he might be able
+to convert and baptize the Chinese merchants, who seemed disposed
+to settle in Manila; this plan he had adopted in Tondo, where he had
+administered the sacrament to numbers. In this provincial chapter it
+was agreed, that Padre Herrera should be sent a second time to Mexico,
+in order to bring more clerical aid to this province; they likewise
+chose as provincial, the Padre Friar Martin de Rada, and elected a
+capitular of the convent of Manila; they established clergy in Zebu,
+Masbate, Otong, Mindoro, Tondo, Calumpit, and Lubao. Soon after this,
+convents were founded in the districts of Taal, Bay, and Pasig, and
+many visitations were made, by which it was ascertained, that the
+number of the clergy increased so much, that it became necessary,
+to separate the parish priests from the friars.
+
+The greater part of this quarter of the island, being reduced to
+complete obedience, to the King of Spain, and nothing being known of
+the northern part of it, Juan de Salcedo offered to make the discovery,
+at his own risk. He collected men and ships, the Governor allowing
+him forty-five soldiers, with necessary ammunition. He sailed from
+Manila on the 20th of May, 1572; on the third day, he arrived at
+Cape Bolinao, in the province of Zambales, where he found a Chinese
+junk or sampan, and a party of Chinese, who had got possession of a
+chief and some Indians, with an intent to carry them to China. Juan
+de Salcedo re-took them from the Chinese, and gave them their liberty,
+which action so gratified the feelings of the natives, that they became
+immediately vassals of the King of Spain, and solicited to be placed
+on the same footing, as the people of the other districts. Passing
+from thence to Pangasinan, he coasted the whole of that province,
+and that of Ylocos, until he arrived at Cape Boxeador, examining all
+the ports, bays, and landing places, near which his squadron was able
+to approach, and it consisted of many, but very small vessels. He
+was desirous, of preserving a good understanding with the Indians,
+and most of the towns on the coast, received him in a very friendly
+manner, and supplied him with provisions, which he stood in need of;
+but on his entering the rivers and creeks, he found great resistance
+from the inhabitants of the districts bordering on them. He attacked
+them on several occasions, putting them to flight with great ease,
+and sent to them, desiring them to leave the mountains, with a promise
+of his friendship. Some, however, not relying on the promises of the
+Spaniards, could not divest themselves of their apprehensions, while
+others readily came down, submitted, and agreed to pay the tribute. In
+this manner he was proceeding, and had almost subdued these two large
+provinces [19], intending to pass on to Cagayan; but he was opposed by
+his own people, who became weary of the expedition. His second in
+command, Antonio Hurtado, proposed that he should go on, and prosecute
+his original plan, but Juan de Salcedo, although he desired it much,
+thought it better to accede to the representations of his soldiers,
+and they returned by the same route, confirming in their obedience
+the towns which had submitted. On his arrival at Bigan, the natives
+received him with so much cordiality, that he prudently determined
+on the step of founding there a Spanish city, for the purpose of
+controlling the neighbouring country.
+
+Having, with this view, ordered the natives to cut sufficient timber
+to build a fort, and accommodations for those who chose to remain,
+he became desirous of executing the original project, which he had
+abandoned, of passing on to Cagayan. He left in Bigan his second
+in command, with twenty-five soldiers, and, with the seventeen that
+remained, he commenced this arduous undertaking, departing in three
+vessels on the 24th of July. Having passed Cape Boxeador, he entered
+a river where he found a mud village of salt-makers; he desired them
+to call their chiefs, as he wished to be on good terms with them,
+and after many messages they appeared with their Rajah, who was a
+very handsome man, and whiter than the rest of the Indians. Juan de
+Salcedo came up to him with open arms, intending to embrace him; but
+the barbarian, unaccustomed to such a mode of salutation, believing
+that he wanted to catch him, took to his heels and fled, and on
+no entreaty would he be prevailed on, to leave the mountains. Our
+people, therefore, hoisted their sails, and arrived at the river of
+Cagayan. They sailed up this river a considerable way, and found a
+populous district; but they dared not attempt any hostility against
+the inhabitants, as they were so few in number in comparison to
+the natives, and they resolved to return to Manila by that side of
+the island, in order completely to ascertain the whole extent of
+Luzon. They proceeded about one hundred leagues, without discovering
+any population, or any thing but a rocky shore. They coasted it
+until they arrived at a bay, which Juan de Salcedo thought had been
+named Amanto, having been there when he went to Paracale. In this,
+however, he was mistaken, but as that bay was very near, he arrived
+in a few days at it. Here he went on shore; and travelled on till
+he came to the towns on the lake, where he embarked on board a small
+boat with only four rowers. The boat was on the point of foundering
+during the passage, and the Indians deserting her by swimming away,
+he would inevitably have been lost, had not a proa, with some friendly
+Indians, passing by, immediately relieved him. Arriving at Manila, he
+received the melancholy intelligence of the death of his grandfather,
+on the 20th of August, 1572, accelerated much by the vexatious and
+multifarious duties of his office. He was interred in the church of
+the Augustines, with the magnificence due to his character and station.
+
+By the death of Legaspi, the treasurer, Guido de Labezares became
+governor ad interim, by a decree of the Royal Audience of Mexico,
+and which decree was found among the papers of the deceased. A few
+days after Labezares had succeeded to the government, Manila suffered
+severely from a hurricane, which destroyed almost all the houses,
+these being built of canes, and drove back the two ships which
+had been sent to Acapulco, but which, after the storm subsided,
+sailed again for New Spain, carrying accounts of the death of
+Legaspi. The new Governor sent Colonel Martin de Goite, to reduce
+the revolted natives of Ylocos, which was done with little trouble,
+and he brought away the tribute of the king in gold, compelling them
+to ransom themselves, for a sum far exceeding that amount. This he
+was enabled so easily to do, by the exertions of Juan de Salcedo,
+who, at his own cost, had subdued nearly all this province, and who,
+as the Colonel represented, ought to be allowed to reap the fruits
+of his labours; but Guido de Labezares was prejudiced against him,
+and would not employ him until he was undeceived as to his merits. He
+then sent him to the conquest of the Camarines, which he effected with
+ease, and founded near the river of Vicol a Spanish city, calling it
+Santiago de Libon. He appointed as chief judge Captain Pedro de Chaves,
+with eighty soldiers. While Juan de Salcedo was making these conquests,
+the governor ad interim was exploring the whole of the Bisayas: he
+attempted to restrain within proper bounds the avarice of the factors,
+but it was without effect, as the moment he was gone they returned to
+their old practices. Meanwhile a ship from Acapulco arrived with three
+Augustine friars, men who were much required, not only for the purpose,
+of converting to the Christian religion, the natives of the conquered
+countries, but likewise to preserve the tranquillity of the different
+towns, and which could not be effected solely by force of arms.
+
+When the Governor ad interim returned to Manila, he sent an embassy
+to the Rajah of Borneo, but without effect, as he had no wish to
+be on terms with the Spaniards. He likewise divided the province
+of Ylocos between the Colonel and Juan de Salcedo, who had been
+employed in that expedition. In the beginning of the year 1574, Juan
+de Salcedo sailed to take possession of his portion; he founded in
+the district of Bigan the city Fernandina, where he built a house for
+himself. While he was accomplishing this object, a large squadron of
+vessels passed by, which had taken a galeot and twenty men he had sent
+in search of provisions; and presuming that their intention was to
+attack him, he began to fortify the town, but seeing they prosecuted
+their route, he took it for granted they were going against Manila;
+and having collected together all the Spaniards he had in Ylocos,
+he embarked for the capital to the assistance of the Governor. This
+was the famous expedition of Limahon, by which Manila was nearly lost,
+but a short time after its foundation.
+
+Limahon was a pirate of such renown, that the Emperor of China had
+sent against him three different squadrons, and he was in fact so
+pressed on all sides by this force, that having captured a Chinese
+junk coming from Manila, who informed him of the new conquests
+by the Spaniards, he determined to sail for this country, and be
+crowned King of these islands, in order to be secure, by this means,
+from the Emperor's attacks. He arrived at the island of Corregidor,
+which is in the mouth of the bay, the 29th of November 1574, with
+sixty-two junks, in which he brought one thousand five hundred women,
+two thousand soldiers, and a great many seamen, sufficient artillery,
+muskets, and swords. The Spaniards had no intimation of his arrival
+at Corregidor, and the same night his second in command, who was a
+Japanese of the name of Sioco, landed with six hundred men, with which
+he entered, and attempted to take possession of Manila. In the attempt
+to land his men he lost three boats, which were swamped by the surf;
+but he effected his object, without being at all discovered by our
+people. He first landed at Paranaque, supposing it to be Manila, but
+soon finding out his mistake, he began his march to it by the beach,
+his vessels following him, and at day-break he arrived at Manila, where
+he was discovered by the Indians. They made all haste to the Colonel,
+who lived close to the royal gate, where the college of St. Joseph
+now stands, and informed him, that there was an immense body of Moors
+of Borneo coming by the sea side. The Colonel, however, as he had no
+reason to conclude, that the Borneans considered themselves, in direct
+hostility with the Spaniards, gave no credit to it, till he saw the
+Chinese enter by the gate, close to his house. Three soldiers, who
+were placed as guards there, attempted to resist them, but they were
+soon overpowered by multitudes, and one only escaped, severely wounded.
+
+The wife of the Colonel looking out of the window, thought they were
+Indians come against them, and called out, "Here the dogs come, we
+are all dead." The Portuguese interpreter, who accompanied Sioco,
+enraged at this reproachful epithet of the lady, ordered the house
+to be set on fire. The Colonel, who was ill, immediately on this got
+up, put on his armour, and unsheathing his sword, leapt out of the
+window in the midst of his enemies, who received him on their swords,
+and cut him to pieces. They killed the wife of a common soldier, whom
+they found in the house, and left for dead Dona Lucia Corral, the wife
+of the Colonel, but she afterwards recovered from her wounds. Sioco
+pursuing his march, encountered some Spaniards who were on their way
+to assist the Governor, and seeing that there were few opposed to
+him, he formed his men into a half moon, and charged the centre of
+the Spaniards. The engagement was long doubtful, when eight soldiers
+being killed, the rest must have shared their fate, had they not been
+joined by twenty more, under the command of Captain Alonso Velasquez,
+the aid-de-camp of General Amador de Arriaran, and Gaspar Ramirez,
+aid-de-camp of the Colonel, who charged the Chinese so furiously,
+that Sioco was obliged to retire to his boats and join Limahon, who had
+anchored in Cavite. Sioco justified his ill success in this action, by
+saying, that the people were tired by their long march along the beach,
+which excuse Limahon admitted, and determined on another assault on
+the third day. This affair having happened on St. Andrew's day, the
+Spaniards attributed it to the intercession of that Saint, that they
+had not all fallen into the hands of the Chinese, and expressed their
+gratitude, by choosing him patron of Manila, instituting an annual
+solemn feast on the occasion. Limahon's delay of the second attack,
+was the means of saving all, as it gave time to Juan de Salcedo, to
+join with his force from Ylocos. He arrived in the bay, in the night
+of the same day of St. Andrew, and understanding that Limahon was in
+Cavite, he did not attempt to enter there, but landed on the Pampanga
+side of the bay. The day following, in the evening, he met with two
+Indians, who had escaped from the engagement, and informed him of all
+that had happened; he immediately made sail, and entered Manila that
+night. When he was at the mouth of the river, he ordered the trumpets
+to be sounded, and placed a great number of lights about his ship,
+to induce the enemy to believe, the approach of considerable relief
+to the Spaniards, who saluted him in form, all of which caused great
+alarm to the Chinese. The Governor ad interim, was so pleased with
+the diligence of Juan de Salcedo, that he appointed him Colonel,
+in the room of Martin de Goite.
+
+The same night, Limahon weighed anchor from Cavite, and pressed on to
+Manila, and Sioco disembarked the following morning, after having sworn
+by an oath to his General, that he would either die in the attempt,
+or that day be in possession of the house of the Governor. He directed
+his march to the fort, which our people had constructed of timber,
+faggots, and barrels of earth, and he divided his troops into three
+bodies. He ordered one to march down, through the principal street of
+the city, to the square, where he expected the Spaniards would sally
+out of the fort, and engage them; and in this expectation, he sent
+another body, by the side of the river round the fort, and the third,
+which he commanded himself, he led along the beach. The division which
+had been ordered down the principal street, arrived in the square,
+and in order to induce the Spaniards to sally from the fort, they
+set fire to the houses. Fortunately the Spaniards did not quit the
+fort, though they saw their houses burning, but contented themselves
+with playing their artillery upon the Chinese, doing a great deal
+of mischief. Sioco, finding that it was not possible, to draw the
+Spaniards from their fortifications, and having lost many of his men,
+ordered the division that had arrived at the square, to assault the
+fort, at the same time leading on his own. Such was the multitude of
+the Chinese, against so few on our part, that the palisade was forced,
+and they entered through a part, which Ensign Sancho Ortez defended,
+and in which he was killed, performing prodigies of valour. Immediately
+the Governor heard of this, he repaired to the fort, attended by the
+Colonel; they cut their way through the Chinese, and having entered it,
+repulsed the invaders with great loss. The Chinese, panic struck at
+this, retiring by degrees towards the shore, the Spaniards followed
+them close, making great slaughter among them; but, to our great
+misfortune, our people suddenly abandoned their advantage, at the
+sight of Limahon's squadron, which had just entered the river, but
+had not been able hitherto, to take part in the action.
+
+Limahon observing this, ordered his ships off, in order that his
+men might become desperate, on finding themselves deprived of all
+protection from him: the contrary effect, however, was produced by
+it, as they were seized with such a panic, that they could not face
+their enemies, but formed themselves on the shore, and received the
+fire of our artillery, which was discharged repeatedly upon them,
+determined rather to wait death with firmness, than return into the
+engagement. In this they would have persisted, had not Limahon arrived
+with four hundred fresh men. As all was not lost, he ordered some of
+his people to burn a ship and galley, which, with a few other small
+vessels, were drawn up on the beach, and which, when they had destroyed
+the houses, they had forgot to burn with the rest, and he made a false
+attack on the fort, in order to compel the Spaniards to sally out, to
+hinder the operation. The Colonel guessed his intention: he, however,
+sallied out with fifty men, against those only who were proceeding
+to pillage the city, and put them to flight precipitately. Limahon
+seeing that his plan had not succeeded, having lost many men,
+and finding that his principal captain, Sioco, had been killed,
+he embarked his troops, and, under favour of the night, returned
+to the river Paranaque, where he killed all the Indians, he found
+assembled in any hostile way, and, before day-break, he set sail,
+and did not bring to, until he came to the province of Pangasinan;
+where he entered into an amicable arrangement with the chief, forming
+an encampment, and fortifying it with a strong palisado on an inlet of
+the river Lingayen. The Governor was determined to follow him into the
+province, but he found it necessary first to restore the fortifications
+of the city, and likewise to quell a sedition of the Indians, who,
+on this occasion, shewed how little they could be depended upon.
+
+The natives of Manila, whilst the Spaniards were engaging the Chinese,
+robbed their houses and maltreated their slaves; those of Tondo killed
+some Sachristans belonging to a convent, and they would have done the
+same with the clergy, but that they could not have concealed it. Those
+of the island of Mindoro, however, imprisoned the friars, and took them
+to the mountains, where they were not bold enough to murder them, till
+they saw how the action with Limahon would terminate, and how things
+would be adjusted. Rajah Soliman and Lacandola, the chief of Manila
+and Tondo, apprehensive that the Governor would punish them for this
+ill conduct, retired to Navotas, where they fomented a rebellion. In
+order to quell this the Colonel, accompanied by Friar Marin, set out
+immediately, and when Lacandola understood they had arrived, he sent
+to them to request the friar would repair to a station about three
+leagues distant, where all the chiefs were assembled, and where they
+were desirous of treating of a reconciliation with the Spaniards. The
+friar Marin determined to proceed to the station which they mentioned,
+and there he met all the chiefs, who received him with much joy,
+but they could not be persuaded to see the Colonel. Lacandola alone
+abandoned his fears, in consequence of the promise the friar had made
+him, and left Navotas with an intention to present himself, but he
+found that Juan de Salcedo had returned, and directed his way to his
+house. Salcedo encountered two ranks of armed men on the banks of the
+river, near the house of Lacandola; he boldly went up to them, and
+took away their lances and arrows; when, Lacandola arriving, he said,
+"What is the meaning of this? why are these men armed?" The Indian made
+many excuses, and promised to wait on the Governor the day following,
+in company with the friar Marin. The Governor admitted the excuses,
+and presented Lacandola with a silk mantle and a gold chain. Won over
+by this treatment, Rajah Soliman, in four days, presented himself to
+the Governor, and the sedition was thus terminated. Captain Rivera
+subdued the people of Mindoro with the same facility.
+
+The Governor being relieved from the anxiety, which the restlessness
+of the Indians had occasioned, determined to follow Limahon to
+Pangasinan. He found, on mustering, that the soldiers in Manila
+amounted to two hundred, and about two hundred more were scattered
+through the provinces of Bisayas and Camarines; from among these
+he manned the squadron, with two hundred and fifty Spaniards, and
+he added one thousand five hundred friendly Indians. On the 22d of
+March 1575, the Colonel sailed with this armament to Pangasinan,
+and, on the 29th of the same month, in the night, arrived in the
+river Lingayen. The day following he sent Captain Pedro de Chaves to
+take possession of the ships belonging to the corsair, and Captain
+Gabriel de Rivera to reconnoitre his fortifications. Chaves executed
+his commission with ease, as the Chinese fled from their ships, the
+moment he boarded them. Rivera attacked the works, firing upon them,
+and making a dreadful carnage. Limahon, observing what passed, ordered
+his men under cover of a grove of date trees, where they might defend
+themselves more easily. Captain Chaves sent assistance to Rivera,
+and a most sanguinary engagement commenced. Rivera at last routed
+the Chinese, compelling them to retire to their fort, which he would
+have scaled, but, finding the palisade too lofty, he had recourse
+to the expedient of ordering his men to rush in a body against it,
+formed as it was of date trees driven into the earth. This they did
+with such force, that they broke through, opened the gate, and entered
+the fort. The Chinese then retired within the second palisade, which
+was the quarter of Limahon. The Spaniards ought to have attacked the
+inner fort, before the Chinese had recovered from their panic; but
+their avarice prevailed, and they dispersed themselves through the
+different houses, which had been built within the first palisade,
+plundering them, without attempting any thing else. Limahon was
+not slow in taking advantage of this error of the Spaniards, and,
+attacking them with four hundred men, he drove them out of the works
+with great loss, thus paying dearly for the indulgence of their habits
+of plunder. Ashamed of this defeat, our people returned a second time
+to the assault, when they retook the first line of works, but being
+unable to force the inner one, they burnt the houses of the Chinese,
+and going on board their boats, they retired to where Pedro de Chaves
+was posted. Here, finding one of the junks unserviceable, she was
+set fire to, and a retreat of the whole body was made good, to the
+post where the Colonel was stationed, with the rest of the armament.
+
+Juan de Salcedo, convinced of the difficulty of taking the fort by
+storm, and desirous of being as sparing as possible, of the lives of
+his Spaniards, considering the difficulties they had to encounter,
+determined on attempting to reduce Limahon by fair means. Having in
+his army a Chinese who had been established in Manila, he ordered
+him to write to Limahon; but this letter having no effect, he wrote a
+second to the same purpose. Limahon replied, that he was considered a
+savage tiger, whom all were desirous of catching; but he assured them,
+that he should either kill them, or they him. The Chinese, therefore,
+thus declining every amicable proposal, the Colonel resolved to
+throw up works near to their works, but at such a distance as to
+be without the range of the enemy's artillery. Upon his beginning
+accordingly to pitch his camp, however, a shot was fired which passed
+close to him, and wounded his aid-de-camp in the leg, affording him a
+convincing proof that their artillery could reach all over the small
+island. It was, therefore, deemed necessary to remove the camp to
+another position, and to blockade the mouth of the river to prevent
+Limahon from escaping, until the Governor of Manila should determine,
+whether he would have the works taken by assault, or that, by means of
+a blockade, the Chinese should be starved into submission. Upon this
+retreat of the Spaniards, Limahon collected the remaining fragments of
+the junks, which had been burnt, and with these built some boats within
+the fort. Four months passed in this manner, when, finding he had no
+other resource, Limahon opened a canal to the river, and, in the night,
+escaped with all his people in the small vessels he had constructed. To
+deceive the Spaniards, and conquer the difficulties opposed to him in
+the mouth of the river, he set fire to a few small vessels filled with
+combustibles, and, ordering a false attack to be made on the guard,
+he, in the meantime, escaped; and, without any obstruction, on the
+3d of August 1575, prosecuted his voyage. During these transactions
+between Juan de Salcedo and Limahon, the Augustine friars held a
+chapter, and appointed priests in the towns of Candaba and Macabebe,
+in the province of Pampanga, in Bizan, in the province of Ylocos, and
+in the island of Negros. They were not satisfied with the innumerable
+converts, they made in these islands, but they became desirous of
+attempting the spiritual conquest of the empire of China. There was
+at that time in Manila, a Chinese of the name of Aumon, who had been
+sent by the viceroy of Fouquien, in search of Limahon, to promise him
+pardon, on the part of the Emperor of China, if he would cease his
+depredations. This Chinese had been to Pangasinan, and told Juan de
+Salcedo, that he wished to see the pirate; but as Salcedo distrusted
+the nature of his mission, Aumon deemed it prudent to return to Manila,
+where he paid his court so well to the Governor, that he delivered
+him up fifty captives which had been taken from Limahon. Aumon was now
+desirous of returning to China, and the Augustine friars conceived this
+would be a good opportunity, to attempt an establishment there. With
+this view they endeavoured to persuade him, to take two friars under
+his protection, which request the Governor seconded; and, as the news
+of Salcedo's success against Limahon had, by this time, reached them,
+Aumon determined to comply with the request. The friars Martin de
+Rada, and Geronimo Marin, were nominated for this undertaking, and,
+at the same time, as ambassadors from the Governor, were the bearers
+of a letter to the Viceroy of Fouquien, and another to the Emperor,
+which they were ordered to deliver to the Viceroy, as their directions
+were not to proceed beyond that point. But as it was intended,
+that these religious should remain in the province of Fouquien, to
+propagate the Christian faith, two Spaniards were sent to bring back
+the answer to the embassy. They left Manila on the 2d of July 1575,
+and before they returned, the new Governor of these islands arrived.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1575.
+
+    Of the Administration of Don Francisco La Sande, second Governor
+    of Manila.
+
+
+Doctor Don Francisco La Sande, born at Caceres in Estremadura,
+and Oidor of Mexico, took possession of this government on the
+24th of August 1575. He instituted an inquiry into the conduct of
+his predecessor, and acquitted him of any misapplication of his
+authority. At the commencement of La Sande's government, the embassy
+returned from China, and proved to have had a favourable issue,
+as the Viceroy of Fouquien received them with great respect; and
+although he could not permit the friars to remain in the province,
+as he had no orders to that effect, he forwarded the letter, which the
+Governor of Manila had written to the Emperor of China, contributing
+all in his power to second his views: and this fully appeared by the
+answer, which the Chinese brought in the month of February, the year
+following, by which the Emperor appointed one port in his dominions,
+for commercial intercourse with the Spaniards. The Chinese brought
+considerable presents, which they would not deliver to the actual
+Governor, but to Guido de Labexares, who, as Governor ad interim,
+had despatched the embassy. This affront Don Francisco La Sande felt
+so severely, that he behaved to them with great coolness, and made
+them no presents when they returned. The unhandsome conduct of the
+Governor, frustrated those expectations, which had been raised by
+the defeat of Limahon, and the subsequent mission; by making a most
+unfavourable impression on the minds of the Chinese, who discharged
+their whole vengeance, on the heads of the two Augustine friars. They
+landed them in the province of Zambales, scourged them most cruelly,
+murdered, before their eyes, their interpreter and slaves, and left
+them bound fast to trees; in which situation they must have perished,
+had not, providentially, Morones been passing that way, who released
+them, and cured their wounds.
+
+This year, 1576, was unpropitious to the Spaniards in the Philippines;
+for, independent of this disgrace, they had the misfortune to lose
+Juan de Salcedo, who died on the 11th of March, and who had been a
+second Pizarro, or Cortes, in this conquest. He was seized with a
+fever while in Ylocos, and when in that state, visiting a mine in his
+domains, he drank some cold water, which operated so powerfully on the
+intestines, that he died in three hours. On the island of Catanduanes,
+likewise, a party of Augustine missionaries was shipwrecked: this
+was a public loss, and most severely felt, as, without the labours
+of the religious, the military exploits of the Spaniards, would have
+been of little avail, in securing the subjection of these islands.
+
+This loss was repaired the following year, by the arrival of some more
+friars, and seventeen Franciscans, whom the Augustines received in
+their convents, and assigning to them the ecclesiastical authority
+over a number of towns, the Franciscans began their labours with
+indefatigable zeal.
+
+About this time, Queen Elizabeth of England, sent the famous Drake with
+a considerable squadron, for the purpose of subduing the Moluccas. In
+passing the Straits of Magellan, he lost several of his ships;
+but he pursued his course in his own ship, committing many acts of
+hostility on the voyage, and giving a name to several islands which
+he discovered, such as St. Bartholomew, St. James, and New Albion,
+a large island, where he was detained six weeks. Arriving at Tidore,
+he began to gather cloves, without permission from the King of the
+island, at which the latter took great offence; but Drake having
+made him presents, he stipulated for the assistance of their arms,
+in case he should require it, permitting the English to establish
+factories for collecting cloves and nutmegs, and, in token of his
+amity, sent a most superb ring to the Queen of England. Richly laden
+with spices and Chinese merchandize, which he had captured in several
+of our vessels, on their voyage to New Spain, Drake proceeded on his
+return to England, where, after a variety of disasters, he arrived,
+filling all Europe with admiration of the valuable nature of his
+cargo. That strangers might not, by such means, acquire a footing in
+the Moluccas and neighbouring islands, the Governor sent an expedition
+against the island of Borneo, which, by the following circumstances,
+became a matter of easy conquest. Sirela, King of Borneo, had come to
+Manila, to solicit the assistance of the Spaniards, in the recovery of
+his kingdom, of which he had been unjustly deprived by his brother;
+and he promised, in the event of his success, that the whole of this
+large island, should become tributary to Spain. Don Francisco La Sande,
+conceiving this a most desirable object, and that it would necessarily
+lead to the conquest of all the Archipelago of Maluco, determined to go
+in person, that he might not lose the favourable opportunity, which now
+presented itself, by replacing Sirela in the possession of his kingdom.
+
+He sailed from Manila in thirty vessels, with a large body of Spaniards
+and friendly Indians, and arrived safely at Borneo. Having entered
+the river, he proceeded along it, until he arrived at the residence
+of the usurper, upon which he immediately directed his artillery. The
+King, however, with his troops, gallantly attacked the Spaniards,
+but in a short time, fled in great disorder, and took refuge in the
+mountains. The Governor placed his deposed brother on the throne, and
+returned to Manila, where he planned several other expeditions. He sent
+a squadron to Jolo and Mindanao, which reduced these two islands,
+and compelled them to pay the customary tribute to the King of
+Spain; but from the great distance they were at from Manila, and
+the very limited number of clergy then in the seat of government,
+a sufficiency could not be spared, for the purpose of converting the
+natives to Christianity, during the short time these islands were
+held. He completed the conquest of the province of Camarines by means
+of Captain Chaves, who founded the city of Nueva Caceres, close to the
+town of Naga. The Augustine friars began their spiritual conquest,
+but finding their number unequal to the task, of duly attending the
+undertaking, they called in to their assistance the Franciscans,
+to whom eventually they ceded this district.
+
+Towards the close of La Lande's government, an unpleasant disagreement
+arose between the clergy and laity. The factors had introduced into
+their respective districts, several abuses, which the clergy would
+not countenance. Certain services were required of the Indians, beyond
+the stipulated rents, which were extremely vexatious, and which little
+accorded with the Christian character. The friars began by preaching
+against these abuses, but this had little effect, and in the end,
+so many complaints were made, that it reached the ears of the King
+(Philip the Second), who issued an order, in which he reproved the
+conduct of the factors, and enjoined them, to pay strict obedience to
+the instructions they had received, to confine their imposts to the
+stipulated rents alone. The Governor gave every aid to the order of
+his Majesty, making regulations, by which the Indians might be secured
+against such encroachments in future. This, in some respect, abated
+the gathering storm, but tranquillity was never completely restored, as
+the avarice of the factors set at defiance all laws, human and divine.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1580.
+
+    The Administration of Don Ronquillo de Penalosa, third Governor
+    of Manila.
+
+
+In April 1580, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Penalosa arrived at the
+port of Cavite, as Governor of Manila. He was a nephew of the famous
+Judge Ronquillo, who hanged the Bishop of Zamora. He brought to his
+predecessor, the appointment of Oidor of Mexico, with orders for
+him to sail by the first ship, destined for Acapulco. On his taking
+possession of his government, his first step was, to mark out the
+Chinese quarter of the town, under the guns of the fort of Santiago,
+on the other side of the river. He sent Captain Rivera to Borneo,
+again to re-establish on his throne the legitimate King Sirela,
+who had a second time been deprived of it by his brother, with the
+assistance of a Portuguese Captain, of the name of Brito. Rivera
+executed his commission without delay, and returned to Manila, after
+having placed Sirela in peaceable possession of his kingdom. This was
+judged to be the fittest opportunity, for bringing the Moluccas under
+the Spanish dominion, and the Governor began to make preparations for
+the enterprize, for, in addition to the customary enmity between the
+courts of Portugal and Castile, he had received positive instructions
+from Philip the Second, to effect this object. Circumstances, however,
+compelled him to postpone it till the year following, as several
+matters of consequence, in these islands, required his presence,
+particularly in the province of Cagayan, where a Japanese pirate had
+established himself, with a great many followers and vessels. Pablo
+Carrion dislodged the Japanese, but not without great loss on the
+side of the Spaniards, as the former, rather than be taken prisoners,
+preferred dying bravely, with arms in their hands. The pirate thus
+dislodged, the Governor founded the city of Nueva Segovia, close to
+the Indian town of Lalo, and the city of Arivalo, in the island of
+Panay, in memory of his native province.
+
+The year following, 1582, an expedition sailed to the Moluccas,
+commanded by Don Sebastian Ronquillo, a nephew of the Governor, who
+took with him Pablo de Lima, married to a niece of the King of Tidore,
+and who, in her right, laid claim to several towns, of which she had
+been unjustly deprived by the King of Ternate. De Lima was likewise
+appointed Governor of Ternate, when it should be subdued by the
+Spaniards, and all these considerations contributed, to induce him to
+give every aid to this expedition. The squadron arrived at the island
+of Motiel, and making an easy conquest of it, the natives recognized
+Pablo de Lima as their chief. From this island, the Spaniards proceeded
+on their voyage to Ternate, where the Indians seemed determined,
+to throw every impediment in the way of their disembarkation; but
+the resistance was of short duration, as the Spaniards contrived to
+draw them into the interior, and to plant their artillery against
+the town, without which expedient nothing could have been done. They
+laid regular siege to the town, and were on the point of taking it,
+when a disorder in the intestines began to rage among them, which
+occasioned such mortality, that they were compelled to break up their
+enterprize, and return to the Philippines. During these transactions
+in Ternate, the Christians in Manila, found out new objects for mutual
+hostility. Besides the provinces which I have mentioned, which the
+Augustine friars had been the means of reducing to obedience, they
+had distributed priests in Pangasinan, in Cagayan, and in the two
+provinces of Misames and Caraga, in the island of Mindanao, which are
+the only two in this large island, acknowledging subjection to the
+Spaniards. The factor of Mindanao, whose name was Blas de la Serna,
+treated the Indians with great severity, and lived a scandalous life,
+highly prejudicial to the cause of Christianity.
+
+The friar whom the Augustines had placed there, admonished him
+repeatedly to alter his course of life; but as his conduct became
+more reprehensible every day, the friar, unable to bear it longer,
+was under the necessity of excommunicating him. The factor, in revenge
+for (as he termed it) his impudence, publicly beat him. At this time
+the Bishop of Manila was Don Fr. Domingo de Salazar, who had arrived
+at Manila in March, 1581, with two Jesuits, who were the first of
+the order in these islands. On the 21st of December, he erected the
+church into a cathedral, appointing proper prebends and dignitaries,
+and forming municipal authorities for its due government. This
+nobleman was highly attentive to the rights of the clergy. He took
+up the affair with the factor very warmly, and did not relax in his
+exertions, until he saw him at Manila undergo the punishment, imposed
+on him by the sentence of the church, and which he had so well merited.
+
+The whole body of factors being alarmed, and fearing this would be
+much to their prejudice, persuaded the Governor, to withdraw from the
+clergy, the Indians who had been given to them for their own service,
+and that of the church. The Spaniards well inclined to the factors,
+seconded this advice, and they, in conjunction, commenced a cruel
+persecution against the Augustine and Franciscan friars. But Pedro de
+Chaves, Amador de Arriaran, Juan de Morenos, Antonio Savedra, Miguel
+de Lorca, Francisco de la Cueba, Esteban Rodrigueze de Figueroa,
+and other factors, who had seen, of how much importance the friars
+were, in the conquest and retention of these islands, came over to
+their party, and defended them against the attack thus made on them,
+proving satisfactorily, that without the assistance of the clergy,
+the factors would never have received even their rents.
+
+The Governor, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, was deeply afflicted at those
+disputes, so much at variance with his character, and with the anxiety
+of his views, for the happiness and prosperity of these islands. His
+whole mind, indeed, was occupied in the consideration, of what might
+contribute to these ends, and to the aggrandizement of the Spanish
+name; but unhappily persuading himself, that his honour was committed
+by these dissensions, he became affected by a deep melancholy,
+to which he was a prey during six months, and to which he fell a
+sacrifice in the month of March, 1583, before he completed his third
+year as Governor. He was interred in the church of St. Augustine,
+and to do him honour, more tapers than usual being burnt, the roof
+of the church was set on fire, which in a few hours communicated
+so generally, that the greater part of the city was destroyed, with
+immense loss of lives and property.
+
+By the death of Don Gonzalo, his kinsman, Don Diego Ronquillo,
+succeeded as Governor ad interim, being nominated as such in the
+royal order. The new Governor directed all his attention, to the
+rebuilding of the city, assisting personally in the public works,
+and paying particular attention, to the restoration of the houses,
+belonging to the inhabitants. Such diligence was used, that in a short
+time, the city was completely re-established. Many of the inhabitants,
+lost almost all their property in this fire; and the disaster, though
+of sufficient magnitude, was swelled into a most dreadful picture,
+by the ship going to Acapulco, but which had been forced by stress
+of weather into China. It is inconceivable, in what consternation,
+the inhabitants of the islands in the neighbourhood of Manila,
+arrived to their assistance. Don Diego Ronquillo immediately sent
+to China the factor of the royal works, Juan Bautista Roman, with
+orders to chastise those, who had been the cause of spreading this
+report, and to despatch, at any expense, a ship to New Spain, with a
+true statement of the extent of the mischief. The factor performed
+his commission with such efficacy, that the ship he despatched,
+returned the year following from Acapulco, in company with another;
+and in these ships came the new Governor and the Royal Audience. The
+government of Don Diego had lasted only one year, but, though short,
+it was of great importance to the settlement.
+
+He reduced to obedience in the island of Layte, and the province of
+Pangasinan, some towns which refused to pay the usual tribute, and he
+effectually suppressed symptoms of sedition in the other provinces,
+and which took their rise in the ill treatment of the factors. The
+factors entertained the idea, that the Indians whom they had found on
+their lands, ought to be considered in the light of slaves in every
+respect, and compelled them to work, appropriating all the wages of
+their labour to their own use, by which means they enjoyed all the
+luxuries of life, and even accumulated fortunes. To such a height had
+these abuses been raised, that a reform was absolutely necessary. The
+Governor bestowed particular attention on this subject, punishing
+those who were culpable, and watching over the general good. The result
+of this was, that many Indians who before had fled to the mountains,
+returned to the towns, and paid the tribute settled by the government,
+either in silver, or in the produce of the land they cultivated. By
+these desirable arrangements, the royal revenue was improved, and
+the interest of the factors so much injured by their own avarice,
+that from hence arose the proverb, "Avarice bursts the sack."
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1584.
+
+    The Administration of Don Santiago de Vera, fourth Governor of
+    Manila.
+
+
+The Governor, Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, had sent to Madrid Captain
+Gabriel Rivera, to solicit several objects, necessary to the general
+welfare of these islands, and in particular, that a Royal Audience
+should be established there, as it was extremely disadvantageous and
+embarrassing, to be obliged to have recourse to that of Mexico.
+
+The King granted this request, and sent Don Santiago de Vera, of
+Alcala de Henares, as Governor and President of the Royal Audience; and
+Don Melchor de Avalos, and Don Pedro de Rosas, as oidores of it. The
+third oidor, Don Antonio Rivera, arrived two years afterwards. Don
+Gaspar de Ayala was nominated fiscal. Don Santiago took possession of
+his government May, 1584, and immediately formed the Royal Audience,
+bearing the royal signet with much ostentation, under a canopy, from
+the convent of St. Augustine, to the palace. The Chancellor was Gabriel
+de Rivera, who arrived this year, with the title of Mariscal of the
+lake of Bombon. Immediately that Don Santiago took possession of his
+government, he put in force the orders which he had received from
+the King, to chastise those factors, who had abused the authority,
+they derived from the possession of the lands granted them. He
+began, by dispossessing Bartoleme de Ledesma, factor of Abuyo, and
+others the most culpable, punishing the rest in proportion to their
+irregularities, after full conviction of their delinquency.
+
+In the following year, 1585, he sent Juan de Morones and Pablo de
+Lima, with a powerful squadron, to reduce the Moluccas under the
+Spanish dominion, but it returned to Manila with similar disgrace
+to the preceding one, without being able to take possession of the
+fortifications of Ternate. The Governor was much chagrined at the
+ill success of this expedition, and was desirous of repeating the
+attempt, conformable to the positive instructions received from
+the King to that effect; but he was not able to execute it, as the
+troops from New Spain had not arrived, and, independent of this,
+the insurrections of the Indians were of too formidable a nature,
+for they lost no opportunity which presented itself of breaking the
+yoke of the Spaniards. Those of Pampangos and Manila entered into a
+conspiracy with the Moors of Borneo, who had ostensibly come there
+for the purpose of traffic. They formed the plan of traitorously
+entering the town in the night, setting fire to it, and killing in
+the confusion all the Spaniards. This conspiracy was discovered by
+a female Indian, married to a Spanish soldier. The Governor checked
+it in its commencement, imprisoning many, and severely punishing
+others by way of example. The islands of Samar, Ybabao, and Leyte,
+were likewise far from being in a state of tranquillity, and the
+factor of Dagami, a town of Leyte, had nearly lost his life by the
+Indians, in the collection of the tribute paid in wax, and which
+he had attempted to levy by a measure, containing double the usual
+quantity. This compelled him to fly for safety to the mountains, and
+he passed from thence in a boat to the island of Zebu. The Governor
+sent Captain Lorenzo de la Mota to quell these disturbances, which
+he soon did by promising to punish the delinquent.
+
+Among the calamities which happened during this government, the
+loss of the ship Santa Anna was not the least; she was on her way,
+richly laden, to Acapulco, and was taken by the English. Cavendish,
+an English pirate, emulous of the fame of Drake, having equipped five
+ships, with the assistance of Queen Elizabeth, took his departure
+for this quarter of the world; and having committed many acts of
+hostility on the coasts of Brazil and Peru, he arrived at Molucca,
+where he procured every information respecting the produce of the
+Philippines, and the rich cargoes which every year were sent from
+these islands to Acapulco. Well instructed, likewise, in the tract
+observed by our galleons, he sailed for the coast of California, to
+lie in wait for the annual ship destined for New Spain. In due time
+the Santa Anna, as is customary, made her appearance on that coast,
+in prosecution of her voyage to Acapulco, and fell into the hands of
+the English without any resistance, being quite unprepared.
+
+The English having made themselves masters of this valuable prize,
+directed their course to the Philippines, and arriving at the island
+of Panay, where we had a ship in the dock of Yloylo, an attempt was
+made to burn her, but it was rendered ineffectual by Captain Lorenzo de
+Limas, who made a vigorous resistance, with such soldiers and Indians,
+as he was able to collect in the province. Abandoning this object,
+the English commander sent a letter to the Governor, to apprize him
+of the capture he had made of the Santa Anna, and to inform him he
+should return frequently to those seas. He departed from Panay for
+the Cape of Good Hope, from whence he sailed for England, and arrived
+laden with such riches, that his name became more renowned than ever
+was that of Francis Drake.
+
+In the year 1589 no ship was despatched to New Spain; for two which
+had been equipped for this voyage, were lost in the port of Cavite
+in a dreadful storm, which happened on St. Peter's Day. About the
+same time many insurrections of the Indians took place, and in
+particular, those of Cagayan, who were always very troublesome,
+murdered many Spaniards. Those likewise, in the valley of Dingras,
+in the province of Ylocos, resisted the collections of tribute, and
+murdered six people from the city of Fernandina, who were travelling
+through their towns. Don Santiago quelled these tumults, and restored
+tranquillity, by duly mingling punishment with clemency. He likewise
+constructed a strong fort of stone, where the royal gate now stands;
+he removed to Manila the foundery which was hitherto in Santa Anna; and
+cast some artillery, with the assistance of an Indian of Pampango. He
+founded an hospital for the Spaniards: but the principal mover of
+this pious act was Don Luis de Vivanco, who, jointly with his wife,
+endowed it, and appropriated it to the reception and cure of the
+sick. The Governor divided several portions of land among those
+soldiers and sailors who deserved it most, and conducted himself in
+the exercise of his authority, so much to the general satisfaction,
+that his character as an excellent Governor was established by the
+declaration of the licentiate Herber del Corral, who was chief judge
+on the occasion of passing his trial of approbation.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1590.
+
+    The Administration of Gomez Perez Dasmarinas, the fifth Governor
+    of Manila.
+
+
+The clergy of Manila about this period, sent to the court of Madrid
+and Rome the Friar Sanches, a Jesuit, under the pretence of soliciting
+some objects, for the spiritual as well as temporal welfare of these
+islands. Arriving at Madrid, he petitioned that the Royal Audience
+should be removed, and that Gomez Perez Dasmarinas, a noble Galician
+knight of the order of Santiago, Corregidor of Logrono, should
+be sent as Governor. This nobleman arrived at Manila in May 1590,
+in one of the two ships which the Viceroy of Mexico had despatched,
+and in which he had sent four hundred troops, a supply, by this time
+highly requisite in the islands. The other ship which accompanied
+her struck on a shoal, close in with the land of Maranduque, and was
+lost, but all the people were saved. The King gave the new Governor,
+as a salary, ten thousand Castile ducats out of the royal revenue of
+New Spain, and which was remitted annually to the Philippines.
+
+He brought an order that the proceedings of the Royal Audience
+should be suspended; and in performance of this, the year following,
+the Oidores composing it embarked for Mexico; the Oidor Roxas alone
+remaining, as the ad interim successor of the Governor. The Bishop, who
+had some disagreement with the Governor, feeling the importance of the
+Royal Audience, as the only tribunal capable of curbing the power of
+the Governor, and persuading himself it was not safe, to trust in the
+hands of one man, the uncontrolled exercise of authority, in a country
+so remote from the seat of government, it was his intention to proceed
+to New Spain, with a view to procure the re-establishment of the Royal
+Audience in Manila, and on various, affairs of his bishopric. The
+Governor, that he might not effect his purpose, would not allow him
+to embark with the Oidores; and the Bishop in the mean time contented
+himself, with giving full powers and instructions to the Augustine
+Friar Ortiga, who was going to Madrid, to appear to any allegations
+which might be preferred against him. In the short time this government
+lasted, great undertakings were performed; such as building a wall
+of stone round Manila, erecting the fort of Santiago, and furnishing
+it with good artillery. The royal magazines in Manila and Cavite
+were built; and the asylum of Santa Potenciana was erected for the
+maintenance, at the cost of the state, of a certain number of young
+persons, daughters of deceased military officers, until they should be
+married. The Governor established among the different religious orders,
+a salutary ecclesiastical control over the Indians, assigning to each
+order their different towns and provinces, and converting the colony
+into a complete republic; supplying every defect in the government;
+and putting the whole in a respectable state of defence, by means of
+his four hundred regular soldiers, divided into detachments.
+
+Among the natives of many adjacent islands which traded with Manila,
+those of Japan, in particular, brought the richest merchandize for the
+consumption of the colony, and for the commerce with Acapulco. A keen
+and able man of this nation, named Faranda Kicmon, who had renegaded
+from the faith, persuaded Taycosama, Emperor of Japan, to send an
+embassy to Manila; and promised him, that if he would give him the
+commission, he would procure him to be acknowledged King of Manila,
+and that a regular and lucrative commerce, might be established between
+the two nations. The Emperor gave credit to his representations, and
+despatched him with letters to the Governor, claiming the vassalage of
+the Philippines. The Governor received this embassy, and replied to it
+immediately, without bringing into question the point of vassalage,
+by proposing to establish a commercial intercourse; sending for this
+purpose, the Franciscan Friars Pedro Bautista, Francisco de San Miguel,
+Bartholome, and Gerardo de San Miguel, who likewise had determined to
+avail themselves of this opportunity, to establish themselves in that
+kingdom to preach the gospel: he likewise sent with them a Portuguese
+of the name of Carvallo, and they bore a handsome present to the
+Emperor. Notwithstanding many malicious falsehoods which Faranda
+had circulated, Taycosama received the friars with much courtesy,
+and granted them permission to remain in his kingdom, treating them
+with much respect in the first instance, although, at a subsequent
+period, he murdered them. About this time ambassadors from the King
+of Camboa arrived, with two elephants, as a present to the Governor;
+and endeavoured to engage him, to grant them assistance against
+the King of Siam, who had commenced hostilities against them. The
+Governor answered the King of Camboa with another present, giving
+them great hopes, but evading immediate assistance, on the plea that
+his projected expedition to the Moluccas, required all his resources,
+however desirous he was of giving the aid they demanded.
+
+That this expedition might not turn out as the former had done, Gomez
+Perez Dasmarinas determined to accompany it in person. He sailed
+from Cavite on the 19th of October 1593, and arriving off Santiago,
+encountered a strong gale from the eastward, and the whole of the
+fleet was separated, his own ship alone remaining: this compelled
+him to anchor at Brimstone Cape, to effect which he was obliged
+to have recourse to his boats, on account of the great variety
+of currents. The Chinese, to the number of one hundred and fifty,
+though able to pull at the oar, assisted but very little; and the
+Governor abused them for the little exertion they made. These people
+resented this ill-treatment; and considering themselves as superior
+in force to the few Spaniards in the ship, conceived the design of
+murdering them the same evening. Whilst the Spaniards took their
+siesta (or afternoon nap), little dreaming of the designs of the
+Chinese, the latter commenced their carnage by killing the Governor,
+and all those who were not able to effect their escape in the launch,
+or by swimming, sparing only Friar Montilla, a Franciscan, and Juan de
+Cuellar, secretary to the Governor, whom they took with them. After
+this massacre they sailed for China, and passing by Ylocos, they
+entered the port of Sinay to water, where the Indians fell on them,
+and killed twenty of their number. The following day they disembarked
+in another port; and actuated by superstitious motives, sacrificed
+one of the native converts, in revenge for the slaughter the Indians
+had made the day before, and by which sacrifice, they expected to
+propitiate their gods in favour of their voyage. They tied him to a
+cross, and opening his chest, took out his heart, which they offered
+to their idols. They then made sail, and coasted for several days:
+they resolved to set on shore Friar Montilla, Secretary Cuellar,
+and those Philippine Indians who had been their shipmates. They
+then proceeded to Cochin China, where, in the end, they received the
+punishment due to their crimes.
+
+On the death of the Governor, the Licentiate Rosas succeeded to the
+Command, and immediately despatched two ships in search of the Chinese,
+under the command of Don Juan Ronquillo. They made enquiry in several
+ports; but not being able to gain information respecting their route,
+they returned without effecting their object. That they might not,
+however, remain without punishment for such atrocious crimes, and
+supposing that the Chinese might have taken shelter in the province of
+Chancheo in China, of which they were natives, he sent Don Fernando de
+Castro, to solicit of the Viceroy of that province, due satisfaction
+against the aggressors. Unable, however, to reach that destination,
+he was, by the interposition of divine Providence, compelled to bear
+away for Cochin China, where, on his arrival, he found the murderers
+had retired. He communicated his business to the King, and the whole
+of them were imprisoned and executed. Some of those, likewise, whom
+the Portuguese Governor of Molucca, had sent on the expedition with
+the Chinese, were hanged in Manila. The whole, however, affording
+small consolation for the melancholy catastrophe which had taken place.
+
+Forty days after the death of the Governor, Friar Montilla and
+Secretary Cuellar arrived at Manila, after having suffered many severe
+hardships, and being brought out for death repeatedly, whilst they were
+with the Chinese. The deceased Governor had given in charge to these
+gentlemen a trunk, to be delivered to his son Luis Perez Dasmarinas;
+and on opening it, papers of great importance were found: among
+the rest, a royal order, by which he had the power to nominate his
+successor, in virtue of which he named his own son Luis. At first Luis
+found some difficulty in being acknowledged as such, the Licentiate
+Roxas being firmly seated; and unwilling to deliver up his authority,
+for which he had begun to entertain a great attachment; he, however,
+on the 3d of December, in the same year, left Luis in quiet possession.
+
+The new Governor was desirous of sending another expedition to Molucca,
+but desisted from it at that time from prudential motives. It
+was fortunate that he formed this resolution, as in this case,
+Manila would have been left with only a few troops, and exposed to
+another attack from the Chinese, on whom little reliance could be
+placed. Indeed, there was reason to suspect they had something of
+that nature in contemplation, as many junks about this time arrived
+with Mandarins in them, and the cause of their appearance was never
+ascertained. They landed very frequently, and visited the Governor,
+but did not attempt any thing, nor could he comprehend their object;
+most fortunately, however, at this moment, arrived the two ships which
+sailed this year from Acapulco, bringing a sufficient force with them,
+to resist enemies more powerful than the Chinese.
+
+Our historians have, with great minuteness, stated the losses and
+arrivals of the ships which are sent to New Spain, on account of their
+being so interesting to these islands, which depend upon them for
+their subsistence, and, of course, their loss or arrival occasions
+a very general sensation. There is no reason to think, that these
+misfortunes are to be attributed to the difficulty of the passage,
+nor to stormy weather, so much as to the ignorance of the pilots,
+who are chosen without examination as to their nautical skill, the
+bad construction of the ships, their sailing out of season, and too
+heavily laden. These are, unquestionably, the principal causes of
+their failure; and it is a pity it is not remedied, for it is with
+justice affirmed, that the avarice and knavery of some rich people,
+have buried in the ocean many millions of dollars.
+
+In the year following, the same two vessels again made this voyage,
+and Senor Morga came in one, as successor to the late Governor,
+but this nobleman was afterwards promoted to be Oidor of Mexico,
+where he wrote the history of the Philippines. There came likewise
+in these ships, a sufficient number of troops, sent by the Viceroy
+of Mexico. Don Luis Dasmarinas was now, therefore, enabled to give
+the King of Camboxa that relief which his father had promised. He
+likewise despatched an expedition to the island of Mindanao; and
+he quelled an insurrection in some of the provincial towns which
+had revolted, and refused to pay the tribute, particularly those in
+Cagayan and Zambales. He did many praiseworthy actions, and governed
+with more approbation than his father, possessing greater abilities,
+at the same time that he was more affable to all.
+
+In the month of February 1596, the flag ship of the squadron of Alvaro
+Mendana de Neyra arrived at Cavite. He had sailed from Callao, the
+port of Lima, with four ships, to colonize the islands of Salmon;
+and having begun his new settlement in the island of Negros, near
+New Guinea, he died there, and his wife, Dona Isabela Barreto, at the
+instigation of the people, left the colony, and came in his ship to
+Manila. The Governor received her with great attention, and gave her
+every assistance, to enable her to return to New Spain.
+
+An important establishment was now founded here, called the Pious
+Work of Mercy, which originated with a clergyman of the name of Losa,
+and who, together with Captain Esquerra, an inhabitant of Manila,
+employed themselves in collecting donations for this purpose; and
+their exertions were so successful, that they were soon enabled to
+build the college of Santa Isabel, where many female orphans are
+maintained, and on whom marriage portions are bestowed. In emulation
+of this pious work, many others were endowed in the convents, and
+in the cathedral. The projectors traded with their funds to China,
+Batavia, the coast of Coromandel, and Acapulco, the produce of which
+was destined to be employed in like manner as above, in hospitals,
+dowers to orphan females, in ransoming children in China [20], and
+for masses for souls in purgatory, reserving part of it for the
+annual increase of the funds of these pious establishments, and to
+alleviate the distresses occasioned by the losses of the annual ships,
+of which they thus became the assurers to a certain extent. Such
+establishments may be useful to new settlers, since the parties
+desirous of commercial pursuits, may, if they possess any credit,
+be certain of meeting in these resources a capital with which they
+may trade. I am not of opinion, however, that they are very useful
+to these islands, generally speaking, because the rich merchants, who
+have sufficient capital, employ it in objects attended with no risk,
+and in their store-houses, and trade with that which they draw from
+this charity, by which they escape the chance of loss. If there had
+not, unfortunately we may say, been this resource, no doubt some mode
+would have been resorted to, of insuring the Acapulco adventures, at
+less than the pious foundations have been in the habit of contributing,
+and which often exceeds fifty per cent., and never falls below twenty
+per cent. Like all other adventures managed by a public body, there is
+never such strict oeconomy as when under the control of individuals,
+whose interests are involved in the result.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1596.
+
+    The Administration of Don Francisco Tello de Gusman, the fourth
+    Governor of Manila.
+
+
+The news of the death of Dasmarinas, reached Madrid through the
+medium of India, and immediately the King sent as his successor Don
+Francisco Tello de Gusman, Knight of the order of Santiago, born at
+Seville, who had been treasurer of the Indies. He arrived at Manila
+the 1st of June 1596, and the following month despatched the ship San
+Philip to Acapulco; but she encountered in her voyage heavy gales,
+was dismasted, and lost her rudder, and having no other resource, bore
+away for Japan, where the relief she sought was denied, except on the
+condition of her entering the port of Urando; in effecting which she
+touched on a sand bank, and made so much water, that she was under the
+necessity of being unloaded. The Governor, allured by the prospect of
+such rich booty, immediately conceived the design of making himself
+master of the vessel and cargo, and accordingly secured it in the
+royal store-houses, sending information to the Emperor Taycosama,
+that the Captain having given a false representation of the matter,
+he had proceeded against him according to law, and had secured the
+whole of the property. By this means he so warped the whole affair,
+that the cargo was condemned, and a prosecution was commenced, in the
+progress of which those Franciscan friars fell martyrs, who had come
+to this kingdom in quality of ambassadors.
+
+Taycosama named one of the four principal Governors of his kingdom,
+called Uximonoxo, to take charge of the ship, in order that the
+cargo might be delivered up; for our Captain, Don Mathias Landecho,
+had petitioned the Emperor, sending two Spaniards and two friars, of
+those he had in the ship, with a present worth twenty thousand dollars,
+to soften him, and, if possible, to obtain justice. Upon their arrival
+at Meaco, the court of the Emperor, they applied to the Franciscan
+friars, who, by their experience in this city, they conceived, could
+procure a favourable reception to their application. The Franciscans
+judged it better to apply to Ximonoxo, another of the four Governors;
+but this crafty Japanese, possessing more abilities than the friars,
+deceived the whole of them, found means to make them deliver up
+the present of the Emperor to him, offering to give them a letter
+to Uximonoxo, which they agreed to, and acceded to his wish. The
+Spaniards returned quite content with this letter; but it was the
+letter of Uriah, the Hittite, for immediately they delivered it,
+Uximonoxo imprisoned them. When they found out the deceit, they
+sent the Friar Guivara to Meaco, to procure their liberty from the
+other Governors, and, with the assistance of the Franciscan friars,
+attempted to get an audience of the Emperor, to explain to him the
+conduct of his Governors; but Uximonoxo was too crafty for them,
+prejudicing the Emperor against the friars, through the medium of
+the Bonzos, who are priests of their idols, to whom he suggested the
+propriety of complaining against them, because they propagated a new
+doctrine against the gods, which must be prejudicial to the state.
+
+Taycosama, who began to be desirous of keeping possession of the
+merchandize of the wrecked vessel, imprisoned the Franciscan friars,
+on pretence of their having preached the gospel of Christ against
+his command; and likewise pretended that they were employed as spies
+by the Spaniards, and that, with these views, they had quitted their
+own country. He now openly seized the property saved, and condemned
+the friars to death. With them the following were comprehended in
+this sentence; the Friars Pedro Bautista, Francisco Blanco, Gonsalo
+Garcia, Francisco de San Miguel, Martin de la Asumpcion, together
+with Phelipe de Jesus, who was going in that ship to New Spain to
+be ordained, and had resided with his brethren since his arrival in
+Japan. These six Franciscan friars, with three Japanese Jesuits, and
+seventeen Japanese laymen, who professed Christianity, all shared the
+same fate. They were paraded through the streets of Meaco, with their
+left ears cut off, and then marched above two hundred leagues into
+Nangasaqui, where they suffered martyrdom, by being placed on crosses,
+and put to death with lances. This transaction took place on the 5th
+of February 1597, in the presence of Senor Martinez, a Jesuit Bishop,
+many other Jesuits and Franciscan friars, and the Spaniards lately
+arrived in that ship, and who returned to Manila, after suffering
+many hardships, and certified what they had witnessed on this occasion.
+
+Immediately on the death of these martyrs being made known in Manila,
+the Governor sent two Spaniards and an Augustine friar, to solicit
+their bodies, and complain to the Emperor of the ill treatment which
+the Spaniards had experienced in regard to their ship, contrary to
+the treaty which had been made with the government of Manila. They
+likewise had instructions, to procure the establishment of commercial
+regulations for the future; and to pave the way for these views, they
+took with them a present of an elephant, an animal seldom seen in
+Japan. Taycosama was delighted with this present, and he esteemed it
+the more, as it knelt three times in his presence, on a certain signal
+being made to it. He received the ambassadors with great cordiality,
+and pleaded the laws of the empire, in justification of the conduct
+which had been observed, with regard to the ship and cargo; but made
+a promise, for the second time, of protection to the commerce of the
+Spaniards, assuring them that these vexations should never be repeated,
+and despatched them with a present to the Governor, together with the
+relicts of the martyred saints. The Spaniards had little confidence
+in the duration of this good understanding, for Faranda incessantly
+instigated the Emperor to commence hostilities on Manila, promising to
+reduce the whole of the islands to his obedience. The four Governors
+of the kingdom seconded the representations of Faranda, and measures
+were adopted with the view of carrying them into effect by collecting
+an armament; but the chief men of the country, who considered Faranda
+as a despicable character, much retarded this scheme. It was at
+first understood in Manila, that this armament was directed against
+the island of Formosa, as the first step towards the conquest of the
+Philippines. Our Governor took every precaution, and among others,
+sent an embassy to Canton, as the Chinese were the ancient enemies
+of the Japanese; and it was their interest to prevent the latter
+from making this conquest: nothing of this, however, was eventually
+necessary, as Taycosama died, and peace immediately followed.
+
+While this was passing in Japan, the two expeditions which Luis
+Dasmarinas had sent to Camboxa and Mindanao were proceeding in their
+operations; that which went to Camboxa began successfully, but it was
+afterwards completely ruined by Major Juan Gallinato, and returned to
+Manila without effecting any thing. Don Luis Dasmarinas having pledged
+himself for the success of this expedition, armed, at his own cost,
+two ships and a galiot, and with the approbation of the Governor,
+left Manila for Camboxa, and in a little time after arrived at China,
+at the port of Pinae, twelve leagues distant from Canton, where he
+encountered the Governor of Malacca, took him prisoner, and returned
+to Manila. His galiot arrived at Cagayan, and proceeded on his voyage
+to Camboxa, where he found the King re-established on his throne
+by the Portuguese, Cabos Diego Belloso and Blas Ruiz. The other two
+Spanish ships also arrived there, and an attempt was made to establish
+themselves in that kingdom; but although the King seemed to desire it,
+they were compelled to abandon the project, as it was opposed by his
+step-mother, and the Malays had already freed themselves from the
+control of the Portuguese by the murder of Belloso and Ruiz; indeed
+a few only had escaped, with Captain Juan de Mendoza in his ship.
+
+In Mindanao, Captain Figueroa, who had the charge of this expedition,
+and who bore, by the King's order, the title of Marquis of what
+he might conquer, arrived at Buhayen, where the Moors had some
+fortifications, from whence he retired to the kingdom of Tamoncaca,
+whose King was in amity with the Spaniards. The Senor Salazar having
+come out about this time to see the Royal Audience re-established,
+the ecclesiastical establishment was likewise arranged, the first
+Archbishop being the Senor himself. He, however, scarcely enjoyed
+his dignity three months, as, in August in the same year, he died of
+a dysentery. There had come with him Friar Pedro de Agurto, of the
+order of St. Augustine, first Bishop of Zebu, and Senor Benevides,
+of the order of the Dominicans, first Bishop of New Segovia. In the
+same year the Oidores arrived, who were to form the Royal Audience,
+the President of it being the Governor. The chief Oidor was Morga,
+nominated as successor ad interim to the Governor. The others were Don
+Christoval Telles Almanza, Alvaro Zambrano, and Geronimo de Salazar. In
+eight days after their arrival, the Royal seal being carried with
+much pomp to the cathedral, and from thence to the palace, the Royal
+Audience was, by this ceremony, considered as fully established.
+
+In the garrison of Caldera, Juan Pacho had remained as Governor, and
+being of an active disposition, he attempted to reduce the natives of
+Jolo, on which island he landed immediately after a storm of rain, and
+attacking them, was killed, with the greater part of his people. The
+residue retreated to Caldera; but in consequence of this defeat,
+the natives of Jolo and of Mindanao, with fifty Caracoas, invaded the
+islands of Zebu, Negros, and Panay, pillaging and burning the towns,
+and making many prisoners. In the following year, 1590, they repeated
+the attack, and the natives retiring to the mountains, refused to quit
+them again, as the Spaniards were unable to protect them. Those in
+particular of the island of Panay were most pertinacious, and would
+not come near the town, as one of their priestesses had asserted,
+that the Spaniards were in league with the Moors, and had been the
+cause of these hostilities for years back. It cost the friars a great
+deal of trouble, to eradicate the effects of the impression, made by
+this means on the minds of the Indians, but at length they succeeded,
+and the towns were re-occupied.
+
+To chastise these insults of the Moors, the Governor sent Juan
+Gallinato, with two hundred Spaniards, to Jolo; but after making an
+attempt to possess himself of a fort, which the King of Jolo had on a
+lofty hill, he returned to Manila, without having effected any thing
+of consequence.
+
+From that time to the present, the Moors have not ceased to infest our
+colonies. It is incredible what a number of Indians they have made
+prisoners, what towns they have plundered, what villages they have
+annihilated, and what ships they have taken. I am inclined to think,
+that Providence permits this as a punishment on the Spaniards, for
+delaying the conquest for no less a period than two hundred years [21],
+notwithstanding the expeditions and fleets, that have almost annually
+been sent to attempt it. On the first arrival of the Spaniards in
+those seas, they conquered, in a short time, all the Philippines,
+excepting the small island of Jolo, part of Mindanao, and a few other
+very insignificant islands near them, which, to this period, have
+not submitted. These Moorish Indians are certainly very valiant, and
+their enmity has been drawn upon us by our own conduct; for instead of
+following the laudable example of the first settlers in these islands,
+who brought the natives under subjection, principally by the mild
+interference of the friars, it seems, of late years, to have been the
+object of the Spaniards, since the great increase of the lucrative
+commerce of Manila, to acquire, by oppression and force, lands and
+establishments on these islands, without any view to conciliate the
+natives. Those, therefore, who have been sent on different occasions to
+reduce the country, have, instead of attending to the object of their
+mission, been solicitous only to serve their own purposes, considering
+that as a primary, which ought to have been a secondary object; and
+the natives profiting by constant experience in warfare, during which
+they discovered that the Spaniards were mortal like themselves, have
+at last become very formidable. There can be no doubt these Indians
+may be reduced by the same means employed with the others, that is,
+by sending missionaries amongst them, and a sufficient number of
+Spanish stations might be established, to command respect. These
+garrisons ought to be independent of the Governor of Manila, and
+ought to have a chief, who should reside there, directing his whole
+attention to the improvement of the settlement, by the extension in
+the country of the Spanish influence, by temperate measures.
+
+As the matter is now ordered, these appointments are made with no
+other view than to enrich, by any means, the individuals sent there as
+Governors. Such, too, is the situation of the Governors of Zamboanga
+and Marianas; who appropriate to their own use all the revenue sent
+by his Majesty's Governors for public purposes, and then return to
+Manila, leaving the colonies as poor and miserable as the first day
+they were established.
+
+In October 1600, two Dutch pirates took their station at the entrance
+of Marivelez, waiting for the ship Saint Thomas, which was expected
+to return from New Spain about this time. The Governor sent against
+them the Oydor Morga with two galleons, an English patache which had
+come from Malacca, a galiot, and other small vessels. On the 12th of
+December an engagement took place, when Morga took one ship, and the
+other fled, very much disabled; but he was incapable of pursuing his
+advantage, for his ship had suffered so much that she foundered, and
+fifty of the crew were drowned, the rest being saved on the island
+of Fortune. The ship which he had taken from the Dutch had on board
+twenty-five men, whom the Governor ordered to be hanged, as a warning
+to other pirates. During this year, two ships sailed for Acapulco; one
+was lost on the island of Catanduanes, but all the people were saved;
+the other took shelter in one of the Marianas, where she was seized by
+the Indians, who murdered most of the Spaniards, reserving only a few,
+whom the ship Saint Thomas rescued on her return to New Spain; but the
+various disasters which had befallen Manila during this government,
+were far surpassed by a terrible earthquake, in which many houses,
+and the church of the Jesuits, were destroyed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1602.
+
+    The Administration of Don Pedro de Acuna.
+
+
+In May 1602, four ships from New Spain arrived at Cavite, in one
+of which came the new Governor, Don Pedro Brabo de Acuna, Knight of
+the order of San Juan, and who had been Governor of Carthagena. In
+passing by the Marianas, he had the good fortune to rescue twenty-five
+Spaniards, who had been shipwrecked in the St. Margarita. Immediately
+on taking possession of his government, he gave audience to the
+ambassadors of Dayfusama, Emperor of Japan, who had succeeded to the
+kingdom, on the death of Taycosama, and requested that the commerce
+with his kingdom might be continued; and that shipwrights might be
+sent from Manila to build vessels for him. Without touching on this
+last subject, the Governor dismissed the Japanese with a magnificent
+present, which was all lost, as they were shipwrecked on the island of
+Formosa. With these ambassadors, friars from all the orders in Manila
+entreated the Governor to be allowed to proceed to Japan, in order to
+make converts, even at the risk of martyrdom. These good dispositions
+and intentions the Governor encouraged, and by his assistance, they
+were able to establish themselves in that kingdom, where in a short
+time they founded several convents. In 1603, the Augustine friars
+already possessed one, and the Captain of the ship Espiritu Santo,
+who put in there in distress, applied to the friars, requesting them
+to interest themselves with the Emperor, as the Japanese, conformable
+to their regulations, would not permit the ship to remain. Dayfusama
+received the application with courtesy, and punished those who had
+been the cause of it, sending the Spaniards who had accompanied
+the friars back to Manila, with great honours, giving at the same
+time strict orders, that all Spanish vessels arriving in future,
+in his ports, should be treated as friends; the ship, however,
+in the meantime had made her escape, fearing the same ill success,
+as had attended a similar application to Taycosama.
+
+A short time after the arrival of Acuna, he made a voyage through
+the Bisayas (or Islas de Pintados), to inspect the garrisons, and to
+make preparations for an expedition, which he intended against the
+Moluccas; and whilst he was employed in building the fort of Yloylo,
+the Moors took the opportunity offered by his absence, of seizing
+all the ships they met with, burning the towns, and endeavouring to
+take possession of Balayan; but the Alcalde Mayor of the province
+opposed them; and upon receiving assistance from Manila, pursued
+them to a desert island, off which he fell in with the Governor on
+his return to the capital. Orders were issued to attack them; but
+the Moors making all the sail they could, he was able only to take
+two, and sink five others, out of seventy vessels, of which their
+force consisted. On his arrival at Manila, the Governor received the
+melancholy intelligence of the death of Senor Tello, his deputy, who
+had discharged his trust with great zeal and probity. He was buried
+in the church of St. Augustine, to which he had left considerable
+donations. Soon after this a great fire happened in Manila, which
+burnt two hundred and fifty houses, the convent of St. Domingo,
+and the hospital for the reception of the Spaniards.
+
+In May 1603, three Chinese Mandarins arrived, on the extraordinary
+mission of discovering, whether the port of Cavite was composed of
+gold, as a Chinese, called Tiongon, had reported to his Emperor,
+by whom he was imprisoned, until the truth of his assertion should
+be ascertained, this man having promised to conquer it or lose his
+life. It was believed that this was a mere stratagem, to reconnoitre
+the country, as it was understood, that the Emperor intended to land
+an hundred thousand men, in the following December, with the view of
+becoming master, of the whole of the Spanish possessions. The Governor
+treated these Mandarins, with the most flattering distinction, shewed
+them the island of Cavite, and undeceived them in regard to the opinion
+propagated by their countryman, assuring them that the island was
+termed the Golden Island, on account of its lucrative commerce only.
+
+The expected armament of the Emperor did not make its appearance;
+but an insurrection of the Chinese inhabitants of Manila followed,
+which had been in a state of preparation during the embassy, and now
+broke out. There was a Chinese in Manila of the name of Engcan, who
+had remained there since the time of Limahon, who had been baptized,
+was very rich, and was in intimacy with many Spaniards. He offered to
+his countrymen, to build a wall round their quarter of the town: the
+work was commenced; but the fidelity of the Chinese beginning to be
+suspected, the Governor endeavoured to ascertain their intentions,
+through the medium of their enemies, the Japanese, from which
+circumstance the Chinese entertained a belief, that the Governor
+proposed to massacre them, with the assistance of these people;
+and they resolved, among themselves, to enter Manila on the eve of
+St. Francis, and murder every Spaniard in the place. Twenty-five
+thousand Chinese were concerned in this plot, which was discovered
+by an Indian having given notice of it to the curate of Quiapo,
+through whose means the information was instantly communicated
+to the Governor. There were two classes of Chinese at that time in
+Manila. Those who came annually for the purposes of commerce, and those
+who had long been residents, in a quarter of the town called Parian,
+outside of the walls of the city, and whom the Dominican friars had
+endeavoured to convert.
+
+The first step the Governor took, was to attempt to reconcile the
+annual Chinese merchants, who were very numerous; but he failed in
+the attempt, as they had collected in a large body in open rebellion,
+in a town within half a league of Manila, the others remaining in
+Parian. The Governor made a confidant of Engcan, and sent him, in
+company with some Spaniards, to endeavour to bring them back to a
+sense of their duty, but without effect, as the works they had raised
+in their defence would, in their opinion, protect them. In the night,
+some of them sallied out, burned the towns of Quiapo and Tondo, and
+killed many Indians. They were opposed by one hundred and thirty
+Spaniards, almost all of whom perished: among them were Don Luis
+Dasmarinas, Don Thomas Brabo, and Don Juan de Alcega, whose heads
+the Chinese sent to Parian, as an incitement for their countrymen
+to follow their example. Upon examination, it being discovered that
+Engcan was the principal abettor of these men, he was imprisoned,
+which had such an effect upon many of his countrymen, that they hanged
+themselves in despair.
+
+The Spaniards, finding that they could do nothing by means of mild
+measures, commenced their operations, and fought with such determined
+resolution, that the slaughter was immense. So general was the spirit
+of loyalty, that even the friars took up arms, and, in particular,
+Antonio Flores, who had been a soldier in Flanders and Italy, and had,
+in the battle of Lepanto, been ensign under Bernardino de Meneses, but
+afterwards took the habit of St. Augustine. The position he took was on
+the river, close to which the rebels were obliged to pass to join the
+Chinese of Parian; from this he sallied out, and made great slaughter
+among them. They made good their retreat, however, to Parian and Dilao,
+where they threw up works, but Captain Gallinato burned Parian, and
+laid waste Dilao; and Captain Luis de Velasco pursued them to Tabuco,
+which we now call Cabuyao. The Chinese not being able to maintain
+themselves here, passed on to the town of St. Pablo in the mountains,
+where Velasco, who had pursued them, fell, together with two Franciscan
+friars. Here the insurgents fortified themselves so strongly, that it
+was deemed necessary to send a greater force from Manila against them.
+
+Major Christoval de Acuna was charged with the expedition. He cut
+off their supply of provisions, and reduced them to such distress,
+that their only alternative was, to abandon their position or starve.
+
+They availed themselves of the cover of night, and made the best
+of their way to Batangas, where the Spaniards pursued them, and
+completed their destruction, having killed in different engagements,
+twenty-three thousand men, one hundred alone, who were rowers in the
+galleons, remaining of their whole number; and as a warning to their
+countrymen, to abstain from insurrection in future, Engcan was ordered
+to be hanged, and his head to be placed on the gaol. The Governor sent
+two Augustine friars to Spain, to inform his Majesty of the rebellion,
+and to enable them to arrive in a shorter time, he sent them by India;
+but they encountered so many difficulties in their passage through Goa,
+Persia, Turkey, and Italy, that it was three years before they arrived
+at the court of Madrid. This has always been a dangerous journey,
+and was particularly so to Friar Nicholas Milo, an Augustine, who,
+a few years before, had been sent the same route with a lay brother,
+born in Japan, and who, after having been exposed to great misery
+in many countries, fell a martyr in Muscovy with his companion. The
+Emperor of China sent ambassadors to Manila respecting the rebellion,
+requesting to know the meaning of the slaughter, which had been made
+among his subjects. The Governor justified himself amply, and the
+commerce remained on the same footing as before.
+
+In March 1604, eight hundred troops arrived from New Spain, with which
+relief Don Pedro de Acuna was enabled to fit out a fleet of thirty
+sail, in the port of Yloylo, for the conquest of the Moluccas. He
+sailed at the head of this armament on the 15th of January, 1606; and
+upon his arrival at Ternate, he sat down before the place, to which
+the King of the island had retired, and took it on the 1st of April,
+with the loss of fifteen Spaniards. The King of Ternate, who had fled
+with some of his subjects, intimated a desire to enter into amicable
+terms with the Spaniards, proposing to deliver up all his fortresses,
+the towns in Batoquina, which were anciently peopled by Christians
+(either Dutch captives, or Spanish deserters), all his Christian
+prisoners, the islands of Marotay and Herrao, with all his artillery
+and ammunition; and which terms were acceded to. He was not, however,
+left in possession of his kingdom, but accompanied the Governor to
+Manila, with some of his chiefs, who were not allowed to remain,
+from an apprehension of their fomenting disturbances.
+
+The Colonel, Don Martin Esquival, was appointed Governor of Ternate,
+with six hundred men; and in Tidore, the King of the island requested,
+that Captain Alarcon might remain with one hundred troops, which was
+acceded to. During these transactions, and while this armament was
+at Ternate, and few troops remained at Manila, the Japanese who lived
+behind the city, availed themselves of these circumstances, and took
+up arms against the Spaniards. This rebellion was soon put a stop to,
+through the mediation of the friars, who persuaded the insurgents to
+lay down their arms, and submit quietly. By this species of management,
+time was gained for the arrival of the Governor, to whom information
+had been sent. He arrived at Manila, banished the ringleaders to
+their own island, and obliged the rest to live in the town of Dilao,
+where they would be always under our guns; and by this means, kept in
+obedience. The Governor reaped little benefit from these successes,
+as he was immediately afterwards, seized with a complaint in the
+intestines, which carried him off on St. John the Baptist's day. On
+the death of the Governor, Don Christoval Telles de Almanza, as chief
+Oidor, became Military Governor ad interim. The rebellion, which lay
+smothered in the breasts of the Japanese, on this occasion, broke
+out afresh. They engaged the Spaniards, and many fell on both sides,
+as the Japanese were very brave, and were called the Spaniards of
+Asia. In the end, however, they were conquered, and were not permitted
+to live together in any considerable number till the year 1621, when
+Pelayo Hernandez built shops on their old quarter, which were hired
+out for the benefit of the Franciscan friars.
+
+Some of the Spaniards of the Moluccas took prisoner Pablo Blancardo,
+the Dutch commander at Malacca, and brought him in his galley to
+Ternate. The Governor there, in consideration of fifty thousand
+dollars, set him and all his people at liberty, which, when it was
+known in Manila, was stigmatized as an act of great baseness; and this
+public censure affected the Governor's mind to that degree, that he
+died of grief soon afterwards. The second in command succeeded; and to
+give satisfaction to the Royal Audience, despatched two ships in search
+of General Blancardo, who, it was supposed, had gone towards Maquien,
+in a patache; they took him prisoner a second time, and sent him with
+all his people, to Manila, where he was some time afterwards repaid
+from the Royal coffers, the amount of his ransom. Pablo Blancardo
+died of grief in prison at Manila, where he had been confined until
+the arrival of twenty-two Spaniards, who had been taken at Amboyna
+by the Dutch, and for whom it was intended he should be exchanged.
+
+The Royal Audience conducted themselves with great approbation in the
+civil administration, until the year 1608, when Don Rodrigo Vivero of
+Laredo, who was named by the Viceroy as Governor ad interim, arrived
+at Manila, and having had great experience in the management of the
+Indians in New Spain, he availed himself of it on this occasion, giving
+instructions to that effect to the chief judges, and other ministers
+of justice. He governed with much satisfaction for one year, when he
+delivered up the insignia of his office, and returned to Mexico.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1609.
+
+    Of the Administration of Don Juan de Silva.
+
+
+When the account of the death of Acuna reached Madrid from New
+Spain, the government was bestowed on Don Juan de Silva of Truxillo,
+Knight of the order of Santiago, who, at that time, was serving in
+Flanders. He arrived at Cavite in Easter, and took possession of
+his government, bringing with him six companies of soldiers, which
+addition to our force was of great importance at this period, as,
+in the month of October, the Dutch squadron which has been mentioned,
+appeared off the port of Yloylo. It was composed of six ships and a
+considerable military force, which it was intended to disembark in
+this province, but they were repulsed by the Alcalde Mayor. It then
+appeared off Marivelez, with the view of preventing ships from going
+to Manila, and of seizing all merchantmen. Don Juan de Silva fitted
+out an armament, with which, in the month of April, he attacked and
+defeated them on the day of St. Mark. He took two ships, the Captains
+of which had been killed, with many of the crews; a third fled, and
+the other two which had been separated the day before from the fleet,
+and were returning with great booty, retired with such despatch, that
+the Spanish squadron was unable to come up with them. He, however,
+seized those ships which they had taken. Among others was a Japanese
+vessel, in which were embarked those Spaniards, who had been wrecked
+on the coast of that island in the ship St. Francis.
+
+The Archbishop of Manila, Benavides, having died on the 26th of
+July, 1605, his Majesty named as his successor, Don Diego Vasques
+Mercado of Arevalo, in Old Castile. This year, 1610, he arrived at
+the Philippines, and discharged his functions with great approbation,
+until the year 1616, when he died, and the Bishop of Zebu succeeded
+him in the Archbishopric.
+
+The Dutch being settled in the island of Java, and possessing
+fortifications in Malacca and other parts of India, our Governor
+had little relish for such a neighbourhood, and as they had at
+times infested our seas, and attacked our islands, he determined,
+in person, to destroy the forts they had in Malacca, which being so
+close in his vicinity, he was the more jealous of. He fitted out a
+squadron of six ships and two galleys, and sailed for Ternate, where
+he intended to take on board some linguists, and to arrange all his
+other operations. He understood, in Ternate, that the Dutch hearing of
+this expedition, had fortified themselves in such a manner in Malacca,
+that it was impossible to make an impression upon them, and that he
+might not entirely lose the benefit of the armament he had prepared,
+he attempted to reduce the forts in Gilolo and Bataquina, but was
+obliged to retreat to Manila, with the loss of three hundred men,
+when he immediately began to make preparations of men and ships for
+another expedition of the same nature. These islands, at this time,
+received considerable aid in the arrival from Spain, by the way of
+India, of five caravelas out of seven, which in April, 1613, had
+sailed from Cadiz, commanded by Ruy Gonzalez de Segueira, having on
+board three hundred and fifty soldiers, two hundred and forty seamen,
+and a hundred Portuguese landsmen.
+
+Upon the arrival of this relief, the Governor determined to
+proceed to Malacca against the Dutch, whose position he ordered to
+be reconnoitred, but he found them so powerful in ships, which had
+arrived by the Straits both of Magellan and Sunda, that he deemed it
+necessary to use his utmost exertions, to enable him to cope with
+such powerful enemies. With this view he sent a despatch to the
+Viceroy of India, requesting he would unite the forces of the two
+kingdoms; but while he was preparing his armament at Cavite, ten Dutch
+vessels arrived at Panay. They landed a number of men, and marched
+for the city of Arivalo, burning the churches and the convents of
+the Augustine friars, in the towns of Ogtong and Xaro. The Indians,
+aware of the inadequate force the Spaniards possessed, fled to the
+mountains, and although the Dutch retired immediately, it cost the
+friars a great deal of labour, to bring them back to their towns,
+where they could not persuade themselves they were secure.
+
+By the end of the year 1616, Don Juan de Silva had collected the
+greatest armament, that had been seen in the Philippines; it consisted
+of ten galleons, four galleys, a patache, and many smaller vessels,
+with all necessary supplies, and five thousand men, two thousand being
+Spaniards and Portuguese. He sailed with this formidable armament,
+on the last day of this year, to attack the forts of Malacca; but
+as the galleons had not arrived which were expected from India,
+and which he imagined had wintered in the Straits of Malacca, and
+it was known that the Dutch kept some vessels in these Straits,
+in expectation of the ships from China which passed by here, the
+Governor thought it most adviseable, to attack these ships in the
+first instance, and after he had destroyed them, he should be able
+to join the galleons from India, and proceed to the Dutch forts in
+Malacca. The reasoning was good, but it failed in the execution,
+the galleons of India having been burnt, in an engagement they had
+with the Dutch, and the latter having quitted the Straits eight days
+before the Spaniards arrived, flying with all their effects, as they
+had received secret intelligence of their route. At the same time that
+the Spanish galleons entered the Straits, two Malay merchantmen from
+China arrived very richly laden; by saving which, the inhabitants
+of Malacca called Don de Silva their preserver, received him on
+shore under a canopy, and expected from his valour, and the powerful
+fleet he brought, that India would be freed from those freebooters,
+the Dutch; but he was seized with a fever, and died in eleven days,
+on the 19th of April, 1616. He had ordered his body to be embalmed,
+and directed it should be carried to Xerez de los Cavalleros, to
+a convent of bare-footed carmelites, and buried there. Before he
+died, he gave the command of the armament to Don Alonzo Henriquez,
+who brought it back to Manila, without effecting any thing else.
+
+By the death of the Governor, the command devolved on Don Andres
+Alcaraz, the oldest Oidor, who had been left in charge of the
+government by Don Juan de Silva, when he sailed with the armament
+for Malacca. About the same time our squadron sailed from the bay,
+another Dutch squadron, which had lately arrived by the Straits of
+Magellan, entered the mouth of the harbour, and lay a month close to
+Marivelez. There were only four ships and two pataches laying before
+Manila, and it was without artillery, ammunition, or soldiers. The
+Governor ad interim was not dismayed at this; he armed those few ships
+he possessed, fortified certain positions, and was encouraged in the
+undertaking by the people, who took up arms, not only the laity, but
+even the ecclesiastics also. The Dutch commander wrote two letters
+to the Royal Audience, and one to General Pablo Blancardo, whom the
+Spaniards had carried prisoner to Manila; but as soon as he learned
+that Blancardo had died in prison, he made sail to the Moluccas.
+
+Upon the death of Silva, the Dutch came with ten ships against Oton,
+where they were gallantly repulsed by the commandant of the Pintados,
+Don Diego de Quinones, who, in a wooden fort, sustained a siege of
+ten days, during which time the Dutch made four assaults, in which
+many were killed, but at last they were compelled to re-embark, and
+they retired to Malacca. The following year the same armament of ten
+ships came against Playa Honda. The Governor despatched against them,
+the Colonel Don Juan Ronquillo, with six galleons and two galleys; they
+came to an action on the 14th of April, 1617, and the two commodores
+being engaged, Don Juan Ronquillo sunk his adversary's ship, called
+the Sun of Holland; two other ships were burnt, and the rest fled
+with precipitation. The Spaniards, however, were not able to pursue
+them, as they had suffered much in the engagement, and had lost the
+galleon St. Mark. After this action, Don Geronimo de Silva returned
+from Molucca, and the Oidor Alcarez resigned to him his office, the
+duties of which he had discharged with great applause. In October,
+Don Geronimo ordered the seven galleons that had been so severely
+handled in the last engagement, to be laid up in Marinduque. The two
+ships for Acapulco were despatched in the worst season of the year,
+during the hurricane months, and they were both lost, one on the
+coast of Lobo, and the other on that of Galban. This reflected no
+great credit on the wisdom and prudence of the Governor.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1618.
+
+    The Administration of Don Alonzo Faxardo.
+
+
+On the 2d of July, 1618, arrived Don Alonzo Faxardo, of the order of
+Alcantara, of Murcia, and on the day following he took possession
+of the government of these islands. His Majesty had appointed him
+chief of an armament which he had intended to send by the Straits of
+Magellan, to the relief of Don Juan de Silva, to drive the Dutch from
+these seas; but it was delayed by his sending the forces destined for
+the Philippines, to the relief of the Emperor of Germany, Ferdinand
+the Second. The voyage on this account did not take place, until the
+death of Silva was known, when his Majesty named Faxardo as Governor,
+charging him to be careful of the interests of the Indians, who had
+suffered much in the late struggles, and promising ample rewards
+to those Spaniards, who should make this an object of their special
+attention.
+
+A short time after his arrival, the Dutch appeared in those seas,
+not with the intention of attempting Manila, as they were aware of
+the difficulty of the undertaking, but to intercept the galleons from
+Acapulco, richly laden with bullion. For this purpose they cruized
+with three ships off Cape Espiritu Santo, taking their station in the
+strait of St. Bernardino, as the galleons coming from Acapulco were
+in the constant habit of taking that route. On the 25th of February
+the Dutch got sight of them; they bore up, and ordered them to strike
+their colours, when a severe engagement took place. The Spaniards,
+under the veil of night, and in the confusion which prevailed,
+separated and escaped, one arriving at Palapag, and the other at
+Borongo, on the coast of Ybabao, where the cargoes were all saved,
+though the ships were lost. That the same misfortune might not occur
+again, the Governor ever after gave the commanders secret instructions,
+changing their route each voyage. On the 24th of August, this year,
+Friar Miguel Garcia Serrano, of the order of St. Augustine, late
+Bishop of New Segovia, took possession of the Archbishopric of Manila.
+
+In the year 1623, upon the canonization of St. Ignacio and
+St. Francisco Xavier, the friars of that order celebrated a grand
+festival, and those of Zebu, desirous of imitating them, likewise
+celebrated one, at which all the Jesuits of the island of Bohol were
+present, leaving very few Spaniards in that island. The defenceless
+state of it induced two or three Indians to persuade the rest to rebel,
+assuring them that the Devil had appeared, ordering them not to pay
+tribute to the Spaniards, but to retire to the mountains, and erect a
+chapel, where they should worship him, and he would give them every
+thing they required, and defend them from the Spaniards. This was
+quite sufficient to set all the island in a flame, two towns alone
+remaining faithful to the Spaniards. The Alcalde Mayor of Zebu,
+immediately upon notice of this insurrection, sent fifty Spaniards,
+and one thousand friendly Indians to Bohol, who attacked the rebels
+with great vigour, made considerable slaughter, and completely routed
+them. This ought to have undeceived them, but they were obstinate,
+and fortified themselves on a rock, which, however, afforded them
+little defence, as our people being protected by their shields from
+the arrows and stones they hurled down, gained the height, and made
+great havock among them, making prisoners all that were not able
+to save themselves by flight. The Alcalde Mayor hanged some of the
+ringleaders, and pardoned the remainder; but insensible to this favour,
+they spurned at the proffered pardon, and fled to the mountains,
+to which, six months after, the Alcalde returned, and thoroughly
+quelled the insurrection.
+
+The bad example of the people of Bohol was followed by those of the
+island of Leyte, and was fomented by an Indian who was not suspected
+of disaffection. This was Bancao, a petty chief of Dimasava, who had
+received Legaspi with great attention, and had accompanied him to Zebu,
+where he was baptized, for which conduct Philip the Second had sent
+him a royal order, granting him many privileges. He had been very
+faithful to the Spaniards in his youth, but turned traitor in his
+old age. In imitation of those of Bohol, he raised an insurrection
+among the Indians in the island of Leyte, so that it became necessary
+to send a force against them. Although they saw the Spaniards were
+superior in numbers to them, they were not dismayed, and received
+them firmly; but in a short time they fled with precipitation. In
+this flight Bancao was killed, having been transfixed by a lance:
+his head was placed on a pole, to serve as a warning to others,
+which had so good an effect, that order was immediately restored.
+
+This year an expedition was sent to the mountains of Igorrotes,
+where there were mines of gold, and where the Indians were of fairer
+complexion, with the small eyes of the Chinese. It was imagined that
+when Limahon was in Pangasinan, many of his people, pressed by hunger,
+fled to the mountains, and mixed with the inhabitants, from which
+intercourse resulted this cast, so different from the rest.
+
+This expedition, under charge of Francisco Carrino de Valdes, head
+of the provinces of Pangasinan and Ylocos, marched in good order
+seven days, and on the eighth arrived in the town of the mines,
+where the natives received them well; but the Spaniards placed too
+much confidence in them. The Igorrotes, when least expected, rose on
+them, and treacherously murdered the chief of the friendly Indians, on
+which de Valades retired, to wait a better opportunity. The following
+year the expedition was expected to be repeated, but it was not, as
+it became necessary for the troops to march to Cagayan, to quell an
+insurrection among the Indians of that province. Many expeditions have
+since taken place to these mountains, but with such ill success, that
+the Indians of this district remain independent to this hour. They,
+however, trade with the Spaniards in gold, wax, and tobacco, in return
+for cattle; and the Augustine friars have succeeded, in converting
+to Christianity, a few who live in the towns near the mountains.
+
+The Governor persevered in pacific measures as much as possible,
+although those measures were deemed disgraceful. He had much
+domestic uneasiness on account of his wife, Dona Catalina Zembrano,
+who had an illicit connection, and was accustomed to steal out from
+the palace to a particular house, where she was at last discovered
+with her lover by Faxardo, who going his rounds through the city, as
+was his custom, from information, no doubt, which he had received,
+entered into the house in which this lady was with her paramour,
+and found her in a situation, which rendered her guilt sufficiently
+manifest. Don Alonzo, a man of high honour, severely felt this injury,
+and was determined to take proper vengeance. He ordered a confessor
+to be called to her; and the ceremony at an end, unmoved by the
+tears and persuasion of the priest to the contrary, he stabbed her
+with his own hand. The unworthy paramour saved his life by flight,
+and thus escaped the vengeance of the Governor. Don Alonzo soon after
+fell into a profound melancholy, of which he died in two years, and
+was buried in the church of the Franciscans, August, 1624. By his
+death Don Geronimo de Silva succeeded to the military government,
+and the civil government became vested in the Royal Audience. In a
+short time after, a fleet of seven Dutch men of war appeared off Playa
+Honda, and many of their soldiers landed on the island of Corrigidor,
+and took prisoners or killed such Indians as fell in their way. The
+Governor proceeded against them with five galleons and two large
+galleys, and fell in with them on the coast of Playa Honda, when the
+Dutch attempted to escape; but our commander's ship, by superiority
+of sailing, prevented it, when a warm engagement took place, and a
+Spaniard was killed close to the Governor. It is necessary to mention
+this accident, as he thought himself in great danger, and was so
+alarmed by it, that he ordered the ships to retire to Cavite, where
+he was received with the contempt he merited; the people imputing
+the loss of the victory to his cowardice. Complaints were made to
+the Royal Audience, who confined him in the fort of Santiago, where
+he remained until he was released by the Governor who succeeded him,
+ad interim, Don Fernando de Silva, knight of the order of Santiago.
+
+Don Fernando had been in Manila before this time, having there made a
+most honourable matrimonial connection; and having accumulated a good
+fortune, he went with his wife to Mexico, and from thence to Madrid,
+having been sent thither by his near relation, the Viceroy of New
+Spain, Marquis de Cerralbo. Having returned to Mexico and this vacancy
+in the government of Manila occurring, it was given to him ad interim,
+and he arrived there in June 1625.
+
+He was received in Manila with great satisfaction, as they knew he
+was prudent, and well acquainted with these islands: this he had
+sufficiently shewn in the measures he had adopted for the protection
+of our commerce, by means of the ships he had built at Cavite for
+that purpose. He ordered the Alcalde Mayor of Cagayan to land on the
+island of Formosa, and fortify it in that part of Fanchuy which was
+the nearest to Cagayan, in order, with greater facility to oppose the
+Dutch, who, the year before, had raised forts on the opposite side,
+called Tayguan, with the intention of obstructing the commerce of
+China with Manila. The Alcalde Mayor executed his commission, and
+constructed works sufficiently extensive to accommodate the troops,
+and the Dominican friars, who had gone there to convert the natives;
+and who exerted themselves with such zeal, that in a short time they
+built several towns, and were able to number the greater part of the
+natives, among the professors of our faith.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1626.
+
+    Of the Administration of Don Juan Nino de Tabora.
+
+
+Don Juan Nino de Tabora, knight of the order of Calatrava, was named
+as Governor of the Philippines. He embarked for his government with
+six hundred troops, and several officers, who had served with him
+in Flanders, among whom were Don Lorenzo Olaso y Ochotegui, who came
+with the appointment of Colonel. Tabora arrived safely at Manila, and
+entered upon his government on the 29th of June, 1626. He possessed
+a fund of military knowledge, which was of great importance, at this
+period, to the Philippines, and he immediately provided a sufficient
+force to protect their commerce, and secure the respect of their
+neighbours. In ten months after his arrival, he had collected eight
+large ships of war, four smaller for the commerce of Acapulco, and two
+still smaller for the protection of the intercourse with Molucca. With
+this armament, and with two ships, which were expected from New Spain
+with men and money, he determined to attack the Dutch on the island
+of Formosa; but the arrival of the two ships being retarded very
+considerably, he was not ready to proceed with the expedition, until
+the middle of August. The Royal Audience, considering the approach
+of the monsoon, and apprehensive of the loss of the squadron, and
+that the object of the expedition might be thus defeated, represented
+their fears to the Governor, and passed an order that it should not
+sail. Having no faith, however, in what he considered as idle chimeras,
+Tabora left Cavite, and arrived at Cape Boxeador; where, finding the
+north winds had set in, and that it was impossible to make head against
+them, after repeated unsuccessful attempts, he bore away for Cavite;
+and the only advantage resulting, from his pertinacious opposition
+to the opinion of the Royal Audience, was the relief he sent in some
+small vessels, to the Spaniards in the island of Formosa.
+
+A vessel soon after arrived from China, and gave the intelligence that
+the Dutch were lying in wait at Macao, for the merchantmen expected
+from Manila in China. The Portuguese requested, that part of the
+armament might be allowed to convoy them, offering to contribute to
+the expenses. The Governor, accordingly, sent with them two large
+galleons, with a patache, ordering the commodore, after he had seen
+the Portuguese safe, to run up the coast from Macao to Sincapura
+in search of the Dutch, wintering at Siam, for which indulgence he
+was ordered to make the necessary presents to the King. Don Juan
+de Alcaraz, who was the commodore, punctually obeyed his orders: he
+arrived at Macao, and not meeting with the Dutch, who had quitted it
+precipitately, on notice of his appearance in this quarter, he passed
+on to Siam, where, finding the Dutch protected by the Siamese, he
+burned some of their junks, and made prisoners the ambassadors whom
+the Siamese were accustomed, at certain periods, to send to China,
+with their acknowledgment of the sovereignty of the Emperor. Upon this
+occasion our arms acquired such credit, that, during the whole of this
+government, the Dutch made no further attempt against these islands.
+
+In the year 1628 two ships arrived with the usual supplies from
+Acapulco, and in them came Friar Hernando Guerrero, of the order of
+St. Augustine, Bishop of Cagayan, and the Governor's intended bride,
+Dona Magdalena Zaldivar y Mendoza, with whom he had entered into a
+treaty of marriage while at Mexico, and had obtained leave from the
+King for that purpose. The wedding feasts, however, were no impediment
+to the operations of the government. The Moors of Jolo continually
+infested these islands; those, in particular, which were the more
+remote from the capital, were kept in perpetual alarm, and nothing was
+talked of but the depredations committed, and the prisoners taken. To
+chastise these insults, a squadron was sent against Jolo, under the
+command of Don Christoval de Lugo. He arrived safe, and landed all
+his people without any resistance, the Indians having, in a cowardly
+manner, abandoned their town, and retired, with their King, to a fort
+situated on the top of a hill. The Spaniards plundered these houses, in
+which the friendly Indians diligently assisted, enriching themselves by
+the spoils, which consisted of rice, gunpowder, brimstone, small-arms,
+&c. They did not pursue them to the fort on the top of the hill, in
+which they had taken refuge; but, after having completely destroyed the
+town, they embarked for Manila. In passing by the island of Basilan,
+they landed, burned the principal town, and destroyed all the trees,
+as a punishment for the aid which these Indians had afforded to those
+of Jolo, in the last incursions they made.
+
+The following year, a sacrilege was committed in the cathedral, which
+affected the mind of the Archbishop to that degree, that he died of
+melancholy. He was one of the most devout prelates who had occupied
+the archbishopric. He was interred in the church of St. Augustine.
+
+After his death, there was a dispute between the ecclesiastical
+Cabildo and the Bishop of Zebu, as to who should succeed ad interim
+to the archbishopric, when the Royal Audience determined in favour of
+the Bishop, conformable to the bull of Pius V. The Moors in Jolo and
+Caumocones again commenced their ravages in the islands: nothing was
+secure in the towns on the coasts; neither friars, Indians, churches,
+or ornaments; all were objects of their enmity. Notice was, without
+loss of time, given to the Governor; he despatched a fleet, commanded
+by Don Lorenzo Olaso, for the double purpose of making peace with the
+Indians of Mindanao, as they requested, and to retaliate upon those
+of Jolo. He arrived at Jolo, landed his people, and marched up to the
+fort on the hill, to which, as usual, the Indians had retired. The
+General believed it no difficult matter to reduce the fort, and
+gave orders to attack it accordingly; he shewed, in the attack,
+great personal valour, and acting the part of a common soldier,
+as well as a general, was, with two of his captains, killed. As no
+officer remained to command them, the men retired to their ships;
+and, without doing anything else than laying waste the country, they
+returned to Manila in haste, and in disgrace, the Moors becoming more
+insolent than they were before. The Indians of the province of Caraga,
+in Mindanao, observing that the Spaniards were unable to subdue their
+countrymen, put to death some of the friars and Spaniards who were
+living among them, and declared open rebellion in most of the towns of
+the province.--The remaining friars and Spaniards, took refuge in the
+towns which continued faithful to their cause; and, in a short time,
+relief arriving from Manila, order was again restored.
+
+This year several embassies arrived at Manila: one from Japan
+from the Governor of Nangasaquy; and the King of Saxuma, likewise,
+sent ambassadors, seeking redress for the ravages our galleons had
+committed in the harbour of Siam, on two junks of his nation, and
+out of which had been taken some of the royal merchandize, which
+they considered a great sacrilege, and which had so irritated them,
+that the real object of the embassy was to reconnoitre the place,
+with a view to take vengeance for this insult. A Governor of one of
+the Chinese provinces, sent an embassy to request the continuation of
+the commercial intercourse; and the King of Cambodia, who was at war
+with the King of Siam, sent to request the protection of the Spaniards,
+offering the commerce of his kingdom, and liberty to form a dock for
+the building of ships. The Governor received all these with presents,
+and dismissed them with urbanity and kindness: he accepted the offer
+of the King of Cambodia, and sent some ship-builders for the purpose
+of constructing a vessel there: with them went four Dominicans to
+preach the gospel; but when they arrived, finding the King dead, and
+little disposition in his son, who succeeded him, to admit the catholic
+religion, they all returned to Manila without effecting any thing.
+
+The Governor, who was determined to lose no opportunity that offered
+to build ships, finished one in the port of Cavite; but so badly
+constructed, that, at the commencement of her voyage for Acapulco,
+she foundered in the port: she was, however, hove up, and sufficiently
+repaired to proceed on her voyage the following year. By this means,
+and the arrival here of the other ships in 1631, no ship remained
+in Acapulco to send to the Philippines; and the Viceroy of Mexico
+despatched two pataches with the ordinary relief. In one of these came
+Don Francisco Roxas y Onate, Oidor of Mexico, as inspector of the
+Royal Audience, and other tribunals; and his office to continue two
+years. He was well received, and the Governor supported his authority
+whilst he lived; by means of which, he made his visit pleasant,
+although he suspended two Oidors. His Excellency, on the 22d of July
+1632, died of a dysentery, occasioned by being exposed to the rain
+and sun, during his visits to and from Cavite, in the performance of
+his office, in which he was extremely diligent, having made a bridge
+over the river of Manila, repaired the fortifications of the town,
+and constructed several works in Cavite.
+
+Don Lorenzo Olaso had been named by the Viceroy of Mexico to succeed
+him pro tempore. Nothing particular occurred under his administration,
+which only lasted a year, when Don Juan Zerezo of Salamanca was
+appointed to succeed as Governor ad interim. Immediately on his arrival
+at Manila, with a view to repress the insults of the Moors, and on
+the representation of the Jesuits, he determined to form a garrison
+at Zamboanga. He appointed Don Juan de Chaves to the command, with an
+adequate force, and orders, after destroying the towns of the Moors,
+to erect a fort in the situation which Friar Vera had pitched upon,
+a little distant from the port of Caldera, where it was necessary
+to maintain a detachment to guard the shipping. This situation is
+most beautiful; but, having no water, the defect was supplied by
+digging a channel from the river, through which the water flows in
+great abundance, and, passing by the wall of the fort, falls into
+the sea. The first stone of the fort was laid on the 23d of June,
+1635. Many of the Spaniards opposed this plan under different pretexts,
+and experience has shewn what little purpose this fort has answered,
+its only use being to enrich one military man, who is Governor for
+three years, and who draws twenty or thirty thousand dollars profit
+from the supplies furnished the soldiers. The Moors, not in the
+least checked by the fort of Zamboanga, have continued, to this hour,
+committing the same ravages as before; and the Indians, who are each
+taxed a measure of rice for its maintenance, have received neither
+security or benefit from it.
+
+It has been too justly observed by Senor Solorzano, that whatever is
+established with a view to benefit the Indians, universally fails of
+attaining that end; nor is this to be wondered at, as every regulation
+brought forward with this avowed intention is always so contrived,
+as to contribute not to the advantage of the oppressed Indian, but
+solely to that of the person exercising the chief authority.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1635.
+
+    The Administration of Don Sebastian Corcuera.
+
+
+On the 25th of June, 1635, Don Sebastian Hurtado de Corcuera, who had
+been Governor of Panama, took possession of this government, and the
+same day Senor Guerrero took possession of the archbishopric, although
+the bulls had not yet arrived. Dissensions immediately begun between
+these two, originating between the Dominicans and bearded friars,
+respecting the division of their provinces, and on which account
+his Excellency was determined to be revenged of the Archbishop,
+the very first opportunity. An occasion very soon presented itself:
+the Archbishop having taken a female slave from an artilleryman,
+because he had an illicit intercourse with her, the artilleryman met
+her one day in the street, and, for some unknown cause, murdered her,
+taking refuge in the church of St. Augustine.
+
+The Governor ordered the troops to seize him in the church, without
+first applying to the friars; they obeyed their orders, seized
+the criminal, and delivered him up to their commanding officer,
+who sentenced him to death. The sentence was executed in front of
+the church of St. Augustine, a place which had never been used for
+public punishment: the Archbishop attempted to prevent the violation
+of the church privileges, but his attempt proved ineffectual.
+
+During the disputes between the Governor and the Archbishop, the
+Moors were ravaging our towns, and for the space of eight months
+committed horrible atrocities. His Excellency determined to go in
+person to chastise them. He sailed from Manila with a squadron on the
+2d of February, 1637, and having arrived at Lamitan, the residence of
+Corralat, petty sovereign of Mindanao, he possessed himself of it with
+ease. Corralat retired to a hill well defended by batteries, and the
+best troops he had. The Governor attacked him, but after losing many
+Spaniards, he sounded a retreat. The day following he renewed the
+attack by a road more accessible, when he possessed himself of the
+fort, and made great slaughter of the Moors, who threw themselves
+headlong over the precipice in their confusion. The Governor now
+retired to Zamboanga, where he received the chief of Buhayen, and those
+of the island of Basilan, upon both of whom their fears had operated
+to beg for peace, promising to consider Corralat as a common enemy,
+and receive Friars into their dominions.
+
+From Zamboanga he passed to Jolo, and sat down before the famous
+hill fort of the island, and which the Spaniards had never been able
+to possess themselves of. He found it, however, so well fortified,
+that after attempting to batter it, he was obliged to have recourse
+to some other mode of attack. He prepared five mines, and springing
+them at the time of assault, he blew up part of the works, with
+fifty men; but the Spaniards advanced so slow, that the Moors had
+time to recover themselves, and returning to the charge, repulsed
+them effectually. The next day two more mines were sprung, which did
+great damage. The Spaniards then advanced rapidly to the remaining
+fortification, but behind the rampart which had been blown up, contrary
+to their expectation, they found another work erected, and by which
+means they were repulsed. The Governor observing the little effect
+produced by these assaults, determined to surround the hill, though a
+league in circumference, with a wall and forts, converting the siege
+into a strict blockade. This measure, however, proved by no means
+adequate to the end in view, the besieged defending themselves with
+great resolution, and destroying numbers of the assailants. It was,
+therefore, resolved to construct a battery on a position completely
+commanding the hill. The Moors on this were desirous of capitulating,
+but the Governor commanded them to surrender at discretion. Thinking
+these terms harsh, they became desperate, and assaulted the Spanish
+camp; but not being able to force it, they took the opportunity of
+quitting the hill by the back part of it, which had been left for
+the time lightly guarded.
+
+His Excellency found himself in possession of the enemies position,
+and all their riches, with the Queen and her nephew, Tancun. The
+Queen requested permission to bring the King and his chiefs into the
+presence of the Governor; he consented, and she took that opportunity
+of escaping. The Governor then sent Tancun for the same purpose, and he
+returned with the keys of the royal coffers; but by the carelessness
+of the guard, being left too much at liberty, he contrived to get
+possession of all the treasure, with which he secured his retreat. His
+Excellency leaving a garrison of two hundred Spaniards, and two hundred
+Pampangos in Jolo, returned to Manila, where he was received with
+great honours, as conqueror of Jolo and Mindanao. It is undeniable
+that Senor Corcuera reduced the inhabitants of Jolo and Mindanao, and
+would have retained his conquest, had greater harmony subsisted between
+the Jesuits, and the commanders of the different garrisons. He was
+successful as a soldier, but unfortunate in his choice of the means
+to secure his acquisition. The dissensions between the Jesuits and
+the military rose to such a pitch, that at last all the positions were
+abandoned, and all our exertions, and sacrifices of men and resources,
+rendered of no avail.
+
+By the year 1639, the number of Chinese in these islands had
+increased to thirty thousand, most of them cultivators in Calamba
+and in Binan. Among these began a disaffection, which spreading to
+those of Santa Cruz, Parian, and Manila, they at last converted the
+church of St. Peter Macati into a kind of strong hold, in which they
+established their head-quarters. The Governor sent against them two
+hundred Spaniards, and a large body of Indians, who easily dislodged
+them from this position. Dispersed into separate bands, they plundered
+the houses of the Spaniards, and some Indian towns, committing great
+atrocities. The Spaniards followed them, making dreadful havock among
+them, from November 1639, to March following, when being reduced in
+number to seven thousand, they surrendered. Very few of our people
+were killed, but Manila was reduced to great distress, by the loss of
+so many of its useful class of citizens, as unquestionably the Chinese
+were. The Indians fortunately had remained perfectly tranquil, which
+was rather to be attributed to their fixed hatred of the Chinese,
+than their attachment to the Spaniards.
+
+In the year 1642, the Archbishop Guerreo visited his diocese, and in
+the harbour of Naryan, in Mindoro, a pirate seized his vessel, with
+all his equipage, he himself, with great difficulty, saving himself by
+flight. This disaster had such an effect upon him, that he died on the
+2d of July at Manila, and was buried in the church of St. Augustine.
+
+The kingdom of Portugal, which had been united to the crown of
+Castile in 1640, shook off the Spanish yoke, and electing the Duke of
+Braganza King, the possessions of that nation in India immediately
+followed the example of the mother country, and declared for that
+family. This year the Dutch reduced Malacca, and by this conquest,
+and the separation of the Spanish and Portuguese interest, it was
+apprehended they would renew their attempts on the Philippines, which
+had now, for many years, remained unmolested by them. This conjecture
+proved true; they commenced their operations by stationing, for two
+successive years, a squadron in the route of the ships from Acapulco,
+but the Jesuits, in the island of Samar, frustrated their design. They
+then planned the capture of the island of Formosa, with a view to
+interrupt the commerce to China, and as a ladder for the conquest of
+the Philippines. They proceeded on the enterprize in the year 1642,
+with four ships, a patache, and several smaller vessels, and in a few
+days succeeded in their object, the island having surrendered. Great
+consternation prevailed at Manila on information of this conquest,
+as it was expected that the Dutch would follow up their success by
+an attack on that capital; but the glory of repelling these intruders
+was reserved for the successor of Senor Corcuera.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1644.
+
+    The Administration of Don Diego Faxardo.
+
+
+Don Diego Faxardo, Knight of the order of Santiago, took possession
+of his government on the 11th of August, 1644, and immediately gave
+proof of his unrelenting disposition by his conduct towards Senor
+Corcuera, by confining him in the fort of Santiago, in which he
+remained five years.
+
+The new Governor found these islands infested by Dutch squadrons, and
+to enable himself to meet them with effect, he deemed it necessary
+to unite the whole of the Spanish force, dispersed through the
+different garrisons. He directed the officer in command at Zamboanga,
+to enter into an amicable arrangement with Corralat, King of Mindanao,
+which was effected very satisfactorily, through the mediation of a
+friar. He likewise directed the officer commanding at Jolo to adopt
+similar measures with the King of that island, and evacuating all
+the forts, to bring all the Spaniards to Manila; but this was not to
+be effected so easily, Salicala, hereditary Prince of the kingdom,
+having gone to Batavia, soliciting assistance from the Dutch, to
+drive the Spaniards from the island. They, however, spared him only
+two ships, with which trifling aid, having made many attempts against
+our principal position, which was defended vigorously by Don Estevan
+Ugalde, a valiant Biscayan, the Dutch retired to Batavia, promising
+the Moors to return next year, with a more effective force. The
+Jesuit friar was, in the mean time, commissioned to make peace with
+them; which he effected on very advantageous terms. Jolo being thus
+evacuated, the Dutch arrived at the appointed time with the promised
+assistance; and finding that the Spaniards had retired to Zamboanga,
+they determined on attempting the capture of the fort of Caldera,
+in Mindanao, but they were repulsed with such loss, that they made
+a rapid retreat to Batavia.
+
+The following year, the Dutch again appeared in these seas, with a
+squadron of twelve ships, when eleven of them remaining on the coast of
+Batan, the commodore came forward alone, to reconnoitre Cavite. Senor
+Corcuera, who was in confinement in the fort, as already mentioned,
+immediately saw the error the Dutch commander had committed, in not
+making the attack with his whole force, while the place was in an
+unguarded and defenceless state. Every advantage was taken of the
+error, and Cavite was furnished, without delay, with the necessary
+reinforcements, and supplies of ammunition and provisions. On the
+third day the Dutch squadron made their attack, but the Governor,
+Andras Azaldegui, a very active man, defended the place so effectually,
+that great slaughter ensued, and the Dutch General received a wound,
+of which he died. On this they retired, and disembarked in Pampanga,
+where the Alcalde Mayor of the province having collected six hundred
+Pampangos, and fortified himself as well as possible in the convent
+of Abucay, the Dutch assaulted him, when the Indians fled in such
+disorder, and with such precipitation, that four hundred of them were
+killed in the pursuit. The Dutch not deeming it prudent to remove
+far from their ships, returned on board, and disembarked a second
+time in the town of Samal, where the Spaniards having gone to Manila,
+the Indians alone remained, who repulsed them, and compelled them to
+take refuge in their ships.
+
+They then took their station close to Mareveles, to intercept our
+commerce, and while here they had information that a galleon, built at
+Leyte, was on her way to Manila. They despatched six ships to take her,
+but the commander understanding that the Dutch were in these seas,
+put into a harbour, and fortifying the entrance with batteries,
+remained perfectly secure from all insult, and the Dutch deeming
+the attempt unjustifiable, returned to Batavia, without reaping any
+advantage from their expedition.
+
+Salicala, son of the King of Jolo, a turbulent character,
+notwithstanding the peace he had concluded with the Spaniards, begun
+to infest our seas with a squadron, which committed great depredations
+in every quarter; and Cachile, Lord of Tup Tup, in Borneo, having
+followed his example, it was found necessary to send against them an
+adequate force. The Spaniards encountered the squadron of Cachile
+between Masbate and Burias, and an engagement took place, in which
+he was killed, and his fleet dispersed. Immediately on this Salicala
+retired to Jolo, where his attention became sufficiently occupied, in
+disputes respecting the succession to the throne. The Moors of Borneo,
+imitating the conduct of the Indians of Jolo in their piracies, the
+Governor sent Major Monforte with orders to chastise them severely,
+as a warning to the rest. Monforte landed in Borneo, burning and
+destroying all the towns within his reach, together with great
+quantities of provisions, and a number of vessels, and making about
+two hundred prisoners, thus retaliating on them for their piratical
+attacks on us. Exclusive of these continual depredations of the Moors
+and Dutch, the provinces in Luzon were by no means in a tranquil state.
+
+A commotion, likewise, was begun in Palapag, by murdering the Jesuit
+friar, who was the curate of the place; and, to enhance the criminality
+of the action, and comprehend every one in the rebellion, Sumoroy, who
+was the assassin, was for two days parading the town, avowing publicly
+that he killed the friar; and, setting at liberty two insurgents,
+whom the Jesuits had confined, he ordered the people to plunder the
+church and convent: from this source, the insurrection spread through
+the whole island. The Camarines imitated the conduct of the people of
+Palapag, in every thing but the murder of the friars. The island of
+Zebu, likewise, notwithstanding its garrison, wavered in its loyalty;
+and, indeed, all the islands were ripe for rebellion: the people of
+Caraga, however, were the most violent, having murdered many Spaniards
+and Friars. There is no question that the Bisayas would have been
+lost on this occasion, had not a stop been put to these atrocities
+in due time.
+
+The Governor sent a force to Palapag, and ordered that four hundred
+Indians of Lutao, who had been lately converted from Mahometanism,
+should be incorporated with this force sent from Manila, and
+jointly attack the rebels. The Jesuit friar, Vincente Damian,
+took compassion on the misguided Indians, and attempted to persuade
+them to return to their obedience; but, thinking themselves strong
+enough to overcome the Spaniards, they would not listen to reason,
+and fortified themselves on a hill, which Sumoroy had made his head
+quarters. Captain Roxas commanded the Spaniards, Don Andres Azaldeguy,
+who was the proper commanding officer, having had orders from the
+government, to go and secure the property, in a ship which had been
+lost on the coast of Camarines. Roxas was a man of ability and bravery,
+and came to the resolution of assaulting the hill in the night, when
+the rebels would be less on their guard. The Spaniards arrived at the
+outposts, when they were discovered, and notice given to Sumoroy. The
+precipitation with which the Indians fled is incredible: it resembled
+that of a flock of goats, our people following them, and making great
+slaughter. Sumoroy attempted to escape; but his people killed him,
+with the view of ingratiating themselves with the Spaniards, and
+delivered up his head to Roxas, who placed it on a pole as a warning
+to the rest. The friars being now able to return to their duty,
+in the respective towns, soon reduced the discontented to obedience.
+
+The ringleader of the rebellion in Caraga was an Indian, named Dabao,
+who was not in the least suspected of disaffection. He entered
+one day into the fort, bringing with him eight men with their hands
+bound, apparently with the view of surrendering them; but yet, at the
+same time, so loosely bound, as to escape when they chose. When the
+Spanish officer came out to receive them, Dabao struck him on the head
+with his sword, and the eight men, immediately releasing themselves,
+unexpectedly attacked the people in the fort. They made such carnage,
+that only one friar and five soldiers escaped, by throwing themselves
+from the wall, and retiring to the convent, where they fortified
+themselves. The Indians immediately forsook the town and fled to the
+mountains, when the friar, and the Spaniards who were in the convent,
+built a boat, and retired along the coast to another town, to which
+the insurrection had not spread.
+
+The Governor sent them relief from Manila, and offered a pardon
+to those who should return to their towns, and their allegiance as
+before. The Spaniards, however, broke their word, and hanged many of
+the ringleaders.
+
+On the day of Saint Andrew, which was the anniversary of the victory
+the Spaniards obtained over Limahon, about eight o'clock at night,
+an earthquake happened, which destroyed almost all Manila, with the
+exception of the church and convent of St. Augustine. The public
+edifices, in particular, were nearly all thrown down and destroyed,
+and more than six hundred people buried in the ruins: some were found
+alive between the stones and the wood, who had remained there even
+three days. The calamity reached the towns of the islands; in Cagayan,
+a hill was rased from its foundation, and fell on a town, burying in
+its fall all the inhabitants. In some parts the earth sunk; and, in
+others, torrents of sand burst out, overwhelming man and beast. Many
+other extraordinary changes occurred in the course of sixty days,
+during which a succession of earthquakes prevailed. The people of
+Manila left the city to live in huts in the fields, until it was
+ascertained that they might return in safety to their houses. It
+was said that the image of St. Francis, placed in the house of an
+Indian of Dilao, sweated most copiously during this calamity, and
+shed abundance of tears; in consequence, he was elected patron of
+earthquakes, and is designated St. Francis of Tears.
+
+As a proof of that harshness which characterized Senor Faxardo,
+it will be sufficient to mention his conduct to Christoval Romero,
+whom the Viceroy of Mexico had sent, to bring him intelligence of the
+state of these islands, two years having elapsed without the usual
+ship having appeared at Acapulco. He arrived at the port of Lampon,
+and, understanding that the Dutch were infesting these seas, he landed
+the silver, and despatched it to Manila, in order that he might with
+less risk get round. Soon after he had sent away the silver, the Dutch
+arrived, and entered the port with their launches. Romero being far
+inferior in force to the enemy, burnt his vessel, as he saw no chance
+of saving it, and came to Manila by land. Everybody considered this
+man as entitled to great praise for his conduct on the occasion,
+and expected that he would be well received and rewarded; but the
+rigorous Governor, on the plea that the burning of the launch was
+an act of cowardice, imprisoned him, and condemned him to lose his
+head. All Manila clamoured against this sentence; and the object of
+it appealed to the Royal Audience, who revoked it. This rigour of the
+Governor was imputed to his not having been duly bribed by Romero;
+but nothing of that nature could be absolutely proved against him.
+
+About this time, the hospital or college of St. Juan de Letran was
+founded by Juan Geronimo Romero, who compassionating the situation of
+unfortunate orphans, took them into his house, and carefully brought
+them up. His Majesty being informed of this praise-worthy conduct, by a
+royal order protected the establishment; but granted so little in aid
+of it, that recourse was necessarily had to the contributions of the
+well disposed, in order to render it of more general use. It was, at
+length, removed to a spot behind the city: the boys were allowed a blue
+coat, cap, &c., and were supported, as in others, with the additional
+aid of a college pension, to enable them to pursue their studies at
+the university; the college having no establishment of this nature.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1653.
+
+    The Administration of Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara.
+
+
+The ship San Francisco Xavier arrived in Cavite in July, 1653, bringing
+the new Governor, Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara; the Archbishop
+of Manila, Don Miguel Poblete; the Bishop of Ylocos, Don Rodrigo de
+Cordinas, a Dominican; and the Oidor, Don Juan Bolivar. The Governor
+immediately, as was usual, sat in judgment on his predecessor, who,
+apprehensive that he might be deprived of his liberty, retired into
+the college of Jesuits, securing his personal safety in this sacred
+asylum. The Archbishop fixed the month of March for a jubilee, on
+which occasion an immense concourse of people assembled, and he, with
+great solemnity, invoked the blessing of the Almighty on these islands.
+
+Many calamities occurred during this administration, such as the
+small-pox, famine, and a dreadful earthquake, which ruined many
+edifices, and did much injury; but what affected the Governor much
+more than all these, was the revolt of the Indians and Chinese, and the
+ravages committed by the Moors of Mindanao. The Spaniards were at peace
+with Corrolat, King of Mindanao, and he appeared perfectly satisfied;
+but the chief men, turbulent and warlike, urged him to break it.
+
+The Governor sent two Jesuits and some Spaniards, in the nature of an
+embassy, to strengthen our existing amity with the King: when, without
+any respect for their characters as ambassadors, and, listening to
+the representations of his nephew Balatamay, he murdered them all,
+and excused his atrocity to the Governor of Zamboanga, throwing the
+blame on his nephew, whom, he alleged, he could not punish, on account
+of his great power in the state.
+
+In the letter which he wrote to the Governor of Manila, he laid
+the blame on the Jesuit, who was at the head of the embassy; thus
+indicating his intention, by these contradictory falsehoods, of
+gaining time to draw to his party the King of Jolo, and other chiefs
+of the Moluccas.
+
+Don Francisco Esteyvar, who was Governor of Zamboanga, despatched
+against him an armament of ten carracoas, whose rowers were Indians
+of Lutao, and who, though they had been converted to Christianity,
+felt for Corrolat as a countryman. Nothing could persuade them to row
+against the Moors, excusing themselves under various pretexts; and,
+although they could have been compelled, yet Don Fernando Bobadilla,
+who commanded the expedition, fearing that they would desert him in
+the time he most wanted them, and not desirous of exposing himself
+to such a risk, returned to Zamboanga.
+
+As the Spaniards had delayed the chastisement of the Moors for the
+murder of their ambassadors, they were induced, as might be expected,
+to commit still greater ravages than those they had yet been guilty of,
+and Don Sabiniano de Lara sent against them a considerable squadron,
+under the command of a man, valiant in the cabinet, but who proved the
+reverse in the field. He repeatedly showed a disposition to attack the
+Moors; but, on various pretexts, avoided coming to an engagement, and
+at last retired to Zebu, abandoning the cause, and leaving the Moors
+to return quietly to their own country. The Governor of Zamboanga,
+however, acting a different part, and determined to chastise the Moors,
+collected some vessels, and retaliated on their country, the ravages
+they had committed on ours.
+
+A slight disturbance, about this time, took place in the province of
+Pampanga, the cause of which was as follows: the late Governor having
+ordered a ship to be built in Camboxa, sent all the necessary workmen
+in a vessel, which he patched up, and launched for the purpose. After
+having completed their work, and when they were on their return from
+Camboxa to Manila, they encountered a storm, so violent, that the
+vessel was wrecked, and almost all the people perished. The galleon,
+San Francisco Xavier, was lost in the same storm on the coast of Samar,
+and two other ships which were going to Acapulco were forced back. The
+galleon, La Concepcion, too, was so unfortunate as to be driven back
+twice, having suffered severely in her rigging. To repair these losses,
+it was necessary that a greater quantity of wood should be cut than
+was customary, and that with unusual expedition. The Indians suffered
+always severely in these undertakings, as they were obliged to leave
+their towns for the mountains, where, their wages being very small,
+and their treatment very bad, they too often fell a sacrifice to
+sickness. The overseer of the present wood cutting was a man of
+great severity, and, as the wood was to be cut with all despatch,
+he had recourse, with the poor Indians, to measures which humanity
+could not justify, in order to expedite the work. Resisting this
+oppressive conduct, they mutinied, and the mutiny extended through
+all the towns, although they did not behave with disrespect to the
+church or friars. To quell this sedition before it took a wider
+range, the Governor took up his residence in Macabebe, which is the
+first town in the province, from Manila, taking with him some troops,
+and ordering into his presence some of the ringleaders. The Indians,
+naturally timid, had already repented of this disturbance, when the
+friars interfering, it was completely quelled, and the principal
+ringleader, an Indian named Maniago, was conveyed to Manila, being
+considered as too dangerous an inhabitant of the province.
+
+The bad example of those in Pampanga, induced the Indians of Pangasinan
+to rebel, electing as their King an Indian, called Marlong. They
+murdered the Alcalde Mayor of the province, with all his family, and,
+upon this being known in Manila, the Governor sent troops by sea
+and land to quell the sedition; but the Dominican friars possessed
+such power over the Indians, that they were restored to their duty
+without firing one gun; and their King, Marlong, was delivered up
+and hanged immediately.
+
+When the Indians of Pangasinan began their rebellion, they had sent
+emissaries to the provinces of Cagayan, Ylocos, and Zambales. In
+this last they made little progress, but in Ylocos, an Indian called
+Manzano, headed the rebellion, and, having collected a number of
+malcontents, he attacked the Spaniards, murdered the Friar Bacarra, and
+ill treated the Bishop Cardinas, on which the Alcalde Mayor and some
+friars fled to Manila; but the province of Pangasinan being by this
+time reduced to subjection, the troops were sent against Manzano, and
+soon reduced him likewise; and the ringleaders of both were executed.
+
+The civil wars of China were the cause of the conquest of that country
+by the Tartars. A Chinese named Ly, having urged the provinces
+remote from the court to revolt, and meeting with no opposition,
+arrived at the capital (Pekin), on which occasion, either from
+treason or cowardice, all abandoned the Emperor, who, seeing himself
+thus forsaken, cut off, according to their usual custom, the head of
+his daughter, that she might not fall into the hands of the rebels,
+and afterwards hanged himself on a tree, to avoid a similar disgrace.
+
+All acknowledged the authority of Ly, except the army, which had
+been opposed to the Tartars, and which, fearing the result of this
+rebellion, made peace with them, and they united against the common
+enemy, Ly, whom they soon drove from Pekin. Nothing more was ever
+heard of this rebellion; but, the Tartars having by this means got
+into the interior of China, though they met with some opposition,
+yet, finally, they reduced the whole of the empire, and it continues
+still under the Tartar dynasty.
+
+A poor Chinese, who had fled from Macao to Manila, where he was
+baptized by the name of Nicolas, and where he became a shop-keeper,
+afterwards went to Japan, where he married; but finding that he did
+not acquire riches quick enough, he entered the Chinese army, where he
+rose very high, being appointed General against the rebels. Zunchin,
+who was the last Emperor of the Chinese race, having hanged himself,
+as already noticed, Nicolas sided with the Tartars, by whom he was
+apparently well received. The Tartar Emperor heaped favours upon him,
+and named him as one of his tributary monarchs, under the title of
+Pignan, which signifies, conqueror of the south. By these means he
+lulled him into security; and having at last imprisoned him and all
+his family, completed his treachery by blowing him, and the greater
+part of them, up with gunpowder.
+
+His son, Cogseng, after this disgraceful transaction, turned pirate,
+and sufficiently revenged the death of his father by ravaging the
+Chinese coasts and islands. He was the conqueror of the island of
+Formosa, and the first who triumphed over the arms of Europeans. The
+Dutch, at this time, were complete masters of the island, they
+possessed two thousand Europeans, with sufficient artillery and ships;
+when hearing that the Chinese intended to attack them, they united
+all their forces in Tayguan; but the pirate, who came with about one
+hundred thousand men, landed on the opposite coast of the island,
+and immediately entered on the cultivation of the soil. A short time
+after, he invested the fort of Tayguan, and the Dutch capitulated,
+after a seven months siege, by which they were allowed to leave the
+island, with the ships they had in the port.
+
+Cogseng, elated with this success, determined to become master
+of the Philippines, for which purpose he sent the Friar Victorio
+Riccio, a Dominican, with the title of his Ambassador, to Manila,
+with a letter to the Governor, in which he required him to recognize
+him as Sovereign, and pay him tribute, threatening, if he refused,
+to ravage his coasts with his fleet. On the 18th of May, 1662, the
+friar arrived on this embassy at Manila, and delivered his letter
+with great secrecy, which, however, was not long withheld from the
+public. The Governor without delay began to levy troops, repair the
+fortifications, and recall all the forces to the capital; and in order
+to be as secure as possible, he sent away all the Chinese merchants,
+and others that were established in the islands. Upon this being
+known, it was whispered that the Governor intended to decapitate
+all the Chinese, who, being naturally cowards, believed the knife
+already at their throats, and retired to the mountains, from whence
+some passed, with great risk, in small boats to Formosa. The day on
+which the Governor called the Chinese chiefs before him, in order
+to intimate to them that they must retire, the remaining Chinese
+believing that they were all to be murdered, took up arms; but the
+Dominicans had sufficient influence to prevail on them to remain
+quiet. The Governor now sent back Friar Riccio to Cogseng with an
+answer to his letter, but, on Riccio's arrival, he found the pirate
+dead of a fever, Manila being by this means released from the danger
+with which she was threatened. The Chinese who had fled to Formosa,
+circulated a thousand calumnies, which would have cost Friar Riccio
+his life, if he had not been saved by the son of Cogseng, who had
+succeeded his father in power; but not possessing the warlike spirit
+of his father, he sent an Ambassador to Manila, to make a treaty
+of amity and commerce with the Spaniards. Although the expedition
+of Cogseng had not reached Manila, the place of its destination,
+the effects of it had fallen very heavy on the islands, as all the
+churches and convents near Manila were destroyed, to prevent the
+enemy from converting them into military stations.
+
+The Governor of Ternate had abandoned that station, by no means
+easy to be recovered, as the garrison was, in its retreat to Manila,
+accompanied by the Indians, called Mahhicas, who were the best friends
+to the Spanish cause, and who were then settled at the mouth of the
+river Marigondon, where their descendants remain to this hour. The
+garrisons too of Calamianes and Zamboanga evacuated these stations;
+and as they had always been a check on the Moors of Jolo and Mindanao,
+opportunities were by this means offered of committing with impunity
+such ravages in the Bisayas, that the friars were compelled to abandon
+the province of Calamianes.
+
+Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara had governed these islands with great
+prudence, but notwithstanding this, several articles of impeachment
+were preferred against him, and he was fined seventy thousand
+dollars. On appealing, however, to the council of the Indies, the
+sentence was reversed, and the fine remitted; but disgusted with
+the world, he retired to Malaga, his native country, and took the
+monastic habit.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX.
+
+ANNO DOM. 1663.
+
+    The Administration of Don Diego Salcedo.
+
+
+Don Diego de Salcedo not being able, by the prevalence of the
+south-west-monsoon, to reach Manila by the ordinary route of the
+straits of Bernardino, he made Cagayan, where he landed, and travelled
+across the island to the city, and took possession of his government
+in September, 1663. Immediately on his arrival, he held out every
+encouragement to commerce, and preparation was made for sending the
+usual ship to Acapulco as early in the season as possible, in order
+to avoid those misfortunes which had too frequently taken place.
+
+This conduct of the Governor at first gave great satisfaction to
+the merchants of Manila; but they began very soon to discover his
+diligence was directed only to his own individual benefit, or that of
+his friends, as due care had been taken by them to buy up all the best
+goods, leaving in the market only those of inferior quality; and that
+no opportunity might be afforded to the merchants to procure a fresh
+supply of the different articles from the coast, he despatched the
+ship before the coasters could possibly arrive. By this means almost
+all the commerce of Acapulco, for that season, centered in him and
+his friends. About this time the news arrived of the death of Philip
+the Fourth, and the Archbishop was attacked with protracted illness,
+which ended in extreme debility, of which he died, 1667. The attention
+of Salcedo had been completely occupied by the violent disputes, which,
+during the whole period of his government, subsisted between him and
+the ecclesiastical authorities, and which terminated in the Commissary
+of the Inquisition of Mexico ordering him to be seized, and conveyed on
+board the patache destined for Acapulco, in which ship he died, 1669.
+
+
+                             END OF VOL. I.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTES TO VOLUME I.
+
+
+Note I.--Page 6.
+
+Were it not that we have this strong corroborative evidence of the
+veracity of other travellers on this subject, we should be inclined
+to attach a degree of impossibility to the existence of an European
+power of the first distinction, in an insular situation, similar to
+that of the Philippines, established there for nearly three centuries;
+yet through the whole of that period incessantly exposed to the inroads
+and depredations of the surrounding savage nations. But in the perusal
+of the following pages it will appear sufficiently manifest that the
+system of colonization pursued by the Spanish monarchy. From the first
+discovery of the New World, and without little, if any, amelioration,
+practised at this time, is least of all calculated for either the
+extension of permanent national dominion, the enlargement of the
+human mind, or the general dissemination of commercial industry. The
+discovery of the Cape of Good Hope and America produced a revolution
+among the European nations, which, aided by the phenomenon of the
+magnetic needle, stimulated the human mind to exertions far more
+arduous than had been effected by the Crusades; but the same spirit
+that animated Peter the Hermit seems to have presided over the counsels
+of the Spanish monarchy and directed its researches. To whatever
+cause it may be imputed, whether political, moral, or physical, this
+nation, so justly celebrated about this period, seems to have had
+little progressive tendency to improvement, and till within these few
+years the Spanish colonists of the eighteenth, in point of information
+and commercial enterprize, differed in no respect from those of the
+sixteenth century. The general dissemination of science, the gradual
+dispersion of prejudice, the consequent expansion of the human mind,
+and the example of surrounding nations, will doubtless have due
+effect on those noble qualities which characterized the Spaniard of
+the sixteenth century; and which, though enchained for succeeding
+ages by the peculiarity of their internal politics, still exist in
+the Spaniard of the nineteenth. No doubt, indeed, can be entertained
+that the changes likely to be produced during the present eventful
+period, will convert the reign of Ferdinand the VIIth into the aera of
+Spanish regeneration, in all that can be considered steady in council,
+great in arms, liberal in sentiment, and energetic in social as well
+as commercial intercourse. And we fully trust that the blind and
+persecuting influence which dictated the expulsion of the Chinese
+from the Philippines, and produced consequences nearly bordering on
+the annihilation of all industry and all commerce in the Islands,
+no longer disgraces their counsels or finds an advocate in the breast
+of one true Spaniard.
+
+
+Note II.--Page 8.
+
+We are well aware that at a distance from the seat of even an energetic
+government, abuses will exist which may sometimes be beyond its
+reach; but the instance before us, gives us at once an insight into
+that system of oppression and abuse of power which prevails in the
+Spanish settlements, and originated in the invariable practice of the
+Spanish court, of furnishing the opportunity to their dependants in
+the mother country to enrich themselves during a temporary residence
+in the colonies.
+
+
+Note III.--Page 12.
+
+The most authentic communications on this subject to the translator,
+are, that during the months of March, April, and May, the heat is
+sometimes oppressive; June, July, August, and September, forms the
+rainy season; the month of October of a doubtful character; November,
+December, January, and February, a heavenly spring: and that the
+climate in the whole is uncommonly healthy, the natives living to a
+great age.
+
+
+Note IV.--Page 13.
+
+If it were not sufficiently ascertained that the author of this work
+was not a foreigner, but a monastic Spaniard, it might be concluded
+from this expression, that he meant to cast a strong reflection on
+the Spanish government; but in the progress of the work the reader
+will discover that he is fully justified.
+
+
+Note V.--Page 14.
+
+"The fishermen place their net zig-zag-ways in from eight to eighteen
+fathom water; at each angle they have several chambers, and over every
+angle they have a boat moored, with two or three fishermen in it, who
+are always watching the fish when they enter the chambers, and with
+a line, supported on the surface by a buoy, they draw a net across
+the chamber door." Vide Jackson's Mediterranean Commerce, p. 103-4.
+
+
+Note VI.--Page 18.
+
+The diversity of opinion as to the substance of which these nests are
+composed, is such, that to this hour we are left on the wide field
+of conjecture, and without any clue which may be absolutely relied on
+for unravelling the mystery. The intelligent Sonnerat, as a judicious
+naturalist, is entitled to every attention on the subject, and he,
+by admitting into his work the following quotation from "Transactions
+philosophiques de la societe Batave, etablie dans l'isle de Java pour
+l'avancement des arts et des sciences, vol. iii." gives us reason to
+suppose that he adopts the opinion of that writer. He prefaces his
+introduction of the subject by the following scientific description
+of the bird:
+
+"La salangane (hirundo esculenta, Lath. sp. 26. Lin. Rumph. herb.
+vi. pag. 183. tab. 75. fig. 4. Forster.)"
+
+And then proceeds with the extract thus:
+
+"The salanganes are of a blackish grey colour, somewhat inclining
+to green; but on the back, down to the tail, as well as under the
+breast, the colour is mouse grey. The whole length of the bird, from
+the back to the tail, is about four inches and a half; and its height,
+taken from the beak to the extremity of the foot, three and a quarter
+inches: its girt is ten and a quarter inches: the longest feathers of
+the wing are about four inches. The head is flat; but the thickness
+of the downy feathers which cover it make it appear round, and rather
+large in proportion to the rest of the body. The beak is large, ending
+in a sharp point, but hooked like that of a nocturnal bird of prey;
+its size is augmented by the addition of a naked membrane, similar to
+parchment, which folds inwards when the beak is shut, but expands with
+the opening of it, and enables the bird, while on the wing, to seize
+with greater facility the insects which constitute its food. The eyes
+are black, and very large; and the tongue not forked, but of the form
+of an arrow. The ears flat and round, with a small oblong opening,
+and entirely covered by the downy feathers of the head. The neck very
+short, as are the legs, and bones of the wings. The thighs entirely
+covered with feathers; and the lower and more delicate parts of the
+legs, as well as the feet, provided with a black skin resembling
+parchment: each foot has four toes, three pointing forwards and one
+backwards; they are separated from each other even to the root, and
+the middle one, including the claw, is at least as long as the lower
+part of the leg; each toe is furnished with a black claw, pointed,
+hooked, and very long, by means of which it attaches itself, with great
+facility, to the juttings of the rocks. The tail is at least as long
+as the body, even including the neck and the head; when it is spread
+out it has the shape of a wedge, and has ten large feathers; the four
+first on each side are the longest, and when the tail is closed they
+extend beyond the others about an inch; the others diminish towards
+the middle of the tail, and nearly equal the length of the body. This
+bird is extremely light and delicate; ten of these swallows will only
+weigh about two ounces and a half. The inhabitants of Java call them
+lawit, and the mountaineers give them the names of berongdagae or waled.
+
+"There are two places in the neighbourhood of Batavia where they
+are found in great abundance; the one, Calappa-Nongal, is about ten
+miles to the south of the town; the other, Sampia, is a little more
+distant towards the south-west, but both lie in that elevated range
+which takes its direction by the sea coast, and which appears to be
+different from the great chain which pushes itself into the country,
+and traverses the whole island. Besides these principal places,
+there are many others, both in the same district, and at a very great
+distance from the coast, where these birds are found, though in fewer
+numbers; and there are even some which are carefully concealed by
+those of the inhabitants who are acquainted with them.
+
+"There are two bird mountains, called Goa (caverns) by the inhabitants
+of Java, which are insulated rocks, hollow in the middle, and pierced
+by a great number of openings, for the most part of sufficient size
+easily to admit a man; others are more difficult of access, and some
+so small that nature seems to have intended them for the security of
+those little animals. These rocks are composed of a grey calcareous
+stone and white marble, and are covered with a multitude of lofty trees
+of different kinds. To the interior of these caverns the birds fix
+their nests in horizontal ranges, and so close to each other, that,
+generally speaking, they join; they build them at different heights,
+from fifty to three hundred feet, higher or lower as they can find
+a berth; there is not a single hole, or convenient spot sufficiently
+dry and proper, which is not occupied; but if the surface is in the
+smallest degree wet, or even damp, the birds immediately abandon it.
+
+"At break of day the whole of the birds take wing with a great noise,
+and in the dry season immediately shoot up so high in the atmosphere,
+in search of their food, as to be soon lost to the sight: they return
+about four in the afternoon, and again take shelter in their holes,
+to which they confine themselves during the rest of the day, those
+excepted which are hatching. On the other hand, during the rainy
+season, it has been often remarked that they never ramble very far
+from their holes, particularly in the government of Java, where the
+rocks even border close on the sea.
+
+"They feed on all the varieties of insects which are found hovering
+over stagnated waters, and they easily secure them by means of the
+extended opening of which their beak is capable. Their most formidable
+enemy is a bird of prey, which catches them in great numbers as they
+escape from their holes, and which the inhabitants are very careful
+to keep at a distance as much as possible by shooting them.
+
+"They prepare their nests with the more solid parts of their food,
+and by no means with the froth of the sea or marine plants, as has
+been asserted [1]. This opinion is the more founded in probability,
+as it is ascertained by experience that those birds which build on
+the rocks, already mentioned, have never been seen on the coast,
+and that they could not repair thither and return in any reasonable
+time on account of the lofty chains of mountains they would have to
+traverse, and the tempestuous winds which prevail there. The great
+difference, then, in the colour and value of these nests, is a proof
+that their quality depends solely on the nature and abundance of the
+insects which form their food; perhaps, likewise, on the more or less
+perfect solitude of the places they resort to for it.
+
+"The nests collected in the territory of Calappa-Nongal and of Goadja
+are quite grey, and are of one-third less value than those of the
+territory of Sampia. These last again are in far less estimation
+than the excellent sort sent every year from Ternate and Passir,
+or those found in the islands immediately adjoining, and on that of
+Borneo in particular.
+
+"These birds require two months to prepare their nests; they
+immediately after lay their eggs, and sit fifteen or sixteen days. As
+soon as the young take flight, the gathering of the nests commences,
+and is repeated every four months: it is the harvest of the proprietors
+of those rocks. This is performed by men accustomed from their infancy
+to clamber among these precipices: with reeds and bamboos they provide
+themselves with ladders, with which they mount up to the holes; but
+when the depth of the caves is too great, they have recourse to ropes.
+
+"When at the bottom of these caverns, they place against the inside
+notched bamboos, which answer the purpose of ladders, to enable them to
+reach the nests, and if these are beyond their immediate reach, they
+detach them with bamboo poles; there are likewise holes, but in very
+limited numbers, which may be got at by means of ladders of bamboo.
+
+"This employment, which is attended with very great risk, costs the
+lives of many human beings, and particularly of those who attempt
+to steal the nests. For their preservation, guards are placed here
+and there.
+
+"The mountaineers usually employed in collecting the nests never
+undertake it till they have sacrificed a buffalo, the usual prelude,
+with the Javanese, of all their enterprizes; they mutter a few
+prayers, anoint their bodies with aromatic oils, and fumigate the
+caverns with incense, a precaution, according to them, absolutely
+necessary. The principal of these caverns lie in the island of Java,
+where a female deity, under the appellation of Raton laut Ridaud,
+or Princess of the South Sea, is held in high veneration. A small
+hut, containing a covered bed, is prepared for her, together with
+several elegant dresses, and which no person but a Princess dare
+approach. Every Friday, during the period of collecting the nests,
+incense is burnt in it, and the bodies and clothes of all those who
+propose to mount the rocks ought to be exposed to this fumigation. The
+rest of the Javanese are not so superstitious, and attach much less
+importance to ceremonies. These caverns are lighted, on such occasions,
+by torches made with the rosin of a large tree, called the cavet,
+and of the inner bark of the areka.
+
+"The collection of the nests does not last more than a month, and, as
+has been said, may be repeated three times annually. Some think that
+it might even be extended to a fourth, but that is not very probable,
+as all the people employed in this work affirm that a nest, as long as
+it remains entire, is constantly augmented or thickened by the bird,
+which never totally abandons it till it becomes dry and woolly in
+the inside.
+
+"After the nests are gathered, nothing remains to be done but to dry
+and clean them, and they are then packed in baskets and sold to the
+Chinese. The price varies, as depending on their whiteness and degree
+of perfection; some are grey, and others reddish, while those of the
+best sort are extremely rare. They are sold on the spot for from eight
+hundred to one thousand four hundred rixdollars for one hundred and
+twenty-five pounds weight. This price, and the insatiable avarice
+of the Chinese, often produce cheating, and an adulteration of the
+article. They have no hesitation in corrupting the guards with money,
+opium, or clothes; and deceits are practised, against which the most
+extreme vigilance is often unavailing.
+
+"The two places we have already mentioned, Calappa-Nongal and
+Sampia, belonged formerly to the Dutch East India Company, but as
+the advantages resulting from the possession of them were partly
+unknown, or diminished in value by the dexterity of the Javanese, the
+company formed the resolution of letting them by public auction, and
+nearly one hundred thousand rixdollars is drawn from them, a sum far
+exceeding their utmost expectations. In the same range of mountains
+there are besides these other places of the same description, but
+of less importance. There are likewise two or three in the interior,
+and some others, which are concealed with great care.
+
+"There are in the government of Samarang, in the island of Java,
+three mountains celebrated for their birds, called Goadaher, Gede,
+and Nangasari. The sea washes their base, and flows so far into the
+interior of the latter, that it may be said they can catch fish in
+the body of the mountain. The nests in these districts are of an
+excellent quality, but very difficult to collect, on account of the
+precipitous nature of the rocks, and the violent beating of the surge
+against them, which renders it necessary for those employed to suspend
+themselves from the top by ladders of bamboo. In the island of Java,
+about twenty-five quintals of these nests are collected annually.
+
+"There are likewise swallow caverns in the island of Bantam, and in
+Sumatra; but the inhabitants of the former are so indolent, and the
+government so detestable, that they are not even at the trouble to
+sow rice, nor do they cultivate any one article which contributes to
+human existence. The Chinese have never attempted to penetrate into
+the interior of this kingdom, and they have no commerce whatever with
+the mountaineers; indeed they have very little intercourse even with
+the coast.
+
+"The Javanese and Europeans established in India eat even the birds
+themselves when young, but it is difficult to procure them; they are
+considered as a very luscious food. The nests, on the contrary, when
+stewed as a soup, and afterwards exposed to the dew, and sweetened
+with sugar, are said to be highly cooling, and the Javanese administer
+them successfully in violent fevers. The author of this memoir has
+had occasion to observe that, prepared in the manner which will be
+subsequently mentioned, they have been useful in disorders of the
+throat, and in hoarseness. Most probably this remedy has been borrowed
+from the Chinese, who (according to information furnished to the author
+by a man who was in the habit of dealing largely in these nests) use
+them most generally in the winter, because disorders of the throat
+are very common at that season in the southern regions of the empire,
+on account of the habits the Chinese are in of indulging themselves
+over the fire.
+
+"But though the author has repeatedly eat these nests, prepared in
+various ways, he has not been able to bring himself to put much faith
+in the very nutritive and strengthening property attributed to them. He
+has had them analyzed by good chemists, but the result has been only a
+gummy solution, of rather a disagreeable taste, which might, however,
+be of service in certain disorders of the chest.
+
+"These nests are, in fact, only articles of luxury or ornament on
+the tables of the rich. The Chinese are passionately fond of them:
+after well soaking and cleaning them, they are put with a fat capon
+or a duck into an earthen pot, closely covered; they are simmered
+for twenty-four hours over a small fire, which is called timmen;
+thus prepared, this eatable acquires a relish infinitely more rich,
+and a more nourishing quality.
+
+"The trade in these nests, which some years ago was of little
+importance, has been greatly on the increase for some time. The price
+is constantly rising in China, and Batavia is the principal market
+for them. The company having abandoned it, the inhabitants derive
+sufficient advantage from it to diminish the exportation of specie,
+which is highly prejudicial. It is now very well ascertained that
+the species of swallow which builds these nests is not to be found
+in China.
+
+"Linnaeus, in his Systeme Naturel, characterizes this swallow, which he
+calls the hirundo esculenta, by white spots only on the feathers of the
+tail. But those birds of Java, which construct the nests in question,
+have no spots either on their tail or elsewhere. The feathers of the
+tail are entirely of one colour, that is, grey, approaching to black
+on the upper, and a lighter grey on the under surface.
+
+"Rumph says, in speaking of these apodes marinae, that the feathers of
+their tail are spotted, and that the breast has black and white spots.
+
+"Valentyn in his description of the small swallow which builds the
+eatable nests, says nothing of spots, and only states that the body
+is veined white and black.
+
+"If these differences are allowed to be essential, it will follow
+that there must be two kinds of these swallows, the one with a
+spotted breast, and having white spots on the tail, the other without
+either. It is possible, even, that there may be a third variety, that
+called momos, or bocrongitams. These likewise form their nests of
+part of their food; but mixed with so much impure matter that no use
+can be made of them. Care is taken, therefore, to drive them away,
+that they may not injure the nests of the better species. They are
+readily known from these latter by their superior size, and their
+legs being provided with small feathers down to the feet.
+
+"In the kingdom of Tonquin, and in China, there is a great demand for
+these nests of the salanganes. They form their most exquisite food,
+and they attribute to them the property of strengthening the stomach,
+and of being a powerful aphrodisiac. They are preserved for the tables
+of the King, and those of the principal nobles who are able to procure
+them. They are diluted, made into gravy or soup, and mixed with all
+sorts of choice aliment, and every kind of taste is imputed to them.
+
+"In the state in which the salanganes are sold, they bear a close
+resemblance to the half of a preserved citron, both in size and
+shape. They are put into small boats, which the people of the country
+are sufficiently dextrous in piloting through the rocks where the
+nests are found. The King of Cochin-China retains in his own hands,
+exclusively, the portion of this trade which belongs to him, as the
+most precious production of his dominions, and of which the sale is
+most to be relied on."
+
+
+Note VII.--Page 18.
+
+This shell, which even here, as every where else, bears the name of
+cowrie, forms likewise the currency of Africa, as it formerly did
+that of India; and this may probably furnish an argument in favour
+of the Malay origin.
+
+
+Note VIII.--Page 21. Note IX.--Same page.
+
+Two causes are here assigned for the wretched state of these
+dependencies, apparently different, but in fact flowing from the same
+source. We are told that the surrounding nations are more industrious,
+and can work at a cheaper rate, and that the insects and rats destroy
+the produce of the soil. Were the encouragement of agriculture and
+manufactures an object of importance in the colonial system of the
+Philippines, the extension and protection of the former would soon
+circumscribe the dominion of the rats, its most destructive enemy;
+and if the productions of the soil were, as they ought to be, in as
+great plenty, and at as low a rate as on the neighbouring islands,
+manufactures, particularly with the aid of machinery, would be afforded
+at a profit adequate to the exertions of industry. But the truth
+is, that the Spanish government is rather desirous of considering
+the Philippines as the grand depot of the commerce of South America
+with India and China, and it may be presumed that, on this account,
+not only is its industry repressed, but the very heavy expense of the
+settlement submitted to and annually sent from New Spain. The revenue
+stated to be collected in the islands amounts to about one million of
+dollars, and this, together with about the same sum remitted by the
+Acapulco ships, enable the government to defray the annual charges
+of the colonial establishment.
+
+
+Note X.--Page 24.
+
+The Spanish author, on the subject of the origin of these Negroes,
+forms a conclusion directly at variance with what he afterwards says
+with regard to the origin of the Indians. He admits that the similarity
+of the former to those of Angola, with the exception of only a shade
+in colour, carries sufficient conviction as to their parent stock,
+and of course allows the islands to have been originally colonized
+from Africa, and by a people infinitely less advanced in cultivation
+than the Indians, setting aside at once his own very well founded
+subsequent conclusion, that the colonization of all the islands of the
+South Sea, with the Marianas, Philippines, &c. must have originated in
+South America, and proceeded gradually before the wind. The constant
+course of easterly winds in the Pacific, joined to the instances he
+adduces of similitude of language, unquestionably aid his hypothesis,
+which, though probably more curious than practically useful, is yet
+deserving of attention. There is not, indeed, a more embarrassing
+subject than that frequently proves to be, which treats of the origin
+and ancient connexion of distant nations, and after all, as in this
+case, we are too often left on the field of conjecture.
+
+
+Note XI.--Page 25.
+
+The reason here given for the wretched condition of these people
+seems more candidly than might be expected from a Spaniard, to take
+the load of responsibility from them and cast it on the government;
+and the perusal of the succeeding pages will but too well confirm
+the propriety of the censure.
+
+
+Note XII.--Page 36.
+
+Sonnerat asserts, that among the mild inhabitants of the fertile
+plains on the west border of the Lake Bay, adultery is the only crime
+punished with death; but it seems more reasonable to conclude, that
+of the two the Spaniard is most to be relied on.
+
+
+Note XIII.--Page 37.
+
+The striking resemblance of this to the price exacted by Laban from
+Jacob for his two daughters, will not be passed over by the reader
+unnoticed; and we are obliged to conclude either that such similarity
+of customs must originate in a common source, or that a certain state
+of social life, in certain climates, will produce manners mutually
+approximating.
+
+
+Note XIV.--Page 42.
+
+Without, in any respect, detracting from the merit of the propagators
+of the Christian faith in these islands, or claiming any superiority
+for our own tenets or practice, I fear we need not travel beyond the
+pillars of Hercules to the southward, and the Ultima Thule to the
+northward, to discover such perversion of human intellect, although,
+I trust, it is no proof that we are very bad Christians.
+
+The influence of traditional superstitions is too generally known
+and admitted to require to be descanted on. Its operation commences
+with the first dawn of reason, and very rarely is it found that even
+all the strength of the human mind, aided by religion and philosophy,
+can thoroughly eradicate the impressions it makes. The water kelpie
+of the north of Scotland differs from the Patianac and Tigbalang, only
+as being a good natured and very useful being; and we are all familiar
+with the mythologic machinery of our ancestors, for we will take leave
+to entertain a belief that Fingal and Ossian did once exist, and that
+the latter pourtrayed the manners, customs and opinions of his time.
+
+
+Note XV.--Page 46.
+
+It is curious to observe the progress of science and discovery, and
+still more deserving our notice is the transitory nature of power. The
+magisterial authority assumed by the Pontiff on this occasion might
+possibly have saved the effusion of human blood, and its interposition
+at that crisis, as a mediator between the most powerful nations then
+in existence, if it was beneficial in no other respect, seems to have
+stimulated the Spaniards to attempt the discovery of a passage into
+the Pacific by the southern coast of America.
+
+
+Note XVI.--Page 65.
+
+This must either be a mistake, or we must conclude that the intercourse
+of the Portuguese with these islands had furnished them with the
+European improvements.
+
+
+Notes XVII. and XVIII.--Pages 106-7.
+
+The circumstances stated on both these occasions, incontestably prove
+that the energy and exertions of the Portuguese in establishing their
+own exclusive dominion in the eastern Archipelago, even in defiance of
+the fiat of his Holiness, had led them to impart to the natives that
+knowledge which they themselves had been but lately possessed of;
+for the use of cannon, on board ships, did not come into practice
+till about the year 1539.
+
+
+Note XIX.--Page 129.
+
+Thus it is that the Spaniards appear even to have deceived themselves
+in subduing those islands. In the course of this work, the reader
+will be enabled to appreciate the nature of what the Spaniards called
+a conquest. The progress of a few men into the interior of a country
+under the protection of fire-arms, and the baptism of some individuals,
+to whose language the Spaniards were perfect strangers, and who of
+course could form no idea of the obligations imposed by the ceremony,
+seem to constitute their notion of conquest. Thus it is too that their
+authority extends over so small a portion of these delicious islands.
+
+
+Note XX.--Page 197.
+
+The inhuman custom of infanticide is not only practised with impunity
+in China, but seems even countenanced as the readiest means of
+limiting a population which would otherwise be superabundant, and in
+time exceed the productive powers of the country. By the narrative of
+Lord Macartney we learn, that in the tract of country through which
+the embassy passed, the population appeared excessive; at the same
+time that cultivation and industry seemed to be extended to their
+utmost limits. All the accounts we possess of that extraordinary empire
+concur in this representation. What effect the very pious application
+of the funds of the eleemosynary establishments at Manila may have
+in checking this savage custom is not noticed by the author; and we
+have reason to fear the practice is so general, that any attempt to
+check it by this means might rather tend to stimulate the avarice
+of the parents, and produce an opposite effect. The Chinese are as
+yet but in a half civilized state, and while they continue so we can
+entertain but slender hopes of any alteration more consistent with
+the feelings of humanity.
+
+
+Note XXI.--Page 211.
+
+The whole of this paragraph comprises a more virulent Philippic against
+the Spanish government than we could have expected from a Spaniard;
+but which the reader is by this time convinced is no less just than
+spirited. That the mild measures the author recommends would have
+the desired effect may be fairly doubted. He appears to write as a
+monk rather than as a statesman; but it cannot admit of a question,
+that if it were possible to combine with such measures a military
+establishment, under the control of wise laws, whose mild influence
+might be generally felt, and equally protect the native as the
+Spaniard, the unstable authority of that nation upon these islands
+would soon assume a different character, and reduce the quantum of
+human misery which their present system is calculated to perpetuate.
+
+
+
+
+
+                      T. DAVISON, Lombard-street,
+                          Whitefriars, London.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NOTE
+
+
+[1] This is an opinion very generally received, and naturalists,
+in copying one from another, have stamped a credit upon it. Houttyn
+himself, in his Natural History, vol. i. part v. page 607, gives a
+description of this bird, and of its manners, very different from
+the above.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of An Historical View of the Philippine
+Islands, Vol I (of 2), by Martinez de Zuniga
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORICAL VIEW--PHILIPPINE ISLANDS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 39010.txt or 39010.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/0/1/39010/
+
+Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net/ for Project
+Gutenberg (This file was produced from images generously
+made available by the Digital & Multimedia Center, Michigan
+State University Libraries.)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/39010.zip b/39010.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1105503
--- /dev/null
+++ b/39010.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c54c43b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #39010 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/39010)